OF  THE 

U N I VERS  ITY 
Of  ILLINOIS 

970./ 

E-E5L 

* 


The  person  charging  this  material  is  re- 
sponsible for  its  return  to  the  library  from 
which  it  was  withdrawn  on  or  before  the 
Latest  Date  stamped  below. 

Theft,  mutilation,  and  underlining  of  books  are  reasons 
for  disciplinary  action  and  may  result  in  dismissal  from 
the  University. 

To  renew  call  Telephone  Center,  333-8400 

UNIVERSITY  OF  ILLINOIS  LIBRARY  AT  URBANA-CHAMPAIGN 


MAY  7 W4 


h 


$m  i 


JAN  0 5 1)89 


Wfi  1 21993 


L161— 0-1096 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2017  with  funding  from 

University  of  Illinois  Urbana-Champaign  Alternates 


https://archive.org/details/indianwarsofunit00elli_0 


THE  INDIAN  WARS 

OF 


THE  UNITED  STATES. 


THE  DEATH  OP  SITTING 


THE  INDIAN  WARS 

OF  THE 

UNITED  STATES 


FROM  THE  FIRST  SETTLEMENT  AT  JAMESTOWN , IN  1607 
TO  THE  CLOSE  OF  THE  GREA  T UPRISING  OF  1890-91 


WITH  NUMEROUS  ILLUSTRATIVE  INCIDENTS 


BY 

EDWARD  S.  ELLIS.  A,  M. 

AUTHOR  OF  “THE  YOUTHS*  HISTORY  OF  THE  UNITED  STATES,”  “GREAT  RIVER 
SERIES,”  “LOST  IN  SAMOA,”  “TAD,  OR  GETTING  EVEN  WITH  HIM,” 
“FROM  THE  THROTTLE  TO  THE  PRESIDENT’S  CHAIR,”  ETC. 


ILLUSTRA  TED 


CHICAGO 

J.  D.  KENYON  & CO. 


Publishers 


(*OFVRi“HT,  1892,  gy 

CASbELL  PUBLISHING  COMPANY. 

Copyright  1902,  by 

J,  D.  KENYON. 


All  rights  reserved. 


M.  A.  DONOHUE  A CO.,  PRINTERS,  BINDERS  AND  PUBLISHERS,  CHICAGO. 


QJ?/  ° VI  “7 


INTRODUCTION. 


The  history  of  the  Indian  wars  of  the  United  States  is  a history  of  one 
continuous  series  of  blunders,  frauds,  oppression,  injustice,  and  crime  that 
is  a reproach  to  our  nation.  Here  and  there,  in  the  record,  a bright  page 
shines  out  all  the  more  vividly  because  of  its  contrast  with  the  surrounding 
darkness.  None  can  estimate  the  amount  of  property  destroyed,  the  num- 
ber of  lives  sacrificed,  and  the  injury  done  to  civilization  and  progress  by 
our  dealings  with  the  Indians. 

We  have  two  classes  of  extremists  : those  who  maintain  that  there  is 
only  one  good  Indian  and  he  is  dead,  and  those  who  believe  that  the  red 
man  has  been  the  invariable  victim,  instead  of  the  wrongdoer,  in  all  the 
troubles  of  the  white  men  with  his  people.  That  the  latter  has  been  the 
truth  in  a majority  of  instances  is  undeniable,  but  it  is  equally  true  that 
more  than  once  the  treachery,  the  cruelty,  and  the  atrocity  of  the  Indian 
have  had  no  shadow  of  palliation  or  excuse.  The  Indian  problem  still 
confronts  us,  but  a knowledge  of  our  history,  and  an  acquaintance  with  the 
views  of  those  who  have  studied  for  years  the  red  man’s  traits,  habits,  char- 
acteristics, and  nature,  and  who  comprehend  his  anomalous  position  among 
us,  must  enable  all  to  read  the  true  answer  to  the  question  which  has 
caused  the  waste  of  so  much  treasure  and  life. 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER  I. 

The  North  American  Indians,  . 

CHAPTER  II. 

The  First  English  Settlement  and  the  First  Indian  Wars, 


CHAPTER  III. 


The  First  Indian  War  in  New  England — Extermination  of  the 
Pequots, 


CHAPTER  IV. 


King  Philip’s  War— Attacks  on  Swansea,  Brookfield,  and  Other 
Places, 


CHAPTER  V. 

King  Philip’s  War  (concluded) — The  Attack  on  Hadley — Burning 
of  Deerfield — The  Fight  at  Bloody  Brook — Defeat  of  the 
Narragansetts — The  Victory  and  Defeat  at  Turner’s  Falls — 
Death  of  King  Philip — The  War  in  New  Hampshire — Death  of 
Major  Waldron — Exploit  of  Mrs.  Dunston — Memorial  Hall  in 
Deerfield,  Mass., 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Bacon’s  Rebellion  in  Virginia  Caused  by  Trouble  with  the  Indians, 


CHAPTER  VII. 

The  Struggle  Between  England  and  France  for  Mastery  in  the 
New  World — The  Part  Taken  by  the  Indians,  . 

CHAPTER  Hill. 

Pontiac’s  Conspiracy— Major  Rogers’s  Expedition  Westward — 
Meeting  with  Pontiac — The  Plot — Its  Betrayal  to  Major 
Gladwyn — The  Baffled  Chief  Throws  the  Mask  Aside — 
Pontiac’s  Treachery, 


PAGE 

I 


4 


10 


*7 


26 


38 


43 


5° 


VI 


CONTENTS. 


PAGS 

* CHAPTER  IX. 

Pontiac’s  Conspiracy  (continued) — A Remarkable  Man — Loss  of 

the  Convoy — Fall  of  the  Forest  Garrisons,  . ...  61 

CHAPTER  X. 

Pontiac’s  Conspiracy  (continued) — Attempts  to  Destroy  the 
Schooner — Arrival  of  Dalzell — The  Battle  at  Bloody  Run — 

A Remarkable  Escape, 71 

CHAPTER  XI. 

Pontiac’s  Conspiracy  (continued) — The  Fall  of  Michillimackinac — 

A Trader’s  Adventures — Green  Bay  and  Sault  Ste.  Marie — 
Lieutenant  Gorell’s  Tact  and  Success, 83 

CHAPTER  XII. 

Pontiac’s  Conspiracy  (continued) — The  Old  Frontiers — Indian 
Outrages — Fort  Pitt — Singular  Escape  of  the  Garrison  of 
Fort  Le  Bceuf — Thrilling  Incidents — Bouquet’s  Expedition — 

The  Battle  of  Bushy  Run, 94 

CHAPTER  XIII. 

Pontiac’s  Conspiracy  (continued) — The  Siege  of  Detroit — Discour- 
agement of  the  Indians — Disaster  to  Major  Wilkins’s  Expedi- 
tion— Colonel  Bradstreet  Outwitted — Departure  of  Pontiac 
— Colonel  Bouquet’s  Brilliant  Success, 106 

CHAPTER  XIV. 

Pontiac’s  Conspiracy  (concluded) — The  Country  of  the  Illinois — 
Pontiac’s  Last  Rally — Failure  of  His  Embassy  to  New  Orleans 
— Croghan’s  Mission — Pontiac’s  Despair — He  Makes  Peace— His 
Assassination, 113 

CHAPTER  XV. 

The  Adventures  of  Peter  Williamson, . 122 

CHAPTER  iSSET 

Emigration  Westward — The  Wyoming  Massacre,  ....  131 

CHAPTER  XVII. 

The  Escape  of  Rufus  Bennet — Queen  Esther’s  Rock — The  Exploits 
of  Lebbeus  Hammond  and  Joseph  Elliott — Saved  by  a Spider’s 
Web — The  Fratricide,  . . ......  137 


CONTENTS. 


Vll 


PAGE 

CHAPTER  XVIII. 

The  Singular  Story  of  Frances  Slocum, 142 

CHAPTER  XIX. 

The  Massacre  at  Cherry  Valley — Major  Clarke’s  Brilliant  Expe- 
dition— A Strange  Surrender — The  Six  or  Five  Nations — 
Sullivan’s  Crushing  Campaign  Against  the  Indians,  . . . 149 

CHAPTER  XX. 

A White  Miscreant — A Dark  Page  in  American  History — Retribu^ 

tion, 155 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

A Scrimmage  With  the  Delawares — Brady’s  Leap,  . . . 162 

CHAPTER  XflL, 

Ravages  by  the  Indians — Major  Doughty’s  Encounter  on  the  Ten- 
nessee— General  Harmar’s  Expedition — Defeat  of  St.  Clair — 
General  Wayne’s  Successful  Campaign — The  Treaty  of  Fort 
Greenville, 169 

CHAPTER  XXIII. 

The  Greatest  American  Indian  That  Ever  Lived — Tecumseh’s 
Birth  and  Youth — At  the  Battle  of  Fallen  Timbers — A Timid 
Kentuckian — Tecumseh’s  Interview  with  Governor  Harrison 
— A Dramatic  Scene, 177 

CHAPTER  XXIV. 

Tecumseh  Takes  the  Warpath — Address  of  Governor  Harrison — 
Reply  of  the  Shawanoe  Chieftain — The  Battle  of  Tippecanoe — 
Defeat  of  the  Shawanoes — Colonel  Dudley’s  Repulse — Tecum- 
seh’s Reproof  of  General  Proctor — The  Battle  of  the  Thames 
— Death  of  Tecumseh, 186 

CHAPTER  XXV. 

The  Creek  War — The  Massacre  at  Fort  Mimms — General  Jackson 
Takes  the  Field — A Victory  at  Tallushatches — Victory  at 
Talledega — Defeat  of  the  Creeks  at  Autosse — Defeat  of  the 
Indians  at  Enotochopko  Creek — Victory  at  Horseshoe  Bend — 
Weatherford — End  of  the  Creek  War, 203 


V'fJl 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

CHAPTER  XXVI. 

The  Adventures  of  Michigan  John, ' 212 

CHAPTER  (XXVII. 

The  First  Seminole  War — High-Handed  Proceedings  of  General 

Jackson — End  of  the  War, 218 

CHAPTER  XXVIII. 

The  Black  Hawk  War — Red  Bird — Black  Hawk’s  Grievances — 
Preparations  by  the  Governor  and  Military  Authorities — 
General  Gaines’s  Movements — General  Atkinson’s  Expedition 
— Defeat  of  Major  Stillman — Indian  Allies — Ravages  of  the 
Cholera — The  Attack  by  the  “Warrior” — The  Decisive  Bat- 
tle— Surrender  of  Black  Hawk, 221 

CHAPTER  XXIX. 

Black  Hawk’s  Oratory — His  Visit  to  Washington — Imprisonment 
and  Release  — His  Return  Home — His  Humiliation — Death  of 
the  Sac  Leader, 233 

CHAPTER  XXX. 

The  Second  Seminole  War — The  Treaty  of  1823 — Dissatisfaction 
of  the  Whites  and  Indians — Hostilities — Treaty  of  Payne’s 
Landing — Osceola — Message  of  President  Jackson — Imprison- 
ment of  Osceola — Outrages  by  Indians — Massacre  of  Dade’s 
Command — Assassination  of  General  Thompson — Fight  on  the 
Ouithlacoochee,  . 244 

CHAPTER  XXXI. 

The  Second  Seminole  War  (continued) — Defeat  of  Major  Putnam 
— Second  Fight  at  the  Ouithlacoochee — Progress  of  the  War 
— Help  From  the  Northern  Indians — Creeks  Enlisted  in  the 
United  States  Service — Colonel  Lane’s  Expedition — Death  of 
Colonel  Lane — Battles  in  Wahoo  Swamp — Fruitless  Negotia- 
tions,   259 

CHAPTER  ^XXXII. 

The  Second  Seminole  .War  (concluded) — Treacherous  Capture  of 
Osceola — His  Death — Battle  of  Lake  Okeechobee — Defeat  of 
Lieutenant  Powell — Bloodhounds  Imported  From  Cuba — Fur- 
ther Outrages — Mimic  and  Real  Tragedies — Failure  of  Nego- 
tiations— The  Right  Man  at  Last — End  of  the  Seminole  War, 


270 


CONTENTS.  ix 

PAGE 

CHAPTER  XXXIII. 

The  Discovery  of  Gold  in  California — Treaties  With  the  Indians 
— Treaty  With  the  Cheyennes  and  Arapahoes — Intrusion  on 
the  Indian  Lands — Massacre  of  Indians  by  Colonel  Chivington 
—New  Treaties — Establishment  of  Military  Posts — The  Mili- 
tary Division  of  the  Missouri — Attack  on  the  Union  Pacific 
Railway — Fruitless  Negotiations — Congress  Appoints  Commis- 
sioners— Their  Doings, 281 

CHAPTER  XXXIV. 

The  Minnesota  Outbreak — Causes — The  First  Hostilities — Little 
Crow — Fearful  Outrages — Consternation  on  the  Border — 
Captain  Marsh’s  Encounter  With  the  Hostiles — At  Yellow 
Medicine — Attacks  on  Fort  Ridgely,  ......  289 

CHAPTER  XXXV. 

The  Minnesota  Outbreak  (continued) — Attacks  on  New  Ulm — 
Colonel  Sibley’s  Expedition — Relief  of  Fort  Ridgely — Disaster 
to  Major  Brown’s  Command — Attack  on  Captain  Strout — 
Attack  on  Hutchinson — Dissensions  Among  the  Sioux — Battle 
of  Wood  Lake — Capture  of  Indian  Camp,  . 302 

CHAPTER  XXXVI. 

The  Minnesota  Outbreak  (concluded) — Attack  on  the  Indian 
Prisoners  at  New  Ulm — Trial  of  the  Prisoners — Thirty-eight 
Executed — Death  of  Little  Crow — Close  of  Hostilities,  . 314 

CHAPTER  XXXVII. 

Further  Treaties  by  the  Peace  Commissioners — Continuance  of 
Outrages — Depredations  in  Kansas  and  Colorado — General 
Sheridan’s  Campaign — Desperate  Fight  of  Major  Forsyth — 
Singular  Adventure  of  Two  Scouts — Destruction  of  Black 
Kettle’s  Band  by  General  Custer — The  Indians  Sue  for  Peace,  323 

CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 

Indian  Trouble  in  the  Northwest — General  Crook’s  Campaign — 

The  Modoc  War — Assassination  of  General  Can  by  and  Dr. 
Thomas — The  Experience  of  Two  Young  Ranchmen  in  the  Bad 
Lands, 336 


X 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 

CHAPTER  XXXIX. 

Campaign  of  Generals  Terry  and  Crook  Against  Sitting  Bull — 

The  Custer  Massacre — Defeat  of  Sitting  Bull  by  General 
Miles — Defeat  and  Death  of  Crazy  Horse — Chief  Joseph  and 
His  Wonderful  Retreat  and  Defense — Death  of  Major  Thorn- 
burgh and  Agent  Meeker, 360 

CHAPTER  XL. 

The  Conquest  of  the  Apaches— The  Most  Terrible  of  all  Abo- 
rigines— Captain  Bourke’s  Description — The  Massacre  at  Camp 
Grant — A Reign  of  Terror — Incidents— General  Crook  Assumes 
Command — His  Plans  Interfered  With  by  a Peace  Commissioner,  373 

CHAPTER  XLI. 

The  Conquest  of  the  Apaches  (concluded) — General  Crook’s  Cam- 
paign— A Happy  Ending  Destroyed  by  Political  Influences — 
Geronimo — His  Daring  Exploits — Captain  Lawton’s  Brilliant 
Work  Under  General  Miles — End  of  the  War — Geronimo  in 
Captivity,  385 

CHAPTER  XLII. 

The  Indian  Uprising  of  1890-91 — Causes  of  the  Numerous  Indian 
Wars — The  Board  of  Indian  Commissioners — Corruption  in  the 
Indian  Bureau — Views  of  General  O.  O.  Howard,  . . . 396 

CHAPTER  XLIII. 

The  Indian  Uprising  of  1890-91  (continued) — The  Leaders  of  the 
Reactionary  Party — Fraud  in  the  Purchase  of  Indian  Lands — 
Indian  Commissions — Bishop  Hare’s  Views — The  Messiah  Craze 
— Sitting  Bull — The  Indian  Police, 406 

CHAPTER  XLIV. 

The  Indian  Uprising  of  1890-91  (continued) — Death  of  Sitting  Bull 
—Sketch  of  the  Famous  Chief  and  Medicine  Man — Battle  of 
Wounded  Knee — Incidents  of  the  Fight — Burning  of  the  Catho- 
lic Mission  Building — Gloomy  Outlook — Danger  of  Pine  Ridge,  412 

CHAPTER  XLV. 

The  Indian  Uprising  of  1890-91  (continued) — The  Killing  of  Lieu- 
tenant E.  W.  Casey — Excitement  Among  the  Hostiles — Alarm- 
ing Rumors — Wanton  Attack  on  Friendly  Indians — Critical 
Hours— Sullen  Approach  of  the  Indians  to  the  Agency,  . . 426 


CONTENTS. 


XI 


PAGE 

CHAPTER  XLVI. 

The  Indian  Uprising  of  1890-91  (concluded) — The  Crisis — Sur- 
render OF  THE  HoSTILES — GENERAL  MlLES’s  CONGRATULATORY 
Address — Charges  Against  Colonel  J.  W.  Forsyth — Overruled 
by  the  Secretary  of  War,  ........  436 

CHAPTER  XLVII. 

Visit  of  the  Sioux  Delegation  to  Washington — Speeches  by 
Secretary  Noble,  John  Grass,  American  Horse,  Young-Man- 
Afraid-of-His-Horses,  Two-Strike,  Hump,  High  Hawk,  Hollow 
Horn  Bear,  Medicine  Bull,  White  Ghost,  Big  Mane,  Little  No 
Heart,  Mad  Bear,  Turning  Hawk,  and  the  Great  Father, 
President  Harrison — The  Indian  Story  of  Wounded  Knee,  . 446 

CHAPTER  XLVIII. 

Trial  and  Acquittal  of  Plenty  Horses  for  the  Killing  of  Lieu- 
tenant Casey — Views  of  Captain  R.  H.  Pratt  on  the  Educa- 
tion of  the  Indian, 458 


CHAPTER  XLIX. 

Views  of  Frederic  Remington,  the  Artist,  on  the  Indian  Question 
— A Specimen  of  National  Legislation  for  the  Indians — The 
Acquisition  of  Indian  Lands, 466 

CHAPTER  L. 

The  Richest  People  in  the  World — “What  Shall  be  Done  With 
the  Indians?” — Views  of  the  First  White  Child  Born  in  the 
Present  State  of  Minnesota — Indian  Progress  and  Civilization,  477 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


PAGE 

The  Death  of  Sitting  Bull,  . Frontispiece 

Indian  Medicine  Man,  . - . , . . . . . . 5 

Captain  Smith, ......  6 

Opecancanough  Arousing  the  Indians,  ......  7 

Opecancanough  in  Captivity,  ........  8 

Gallup’s  Attack  on  the  Indians,  . . . . . .11 

Attack  on  the  Pequot  Fort,  ........  15 

King  Philip’s  Arms, .....  21 

Attack  on  Brookfield,  .........  23 

Death  of  Philip, . ...  30 

The  Treacherous  Entrance,  ........  32 

The  Old  Indian  House  at  Deerfield,  Mass.,  35 

Door  of  the  Indian  House  through  which  Hannah  Stebbins  was 

Shot, 35 

The  Bullet  that  Killed  Hannah  Stebbins,  . ...  36 

Snowshoes  Worn  by  Captain  Shelden, 36 

Shoe  Worn  by  Little  Sarah  Coleman,  .......  37 

The  Attack  on  the  Doeg  Wigwam,  .......  39 

Burning  of  Jamestown, . 41 

Attack  on  Schenectady,  ........  44 

French  Explorers  Burying  Leaden  Plates,  .....  46 

Washington’s  Attack  on  the  French  in  the  Ravine,  ...  47 

Leaving  the  Fort,  60 

“ Do  your  Duty,”  ..........  63 

Attack  on  Presque  Isle,  67 

Night  Attack  on  the  Schooner, 73 

“ Blow  her  Up  ! ” . 81 

“That  Leads  to  the  Garret;  Hide  yourself  There,”  . . 87 

The  Warning  of  the  Jesuit  Priest,  .......  91 

Hewing  the  Way  to  Freedom,  97 

“The  Indians  will  Soon  be  Here,”  .......  ioi 

xiii 


XIV 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE 

Colonel  Bouquet  Writing  what  he  Believed  to  be  his  Last 

Dispatch, 103 

Returning  the  Captives, . . .m 

The  Crowning  Evil, , . nj 

Death  of  Pontiac,  . . . . . . . . . .120 

Twenty-Five  Other  Indians  Arrived,  ......  125 

Ai  She  Flew  from  me,  Screaming,”  ........  13a 

Monument  Erected  at  Wyoming,  .......  132 

The  Vale  of  Wyoming, 134 

Escape  of  the  Fugitives,  . - . . 138 

Saved  by  a Spider’s  Web, 140 

The  Capture  of  Frances  Slocum,  .......  143 

From  Civilization  to  Barbarism, 145 

A Vain  Appeal,  147 

Death  of  Colonel  Alden, 15 1 

An  Iroquois  Home, 153 

A Piteous  Appeal, 157 

Torture  of  Colonel  Crawford, 159 

The  Leap, 165 

A Pioneer  Home, . 171 

Washington  in  a Rage, 173 

At  the  Battle  of  Fallen  Timbers, 179 

The  Frightened  Kentuckian, 181 

“ Tecumseh  has  Got  to  Detroit  ! ” . 189 

He  Seized  him  by  the  Hair  and  almost  Shook  the  Life  out  of 

him, 191 

“You  are  not  Fit  to  Command — Go  Home  and  put  on  Petti- 
coats,”   193 

Death  of  Tecumseh, 199 

The  Attack  on  Fort  Mimms,  .........  205 

General  Jackson’s  Invitation  to  Dinner, 207 

Weatherford  and  General  Jackson, 210 

He  . . . Dragged  him  out  of  the  Den, 216 

The  Attack  on  the  Keel  Boats, 222 

The  Flag  of  Truce, 225 

The  Deserters  in  the  Woods, 227 

The  Attack  of  the  “ Warrior,” 229 

Surrender  of  Black  Hawk, 231 

Triumph  and  Humiliation, 239 

“ Our  Illustrious  Guest  ! ” 242 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS.  ' XV 

PAGE 

Osceola,  Chief  of  the  Seminoles, 247 

Arrest  of  Osceola, 250 

A Friend  in  Need, .252 

Major  Dade’s  Battle  Ground, 255 

Death  of  General  Thompson, 257 

Attack  on  the  Sloop  “ Pilot,” 260 

Seminole  Attack  on  a Settler’s  Home,  ......  264 

An  Attack  of  Devotion, 266 

Treacherous  Capture  of  Osceola, 271^ 

The  Squaw  Guide,  274 

Bloodhounds  in  the  Seminole  War, . 276 

A Seminole  Theatrical  Troupe,  .....  . 278 

Penetrating  the  Everglades, 279 

The  Overland  Route  to  California,  282 

Coming  in  at  Fort  Lyon, . 283 

Attack  on  Railway  Train  by  Hostiles, 286" 

Fall  of  Young  myrick, 293 

Attack  on  Dr.  Humphreys  and  his  Family,  .....  294 

Strange  Death  of  Captain  Marsh, 297 

Relief  of  New  Ulm, 299 

Ingenious  Stratagem  of  a Hostile,  .......  305 

The  Sioux  Arrows, 307.- 

A Startling  Awakening, • 310 

Attack  on  the  Indian  Prisoners,  .......  313 

“ I never  Saw  such  a Charge  Before  ! ” 327 

An  Hydraulic  Exploit, 332 

Mourning  for  the  Fallen,  333 

Indian  Civilization, 339 

Attack  by  Modocs  on  the  Peace  Commissioners,  ....  34^ 

The  Bad  Lands, 343 

The  Destructive  Hunt, 345- 

“ Turning  for  an  Instant  at  the  Foot  of  the  Bank,”  . . 353^ 

“ Still  Dancing  and  Dodging,  they  Sheered  off,”  ....  357^ 

Custer’s  Last  Fight, 361X 

“ Comanche,”  the  Only  Survivor  of  the  Custer  Massacrf,  . . "365' 

A Notice  to  General  Miles  from  Sitting  Bull,  ....  368 

“From  where  the  Sun  now  Stands  I Fight  no  more  against 

the  White  Man,” 369 

An  Apache  Warrior, 374 

On  the  Warpath, 375 


XVI 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS. 


PAGE 

Pursuit  of  the  Raiders,  ....  ....  377 

Taunting  their  Pursuers, . 379 

Attack  on  the  Ranchman’s  Family,  ......  381 

General  George  Crook,  ........  . 383 

An  Apache  Home, 386 

General  Crook’s  Apache  Guide,  ........  389 

Geronimo, 391 

Crossing  the  Rio  Grande, 392 

Gallant  Exploit  of  Lieutenant  Clarke,  .....  393 

The  Ghost  Dance, 401 

Indian  Police,  . ......  410 

Crow  Indian  Scouts,  ..........  416 

Battle  of  Wounded  Knee,  ........  417 

The  Young  Cannoneer,  420 

Attack  on  the  Wagon  Train, . 423 

Coming  in  for  a Powwow,  . . . . . , , * . 425 

Bringing  the  News  of  Lieutenant  Casey’s  Death,  . . 427 

Death  of  Few  Tails,  .....  ....  43c 

United  States  Border  Infantryman,  , . 432 

Cheyenne  Scout,  ....  433 

Approach  of  the  Indian  Scouts,  .......  434 

The  Final  Surrender, -437 

Interview  of  the  Indian  Delegation  with  their  “ Great  Father  ” 

at  Washington,  ..........  456 

Congratulating  Plenty  Horses  on  his  Acquittal  of  the  Murder 

of  Lieutenant  Casey,  .........  460 

Poetic  Justice,  ...........  478 

The  Last  Scenf.  . , ....  481 


THE  INDIAN  WARS 


OF 


THE  UNITED  STATES. 


CHAPTER  I. 


THE  NORTH  AMERICAN  INDIANS. 


O one  knows  where  the  North  American  Indians  came  from.  There 


T are  many  ingenious  theories  to  explain  their  presence  on  our  conti- 
nent. The  one  now  generally  accepted  is  that  their  ancestors  found  their 
way  from  Asia  across  Bering  Strait,  many  centuries  ago,  and  migrating 
southward  gradually  overspread  North  and  South  America.  The  latest 
scientific  researches  add  reasonableness  to  this  theory. 

With  the  exception  perhaps  of  the  Esquimaux,  the  Indians  possess  a 
general  resemblance.  Their  characteristics,  as  given  by  Lawrence,  are  : 
S'dn  brown  or  cinnamon-hued  ; iris  dark ; hair  long,  black,  and  straight; 
beard  scanty  ; eyes  deep-seated  ; nose  broad,  but  prominent ; lips  full  and 
rounded;  face  broad  across  cheeks,  which  are  prominent,  but  less  angular 
than  the  Mongolian,  and  with  features  distinct.  The  general  shape  of  the 
head  is  square,  with  low  but  broad  forehead,  back  of  the  head  elevated, 
top  elevated,  face  much  developed,  and  powerful  jaws.  The  parietal  region 
is  also  much  developed,  orbits  large,  feet  and  hands  small  and  well  propor- 
tioned, teeth  white  and  sound,  and  the  facial  angle  about  750. 

The  stature,  while  no  greater  than  that  of  other  races,  shows  in  some 
instances  a marked  difference.  The  Osages  are  tall,  while  the  Shoshones 
are  below  the  average  height.  The  muscular  development  of  the  Amer- 
ican Indian  is  not  great,  and  he  shows  a tendency  to  grow  fat  when  food 
is  abundant,  and  his  habits  indolent.  He  is  inferior  to  the  white  race  in 
labors  requiring  compactness  of  muscle  and  long-continued  exertion.  The 
complexion  varies  from  the  dark-brown  of  the  Californian  tribes  to  the 
almost  white  of  the  Mandans  and  the  Chinooks.  The  beard  is  scanty,  ex- 
cept among  the  Athabascans,  and  is  prevented  from  growing  by  their  cus- 
tom of  plucking  it  out.  The  Indian  has  a dull,  sleepy  eye,  with  little  fire 


2 THE  NORTH  AMERICAN  INDIANS. 

>9 

unless  when  his  passions  are  aroused.  The  features  are  frequently  regular 
and  express  nobility.  Many  of  their  women  are  handsome.  The  skin  of 
the  Indian  is  smoother,  softer,  and  thinner  than  that  of  the  white  races. 
He  is  of  haughty  demeanor,  taciturn  and  stoical  to  the  last  degree.  He  is 
alert  and  cunning  in  the  surprise,  persevering  in  the  pursuit,  and  revengeful 
in  the  destruction  of  his  enemies.  He  is  cruel  to  prisoners  taken  in  war, 
without  regard  to  sex  or  age,  and  when  himself  a captive,  endures  stoically 
the  most  frightful  tortures.  He  is  idle  and  grave  in  peace,  except  when 
engaged  in  hunting  or  amusements ; hospitable  and  grateful  for  favors, 
with  a poetic  and  imaginative  temperament,  which  is  often  exhibited  by 
an  eloquence  simple  but  of  the  highest  order. 

As  a race,  however,  the  American  Indian  is  more  animal  than  intel- 
lectual. While  he  shows  a reverence  for  age  and  a strong  love  of  children, 
he  is  superstitious  to  a degree.  Their  war  dances,  pow-wows,  sorceries, 
and  numerous  ceremonies  are  marked  by  excesses  and  absurdities  char- 
acteristic of  the  lowest  forms  of  barbarism.  Marriage  among  them  is 
generally  dissoluble  at  the  pleasure  of  the  parties.  Polygamy  is  common 
and  the  women  undergo  all  the  drudgery  of  labor.  They  believe  in  the 
existence  of  a Supreme  Being,  embodying  a principle  of  unusual  benevo- 
lence, to  whom  is  due  gratitude  for  all  blessings.  On  the  other  hand,  they 
stand  in  fear  of  a spirit  of  evil,  who  they  believe  takes  an  active  concern  in 
all  the  affairs  of  life.\) 

The  Indians  of  "North  and  South  America  have  more  than  four  hun- 
dred languages  and  two  thousand  dialects.  Yet  each  tribe  possesses  its 
own  peculiar  physiognomy  and  its  members  are  readily  distinguished  by 
their  features  and  their  dress. 

With  such  an  enormous  number  of  tribes,  many  of  which  include  only 
a few  hundred  members,  classification  is  difficult.  The  Indians,  however, 
that  at  present  occupy  our  territory  may  be  classed  as  follows  : 

The  Panis,-Araparhoe  -family,  including  (i)  the  Panis  or  Pawnees; 
(2)  the  Arapahoes ; (3)  the  Jetans,  named  Comanches  by  the  Spaniards. 

The  Columbian  family,  including  (1)  the  Tushapaws;  (2)  the  Multno- 
mah ; (3)  the  Chahala ; (4)  the  Snake  or  Flatheads ; (5)  the  Shoshones ; 
(6)  the  Chopunish ; (7)  the  Sokulks ; (8)  the  Esheluts ; (9)  the  Enishurs; 
(10)  the  Chilluckittequaws. 

The  Sioux-Osage  family,  including  (1)  the  Sioux  or  Dakota,  the 
most  powerful  of  the  independent  aborigines,  which  are  divided  into  the 
Dakota  proper  and  the  Assiniboine,  the  latter  living  in  alliance  with  the 
Chippewas ; (2)  the  Omawha  or  Maha,  subdivided  into  several  tribes; 
(4)  the  Mandans ; (5)  the  Mawsash,  commonly  called  Osages,  subdivided 
into  three  tribes. 

The  Mobile-Natches  or  Floridian  family,  comprising  six  principal  or 


THE  VARIOUS  TRIBES. 


3 


independent  branches,  each  subdivided  into  several  tribes  : (i)  the  Natches, 
who  are  almost  extinct,  the  remnant  being  scattered  among  the  Creeks  and 
Choctaws ; (2)  the  Muskohges  or  Creeks,  the  most  numerous  of  the 
original  tribes,  consisting  of  the  Upper  and  Lower  Creeks,  the  latter  of 
whom  are  called  Seminoles;  (3)  the  Chickasaws;  (4)  the  Choctaws; 
(5)  the  Cherokees,  the  most  enlightened  of  the  independent  aborigines. 


The  Mohawk,  Huron,  or  Iroquois  family,  which  once  formed  the 


most  powerful  Indian  confederation  on  this  continent,  includes  a great 
variety  of  tribes:  (1)  the  Mohawks,  who  with  the  Senecas  and  Onondagas 
originated  the  Five  Nations,  which  afterward  became  Six  Nations,  by  the 
addition  of  the  Tuscaroras  of  the  South.  It  includes  also  the  Oneidas, 
^ ugas,  Canoys,  Mohegans,  and  Nanticokes. 


T The  Lenape  family,  including  (1)  the  Shawanoes;  (2)  the  Kickapoos ; 
(3)  the  Sacs,  Sawhees,  and  Ottogamies,  called  also  the  Foxes ; (4)  the 
Miamis;  (5)  the  Illinois;  (6)  the  Pottawatomies ; (7)  the  Winnebagoes; 
(8)  the  Delaware  or  Leni-Lenape ; (9)  the  Mohicans;  (10)  the  Abenaqui ; 
(ii)  the  Micmacks;  (12)  the  Algonquin;  (13)  the  Chippewa;  (14)  the 
Knistenaux ; (15)  the  Nenawehk ; (16)  the  Abbitibes ; (17)  the  Chip- 
pewyaus;  (18)  the  Carrurs.  The  Apaches,  who  have  played  such  a promi- 
nent part  in  our  late  Indian  wars,  belong  to  the  Mexican  family. 


CHAPTER  II. 


THE  FIRST  ENGLISH  SETTLEMENT  AND  THE  FIRST  INDIAN  WARS. 

THE  history  of  the  Indian  wars  in  this  country  properly  begins  with 
the  first  settlement.  It  has  been  wittily  said,  and  with  some  truth, 
that  when  the  New  England  pioneers  landed  on  our  shores,  they  first  fell 
upon  their  knees  and  then  upon  the  aborigines. 

More  than  a hundred  years  rolled  away  after  the  discovery  of  America 
by  Columbus,  before  a French,  Dutch,  or  English  colony  secured  a permanent 
footing  on  its  soil.  Spain  had  a small  settlement  at  St.  Augustine,  founded 
in  1565,  which  through  much  suffering  held  fast,  but  the  remaining  terri- 
tory, embracing  millions  of  square  miles,  was  inhabited  only  by  the  red 
Indian  and  wild  beasts. 

After  several  ineffectual  attempts  by  England  to  establish  a colony  in 
this  country,  King  James  I.  granted  a patent  or  charter  to  two  companies, 
by  which  they  received  a gift  of  the  whole  continent  of  North  America, 
from  the  thirty-fourth  to  the  forty-fifth  parallel  of  latitude.  This  did  not 
interfere  with  the  French  in  the  north,  nor  the  Spaniards  in  the  south,  but 
the  grant  included  all  the  present  States  along  the  Atlantic  seaboard,  north 
of  South  Carolina,  except  a part  of  Maine.  The  name  given  to  this  immense 
tract  was  “Virginia.” 

The  charter  of  the  king  divided  the  territory  into  two  parts.  The 
southern  half  belonged  to  the  London  Company  and  the  northern  half  to 
the  Plymouth  Company,  with  the  wise  condition  that  their  nearest  colonies 
must  be  a hundred  miles  apart,  and  must  indulge  in  no  quarreling. 

Attempts  at  settlement  followed.  The  Maine  colonists  arrived  at  the 
mouth  of  the  Kennebec,  in  August,  1607,  but  were  so  discouraged  by  the 
outlook  that  they  did  not  stay  long.  Most  of  them  went  back  to  England 
in  the  autumn.  A few  remained  until  the  following  spring,  when  their 
leader,  George  Popham,  having  died,  the  rest  returned  to  their  homes. 
They  took  with  them  such  dismal  reports  of  the  inhospitable  climate  that 
nearly  twelve  years  passed  before  the  next  attempt  to  settle  New  England. 

In  “The  Youths’  History  of  the  United  States,”  you  will  find  the  par- 
ticulars of  the  first  English  settlements  in  America.  The  London  Company 
sent  out  three  vessels  in  the  month  of  December,  1606,  containing  one  hun- 
dred and  five  men  and  no  women.  The  most  famous  member  of  the  com- 
pany was  Captain  John  Smith,  who  had  led  a life  of  strange  adventure, 


4 


FOUNDING  OF  JAMESTOWN. 


5 


which  was  continued  in  the  New  World.  The  colony  landed  upon  a penin- 
sula, about  forty  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  river,  which  they  named  the 
James,  in  honor  of  the  king,  and  began  the  settlement  of  Jamestown.  Only 
a few  ruins  remain  to  mark  the  site  of  the  first  English  settlement  in  this 
country. 

The  new  colony  suffered  from  the  heat  and  other  discomforts.  There 
came  a time  when  probably  all  the  settlers  would  have  perished,  but  for  the 


INDIAN  MEDICINE  MAN. 


kindness  of  the  Indians,  who  gave  them  food.  Everyone  is  familiar  with  the 
story  of  the  rescue  of  Captain  John  Smith  from  death  by  Pocahontas,  the 
daughter  of  the  great  Indian  chief  Powhatan,  the  result  of  which  was  that 
Powhatan  became  a fervent  friend  of  the  English  as  long  as  he  lived. 

The  marriage  of  Pocahontas  to  the  Englishman  Rolfe  took  place  in 
1613.  Powhatan  died  five  years  later,  and  his  successor  was  his  brother, 


6 


OPECANCANOUGH. 


Opecancanough,  who  hated  the  English  invaders  with  an  inextinguishable 
hatred.  But  he  was  shrewd,  and  possessed  all  the  proverbial  cunning  of  his 
race.  He  determined  to  exterminate  all  of  the  intruders. 

The  chief  was  too  wise  to  make  an  open  attack  or  to  let  it  be  known  that 
he  was  an  enemy  of  the  English.  He,  therefore,  acted  as  their  friend, 
while  laying  his  plans  for  their  massacre.  For  four  years  he  plotted  so 


CAPTAIN  smith.  {From  the  portrait  in  his  “ Virginia .”) 


carefully  that  the  neighboring  tribes,  who  were  friendly  to  the  whites,  did 
not  suspect  his  purpose.  In  the  depths  of  the  solemn  woods,  the  dusky 
plotters  held  many  secret  meetings,  at  which  they  fanned  the  fires  of  hate 
and  perfected  their  fearful  scheme  of  blotting  from  the  face  of  the  earth 
every  white  person  that  had  entered  their  hunting  grounds. 

The  appalling  blow  was  struck  by  Opecancanough  in  March,  1622,  when 


MASSACRE  OF  THE  SETTLEMENTS. 


7 


his  warriors  burst  upon  the  settlements  with  the  fury  of  the  cyclone.  The 
pioneers,  nearly  all  of  whom  were  absorbed  in  the  cultivation  of  tobacco, 
were  overwhelmed  by  the  fierce  hordes  ^ > 

which  seemed  to  spring  from  the  very 
earth.  With  their  frightful  yells,  they 
desended  upon  the  settlers,  many  of 
whom  were  so  unprepared  that  they 


had 


OPECANCANOUGH  AROUSING  THE  INDIANS. 


nothing  but  farming 
utensils  in  their  hands 
with  which  to  defend 
themselves.  Age,  sex, 
illness,  former  friendship  availed  nothing  to  stay  the  awful  tempest  of  wrath. 
In  the  space  of  a single  hour,  three  hundred  and  forty-seven  men,  women,  and 
children  were  massacred,  and  eighty  flourishing  plantations  planted  along 
the  James  were  reduced  to  six.  These  escaped  through  the  warning  of  a 
friendly  Indian,  who  brought  word  to  Jamestown,  on  the  night  before  the 


8 


PUNISHMENT  OF  THE  INDIANS. 


day  fixed  upon  for  the  massacre.  Runners  were  sent  out  to  warn  the  other 
settlements,  but  they  were  scattered  at  such  a great  distance  along  the  river 
that  they  could  not  be  reached  in  time. 

Swift  retribution  followed  this  work.  The  settlers  spent  the  following 
summer  in  strengthening  themselves  against  further  attacks,  and  in  pre- 


OPECANCANOUGH  IN  CAPTIVITY. 


thing  else,  even  the  planting  of  their  crops.  Where  such  furious 
resentment  raged,  it  need  not  be  said  that  the  white  men  equaled  the 
atrocity  of  the  Indians.  They  showed  them  no  mercy  and  resorted  to 
the  same  methods  that  their  enemies  had  employed.  They  went  so  far  as 
to  pretend  to  make  peace  with  them,  and,  when  the  unsuspicious  warriors 


DEATH  OF  OPECANCANOUGH. 


9 


and  chiefs  met  them  in  council,  they  sprang  upon  and  put  many  to  death. 
In  this  respect,  their  treachery  was  not  surpassed  by  the  Indians,  who  had 
received  solemn  assurances  that  their  lives  would  be  held  sacred. 

For  a time  it  was  believed  that  the  great  war  chief  Opecancanough  was 
among  the  slain,  but  the  old  fellow  turned  up  twenty-two  years  later  and 
struck  another  fearful  blow  at  the  colonists.  No  one  understood  better 
than  he  the  virtue  of  patience,  for,  when  the  hour  came  to  act,  he  was  a 
hundred  years  old,  and  so  feeble  that  he  had  to  be  carried  on  a litter  at  the 
head  of  his  warriors. 

Opecancanough  did  his  task  well.  All  the  Indians  for  six  hundred  miles 
around  were  in  the  plot.  The  fateful  drama  opened  in  April,  1644,  when 
an  attack  was  made  along  the  frontier,  the  plan  being  to  carry  it  to  the 
sea.  The  massacre  continued  for  two  days,  during  which  from  three  to 
five  hundred  whites  were  slain,  the  destruction  being  greatest  along  the 
York  and  Pamunky  rivers,  where  Opecancanough  commanded  in  person  ; 
but  at  the  end  of  the  time  mentioned,  Sir  William  Berkeley,  with  an  armed 
force,  checked  the  progress  of  the  Indians,  who  were  pressed  hard  in  turn. 

The  fighting  was  desperate.  Not  only  were  the  assailants  repulsed,  but 
the  great  chieftain  was  taken  prisoner.  By  this  time  he  was  so  emaciated 
and  worn  out  that  it  is  said  he  was  unable  so  much  as  to  raise  his  eyelids. 
Nevertheless,  he  was  borne  in  triumph  to  Jamestown. 

A soldier  was  appointed  to  guard  him,  but,  influenced  probably  by 
the  recollection  of  the  number  of  lives  that  had  been  lost  through 
the  agency  of  the  veteran  leader,  the  guard  deliberately  fired  upon 
Opecancanough  and  fatally  wounded  him.  He  heard  the  bustle 
made  outside  by  the  crowd  that  was  striving  to  get  a look  at  a dying 
sachem.  He  ordered  his  attendant  to  lift  his  eyelids.  The  sight  filled  his 
worn  frame  for  the  moment  with  unnatural  strength,  and,  rising  undaunt- 
edly to  his  feet,  he  commanded  that  the  governor  be  brought  to  him. 
When  Berkeley  appeared,  the  wrathful  chieftain  said  : 

“ Had  it  been  my  fortune  to  take  Sir  William  Berkeley  prisoner  I 
would  not  have  meanly  exposed  him  as  a show  to  my  people.” 

A few  minutes  later  he  died. 

Peace  followed  the  defeat  of  the  Indians,  and  Jamestown  and  the  sur- 
rounding colonies  were  prosperous  for  a long  time. 


CHAPTER  III. 


1/ 


THE  FIRST  INDIAN  WAR  IN  NEW  ENGLAND — EXTERMINATION  OF  THF 

PEQUOTS. 

/^VN  the  2 1 st  of  December,  1620,  the  Pilgrims,  to  the  number  of  102, 
landed  from  the  Mayflower , on  the  bleak  coast  of  Cape  Cod.  They 
were  strong,  sturdy  people,  all  of  them,  driven  from  their  homes  in  the  Old 
World  by  religious  persecution,  and  well  prepared  to  become  the  founder? 
of  a nation  in  the  New  World. 

Their  sufferings  were  appalling.  After  a time  half  of  the  little  band 
died,  and  there  was  one  woful  period  when  only  seven  well  persons  were 
in  the  colony.  But  they  held  on  grimly  and  by  and  by  prosperity  dawned, 
though  it  was  a long  while  in  coming. 

Fortunately  the  Indians  did  not  disturb  them.  Had  they  done  so 
they  could  have  readily  exterminated  the  little  band.  The  astonishment 
of  the  pioneers  was  great,  one  day  in  early  spring,  when  an  Indian  came 
out  of  the  woods  and  saluted  them  with  the  words: 

“Welcome,  Englishmen!  welcome,  Englishmen  ! ” 

This  red  man  was  Samoset,  who  had  picked  up  a few  words  of  Eng- 
lish a few  years  before  from  some  fishermen  on  the  coast  of  Maine.  He 
belonged  to  the  tribe  of  Wampanoags,  whose  chief  was  Massasoit. 

Samoset  was  treated  so  kindly  that  he  became  a devoted  friend  of  the 
settlers,  and,  a few  days  later,  made  another  visit,  accompanied  by  Mas- 
sasoit, chief  of  the  tribe.  The  sachem  was  entertained  with  the  same  hos- 
pitality, the  result  of  which  was  that  he  formed  an  alliance  with  the  Eng- 
lish, by  which  it  was  pledged  that  the  two  people  should  abstain  from 
harm  and  aid  each  other  against  all  enemies.  This  treaty  was  faithfully 
kept  for  half  a century,  and  Massasoit  secured  the  submission  of  nine  other 
sachems  to  King  James. 

The  result  of  such  humanity  and  wisdom  on  the  part  of  the  pioneers, 
taken  with  that  of  William  Penn,  who  adopted  a still  more  enlightened 
policy,  forms  one  of  the  most  striking  lessons  in  the  history  of  our  country. 

While  the  Pilgrims  were  toiling  and  suffering  at  Plymouth,  other 
feeble  settlements  were  made  along  the  coast.  On  the  29th  of  June,  1629, 
five  vessels,  one  of  which  was  the  famous  Mayflower , entered  what  is  now 
Salem  harbor.  They  brought  four  hundred  passengers,  as  well  as  cattle, 
goats,  and  agricultural  implements.  They  were  sent  by  the  new  English 
corporation  styled  “ The  Governor  and  Company  of  the  Massachusetts 

10 


gallup’s  attack  on  the  Indians. 


JOHN  GALLUP  OF  BOSTON  1 3 

Bay  in  New  England.”  Their  grant  extended  from  the  Merrimac  to  the 
Charles  River. 

The  new  colony  was  known  as  the  Massachusetts  Bay  Colony.  John 
Winthrop  came  over  the  following  year,  as  the  new  governor,  bringing 
eight  hundred  colonists  with  him.  Among  the  new  arrivals  were  many 
wealthy,  cultured,  and  powerful  men,  and  it  overshadowed  the  humble 
colony  at  Plymouth.  They  founded  the  town  of  Salem  and  afterward 
settled  Boston,  Roxbury,  Dorchester,  Charlestown,  Watertown,  and  less 
important  places. 

The  two  colonies  for  a long  time  were  independent.  The  Massachu- 
setts Bay  prospered  more  than  Plymouth,  and,  in  1692,  the  two  united 
under  the  name  of  Massachusetts,  the  word  being  derived  from  one  of  the 
Indian  tribes  in  the  neighborhood. 

jy>ne  pleasant  day  in  the  summer  of  1636  John  Gallup,  of  Boston,  was 
sailing  in  a small  fishing  boat,  with  a man  and  two  boys,  when  his  attention 
was  attracted  by  the  peculiar  action  of  another  fishing  boat  near  Block 
Island.  It  was  drifting  along  with  the  sails  flapping,  and  he  would  have 
felt  sure  no  one  was  on  board  had  he  not  seen  a number  of  persons  moving 
about  the  deck. 

“ There  is  something  wrong,”  he  said  to  his  companions,  as  he  headed 
his  own  boat  toward  the  other,  which  he  soon  recognized  as  belonging  to  a 
neighbor. 

While  yet  some  distance  away,  Gallup  saw  a canoe  leave  the  boat  and 
hurriedly  paddle  for  shore.  A scrutiny  of  the  figures  on  deck  showed  they 
were  Indians.  This  told  the  fearful  story.  The  red  men  had  killed  those 
on  board  and  taken  possession  of  the  vessel. 

But  Gallup  was  a brave  man  and  did  not  flee.  He  had  two  guns,  two 
pistols,  and  plenty  of  ammunition.  He  ordered  his  companions  to  steer 
straight  for  the  other  boat,  and,  stationing  himself  at  the  prow,  opened  fire 
on  the  Indians.  He  was  one  of  the  best  marksman  on  the  frontier,  and 
aimed  with  such  care  that  every  time  he  pulled  trigger  a warrior  fell. 

Gallup’s  vessel  bore  directly  down  on  the  other,  whose  occupants  be- 
came so  terrified  that  many  ran  below  to  escape  the  whistling  bullets,  for 
the  boys  and  the  other  man  joined  in  the  fusillade.  A minute  later,  Gal- 
lup’s boat  crashed  into  the  other  and  six  of  the  frightened  Indians  leaped 
into  the  water.  Rebounding,  the  vessel  struck  a second  time,  and  all  the 
savages  sprang  into  the  sea,  excepting  four.  Gallup  and  his  companions 
leaped  over  the  gunwale  and  assailed  them  with  such  fierceness  that  two 
ran  below,  while  the  remaining  couple  begged  for  mercy.  It  was  granted 
and  they  were  made  prisoners. 

The  Indians  concerned  in  this  outrage  were  Pequots.  Governor  Vane, 
on  learning  of  the  occurrence,  sent  ninety  men  to  Block  Island,  where  they 


14 


EXPEDITION  AGAINST  THE  PEQUOTS. 


attacked  and  scattered  the  savages,  burned  their  lodges  and  came  back  to 
‘Boston  without  the  loss  of  a man.  The  campaign  against  the  Pequots  was  on 
such  a small  scale  that,  instead  of  cowing,  it  exasperated  and  spurred  them 
to  greater  hostilities.  Like  Opecancanough,  they  determined^)  extermi- 
nate  all  the  ..white-peo p 1 e in  the  country.  ~ — 

This  was  a grand  scheme,  but  the  Pequots  knew  the  madness  of  enter- 
ing upon  the  work  without  the  help  of  the  other  tribes.  Their  old  enemies, 
the  Narragansetts,  could  place  five  thousand  warriors  on  the  warpath, 
and,  if  they  should  join  forces  with  the  Pequots,  there  was  reason  to 
hope  for  success.  Accordingly,  messengers  were  sent  to  the  Nar- 
ragansetts, and  every  art  known  to  Indian  oratory  and  persuasion  was 
used  to  bring  them  into  the  alliance.  Success  was  almost  reached,  when 
Roger  Williams,  the  preacher  that  had  been  banished  from  New  England, 
and  who  was  living  among  the  Narragansetts,  turned  the  scale  and  they 
declined  to  join  the  Pequots. 

Desperate  as  the  latter  knew  the  chances  to  be,  they  plunged  into  the 
war  single-handed,  beginningin  the  usual  way,  by  stealthy  attacks  on  cabins 
and  by  shooting  down  laborers  in  the  fields.  When  they  secured  a prisoner, 
as  happened  quite  often,  they  put  him  to  death  by  torture.  Growing 
bolder  through  success,  they  attacked  the  little  town  of  Weathersfield,  and 
well-nigh  succeeded  in  capturing  it.  They  had  a thousand  braves  on  the 
warpath  and  became  so  menacing  that  Connecticut  begged  Plymouth  and 
Massachusetts  Bay  to  save  her. 

The  response  was  met  by  the  dispatch  of  ninety  men  under  Captain 
Mason,  who  was  a veteran  soldier.  Before  leaving  Hartford  most  of  the 
night  was  spent  in  prayer.  Seventy  Mohicans,  under  Uncas,  a sachem  of 
the  tribe,  went  with  the  English.  There  was  some  suspicion  of  the  loyalty 
of  these  dusky  allies,  but  though  they  amounted  to  little,  they  remained 
true  to  the  white  men. 

Mason  was  joined  by  'Captain  Underhill,  in  command  of  the  Con- 
necticut troops,  and  it  was  wisely  decided  to  attack  the  Pequots  in  the  rear, 
by  marching  through  the  country  of  the  Narragansetts.  Accordingly,  the 
three  small  vessels  containing  the  troops  sailed  easterly  along  the  coast, 
and  entered  Narragansett  Bay  on  the  evening  of  May  20.  The  following 
day,  being  Sunday,  was  spent  in  religious  exercises,  and  a storm  prevented 
the  landing  until  the  23d. 

When  the  troops  approached  the  Pequot  fort,  which  stood  on  an  emi- 
nence, in  the  present  town  of  Groton,  Connecticut,  the  Mohican  and  Nar- 
ragansett allies  were  frightened  almost  into  a panic.  They  stayed  at  a safe 
distance  until  the  fight  was  over,  helping,  however,  in  the  closing  scenes  of 
the  tragedy. 

Just  as  night  was  shutting  in,  on  the  evening  of  the  25th,  the  settlers 


THE  PEQUOT  FORT. 


15 

came  in  sight  of  the  fort,  which  consisted  of  a circular  inclosure,  containing 
more  than  an  acre.  It  was  surrounded  by  palisades,  a dozen  feet  high, 
set  so  close  that  no  person  could  force  his  body  between,  while  there  was 


ATTACK  ON  THE  FEQUOl'  FORT. 


plenty  of  room  for  the  Indians  to  use  their  bows  and  arrows.  Within  the 
palisades  were  rows  of  wigwams. 

Crouching  in  the  woods,  the  settlers  heard  the  sounds  of  rough  mirth 
and  revelry  from  the  stockades.  With  no  suspicion  of  danger,  the  red  men 


1 6 


ANNIHILATION  OF  THE  PEQUOTS. 


were  enjoying  themselves  in  their  boisterous  fashion,  and  perhaps  engaging 
in  the  torture  of  some  prisoner,  powerless  to  help  himself. 

A cautious  reconnoisance  disclosed  two  entrances  to  the  Pequot 
stronghold.  They  were  opposite  each  other  and  protected  by  only  a few 
bushes.  It  was  decided  to  make  a simultaneous  rush  through  the  two 
openings. 

The  first  streakings  of  light  had  not  yet  appeared  in  the  east  when  a 
watch  dog,  near  the  eastern  entrance,  discovered  several  of  the  shadowy 
figures  in  the  moonlight,  stealing  over  the  ground  toward  the  fort.  He 
barked  and  the  drowsy  sentinels,  starting  up,  uttered  the  cry : 

“ Owanux  ! Owanux  ! ” (The  Englishmen  ! The  Englishmen  !) 

Captain  Mason  sprang  through  the  bushes,  and,  sword  in  hand,  opened 
the  fight,  holding  his  ground  until  his  soldiers  could  hasten  to  his  help. 
Underhill,  on  the  other  side,  knew  what  the  sounds  meant  and  attacked 
with  equal  energy. 

The  Pequots  were  among  the  bravest  of  Indians,  and  they  fought  with 
a desperation  and  valor  which  soon  compelled  the  assailants  to  give  ground. 
At  the  moment  when  defeat  threatened,  Mason  snatched  up  a firebrand 
and,  whirling  it  into  a quick  blaze,  flung  it  on  the  roof  of  a wigwam,  which 
almost  immediately  broke  into  flames.  Underhill  was  hardly  a minute 
later  in  doing  the  same  on  his  side  of  the  stronghold. 

The  slaughter  now  became  fearful.  Men,  women,  and  children  were 
slain  without  mercy.  When  the  fire  was  fairly  under  way,  the  soldiers  ran 
©utside  and  waited  until  the  victims,  in  their  frantic  efforts  to  escape,  were 
outlined  against  the  vivid  flames,  when  they  shot  them  down.  If  any  per- 
chance escaped,  they  fell  victims  to  the  cowardly  Mohicans  and  Narragan- 
setts  in  the  woods  beyond  the  white  men.  The  loss  of  the  Pequots,  while 
siot  definitely  known,  was  probably  a thousand.  Two  of  the  whites  were 
killed  and  many  wounded. 

On  their  return  to  their  ships,  Mason  met  three  hundred  more  Pequot 
warriors.  A fight  instantly  opened,  but  the  whites  got  to  the  rear  of  the 
Indians  and  reached  the  harbor,  fighting  all  the  way. 

Having  begun  the  war  of  extermination,  the  settlers  continued  it  with- 
out mercy.  Mason,  with  a strong  force,  scoured  the  country  from  near 
New  London  to  the  English  fort  at  Saybrook.  The  Pequots  were  de- 
stroyed to  that  extent  that  the  survivors  made  haste  to  surrender.  Some 
were  sent  to  the  Bermudas,  others  were  enslaved  in  Massachusetts  and 
Connecticut,  and  the  rest  were  absorbed  by  the  neighboring  tribes.  Thus 
the  Pequot  Indians  soon  disappeared  from  the  face  of  the  earth,  and  a long 
period  of  peace  and  prosperity  came  to  the  New  England  colonies. 


CHAPTER  IV. 


KING  PHILIP’S  WAR— ATTACKS  ON  SWANSEA,  BROOKFIELD,  AND  OTHER 

PLACES. 

THE  most  famous  early  uprising  of  Indians  in  this  country  is  known 
as  King  Philip’s  war.  It  has  already  been  shown  that  Massasoit,  the 
great  Wampanoag  chieftain,  in  return  for  the  kindness  shown  to  him  by 
the  English,  continued  their  loyal  friend  through  life.  He  died  in  1660* 
and  was  succeeded  by  his  two  sons,  Wamsutta  and  Pometacom,  whose 
English  names  were  Alexander  and  Philip. 

In  1662  the  English  were  disturbed  by  so  many  reports  that  Alex- 
ander was  plotting  with  the  Narragansetts,  that  he  was  ordered  to  appear 
before  the  Court  of  Plymouth  and  make  explanation.  He  expressed  a 
willingness  to  come,  insisting  that  he  was,  as  he  had  always  been,  a good 
friend  of  the  white  men.  On  the  day  appointed,  however,  he  not  only 
failed  to  present  himself,  but  went  among  the  Narragansetts,  who  he  pre- 
tended were  his  enemies.  Thereupon  he  was  brought  by  force  to  Ply- 
mouth. While  there  he  fell  ill  and  died.  The  English  said  that  his  ex- 
cessive rage  and  mortification  brought  the  fever  which  carried  him  off* 
but  his  people  declared  that  he  had  been  poisoned  by  the  physician  wh© 
attended  him.  His  death  left  Philip  the  chief  sachem  of  the  Wampa^ 
noags. 

The  younger  brother  was  the  superior  of  the  elder  in  every  respect* 
and  was  one  of  the  most  remarkable  men  of  his  race  that  ever  lived.  The 
distrustful  English  asked  him  to  come  to  Plymouth  and  make  known  his 
sentiments.  He  did  so  and  solemnly  denied  that  he  was  concerned  in  m 
knew  of  any  plot  against  them.  He  offered  his  younger  brother  as  a host* 
age  until  the  truth  of  what  he  declared  could  be  established.  The  court 
declined  the  offer  and  the  former  covenant  of  friendship  was  renewed* 
Philip  and  five  of  his  subordinate  sachems  signed  an  agreement  to  live 
peaceful  and  loyal  subjects  of  the  king,  while  the  Court  promised  to  give 
them  and  their  tribe  what  help  they  might  need.  As  a result,  five  years 
of  quiet  followed. 

The  real  cause  of  King  Philip’s  war  has  never  been  established.  He 
probably  shared  the  race  hatred  of  most  of  his  people,  and  had  besides  a 
number  of  personal  grievances.  The  widow  of  his  brother  insisted  that 
Alexander  had  been  poisoned,  and  it  is  likely  Philip  shared  the  beiieL 
Possibly  he  was  right. 


17 


8 


BREAKING  OUT  OF  KING  PHILIP'S  WAR. 


A white  man  was  murdered  by  the  Indians,  in  1671,  near  Dedham, 
Mass.,  and  suspicion  pointed  to  Philip  as  the  instigator  of  the  crime. 
The  real  criminal,  however,  was  afterward  discovered  and  executed.  The 
rumors  of  his  hostility  continuing,  the  chief  was  once  more  called  upon 
to  explain.  Being  naturally  suspicious  of  those  who  distrusted  him, 
Philip,  when  he  appeared  at  Taunton  Green,  was  accompanied  by  a party 
fully  armed  and  in  war  paint.  The  English  were  also  prepared,  but  the 
sachem  refused  to  move  any  further  until  the  English  captain  left  several 
of  his  men  as  hostages  during  the  conference.  Philip  and  his  companions 
were  required  to  surrender  the  firearms  in  their  possession,  and,  though 
they  obeyed,  it  was  with  such  sullenness  that  all  saw  trouble  would  come 
sooner  or  later. 

There  was  a converted  Indian  known  as  Sassamon,  who  moved  freely 
among  the  red  and  white  men.  To  the  latter  he  brought  all  he  knew  or 
heard  about  Philip.  His  own  people  distrusted  him  and  one  day  his  dead 
body  was  found  under  the  ice  of  Middleborough  Pond.  An  examination 
showed  that  Sassamon  had  been  killed,  his  rifle  having  been  left  in  sight 
to  give  the  impression  that  he  had  met  his  death  by  drowning.  An  Indian 
finally  came  forward,  who  declared  that  from  the  top  of  an  adjoining  hill 
he  saw  three  of  his  people  slay  Sassamon  and  thrust  his  body  under  the 
ice.  The  accused  were  arrested  and  tried  before  a jury,  partly  composed 
of  Indians.  They  were  convicted  and  put  to  death. 

By  this  time  Philip’s  patience  was  worn  out.  He  was  continually  sus- 
pected and  accused,  and  the  settlers  obstinately  refused  to  believe  any- 
thing but  evil  concerning  him.  He  decided  on  war. 

That  there  might  be  no  mistake  as  to  his  intentions,  he  and  his  war- 
riors boldly  displayed  their  firearms,  as  they  marched  toward  the  head  of 
the  peninsula  where  they  lived,  which  was  a ridge  of  woody  hills,  near  the 
present  city  of  Bristol.  They  were  closely  watched  and  other  Indians  were 
observed  making  their  way  thither.  The  squaws  and  children  were  sent 
to  Narragansett,  and  the  noise  of  firing  and  shouts  removed  all  doubts  of 
the  intentions  of  Philip  and  his  warriors. 

A short  time  before  hostilities  opened,  the  governor  of  Massachusetts 
sent  an  ambassador  to  the  sachem  to  demand  of  him  why  he  intended  war 
against  the  English.  He  was  asked  at  the  same  time  to  enter  into  a 
treaty.  Philip’s  answer  was  worthy  of  the  man  : 

“Your  governor  is  but  a subject  of  King  Charles  of  England.  I shall 
not  treat  with  a subject.  I shall  treat  of  peace  only  with  the  king,  my 
brother.  When  he  comes,  I am  ready.” 

The  alarm  became  so  general  that  the  24th  day  of  June,  1675,  was  ap- 
pointed a day  of  fasting  and  prayer  that  the  horrors  of  the  impending 


THE  OPENING  CONFLICTS.  1 9 

war  might  be  averted.  It  was  on  that  very  day  that  the  opening  act  of 
the  King  Philip’s  war  took  place. 

At  Swansea,  a small  town  near  Philip’s  territory,  the  services  were 
finished  at  church  and  the  worshipers  were  returning  to  their  homes,  when 
they  were  fired  upon  by  a party  of  Indians.  One  was  killed  and  two  were 
wounded.  A couple  hurried  off  for  a surgeon,  when  they  were  shot  down, 
while  six  others  were  slain  near  the  garrison  and  their  bodies  mutilated  in 
the  barbarous  fashion  of  the  Indians.  Several  buildings  were  burned,  when 
the  assailants  drew  off  as  swiftly  as  they  had  appeared. 

Philip  did  not  take  part  in  this  attack,  and  it  is  believed  it  was  made 
against  his  wishes,  but  it  was  the  opening  of  the  terrible  war,  which  was 
now  to  be  prosecuted  with  unrelenting  vigor  to  the  bitter  end. 

The  Indians  flew  to  arms  and  struck  blow  after  blow.  The  New 
England  towns  were  so  scattered  and  ill-prepared  for  defense,  that  for  a 
time  the  savages  had  almost  everything  their  own  way.  A portion  of 
Taunton,  Middleborough,  and  Dartmouth  was  destroyed,  and  Swansea, 
being  abandoned  by  the  inhabitants,  was  burned  by  the  red  men. 

The  terrified  people  sent  runners  to  Plymouth  and  Boston,  begging 
for  help  against  the  marauders.  Immediately  on  the  news  reaching  Boston, 
the  drums  beat  for  volunteers,  and  within  three  hours  iio  men  were 
mustered  in  under  the  command  of  Captain  Mosely,  an  excellent  officer,  in 
whom  all  felt  confidence. 

The  soldiers  left  Boston  June  2 6,  and  arrived  at  Swansea  two  days 
later.  Night  was  closing  in  and  twelve  men  started  out  to  search  for 
Philip  and  his  warriors.  They  were  speedily  attacked  by  a force  equal  to 
their  own  and  one  was  killed  and  another  wounded.  Two  of  the  Indians 
were  slain. 

The  following  morning  the  Indians  showed  themselves  boldly  to  the 
English,  and  by  taunting  shouts  dared  them  to  come  out  and  fight.  Cap- 
tain Mosely  accepted  the  challenge  and  charged  furiously  upon  them  at 
the  head  of  his  men.  The  warriors  fled  to  cover,  and,  after  a few  shots, 
scattered.  One  white  man  was  brought  down,  but  Mosely  kept  up  the 
pursuit  for  a mile,  killing  a half  dozen  as  they  were  making  for  a dense 
swamp.  The  following  day  the  soldiers  marched  to  Mount  Hope  Neck 
and  found  Philip’s  wigwam,  but  he  and  his  people  had  made  good  their 
escape.  They  discovered  eight  heads  of  settlers,  set  upon  poles,  and  took 
them  down  and  buried  them. 

On  the  morning  of  July  i,  Lieutenant  Oakes,  while  on  his  way  from 
his  camp  at  Rehoboth  to  headquarters  at  Swansea,  came  upon  a party 
of  Indians  and  impetuously  attacked  them.  He  lost  one  of  his  men  and 
killed  several.  Three  scalps  were  taken  and  sent  to  Boston,  being  the  first 
captured  during  the  war. 


20 


ATTACK  ON  CAPTAIN  CHURCH. 


Benjamin  Church,  made  famous  by  the  part  he  took  in  King  Philip’s 
war,  was  given  command  of  thirty-six  men,  Captain  Fuller  being  associated 
with  him.  On  the  8th  of  July  they  marched  down  into  Pocasset  Neck- 
•Church  was  a fine  Indian  fighter  and  knew  the  country  well.  He  urged  the 
officers  to  pursue  Philip  on  the  Pocasset  side,  being  convinced  there  were 
no  Indians  in  Mount  Hope  Neck,  to  which  the  settlers  were  giving  almost 
undivided  attention.  Church’s  advice  was  disregarded,  and,  as  a conse- 
quence, Philip  burned  the  towns  in  the  direction  of  Plymouth. 

A force  of  thirty-six  men  cannot  be  reckoned  very  formidable,  but 
Church  divided  his  company,  he  taking  nineteen,  and  Fuller  the  rest. 

The  former  soon  had  his  hands  full.  Making  his  way  to  a point  of  land,, 
afterward  the  southern  extremity  of  Tiverton,  he  was  attacked  by  three 
hundred  Indians,  who  pressed  him  hard.  When  the  little  force  was  almost 
surrounded,  Church  gave  orders  to  retreat.  This  saved  the  settlers  from 
immediate  destruction,  but  it  looked  as  if  they  must  be  eventually  mas- 
sacred, for  the  savages  were  well  armed  and  fought  fiercely. 

Church  preserved  his  coolness,  but  his  men  were  pressed  so  hard  that 
they  showed  signs  of  panic.  He  cheered  them  by  his  inspiriting  words,  and 
helped  to  throw  up  temporary  defenses  with  the  stones  that  were  scattered 
around ; but  the  iron  hail  came  faster  and  faster,  and,  as  if  fate  was  against 
the  brave  soldiers,  the  boats  that  had  been  appointed  to  attend  the  expe- 
dition grounded  on  the  Rhode  Island  shore,  and  could  not  go  to  their  help. 
Finally  one  of  them  released  itself  and  approached  the  beleagured  defend- 
ers. Seeing  its  purpose,  the  Indians  poured  in  such  a hot  fire  that  the  occu- 
pants did  not  dare  attempt  to  land.  Captain  Church  shouted  to  them  to 
go  back  and  send  a canoe  to  his  help.  The  boatmen  declared  they  could 
not  do  so. 

By  this  time  Church  had  lost  his  temper,  and  he  had  good  cause  for 
doing  so. 

“ If  you  don’t  leave  at  once  I’ll  fire  into  you  ! ” he  called,  and  the  men, 
knowing  his  resolution,  hastily  obeyed. 

The  situation  of  the  defenders  became  more  desperate  than  before- 
The  Indians  fired  faster  than  ever,  and  filled  the  air  with  their  exultant 
shouts.  And  yet  one  is  tempted  to  smile,  on  learning  that,  despite  the 
fury  with  which  the  fight  was  prosecuted,  there  had  not  been  so  much  as  a 
white  man  wounded.  At  this  crisis,  however,  a sloop  appeared,  bearing 
down  upon  them.  The  captain  sent  his  canoe  ashore,  but  it  was  so  small 
that  it  could  take  off  only  two  at  a time.  Amid  the  firing  of  the  Indians, 
who  saw  their  prey  eluding  them,  the  embarkation  began.  Church  was  the 
last  man  to  leave,  and  his  escape  was  remarkable.  A bullet  passed  through 
his  hair,  two  others  struck  the  canoe  as  he  was  stepping  into  it,  and  a stake 
prevented  another  from  piercing  his  breast.  Not  much  can  be  said  in  praise 


SUCCESS  OF  PHILIP. 


21 


of  the  Wampanoag  marksmanship  displayed  on  this  occasion,  for,  after  six 
hours’  fighting,  not  a single  soldier  was  killed. 

Captain  Fuller  and  his  little  band  had  an  escape  equally  narrow.  Find- 
ing themselves  overwhelmed  by  Indians,  they  skurried  into  the  old  house, 
near  the  water’s  edge,  where  they  maintained  themselves  until  taken  off  by 
boats. 

In  the  latter  part  of  July,  Philip  was  located  with  his  warriors  in  a 
large  swamp  near  Taunton  River.  By  this  time  the  English  were  so  pow- 
erful that  they  were  able  almost  entirely  to  surround  the  swamp,  and  felt 
certain  of  bagging  the  leader.  Catching  sight  of  several  of  the  Indians,  the 
English  charged,  and,  as  might  have 
been  anticipated,  were  quickly  drawn 
into  ambush.  In  the  gloom  of  early 
evening,  friends  could  not  be  distin- 
guished from  foes,  and  there  was  reason 
to  believe  that  more  than  one  white 
man  was  shot  down  by  his  own  people. 

A hasty  retreat  was  ordered,  and  the 
English  extricated  themselves  with  bet- 
ter success  than  they  had  reason  to 
hope. 

The  belief  was  so  strong  that  Philip 
was  entrapped  beyond  the  chance  of 
escape  that  most  of  the  troops  with- 
drew, leaving  a small  force  to  starve 
out  the  chieftain.  The  absurdity  of 
erecting  a fort  in  this  place  was  aptly 

described  by  Church,  who  said,  “ You  are  building  a fort  for  nothing  to 
cover  the  people  from  nobody.” 

After  being  thus  guarded  for  thirteen  days,  Philip,  having  gathered 
enough  canoes  for  his  purpose,  quietly  withdrew  into  the  country  along  the 
Connecticut  River.  On  his  way  he  was  attacked  by  a party  of  Indians 
friendly  to  the  whites,  and  lost  some  of  his  best  men. 

Securing  a good  position  for  annoying  the  back  settlements  of  Massa- 
chusetts, the  chief  went  to  work  with  his  usual  vigor.  He  attacked  the 
people  at  Mendon  while  at  work  in  the  fields,  and  shot  five.  There  was  no 
doubt,  now,  that  the  Nipmuck  Indians  were  making  ready  to  join  Philip. 
They  lived  on  the  northern  tributaries  of  the  Thames,  and  Captains  Edward 
Hutchinson  and  Wheeler,  with  twenty  mounted  men  and  three  Christian 
Indians,  as  guides  and  interpreters,  were  sent  to  hold  a conference  with  the 
savages.  It  had  been  agreed  by  the  suspected  sachems  to  meet  the  whites 
at  an  appointed  place,  about  three  miles  from  Brookfield. 


KING  PHILIP  S ARMS. 


22 


ATTACK  ON  BROOKFIELD. 


Upon  reaching  the  spot  no  Indians  were  visible,  and  a consultation 
was  held  as  to  whether  they  should  go  any  farther.  The  Brookfield  people 
were  so  sure  of  the  comity  of  the  Nipmucks  that  they  prevailed,  and  it  was 
decided  to  advance  to  a point  where  there  was  reason  to  believe  the  Indi- 
ans were  gathered.  While  on  their  way  thither  they  were  ambushed  by  a 
large  war  party,  who  killed  eight  and  mortally  wounded  three.  Among  the 
latter  was  Captain  Hutchinson,  who,  though  carried  off,  died  a few  days 
later. 

A son  of  Captain  Wheelerdid  a heroic  thing  in  this  affray.  Shot  through 
the  arm  himself,  he  saw  his  father’s  horse  fall  dead,  while  the  parent  dropped 
helpless,  with  a bullet  through  his  body.  The  youth  sprang  from  his  own 
horse,  helped  his  father  up  in  front  of  him,  and  carried  him  safely  away,  the 
survivors,  after  some  more  hard  fighting, ’succeeding  in  reaching  Brookfield. 

The  three  Christian  Indians  fought  well  and  saved  the  lives  of  the 
whole  party,  for  it  was  the  guidance  of  two  of  them,  through  a path  unknown 
to  the  whites,  that  took  them  to  Brookfield.  The  other  ally  fell  into  the 
hands  of  the  Wampanoags.  The  two  were  so  badly  treated  afterward  by 
the  whites,  that  they  were  forced  to  fly  to  Philip  for  protection.  One  was 
killed  in  battle,  and  the  other,  being  taken  prisoner,  was  sold  by  his  captors 
as  a slave  and  sent  to  Jamaica.  Through  the  intercession  of  Eliot,  the 
“ Indian  apostle,”  he  was  finally  allowed  to  return.  The  one  taken  prisoner 
during  the  fight  near  Brookfield  escaped,  and  afterward  did  good  service 
for  the  pioneers. 

The  retreat  to  Brookfield  was  a flight,  with  the  ferocious  warriors  on 
the  heels  of  the  fugitives.  The  latter  shouted  the  alarm,  and  they  and  the 
inhabitants,  to  the  number  of  four-score,  swarmed  into  the  garrison  house, 
catching  up  their  guns  and  children,  and  having  barely  time  to  close  the 
doors  against  their  assailants. 

Every  house  in  Brookfield  was  burned,  excepting  the  one  in  which  the 
inhabitants  and  a few  soldiers  had  taken  refuge.  The  first  volley  fired  by 
the  Wampanoags  fatally  wounded  a white  man.  Another  was  captured  by 
the  savages,  who  cut  off  his  head,  and  kicked  it  hither  and  thither,  like  a 
football.  Tiring  of  this  horrible  sport,  they  stuck  it  on  a pole,  and  set  it  up 
in  front  of  his  own  home. 

The  defenders  did  not  need  such  incentives  to  make  them  fight  to  the 
last.  Every  now  and  then  a dusky  miscreant  would  attempt  to  steal  up  to 
the  garrison  house  with  a torch,  but  inevitably  he  was  riddled  with  rifle 
balls  before  he  could  accomplish  anything. 

Believing  that  they  were  doomed,  unless  they  could  secure  help,  the 
defenders  twice  attempted  to  send  out  a runner,  but  he  was  detected  in 
both  instances,  and  was  barely  able  to  get  back  in  time  to  save  himself. 
The  Indians  did  not  relax  their  efforts  to  burn  the  structure.  Firebrands 


'V  *'L 


ATTACK  ON  BROOKFIELD, 


■JLtihrt'i 
Of  IH£ 
WRHVPRSiry  OF  u nmis 


A PROVIDENTIAL  DELIVERANCE.  2$ 

were  placed  on  the  ends  of  long  poles,  and  shots  were  continually  sent  be- 
tween the  crevices  of  the  logs. 

The  defenders  were  equally  vigilant.  While  the  worn-out  children 
slept,  the  mothers  peered  through  the  openings,  helped  to  load  the  guns, 
passed  the  ammunition,  and  gave  all  the  aid  they  could.  Finding  the 
building  could  not  be  fired  in  the  usual  way,  the  savages  tied  burning  tow  to 
arrows,  and  launched  them  against  the  sides  and  roof,  but  the  little  twists 
of  fire  died  out  without  igniting  the  wood. 

At  midnight  the  full  moon  rose  above  the  forest  and  revealed  a terri- 
fying situation.  The  Nipmucks,  during  the  darkness,  had  heaped  a large 
pile  of  combustible  stuff  against  the  corner  of  the  building,  which  they 
ignited.  Under  the  fire  of  the  best  marksmen  in  the  structure,  several 
settlers  dashed  out  and  scattered  the  blazing  stuff. 

This  was  repeated  twice,  and  during  the  flurry  one  of  the  fleetest  of 
the  defenders  managed  to  reach  the  trees  unobserved,  and  was  off,  like  a 
deer,  in  quest  of  help.  He  had  a long  way  to  go,  and  it  was  not  to  be 
believed  that  the  settlers  could  hold  out  until  his  return. 

The  siege  and  defense  of  this  house  was  one  of  the  most  remarkable 
incidents  of  King  Philip’s  war.  The  attack  continued  through  the  suc- 
ceeding day  and  night.  There  were  times  when  the  air  was  illuminated  with 
flaming  arrows,  which,  curving  gracefully  over  in  the  darkness,  buried  them- 
selves, with  a distinct  thud,  in  the  timbers  of  the  roof.  Holes  were  cut 
through,  and  water  dashed  upon  the  fire  thus  kindled,  this  being  done  again 
and  again,  until  it  seemed  one  party  or  the  other  must  tire  out. 

On  the  third  day  all  believed  the  end  was  at  hand.  A wagon  was 
piled  high  with  hemp,  flax,  hay,  and  dry  wood,  set  fire,  and  then,  when 
fully  ablaze,  run  against  the  building.  There  was  no  checking  this  minia- 
ture conflagration,  and  the  bravest  heart  was  in  despair. 

But,  as  if  the  day  of  miracles  was  not  past,  a brisk  shower  of  rain 
descended,  not  only  putting  out  the  fire,  but  so  thoroughly  wetting  the 
material  that  it  was  impossible  to  rekindle  it. 

Meanwhile  the  swift-footed  runner  did  his  duty  well.  Near  Lancaster 
he  came  upon  a force  of  about  fifty  men  under  the  command  of  Major 
Williard,  a veteran  seventy  years  old.  The  road  was  long  and  rough  to 
Brookfield,  but  they  rode  thither  like  a whirlwind,  and,  dashing  into  the 
town,  assailed  the  Nipmucks  with  such  fury  that  they  were  scattered  right 
and  left.  In  a short  time  not  a live  one  was  in  sight.  The  number  killed 
by  the  major,  added  to  those  that  had  previously  fallen,  was  eighty. 


CHAPTER  V. 


KING  PHILIP’S  WAR  (CONCLUDED) — THE  ATTACK  ON  HADLEY — BURNING 
OF  DEERFIELD — THE  FIGHT  AT  BLOODY  BROOK— DEFEAT  OF  THE 
NARRAGANSETTS— THE  VICTORY  AND  DEFEAT  AT  TURNER’S  FALLS — 
DEATH  OF  KING  PHILIP — THE  WAR  IN  NEW  HAMPSHIRE — DEATH 
OF  MAJOR  WALDRON — EXPLOIT  OF  MRS.  DUNSTON — MEMORIAL  HALL 
IN  DEERFIELD,  MASS. 

KING  PHILIP  was  now  fairly  launched  upon  his  war,  and  he  pushed 
it  with  furious  vigor.  His  emissaries  entered  the  Connecticut  Valley, 
and,  after  a time,  succeeded  in  persuading  the  Christian  Indians  to  join  him. 
The  flames  of  war  sprang  up  everywhere,  and  some  of  the  most  thrilling 
incidents  in  the  history  of  our  country  took  place  during  its  continuance. 

The  men  who  walked  to  church  on  Sundays  carried  their  loaded  mus- 
kets with  them.  They  were  stacked  outside  the  door,  and  a sentinel  paced 
to  and  fro  while  the  services  were  going  on.  Perhaps  the  good  minister 
was  no  more  than  fairly  started  upon  his  sermon  of  three  or  four  hours’ 
length,  when  the  sharp  crack  of  the  gun  outside,  or  the  rattling  fire  of  the 
red  men,  stealing  into  town,  abruptly  ended  the  discourse  and  brought 
the  worshipers  scrambling  out  of  doors  for  their  weapons,  the  minister 
probably  in  the  lead. 

It  was  such  an  attack  as  this  that  was  made  at  Hadley  on  fast  day. 
The  assault  was  so  fierce  that  the  men  were  driven  into  the  meeting  house, 
when,  at  the  moment  that  everything  seemed  lost,  a stranger  suddenly 
appeared  among  the  terrified  people.  He  was  tall  and  soldierly  looking, 
with  a long  gray  beard,  and  the  manner  in  which  he  handled  his  sword  and 
conducted  himself  proved  that  it  was  not  the  first  time  he  had  engaged  in 
battle.  Rushing  to  the  head  of  the  men,  he  beckoned  them  to  follow,  and 
led  the  attack  with  such  skill  that  the  Indians  vanished  in  hot  haste. 
Then  the  stranger  disappeared  with  equal  and  more  mysterious  suddenness. 

This  is  the  legend  that  has  come  down  to  us  through  more  than  two 
centuries.  Many  regarded  the  stranger  with  susperstitious  awe-,  but  history 
records  that  he  was  no  less  a personage  than  Colonel  Goffe,  the  regicide, 
who  had  escaped  from  England  and  was  in  hiding  in  the  colonies,  at  the 
house  of  a Mr.  Russell  at  Hadley. 

On  the  same  day  that  Hadley  was  attacked,  a number  of  dwellings  and 
barns  were  burned  at  Deerfield,  and,  some  weeks  later,  the  block  house  at 

26 


ATTACK  ON  THE  NARRAGANSETT  FORT. 


27 

Nortlifield  was  besieged  and  a dozen  men  killed.  While  Captain  Beers  and 
thirty  men  were  hurrying  to  its  relief,  they  were  ambushed  and  lost  twenty 
killed,  including  Captain  Beers.  Deerfield  received  a second  attack,  while 
the  people  were  on  their  way  to  church.  The  farmers  fled  in  such  affright 
that  they  left  a large  quantity  of  grain  partly  threshed.  To  save  it  from 
the  Indians,  Captain  Lathrop  and  eighty  men  of  Ipswich  were  sent  with 
eighteen  wagons  and  teamsters  to  finish  the  threshing  and  to  bring  away 
the  product.  They  completed  the  task  and  started  on  their  return. 

The  weather  was  warm,  and  they  halted  in  the  forenoon,  near  a grove, 
through  which  meandered  a small  brook.  The  shade  was  inviting  and 
the  abundant  grapes  tempted  the  men  to  gather  them.  While  thus  occu- 
pied, with  no  thought  of  danger,  seven  hundred  Indians,  that  had  been 
stealthily  following  their  trail  all  night,  attacked  them  with  resistless  fero- 
city. Captain  Lathrop  and  all  his  men,  except  seven,  were  killed.  Cap- 
tain Mosely,  who  had  a small  force  at  Deerfield,  heard  the  firing,  and,  know- 
ing what  it  meant,  made  haste  thither.  He  came  upon  the  Indians  as  they 
were  scalping  the  dead.  He  charged  them,  and  the  fight  continued  until 
dark,  when,  receiving  re-enforcements,  Mosely  drove  off  the  Indians. 

Doubtless  the  little  brook  ran  red  that  day,  for  its  clear  waters  were 
dyed  by  the  life  current  of  the  fighters,  and  ever  since  that  awful  fight, 
hundreds  of  years  ago,  it  has  borne  the  name  of  Bloody  Brook. 

By  this  time  the  truth  was  manifest  to  all  : the  war  could  be  ended 
only  by  a decisive  campaign.  The  powerful  Narragansetts  had  become  the 
allies  of  Philip,  and  it  was  absolutely  necessary  that  all  the  New  England 
colonies  should  join  in  the  attempt  to  crush  the  mighty  leader  and  his  dusky 
hosts.  So  it  was  that  Massachusetts  furnished  520  men,  Plymouth  159,  and 
Connecticut  300.  One  hundred  and  fifty  Mohicans  joined  this  force,  which 
was  commanded  by  Governor  Josiah  Winslow  of  Plymouth. 

This  was  a strong  body  for  colonial  times,  but  no  more  than  was 
needed,  if  indeed  it  was  enough.  A prisoner  told  Winslow  that  35CO 
Narragansetts  were  gathered  in  their  fort  at  Kingston,  R.  I.  This  defense 
was  extensive  enough  to  cover  several  acres  and  stood  on  high  ground,  sur- 
rounded by  a swamp.  Every  side  was  protected  by  strong  palisades,  ham- 
mered deep  into  the  ground.  The  single  entrance  to  the  fort  was  over  a 
bridge  of  logs  roughly  thrown  together.  Few  finer  Indian  strongholds 
have  ever  been  known  in  this  country 

The  lusty  New  Englanders,  tramping  through  the  deep  snow,  appeared 
before  this  fort,  December  19,  1675.  Halting  only  long  enough  to  learn 
their  bearings,  they  attacked  with  all  possible  fury.  The  Massachusetts 
men  were  in  advance  and  received  such  a hot  reception  that  they  were 
driven  back.  A large  number  of  soldiers  fell,  besides  six  captains.  The 
veteran  Church  assailed  the  rear  of  the  fort,  which  was  slightly  weaker  than 


28 


CAPTAIN  TURNER’S  EXPEDITION. 


elsewhere,  with  such  energy  that  he  forced  an  entrance.  He  was  shot  three 
times,  but  valiantly  led  the  way  into  the  inclosure.  He  opposed  the  burn- 
ing of  the  wigwams,  which  were  filled  with  corn,  but  in  no  other  way  could 
the  Indians  be  routed,  so  the  torch  was  applied.  There  were  six  hundred 
of  them,  and  in  a few  minutes  they  were  all  ablaze. 

J In  the  frightful  flurry  no  one  noticed  Captain  Samuel  Hall,  of  Fair- 
^neld,  who  lay  bleeding  in  the  snow,  shot  through  both  thighs,  but,  when  the 
flames  scorched  him,  he  struggled  to  his  feet  and  cut  his  way  out  of  the 
inclosure.  The  Narragansetts  had  the  alternative  of  being  burned  alive  or  of 
flight,  and  they  swarmed  over  the  palisades  and  struggled  through  the  en- 
trance. They  fought  with  great  valor  on  reaching  the  outside,  and  it  was 
®nly  after  a most  determined  struggle  that  they  were  driven  through  the 
swamp  and  into  the  open  country. 

This  was  a great  Indian  battle  for  those  times.  Eighty  of  the  whites 
were  killed,  and  about  double  that  number  wounded.  The  Indians  lost 
six  or  seven  hundred,  including  a score  of  chiefs.  The  weather  was  of 
Arctic  severity,  the  provisions  exhausted,  and  the  sufferings  of  the  troops 
were  so  great  on  their  return  that  many  perished  by  the  way. 

It  will  be  supposed  that  such  a crushing  victory  ended  the  war. 
Undoubtedly  it  would  have  done  so  had  King  Philip  been  among  those 
slain.  But  he  was  very  much  alive,  and  continued  his  raids  in  the  interior 
of  Massachusetts.  Lancaster  was  attacked  by  the  Wachusett  Indians  in 
February,  and  among  the  prisoners  taken  away  by  the  savages  was  Mrs 
Rowlandson,  wife  of  the  minister,  and  their  little  girl,  only  six  years  old. 

During  the  attack  the  mother  and  child  were  wounded  by  the  same 
bullet.  The  mother  carried  the  little  one  in  her  arms  for  nine  days  until 
it  died.  The  parent  remained  a captive  for  three  months,  when  she  was 
ransomed  for  twenty  pounds. 

The  defiant  confidence  of  the  Indians  was  shown  by  their  action  in 
taking  possession  of  the  deserted  fields  at  Deerfield  and  planting  them. 
Learning  of  this,  Captain  Turner,  of  Boston,  hurriedly  gathered  a hundred 
troopers,  and,  riding  hard  to  the  place,  attacked  it  at  daylight,  May  io. 
The  Indians  were  so  surprised  that  many  forgot  to  take  their  paddles  when 
they  ran  for  their  canoes.  As  a consequence  they  were  carried  over  the 
falls.  So  unrelenting  was  the  assault  and  pursuit  that  it  is  believed 
three  hundred  of  the  savages  were  slain,  the  whites  losing  but  a single 
man. 

But  Captain  Turner  made  the  mistake  that  had  been  made  scores  of 
times  before,  and  has  been  made  hundreds  of  times  since.  A large  party 
of  Indians  in  the  neighborhood  heard  the  firing  and  hastened  to  the  spot. 
Captain  Turner  was  surprised  in  turn,  and  the  rumor  that  Philip  himself 
was  among  the  assailants  threw  the  whites  into  such  a panic  that  they 


A 


DEATH  OF  PHILIP.  29 

became  easy  victims  to  the  atrocity  of  the  Indians.  Captain  Turner  and  a 
third  of  his  men  were  killed. 

Philip’s  attack  on  Hadley  was  defeated,  as  was  a second  attack  made 
by  the  chieftain.  Massachusetts  passed  laws  for  the  impressment  of  soldiers, 
forbade  all  trade  with  the  Indians,  and  sternly  enforced  such  severe 
measures  that  the  scene  of  hostilities  shifted  to  the  south,  and  the  neigh- 
boring settlements  in  Connecticut  and  Rhode  Island  were  thrown  into  a 
panic. 

The  intrepid  Church,  having  recovered  from  his  severe  wounds,  again 
took  the  field  and  did  excellent  service.  On  the  1st  of  August,  he  swooped 
down  on  the  chieftain’s  headquarters,  killed  and  captured  one  hundred  and 
thirty,  and  came  within  a hair  of  securing  the  leader  himself.  He  fled  in 
such  haste  that  he  left  all  his  wampum  behind.  Soon  after  Church  made 
captives  of  Philip’s  son  and  wife.  Sad  to  say,  this  youth  was  afterward  sold 
into  slavery.  In  this,  however,  the  lad  only  shared  the  fate  of  many  of  his 
fellow-prisoners. 

For  a time  it  was  impossible  to  run  Philip  down.  He  cut  off  his  long 
black  hair,  which  doubtless  saved  him  from  recognition  and  death  more 
than  once.  His  uncle  was  shot  by  his  side,  when,  had  the  chieftain’s  iden- 
tity been  suspected,  he  would  have  received  the  bullet.  As  his  fortunes 
waned,  his  followers  fell  away  from  him,  until  at  last  he  became  a fugitive, 
flitting  from  place  to  place,  ever  on  the  alert  to  escape  the  bloodhounds  on 
his  trail.  One  of  his  warriors  approached  him  with  the  advice  to  surrender, 
but  Philip  gave  him  scarce  time  to  make  his  errand  known  when  he  brained 
him.  The  brother  of  the  victim,  knowing  he  was  in  danger  of  sharing 
the  same  fate,  made  his  way  to  Captain  Church,  told  him  where  Philip  was 
hidden,  and  offered  to  guide  him  to  the  spot. 

Early  on  the  morning  of  August  12,  Church  arrived  at  the  swamp 
where  Philip  was  encamped,  and,  before  the  chieftain  knew  of  his  danger, 
the  place  was  surrounded.  Only  one  small  avenue  was  left  unguarded. 
Church  ordered  Captain  Roger  Golden  to  rush  into  the  swamp  and  fall  upon 
Philip’s  camp.  Before  he  could  reach  the  spot,  Philip  bounded  to  his  feet 
and  was  off. 

Running  with  all  speed,  he  emerged  at  a point  where  an  Englishman 
and  Indian  were  waiting  for  him.  Bringing  his  gun  to  a level,  he  pulled 
the  trigger,  but  the  weapon  missed  fire.  Alderman,  the  Indian,  raised  his 
musket,  which  was  loaded  with  two  balls,  and  “ sent  one  through  his  heart 
and  another  not  above  two  inches  from  it.  He  fell  upon  his  face  in  the 
mud  and  water,  with  his  gun  under  him.” 

With  Philip  were  killed  five  of  his  most  trusted  followers,  one  of  them 
the  Indian  who  fired  the  first  gun  at  the  beginning  of  the  war.  The  chief 
was  beheaded  and  quartered  by  an  old  Indian  executioner  at  the  bidding 


30 


INDIAN  TROUBLES  IN  NEW  HAMPSHIRE. 


of  Church,  and  the  head,  being  sent  to  Plymouth,  was  exposed  upon  a gib- 
bet for  twenty  years.  One  of  the  hands  was  on  exhibition  for  a long  time 
in  Boston,  and  his  mangled  remains  were  denied  the  right  of  burial. 

Several  months  passed  before  hostilities  ceased.  When  the  war  was 
finally  ended,  thirteen  towns  had  been  destroyed,  more  than  five  hundred 
buildings  burned,  and  upward  of  six  hundred  lives  sacrificed.  But  the 


DEATH  OF  PHILIP. 


power  of  the  red  men  in  southern  New  England  had  received  its  death 
blow. 

Meanwhile,  New  Hampshire  did  not  escape  the  horrors  of  Indian  war. 
As  is  the  rule,  the  settlers  often  had  only  themselves  to  blame  for  the  out- 
rages they  suffered.  It  is  said  that  one  day  a party  of  sailors  were  debat- 
ing whether  an  Indian  could  swim  on  the  first  trial  as  quadrupeds  can.  To 
settle  the  dispute,  they  overturned  a canoe,  containing  the  wife  of  the  sachem 
Squando.  She  saved  the  babe  from  drowning,  but  it  afterward  died  from 
the  shock. 

When  the  settlers  around  the  Kennebec  heard  of  Philip’s  doings,  they 


TREACHEROUS  CONDUCT  OF  THE  WHITES. 


31 


ordered  the  Indians  to  surrender  their  arms.  They  refused,  and  soon  there- 
after a settler  and  his  family  at  Falmouth  were  killed.  At  Saco,  the  sav- 
ages tried  the  same  tactics  as  at  Brookfield  and  also  failed,  though  not  ex- 
actly from  the  same  cause.  T wice  they  attempted  to  back  a wagon  filled  with 
burning  combustibles  against  the  house.  The  first  time  one  of  the  wheels 
sank  into  a deep  hole,  lurching  so  heavily  that  the  Indians  pushing  it  were 
exposed  to  the  fire  of  the  defenders  and  had  to  scamper  for  their  lives. 

On  the  second  attempt  the  vehicle  was  mired,  and  the  united  efforts 
of  the  savages  could  not  move  it. 

At  Berwick  a young  servant  girl  saw  a party  of  Indians  approaching 
the  house  of  a neighbor.  She  bounded  in  ahead  of  them  and  had  barely 
time  to  slam  the  door  in  their  faces.  She  bravely  held  it  against  their 
assaults  until  the  fifteen  women  and  children  within  had  time  to  leave  by 
the  rear  and  start  for  the  blockhouse.  Just  then  the  Indians  smashed  in 
the  door,  struck  down  the  girl  with  a tomahawk,  and,  making  after  the 
fugitives,  killed  two  of  the  children  while  they  were  climbing  a fence.  We 
are  glad  to  say  that  the  servant  girl  fully  recovered  and  lived  to  be  an  old 
woman. 

Massachusetts,  knowing  the  extremity  of  New  Hampshire’s  peril,  sent 
a hundred  and  thirty  men  to  Dover  in  the  summer  of  1676  as  a reinforce- 
ment to  Major  Waldron,  who  commanded  there.  Having  received  orders 
to  arrest  every  Indian  guilty  of  murder,  Waldron  invited  all  those  willing 
to  make  peace  to  visit  him  under  a flag  of  truce.  A large  number  accepted 
the  invitation.  When  they  came  together,  the  Massachusetts  soldiers  rec- 
ognized several  of  Philip’s  warriors  among  them.  They  insisted  that  the 
whole  party  should  be  taken  into  custody.  Waldron  was  willing,  but  thought 
bloodshed  could  be  saved  by  strategy.  He  invited  them  to  take  part  in  a 
sham  battle.  By  this  means  he  entrapped  two  hundred.  This  treachery 
was  not  only  without  palliation,  but  was  rendered  the  more  heinous  be- 
cause the  innocent  were  captured  with  the  guilty  and  sent  to  Boston, 
where  they  were  sold  as  slaves  and  sent  abroad. 

The  other  savages  were  incensed  and  retaliated  with  characteristic 
ferocity.  Several  attempts  were  made  to  chastise  the  savages,  but  nothing 
was  accomplished,  and  desultory  fighting  continued  a long  time.  The 
people  of  Portsmouth  were  so  alarmed  that  the  government  sent  Major 
Waldron  with  a strong  force  of  English  and  Natick  Indians  to  the  Kenne- 
bec and  Pemaquid.  During  an  interview  with  some  hostiles  the  soldiers 
observed  that  they  had  firearms  with  them,  contrary  to  agreement.  This 
precipitated  a wrangle,  in  which  several  warriors  were  killed,  and  fighting 
went  on  with  the  old  time  vigor. 

An  attack  on  Black  Point  was  repulsed,  but  a few  days  later  a party 
of  soldiers  were  ambushed  at  the  same  place  and  sixteen  of  them  killed. 


32 


INDIAN  STRATEGY. 


'Nearly  every  night  the  skies  were  lit  up  by  the  flames  from  the  burning 
cabins  of  the  settlers. 

The  general  court  of  Massachusetts  opened  a fire  in  the  rear  of  their 
dusky  foes,  by  sending  agents  among  the  Mohawks  to  kindle  their  enmity 
against  their  old  foes.  The  mission  was  quite  successful,  and  the  hostiles 
found  they  had  their  hands  more  than  full  in  fighting  the  Iroquois  and 
white  people  at  the  same  time. 

In  April,  1678,  a treaty  of  peace  was  made,  which  it  was  hoped  would 
be  permanent,  inasmuch  as  the  leading  chiefs  took  part,  but  trouble  came 
from  an  unexpected  quarter.  A number  of  Indians  whom  Major  Waldron 
had  treacherously  seized  and  sent  to  Boston  to  be  made  slaves,  escaped 
and  returned.  They  quickly  made  trouble. 

In  the  little  town  of  Dover  were  five  blockhouses,  inclosed  by  high 

guards  were  careless,  and 
when  someone  told  Major 
Waldron  that  the  Indians 
were  acting  suspiciously, 
he  laughed  and  advised 
his  friends  to  feel  no 
alarm. 

On  the  night  of  June 
27,  ten  squaws  presented 
themselves  in  couples,  at 
each  of  the  block  houses, 
and  asked  the  privilege  of 
staying  all  night.  The 
only  thing  noticeable  in 
this  was  that  the  different 
requests  were  made  at 
the  same  time.  It  was  refused  at  one  place,  but  the  squaws  were 
allowed  to  enter  the  dwelling  of  Major  Waldron  under  the  escort 
of  a chief. 

The  officer  was  in  a gracious  mood,  and  explained  to  the  women  how 
to  undo  the  fastenings  of  the  gates  in  case  they  should  want  to  go  outside 
during  the  night.  Then  he  bade  them  good-evening  and  withdrew  to  his 
own  dwelling. 

Acting  as  though  there  was  nothing  on  their  minds,  the  squaws  did 
not  retire;  but  remained  on  watch  until  near  midnight.  At  that  hour  they 
heard  a slight  noise  outside.  It  was  the  signal  agreed  upon.  Silently  and 
swiftly  they  withdrew  the  bars  of  the  gate,  and  a number  of  shadowy  figures 
glided  into  the  dwelling.  They  were  after  Major  Waldron,  and  it  took  but 
a short  time  to  find  him. 


palisades  and  capable  of  strong  defense.  The 


THE  TREACHEROUS  ENTRANCE. 


EXPLOIT  OF  MR.  DUNSTON. 


31 


The  veteran  was  eighty  years  old,  but  the  moment  he  heard  the  intru- 
ders in  his  apartment,  he  leaped  to  his  feet,  caught  up  his  sword  and  drove 
them  out.  He  was  knocked  senseless  a moment  later  by  the  blow  from  a. 
tomahawk.  Then,  with  tantalizing  reproaches,  they  mangled  his  body* 
pillaged  and  burned  the  house.  In  another  dwelling  all  the  men  were 
killed,  the  women  set  apart  for  captivity,  and  the  house  also  given  to  the 
flames.  A dog  gave  the  alarm  at  a third,  just  in  time  for  the  soldiers 
to  rally  and  drive  back  the  Indians.  The  fourth  was  pillaged.  Twenty- 
three  in  all  were  killed  and  twenty-nine  taken  to  Canada  and  sold  to  the 
French. 

Captain  Church  was  sent  to  New  Hampshire  and  did  as  effective 
service  as  in  Massachusetts,  but  it  was  not  until  peace  was  made  between 
the  French  and  English  that  the  former  restrained  the  savages  from 
hostilities. 

Where  the  hatred  between  the  two  races  was  so  bitter  and  the  was 
continued  so  long,  strange  escapes  and  thrilling  adventures  were  almost 
without  number.  These  will  be  found  embalmed  in  the  local  histories  and 
traditions  as  they  have  been  handed  down  for  more  than  two  centuries 
from  those  who  were  actors  in  the  stirring  times. 

One  of  the  strangest  experiences  was  that  which  befell  Mrs.  Dunston^ 
near  the  close  of  King  Philip’s  war.  Her  husband  was  working  in  the  field 
near  his  home  at  Haverhill,  when  he  observed  a party  of  Indians  approach- 
ing his  house.  Leaping  upon  his  horse,  he  put  him  to  a dead  run  and 
shouted  to  his  family  to  flee  to  the  nearest  garrison.  His  wife  was  lying  m 
bed  with  an  infant  but  a week  old,  and  was  attended  by  a nurse,  while 
seven  children  were  playing  about  the  house.  They  scattered  like  a covey 
of  quail  for  the  woods.  The  husband  intended  to  lift  his  wife  upon  the 
horse  with  him,  but  the  Indians  were  too  close, and  seeing  no  hope  of  help- 
ing her,  he  galloped  after  his  children,  calling  on  them  to  run  as  fast  as 
they  could  through  the  briers  and  undergrowth.  The  terrified  ones  obeyed, 
the  elder  ones  helping  the  younger,  who  toddled  bravely  forward,  while  the 
father  kept  sharp  watch  of  the  Indians. 

They  were  after  him  the  next  moment,  when  he  wheeled  and  leveled 
his  rifle  at  the  foremost.  Instantly  they  dodged  behind  the  trees  to  screen 
themselves.  Dunston  could  have  brought  one  of  them  down,  but  he  dared 
not  fire,  since  they  would  have  been  upon  him  before  he  could  reload  his 
weapon. 

All  the  time  he  kept  urging  his  children  to  go  faster,  when  the  little 
ones  were  doing  their  utmost.  Waiting  until  they  had  advanced  a few 
rods,  he  started  his  horse  after  them.  The  Indians  whisked  from  shelter 
and  were  upon  them  again.  Up  went  the  silent  rifle  as  before,  and  agaiip 
they  dodged  to  cover. 


34 


A STRANGE  LEGEND. 


This  curious  performance  was  repeated  several  times,  but  fortunately 
the  nearest  garrison  was  not  far,  and  all  the  children  reached  there  in  safety, 
where  they  were  soon  joined  by  their  father. 

The  Indians  now  turned  back  and  wreaked  their  vengeance  on  the 
household  that  was  left.  The  infant  was  killed  at  the  side  of  the  mother, 
the  house  was  burned,  and  Mrs.  Dunston,  her  nurse,  and  a boy  were  made 
captives.  To  escape  pursuit,  the  hapless  prisoners  were  forced  to  travel  as 
fast  as  they  could,  their  captors  intending  to  take  them  to  a rendezvous 
beyond  Penacook  and  there  compel  them  to  run  the  gauntlet. 

Mrs.  Dunston  was  a worthy  mate  for  a pioneer.  She  told  her  com- 
panions that  if  the  chance  presented  itself,  she  meant  to  kill  her  captors. 
Her  scheme  was  a wild  one,  but  they  favored  it,  since  certain  death  awaited 
them  in  running  the  gaunlet.  She  persuaded  the  boy  to  ask  an  Indian  to 
explain  how  his  people  were  able  to  kill  a foe  at  a single  blow.  The  war- 
rior had  no  more  sense  than  to  teach  the  art,  giving  instruction  at  the  same 
time  in  the  right  way  of  taking  a scalp. 

The  night  was  far  along,  when  Mrs.  Dunston  stealthily  arose  and 
signified  to  her  wakeful  companions  to  do  the  same.  The  Indians  felt  so 
secure  that  they  had  stationed  no  sentinels  and  all  were  asleep.  It  is  said 
that  every  one  of  the  ten  Indians  was  killed  as  he  lay  sunk  in  slumber  on 
the  ground.  The  memory  of  their  brutality  to  her  infant  so  incensed  the 
mother  that,  when  she  saw  them  all  dead,  she  deliberately  scalped  them. 
Then  she  and  her  companions  hurriedly  made  their  way  to  the  Merrimac, 
where  they  entered  a canoe  and  floated  down  to  the  settlements,  and  then 
were  beyond  danger. 

The  exploit  of  Mrs,  Dunston  and  her  friends  made  them  famous.  It 
excited  so  much  admiration  that  the  general  assembly  voted  them  fifty 
pounds,  and  many  persons  sent  them  presents.* 

Memorial  Hall,  in  the  little  town  of  Deerfield,  Mass.,  in  the  Connecticut 
Valley,  contains  hundreds  of  interesting  relics  of  the  perilous  early  days  of 
its  history.  In  1704  it  was  the  frontier  town  on  the  Connecticut  River. 
In  the  early  part  of  that  year  two  hundred  French  and  one  hundred  and 
forty-two  Indians  were  sent  from  Canada  against  the  place.  The  weather 
was  frightfully  cold,  and  snow  covered  the  ground  to  the  depth  of  several 
feet,  but  the  formidable  force  reached  the  elevated  pine  woods,  now  known 
as  Petty’s  Plain,  two  miles  to  the  north,  on  the  evening  of  February  29,  1704. 
There  they  hid  themselves  in  the  forest  until  midnight.  It  was  found  that 
the  crust  on  the  snow  was  strong  enough  to  bear  their  weight,  and,  laying 

* This  is  the  legend  that  comes  down  to  us,  wrapped  in  the  mold  of  two  centuries.  To  a person, 
however,  in  the  possession  of  his  senses,  the  statement  that  ten  Indian  warriors  lay  quiescent,  each 
awaiting  his  turn,  while  two  women  and  a boy  made  the  circuit  and  chopped  them  to  death,  is 
incredible.  We  would  like  to  believe  the  story,  but  it  is  impossible,  even  with  the  termination  of 
the  lady  returning  to  scalp  the  whole  ten,  by  way  of  an  ornamental  winding  up  of  the  tragedy. 


ATTACK  ON  DEERFIELD. 


35 


aside  their  snow-shoes  and  packs,  they  pushed  on,  crossing  the  Deerfield 
meadows  a little  before  daylight.  They  were  afraid  their  approach  would 
be  heard,  and  with  Indian  cunning,  they  adopted  the  artifice  of  resting  a 

great  swiftness.  This  was 
done  to  imitate  the  sough- 
ing of  the  wind. 

But  there  was  no  ne- 
cessity for  such  caution. 
Everybody  in  Deerfield, 
including  the  sentinel,  was 
sound  asleep.  The  snow 
was  drifted  so  deep  at  the 
northwest  corner  that  the 
phantom-like  figures 
swarmed  over  the  tops  of 
the  palisades,  and  quickly 
scattered  through  the  town 
to  begin  their  dreadful 
work.  Houses  were  furi- 
ously assaulted,  doors  smashed  inward,  people  dragged  from  their  beds, 
and  tomahawked  or  made  prisoners.  Hearing  the  terrible  yells,  Rev.  John 
Williams  leaped  up,  and,  grasping  a pistol,  leveled  it  at  an  Indian  as 
he  dashed  into  his  room,  and  pulled  the 
trigger.  It  missed  fire  and  he  was  instantly 
made  prisoner. 

He  was  compelled  to  dress  with  one 
arm  tied  to  his  side,  and  the  same  precaution 
was  adopted  with  his  wife  and  children. 

The  cruel  Indians  dragged  his  two  youngest 
children  to  the  door  and  tomahawked  both. 

A negro  girl  was  served  in  the  same  manner, 
and  when  it  was  found  that  Mrs.  Williams, 
because  of  recent  illness,  was  unable  to 
travel,  she,  too,  was  put  to  death. 

The  clergyman  and  his  five  children 

were  taken  to  Canada.  The  total  number 

of  Captives  carried  off  was  II2,  besides  47  Door  of  the  Indian  House  through 
....  . which  Hannah  Stebbins  was  shot 

killed.  in  the  following  April  Deerfield  in  the  attack  by  French  and  Indians 

had  only  280  inhabitants.  But,  though  in  I7°4' 

taken  utterly  by  surprise,  there  had  been  some  hard  fighting  within  the 
palisades,  where  more  than  forty  of  the  enemy  were  slain. 

The  most  imposing  dwelling  in  Deerfield  was  that  of  Captain  John 


few  minutes,  and  then  rushing  forward  with 


THE  OLD  INDIAN  HOUSE  AT  DEERFIELD,  MASS., 
TAKEN  DOWN  IN  1 848. 


RELICS  IN  THE  DEERFIELD  MUSEUM. 


36 


Sheldon,  afterward  known  as  the  Old  Indian  House.  It  was  built  in  1686, 
of  wood,  the  walls  being  lined  with  brick.  The  upper  story  projected  over 
the  lower,  and  was  pierced  with  loop-holes.  The  door  was  made  of  two- 
thicknesses  of  planks,  battened  and  held  firmly  together  by  two  courses  of 
rivets,  crossing  each  other  diagonally  about  three  inches  apart. 

This  powerful  door  resisted  the  attack  for  a long  time.  After  repeated 
efforts  the  assailants  succeeded  in  cutting  a hole  in  the  middle,  large 
enough  to  permit  them  to  shove  through  the  muzzle  of  a gun.  They  fired 
blindly  and  as  rapidly  as  the  weapons  could  be  discharged  and  with- 
drawn. Hannah  Stebbins,  who  had  been  sleeping  in  an  adjoining  room,, 
became  terrified,  and  started  from  her  bed  to  seek  refuge  elsewhere.  At 

this  moment  the  musket  was  discharged,  and  the 
bullet  passed  through  her  body  and  buried  itself 
deep  in  the  wall  beyond. 

In  the  Deerfield  Museum  may  be  seen  this 
door,  excellently  preserved,  and  showing  the  work 
of  the  tomahawks  as  distinctly  as  if  it  all  took 
place  yesterday.  Several  dark  stains  on  the 
woodwork  are  believed  to  have  been  made  by 
the  blood  of  the  captives  in  front  of  it. 

In  a small  box,  screwed  against  the  side  of 
the  door,  is  the  bullet  which  did  its  fatal  work 
nearly  two  hundred  years  ago. 

At  the  time  of  the  attack  Captain  Sheldon 
was  absent,  but  his  son  and  wife  were  sleeping 
in  one  of  the  rooms.  When  they  heard  the  yells 
of  the  assailants,  they  sprang  out  of  bed,  hastily 
donned  their  clothing,  and  leaped  out  of  the 
window'  into  the  snow.  The  husband  escaped, 
but  the  wife  sprained  her  ankle  and  was  made  prisoner. 

The  Old  Indian  House  stood  until  1848,  when  it  was  taken  apart  to 
make  room  for  a more  modern  structure.  The  savages  at  last  effected  an 
entrance,  plundered  the  building,  and  used  it  as  a depot  for  the  prisoners 
that  were  secured  during  the  attack.  Every 
other  house  within  the  palisades  was  burned. 

Captain  Sheldon  was  among  the  first  to  reach 
Deerfield  after  the  massacre  and  flight  of  the 
French  and  Indians.  He  made  several  journeys 
to  Canada  to  secure  his  children.  The  dilapidated 
snow-shoes  which  he  used  on  one  of  his  laborious 

trips  may  still  be  seen.  This  is  the  way  they  look.  Snow-shoes  worn  by  Captain 
„ . , _ . . , Sheldon  on  his  several  jour- 

Iwo  years  afterward,  fifty-seven  of  the  cap-  neys  to  Canada. 


The  bullet  that  killed  Hannah 
Stebbins  in  1704.  and  the 
powder  horn  carried  in  the 
Meadow  Fight  of  that  year. 
Carried  by  Elisha  Searle  in 
1723,  and  by  Solomon 
Searle  at  the  battle  of  Ben- 
nington, 1777. 


EUNICE  WILLIAMS. 


3 7 


tives  returned  from  Canada.  Among  them  were  Rev.  Mr.  Williams  and 
his  remaining  children,  with  the  exception  of  Eunice,  ten  years  old. 
Despite  his  utmost  efforts,  he  was  obliged  to  leave  her  behind.  As  the 
girl  grew  older  she  adopted  savage  customs  and  ways,  and  finally  married 
a warrior,  by  whom  she  had  several  children.  They  afterward  visited 
Deerfield,  dressed  in  aboriginal  costume,  and,  as  may  be  supposed,  caused 
a profound  sensation.  Despite  the  most  earnest  entreaties  of  her  relatives 
and  friends,  Eunice  refused  to  stay  with  them,  and,  returning  to  Canada 
with  her  Indian  husband,  remained  there  until  her  death. 

Fenimore  Cooper’s  touching  story,  “Wept  of  the  Wish  Ton-Wish,’' 
was  founded  on  this  incident. 

Eleazer  Williams,  believed  by  many  to  be  the  lost  dauphin  of  France,, 
(but  he  wasn’t),  was  the  grandson  of  Eunice  Williams. 

Among  the  relics,  sketched  during  a recent  hurried  visit  to  the  mu- 
seum, was  an  old-fashioned  powder  horn,  beautifully  carved,  and  suspended 
by  a string.  One  of  the  colonists  carried 
this  during  the  famous  Meadow  fight 
in  1704;  it  was  later  borne  by  Elisha 
Searle,  the  captive  of  1723,  and  did  duty 
for  Solomon  Searle  in  the  battle  of 
Bennington  in  1777. 

But  here  is  a relic  upon  which  few 
can  look  without  a moistening  of  the 
eye.  It  is  a small  shoe,  or  rather  the 
remains  of  one.  Little  Sarah  Coleman, 
a sweet  child  of  tender  years,  had  it  on  one  of  her  chubby  feet,  in  Septem- 
ber, 1676,  when  the  Indians  made  her  and  some  others  prisoners.  They 
were  the  first  party  of  English  captives  taken  to  Canada  by  the  Indians. 


Shoe  worn  by  little  Sarah  Coleman,  one 
of  the  captives  taken  from  Hatfield  to 
Canada  in  September,  1676,  that  being 
the  first  party  of  English  prisoners  carried 
to  Canada  by  Indians. 


CHAPTER  VI. 


BACON’S  REBELLION  IN  VIRGINIA,  CAUSED  BY  TROUBLES  WITH  THE 

INDIANS. 

T T was  a notable  coincidence  that  when  the  New  England  colonies  were 
fighting  and  running  King  Philip  to  earth,  Virginia  was  in  the  throes 
of  another  struggle  with  the  Indians  on  her  frontiers.  The  most  famous 
civil  war,  except  that  of  1861-1865,  known  as  Bacon’s  rebellion,  was  brought 
about  by  trouble  with  the  red  men. 

The  Indians  became  so  threatening  in  1675  that  the  forts  were  put  in 
a condition  of  defense,  and  Sir  Henry  Chiceley,  the  lieutenant-governor, 
made  his  preparations,  in  the  spring  of  that  year,  to  lead  a force  of  five 
hundred  men  into  the  country  of  the  hostiles.  Virginia  contained  forty 
thousand  inhabitants  and  was  in  a highly  prosperous  condition,  though 
there  was  deep  dissatisfaction  with  their  ruler,  the  bigoted  governor,  Sir 
William  Berkeley,  who  thanked  God  that  there  were  no  free  schools  or  print- 
ing presses  in  the  province.  From  1660  until  1676  the  Assembly  of  Vir- 
ginia prevented  the  election  of  any  new  members,  preserving  its  own  power 
of  prorogation. 

When  everything  was  ready  for  chastising  the  troublesome  Indians, 
Governor  Berkeley  sent  an  order  disbanding  the  forces.  The  settlers  were 
exasperated  to  the  verge  of  revolt,  and  openly  accused  the  governor  of 
favoring  the  savages  for  the  sake  of  the  monopoly  in  the  beaver  trade. 
The  soldiers  disbanded  and  went  to  their  homes,  knowing  that  war  was 
coming,  and  openly  declaring  that  if  Berkeley  would  not  protect  them  they 
would  protect  themselves. 

Some  time  later  a party  of  settlers,  on  their  way  to  church,  found  a 
wounded  neighbor  dying  in  front  of  his  own  door,  while  a friendly  Indian 
lay  dead  a short  distance  away.  The  white  man  lived  long  enough  to  tell 
that  a party  of  Doeg  warriors  was  the  cause  of  their  death.  The  alarmed 
settlers  spread  the  news,  and  in  a short  time  thirty  men  were  hot  on  the 
track  of  the  murderers.  Twenty  miles  above,  at  the  crossing  of  the  river, 
the  trail  divided  and  the  pursuers  separated  into  two  parties.  One  of 
them  speedily  came  in  sight  of  a Doeg  wigwam,  which  they  attacked  with 
such  impetuosity  that  eleven  Indians  were  killed.  Among  them,  doubtless, 
were  the  slayers  of  the  settler  and  friendly  Indian. 

About  this  time  the  other  company  of  whites  assailed  a wigwam  and 
slew  fourteen  of  the  inmates  before  learning  that  they  were  not  Doeg,  but 

38 


EXPEDITION  AGAINST  THE  SUSQUEHANNOCKS, 


39 


Susquehannocks.  The  white  men  went  back  to  their  homes,  and  the  Doegs, 
Susquehannocks,  Piscataways,  and  Senecas  took  the  warpath. 

The  danger  was  so  imminent  that  Virginia  and  Maryland  put  a force 
of  a thousand  men  in  the  field,  under  Major  Thomas  Truman,  of  Maryland, 
and  Colonel  John  Washington,  of  Vir- 
ginia. The  latter  was  the  great-grand- 
father of  the  Father  of  his  Country. 

This  formidable  body  surrounded  a 
strong  fort  on  the  Piscataway,  in  which 
the  Susquehan- 
nocks had  taken 
refuge  with  their 
women  and  chil- 
dren. Before  the 
attack  was  made 


THE  ATTACK  ON  THE  DOEG  WIGWAM. 


six  of  the  chiefs  were  called  out  for  a conference.  They  denied  that 
their  tribe  had  harmed  any  of  the  whites,  declaring  that  the  Senecas,  who 
had  fled  northward,  were  the  aggressors. 


40 


bacon’s  rebellion. 


Major  Truman  accepted  the  explanation,  but  the  Virginians  told  him 
he  was  too  credulous.  The  following  day  the  mangled  bodies  of  a settler 
and  his  family  were  brought  into  camp.  The  soldiers  were  so  infuriated 
that  they  seized  five  of  the  chiefs,  who  had  come  out  for  another  conference, 
and  put  them  to  death. 

This  treachery  caused  great  indignation  in  Maryland  and  Virginia. 
Truman  was  tried  by  the  legislature  of  his  province  and  found  guilty  of  the 
death  of  the  five  Indians,  contrary  to  the  laws  of  God  and  nations.  There 
is  no  record,  however,  that  he  suffered  any  punishment  therefor.  Governor 
Berkeley,  in  his  opening  address  to  the  legislature  of  Virginia,  gave  Colonel 
Washington,  who  was  a member,  a pointed  rebuke,  and  that  was  all. 

The  enraged  Indians  spread  death  and  devastation  along  the  Rappa- 
hannock, James,  and  York  rivers,  slaying  more  than  fifty  during  the  fol- 
lowing winter.  It  was  the  unexplainable  course  of  Governor  Berkeley  at 
this  crisis  which  caused  the  rebellion  in  the  province.  It  is  said  that  the 
Susquehannocks  made  overtures  for  peace,  but  he  paid  no  heed  to  them, 
and  was  equally  deaf  to  the  appeals  of  his  own  people  for  protection. 
Nathaniel  Bacon  was  a bright,  energetic  young  planter,  who  owned  several 
plantations  on  the  James.  He  was  a member  of  the  council  and  captain  of 
a company  of  the  militia.  He  disliked  Governor  Berkeley  as  much  as  the 
governor  disliked  him,  and  declared  that  if  another  settler  was  harmed  by 
the  Indians,  he  would  call  out  the  militia,  regardless  of  the  governor’s 
royal  commission. 

It  was  not  long  before  Bacon  was  given  the  chance  to  prove  his  ear- 
nestness. The  Indians  raided  one  of  his  plantations  near  the  falls  of  the 
James,  killing  a servant  and  his  overseer.  Bacon  lost  no  time  in  gathering 
a force  of  several  hundred  brave  backwoodsmen,  ready  to  follow  wherever 
he  led.  Before  setting  out  to  punish  the  hostiles,  it  is  said  Bacon  sent  a re- 
quest to  the  governor  for  a commission,  but  it  was  refused. 

Bacon  set  out,  but  had  not  gone  far  when  he  was  overtaken  by  a mes- 
senger from  the  governor  with  an  order  for  him  to  disperse  his  men  at  once. 
Bacon  read  the  proclamation  to  his  followers,  and  told  them  that  all  who 
chose  to  go  back  were  free  to  do  so.  They  were  so  frightened  that  when 
the  flurry  was  over  Bacon  found  himself  at  the  head  of  only  fifty-seven  men. 

Learning  that  these  “ rebels  ” were  on  their  way  to  the  Indian  country, 
Berkeley  summoned  a troop  of  horse  and  set  out  in  pursuit  of  them.  Be- 
fore he  came  up  with  the  daring  company,  an  insurrection  broke  out  among 
the  planters  to  the  south.  Thereupon  the  governor  concluded  to  leave 
Bacon  atone  for  the  time,  and  give  his  attention  to  matters  nearer  home. 
Upon  reaching  Jamestown,  everything  was  so  topsy-turvy  that  he  was 
obliged  to  yield  to  the  demands  of  the  citizens  and  grant  the  election  which 
had  been  denied  them  for  many  years. 


BURNING  OF  JAMESTOWN. 


4 


Meanwhile,  Bacon  was  striking  effective  blows  against  the  Indians.  He 


captured  and  burned  the  Susquehannock  fort,  killing  one  hundred  and  fifty 
warriors,  annihilating  that  tribe  almost  as  utterly  as  the  Pequots  were 
wiped  out  of  existence  in  New  England.  Bacon’s  course  made  him  so  pop- 
ular that  he  was  elected  a member  of  the  new  assembly  and  'appointed 
commander-in-chief  of  all  the  military  forces  in  Virginia.  Bacon  apologized 
to  the  governor  for  taking  up  arms,  a 
thing  he  could  very  well  afford  to  do, 
since  the  object  of  such  a violation  > *r 

of  law  had  been  attained,  but  the  big- 
oted Berkeley  refused  to  sign,  his  com- 
mission, and  raised  a strong  force  to 


BURNING  OF  JAMESTOWN. 


bring  the  popular  young  planter 
to  punishment. 

It  is  not  within  our  province 
to  give  a history  of  the  civil  war 
that  followed.  During  its  progress  Jamestown  was  burned,  it  being  fired 
by  the  adherents  of  Bacon,  many  of  whom  owned  fine  homes  in  the  place, 
in  order  to  prevent  it  being  used  as  a refuge  by  Berkeley  and  his  followers. 
When  Bacon  was  on  the  verge  of  triumph  over  the  governor,  he  took  a 
fever  and  died.  Through  the  aid  of  his  royal  master  at  home,  Berkeley  was 
restored  to  power  and  brutally  revenged  himself  on  those  that  had  opposed 
him.  Twenty-two  of  the  leading  insurgents  were  hanged;  three  died  in 


42 


BERKELEY’S  CRUELTY. 


prison  and  five,  condemned  to  execution,  escaped  from  imprisonment, 
Hansford,  Milford,  and  Edmund  Cheeseman,  leading  adherents  of  Bacon, 
were  summarily  tried  by  court-martial,  insulted  in  the  grossest  manner  dur- 
ing the  proceedings,  and  all  three  hanged.  When  Drummond  was  brought 
into  the  presence  of  Berkeley,  the  governor  made  a mock  salutation,  and 
with  a grim  smile  said  : “ I am  more  pleased  to  see  you  than  any  man  in 
Virginia;  you  shall  be  hanged  in  half  an  hour.” 

Drummond’s  reply  was  calm  and  dignified.  He  was  a brave  man  and 
met  death  unflinchingly  three  hours  later.  His  widow  and  children  were 
deprived  of  their  property  and  forced  to  beg  for  bread.  Had  not  the 
remains  of  Bacon  been  secretly  buried,  they  would  have  been  publicly 
exhibited  in  chains  on  a gibbet.  Confiscations,  fines,  imprisonment,  and 
banishment  were  inflicted  at  such  a rate  that  even  the  supporters  of  Berke- 
ley were  shocked  and  protested  that  vengeance  had  gone  far  enough. 
When  King  Charles  learned  all  that  the  tyrant  had  done,  he  exclaimed : 

“ The  old  fool  has  taken  more  lives  in  that  naked  country  than  I have 
done  here  for  the  murder  of  my  father,”  and  the  king  spoke  the  tiuth. 


CHAPTER  VII. 


THE  STRUGGLE  BETWEEN  ENGLAND  AND  FRANCE  FOR  MASTERY  IN  THE 
NEW  WORLD— THE  PART  TAKEN  BY  THE  INDIANS. 

AS  the  settlement  of  America  progressed  the  possessions  and  power  of 
Spain  and  Holland  decreased,  while  those  of  England  and  France 
increased,  until,  before  the  opening  of  the  eighteenth  century,  the  two 
great  nations  became  powerful  rivals  in  the  development  of  the  New 
World.  They  were  frequently  involved  in  wars  across  the  Atlantic,  and  it 
inevitably  followed  that  their  colonies  in  this  country  were  forced  into 
hostilities  against  each  other,  and  it  was  also  equally  inevitable  that  the 
Indians  should  take  a part  in  the  fight  for  supremacy. 

In  1688  a revolution  broke  out  in  England,  and  James  II.  saved  his 
life  by  fleeing  to  France,  where  Louis  XIV.  gave  him  shelter.  The  two 
monarchs  were  Catholics,  and  Louis  pledged  himself  to  help  James  get 
back  his  throne.  Parliament,  however,  crowned  William  of  Orange,  who 
found  himself  obliged  to  fight  not  only  his  rival,  but  the  king  of  France. 
War,  therefore,  broke  out  in  1689,  and  the  colonies  were  drawn  into  it. 

The  French  showed  greater  wisdom  than  the  English,  by  cultivating 
the  friendship  of  the  Indians,  who  gave  them  great  aid  in  desolating  the 
frontier  settlements.  The  French  were  settled  in  Canada  and  along  the 
St.  Lawrence,  so  that  they  were  the  neighbors  of  the  English  in  New  York 
and  northern  New  England,  though  they  proved  anything  but  desirable 
neighbors. 

On  the  27th  of  June,  Dover,  a small  settlement  on  the  northeastern 
frontier  of  New  Hampshire,  was  attacked  by  a party  of  French  and  Indians, 
who  killed  more  than  a score  of  persons  and  carried  off  twenty-nine  cap- 
tives. Late  in  the  same  summer,  a hundred  Indians  paddled  out  of  the 
Penobscot  in  their  canoes  and  fell  upon  the  settlers  at  Pemaquid,  now 
Bremen.  The  whites  were  surprised  while  at  work  in  the  fields,  and  the 
fort,  after  a brief  siege,  was  captured,  only  a few  of  the  defenders  escaping 
to  the  woods. 

In  the  depth  of  winter  a large  force  of  French  and  Indians  set  out 
from  Montreal,  and,  pushing  southward,  crossed  the  Mohawk  and  drew 
near  Schenectady,  whose  inhabitants  had  no  suspicion  of  danger.  The 
gates  were  unguarded,  snow  men  doing  duty  as  sentinels.  In  the  depth  of 
winter,  with  the  snow  lying  heavy  on  the  ground,  surely  the  people  were 
warranted  in  believing  they  were  in  no  peril  from  the  red  men. 


43 


44 


ATTACK  ON  SCHENECTADY. 


The  enemy  lay  hidden  in  the  woods  all  day.  Then,  late  at  night, 
they  stole  out  from  the  gloom,  passed  unchallenged  through  the  gates,  and 
fell  upon  the  inhabitants  with  the  fury  of  wild  beasts.  Sixty  people  were 
tomahawked  and  scalped,  the  houses  fired,  while  those  who  were  fortunate 
enough  to  escape  the  savages  rushed  out  half-clad  into  the  snow  and 


ATTACK  ON  SCHENECTADY. 


struggled  to  Albany, 
sixteen  miles  distant. 
It  will  be  seen  how 
New  Hampshire  was  exposed  to  attacks  from  Canada.  The  province 
was  so  weak  that  it  could  offer  no  effectual  resistance  to  the  incursions  of 
her  enemies,  and,  but  for  the  help  of  New  England,  New  Hampshire 
might  have  been  wiped  out  of  existence. 

The  Colonial  Congress  of  New  York  decided  upon  an  invasion  of 


ENGLAND  AND  FRANCE  IN  THE  NEW  WORLD.  45 

Canada,  but,  although  undertaken  on  a large  scale,  it  proved  a failure,  and 
the  war  continued  in  a desultory  way  for  several  years. 

In  1694  the  village  of  Oyster  River,  now  Durham,  was  destroyed  by 
the  French  and  Indians,  and  two  years  later  Pemaquid  was  surrendered  a 
second  time  to  the  enemy.  Haverhill  was  attacked  in  the  following  March, 
and  it  was  about  this  time  that  Mrs.  Dunston,  with  her  nurse  and  a boy, 
performed  the  wonderful  exploit  which  has  already  been  related.  Finally 
the  war  was  brought  to  an  end,  in  1697,  by  the  treaty  of  Ryswick. 

The  peace  which  followed  was  a brief  one.  England,  Holland,  and 
Austria  formed  an  alliance  against  France  in  1700,  and  in  1702  Queen 
Anne’s  war  broke  out  and  lasted  eleven  years.  The  Iroquois,  or  Six 
Nations,  whose  hunting  grounds  lay  between  Canada  and  New  York,  made 
a treaty  of  neutrality  with  the  English  and  French.  The  Indians  in  Maine 
did  the  same,  but  the  French  persuaded  them  to  break  their  pledge,  and 
they  were  active  against  the  settlements.  It  was  at  this  time  that  Deer- 
field, as  told  elsewhere,  was  attacked,  and  New  Hampshire  suffered  from 
the  ferocity  of  the  red  men.  Peace  was  made  between  England  and 
France  in  1713  and  lasted  thirty-one  years. 

King  George’s  war  began  in  1744  and  continued  two  years.  Its  chief 
event  was  the  capture  of  Louisburg,  the  “ Gibraltar  of  America,”  mainly 
by  the  New  England  colonists,  who,  at  the  making  of  peace,  enjoyed  the 
pleasure  of  seeing  the  valuable  fortress  returned  to  the  possession  of  the 
French.  The  peace  which  followed  was  only  a truce.  England  and  France 
had  become  the  two  mighty  rivals  for  the  possession  of  the  New  World, 
and  the  tremendous  contest  had  to  be  waged  until  one  or  the  other  was 
vanquished. 

In  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  century  the  English  occupied  a narrow 
strip  of  settlements  along  the  Atlantic  coast,  a thousand  miles  in  extent, 
while  the  French  held  the  territory  from  Quebec  to  New  Orleans.  Each 
nation  claimed  the  country  west  of  the  Alleghany  Mountains,  along  the 
Ohio  River.  The  French  had  more  than  sixty  military  posts  to  guard. this 
long  line  of  possessions.  They  explored  the  Ohio  Valley,  burying  at  dif- 
ferent points  along  the  river  plates  of  lead,  bearing  French  inscriptions,  as 
proof  of  the  pre-emption  of  the  territory. 

The  French  seized  the  English  surveyors  along  the  Ohio  and  broke  up 
a post  on  the  Maumee.  They  further  showed  their  earnestness  by  building 
a fort  at  Presque  Isle,  near  the  present  town  of  Erie,  Pa.,  at  Fort  le  Boeuf, 
at  the  present  town  of  Waterford,  and  a third  at  Venago,  on  French 
Creek.  The  colonists  were  alarmed  by  these  encroachments,  and  Lieu- 
tenant-Governor Dinwiddie  of  Virginia  sent  a message  by  young  George 
Washington  to  the  French  commander  of  the  forts,  demanding  their 
removal.  It  was  a long,  laborious,  and  perilous  journey  on  which  Wash- 


46 


OPENING  OF  THE  GREAT  STRUGGLE. 


ington  engaged,  but  he  acquitted  himself  admirably,  and  brought  back  the 
French  commander’s  refusal  to  comply  with  the  request.  This  meant  war  and 
the  opening  of  the  great  struggle  between  France  and  England  in  America. 
Early  in  the  following  spring  (1754)  the  French 
erected  a fort  on  the  present  site  of  Pittsburg 
after  driving  off  a party  of  English  traders. 

Meanwhile,  a regiment  of  Virginia  troops, 
under  Colonel  Frye,  with  Washington  second 


FRENCH  EXPLORERS  BURYING  LEADEN  PLATES. 


in  command,  had  been  sent  to  occupy  the  point.  Learning  that 
the  French  were  ahead  of  him,  Washington  hastened  forward  with  a 
reconnoitering  party.  The  French  commander,  who  was  hiding  among 


Washington's  attack  on  the  french  in  the  ravine. 


END  OF  FRENCH  RULE  IN  AMERICA. 


49 


the  rocks  with  a detachment  of  troops,  was  surprised  and  killed.  Colonel 
Frye  was  slain,  and  Washington  assumed  command.  He  collected  his 
troops  at  Great  Meadows,  behind  a rough  stockade  which  he  named  Fort 
Necessity.  He  was  soon  attacked  by  a large  force  of  French  and  Indians 
and  compelled  to  capitulate. 

In  1755  occurred  the  memorable  Braddock  massacre.  Braddock  set  out 
with  an  expedition  against  Fort  Duquesne  (now  Pittsburg),  with  Washing- 
ton acting  as  an  aid-de-camp.  Within  ten  miles  of  the  fort  the  army  was 
ambushed,  and  would  have  been  annihilated  but  for  Washington,  who  took 
command  when  Braddock  fell,  mortally  wounded.  Out  of  eighty-two 
officers,  twenty-six  were  killed  and  thirty-seven  wounded.  Half  of  the 
men,  numbering  in  all  two  thousand,  were  killed  or  disabled,  while  the 
French  lost  only  three  officers,  thirty  men  killed,  and  about  the  same  num- 
ber wounded. 

Three  years  later  General  Forbes  conducted  a second  expedition  against 
Fort  Duquesne,  Washington  commanding  the  Virginia  troops.  He  led 
the  advance  guard,  and  the  garrison  fled  on  his  approach.  The  English 
flag  floated  over  the  wrecked  ramparts  ; and  the  place  received  its  present 
name  of  Pittsburg,  in  honor  of  the  great  English  minister. 

Previous  to  this  the  French  forts  at  the  head  of  the  Bay  of  Fundy  were 
taken,  and  all  the  region  east  of  the  Penobscot  fell  into  the  hands  of  the 
English.  The  closing  event  of  the  war  was  the  capture  of  Quebec  by 
General  Wolfe,  at  which  both  he  and  the  French  commander,  Montcalm, 
were  slain.  The  surrender  took  place  September  18,  1759,  and  ended 
French  rule  in  America.  From  the  Gulf  of  Mexico  to  the  arctic  zone  the 
country  was  substantially  that  of  Great  Britain. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 


PONTIAC’S  CONSPIRACY — MAJOR  ROGERS’  EXPEDITION  WESTWARD — 
MEETING  WITH  PONTIAC — THE  PLOT — ITS  BETRAYAL  TO  MAJOR 
GLADWYN — THE  BAFFLED  CHIEF  THROWS  THE  MASK  ASIDE — 
PONTIAC’S  TREACHERY. 

WE  have  summarized  the  leading  events  of  the  French  and  Indian 
war,  in  order  to  make  clear  the  incidents  connected  with  one  of  the 
most  remarkable  Indian  uprisings  that  have  ever  occurred  in  our  history. 
Prominent  among  such  epochs  must  always  stand  the  conspiracy  of 
Pontiac. 

The  war  was  ended,  and  Canada,  with  all  her  dependencies,  yielded  to 
Great  Britain.  To  carry  out  the  full  effects  of  the  momentous  treaty,  it 
was  necessary  to  take  possession  of  the  French  posts  in  the  Western 
wilderness,  where  the  lilies  of  France  still  flew  from  the  flagstaffs.  The 
execution  of  this  difficult  and  perilous  task  was  committed  to  Major 
Robert  Rogers  of  New  Hampshire. 

No  better  man  could  have  been  selected.  He  had  commanded  a 
body  of  provincial  rangers,  and  had  proven  himself  brave,  discreet,  and 
intelligent.  He  was  the  hero  of  more  than  one  daring  encounter  with 
the  Indians,  whose  nature  he  fully  understood.  The  precipitous  mountain 
known  as  Rogers’  Slide,  near  the  northern  end  of  Lake  George,  was 
named  in  honor  of  him.  During  the  French  war,  when  hotly  pursued 
by  a party  of  Indians,  he  slid  down  the  front  of  this  mountain  on  snow- 
shoes  for  nearly  a quarter  of  a mile,  with  arrowy  swiftness.  The  exploit 
so  amazed  his  pursuers  that  they  believed  him  under  the  protection  of 
the  Great  Spirit  and  gave  up  the  pursuit. 

In  the  month  of  September,  1760,  Rogers  was  ordered  by  Sir  Jeffrey 
Amherst,  the  commander-in-chief  of  the  British  forces  in  the  colonies,  to 
ascend  the  lakes  with  a party  of  rangers  and  take  possession,  in  the  name 
of  the  British  king,  of  Detroit,  Michillimackinac  and  other  Western  posts 
included  in  the  capitulation.  He  set  out  with  two  hundred  rangers,  in 
fifteen  whale-boats.  Skirting  the  northern  shore  of  Lake  Ontario  and 
crossing  its  western  end,  they  arrived  at  Fort  Niagara  at  the  beginning 
of  October.  The  boats  were  carried  over  the  portage  and  launched  above 
the  cataract,  deliberately  moving  on,  while  Rogers,  with  several  com- 
panions, hastened  to  Fort  Pitt  to  deliver  some  dispatches  for  the  French 


50 


MAJOR  ROGERS  AND  PONTIAC.  5 1 

commander,  General  Monkton.  He  then  rejoined  his  command,  and 
early  in  September  they  encamped  on  the  present  site  of  Cleveland. 

While  resting  there,  they  were  visited  by  a party  of  Indians  and 
warriors,  who  told  Rogers  they  were  sent  by  Pontiac,  ruler  in  that  country. 
He  forbade  the  English  going  any  further  until  he  had  had  a talk  with 
them.  Rogers  replied  that  he  would  be  glad  to  have  a talk  with  such  a 
mighty  personage. 

Before  the  close  of  that  same  day,  Pontiac  presented  himself.  He 
was  as  haughty  as  an  emperor,  whose  rights  it  was  dangerous  to  dispute. 
He  demanded  to  know  why  Rogers  and  his  men  dared  to  enter  his 
domain  without  his  permission.  The  major  told  Pontiac  the  French  were 
defeated,  Canada  had  surrendered,  and  he  was  then  on  his  way  to  take 
possession  of  Detroit,  aiming  to  help  to  restore  a general  peace  for  the 
red,  as  well  as  the  white  men.  Pontiac  listened  attentively  to  the  state- 
ment, and  informed  the  invaders  that  they  must  stay  where  they  were  till 
morning.  Offering  to  furnish  the  company  with  anything  they  needed, 
he  withdrew  with  his  chiefs  to  his  own  encampment. 

Rogers  suspected  treachery  was  intended,  and  kept  close  guard  through 
the  night,  but  he  was  not  molested. 

Pontiac  came  back  in  the  morning,  saying  that  he  was  willing  to  live 
at  peace  with  the  English  and  let  them  remain  in  the  country,  as  long  as 
they  treated  him  with  proper  respect.  The  calumet  was  then  smoked  and 
everything  looked  well. 

A chilling  storm  set  in  and  held  the  rangers  for  several  days  in  their 
encampment.  Rogers  had  several  more  meetings  with  Pontiac,  and  formed 
a strong  admiration  for  the  head  chief  of  the  Ottawas.  He  was  ambitious, 
shrewd,  and  one  of  the  ablest  representatives  of  the  American  race  that 
ever  lived. 

The  skies  having  cleared,  Rogers  moved  forward  and  a few  days  later  he 
reached  the  western  extremity  of  Lake  Erie.  There  he  learned  that  a 
large  force  of  Indians  lay  in  ambush  at  the  end  of  the  river,  intending  to 
massacre  him  and  his  men.  The  intervention  of  Pontiac  saved  the  party, 
which  pushed  on  toward  Detroit.  The  French  commandant  was  indignant 
at  the  demand  made  upon  him,  but  he  had  no  choice  except  to  obey.  The 
French  garrison  marched  out  and  laid  down  their  arms,  the  cross  of  St.  George 
was  run  up  the  flagstaff,  and,  as  it  whipped  in  the  breeze,  seven  hundred 
Indians,  the  allies  of  France  a short  time  before,  greeted  it  with  wild  yells. 
Detroit  came  into  the  possession  of  the  English,  November  29,  1760. 

The  garrison  were  sent  as  prisoners  down  the  lake,  and  the  Canadian 
inhabitants  were  allowed  to  stay  and  retain  their  property,  on  swearing 
allegiance  to  the  British  crown.  An  officer  was  sent  south  to  take  posses- 
sion of  forts  Miami  and  Ouatanon,  guarding  the  communication  between 


52 


DISCONTENT  OF  THE  INDIANS. 


Lake  Erie  and  the  Ohio  ; and  Rogers,  with  a small  party,  took  the  opposite 
direction,  to  relieve  the  French  garrison  of  Michillimackinac.  Ice  and 
severe  weather  drove  them  back,  however,  and  the  fort,  with  the  posts  of 
Ste.  Marie,  Green  Bay,  and  St.  Joseph,  was  not  occupied  until  the  following 
year. 

Hardly  had  the  transfer  been  made  to  England  when  mutterings  of  ill 
will  were  heard  among  the  Indian  tribes.  While  the  change  of  possession 
could  be  readily  made,  it  was  impossible  to  remove  from  the  hearts  of  the 
red  men  their  deep-rooted  hatred  of  the  English.  The  French  had  culti- 
vated the  good  will  of  the  Indians,  while  the  English  showed  them  indiffer- 
ence and  neglect.  Now  was  the  time  for  the  conquerors  to  use  tact  and 
wisdom,  and,  as  might  have  been  anticipated,  it  was  just  the  time  when 
they  did  precisely  the  opposite. 

A spirit  of  retrenchment  led  the  English  to  withhold  the  presents  to 
which  the  Indians  had  become  accustomed  from  the  French.  Not  only 
that,  but  needed  supplies  were  kept  back  or  appropriated  by  the  officers  and 
agents.  Suffering  and  death  were  the  consequences,  in  many  instances,  of 
this  injustice. 

Possibly  all  this  might  not  have  roused  the  red  men  to  revolt,  had  not 
their  new  masters  furnished  more  intolerable  grievances.  The  English  fur 
trader  showed  himself  a thorough  scoundrel,  who  not  only  swindled  the 
Indians,  but  treated  them  with  the  grossest  brutality.  He  kicked  them 
from  his  path,  and  was  guilty  of  profligacy  and  outrage  to  their  families 
which  richly  merited  death. 

The  officers  of  the  fort,  instead  of  inviting  the  red  men  to  visit  them 
freely,  as  the  French  had  always  done,  soon  let  them  know  their  presence 
was  not  wanted.  If  they  were  slow  in  taking  a hint  it  was  enforced  by  a 
kick,  or  a blow  from  the  butt  of  a musket.  The  last  feather  was  added  to 
the  burden  by  the  persistent  intrusion  of  white  settlers  upon  the  lands  of 
the  savages.  The  Delawares  and  Shawanoes  were  particularly  incensed, 
and  the  Six  Nations  became  hardly  less  angry  than  they.  The  Senecas 
were  too  far  removed  from  Sir  William  Johnson  to  feel  much  of  his  restrain- 
ing influence,  while  the  Mohawks  were  alarmed  at  seeing  their  lands  slipping 
from  their  grasp. 

It  was  only  natural  that  the  French  should  view  with  complacency  the 
growing  discontent  of  the  Indians.  It  was  not  in  human  nature  that  the 
vanquished  should  feel  kindly  toward  those  who  had  so  bitterly  humiliated 
them.  It  cannot  be  doubted  that  they  did  much  to  inflame  the  resentment 
of  the  Indians,  and,  aided  by  the  shortsightedness  of  the  English  themselves, 
trouble  was  as  certain  to  come  as  night  is  to  follow  day.  The  French  de- 
clared to  them  that  the  king  of  France  had  fallen  asleep  ; that  he  would 
soon  awake  and  take  possession  again  of  the  lands  that  had  been  given  up  ; 


PONTIAC’S  CONSPIRACY. 


53 

that  the  Indians  should  receive  their  hunting  grounds  intact,  and  be  rewarded 
for  all  they  did  in  ridding  the  country  of  the  hated  invaders. 

These  cunning  instigations  soon  bore  fruit.  In  the  summer  of  1761 
Captain  Campbell,  commanding  at  Detroit,  learned  that  a deputation  of 
Senecas  had  visited  the  Wyandot  village  near  Detroit,  and  tried  to  per- 
suade the  latter  to  slay  him  and  the  garrison.  Inquiry  disclosed  that  the 
plot  included  Niagara,  Fort  Pitt,  and  other  posts.  Campbell  took  such 
prompt  measures  for  warning  these  stations  of  their  danger  that  the  con- 
spiracy was  defeated  before  a blow  could  be  struck. 

During  the  following  summer  a similar  plot  was  detected  and  sup- 
pressed. Then  came  the  crowning  conspiracy,  the  like  of  which  has 
never  been  equaled  in  the  history  of  the  American  race.  This  was  a grand 
scheme  for  attacking  every  one  of  the  English  forts  on  the  same  day.  The 
garrisons  having  been  massacred,  the  frontiers  were  to  be  ravaged,  the  old 
dream  of  the  Indians  realized,  and  the  English  driven  into  the  sea. 

Pontiac  was  the  moving  spirit  in  this  stupendous  conspiracy.  He  was 
principal  chief  of  the  Ottawas,  who  were  united  into  a loose  confederacy 
with  the  Ojibwas  and  Pottawatomies.  By  the  sheer  power  of  his  genius 
he  held  absolute  sway  over  these  three  tribes,  and  was  powerfully  influential 
among  all  the  Indians  in  the  Illinois  country,  and  from  the  sources  of  the 
Ohio  to  those  of  the  Mississippi;  and  even  beyond  those  far  boundaries 
his  name  was  held  in  awe. 

The  chieftain  was  about  fifty  years  old,  and  in  the  prime  of  his  mag- 
nificent mental  and  physical  powers.  Thoroughly  imbued  with  his  grand 
idea  of  a grand  confederation  of  the  different  tribes  in  a war  of  extermina- 
tion of  the  English,  he  sent  out  ambassadors  during  the  latter  part  of  1762 
to  the  various  tribes.  These  visited  the  country  of  the  Ohio  and  its  tribu- 
taries, threaded  their  way  through  the  wilderness  to  the  region  of  the  upper 
lakes  and  the  dismal  borders  of  the  Ottawa,  and  far  southward  to  the  outlet 
of  the  Mississippi.  The  messengers  of  the  mighty  Pontiac  were  welcomed 
everywhere,  and  their  words  were  listened  to  with  eager  attention. 

The  tribes  thus  leagued  together  comprised  thousands  of  the  bravest 
warriors,  including  even  the  Senecas,  Wyandots,  and  a number  of  tribes  on 
the  lower  Mississippi.  The  agreement  was  that  at  a certain  time  in  May, 
1763,  as  shown  by  the  changes  of  the  moon,  the  Indians  were  to  rise  simul- 
taneously, kill  the  English  garrison  in  the  neighborhood,  and  then  join  in 
the  general  attack  on  the  frontier  settlements. 

One  of  the  extraordinary  facts  connected  with  this  gigantic  plot  was 
that  it  was  not  discovered,  when  of  necessity  it  must  have  been  known  to 
hundreds  of  Indians.  It  came  near  being  revealed  two  months  before  the 
appointed  time  by  a friendly  Indian,  who  gave  the  commandant  at  Fort 
Miami  some  information  that  awakened  his  suspicion.  He  summoned  the 


54 


PLANS  OF  PONTIAC. 


suspected  parties  and  demanded  an  explanation.  The  warriors  lied  with 
such  ingenuity  that  the  secret  was  kept,  though  the  commandant  sent 
word  to  Major  Gladwyn,  at  Detroit,  who  in  turn  forwarded  the  information 
to  Sir  Jeffrey  Amherst,  adding  that,  in  his  opinion,  the  trouble  would  soon 
blow  over.  And  so,  while  the  volcano  was  rumbling  beneath  them,  the 
people  slept. 

By  the  opening  of  spring,  Pontiac’s  preparations  were  complete.  His 
allies  were  ready  to  join  in  striking  the  blow,  but  he  reserved  to  himself 
the  right  of  naming  the  hour.  To  make  this  known  he  summoned  his 
chiefs  and  warriors  to  meet  him  on  the  banks  of  the  river  Ecorces,  near 
Detroit. 

The  meeting  was  held  on  the  27th  of  April,  1763.  Pontiac  addressed 
them  in  the  impassioned  tones  of  his  race,  and,  with  the  genius  of  a genuine 
orator,  roused  their  passions  to  the  highest  tension.  Having  brought  them 
into  the  terrible  mood  he  desired,  he  made  known  his  plan.  He  told  them 
that  on  the  2d  of  May  he  would  gain  admission  to  the  fort,  with  a party 
of  his  warriors,  under  the  pretense  of  giving  the  calumet  dance  before  the 
garrison.  During  this  performance  he  would  learn  all  about  the  strength 
of  the  fortification,  after  which  he  would  call  another  council  to  decide 
upon  the  mode  of  attack.  Then  the  meeting  dissolved,  and  the  members 
scattered  to  their  homes  to  prepare  for  the  “Day  of  Jubilee.” 

On  the  1st  of  May,  Pontiac  presented  himself  at  the  gate  of  the  fort 
of  Detroit,  with  the  request  that  he  and  his  men  might  be  allowed  to 
exhibit  the  calumet  dance  before  the  officers  of  the  garrison.  With  some 
hesitation  the  band  was  admitted,  and,  going  to  the  corner  of  the  street, 
where  stood  Major  Gladwyn’s  house,  he  and  thirty  of  the  warriors  began 
the  wild  performance,  which  was  watched  with  no  little  interest  by  the  com- 
mandant and  his  officers. 

While  this  was  going  on  the  other  ten  Ottawas  strolled  about  the 
fort,  apparently  with  only  natural  curiosity  ; but  they  noted  everything. 
The  dance  being  over  they  withdrew  with  the  rest,  and  not  a member  of 
the  garrison  suspected  the  real  meaning  of  what  had  taken  place. 

A few  days  later  Pontiac  summoned  his  second  council.  A hundred 
chiefs  presented  themselves,  and  to  them  he  unfolded  his  plan. 

He  meant  to  demand  of  Major  Gladwyn  a council  on  matters  of  great 
importance.  He  was  confident  that  he  and  his  principal  chiefs  would  meet 
with  no  difficulty  in  gaining  admission.  Each  warrior  was  to  have  a loaded 
gun  under  his  blanket.  Pontiac  would  begin  an  address  to  the  commandant, 
and  at  the  right  moment  make  a signal,  on  which  the  chiefs  present  would 
attack  the  officers  and  raise  the  war  whoop.  The  other  Indians,  loitering 
outside,  would  join  in  the  attack  the  instant  they  heard  the  signal,  and  the 
garrison  would  be  cut  down  before  they  could  recover  from  their  surprise. 


THE  DANGER  REVEALED. 


55 


Pontiac’s  plan  was  eagerly  adopted,  and  the  chiefs  withdrew  to  their 
respective  villages  once  more,  impatient  for  the  opening  of  the  great  drama. 

On  the  afternoon  of  the  5th  of  May,  a Canadian  woman,  the  wife  of 
St.  Aubin,  one  of  the  leading  settlers,  came  over  from  the  western  side, 
and  visited  the  Ottawa  village  in  quest  of  some  maple  sugar  and  venison. 
She  noticed  a number  of  warriors  engaged  in  filing  off  the  barrels  of  their 
guns,  so  as  to  reduce  the  length  to  about  a yard.  When  she  returned 
home  and  told  what  she  observed,  one  of  her  neighbors,  a blacksmith  of 
the  village,  said  that  the  Indians  were  continually  coming  to  his  shop  to 
borrow  files,  for  some  purpose  which  he  could  not  imagine. 

The  majority  of  the  Canadians  had  no  wish  to  witness  the  shedding 
of  blood,  and,  convinced  that  mischief  was  afoot,  M.  Gouin,  one  of  the 
most  prominent  of  these  people,  went  to  Major  Gladwyn  and  begged  him 
to  be  on  his  guard.  The  commandant  replied  that  he  was  sure  there  was 
no  cause  for  fear. 

There  was  another,  however,  to  whose  words  the  officer  paid  heed. 
This  was  an  Ojibwa  girl,  possessed  of  a certain  rude  beauty,  between  whom 
and  the  officer  an  attachment  existed.  On  the  day  suceeding  the  dis- 
covery of  the  Canadian  woman,  she  visited  the  fort,  and,  after  much  hesita- 
tion, told  the  alarming  secret. 

She  said  that  the  morrow  had  been  fixed  upon  by  Pontiac  to  attack  the 
fort.  He  would  present  himself  at  the  head  of  sixty  chiefs,  each  of  whom 
would  have  a short  gun  hidden  under  his  blanket.  At  the  close  of  his 
sp'eech,  Pontiac  intended  to  offer  a peace  belt  of  wampum,  presenting  it  in 
a reversed  position.  That  was  to  be  the  signal  for  attack.  The  chiefs 
would  whip  out  their  guns  and  shoot  the  officers,  and  the  Indians  in  the 
street,  hearing  the  shouts  and  firing,  would  assail  the  garrison.  The 
intention  was  to  kill  every  Englishman,  but  not  to  harm  any  of  the 
Frenchmen. 

Although  Major  Gladwyn  had  treated  lightly  the  warning  of  his  friend 
M.  Gouin,  the  day  before,  he  could  not  disregard  the  words  of  the  Ojibwa 
girl.  Indeed,  he  was  a skillful  and  intelligent  officer,  as  he  proved  by  his 
subsequent  course.  He  thanked  his  faithful  friend,  told  her  she  should  be 
well  rewarded,  and,  in  order  that  no  suspicion  should  be  excited  against  her, 
urged  her  to  go  back  to  the  village  and  mingle  with  her  people. 

As  soon  as  she  was  gone  Major  Gladwyn  summoned  his  officers  and 
told  them  the  momentous  news,  the  truth  of  which  was  beyond  question. 
There  was  cause  for  the  gravest  fear.  The  defenses  were  in  a poor  con- 
dition, and,  among  the  Indian  villages  scattered  around  the  place,  were  from 
one  to  two  thousand  Indians.  If  any  impulse  should  precipitate  the  action 
of  Pontiac,  the  fort  could  not  be  held  against  the  attack. 

Not  a minute  was  lost.  Every  possible  preparation  was  made.  O^e- 


56 


VISIT  OF  PONTIAC  AND  HIS  WARRIORS. 


half  the  garrison  was  ordered  under  arms,  and  the  officers  spent  the  whole 
night  upon  the  ramparts.  But  an  Indian  understands  the  virtue  of  patience  ; 
and  Pontiac,  having  fixed  upon  the  time,  and  knowing  nothing  of  his  be- 
trayal, adhered  to  his  programme. 

When  the  spring  sun  rose  in  an  unclouded  sky,  the  garrison  observed  a 
fleet  of  birch  canoes  crossing  the  river  from  the  eastern  shore,  within  cannon 
shot  of  the  fort.  Only  one  or  two  warriors  were  to  be  seen  in  each  boat, 
but  the  experienced  eyes  that  studied  the  craft  noticed  that  they  moved 
slowly  and  were  low  in  the  water,  as  though  deeply  laden.  So  they  were — 
each  canoe  being  filled  with  warriors,  crouching  flat  that  their  numbers 
might  not  cause  suspicion  on  the  part  of  the  English. 

It  was  early  when  the  open  common  behind  the  fort  began  swarming 
with  squaws,  warriors,  and  children,  moving  hither  and  thither  as  if  about 
to  engage  in  a game  of  ball.  Among  them  stalked  a number  of  silent  figures 
with  their  blankets  wrapped  about  them,  while  they  cast  furtive  glances  at 
the  fort.  Finally  they  moved  toward  the  gate,  as  if  with  no  particular  pur- 
pose, and  asked  to  be  admitted.  Gladwyn  complied,  his  purpose  being  to 
show  them  that,  though  their  plot  was  known  to  him,  he  held  their  hostility 
in  contempt. 

Pontiac  having  crossed  to  the  shore  with  the  canoes,  gravely  approached 
at  the  head  of  his  three-score  chiefs,  all  marching  in  Indian  file.  His  ad- 
vance was  marked  by  a trifling  but  dramatic  incident. 

A Canadian  settler,  who  had  been  at  the  fort,  was  on  his  way  home  when 
he  met  the  party  at  a small  bridge.  He  stepped  aside  to  give  the  warriors 
room,  glancing  in  the  face  of  each,  as  the  grim  procession  passed  in  review 
before  him.  He  recognized  the  last  man  of  the  company  as  an  old  friend. 
The  two  nodded  to  each  other,  and  the  Indian,  throwing  back  the  fold  of 
his  blanket,  showed  his  rifle  with  the  muzzle  filed  off.  As  he  did  so  he 
made  a meaning  gesture  toward  the  fort,  flapped  back  his  blanket  and 
silently  passed  on,  without  having  fallen  a step  behind  the  rest. 

That  pantomime  told  the  story. 

It  was  about  the  middle  of  the  forenoon  when  Pontiac  reached  the 
fort,  whose  gateway  was  crowded  with  savages.  Each  was  wrapped  to  his 
chin  in  a colored  blanket,  his  fluttering  scalp-lock  ornamented  with  gaudy 
feathers,  and  the  countenances  smeared  with  black,  white,  yellow  and 
crimson  paint,  splashed  over  the  features  in  fantastic  fashion. 

They  were  freely  admitted,  like  the  others.  Those  who  were  watching 
the  face  of  the  great  chieftain  saw  him  start,  as  he  led  the  way,  and  learned 
at  a glance  that  the  plot  was  discovered,  for  on  every  hand  the  fullest  prep- 
arations had  been  made.  Great  was  the  shock,  and  a furious  chagrin 
must  have  filled  his  soul  at  this  dashing  of  the  cup,  when  pressing  his  very 
lips. 


DISCOMFITURE  OF  PONTIAC. 


57 


But  the  single  start  was  the  only  sign  of  the  tempestuous  emotions  of 
his  soul.  1 1 is  followers  were  as  stoical  as  he,  and,  crossing  the  little  town, 
all  entered  the  door  of  the  council  house.  As  they  did  so  they  confronted 
Gladwyn  and  several  of  his  officers,  seated  and  waiting  for  them.  It  could 
not  have  escaped  the  eyes  of  the  visitors  that  every  white  man  had  a pair 
of  pistols  at  his  belt,  and  carried  a sword  at  his  side. 

“ Why,”  asked  Pontiac  through  the  interpreter,  “ do  I see  so 
many  of  my  father’s  young  men  standing  in  the  street  with  their 
guns  r 

Gladwyn  quietly  replied  that  he  had  ordered  them  under  arms  for  the 
sake  of  discipline  and  exercise.  With  many  signs  of  distrust,  and  after 
more  diplomatic  conversation,  the  visitors  seated  themselves. 

Pontiac  rose  to  speak,  holding  the  wampum  belt  in  his  hand.  Every 
eye  was  fixed  upon  the  painted  countenance,  for  it  was  by  no  means  certain 
that  he  would  not  give  the  signal,  even  though  he  knew  the  plot  had  been 
revealed.  At  one  point  in  his  address  he  seemed  to  make  a preliminary 
motion,  as  if  resolved  to  precipitate  the  tragedy,  but,  at  the  same  moment, 
the  vigilant  Gladwyn  carelessly  raised  his  hand.  Instantly  a drum  rolled, 
and  the  clash  of  arms  sounded  without. 

If  Pontiac  meditated  an  attack,  this  stayed  him.  He  could  not  hide 
his  astonishment.  He  saw  Major  Gladwyn  looking  intently  into  his  own 
eyes,  and  the  chief  sat  down  with  considerable  embarrassment  of  manner. 
It  has  been  said  by  several  writers  that  the  commandant  at  this  point  pulled 
aside  Pontiac’s  blanket,  disclosing  the  gun,  and  accused  him  of  treachery. 
Gladwin,  in  his  letters,  makes  no  mention  of  such  an  act,  and  it  is  altogether 
improbable.  He  had  no  wish  to  bring  about  a collision,  and  such  a 
proceeding  would  have  been  almost  certain  to  drive  the  chieftain  and  his 
warriors  into  instant  attack. 

The  commandant  made  a sensible  reply,  assuring  Pontiac  of  the  friend- 
ship and  protection  of  the  English,  as  long  as  they  deserved  it,  but  warning 
him  that  the  first  act  of  aggression  would  be  visited  with  severe  punish- 
ment. The  council  soon  broke  up,  and,  with  more  protestations  of  friend- 
ship, Pontiac  and  his  chiefs  withdrew.  The  only  censure  made  upon  the 
course  of  the  English  officer  was  his  failure  to  detain  the  chief  and  his 
companions  as  hostages  for  the  good  conduct  of  their  followers.  The  con- 
cealed weapons  under  the  blankets  of  the  visitors  would  have  justified 
this,  and  probably  averted  what  soon  took  place.  But  on  the  other 
hand,  such  action  would  have  been  condemned  in  many  quarters  as 
dishonorable,  and  might  have  precipitated  the  attack.  Furthermore 
Gladwyn,  as  he  afterward  declared,  had  no  knowledge  of  the  extent  of 
the  conspiracy. 

Though  baffled  in  his  design,  the  enraged  chief  did  not  give  up  his 


THROWING  OFF  THE  MASK. 


58  * 

far-reaching  scheme.  Had  he  known  who  it  was  that  revealed  his  purpose 
to  the  commandant,  he  would  have  visited  fearful  vengeance  upon  her. 

He  accepted  the  course  of  Gladwyn  as  proof  of  timidity  on  his  part. 
He  visited  him  again  the  next  day,  protesting  more  earnestly  his  friend- 
ship. He  proffered  the  sacred  pipe  of  peace  to  the  commandant,  the 
most  solemn  pledge  that  an  Indian  can  give,  and,  on  his  departure,  pre- 
sented the  token  to  Major  Campbell,  the  second  in  command.  Then  he 
went  to  the  Pottawatomies’  village,  and  consulted  with  their  chiefs  and  those 
of  the  Wyandots  as  to  the  best  means  of  destroying  the  English.  Such 
was  the  nature  of  this  great  Ottawa  chieftain,  who  was  capable,  under 
certain  circumstances,  of  displaying  some  of  the  noblest  attributes  of 
humanity. 

On  the  following  morning,  just  before  noon,  Pontiac  advanced  from 
among  the  throng  of  Indians  on  the  common  and  approached  the  gate. 
When  he  attempted  to  enter  he  found  it  fastened  against  him.  He 
shouted  to  the  sentinels,  and  demanded  to  know  what  it  meant.  Major 
Gladwyn  himself  replied  with  some  forcible  words,  telling  him  that  he 
might  enter  alone,  but  he  wanted  no  more  of  his  rabble  and  would  not  be 
annoyed  with  them. 

Pontiac  saw  it  was  useless  to  wear  the  mask  any  longer.  He  strode 
back  to  his  waiting  warriors,  most  of  whom  were  lying  on  the  ground 
beyond  earshot.  As  he  joined  them,  they  sprang  to  their  feet,  and,  with 
defiant  yells,  made  off. 

The  soldiers,  who  were  watching  through  the  loopholes,  saw  them 
run  toward  the  house  of  an  old  Englishwoman,  who  lived  with  her  family 
on  the  further  part  of  the  common.  A minute  later  their  dismal  scalp- 
yell  told  the  fate  of  the  hapless  inmates. 

Another  party  paddled  to  the  Isle  au  Cochon,  where  a former  English 
sergeant  of  the  regulars  lived.  He  was  dragged  out  from  his  hiding  place 
and  killed  and  scalped.  Pontiac  took  no  part  in  these  bloody  deeds,  but 
walked  toward  the  shore,  his  bosom  so  filled  with  wrath  that  no  one 
dared  approach  him  while  the  terrible  mood  lasted.  Finally  he  entered  a 
canoe  and  paddled  furiously  to  the  Ottawa  village  on  the  further  shore. 
Before  he  landed  he  shouted  so  savagely  that  all  the  inmates  of  the  lodges 
came  rushing  out  to  learn  his  wishes.  Pointing  to  the  bank  he  had  left, 
he  ordered  them  to  move  their  camp  thither,  that  the  river  should  not 
interpose  between  them  and  the  Englishmen  whom  he  had  determined  to 
destroy.  His  commands  were  carried  out  before  the  rising  of  the 
morrow’s  sun. 

Dolorous  news  was  brought  to  the  fort  that  evening  by  a Canadian, 
who  told  that  Sir  Robert  Davers  and  Captain  Robertson,  two  English 
officers,  had  been  waylaid  and  murdered  by  the  Indians,  above  Lake  St. 


ATTACK  ON  THE  PALISADES. 


59 


Clair.  He  said,  further,  that  Pontiac  had  just  been  joined  by  a powerful 
band  of  Ojibways,  from  Saginaw  Bay.  Major  Gladwyn  was  so  apprehen- 
sive of  an  attack  that  every  Englishman  in  the  fort,  whether  civilian  or 
soldier,  was  ordered  under  arms,  and  the  commandant  himself  walked  the 
ramparts  the  entire  night. 

Generally,  the  favorite  hour  for  the  American  Indian  to  strike  is  just 
before  dawn.  So  it  proved  in  this  case.  The  still  air  was  rent  with  the 
cries  of  the  savages,  who,  including  Ottawas,  Wyandots,  Pottawatomies, 
and  Ojibways,  swarmed  out  of  the  woods  and  opened  a fusillade  against 
the  palisades.  The  garrison  was  on  the  alert  to  gain  a good  sight  of 
them  before  firing,  but  the  assailants  took  care  to  use  every  protection. 
They’screened  themselves  behind  barns,  small  buildings,  and  fences,  and, 
where  these  were  lacking,  lay  flat  in  hollows  and  dodged  nimbly  about, 
with  a view  of  confusing  the  aim  of  the  defenders. 

Near  the  palisades  was  a cluster  of  small  buildings,  behind  which 
many  Indians  found  shelter,  while  their  bullets  pattered  incessantly  against 
the  defenses.  A cannon  was  loaded  with  red-hot  spikes  and  fired  at  this 
screen.  The  flames  caught  and  the  savages  scattered  with  such  ludicrous 
haste  that  the  soldiers  broke  into  uproarious  laughter. 

The  attack  lasted  for  six  hours,  when  the  assailants,  having  accom- 
plished nothing,  drew  off.  Only  five  of  the  garrison  had  been  wounded, 
and  the  Indians  suffered  slight  loss. 

Gladwyn  still  believed  the  outbreak  was  only  a spasmodic  ebullition, 
which  would  soon  expend  itself.  He  was  in  sore  want  of  food,  and 
decided  to  open  negotiations  with  the  Indians,  with  a view  of  obtaining 
supplies.  La  Butte,  the  interpreter,  who  might  be  considered  a neutral, 
was  sent  to  Pontiac  to  demand  the  reason  for  his  action,  and  to  assure  him 
that  the  commandant  was  still  ready  to  hear  and  redress  any  real  com- 
plaints. Two  old  Canadians,  Chapeton  and  Godefroy,  anxious  to  help 
the  English,  volunteered  to  accompany  the  interpreter.  As  they  passed 
out  of  the  gates  numbers  of  others  went  with  them,  giving  as  a reason 
that  they  did  not  wish  to  stay  and  see  the  massacre  of  the  English. 

La  Butte  and  his  companions  were  received  with  courtesy  by  Pontiac, 
vho  listened  to  the  Canadians  in  their  attempt  to  dissuade  the  chief  from 
continuing  hostilities.  He  gave  so  many  expressions  of  agreement  that 
the  visitors  were  deceived.  Pontiac,  however,  after  some  parleying,  asked 
that  Major  Campbell  should  visit  him,  in  order  that  he  might  hold  council 
with  the  English  fathers  themselves.  This  request  sounded  reasonable, 
ior  Major  Campbell,  by  his  kindness  and  just  course  toward  the  Indians, 
lad  long  had  their  confidence. 

Major  Gladwyn  suspected  treachery,  but  Campbell  was  so  confident  of 
he  good  faith  of  the  chieftain,  and,  his  power  of  doing  effective  service  for 


6o 


MAJOR  CAM PB ELL’S  VISIT  TO  PONTIAC. 


his  people,  that  he  begged  permission  to  comply  with  Pontiac’s  request. 
Major  Gladwyn  finally  consented,  though  with  reluctance  and  misgiving. 

Major  Campbell  left  the  fort  in  high  spirits,  accompanied  by  La  Butte, 
the  interpreter,  Lieutenant  M’Dougal,  and  several  Canadians. 

Meanwhile  M.  Gouin,  the  old  friend  of  the  garrison,  had  visited  the 
Indian  camp  to  learn  what  was  going  on.  He  heard  and  saw  enough  to 
convince  him  that  treachery  was  intended.  He  hurried  off  two  messengers 
to  warn  the  party  not  to  visit  Pontiac  under  any  circumstances.  They  met 


LEAVING  THE  FORT. 


the  officers  as  they  were  leaving  the  gates,  but  they  refused  to  be  dissuaded, 
and  pushed  on  to  the  camp  of  the  hostiles. 

Their  reception  was  anything  but  reassuring.  After  Major  Campbell’s 
speech,  Pontiac  informed  him  he  would  sleep  in  the  lodges  of  the  red 
men  that  night.  This  convinced  the  officer  that  he  and  his  companion 
were  betrayed. 

Many  of  the  Indians  favored  putting  the  visitors  to  death  at  once,  but 
Pontiac  was  not  ready  to  carry  his  treachery  to  that  extent.  Besides, 
Major  Gladwyn  had  two  Indians  in  his  custody,  arrested  some  days  before 
for  a slight  offense.  The  chief  protected  the  officers  from  insult,  and,  con- 
ducting them  to  a house  near  Parent’s  Creek,  kept  them  there  for  a time 
in  safe  custody,  without  allowing  any  harm  to  come  to  them. 


CHAPTER  IX. 


PONTIAC’S  CONSPIRACY  (CONTINUED) — A REMARKABLE  MAN— LOSS  OF 
THE  CONVOY — FALL  OF  THE  FOREST  GARRISONS. 

THE  Jesuit  priests  had  persuaded  a part  of  the  Wyandots  to  keep  out 
of  the  alliance  Pontiac  formed,  but  the  chieftain  gave  them  the  choice 
of  joining  him  or  being  killed,  and  it  need  not  be  said  what  alternative  they 
adopted.  They  were  among  the  bravest  and  best  fighters  enlisted  by  him 
during  the  war. 

Having  secured  these  allies,  Pontiac  pushed  hostilities  not  only  with 
vigor,  but  with  a skill,  foresight,  and  completeness  of  detail,  and  a readiness 
of  resource  which  stamped  him  as  one  of  the  most  remarkable  members  of 
his  race  that  ever  lived. 

He  placed  some  of  the  Pottawatomies  so  as  to  lie  in  wait  along  the 
river  bank  below  the  fort,  while  others  were  concealed  in  the  woods  to  pre- 
vent any  friends  approaching  the  English  by  land  or  water.  Still  others 
were  hidden  within  gunshot  of  the  fort,  with  orders  to  shoot  down  anyone 
who  chanced  to  expose  himself.  The  place  being  surrounded,  the  Indians 
resumed  firing  upon  the  fort  on  the  12th  of  May. 

Major  Gladwyn,  appreciating  the  gravity  of  his  situation,  called  his 
officers  together  that  evening  for  consultation.  It  is  said  that  the  comman- 
dant was  the  only  one  who  favored  defending  the  post  to  the  last.  The 
rest  advocated  embarking  and  sailing  for  Niagara.  The  desperation  of 
the  situation  will  be  understood  when  it  is  stated  that,  with  the  closest 
economy  and  care,  the  provisions  would  hardly  last  the  garrison  three 
weeks.  Still  further,  the  buildings  were  of  such  inflammable  material  that 
the  danger  of  their  being  set  on  fire  at  any  time  was  imminent.  A more 
disturbing  fear  was  that  the  Indians  would  make  a general  attack,  and  cut 
or  burn  their  way  through  the  pickets ; in  which  case  nothing  could  save 
the  garrison.  A Canadian,  however,  in  the  fort,  removed  this  dread  by 
assuring  Major  Gladwyn  that  such  a method  of  attack  was  so  opposite  to 
the  policy  of  the  Indians  that  it  would  never  be  adopted.  While  one  of 
their  leaders  may  be  personally  brave,  he  never  willingly  engages  in  a con- 
test in  which  he  knows  he  must  pay  for  his  victory  by  the  loss  of  a number 
of  his  warriors.  He  prefers  the  stealthy,  more  tedious  method,  with  less 
prospect  of  losing  his  men.  Such  an  attack  as  the  one  named  could  not 
succeed,  without  a number  of  the  Indians  being  killed  ; that  being  evident 
to  Pontiac,  he  would  not  adopt  it. 

61 


62 


pontiac’s  promissory  notes. 


Days  and  weeks  now  dragged  by  without  any  special  incident.  The 
watch  of  the  Indians  was  sleepless,  until  their  war  whoops  and  the  crack  of 
their  rifles  became  so  familiar  that  they  lost  much  of  their  terror.  Now 
and  then,  parties  of  volunteers  sallied  out,  hastily  cut  down  the  trees,  and 
burned  the  outbuildings  that  gave  shelter  to  their  enemies.  In  this  way 
the  ground  was  soon  cleared  of  the  screens  of  which  the  enemy  had  made 
such  good  use. 

The  two  vessels  in  the  river  were  able  to  sweep  the  northern  and  southern 
curtains  of  the  works,  and,  by  preventing  the  Indians  from  approaching  those 
points,  did  good  service.  No  precaution,  however,  could  prevent  the  war- 
riors from  stealing  through  the  grass  and  launching  their  arrows,  tipped 
with  burning  tow,  at  the  houses.  But  the  defenders  kept  tanks  of  water 
filled,  and  were  so  vigilant  in  extinguishing  the  fires  thus  kindled  that  all 
the  attempts  came  to  naught. 

Pontiac  shortly  after  the  regular  siege  opened,  summoned  Major  Glad- 
wyn  to  surrender,  with  the  assurance  that  if  he  complied,  he  and  the  gar- 
rison could  leave  on  one  of  the  vessels,  but  if  he  persisted  in  the  defense 
he  would  receive  no  quarter.  The  commandant  replied  that  he  cared  noth- 
ing for  such  threats,  and  the  attacks  were  pressed  with  more  vigor,  as  the 
chieftain  continued  to  receive  reinforcements.  He  asked  the  French  to 
teach  him  the  civilized  methods  of  attacking  a fortified  place,  by  regular 
approaches.  Those  of  the  Canadians  who  knew  anything  about  the  subject 
pretended  to  be  as  ignorant  as  he,  but  it  is  more  than  likely  their  ignorance 
was  genuine. 

The  distress  from  the  lack  of  provisions  increased,  and,  but  for  the 
friendship  of  several  Canadians,  Major  Gladwyn  would  have  been  compelled 
through  starvation  to  abandon  the  post.  Under  cover  of  the  darkness,  a 
number  of  friends  on  the  other  side  of  the  river  brought  over  cattle,  hogs, 
and  other  supplies  for  a long  time,  without  any  of  the  Indians  learning  what 
was  going  on. 

The  enemy  began  to  suffer  from  the  same  cause.  They  had  expected 
to  capture  Detroit  by  a single  dash,  and  neglected  to  provide  themselves 
with  food.  They  fell  to  plundering  the  French,  who  protested  to  Pontiac. 
In  meeting  this  complaint,  the  chieftain  displayed  a forecast  which  must, 
excite  admiration. 

He  stopped  at  once  all  outrages  upon  the  French.  He  next  visited  the 
various  houses,  inspected  the  supplies,  and  assigned  to  each  the  share  of 
provisions  which  the  owners  must  furnish  to  the  Indians.  These  levies 
were  gathered  in  one  building,  whence  the  supplies  were  regularly  issued,  as 
needed,  to  the  different  camps.  Having  no  means  of  paying  for  them,  and 
anxious  to  retain  the  good  will  of  the  French,  Pontiac  gave  his  promissory 
notes  in  payment.  They  were  drawn  upon  birch  bark  and  signed  with  the 


MAJOR  CAMPBELL’S  BRAVERY. 


63 


figure  of  an  otter,  the  totem  to  which  he  belonged.  This  we  believe  is  the 
only  instance  known  of  an  American  Indian  providing  the  “sinews  of  war” 
in  this  manner.  What  is  almost  equally  surprising  is  that  Pontiac  redeemed 
all  his  “paper”  at  its  face  value. 

General  Gage,  who  succeeded  General  Amherst,  as  commander-in-chief, 
renders  the  following  tribute  to  this  remarkable  man  : “From  a paragraph 
of  M.  D’Abbadie’s  letter  there  is  reason  to  judge  of  Pontiac,  not  only  as  a 
savage  possessed  of  the  most  refined  cunning  and  treachery  natural  to  the 
Indians,  but  as  a person  of  extraordinary  abilities.  He  says  that  he  keeps 
two  secretaries,  one  to  write 
for  him,  and  the  other  to  read 
the  letters  he  receives,  and  he 
manages  them  so 
as  to  keep  each  of 
them  ignorant  of 
what  is  transacted 
by  the  other.” 

The  British 
commander  - in  - 
chief  at  New  York 
was  ignorant  as 
yet  of  the  peril  of 
Detroit.  When 
spring  was  fairly 
opened,  a strong 
detachment  was 
sent  up  the  lakes 

with  ammunition  for  that  and  the  other  Western  posts.  Major  Gladwyn 
and  the  garrison,  knowing  of  their  approach,  ordered  one  of  the  schooners 
in  the  river  to  Niagara  to  hasten  the  expected  convoy.  On  the  following- 
day,  while  the  vessel  lay  becalmed  at  the  entrance  to  Lake  Erie,  a 
swarm  of  canoes  shot  out  from  the  shores  and  made  swiftly  toward  the 
motionless  schooner. 

In  the  prow  of  the  foremost  boat  the  Indians  had  placed  Major 
Campbell,  who,  it  will  be  remembered,  was  made  a prisoner  by  Pontiac  when* 
he  and  Lieutenant  M’Dougal  visited  the  hostile  camp  on  the  invitation  of 
the  chief.  Their  purpose  now  was  to  use  the  officer  as  a screen  against  the 
fire  from  the  vessel. 


“do  your  duty!”  called  the  brave  old  veteran. 


“ Do  your  duty,”  called  the  brave  old  veteran,  “ and  don’t  think  of  me.” 
Fortunately  his  friends  were  saved  the  painful  alternative,  for  a brisk 
breeze  just  then  filled  the  sails  of  the  schooner  and  took  her  beyond  reach 
of  the  canoes. 


64 


A THRILLING  INCIDENT. 


On  the  30th  of  May,  the  garrison  were  thrilled  by  sight  of  the  long- 
expected  convoy.  Below  the  fort  and  on  the  further  side  of  the  river,  a 
line  of  boats  was  seen  rounding  the  woody  projection,  with  the  flag  of 
England  flying  from  the  stern  of  the  leader.  The  joyous  garrison  felt  that 
the  end  of  their  troubles  had  come,  and  broke  into  cheers,  while  a cannon 
from  the  bastion  boomed  its  deep-throated  welcome. 

But  look!  In  all  the  boats,  dark,  naked  figures  shot  up  to  view,  with 
grotesque  gesture,  and  answered  the  cheers  of  the  English  with  the  dreaded 
war  whoop.  The  Indians  had  captured  the  convoy  and  the  troops  had 
either  been  killed  or  made  prisoners. 

The  woeful  despair  of  the  garrison  was  diverted  by  a thrilling  incident 
which  now  took  place  under  their  very  eyes. 

There  were  eighteen  boats,  in  each  of  which  were  two  or  more  of  the 
captured  soldiers,  who  were  compelled  to  act  as  rowers,  while  several  armed 
Indians  directed  operations.  Other  warriors,  for  the  sake  of  greater  secu- 
rity, followed  the  boats  along  shore.  It  so  came  about  that  in  the  fore- 
most were  four  soldiers  guarded  by  only  three  Indians. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  one  of  the  schooners  belonging  to  Detroit 
had  gone  to  Niagara.  The  larger  still  lay  at  anchor  in  the  stream,  within 
a stone’s  throw  of  the  fort. 

As  the  leading  boat  came  opposite  the  vessel,  the  soldier  acting  as 
steersman  said  in  English  to  his  comrade: 

“ Seize  that  Indian  in  front  of  you  and  throw  him  overboard.” 

“ He  is  a powerful  fellow  and  I fear  I am  not  strong  enough,”  was  the 
reply. 

“ Then  change  places  with  me  and  I’ll  do  it.  Act  as  though  you  are 
tired,  and  they  won’t  suspect  anything.” 

“ Very  well.” 

Nothing  in  the  looks  or  manner  of  the  two  men  indicated  that  their 
words  had  more  than  ordinary  meaning.  The  soldier  stepped  forward  to 
take  the  place  of  his  comrade,  who  rose  as  if  to  change  places  with  him. 
Like  a flash,  the  braver  one  seized  the  unsuspicious  Indian  by  his  coarse 
black  hair,  and,  with  the  other  hand,  gripped  the  girdle  at  his  waist. 
Then,  by  main  strength,  he  flung  the  wretch  overboard ; but  as  he 
went,  he  held  fast  to  the  clothing  of  the  soldier,  and,  stabbing  him 
repeatedly,  dragged  him  into  the  river,  where  both  sank,  grappled  in 
each  other’s  arms. 

The  other  two  Indians  were  so  terrified  that  they  leaped  out  of  the 
boat,  whereupon  the  soldiers  rowed  with  might  and  main  toward  the 
schooner,  shouting  for  help.  The  other  canoes  darted  in  pursuit,  firing  as 
they  went  and  wounding  one  of  the  soldiers.  At  the  moment  of  despair,  a 
cannon  from  the  side  of  the  vessel  sent  its  ball  ricochetting  so  near  the 


DISMAL  TIDINGS.  65 

leading  canoe,  that  the  pursuers  turned  abruptly  about  and  made  for 
shore. 

The  men  rescued  by  this  narrow  chance  told  the  story  of  the  disaster 
to  the  convoy.  Lieutenant  Cuyler  had  left  Niagara  on  the  13th  of  May, 
embarking  above  the  falls,  with  ninety-six  men  and  an  abundant  supply  of 
ammunition  and  provisions.  He  coasted  for  days  along  the  lonely  shore,, 
seeing  no  living  person.  About  two  weeks  later,  he  landed  near  the  mouth 
of  the  Detroit  River,  drawing  the  boats  up  on  the  beach  and  making  prep- 
arations for  encamping. 

While  thus  employed,  a man  and  boy  walked  off  some  way  to  gather 
firewood,  when  an  Indian  bounded  from  among  the  trees  and  tomahawked, 
and  scalped  the  boy.  The  man  ran  back  with  the  alarm.  The  lieutenant 
quickly  formed  his  soldiers  in  a semi-circle  in  front  of  the  boats,  but  had 
hardly  done  so,  when  a force  of  Indians  rushed  so  impetuously  from  the 
woods  that  the  center  of  the  line  gave  way.  The  men  flung  down  their 
guns  and  rushed  for  the  boats. 

A wild  scene  followed,  but  two  of  the  craft  succeeded  in  getting  ofTr 
with  less  than  half  the  men,  among  whom  was  Lieutenant  Cuyler.  They 
rowed  along  the  south  shore  to  Presque  Isle  and  thence  to  Niagara,  where 
Cuyler  reported  his  loss  to  the  commanding  officer. 

The  Indians  who  were  the  actors  in  this  daring  affair  were  Wyandots,. 
that  were  lying  in  ambush  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  to  intercept  trading 
boats  or  those  containing  troops.  The  prisoners  were  subjected  to  horri- 
ble tortures  and  all  put  to  death.  In  the  words  of  Francis  Parkman,  Jr.„ 
the  historian:  “After  night  had  set  in,  several  Canadians  came  to  the 
fort,  bringing  vague  and  awful  reports  of  the  scenes  that  had  been  enacted 
at  the  Indian  camp.  The  soldiers  gathered  round  them,  and,  frozen  with 
horror,  listened  to  the  appalling  narrative.  A cloud  of  deep  gloom  sank 
down  upon  the  garrison,  and  none  could  help  reflecting  how  thin  and  frail 
a barrier  protected  them  from  a similar  fate.  On  the  following  day,  and 
for  several  succeeding  days,  they  beheld  frightful  confirmation  of  the  ru- 
mors they  had  heard.  Naked  corpses,  gashed  with  knives  and  scorched 
with  fire,  floated  down  the  pure  waters  of  the  Detroit,  whose  fish  came  up 
to  nibble  at  the  clotted  blood  that  clung  to  their  ghastly  faces.” 

Dismal  tidings  continued.  A messenger  brought  news  of  the  fall  of 
Fort  Sandusky,  which  had  been  attacked  by  a band  of  Wyandots  in  the 
neighborhood,  on  the  16th  of  May.  Ensign  Paully  admitted  seven 
Indians  on  that  day  with  no  suspicion  of  anything  wrong.  They  success- 
fully played  the  trick  which  Pontiac  attempted,  for  the  ensign  had  no 
friendly  tongue  to  warn  him  of  danger.  Nearlyall  the  garrison  were  mur- 
dered, and  Ensign  Paully  was  carried,  bound  hand  and  foot,  to  Detroit,, 
where  it  was  intended  to  burn  him  at  the  stake.  He  was  saved,  however^ 


66 


FALL  OF  THE  FOREST  GARRISONS. 


at  the  last  moment  by  an  old  woman,  whose  husband  had  lately  died,  and 
who  took  the  ensign  as  his  representative.  Thenceforth  he  was  accepted 
as  a genuine  Ottawa  warrior. 

By  this  time,  Pontiac  had  nearly  a thousand  warriors  at  his  call.  As 
these  brought  their  families  with  them,  the  number  of  savages  in  the  im- 
mediate neighborhood  must  have  been  between  three  and  four  thousand. 
The  determination  to  bring  the  garrison  to  terms  was  as  strong  as  ever  in 
the  breast  of  the  great  leader. 

On  the  15th  of  June,  a party  of  Pottawatomies  approached  the 
gate  of  the  fort,  bringing  with  them  four  English  captives,  with  the  offer 
to  exchange  them  for  several  warriors  held  prisoners  by  Major  Gladwyn. 
The  exchange  was  effected,  and  the  new  arrivals  proved  to  be  Ensign 
.Schlosser,  late  commander  at  Fort  Joseph,  and  three  soldiers.  The  post 
named  stood  at  the  mouth  of  the  St.  Joseph  River,  near  the  head  of  Lake 
Michigan. 

Ensign  Schlosser  had  but  fourteen  men  with  him,  and,  when  unsuspi- 
cious of  danger,  it  was  surrounded  by  a large  force  of  Indians.  He  did  his 
utmost,  but  with  such  a handful  he  was  helpless.  The  sentinel  at  the  gate 
was  tomahawked,  and,  within  ten  minutes,  eleven  men  were  killed  and  the 
ensign,  with  three  survivors,  made  prisoners. 

Several  days  later,  a Jesuit  priest  of  the  Ottawa  mission  near  Michilli- 
mackinac came  to  the  gate  of  the  fort  and  delivered  a letter  to  Major  Glad- 
wyn. It  was  from  Captain  Etherington,  commandant  at  Michillimackinac, 
conveying  the  news  that  another  calamity  was  to  be  added  to  the  long  list 
that  had  already  overtaken  the  western  posts.  The  interesting  particulars 
of  the  fall  of  Michillimackinac  are  given  elsewhere. 

The  next  news  was  that  of  the  capture  of  Fort  Ouatanon,  on  the 
Wabash,  a short  distance  below  the  present  city  of  Lafayette.  Lieutenant 
Jenkins  and  several  of  his  men  were  made  prisoners  on  the  1st  of  June 
by  a characteristic  Indian  strategem,  whereupon  the  rest  of  the  garrison  sur- 
rendered. In  making  the  capture,  however,  the  Indians  expressed  their 
regret,  saying  they  had  acted  contrary  to  their  inclinations,  but  were  com- 
pelled to  the  course  by  other  tribes.  They  showed  more  consideration  to 
the  captives  than  was  displayed  elsewhere,  and  probably  told  the  truth. 

Fort  Miami  on  the  River  Maumee  was  the  next  post  from  which  disas- 
trous tidings  came.  As  Detroit  was  saved  through  the  intervention  of 
an  Indian  woman,  Miami  fell  through  the  treachery  of  another  dusky  girl. 
Ensign  Holmes  was  suspicious  of  trouble,  but  when  a young  Indian  woman 
came  to  him  on  the  27th  of  May  and  urged  him  to  go  to  the  relief  of  a 
squaw,  lying  seriously  ill  in  a wigwam  near  the  fort,  he  obeyed  the  request. 

He  approached  the  wigwam  without  misgiving,  but  before  he  could 
enter  it  he  was  shot  dead  by  two  Indians.  The  reports  were  heard  at  the 


PRESQUE  ISLE, 


67 


fort,  when  the  sergeant  imprudently  went  out  to  learn  the  cause.  He  was 
instantly  made  prisoner.  A few  minutes  later,  three  Canadians  appeared 
at  the  fort  and  summoned  it 
to  surrender,  guaranteeing 
the  lives  of  the  garrison  if 
they  complied,  and  massacre 
if  they  refused.  Being  with- 
out a leader  and  in  great 
terror,  the  men  complied. 

Presque  Isle  was  the 
next  to  go  down,  but  it  may 


be  said  she 
sank  with  col- 
ors flying. 
This  fort 
stood  close  by 
the  present  city  of 
Erie,  on  the  southern 
shore  of  the  lake. 
It  had  a strong  two- 
story  block  house  at 
one  of  its  angles,  with  projecting  upper  stories,  so  as  to  permit  the  defend- 
ers to  shoot  down  on  the  heads  of  their  assailants  below.  The  blockhouse 


ATTACK  ON 

PRESQUE  ISLE. 


68 


A BRAVE  DEFENSE. 


stood  on  a projecting  point  of  land,  between  the  lake  and  a small  stream, 
whose  bank  rose  in  a high  ridge  within  forty  rods  of  the  structure,  which 
thus  gave  cover  to  an  attacking  party,  while  the  bank  of  the  lake  offered 
a similar  advantage  on  another  side. 

Before  the  break  of  day,  on  the  15th  of  June,  the  garrison  of 
Presque  Isle  learned  that  the  Indians  were  present.  The  rising  sun  dis- 
closed two  hundred  warriors,  mostly  from  the  neighborhood  of  Detroit. 
Foreseeing  a desperate  fight,  Ensign  Christie,  the  commandant,  withdrew 
the  garrison  to  the  blockhouse,  determined  to  defend  it  to  the  last. 

The  Indians  opened  a hot  fire,  sending  their  bullets  through  the  loop- 
holes and  every  crevice  that  presented  itself.  In  addition,  they  shot  fire  ar- 
rows upon  the  roof  and  hurled  balls  of  burning  pitch  against  the  walls.  The 
dry  timbers  quickly  took  fire,  but  the  summit  of  the  blockhouse  contained 
an  opening,  partially  protected  by  a wall  of  plank,  through  which  the  garri- 
son could  dash  water  upon  the  flames.  This  was  done  again  and  again,  the 
fire  being  extinguished  times  without  number. 

The  next  move  of  the  Indians  was  to  roll  logs  to  the  top  of  the  ridges 
from  behind  which  they  discharged  their  rifles  and  threw  their  fire-balls 
with  greater  effect.  Near  the  fort  was  a ditch,  which  was  so  inviting  that 
every  few  minutes  an  Indian  or  two  made  an  attempt  to  dart  across  the 
short  open  space  and  reach  it;  but  the  watchful  defenders  had  them 
under  close  range,  and  never  failed  to  kill  or  wound  everyone  making 
the  essay. 

Ordinarily  such  a heroic  defense  would  have  caused  the  Indians  to 
withdraw,  but  these  red  men  were  made  of  sterner  stuff.  It  may  be  said 
that  they  had  only  begun  to  fight. 

The  next  sight  which  greeted  the  defenders  was  a terrifying  one,  and 
might  well  cause  despair.  A heap  of  earth  and  stones  began  rapidly  rising 
behind  the  breastworks,  increasing  in  size  so  fast  that  there  remained  no 
doubt  that  the  Indians  were  undermining  the  blockhouse 

Hardly  had  the  garrison  comprehended  this  new  danger,  when  they 
were  confronted  by  a more  imminent  one.  The  repeated  extinguishment 
of  the  blaze  kindled  on  the  roof  had  well-nigh  exhausted  the  supply  of 
water.  There  was  a well  on  the  parade  ground,  but  it  was  sure  death  to 
approach  it.  Only  one  thing  could  be  done:  that  was  to  dig  a new  well 
within  the  blockhouse  itself. 

Not  a moment  was  lost.  The  flooring  was  ripped  up  and  the  men 
worked  desperately,  their  comrades  firing  the  heated  rifles  from  the  loop- 
holes in  the  hope  of  holding  their  enemies  in  check. 

The  weather  was  hot  and  the  perspiration  streamed  from  the  grimy 
faces  of  the  diggers,  but  they  toiled  furiously.  Before  there  was  the  first 
sign  of  water  the  roof  again  broke  into  a blaze,  for  their  enemies  suspected 


THE  SUMMONS  TO  SURRENDER.  69 

the  dire  extremity  of  the  garrison.  All  of  the  precious  supply  that  was  left 
was  dashed  on  the  twist  of  flame,  which  went  out. 

The  toilers  relieved  each  other  at  the  well,  the  dirt  being  flung  upward 
in  a continuous  shower,  as  the  workers  sank  below  the  surface.  No  sign 
of  water,  and  again  a soldier  called  out  that  one  of  the  burning  arrows  had 
caught,  and  the  roof  was  once  more  on  fire,  while  not  a drop  of  liquid 
remained  to  extinguish  it. 

Just  then  one  of  the  garrison  hastily  crept  out  of  the  little  inclosure  at 
the  crest  of  the  roof,  tore  off  the  burning  shingles  amid  a shower  of  bullets, 
and  was  back  again  without  receiving  a scratch. 

The  fighting  had  continued  all  day  without  intermission,  and  darkness 
closed  upon  the  scene.  But  night  brought  no  rest.  The  Indians  kept  up 
their  firing  until  the  sun  rose  again,  while  the  defenders  took  turns  in 
sleeping;  but  before  that  time  the  diggers  of  the  well  within  the  block- 
house had  struck  a generous  flow  of  water. 

This  happy  issue  was  their  salvation  for  the  time,  for  the  Indians  had 
tunneled  their  way  to  the  house  of  the  commanding  officer,  which  they  set 
on  fire.  It  burned  like  tinder,  and  was  so  close  to  the  larger  structure  that 
the  inmates  were  in  danger  of  being  stifled  by  the  overpowering  heat.  It 
was  so  close,  indeed,  that  the  outer  wall  was  scorched  and  finally  broke  into 
flame.  The  defenders,  drawing  water  from  the  well,  poured  it  upon  the 
blaze,  which  finally  died  out  as  the  commander’s  house  sank  into  a mass  of 
glowing  embers. 

The  interior  of  the  blockhouse  by  this  time  had  become  like  an  oven, 
where,  with  the  air  pulsating  and  hot  with  gunpowder  smoke,  the  men 
panted  for  breath.  They  were  worn  out,  for  the  fighting  and  work  had 
been  so  desperate  that  rest  was  impossible.  Nevertheless,  they  kept  up 
the  defense  through  the  second  day  and  until  the  following  midnight. 

At  the  hour  named  someone  called  out  in  French  from  the  Indian 
intrenchments,  warning  the  garrison  that  further  resistance  could  not  help 
them  since  preparations  were  complete  for  setting  fire  to  the  blockhouse 
above  and  below  at  the  same  time.  Ensign  Christie,  calling  back,  asked 
whether  there  was  anyone  among  his  assailants  who  spoke  English.  A 
man  answered  in  that  tongue,  telling  him  that  if  he  surrendered  the  lives 
of  all  would  be  spared,  but  if  they  continued  to  fight  they  would  be  burned 
alive. 

The  brave  Christie,  determined  not  to  be  entrapped,  replied  that  he 
would  give  his  answer  in  the  morning.  He  did  not  mean  to  yield  so  long 
as  any  hope  remained.  His  answer  was  accepted  and  the  firing  for  the 
first  time  ceased,  the  exhausted  garrison  throwing  themselves  on  the  floor 
and  sinking  into  a deep  sleep,  with  a few  on  the  watch  against  treachery. 

When  morning  came  Christie  sent  two  of  his  men  as  if  to  treat  with 


79 


CAPTURE  OF  THE  FORT. 


the  enemy.  Their  real  business,  however,  was  to  learn  whether  what  had 
been  said  about  the  preparations  to  burn  the  blockhouse  was  true.  He 
instructed  them  to  make  a signal  by  which  he  would  know  the  facts.  Then 
he  watched  the  couple  as  they  climbed  the  breastwork.  He  saw  them 
pause  a moment,  look  around,  and  then  came  the  dreaded  signal.  He 
knew  that  all  hope  of  beating  off  his  assailants  was  gone. 

As  directed,  the  soldiers  demanded  that  two  of  the  leading  chiefs 
should  meet  Christie  half-way  between  the  breastworks  and  the  blockhouse 
to  receive  his  surrender.  This  was  done,  the  ensign  stipulating  that  the 
lives  of  the  garrison  should  be  spared  and  that  they  might  withdraw  un- 
molested to  the  nearest  post. 

It  is  a pleasure  to  record  that,  although  the  conditions  of  this  agree- 
ment were  violated  by  the  Indians,  yet  it  was  not  to  the  shocking  extent 
which  is  common  among  those  people.  After  the  grimy,  pale,  and  ex- 
hausted men  gave  up  their  weapons  that  had  served  them  so  well,  they 
were  surrounded  and  made  prisoners.  They  were  detained  some  time  in 
the  vicinity,  and  then  sent  as  prisoners  to  Detroit.  There  Christie  suc- 
ceeded in  making  his  escape  and  joined  the  garrison  under  Major  Gladwyn. 


CHAPTER  X. 


PONTIAC’S  CONSPIRACY  (CONTINUED) — ATTEMPTS  TO  DESTROY  THE 
SCHOONER — ARRIVAL  OF  DALZELL — THE  BATTLE  AT  BLOODY  RUN — 
A REMARKABLE  ESCAPE. 

IT  will  be  remembered  that  one  of  the  schooners  attached  to  the  fort  at 
Detroit  had  gone  down  Lake  Erie  to  hasten  the  coming  of  Lieutenant 
Cuyler,  with  his  supplies.  Reaching  Niagara,  she  stayed  until  that  officer 
came  back  with  the  news  of  the  massacre  of  most  of  his  men.  He  and  the 
survivors  he  brought  with  him,  together  with  a few  of  the  troops  that  could 
be  spared  from  Niagara,  were  ordered  to  embark  on  the  schooner,  which 
set  out  to  return  to  Detroit  with  the  needed  provisions. 

On  the  23d  of  June,  the  garrison  at  Detroit  noticed  an  unusual  com- 
motion among  the  Indians.  That  night  a Canadian  came  in  and  told  the 
commandant  that  the  schooner  was  a short  distance  below  and  was  trying 
to  come  up,  while  the  Indians,  to  the  number  of  more  than  eight  hundred, 
were  making  ready  to  attack  her.  Gladwyn  fired  a couple  of  cannon  to 
let  his  friends  know  that  he  still  held  out,  and  then,  with  an  anxiety  which 
perhaps  can  be  imagined,  awaited  the  result  of  the  attack  on  the  part  of  the 
schooner,  with  whose  fate  it  may  be  said  his  own  and  that  of  his  men  was 
closely  linked. 

Late  in  the  afternoon,  the  vessel,  favored  by  a gentle  breeze,  began  as- 
cending the  stream  between  the  main  shore  and  the  lengthy  margin  of  Fight- 
ing Island.  She  had  sixty  well-armed  men  on  board,  but  the  officer  kept 
all  but  a dozen  out  of  sight,  hoping  that  the  seeming  weakness  would  tempt 
the  Indians  to  attack  him. 

The  schooner  had  not  quite  reached  the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel, 
when  the  wind  died  out  and  the  anchor  was  dropped.  The  vessel  was 
almost  opposite  to  and  within  gunshot  of  a breastwork  of  logs  which 
the  Indians  had  erected  on  the  shore  of  Turkey  Island,  hiding  it  so  care- 
fully with  bushes  that  the  crew  had  no  suspicion  of  its  existence.  But 
they  were  on  the  alert. 

The  night  wore  slowly  on,  the  only  sounds  breaking  the  impressive 
stillness  being  that  of  the  current  softly  rippling  about  the  bow  of  the 
schooner.  The  brooding  silence  was  like  that  which  had  held  reign  in  that 
spot  centuries  before  the  foot  of  a white  man  trod  the  pathless  wilderness. 

The  night  was  far  along  when  the  lynx-eyed  sentinel  became  certain 
that  a number  of  dark  objects  were  moving  in  the  gloom  along  shore.  He 


71 


72 


ATTACK  AND  REPULSE  OF  THE  INDIANS. 


could  hear  no  sounds,  but  he  knew  the  Indians  were  at  mischief.  This  was 
what  had  been  expected  for  hours,  ar.d  the  men  waiting  below  received 
their  whispered  commands  and,  coming  on  deck,  noiselessly  took  their 
places. 

The  warriors,  stealing  forward  in  their  birch  canoes,  were  now  close  at 
hand,  exulting  in  the  certainty  that  another  rich  prize  was  about  to  fall 
into  their  grasp.  They  saw  no  sign  of  life  about  the  huge  vessel,  so  soon 
to  become  their  own,  with  all  its  plunder  and  the  scalps  of  the  crew. 

Suddenly  someone  struck  a smart  blow  on  the  mast  with  a hammer. 
Instantly  the  schooner  flamed  out,  as  if  the  magazine  had  exploded.  Grape 
and  musket  shot  came  in  a crimson  tempest  from  her  side,  killing  fourteen 
warriors,  wounding  many  more,  and  sending  the  rest  swimming,  diving,  and 
paddling  in  consternation  for  the  shore. 

As  soon  as  the  discomfited  Indians  could  rally  from  this  repulse,  they 
began  firing  from  their  breastwork,  whereupon  anchor  was  lifted  and  the 
schooner  dropped  down  stream  out  of  range. 

Waiting  for  a stronger  favoring  wind,  the  schooner  repeated  the 
attempt  several  days  later.  Though  continually  fired  upon,  not  one  of  the 
crew  was  hurt,  and,  sending  some  grape  into  the  Wyandot  village  as  she 
passed  and  killing  several  warriors,  she  anchored  beside  the  other  schooner, 
where  all  danger  was  past. 

No  arrival  could  have  been  more  welcome,  for  the  vessel  brought  the 
much  needed  supply  of  ammunition  and  provisions.  She  brought,  too,  the 
important  news  that  peace  had  been  finally  concluded  between  England 
and  France.  This  was  most  disagreeable  to  the  Canadians  and  French  at 
the  fort.  They  told  Pontiac  and  his  followers  that  the  statement  was  a 
falsehood  of  Major  Gladwyn,  who  had  invented  it  for  the  purpose  of 
frightening  them.  They  assured  the  red  men  further  that  a powerful 
French  army  was  at  that  very  hour  on  its  way  to  Detroit,  and  would  soon 
make  prisoners  of  all  the  English  in  the  country.  The  chieftain  and  war- 
riors implicitly  believed  this,  and  held  no  thought  of  “letting  up”  on  the 
beleaguered  garrison. 

Pontiac  was  exasperated  by  the  safe  arrival  of  the  vessel,  for  he  knew 
what  a godsend  it  must  prove  to  the  fort.  In  the  hope  of  frightening 
Gladwyn  into  submission,  he  sent  a summons  for  him  to  surrender,  guaran- 
teeing the  lives  of  all  his  garrison  and  making  the  usual  threat  in  the  event 
of  refusal.  He  added  that  he  was  certain  to  receive  large  re-enforcements 
shortly,  and,  when  they  came,  he  could  not  prevent  their  taking  the  scalp 
of  every  Englishman  in  the  fort.  The  commandant  returned  a con- 
temptuous reply  to  the  demand. 

The  leader  of  the  Ottawas  was  naturally  anxious  to  secure  the  active 
support  of  the  Canadians  in  the  war.  He  now  determined  on  a final 


NIGHT  ATTACK  ON  THE  SCHOONER. 


PONTIAC’S  COUNCIL  WITH  THE  CANADIANS. 


75 


attempt.  He,  therefore,  summoned  them  to  a council,  which  was  con- 
ducted with  all  the  dignity  and  impressiveness  of  which  he  was  so  consum- 
mate a master.  After  several  pipes  had  been  passed  around  from  hand  to 
hand,  Pontiac  rose  and  threw  down  a war  belt  at  the  feet  of  the  Canadians. 

“ My  brothers,”  said  he,  “ how  long  will  you  suffer  this  bad  flesh  to 
remain  on  your  lands  ? I have  told  you  before,  and  I now  tell  you  again, 
that  when  I took  up  the  hatchet,  it  was  for  your  good.  This  year  the 
English  must  all  perish  throughout  Canada.  The  Master  of  Life  com- 
mands it,  and  you,  who  know  him  better  than  we,  wish  to  oppose  his  will. 
Until  now  I have  said  nothing  on  this  matter.  I have  not  urged  you  to 
take  part  with  us  in  the  war.  It  would  have  been  enough  had  you  been 
content  to  sit  quiet  on  your  mats,  looking  on,  while  wre  were  fighting  for 
you.  But  you  have  not  done  so.  You  call  yourselves  our  friends,  and  yet 
you  assist  the  English  with  your  provisions,  and  go  about  as  spies  among 
our  villages.  This  must  not  continue.  You  must  be  either  wholly  French, 
take  up  the  war  belt,  and  lift  the  hatchet  with  us ; but  if  you  are  English, 
then  we  declare  war  upon  you.  My  brothers,  I know  this  is  a hard  thing. 
We  are  all  alike  children  of  our  great  father,  the  King  of  France,  and  it  is 
hard  to  fight  among  brethren  for  the  sake  of  dogs.  But  there  is  no  choice. 
Look  upon  the  belt,  and  let  us  hear  your  answer.” 

Among  the  Canadians  was  one  who,  suspecting  the  purpose  of  Pon- 
tiac, brought  a copy  of  the  capitulation  of  Montreal,  with  its  dependencies, 
including  Detroit.  He  exhibited  this,  declaring  that  while  he  and  his 
friends  sympathized  with  the  red  men,  yet  if  they  took  up  arms  against 
the  English  it  would  be  contrary  to  the  commands  of  the  King  of  France, 
who  would  punish  them  therefor.  He  asked  Pontiac  how  that  difficulty 
could  be  met.  The  chief  was  puzzled  for  the  moment,  but  he  received  un- 
expected help.  Some  of  the  vagabonds  among  the  Canadians  declared 
their  willingness  to  help  Pontiac,  and  he  and  his  followers  gave  them  a 
right  royal  welcome.  They,  however,  did  him  little  service,  and  the  bulk 
of  the  Canadians  remained  neutral  as  before. 

That  night  a party  of  renegades  and  savages  approached  the  fort,  and, 
intrenching  themselves,  began  firing  upon  the  garrison  at  daybreak. 
Lieutenant  Hay,  with  a small  force,  sallied  out  and  scattered  the  party 
without  difficulty.  Among  the  English  was  a soldier  who  had  spent 
so  much  time  with  the  Indians  that  he  was  as  much  of  a savage  as  they. 
He  wrenched  the  scalp  from  the  head  of  one  of  the  fallen  Indians  and 
brandished  it,  with  an  exultant  whoop,  after  the  retreating  savages. 

The  result  of  this  shocking  performance  was  more  woeful  than  could 
have  been  anticipated.  The  brave,  high-minded  Major  Campbell  was  still 
a prisoner  among  the  Indians,  though  allowed  to  make  his  home  in  the 
house  of  one  of  the  Canadians.  The  father  of  the  warrior  that  had  been 


;6 


THE  FIRE-RAFTS. 


scalped  was  so  enraged  that  he  summoned  a party,  went  to  the  dwelling 
where  Major  Campbell  was  confined,  and  inflicted  a horrible  death  upon 
the  brave  old  man.  Lieutenant  M’Dougal,  his  companion  in  captivity,  had 
made  his  escape  some  time  previous. 

The  two  armed  schooners  opposite  the  fort  were  so  obnoxious  to  Pon- 
tiac that  he  resolved  to  destroy  them.  They  occasionally  sent  a cannon 
ball  toward  the  savages,  compelling  them  to  make  their  camps  beyond 
range.  Now  and  then,  too,  they  hoisted  anchor  and  indulged  in  a 
short  excursion,  during  which  they  gave  their  enemies  unwelcome 
attention. 

On  the  night  of  the  ioth  of  July,  the  Indians  tied  together  two  boats, 
filled  with  burning  pitch  pine,  bark,  and  other  combustibles  and  set  it  afloat 
above  the  vessels.  The  raft  burned  fiercely,  but  providentially  drifted  by 
without  inflicting  harm  to  either  of  the  schooners.  On  the  following  night 
the  attempt  was  repeated,  with  a much  larger  raft,  which  threw  its  ghastly 
glow  against  the  fort,  the  vessels,  and  the  wooded  shore,  as  that  also  floated 
harmlessly  past. 

Pontiac  next  began  a raft  of  different  construction,  which  promised 
success,  but  Gladwyn  made  such  good  preparations  for  defense  that  the 
Indians  gave  up  the  task. 

The  siege  of  Detroit  had  now  lasted  for  nearly  three  months,  and  some 
of  the  warriors  were  beginning  to  weary  of  the  prolonged  contest,  which 
resulted  in  such  slight  gain  to  them.  The  Wyandots  and  Pottawatomies 
showed  a lukewarmness.  They  came  to  the  fort  and  declared  their  wish  to 
make  peace  with  Major  Gladwyn.  The  latter  demanded  that  they  should 
exchange  the  white  prisoners  whom  he  knew  were  in  their  hands.  The  Indi- 
ans agreed,  but  attempted  to  deceive  the  commandant,  who  sharply  rebuked 
them.  The  exchange  was  effected  after  considerable  wrangling,  during 
which  the  Indians  were  on  the  point  of  attacking  Gladwyn,  despite  the  cer- 
tainty of  their  own  swift  punishment  therefor. 

Meanwhile,  a strong  force  was  on  its  way  to  the  aid  of  Detroit.  Cap- 
tain Dalzell  had  left  Niagara  with  twenty-two  barges,  bearing  two  hundred 
and  eighty  men,  with  a number  of  cannon  and  a supply  of  ammunition. 
They  reached  Sandusky  on  the  26th  of  July,  and,  marching  inland  to  the 
village  of  the  Wyandots,  burned  it  to  the  ground,  and  destroyed  the  corn 
which  was  growing  in  the  fields.  Embarking  again,  Dalzell  reached  the 
mouth  of  the  Detroit  two  nights  later  and  cautiously  made  his  way  up  the 
river.  Fortunately,  he  was  not  seen  by  the  Indians,  who,  had  they  known 
of  his  coming,  would  have  massacred  him  and  all  his  men. 

The  following  morning,  when  midway  between  the  villages  of  the 
Wyandots  and  Pottawatomies,  they  were  attacked  by  the  warriors  of  both, 
in  the  face  of  the  treaty  of  peace  they  had  made  with  Gladwyn  only  a 


CAPTAIN  DALZELL’S  EXPEDITION.  77 

couple  of  weeks  before.  The  Indians  were  repulsed,  but  not  until  fifteen 
of  the  English  were  killed  or  wounded. 

Among  the  new  arrivals  was  the  veteran  Indian  fighter,  Major  Rogers, 
who  had  visited  that  region  a couple  of  years  before,  with  news  of  the  ces- 
sion of  the  western  posts  to  England.  He  brought  with  him  twenty  of  his 
famous  rangers. 

Captain  Dalzell  was  a brave  and  competent  officer,  who  had  been  a 
comrade  of  Putnam  in  some  of  his  most  stirring  experiences.  He  urged 
upon  Gladwyn  that  the  time  had  come  when  a fatal  blow  could  be  dealt  to 
Pontiac  and  his  horde.  He  asked  permission  to  march  out  at  night  and 
attack  the  Indian  camp.'  Gladwyn  replied  that  the  risk  was  too  great,  but 
Dalzell  was  so  persistent  that  the  commandant  yielded  against  his  judg- 
ment. 

Preparations  were  made  for  the  attack  on  the  afternoon  of  the  30th, 
but,  through  some  appalling  oversight,  the  project  became  known  to  several 
Canadians,  who  told  Pontiac.  The  latter  had  lately  removed  his  camp  to  a 
point  several  miles  above  the  mouth  of  Parent’s  Creek,  behind  a large 
marsh. 

In  the  gloomy  stillness  beyond  midnight,  two  hundred  and  fifty  men 
passed  out  of  the  gates  like  so  many  shadows,  and  began  their  march. 
They  filed  two  deep  along  the  road,  while  a couple  of  large  bateaux,  each 
with  a swivel  at  its  bow,  rowed  up  the  river  abreast  of  them.  The  advance 
guard  of  twenty-five  men  was  led  by  Lieutenant  Brown,  the  center  by  Cap- 
tain Gray,  and  the  rear  by  Captain  Grant. 

It  was  a hot,  still  night,  and  the  men  were  in  light  undress,  as  they 
tramped  steadily  forward,  little  dreaming  that  the  Indian  scouts  were 
watching  every  step  they  took,  and  that  Pontiac  had  made  preparation  for 
their  overthrow. 

A mile  and  a half  from  the  fort,  Parent’s  Creek,  christened  that  night 
by  the  name  of  Bloody  Run,  wound  through  a rough  hollow,  entering  the 
river  past  a rank  growth  of  grass  and  sedge.  Near  its  mouth  it  was  crossed 
by  a bridge,  just  beyond  which  the  land  rose  in  sharp  ridges  parallel  with 
the  creek.  These  summits  contained  rough  intrenchments,  thrown  up  by 
Pontiac  to  protect  the  camp  when  he  first  occupied  the  ground  imme- 
diately beyond.  There  were  piles  of  wood  and  picket  fences,  behind  which 
crouched  a multitude  of  warriors,  with  their  fingers  on  the  triggers  of 
their  guns. 

The  sky  was  cloudy  and  dark.  The  soldiers  pushed  onward  with  some 
misgivings,  for  there  was  something  suspicious  in  the  unnatural  calm. 
Parkman  thus  graphically  describes  what  followed : 

‘‘The  advanced  guard  were  half-way  over  the  bridge  and  the  main 
body  just  entering  upon  it,  when  a horrible  burst  of  yells  rose  in  their 


A DISASTROUS  REPULSE. 


7 8 

front,  and  the  Indian  guns  blazed  forth  in  a general  discharge.  Half  the 
advanced  party  were  shot  down  ; the  appalled  survivors  shrank  back  aghast. 
The  confusion  reached  even  the  main  body,  and  the  whole  recoiled 
together;  but  Dalzell  raised  his  clear  voice  above  the  din,  advanced  to  the 
front,  rallied  the  men,  and  led  them  forward  to  the  attack. 

“Again  the  Indians  poured  in  their  volley,  and  again  the  English 
hesitated ; but  Dalzell  shouted  from  the  van,  and,  in  the  madness  of 
mingled  rage  and  fear,  they  charged  at  a run  across  the  bridge  and  up  the 
heights  beyond.  Not  an  Indian  was  there  to  oppose  them.  In  vain  the 
furious  soldiers  sought  their  enemy  behind  fences  and  intrenchments.  The 
active  savages  had  fled  ; yet  still  their  guns  flashed  thick  through  the  gloom, 
and  their  war  cry  rose  with  undiminished  clamor.  The  English  pushed 
forward  amid  the  pitchy  darkness,  quite  ignorant  of  their  way,  and  soon 
became  involved  in  a maze  of  outhouses  and  inclosures.  At  every  pause 
they  made  the  retiring  enemy  would  gather  to  renew  the  attack,  firing  back 
hotly  on  the  front  and  flanks.  To  advance  further  would  be  useless,  and 
the  only  alternative  was  to  withdraw  and  wait  for  daylight. 

“Captain  Grant,  with  his  company,  recrossed  the  bridge  and  took  up 
his  station  on  the  road.  The  rest  followed,  a small  party  remaining  to  hold 
the  enemy  in  check  while  the  dead  and  wounded  were  placed  on  board  the 
two  bateaux,  which  had  rowed  up  to  the  bridge  during  the  action.  The 
task  was  commenced  amid  a sharp  fire  from  both  sides,  and  before  it  was 
completed  heavy  volleys  were  heard  from  the  rear,  where  Captain  Grant 
was  stationed.  A great  force  of  Indians  had  fired  upon  him  from  a large 
house  and  the  neighboring  orchards.  Grant  pushed  up  the  hill  and  drove 
them  from  the  orchards  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet — drove  them  also  from 
the  house,  and,  entering  the  latter,  found  two  Canadians  within.  These 
men  told  him  that  the  Indians  were  bent  on  cutting  off  the  English  from 
the  fort,  and  that  they  had  gone  in  great  numbers  to  occupy  the  houses 
which  commanded  the  road  below. 

“ It  was  now  evident  that  instant  retreat  was  necessary  ; and  the  com- 
mand being  issued  to  that  effect,  the  men  fell  back  in  marching  order,  and 
slowly  began  their  retrograde  movement.  Grant  was  now  in  the  van,  and 
Dalzell  at  the  rear.  Some  of  the  Indians  followed,  keeping  up  a scattering 
and  distant  fire  ; and  from  time  to  time  the  rear  faced  about,  to  throw  back 
a volley  of  musketry  at  the  pursuers. 

“ Having  proceeded  in  this  manner  for  half  a mile,  they  reached  a point 
where,  close  upon  the  right,  were  many  barns  and  outhouses,  with  strong 
picket  fences.  Behind  these,  and  in  a newly  dug  cellar  close  at  hand,  lay 
concealed  a great  multitude  of  Indians.  They  suffered  the  advanced  party 
to  pass  unmolested  ; but,  when  the  center  and  rear  came  opposite  their 
ambuscade,  they  raised  a frightful  yell,  and  poured  a volley  among  them . 


FLIGHT  OF  THE  SOLDIERS. 


79 


The  men  had  well-nigh  fallen  into  a panic.  The  river  ran  close  on  their 
left,  and  the  only  avenue  of  escape  lay  along  the  road  in  front.  Breaking 
their  ranks,  they  crowded  upon  one  another  in  blind  eagerness  to  escape 
the  storm  of  bullets  ; and  but  for  the  presence  of  Dalzell,  the  retreat  would 
have  been  turned  into  a flight.  ‘ The  enemy,’  writes  an  officer  who  was 
in  the  fight,  ‘ marked  him  for  his  extraordinary  bravery ; ’ and  he  had 
already  received  two  severe  wounds.  Yet  his  exertions  did  not  slacken 
for  a moment.  Some  of  the  soldiers  he  rebuked,  some  he  threatened,  and 
some  he  beat  with  the  flat  of  his  sword  ; till  at  last  order  was  partially 
restored,  and  the  fire  of  the  enemy  returned  with  effect. 

“ Though  it  was  near  daybreak,  the  dawn  was  obscured  by  a thick  fog, 
and  little  could  be  seen  of  the  Indians  except  the  incessant  flashes  of  their 
guns  amid  the  mist,  while  hundreds  of  voices,  mingled  in  one  appalling  yell, 
confused  the  faculties  of  the  men,  and  drowned  the  shout  of  command. 
The  enemy  had  taken  possession  of  a house,  from  the  windows  of  which 
they  fired  down  upon  the  English.  Major  Rogers,  with  some  of  his  provin- 
cial rangers,  burst  the  door  with  an  ax,  rushed  in,  and  expelled  them. 
Captain  Gray  was  ordered  to  dislodge  a party  from  behind  some  neighbor- 
ing fences.  He  charged  them  with  his  company,  but  fell  mortally  wounded 
in  the  attempt.  They  gave  way,  however;  and  now,  the  fire  of  the  Indians 
being  much  diminished,  the  retreat  was  resumed. 

“ No  sooner  had  the  men  faced  about,  than  the  savages  came  darting 
through  the  mist  upon  their  flank  and  rear,  cutting  down  stragglers  and 
scalping  the  fallen.  At  a little  distance  lay  a sergeant  helplessly  wounded, 
raising  himself  on  his  hands,  and  gazing  with  a look  of  despair  on  his 
retiring  comrades.  The  sight  caught  the  eye  of  Dalzell.  That  gallant 
soldier,  in  the  true  spirit  of  heroism,  ran  out,  amid  the  firing,  to  rescue  the 
wounded  man,  when  a shot  struck  him  and  he  fell  dead.  Few  observed  his 
fate  and  none  durst  turn  back  to  recover  his  body.  The  detachment  pressed 
on,  greatly  harassed  by  the  pursuing  Indians.  Their  loss  would  have  been 
much  more  severe,  had  not  Major  Rogers  taken  possession  of  another  house, 
which  commanded  the  road  and  covered  the  retreat  of  the  party.” 

This  house  was  so  large  and  strong  that  the  cellar  was  crowded  with 
women,  who  had  rushed  there  for  shelter.  While  the  frantic  men,  who 
had  swarmed  after  the  major,  were  looking  for  refuge,  they  came  upon  a 
keg  of  whisky,  of  which  they  eagerly  drank.  Clothing,  furniture,  and 
indeed  everything  within  reach,  was  piled  against  the  windows  to  serve  as 
a barricade,  and  from  behind  these  the  grimy,  panting  soldiers  fired  as  they 
gained  opportunity  at  the  screeching  assailants,  who  maintained  an  inces- 
sant fusillade. 

The  owner  of  the  house,  an  old  man,  stood  on  a trapdoor  to  keep  the 
soldiers  from  seeking  shelter  among  the  women  in  the  cellar.  His  head 


8o 


PONTIAC’S  VICTORY. 


was  grazed  by  a bullet,  which  buried  itself  in  the  wall,  where  it  could  be 
seen  for  many  years  afterward.  The  cursing  of  the  men,  some  of  whom 
were  half  drunken,  the  shrieks  of  the  wounded,  the  smothered  cries  of  the 
terrified  women  in  the  cellar,  the  whooping  of  the  Indians,  and  the  con- 
tinual firing,  both  within  and  without,  made  up  a pandemonium,  amid 
which  it  was  a long  time  before  Rogers  could  secure  a semblance  of 
order. 

Captain  Grant,  with  the  advance,  had  marched  a half  mile,  when  he 
found  some  defenses,  where  he  paused  to  await  the  arrival  of  the  center 
and  rear.  He  sent  men,  as  he  could  spare  them,  to  occupy  the  houses 
below,  and  thus  secured  communication  with  the  fort  and  effectually 
covered  the  retreat  thither.  An  hour  later  all  had  arrived  except  Rogers 
and  his  men,  who  were  so  beset  by  several  hundred  Indians  that  their 
escape  was  impossible  without  help. 

The  two  bateaux,  having  delivered  their  dead  and  wounded  at  the  fort, 
now  returned  to  a point  opposite  the  beleaguered  house,  where  they  opened 
such  an  effective  fire  on  the  Indians  that  they  scattered,  and  Rogers 
and  his  party  emerging,  hurried  down  the  road  to  join  Grant,  who  resumed 
his  retreat  on  their  arrival.  Then  they  fell  back  in  good  order,  being  re-en- 
forced in  succession  by  the  detachments  left  at  the  houses,  until  at  last  the 
fort  was  reached,  and  the  survivors  were  safe. 

In  this  bloody  affray  the  English  lost  fifty-nine  men,  killed  and 
wounded,  that  of  the  Indians  probably  being  about  one-third  of  that  num- 
ber. Pontiac  and  his  horde  were  greatly  elated  by  their  success.  The 
chieftain  commanded  at  Bloody  Run,  the  ambuscade  being  formed  by  the 
Ojibwas  and  Ottawas,  though  the  Wyandots  and  Pottawatomies  arrived  in 
time  to  take  part  in  the  closing  scenes. 

Pontiac  sent  out  runners  to  make  known  to  the  neighboring  tribes  his 
great  victory.  Re-enforcements  soon  began  arriving,  until  more  than  a 
thousand  armed  warriors  were  besieging  Detroit.  The  English,  however, 
were  not  in  much  fear,  for  the  garrison  had  been  increased,  until  it  included 
more  than  three  hundred  effective  men.  They  were  well  provisioned  and 
supplied,  and  did  not  doubt  that  the  siege  would  end  in  the  discomfiture  of 
the  Indians. 

The  smaller  schooner  had  been  sent  down  to  Niagara  with  dispatches. 
She  was  on  her  return  with  a master  and  crew,  comprising  twelve  men, 
besides  six  Iroquois  Indians,  believed  to  be  loyal  to  the  English.  Shortly 
after  entering  the  Detroit  River,  the  savages  asked  to  be  set  ashore.  The 
captain  was  thoughtless  enough  to  grant  their  request,  and  doubtless  they 
lost  no  time  in  hurrying  to  Pontiac,  with  news  of  the  weakness  of  the 
vessel. 

The  latter*  moved  slowly  up  the  river  until  dark,  when  she  anchored 


“ BLOW  HER  UP  ! ” 


81 


about  nine  miles  below  the  fort,  the  wind  having  fallen.  The  darkness  was 
so  profound  that  it  was  impossible  to  see  the  length  of  the  vessel.  The 
anxious  crew  kept  unceasing  watch,  but  their  eyes  were  of  little  help  amid 
such  Egyptian  gloom. 

From  out  the  impenetrable  shadows  along  shore  suddenly  glided  a fleet 
of  birch  canoes,  containing  fully  three  hundred  and  fifty  warriors.  They 
were  schooled  to  such  stealthy  movements,  and  the  listening  ears  of  the 
sentinels  failed  to  detect  any  sound  that  could  give  an  inkling  of  what  was 


“blow  her  up  ! 


coming,  though  there  was  not  one  who  did  not  feel  they  were  in  imminent 
peril. 

All  at  once  the  dusky  enemies  were  discerned,  approaching  so  swiftly 
that  there  was  only  time  to  fire  a single  cannon  shot,  when  they  began 
swarming  over  the  gunwales,  holding  their  knives  with  their  teeth.  The 
crew  fired  their  musketry  as  they  rose  to  view,  but  without  any  perceptible 
effect.  Throwing  down  their  guns,  they  snatched  up  the  hatchets  and 
spears  with  which  they  had  provided  themselves,  and  assailed  the  Indians 
with  such  fury  that  in  a few  minutes  they  had  killed  twice  their  own 
number. 

The  redskins,  however,  literally  overwhelmed  them,  bounding  over  the 
gunwales  so  swiftly  that  twice  or  three  times  the  force  of  the  crew  could 
not  have  checked  them.  The  master  of  the  vessel  was  dead,  others 
wounded,  and  the  dusky  figures  came  like  a resistless  mountain  torrent. 

“ Blow  her  up  ! ” 


82 


UNEXPECTED  GOOD  FORTUNE. 


It  was  the  mate  who  shouted  this  order  and  its  effect  was  altogether 
different  from  what  the  officer  anticipated.  Among  the  assailants  were  a 
number  of  Wyandots,  who  knew  enough  of  the  English  language  to  under- 
stand the  meaning  of  the  desperate  command.  They  interpreted  it  on  the 
instant  to  their  companions,  and  in  a twinkling  all  leaped  into  the  water, 
swimming  and  diving  frantically  for  shore,  to  escape  the  explosion  which 
they  believed  was  about  to  blow  them  all  into  their  happy  hunting  grounds. 

Two  of  the  crew  had  been  killed  and  four  badly  wounded,  so  that  had 
the  Indians  renewed  the  attack,  they  would  have  had  an  easy  task.  The 
fighting  had  been  of  the  hurricane  order,  for,  in  the  few  minutes  that  it 
lasted,  seven  Indians  were  killed,  and  twenty  wounded,  of  whom  eight 
were  known  to  have  died  a few  days  later.  The  survivors  of  the  crew 
were  afterward  deservedly  rewarded  for  the  bravery  they  displayed. 

The  little  schooner  renewed  her  ascent  of  the  river  the  following 
morning  and  reached  the  fort  without  further  molestation. 


CHAPTER  XI. 


PONTIAC’S  CONSPIRACY  (CONTINUED)— THE  FALL  OF  MICHILLIMACKINAC 
— A TRADER’S  ADVENTURES— GREEN  BAY  AND  SAULT  STE.  MARIE- 
LIEUTENANT  GORELL’S  TACT  AND  SUCCESS. 

T the  time  of  Pontiac’s  great  conspiracy,  none  of  the  British  settle- 


ments  extended  beyond  the  Alleghenies.  The  German  Flats  on  the 
Mohawk  marked  their  extent  in  New  York.  Bedford,  in  Pennsylvania,  was 
the  extreme  limit  on  the  frontier,  the  settlements  of  Virginia  extending 
to  about  the  same  distance.  Through  the  intervening  wilderness  were  the 
various  military  posts  connecting  the  different  points. 

Parkman  thus  describes  the  country  at  that  time  : “ One  of  the  most 
important  of  these  communicating  lines  passed  through  the  country  of  the 
Six  Nations,  and  guarded  the  route  between  the  northern  colonies  and 
Lake  Ontario.  The  communication  was  formed  by  the  Hudson,  the  Mo- 
hawk, Wood  Creek,  the  Oneida  Lake,  and  the  River  Oswego.  It  was 
defended  by  Forts  Stanwix,  Brewerton,  Oswego,  and  two  or  three  smaller 
posts.  Near  the  western  extremity  of  Lake  Ontario  stood  Fort  Niagara, 
at  the  mouth  of  the  river,  whence  it  derived  its  name.  It  was  a strong  and 
extensive  work,  guarding  the  access  to  the  whole  interior  country,  both  by 
way  of  the  Oswego  communication  just  mentioned,  and  by  that  of  Canada 
and  the  St.  Lawrence.  From  Fort  Niagara  the  route  lay  by  a portage  past 
the  great  falls  to  Presque  Isle,  on  Lake  Erie,  where  the  town  of  Erie  now 
stands.  Thence  the  traveler  could  pass,  by  a short  overland  passage,  to 
Fort  Le  Boeuf,  on  a branch  of  the  Allegheny  ; thence,  by  water,  to 
Venango;  and  thence  down  the  Allegheny  to  Fort  Pitt.  This  last  men- 
tioned post  stood  on  the  present  site  of  Pittsburg,  the  point  of  land  formed 
by  the  confluence  of  the  Allegheny  and  Monongahela.  Its  position  was 
as  captivating  to  the  eye  of  an  artist  as  it  was  commanding  in  a military 
point  of  view.  On  the  left  the  Monongahela  descended  through  a woody 
valley  of  singular  beauty;  on  the  right  flowed  the  Allegheny,  beneath  steep 
and  lofty  banks ; and  both  united,  in  front,  to  form  the  broad  Ohio,  which, 
flanked  by  picturesque  hills  and  declivities,  began  at  this  point  its  inter- 
minable progress  toward  the  Mississippi.  The  place  already  had  its  his- 
toric associations,  though,  as  yet,  their  roughness  was  unmellowed  by  the 
lapse  of  time.  It  was  here  that  the  French  had  erected  Fort  du  Quesne. 
Within  a few  miles  Braddock  encountered  his  disastrous  overthrow  ; and, 
on  the  hill  behind  the  fort,  Grant’s  Highlanders  and  Lewis’  Virginians  had 


84 


MICHILLI MACKINAC  AND  THE  FORT. 


been  surrounded  and  captured,  though  not  without  a stout  resistance  on 
the  part  of  the  latter.” 

Pontiac’s  war  affected  to  a greater  or  less  extent  all  the  sections 
named.  Reference  has  been  made  to  the  fall  of  Michillimackinac,  standing 
on  the  southern  shore  of  the  Straits  of  Mackinaw,  connecting  Lakes  Huron 
and  Michigan. 

Just  beyond  the  fort,  at  the  time  mentioned,  was  a cluster  of  Canadian 
houses,  roofed  with  bark  and  protected  by  strong  fences  of  round  pickets. 
Passing  through  the  gate,  the  visitor  came  upon  a large  square  area,  sur- 
rounded by  high  palisades.  A smaller  square  was  formed  within  by 
numerous  houses,  barracks,  and  other  buildings.  The  Jesuits  had  founded 
a mission  on  the  spot  nearly  a hundred  years  before.  The  two  other 
posts  in  this  northern  region  were  Green  Bay  and  Sault  Ste.  Marie, 
each  with  a mission  house,  a fort,  and  a few  Canadian  dwellings. 

Michillimackinac,  more  extensive  than  the  two  named,  contained  thirty 
families  within  the  palisades  of  the  fort  and  about  the  same  number  with- 
out. During  the  war,  the  settlers  and  garrison  were  cut  off  from  the  world. 
It  will  be  remembered  that  it  was  a long  distance  to  the  other  posts,  and 
communication  was  so  dangerous  that  many  months  passed  without  the 
first  item  of  news  reaching  the  people,  and  without  anything  being  heard 
from  them. 

The  Indians  in  the  vicinity  of  Michillimackinac  were  Ojibwas  and  Otta- 
was.  The  principal  village  of  the  former,  numbering  a hundred  warriors, 
stood  on  the  island  of  Michillimakinac,  or,  as  it  is  now  known,  Mackinaw. 
The  same  tribe  had  a smaller  village  near  the  head  of  Thunder  Bay. 

The  Ottawas,  comprising  two  hundred  and  fifty  warriors,  had  their  home 
some  distance  west  of  the  fort,  on  the  shore  of  Lake  Michigan.  They  were 
more  civilized  than  the  Ojibwas,  living  in  log  houses  and  cultivating  the 
ground  to  the  extent  of  providing  not  only  for  their  own  wants,  but  they 
were  able  to  carry  on  a thriving  business  by  furnishing  supplies  to  the 
garrison. 

Both  of  these  tribes  hated  the  English,  for  most  of  them  had  fought  on 
the  side  of  the  French.  In  the  spring  of  1763,  Pontiac’s  messengers 
appeared  among  the  Indians  in  the  neighborhood  and  urged  them  to  join 
in  the  war  against  the  English.  The  seed  thus  sown  fell  upon  soil  ready 
for  it.  The  warriors  eagerly  pledged  themselves  to  do  as  the  great  chief- 
tain wished. 

Before  summer  opened,  news  was  brought  that  Pontiac  had  struck  the 
English  at  Detroit,  and  the  Ojibwas,  whose  numbers  were  much  increased, 
determined  to  emulate  the  deeds  of  their  brethren  far  to  the  south. 
Inspired  by  jealousy  of  the  Ottawas,  they  resolved  to  make  the  attack 
without  their  aid. 


A STRANGE  GAME  OF  BALL. 


85 


The  garrison  at  Michillimackinac  at  that  time  was  composed  of  thirty- 
five  men  and  officers.  They  had  been  warned  by  several  Canadians  of 
their  danger,  and  Captain  Etherington,  the  commandant,  had  been  told  of 
the  scheme  to  destroy  all  the  English  on  the  Lakes.  That  officer  was  not 
the  only  person  who  has  played  the  fool  when  placed  in  a similar  situation. 
He  not  only  refused  to  believe  what  was  said,  but  threatened  to  arrest 

and  send  to  Detroit  the  next  one  who  alarmed  the  fort  with  such 

nonsense. 

There  was  an  English  trader  at  Michillimackinac  named  Henry.  He 
was  uneasy  because  of  what  he  saw  and  because  of  a distinct  warning  from 
a friendly  Indian,  who  urged  him  to  go  away  with  him  to  the  Sault  Ste. 
Marie.  But  Henry  admitted  that  he  shared  the  infatuation  of  Captain 
Etherington,  and  paid  no  attention  to  the  well-meant  counsel  of  his 
friend. 

On  the  morning  of  the  4th  of  June,  a number  of  Indians  came  into 
the  fort  and  invited  the  officers  and  soldiers  to  witness  a game  of  ball 

between  the  Ojibwas  and  Sacs,  the  warriors  of  which  tribe  had  only 

lately  arrived.  This  contest  was  not  what  is  known  to-day  as  base  ball, 
but  approached  more  nearly  that  other  lusty  amusement — so  conducive 
to  broken  heads  and  arms — called  football.  The  Indians  struggled  for  the 
fun  of  the  thing,  and  without  any  special  ambition  to  fly  the  champion- 
ship pennant. 

The  day  was  warm  and  sultry.  The  invitation  was  accepted,  for  at 
those  remote  stations  in  the  wilderness  anything  in  the  nature  of  entertain- 
ment was  welcome.  The  gates  were  left  wide  open,  and  the  soldiers 
gathered  under  the  shadow  of  the  palisades  to  watch  the  play.  Few  of  the 
soldiers  carried  weapons,  and  mingling  with  them  were  many  Canadians, 
while  numerous  squaws,  wrapped  in  blankets,  moved  here  and  there  in  the 
crowd. 

Captain  Etherington  and  Lieutenant  Leslie  stood  near  the  gate  and 
showed  their  interest  in  the  game  by  good-natured  betting.  The  amuse- 
ment is  known  to  the  Ojibwas  as  baggattaway.  Each  player  uses  a bat, 
with  which  to  drive  the  ball  toward  a pole  erected  at  the  further  extremity 
of  the  grounds.  His  opponent  makes  equally  strenuous  effort  to  force  the 
sphere  to  a similar  pole  at  the  other  limit.  The  struggle  was  exciting  to 
the  highest  degree.  The  players  shouted,  tumbled  over  each  other,  struck 
furiously  and  wo  ked  as  though  the  life  of  each  was  at  stake. 

Suddenly,  from  the  midst  of  this  fierce  swarm  of  desperately  earnest 
players,  the  ball  shot  up  in  the  air  as  if  from  the  mouth  of  a mortar,  and, 
curving  over,  dropped  near  the  pickets  of  the  fort.  It  looked  like  a chance 
shot,  and  so  all  the  spectators  believed  it  to  be,  but  instead  of  that,  it  was 
the  preconcerted  signal  for  the  massacre  of  the  English  garrison. 


86 


TRADER  HENRY’S  NARRATIVE. 


The  swarm  of  players  ran  like  so  many  wild  deer  in  pursuit  of  the  ball. 
At  the  moment  of  reaching  it,  the  shouts  turned  into  blood-curdling  war 
whoops.  The  waiting  squaws  whipped  out  their  hatchets  from  under  their 
blankets,  passed  them  to  the  warriors,  and  in  an  instant  pandemonium 
reigned.  Some  of  the  savages  assailed  the  spectators  outside  the  stock- 
ades, while  others  rushed  into  the  fort  and  struck  right  and  left  at  their 
victims  there. 

Before  Captain  Etherington  and  Lieutenant  Leslie  comprehended  what 
was  going  on,  they  were  seized  and  hurried  into  the  woods.  The  trader 
Henry,  already  referred  to,  has  left  behind  a graphic  account  of  his  remark- 
able experience.  Wishing  to  prepare  some  letters,  he  did  not  attend  the 
ball  game.  He  was  writing,  when  he  heard  the  war  cry  and  sounds  of  con- 
fusion. Springing  from  his  chair,  he  hurried  to  the  window,  where  he  saw 
the  Indians  within  the  fort  cutting  down  and  scalping  every  Englishman  in 
sight. 

Henry  seized  a fowling  piece  charged  with  bird  shot  and  waited 
several  minutes,  expecting  to  hear  the  drum  beat  to  arms.  During  this 
trying  interval,  he  saw  more  than  one  of  his  countrymen  struggling  be- 
tween the  knees  of  an  Indian,  who,  holding  him  in  this  manner,  scalped  him 
while  he  was  yet  living. 

Seeing  that  no  resistance  was  to  be  made  against  the  savages,  and 
conscious  of  his  own  peril,  Henry  cast  about  for  some  means  of  saving 
himself.  It  did  not  escape  his  notice  that  many  of  the  Canadian  inhabit- 
ants stood  calmly  watching  the  massacre,  taking  no  part  and  receiving  no 
harm  from  the  Indians.  This  suggested  to  the  trader  that  possibly  he 
might  find  refuge  in  one  of  their  houses. 

Between  the  rear  of  his  own  house  and  that  of  his  next  neighbor,  who 
was  a Canadian,  was  only  a low  fence,  over  which  he  hastily  climbed.  On 
entering,  he  saw  the  whole  family  at  the  front  windows  attentively  observ- 
ing the  slaughter.  Henry  at  once  appealed  to  the  head  of  the  house,  beg- 
ging him  to  give  him  hiding  until  the  massacre  was  over,  for,  if  he  did  so, 
there  was  hope  of  the  supplicant’s  life  being  saved. 

The  Canadian  looked  around,  shrugged  his  shoulders,  and  replied  he 
could  do  nothing  for  him.  Then  he  faced  the  other  way  again  and  gave 
his  attention  to  the  horrifying  scene  going  on  in  front  of  his  house. 

The  poor  fellow  was  in  despair,  but  the  next  moment,  a servant,  a 
Pani  (Pawnee)  woman  beckoned  to  him  to  follow  her.  She  conducted  him 
to  a door  and  whispered  : 

“That  leads  to  the  garret  ; hide  yourself  there.” 

He  could  only  murmur  his  gratitude,  while  she  hurried  him  up  the 
steps,  following  and  not  only  closing  the  door  behind  him,  but  locking  it 
and  taking  the  key. 


TEMPORARY  SAFETY. 


87 


Safe  for  the  moment,  the  trader  hunted  around  for  a small  opening, 
through  which  he  peered  out  upon  the  most  appalling  scene  he  had  ever  be- 
held. The  sights  which  met  his  gaze  were  too  horrible  to  be  told.  It  was 
hard  to  believe  that  human  beings  could  be  transformed  into  such  fiends,  as 
were  those  who  reveled  in  the  slaying  of  the  hapless  soldiers  of  the  fort. 

It  was  only  a few  minutes  before  the  cry  was  heard  from  the  leading 
actors  in  this  awful  tragedy  that  their  work  was  done.  They  were  sorry 
that  no  more  victims  were  left,  so  far  as  they  knew,  and  looking  eagerly 


“ THAT  LEADS  TO  THE  GARRET  ; HIDE  YOURSELF  THERE.” 


around  in  the  hope,  perchance,  of  catching  sight  of  some  poor  fugitive 
cowering  under  partial  shelter. 

Perhaps  the  feelings  of  the  trader  in  the  garret  may  be  imagined,  when 
he  heard  a number  of  Indians  enter  the  house  in  which  he  had  taken  refuge. 
The  floor  of  the  garret  was  the  ceiling  of  the  lower  room,  the  boards  being 
so  thin,  that  he  heard  every  word  spoken. 

The  first  inquiry  of  the  Indians  was  whether  there  was  any  English- 
man in  the  house.  The  owner  answered  that  he  did  not  know  of  any,  and 
therein  spoke  the  truth,  for,  in  his  absorption  in  the  massacre,  he  had  not 
noticed  the  action  of  the  servant  and  the  fugitive,  and  the  woman  kept  the 
secret.  The  Canadian  added  that  his  visitors  were  welcome  to  search,  and 
led  them  to  the  door  of  the  stairs. 


88 


DISCOVERED  AT  LAST. 


The  absence  of  the  key  caused  a slight  delay,  during  which  the  trader 
looked  around  for  some  additional  means  of  concealment.  In  one  corner 
lay  a heap  of  vessels,  such  as  are  used  in  making  maple  sugar.  He  crept 
into  an  opening,  back  and  below  this  pile,  having  just  time  to  do  so,  as  he 
heard  the  feet  of  the  Indians  ascending  the  stairs. 

Four  warriors,  armed  with  tomahawks  and  dripping  with  the  blood  of 
their  numerous  victims,  entered  the  room.  They  walked  about,  looking 
here,  there,  and  everywhere.  The  corner  in  which  the  fugitive  was  crouch- 
ing was  so  far  from  the  windows  that  it  was  in  partial  obscurity,  and  his 
clothing  was  of  nearly  the  same  color  as  the  wooden  implements  that  gave 
him  shelter.  His  fear  was  that  the  beating  of  his  heart  would  betray  him, 
but  he  was  not  discovered.  The  visitors  descended  the  steps,  and  the  door 
was  closed  once  more  upon  him,  who  ventured  to  breathe  freely,  though  he 
could  not  believe  that  he  would  be  spared  much  longer. 

He  was  prostrated  by  the  strain  to  which  he  had  been  subjected,  and, 
throwing  himself  upon  a featherbed  on  the  floor,  quickly  fell  asleep.  He 
did  not  wake  until  he  heard  the  door  again  opened.  His  visitor  this  time 
was  the  mistress  of  the  house,  who  showed  her  astonishment  when  Henry 
raised  his  head  and  addressed  her.  She  told  him  she  thought  the  danger 
was  over,  and  as  long  as  he  kept  himself  in  hiding  he  was  safe. 

It  was  raining,  and  she  had  come  up  to  stop  a hole  in  the  roof.  At 
the  request  of  the  trader,  who  was  suffering  from  the  heat,  she  brought  him 
a cup  of  water,  and  he  dropped  back  again  on  the  hot  feather  bed. 

Lying  thus,  he  naturally  fell  to  speculating  as  to  the  possibility  of 
escape.  The  first  thought  was  that  of  flight  to  Detroit.  But  that  post 
was  four  hundred  miles  away,  and,  to  reach  it,  he  must  pass  through  a 
stretch  of  wilderness,  where  all  the  inhabitants  were  thirsting  for  the  blood 
of  his  countrymen.  He  was  without  provisions  and  weapons  with  which 
to  shoot  game.  There  was  no  hope  in  that  direction,  while  to  stay  where 
he  was  must  inevitably  result  in  discovery.  With  the  great  question  un- 
solved, he  once  more  fell  asleep. 

It  was  daylight  when  he  was  awakened  by  the  sounds  of  the  family 
stirring  below.  A few  minutes  later  the  voices  of  Indians  were  heard. 
They  said  that  careful  search  had  been  made  for  the  English  trader,  but 
his  body  had  not  been  found,  and  it  was  certain,  therefore,  that  he  was  hid- 
ing somewhere.  The  wife  had  told  her  husband  about  the  poor  fellow  up- 
stairs, and  she  now  declared  in  French  that  she  would  not  permit  him  to 
stay  any  longer  in  the  house.  The  Indians  were  sure  to  discover  him  ere 
long,  and  would  revenge  themselves  upon  some  members  of  the  family. 

The  husband  at  first  would  not  agree  with  her,  but  finally  he  came  to 
her  way  of  thinking.  He  told  the  Indians  that  he  had  learned  that  the 
trader  was  really  in  the  house,  but  he  had  come  there  without  his  knowl- 


A TRYING  EXPERIENCE.  89 

edge,  and  he  would  deliver  him  into  their  hands.  At  the  same  time,  he 
opened  the  door  and  led  the  way  upstairs,  they  following  at  his  heels. 

Feeling  that  it  was  useless  to  try  further  to  hide  himself,  Henry  rose 
from  the  bed  on  which  he  lay,  and  stood  up  in  full  view  of  the  Indians,  as 
they  entered  the  room.  They  were  all  under  the  influence  of  liquor,  and 
uttered  ejaculations  of  pleasure  at  finding  their  victim.  One  of  them,  a 
giant  in  stature,  whose  face  was  hideously  painted,  grasped  Henry  with 
one  hand  by  the  collar  of  his  coat,  and  raised  a huge  knife  to  plunge  it  into 
his  breast. 

Holding  his  helpless  victim  thus  for  a few  moments,  all  the  while  look- 
ing steadily  into  his  eyes,  he  abruptly  released  him  with  the  remark  that 
he  would  not  kill  him.  He  had  already  secured  many  English  scalps,  but 
he  had  lost  a brother,  who  resembled  the  white  man  in  features.  He 
would,  therefore,  spare  the  prisoner,  and  call  him  after  the  dead  relative. 

This  altogether  unexpected  reprieve  gave  Henry  another  thrill  of 
hope.  But  it  almost  departed,  when  he  was  ordered  to  go  downstairs,  to 
the  Indian’s  cabin,  where  most  of  the  other  savages  were  gathered,  and 
were  so  wild  with  liquor  that  they  would  be  sure  to  fall  upon  the  prisoner 
when  he  came  in  sight.  Henry  begged  the  Frenchman  to  represent  this 
peril  to  his  new  brother,  and  he  did  so  with  such  effect  that  he  told  the 
trader  he  might  stay  where  he  was  until  he  came  for  him. 

The  Indian  had  not  gone  an  hour,  when  another  came  to  the  house 
and  ordered  Henry  to  follow  him  to  the  Ojibwa  camp.  Henry  recognized 
this  savage  as  a debtor  to  him.  Only  a short  time  before,  when  asked  by 
the  trader  to  pay  him,  he  made  answer  that  he  would  do  so  very  soon.  The 
significance  of  this  reply  was  now  apparent,  but  the  captive  had  no  choice 
except  to  obey. 

His  captor  led  the  way  out  of  the  gate,  but,  instead  of  going  toward 
the  camp,  he  walked  rapidly  in  the  direction  of  the  sand  hills  and  bushes 
behind  the  fort.  Henry  stopped  short  and  refused  to  go  further,  saying 
that  he  knew  the  Ojibwa  meant  to  kill  him.  The  Indian  admitted  that 
such  was  his  intention,  and,  seizing  hold  of  one  arm,  raised  his  knife  to 
bury  it  in  his  body.  Henry  warded  off  the  blow,  wrenched  himself  loose, 
and  ran  for  life. 

He  reached  the  gate  of  the  fort,  and  seeing  the  other  Indian  who 
spared  him  because  of  his  resemblance  to  his  brother,  ran  to  him,  and 
begged  protection.  The  large  warrior  ordered  the  other  to  desist,  but  he 
was  so  infuriated  that  he  kept  up  the  pursuit,  striking  continually  at  the 
fugitive,  who  dodged  through  the  door  of  the  Frenchman’s  house,  where 
he  had  first  received  shelter,  skurried  upstairs,  and  flung  himself  on  the 
bed  again,  with  the  conviction  that  it  was  in  the  power  of  no  Indian  to 
harm  him. 


9o 


COMPANIONS  IN  MISFORTUNE. 


In  the  night,  he  was  startled  from  sleep  by  the  opening  of  the  door 
and  the  entrance  of  several  parties  bearing  a light.  To  his  astonishment 
and  joy,  he  saw  in  the  room  Captain  Etherington,  Lieutenant  Leslie,  a 
trader,  and  a Jesuit  priest.  They  told  him  that  the  Indians  had  arranged 
for  a deep  debauch  on  the  liquor  they  had  obtained,  and,  knowing  the 
danger  to  which  the  captives  would  be  exposed  during  these  revels,  had 
placed  them  all  in  the  fort  in  charge  of  the  Canadians.  The  number  that 
had  thus  escaped  the  massacre  numbered  only  about  twenty. 

An  earnest  debate  was  now  held  among  the  prisoners.  Most  of  them 
believed  they  could  turn  the  tables  on  their  captors.  They  were  really 
in  possession  of  the  fort,  the  Indians  having  neglected  to  place  even  a 
guard  within  the  palisades.  They  were  crazy  with  liquor.  It  was  an  easy 
matter  to  close  the  gates  and  set  the  Indians  at  defiance. 

This  scheme,  desperate,  but  not  without  a prospect  of  success,  would 
have  been  attempted,  but  for  the  priest,  who  showed  himself  a true  friend 
throughout  all  the  occurrences.  He  was  certain  the  Canadians  would 
prove  treacherous,  in  which  event  nothing  could  save  the  life  of  a single 
Englishman.  His  views  prevailed  and  the  scheme  was  given  over. 

In  the  morning,  a party  of  Indians  came  to  the  house  and  ordered 
Henry  to  follow  them.  The  weather  had  now  changed,  and  a cold  storm 
set  in.  He  was  led  to  a dwelling  where  he  found  two  traders  and  a soldier 
imprisoned.  They  were  released  and  directed  to  follow  the  party,  who  were 
embarked  in  a canoe,  guarded  by  seven  Indians,  the  soldier  being  tied  by 
the  neck  to  the  cross  bars  of  the  boat. 

Through  the  cold  dismal  storm,  the  canoe  progressed  for  eighteen 
miles,  keeping  close  to  land,  when  a hundred  Ottawas  suddenly  rushed 
from  the  woods  and  took  possession  of  the  boat  and  prisoners,  whom  they 
brought  ashore. 

This  curious  act  was  prompted  by  jealousy  of  the  Ojibwas,  because 
they  had  captured  the  fort  without  giving  the  Ottawas  a chance  to  share  in 
the  plunder.  They  were  not  so  friendly  as  they  professed  to  be  to  the 
white  men.  They  told  the  latter  that  the  Ojibwas  intended  to  kill  and  eat 
them.  The  captives  were  then  placed  in  an  Ottawa  canoe  and  carried  back 
to  Michillimackinac,  where  the  angry  Ottawas  filed  into  the  fort  and  took 
possession  of  it. 

On  the  morning  after  their  arrival,  the  Ojibwas  made  overtures  to  their 
rivals,  gave  them  a portion  of  their  plunder,  and,  in  the  course  of  the  fol- 
lowing day,  the  quarrel  was  settled.  The  Ottawas  returned  some  of  their 
prisoners,  still  retaining  the  officers  and  several  of  the  soldiers,  who  were 
kindly  treated,  due  mainly  to  the  influence  of  the  priest,  who,  as  stated 
elsewhere,  bore  a letter  to  Detroit,  from  Captain  Etherington,  making 
known  to  Major  Gladwyn  all  that  had  occurred. 


THE  OJIBWA  FRIEND. 


91 


The  captives  were  still  in  great  peril,  but  Henry  seemed  fated  to  un- 
dergo a series  of  marvelous  escapes  from  dangers,  such  as  would  have  caused 
despair  in  the  heart  of  anyone.  At  the  moment  when  his  fate  hung 
trembling  in  the  balance,  his  old  friend  who  had  adopted  him  as  a brother, 
appeared  and  plead  that  he  should  be  given  to  him.  As  the  Ojibwa  was  a 
valiant  warrior,  that  had  rendered  good  service  to  his  people,  his  request 


THE  WARNING  OF  THE  JESUIT  PRIEST. 


was  granted,  the  savage  was  allowed  to  take  him  to  his  lodge,  where  he  re- 
ceived kind  treatment. 

One  day,  while  lying  on  his  bed  of  furs  in  his  new  home,  a loud 
noise  caused  him  to  peer  through  a crevice,  when  he  saw  the  dead  bodies 
of  seven  soldiers  dragged  out.  A famous  war  chief,  lately  arrived,  being 
anxious  to  attest  his  approval  of  what  had  been  done,  he  entered  the  lodge 
where  the  prisoners  were  confined  and  deliberately  dispatched  seven  of  them. 

By  and  by,  the  Indians  were  frightened  by  a fear  of  the  consequences 
of  their  deeds.  Rumors  came  of  a powerful  English  force  on  its  way  to 
punish  them  for  the  massacre.  Most  of  the  warriors  embarked  in  their 
canoes,  with  their  families,  and  sought  a more  secure  place  against  attack. 


92 


THE  POST  OF  GREEN  BAY. 


They  fixed  upon  the  island  of  Michillimackinac,  eight  miles  away,  where 
they  landed  and  hastily  threw  up  some  rude  fortifications. 

The  next  day  messengers  arrived  from  Pontiac,  urging  them  to  go  to 
his  aid  in  the  siege  of  Detroit.  But  the  recipients  of  this  request  were  less 
ardent  than  they  had  been.  They  thought  more  of  their  own  safety  than 
of  aiding  even  so  mighty  a chieftain  as  Pontiac.  None,  therefore,  went  to 
Detroit. 

Food  soon  became  so  scarce  among  the  Indians  that  they  were  forced 
to  cross  to  the  northern  shore  of  Lake  Huron,  where  they  stayed  until  the 
end  of  summer.  Then  they  gradually  dispersed,  each  family  going  to  its 
winter  hunting  grounds.  Henry,  dressed  and  painted  like  an  Indian,  re- 
mained with  his  new  brother  through  the  dismal  season,  apparently  as  much 
of  a savage  as  those  among  whom  he  was  living. 

Mention  has  been  made  of  the  smaller  posts  of  Green  Bay  and  Sault 
Ste.  Marie.  The  latter  was  so  injured  by  an  accidental  fire  during  the  pre- 
ceding winter  that  it  was  abandoned,  the  garrison  withdrawing  to  Michil- 
limackinac, where  most  of  them  perished  in  the  massacre.  Green  Bay  re- 
ceived an  English  garrison  in  1761,  consisting  of  seventeen  men  com- 
manded by  Lieutenant  Gorell. 

This  young  officer  displayed  admirable  tact  in  his  intercourse  with  the 
Indians.  His  task  was  most  difficult,  for  he  was  surrounded  by  powerful 
tribes.  The  Menomonies  dwelt  close  to  the  fort,  at  the  mouth  of  Fox 
River;  the  Winnebagoes  occupied  several  villages  on  the  lake  named  for 
them  ; the  Sacs  and  Foxes  were  on  the  Wisconsin  River,  while  west  of  the 
Mississippi  were  the  resistless  Sioux,  who,  it  was  claimed,  could  put  thirty 
thousand  braves  on  the  warpath. 

As  representative  of  the  British  government,  the  commandant  at  Green 
Bay  was  in  communication  with  all  these  tribes.  He  had  power  to  regu- 
late the  fur  trade,  and  must  so  conduct  affairs  as  to  preserve  peace  with 
these  mighty  forces  of  the  wilderness,  before  whose  wrath  he  and  his  hand- 
ful of  men  would  have  been  but  as  thistle  down  in  the  hurricane. 

Gorell  did  his  part,  as  we  have  said,  with  remarkable  tact  and  success. 
He  secured  the  friendship  of  the  Menomonies,  and  his  treatment  of  them 
produced  a beneficial  effect  on  the  other  tribes. 

On  the  fifteenth  of  June,  an  Ottawa  runner  brought  to  Gorell  a letter 
from  Captain  Etherington,  informing  him  of  the  capture  of  that  post  eleven 
days  before,  and  ordering  him  to  bring  his  garrison  and  all  the  English 
traders  he  might  have  with  him,  to  Michillimackinac. 

On  receipt  of  the  letter,  Gorell  called  the  Menomonies  to  council,  told 
them  what  the  Ojibwas  had  done,  and  said  that  he  and  his  soldiers  were 
going  to  Michillimackinac  to  restore  order.  During  their  absence,  he  would 
commit  the  fort  at  Green  Bay  to  their  care. 


DETROIT,  THE  LAST  POST. 


93 


The  same  words  were  uttered  to  the  Winnebagoes,  Sacs,  and  Foxes; 
but,  though  the  majority  were  friendly  to  the  whites,  a considerable  num- 
ber were  inclined  to  prevent  their  departure.  At  this  critical  juncture,  a 
fortunate  thing  occurred.  A Sioux  chief  presented  himself  and  said  that 
he  had  heard  of  the  bad  things  done  by  the  Ojibwas;  he  hoped  the  tribes 
at  Green  Bay  would  not  follow  their  evil  example,  but  protect  the  English 
garrison.  To  emphasize  the  views  of  his  tribe  in  that  respect,  he  told  his 
brethren  that  if  they  didn’t  do  so,  the  Sioux  would  swoop  down  on  them 
and  teach  them  a lesson  they  would  never  forget. 

This  opportune  interference  was  not  prompted  by  any  love  for  the 
English,  but  rather  by  hatred  of  the  Ojibwas.  The  Sioux  made  it  an 
article  of  their  faith  never  to  take  the  same  side  of  a dispute  with  the  de- 
tested Ojibwas. 

To  prove  their  good  will  toward  the  white  men,  a number  of  the  In- 
dians offered  to  escort  the  English  garrison  on  its  way.  On  the  2 1st  of 
June,  Lieutenant  Gorell  set  out,  he  and  his  men  embarking  in  several  ba- 
teaux, escorted  by  ninety  Indians  in  canoes. 

At  the  Ottawa  village  were  found  Captain  Etherington  and  Lieuten- 
ant Leslie,  with  eleven  men,  still  prisoners,  though  kindly  treated.  The 
Ottawas  wished  to  disarm  Gorell  and  his  party,  but  the  young  officer,  in 
his  impressive  way,  notified  them  that  he  would  not  submit  to  anything  of 
the  kind,  and  the  attempt  was  not  made. 

After  considerable  parleying,  the  Ottawas  released  their  prisoners,  and 
the  whole  party  arrived  in  Montreal  on  the  thirteenth  of  August. 

The  trader  named  Henry,  a portion  of  whose  interesting  adventures 
we  have  told,  eventually  found  his  way  to  the  same  city,  where  it  is 
known  he  was  living  nearly  fifty  years  after  the  massacre  at  Michilli- 
mackinac. 

With  the  single  exception  of  Detroit,  not  a British  garrison  now  was 
left  in  the  region  of  the  Lakes. 


CHAPTER  XII. 


PONTIAC’S  CONSPIRACY  (CONTINUED) — THE  OLD  FRONTIERS— INDIAN  OUT* 
RAGES — FORT  PITT — SINGULAR  ESCAPE  OF  THE  GARRISON  OF  FORT 
LE  BGEUF — THRILLING  INCIDENTS— BOUQUET’S  EXPEDITION— THE 
BATTLE  OF  BUSHY  RUN. 

FORT  PITT  was  built  by  General  Stanwix  in  1759,  on  the  ruins  of  Fort 
Du  Quesne.  So  remote  was  it  in  the  dismal  forest  that  it  stood  two 
hundred  miles  in  advance  of  the  eastern  settlements.  Two  roads  led  from 
the  fort  to  the  latter,  one  cut  by  General  Braddockon  his  fatal  march  across 
the  mountains  from  Cumberland,  while  the  other,  passing  Carlisle  and  Bed- 
ford, was  the  most  frequented,  and  was  made  by  General  Forbes  in  1758. 
Following  the  latter  route  eastward  from  Fort  Pitt,  a journey  slightly 
greater  than  fifty  miles  brought  one  to  the  little  post  of  Ligonier,  which  was 
somewhat  more  than  half  the  distance  of  Fort  Bedford  from  Fort  Pitt.  A 
hundred  miles  further  east  lay  Carlisle,  and  then  the  cabins  of  the  settlers 
began  to  appear  more  frequently.  The  Virginian  frontiers  bore  a general 
resemblance  to  those  of  Pennsylvania. 

As  night  was  closing  in,  on  the  27th  of  May,  1763,  the  garrison  at  Fort 
Pitt  observed  a party  of  Indians  descending  the  banks  of  the  Allegheny, 
with  heavily  loaded  pack  horses.  They  camped  on  the  shore  until  the  fol- 
lowing morning,  when  they  came  over  to  the  fort  with  a valuable  lot  of 
furs,  which  they  exchanged  for  bullets,  hatchets,  and  gunpowder.  Their 
conduct  was  so  peculiar  that  it  was  believed  they  came  as  spies  or  with 
some  sinister  design. 

Shortly  after  their  departure,  news  was  brought  to  the  fort  that  Colonel 
Clapham,  and  a number  of  men  and  women,  had  been  killed  and  scalped 
near  the  fort,  while  an  Indian  town  a short  way  up  the  Allegheny  had  been 
abandoned,  as  though  the  warriors  were  bent  on  mischief.  A horseman 
was  sent  out  to  warn  the  little  garrison  at  Venango,  but  hurriedly  returned, 
having  been  fired  on  and  badly  wounded.  A trader  from  the  Indian  vil- 
lage of  Tuscaroras  brought  still  more  startling  news.  On  the  night  of  the 
27th,  several  Indians  had  called  at  his  cabin  and  begged  him  to  leave  at 
once,  as  they  did  not  wish  to  see  him  murdered.  They  told  him  the  Otta- 
was  and  Ojibwas  had  taken  up  the  hatchet  and  captured  Detroit,  San- 
dusky, and  all  the  forts  in  the  interior.  The  Delawares  and  Shawanoes 
were  doing  the  same,  and  were  murdering  all  the  whites  within  reach. 

The  trader  and  the  thirteen  men  in  his  employ  were  greatly  fright- 


94 


A DIPLOMATIC  INTERVIEW. 


95 


ened,  and  made  haste  to  leave.  The  Indians  required  them  to  give  up  their 
guns,  but  furnished  three  warriors  to  guide  them  to  Fort  Pitt.  These 
guides  led  them  into  an  ambuscade,  from  which  only  the  employer  and 
two  of  his  men  emerged  alive.  It  is  stated  that  more  than  a hundred 
traders  were  murdered  by  the  Indians. 

The  different  forts  were  quick  to  take  alarm,  and  made  every  possible 
preparation  for  attack.  Fort  Pitt  was  a strong  defense,  and  was  com- 
manded by  Captain  Ecuyer,  who  had  full  confidence  in  his  garrison  of  330 
soldiers,  traders,  and  backwoodsmen.  With  these  were  about  the  same 
number  of  women  and  children,  most  of  them  belonging  to  the  families  of 
the  settlers. 

The  Indians  showed  little  concert  in  their  movement  against  the  settle- 
ments. No  Pontiac  was  there ; the  outburst  seemed  to  be  the  irrestrainable 
eagerness  of  the  “young  bucks  ” to  go  on  the  warpath.  They  kept  things 
in  an  uncomfortable  state  for  a time,  so  that  it  was  dangerous  for  anyone 
to  show  his  head  above  the  rampart.  On  the  afternoon  of  June  22d,  a 
party  drove  off  the  horses  grazing  near  the  post  and  killed  the  cattle.  A 
fire  was  opened  on  the  fort,  and  two  men  killed.  The  garrison  sent  some 
shells  among  the  Indians,  who  scattered  in  consternation. 

The  following  morning,  a number  of  warriors  approached  the  fort,  and 
pausing  near  the  ditch,  one  of  them  addressed  the  garrison  : 

“My  brothers,  we  that  stand  here  are  your  friends  ; but  we  have  bad 
news  to  tell  you.  Six  great  nations  of  Indians  have  taken  up  the  hatchet 
and  cut  off  all  the  English  garrisons  excepting  yours.  They  are  now  on 
their  way  to  destroy  you,  also. 

“ My  brothers,  we  are  your  friends,  and  we  wish  to  save  your  lives. 
What  we  desire  you  to  do  is  this:  You  must  leave  this  fort,  with  all  your 
women  and  children,  and  go  down  to  the  English  settlements,  where  you 
will  be  safe.  There  are  many  bad  Indians  already  here  ; but  we  will  pro- 
tect you  from  them.  You  must  go  at  once,  because  if  you  wait  till  the  six 
great  nations  arrive  here,  you  will  all  be  killed,  and  we  can  do  nothing  to 
protect  you.” 

Captain  Ecuyer  was  not  frightened  by  this  threat.  When  it  came  to 
“ drawing  the  long  bow,”  in  the  way  of  story  telling,  he  could  do  his  part 
well. 

“ My  brothers,”  said  he  solemnly,  “ we  are  very  grateful  for  your  kind- 
ness, though  we  are  convinced  you  must  be  mistaken  in  what  you  have 
told  us  about  the  forts  being  captured.  As  for  ourselves,  we  have  plenty 
of  provisions  and  we  are  able  to  keep  the  fort  against  all  the  nations  of  In- 
dians that  may  dare  to  attack  it.  We  are  very  well  off  in  this  place  and 
mean  to  stay  here. 

“ My  brothers,  as  you  have  shown  yourselves  such  true  friends,  we  feel 


96 


A REMARKABLE  ESCAPE. 


bound  in  gratitude  to  inform  you  that  an  army  of  six  thousand  English 
will  shortly  arrive  here,  and  that  another  army  of  three  thousand  is  gone 
up  the  Lakes,  to  punish  the  Ottawas  and  Ojibwas.  A third  has  gone  to 
the  frontiers  of  Virginia,  where  they  will  be  joined  by  your  enemies,  the 
Cherokees  and  Catawbas,  who  are  coming  here  to  destroy  you.  Therefore, 
take  pity  on  your  women  and  children,  and  get  out  of  the  way  as  soon  as 
possible.  We  have  told  you  this  in  confidence,  out  of  our  great  solicitude 
lest  any  of  you  should  be  hurt ; and  we  hope  you  will  not  tell  the  other 
Indians,  lest  they  should  escape  from  our  vengeance.” 

This  announcement  fairly  took  away  the  breath  of  the  Indians.  They 
looked  at  each  other  in  silence  and  then  turned  about  and  walked  off. 
Not  only  that,  but  they  were  so  scared  that  they  made  haste  to  meet  a 
large  body  of  warriors  advancing  from  the  westward  to  attack  the  fort,  and 
warned  them  to  get  out  of  the  path  of  those  terrible  armies  that  were 
marching  thither. 

A few  days  later,  one  of  the  escaped  soldiers  from  Presque  Isle  arrived 
with  an  exaggerated  account  of  the  capture  of  that  post.  He  believed 
every  one  except  himself  had  been  killed.  On  his  way  he  passed  the  ruins 
of  the  little  forts  of  Le  Boeuf  and  Venango.  They  were  burned  to  the 
ground  and  he  supposed  none  of  the  garrisons  had  escaped,  but  fortunately 
this  was  a mistake,  for  a few  hours  later,  Ensign  Price,  the  officer  com- 
manding at  Le  Bceuf,  arrived  with  seven  gaunt,  famishing  soldiers.  He  re- 
ported that  on  the  evening  of  the  1 8th  the  single  blockhouse  was  sur- 
rounded by  an  overwhelming  number  of  Indians,  who,  despite  everything 
the  garrison  could  do,  set  fire  to  the  building  and  eagerly  awaited  the 
appearance  of  the  suffocating  soldiers  to  put  them  to  the  tomahawk.  * 

In  desperation,  Price  and  his  men  hewed  a hole  through  the  massive 
timbers  at  the  rear  of  the  blockhouse,  and  stole  out  into  the  woods,  with- 
out a single  person  being  detected.  Expecting  pursuit,  they  pushed  on 
through  the  rest  of  the  night,  the  following  day,  and  until  next  midnight, 
when  they  came  upon  the  ruins  of  Fort  Venango,  all  of  whose  garrison  had 
been  massacred. 

Six  of  the  fugitives  were  so  worn  out  that  they  were  left  behind  in  the 
woods,  and  the  rest  pushed  on  to  Fort  Pitt.  One  of  those  present  at  Ve- 
nango afterward  told  Sir  William  Johnson  that  a party  of  Senecas  gained 
entrance  through  a pretense  of  friendship,  then  closed  the  gates,  overcame 
the  garrison,  massacred  all  except  Lieutenant  Gordon,  whom  they  tortured 
over  a slow  fire  for  several  nights  until  he  expired.  Then  they  set  fire  to 
the  place  and  left. 

Captain  Ecuyer  was  too  wise  to  repeat  the  blunder  of  so  many  of  his 
associates.  He  drilled  his  men,  strengthened  his  defenses,  and  maintained 
an  unremitting  watch  for  the  attack  that  was  liable  to  be  made  at  any  hour. 


HEWING  THE  WAY  TO  FREEDOM. 


DEVASTATION  OF  THE  WESTERN  FRONTIER. 


99 


In  the  latter  part  of  July,  a party  of  distinguished  chiefs  asked  for  and  ob- 
tained admission.  They  repeated  a boasting  message,  received  from  Pon- 
tiac, and  warned  the  commandant  that  he  must  withdraw  from  the  coun- 
try to  save  himself  and  men  from  massacre.  Of  course,  he  refused,  in 
terms  which  could  not  be  mistaken.  He  told  the  chiefs  he  despised  the 
Ottawas,  and  was  surprised  that  the  Delawares,  to  whom  his  visitors  be- 
longed, should  dare  bring  such  a message.  The  captain  advised  them  to 
go  home  and  take  care  of  their  families,  and  said  if  they  showed  them- 
selves about  the  fort  again,  he  would  send  a goodly  number  of  bomb  shells 
among  them,  and  they  would  be  pretty  sure  to  suffer.  They  departed  in  a 
wrathful  mood. 

That  night  they  surrounded  the  fort,  many  digging  holes  in  the  banks 
along  the  rivers  running  near,  where  they  sheltered  themselves  from  the 
fire  of  the  garrison,  while  they  sent  a bullet  or  arrow  whenever  a target  pre- 
sented itself.  Repeated  attempts  were  made  to  burn  the  buildings  by 
means  of  blazing  missiles,  and  the  timbers  were  often  set  on  fire,  but  in  every 
instance  the  flames  were  extinguished  before  doing  much  harm.  One  white 
man  was  killed  and  several  wounded.  Among  the  latter  was  Captain 
Ecuyer,  whose  leg  was  pierced  by  an  arrow. 

By  this  time,  it  may  be  said  that  the  western  frontiers  of  Pennsylvania, 
Virginia,  and  Maryland  were  aflame.  The  machinations  of  Pontiac  bore 
their  fruit,  and  everywhere  the  painted  savages  were  destroying  harvests 
and  slaughtering  men,  women,  and  children.  Those  of  the  pioneers  that 
were  wise  in  time,  flocked  to  the  forts  and  settlements,  hurrying  night  and 
day  to  escape  the  merciless  pursuers,  who  hung  to  their  trail  as  long  as 
there  was  a chance  of  securing  a scalp.  Carlisle  and  the  other  border  towns 
swarmed  with  wretched  fugitives,  bringing  with  them  such  tales  that  the 
cheeks  of  the  bravest  men  paled  with  horror. 

The  strong  parties  of  borderers  sent  out  to  investigate  some  of  these 
stories  found  them  fully  confirmed.  The  houses  were  smouldering  ruins. 
Among  the  ashes  would  probably  be  found  a horribly  burned  and  scalped 
settler,  still  alive,  but  beyond  help.  It  was  asserted  that  a thousand 
families  were  driven  from  their  homes,  and,  unless  something  was  speedily 
done  to  check  the  havoc,  the  western  part  of  Pennsylvania  would  be  de- 
serted. 

At  the  same  period,  the  settlers  in  the  Mohawk  Valley  and  some  parts 
of  the  Hudson  were  threatened  with  destruction.  Sir  William  Johnson 
held  the  powerful  Six  Nations  neutral.  Had  those  fierce  hordes  plunged 
into  the  general  Indian  war,  the  consequences  would  have  been  appalling  to 
the  last  degree.  As  it  was,  the  Senecas  and  a few  of  the  Cayugas  were 
the  only  members  of  the  confederacy  involved. 

When  Sir  Jeffrey  Amherst  heard  of  the  continued  siege  of  Detroit,  and 


103 


ALARM  AT  CARLISLE. 


learned  of  the  fall  of  one  post  after  another  before  the  savages,  he  was 
compelled  to  face  the  alarming  truth  that  the  Indians  had  risen  in  a gen* 
eral  insurrection.  The  vast  regions  won  from  the  French  must  be  con* 
quered  a second  time.  While  France  was  transferring  the  prize  to  Eng- 
land, the  dusky  hand  reached  out  and  snatched  it  away.  The  bloody 
fingers  closed  rigidly  around  the  trophy  and  refused  to  be  pried  apart,  ex- 
cept by  the  bayonets  of  the  English. 

But  soldiers  were  scarce  at  the  close  of  the  French  and  Indian  war. 
Such  as  could  be  collected  were  placed  with  the  best  judgment.  A small 
re-enforcement  was  thrown  into  Niagara,  and  Captain  Dalzell  reached 
Detroit  with  an  excellent  body  of  men.  The  particulars  of  his  disastrous 
night  attack  on  Pontiac’s  camp  has  been  given  elsewhere. 

An  expedition  had  to  be  sent  with  supplies  to  Fort  Pitt,  for,  despite  the 
bold  front  assumed  by  Captain  Ecuyer  in  his  interviews  with  the  Indians, 
his  provisions  were  at  a low  ebb,  and  it  was  imperatively  necessary  that  he 
should  receive  succor  without  delay.  Accordingly,  with  the  first  news  of 
hostilities,  Colonel  Bouquet,  commanding  at  Philadelphia,  was  ordered  to 
assemble  as  large  a force  as  possible  arid  cross  the  Alleghenies  with  a con- 
voy of  ammunition  and  provision.  By  great  effort,  five  hundred  men  were 
collected  for  the  service.  Agents  were  sent  to  the  frontier  towns  to  gather 
horses,  wagons,  and  supplies,  and  Bouquet  following,  reached  Carlisle  in 
the  beginning  of  July. 

The  town  was  in  a panic.  Every  house,  barn,  and  hovel,  was  crowded 
with  terrified  fugitives  from  the  wilderness.  Their  grewsome  tales  of  the 
crimes  of  the  dusky  hordes  filled  the  air,  and  among  many,  the  belief  was 
strong  that  the  Indians  would  attack  Carlisle  itself.  The  general  opinion, 
however,  was  that  they  would  not  venture  thus  far  east,  and  that  the  fugi- 
tives were  removed  from  danger. 

On  Sunday,  the  3d  of  July,  a soldier,  riding  express  from  Fort  Pitt, 
galloped  into  town,  and  leaped  from  his  horse  to  water  him  at  the  well  in 
the  center  of  the  place.  The  people  crowded  around  him  to  learn  the 
news. 

“News!”  he  repeated,  as  he  remounted,  to  ride  to  the  camp  of 
Bouquet,  “ Presque  Isle,  Le  Bceuf,  and  Venango  have  been  captured  by 
the  Indians,  and  they  will  soon  be  here.” 

The  people  were  thrown  into  consternation.  Runners  were  sent  out 
to  warn  the  settlers  that  had  not  yet  come  in,  and  the  scenes  of  horror  on 
which  they  gazed  made  strong  men  faint.  Those  who  were  given  time  to 
flee,  came  panting  into  Carlisle  not  certain  that  they  were  safe  even 
there. 

Six  men,  gathered  to  reap  the  harvest,  were  seated  at  dinner  at  the 
house  of  a settler  on  the  Juniata.  While  chatting  and  eating,  the  door 


DANGER  OF  THE  SETTLERS. 


IOI 


was  suddenly  burst  in,  and  a party  of  Indians  fired  among  them  and  beat 
down  the  survivors  with  the  butts  of  their  rifles.  One  of  the  young  men 
sprang  from  his  seat,  seized  a gun  in  the  corner,  and  fired  it  into  the  breast 
of  a warrior  rushing  upon  him,  leaped  through  an  open  window,  and  sped 
through  the  woods. 

He  was  unusually  fleet-footed,  and  reached  a small  settlement,  where 
he  told  his  story.  It  so  impressed  his  hearers  that  a dozen  young  men  vol- 
unteered to  cross  the  mountain  and  warn  the  inhabitants  of  the  neighbor- 
ing Tuscarora  valley.  Entering  the  place,  they  found  the  destroyers  had 
been  there  before  them.  Several  houses  were  in  flames,  and  the  dead  every- 


“THE  INDIANS  WILL  SOON  BE  HERE.” 


where.  The  party  formed  the  perilous  resolve  of  following  the  trail,  which 
led  through  a deep  pass  of  the  Tuscarora. 

Sad  to  say,  the  brave  men  were  ambushed,  and  at  the  first  fire  five 
of  their  number  dropped  dead.  The  survivors  paused  long  enough  to  dis- 
charge a wild  volley,  when  they  ran  for  life. 

One  of  the  fugitives,  as  he  dashed  through  the  bushes  and  undergrowth, 
heard  a warrior  at  his  heels.  The  young  man  poured  a lot  of  powder  down 
his  gun  barrel,  flung  in  a bullet  after  it,  and,  without  attempting  to  use  the 
ram-rod,  wheeled  and  let  fly.  The  savage  was  almost  touching  the  muzzle 
of  the  weapon,  and  dropped  dead. 

Not  knowing  how  near  other  Indians  were,  the  fugitive  resumed  his 


102 


bouquet’s  expedition. 


flight,  but  a moment  later  heard  some  person  call  him  by  name.  Turning 
to  the  spot,  he  found  one  of  his  comrades  mortally  wounded. 

“ Take  my  weapon,”  he  said  feebly,  “and  kill  every  Indian  you  can 
with  it.” 

The  friend  accepted  the  gun,  bade  his  comrade  good-by,  and  man- 
aged to  reach  Carlisle.  There  his  story  caused  such  rage  that  several  par- 
ties started  out  on  a scalp-hunt  and  brought  back  a number  of  trophies. 

Bouquet’s  march  to  Fort  Pitt  was  delayed  because  of  the  general  dis- 
may along  the  border.  His  agents  could  not  collect  the  supplies  he  needed, 
and  he  was  so  touched  by  the  sufferings  of  the  refugees,  huddled  in  and 
around  Carlisle,  that  he  impoverished  himself  and  men  in  relieving  their 
wants.  He  accordingly  applied  to  the  settlements  further  eastward.  Hav- 
ing at  last  secured  his  supplies,  he  started  on  his  expedition,  which  a ma- 
jority of  his  friends  were  certain  would  meet  the  same  fate  that  over- 
whelmed Braddock,  though  Bouquet  was  one  of  the  most  competent  officers 
ever  placed  in  command  of  such  an  expedition.  He  was  thoroughly  brave, 
knew  the  Indian  character  intimately,  and  was  held  in  the  highest  regard 
throughout  the  provinces. 

Following  up  the  beautiful  Cumberland  Valley,  the  troops  reached 
Shippensburg,  twenty  miles  away,  where  were  found  scores  of  starving 
fugitives,  whom  it  was  necessary  to  assist.  Knowing  the  danger  of  Fort 
Ligonier,  Bouquet  sent  thirty  of  his  best  men  in  advance,  and  they  arrived 
in  time  to  insure  the  safety  of  the  post. 

Advancing  with  characteristic  caution,  Bouquet  reached  Fort  Bedford, 
which  had  been  beleaguered  for  weeks  by  the  Indians.  He  remained  there 
several  days,  and,  resuming  his  march  on  the  28th  of  July,  was  soon  be- 
yond signs  of  civilization,  at  Fort  Ligonier,  some  fifty  miles  away.  There 
he  decided  to  leave  the  wagons  and  oxen  behind,  because  they  must  prove 
cumbrous  in  the  event  of  an  attack  by  their  enemies,  who  were  swarming 
around  them. 

The  small  army,  taking  with  them  three  hundred  and  fifty  pack  horses 
and  a few  cattle,  camped  at  night  near  Ligonier.  Not  far  off  were  the 
dangerous  defiles  of  Turtle  Creek,  which  offered  so  inviting  an  ambus- 
cade that  Bouquet  decided  to  march  the  next  day  to  Bushy  Run,  stay 
there  till  night,  and  then,  by  a forced  march,  cro'ss  Turtle  Creek  in  the 
darkness. 

Early  in  the  afternoon  of  the  following  day,  when  within  a half  mile 
of  Bushy  Run,  hot  firing  from  the  front  told  that  the  advanced  guard  was 
attacked.  The  two  leading  companies  were  sent  forward  to  its  support, 
but  the  firing  became  more  rapid.  Then  the  convoy  was  halted,  the  troops 
formed  into  line,  and  a general  charge  ordered.  The  screeching  redskins 
were  swept  out  of  the  path  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet. 


A CRITICAL  SITUATION. 


103 


At  the  moment  when  success  seemed  assured,  the  flanks  were  assailed, 
and  the  sounds  from  the  rear  showed  that  the  convoy  was  also  attacked. 
Hurling  off  their  assailants,  the  soldiers  formed  a circle  about  the  terrified 
horses.  It  was  a trying  movement,  made  under  such  a galling  fire,  but  it 
was  accomplished  with  perfect  steadiness,  under  the  direction  of  the 
cool-headed  Bouquet  himself,  whose  example  was  worth  a regiment  of  men. 

For  seven  hours  this  circle  of  troops  withstood  an  attack  that  ordi- 
narily would  have  stampeded  three  times  their  number.  Here,  there,  every- 
where, and  on  all  sides  in  succession,  the  Indians  rushed  up  with  their  yells 
and  poured  in  their  hot  fire,  desperately  striving  to  break  the  circle.  The 


COLONEL  BOUQUET  WRITING  WHAT  HE  BELIEVED  TO 
BE  HIS  LAST  DISPATCH. 


soldiers  gave  them  volley  for  volley,  and  repeatedly  followed  it  up  with  a 
bayonet  charge,  during  which  many  a miscreant  was  spitted.  Darkness 
finally  put  an  end  to  the  desperate  struggle. 

The  situation  of  Bouquet  and  his  little  army  was  almost  hopeless. 
Sixty  soldiers,  besides  a number  of  officers,  had  been  killed  or  disabled. 
With  the  woods  alive  with  Indians,  it  was  impossible  to  change  the  ground, 
and  the  troops  were  obliged  to  encamp  upon  the  hill  where  the  fight  had 
taken  place,  and  where  it  was  impossible,  on  this  hot  summer  night,  to  ob- 
tain a drop  of  water.  Sentinels  were  stationed,  and  every  preparation 
made  to  resist  a night  attack.  Then  Colonel  Bouquet  wrote  a dispatch  to 
Sir  Jeffrey  Amherst,  relating  all  that  had  occurred,  making  wise  suggestions 


104 


A BRILLIANT  EXPLOIT. 


to  Amherst,  and,  at  the  conclusion  of  his  letter,  calmly  expressed  his  con- 
viction that  neither  he  nor  one  of  his  command  would  survive  the  conflict 
that  was  certain  to  open  at  daylight. 

There  were  the  best  of  reasons  for  this  belief,  for,  during  the  night,  the  In- 
dians were  largely  re-enforced,  and  at  dawn  of  day  renewed  the  attack  with 
irrestrainable  ferocity.  Watching  the  fearful  scene,  Bouquet  saw  that  it  was 
simply  a question  of  how  long  it  would  be  before  the  Indians  shot  the  last 
man.  They  had  completely  surrounded  him,  so  that  not  the  slightest 
opening  for  escape  presented  itself.  They  far  outnumbered  the  soldiers 
and  were  invisible.  In  fact,  the  battle,  if  it  may  be  called  that,  was  an 
ideal  one  from  an  Indian  point  of  view,  for  the  savages  could  slaughter  the 
whites,  with  no  danger  to  themselves. 

The  soldiers  were  eager  to  charge  their  assailants,  but  it  was  useless, 
for,  before  reaching  them  they  scattered  like  so  many  quail.  A repetition 
of  the  Braddock  massacre  looked  inevitable. 

Bouquet  ordered  two  companies  of  light  infantry  to  fall  back  into  the 
circle,  which  was  the  central  point  of  defense.  The  troops  opened  on  the 
right  and  left  to  receive  them,  and  then  closed  up  on  the  rear,  as  if  to- 
protect  the  retreat  of  the  inner  circle.  Two  other  companies  quickly  drew 
up,  as  if  to  assist  in  the  retreat.  Fearing  that  their  victims  were  about  to 
escape,  the  Indians  poured  out  of  the  woods  in  solid  masses,  and  with  wild 
shouts  rushed  after  the  soldiers. 

This  was  precisely  the  thing  for  which  Bouquet  had  maneuvered.  He 
wanted  to  get  his  assailants  where  he  could  strike  them.  He  succeeded 
in  doing  so  and  then  he  “ made  the  fur  fly.” 

Placing  his  troops  with  admirable  skill,  he  launched  a portion  against 
the  savages,  using  bullet  and  bayonet  with  resistless  effect.  Those  that 
were  not  killed,  fled  in  terror.  As  the  Indian  horde  wheeled  to  run,  two 
other  companies  assailed  their  flanks,  and  the  bayonet  thrusts  were  more 
terrific  than  ever.  Rushing  headlong  toward  the  only  point  that  promised 
escape,  they  ran  directly  against  the  remaining  soldiers. 

In  truth,  Bouquet  had  reversed  the  respective  situations.  It  was  the 
Indians  who  were  now  surrounded  and  they  received  one  of  the  bitterest 
lessons  ever  taught  to  them.  With  the  same  generalship  he  had  displayed 
from  the  first,  Bouquet  followed  up  the  attack,  utterly  routing  the  Indians. 
They  fled  in  the  wildest  panic,  leaving  sixty  dead  on  the  ground,  including' 
a number  of  prominent  chiefs,  not  to  mention  the  bodies  that  were  carried 
away. 

But  the  white  men  paid  dearly  for  their  victory,  owing  to  the  exposed 
situation  they  were  obliged  to  hold  for  a long  time.  Eight  officers  and 
one  hundred  and  fifteen  men  made  up  the  frightful  total. 

Bouquet  reached  Fort  Pitt  on  the  iotli  of  August,  where,  as  may  be 


THE  RELIEF  OF  FORT  PITT. 


105 


believed,  he  received  a joyous  welcome.  The  garrison  knew  that  he 
would  do  everything  in  his  power  for  their  relief,  and  they  knew,  too, 
the  skill  and  valiant  character  of  the  officer.  They  were  full  of  gloomy 
forebodings,  however,  for  they  were  aware  that  the  Indians  besieging 
the  fort  had  withdrawn  and  started  eastward  with  the  purpose  of  cut- 
ting off  Colonel  Bouquet  and  his  brave  little  band.  As  the  time  passed 
' without  anything  being  heard  of  them,  and  with  the  same  ominous 
' stillness  brooding  through  the  surrounding  woods,  their  fears  grew  into 
the  belief  that  their  friends  had  been  ambushed  and  massacred,  like 
many  others  under  similar  circumstances.  The  garrison  listened  for  the 
triumphant  shouts  of  the  returning  conquerors,  whom  they  expected  to  see 
swarming  back  to  the  fort,  there  to  complete  their  work.  The  joy,  there- 
fore, of  Captain  Ecuyer  and  his  comrades  may  be  imagined  when,  instead 
of  their  dreaded  enemies,  Colonel  Bouquet  and  his  soldiers  filed  out  of  the 
forest  and  marched  into  the  fort. 

Colonel  Bouquet’s  victory  caused  joy  throughout  the  provinces.  The 
Pennsylvania  assembly  passed  a vote  of  thanks,  and,  ere  long,  he  received 
the  additional  honor  of  the  formal  thanks  of  the  king.  No  one  could  envy 
the  hero  the  honors  he  had  won  by  his  successful  relief  of  Fort  Pitt. 


CHAPTER  XIII. 


pontiac’s  conspiracy  (continued) — the  siege  of  Detroit— discour- 
agement OF  THE  INDIANS— DISASTER  TO  MAJOR  WILKINS’  EX- 
PEDITION-COLONEL BRADSTREET  OUTWITTED— DEPARTURE  OF 
PONTIAC — COLONEL  BOUQUET’S  BRILLIANT  SUCCESS. 

HAVING  given  a faint  picture  of  the  devastation  that  reigned  along 
the  frontier,  we  return  to  Pontiac  and  the  siege  of  Detroit,  which 
had  now  lasted  from  May  until  September. 

Such  pertinacity  was  unexampled  on  the  part  of  the  red  men,  who 
have  their  own  ideas  of  conducting  military  operations.  When  a brief 
time  passes  without  bringing  success,  they  generally  make  a change  of 
tactics. 

It  was  impossible  for  Pontiac  to  keep  his  warriors  keyed  up  to  the 
desired  pitch.  They  grew  tired  of  constant  waiting  without  substantial 
results.  News  reached  them  that  Major  Wilkins  was  on  his  way  to 
Detroit  with  a large  force.  They  were  running  short  of  ammunition,  and 
the  dullest  of  them  could  not  fail  to  see  the  hopelessness  of  the  siege. 
The  majority  concluded  that  the  wiser  course  was  to  pretend  to  make 
peace,  go  to  their  wintering  grounds,  and  renew  the  war  in  the  spring. 

In  a line  with  this  policy,  the  leading  chief  of  the  Mississaugas,  a 
branch  of  the  Ojibwas,  came  to  the  fort  on  the  12th  of  October,  with  the 
pipe  of  peace.  His  first  announcement  was  the  astounding  one  that  he 
and  his  people  had  always  been  good  friends  of  the  English  and  always 
wanted  to  be.  They  were  anxious  to  conclude  a permanent  peace. 

The  dusky  orator  added  that  he  had  been  sent  as  a deputy  by  the 
Pottawatomies,  Ojibwas,  and  Wyandots,  who  were  sorry  for  what  they  had 
done  and  begged  his  forgiveness.  Major  Gladwyn  was  not  deceived,  but  it 
was  policy  for  him  to  pretend  that  he  believed  the  falsehoods.  His  garri- 
son by  this  time  was  threatened  with  starvation,  and  no  food  could  be  pro- 
cured as  long  as  the  fort  was  invested.  So  he  told  the  chieftain  that  he  was 
glad  to  hear  his  words.  It  was  not  in  his  power  to  make  a treaty  of  peace, 
but  he  would  agree  to  a truce.  The  chief  left  with  this  answer,  and 
Gladwyn  used  the  lull  so  well,  that  in  a short  time,  he  had  collected  a fair 
supply  for  the  winter. 

The  Ottawas,  however,  continued  heart  and  soul  with  their  indomi- 
table leader.  They  refused  to  make  peace,  and  kept  up  hostilities  till  the 
latter  part  of  October,  when  the  great  chief  received  the  severest  blow  that 

106 


AN  AGGRESSIVE  WAR  DETERMINED  UPON. 


107 


had  yet  befallen  him.  French  messengers  arrived  at  Detroit,  with  a letter 
from  M.  Neyon,  commandant  of  Fort  Chartres,  the  chief  post  in  the  Illinois 
country.  This  letter  was  the  one  which  General  Amherst  had  insisted  that 
Neyon  should  send  to  the  different  tribes.  The  French  commandant  could 
not  refuse,  though  it  can  be  understood  that  the  task  was  a most  unpleas- 
ant one. 

The  letter  told  Pontiac  that  he  could  expect  no  help  from  the  French; 
that  they  were  at  peace  with  the  English,  whom  they  regarded  as  brothers; 
hostilities  could  bring  no  good  result,  and  Pontiac  was  advised  to  abandon 
them  without  further  delay. 

The  chief  was  filled  with  chagrin  and  wrath  at  what  he  regarded  his 
base  betrayal  by  those  for  whom  he  had  been  fighting  so  hard  and  long. 
With  a number  of  his  chiefs,  he  left  Detroit  and  went  to  the  river  Maumee, 
with  the  design  of  stirring  up  the  Indians  in  that  section  and  renewing  the 
war  in  the  spring. 

A fortnight  after  his  departure,  two  friendly  Wyandots,  from  the  neigh- 
borhood of  Quebec,  came  to  Detroit  and  asked  admission.  When  they  had 
entered,  one  of  them  took  out  a false  bottom  from  his  powder  horn,  and 
removed  a closely  folded  letter  which  he  handed  to  Major  Gladwyn.  It 
was  from  Major  Wilkins,  and  stated  that  the  detachment  under  his  com- 
mand had  been  caught  in  a severe  storm,  many  of  the  boats  wrecked, 
seventy  lives  lost,  all  the  stores  and  ammunition  destroyed,  and  the  sur- 
vivors were  forced  to  return  to  Niagara. 

The  campaign  of  1763  had  been  a defensive  one  on  the  part  of  the 
English  colonies,  and  no  effective  blow  had  been  struck  against  the  enemy. 
Preparations  were  made  with  the  opening  of  spring  for  a more  vigorous 
policy.  While  aiming  at  a conciliatory  course  toward  the  Indians,  it  was 
conceded  that  nothing  could  be  accomplished  with  them  until  they  were 
reduced  to  submission.  It  was,  therefore,  decided  that  they  should  be 
brought  to  terms,  by  sending  two  armies  into  the  heart  of  their  country, 
the  advance  being  made  from  different  points. 

The  command  of  the  first  was  given  to  Colonel  Bouquet,  who  was  or- 
dered to  march  to  P'ort  Pitt  and  thence  penetrate  to  the  Delaware  and 
Shawanoe  settlements.  The  other  force,  under  Colonel  Bradstreet,  was  to 
go  up  the  Lakes  and  bring  the  tribes  of  Detroit  and  the  regions  beyond  to 
submission.  The  inducements  to  enlist  in  this  enterprise  were  so  slight, 
that  only  the  refuse  of  the  population  was  secured.  When  Colonel  Brad- 
street  and  Bouquet  reached  Fort  Niagara,  the  little  army  amounted  to 
barely  twelve  hundred  men.  There  were  assembled  a great  many  Indians, 
who  had  been  influenced  by  the  efforts  of  Sir  William  Johnson  to  agree  to 
a peace. 

Many,  however,  held  aloof.  The  Delawares  and  Shawanoes  sent  an  in- 


io8 


COLONEL  BRADSTREET’S  BLUNDERS. 


suiting  message,  that  out  of  pity  for  the  English  they  would  make  peace 
with  them.  At  the  very  time  this  word  reached  Sir  William  Johnson,  the 
tribe  were  renewing  their  outrages  of  the  preceding  year,  on  the  borders  of 
Pennsylvania  and  Virginia. 

Bradstreet  was  a vain,  self-willed  man,  jealous  of  Bouquet,  and  not  to 
be  compared  with  him  in  ability.  While  on  his  way,  he  was  met  by  a pre- 
tended embassy  from  the  Delawares  and  Shawanoes.  The  fact  that  they 
brought  only  a single  small  belt  of  wampum  was  proof  that  their  errand 
was  fictitious.  His  officers  knew  it,  but  Bradstreet  entered  into  a prelim- 
inary treaty  with  them,  binding  himself  to  refrain  from  attacking  them 
within  twenty-five  days,  on  condition  that  the  deputies  should  meet  him 
again  at  Sandusky,  in  order  to  surrender  their  prisoners  and  conclude  a 
regular  treaty  of  peace. 

The  purpose  of  this  trickery  was  to  retard  the  advance  of  the  army 
until  the  season  was  too  late  to  prosecute  the  campaign.  The  Delawares 
and  Shawanoes  at  that  very  hour  were  murdering  and  scalping  along  the 
frontier,  and  they  kept  it  up  until  Bouquet  checked  them  by  his  operations. 

Bradstreet  wound  up  his  folly  by  sending  a messenger  to  Colonel  Bou- 
quet, his  superior  officer,  notifying  him  that  he  had  brought  the  Delawares 
and  Shawanoes  to  terms,  and,  since  there  was  no  call  for  Bouquet  to  ad- 
vance further,  he  might  withdraw  his  troops.  The  indignant  Bouquet  paid 
no  attention  to  the  impertinent  letter,  and  General  Gage,  who  had  suc- 
ceeded Amherst  in  New  York,  severely  censured  Bradstreet  for  his  course 
in  the  affair. 

Having  settled  matters,  as  he  supposed,  Bradstreet  resumed  his  prog- 
ress westward.  His  orders  were  to  attack  the  Wyandots,  Ottawas,  and 
Miamis,  dwelling  near  Sandusky,  but  they  averted  the  danger  by  sending 
a deputation  which  promised  that,  if  he  would  not  molest  them,  they  would 
follow  him  to  Detroit  and  there  conclude  the  treaty.  Bradstreet  agreed 
to  this,  when  he  had  the  best  chance  conceivable  for  bringing  about  their 
submission  at  once.  Before  he  left  the  vicinity,  he  sent  Captain  Morris, 
with  several  Canadians  and  friendly  Indians,  to  the  Illinois  to  try  to  per- 
suade the  savages  in  that  region  to  make  peace  with  the  English.  This 
mission  was  disastrous  in  every  respect.  Not  only  did  Captain  Morris  fail 
to  accomplish  anything,  but  he  was  rebuffed,  insulted,  and  came  very  near 
losing  his  life.  He  was  glad  enough  finally  to  extricate  himself  from 
the  country  and  make  his  way  to  Detroit. 

It  was  on  the  26th  of  August  that  Bradstreet  reached  the  latter  post, 
where  he  was  received  with  great  rejoicing.  The  place  had  been  besieged 
for  more  than  fifteen  months,  and  though  at  times  the  surveillance  was 
relaxed,  yet  the  hostiles  were  always  in  the  neighborhood,  on  the  watch  to 
pick  off  anyone  that  dared  to  venture  outside  the  stockades. 


GENERAL  GAGE’S  REPROOF  OF  BRADSTREET.  IO9 

The  garrison  which  had  borne  this  irksome  situation  so  long  was  now 
relieved,  and  the  new  men  took  their  places.  Bradstreet  next  inquired  into 
the  conduct  of  the  Canadian  inhabitants.  A few  found  guilty  of  helping 
the  Indians  were  punished,  but  the  more  culpable  fled  on  the  approach  of 
the  army. 

Pontiac  was  missing  also.  With  the  more  determined  of  his  followers, 
he  had  withdrawn  to  the  banks  of  the  Maumee,  whence  he  sent  a defiant 
message  to  the  English  commander. 

Bradstreet,  having  concluded  in  his  pompous  way  his  treaties  with  the 
various  tribes  gathered  around  Detroit,  set  out  for  Sandusky  to  keep  his 
engagement  with  the  Delaware  and  Shawanoe  deputies,  who  agreed  to 
bring  in  their  prisoners  and  conclude  a definite  treaty  of  peace. 

The  day  fixed  came  and  passed,  and  not  a solitary  chief  presented  him- 
self. Some  days  later,  several  warriors  showed  up  with  a promise  that  if 
the  commander  would  keep  quiet  and  not  attack  the  villages,  the  captives 
would  be  brought  in  shortly.  Bradstreet  agreed  and  continued  to  wait. 

While  thus  engaged,  a letter  reached  him  from  General  Gage.  The 
commander  of  the  British  forces  in  America  condemned  his  conduct  severely, 
ordered  him  to  break  the  engagements  he  had  made,  and  advance  at  once 
upon  the  enemy,  selecting  for  his  first  object  of  attack  the  Indians  living 
upon  the  plains  of  the  Sciota. 

Bradstreet  was  humiliated  and  filled  with  rage  on  receiving  such  a 
reproof,  which  was  not  decreased,  when,  about  the  same  time,  he  learned 
of  the  total  failure  of  Captain  Morris’  embassy  to  the  country  of  the 
Illinois. 

Bradstreet  declared  it  impossible  to  reach  the  country  of  the  Sciota 
plains  so  late  in  the  season.  He  remained  at  Sandusky  several  days,  and 
finally  started  homeward.  Disaster  seemed  to  have  marked  him  for  its  own, 
for  a storm  on  Lake  Erie  caused  the  loss  of  a number  of  his  men,  and 
others,  who  were  obliged  because  of  insufficient  boats  to  tramp  through 
the  woods,  perished  miserably  on  the  way.  But,  though  the  ill-conducted 
expedition  exasperated  the  Iroquois  allies,  Detroit  had  been  relieved  and 
the  hostiles  were  cowed  into  quiescence. 

Meanwhile,  Colonel  Bouquet  pushed  his  campaign  with  vigor  and  dis- 
cretion. On  the  fifth  of  August,  just  one  year  after  the  fateful  battle  at 
Bushy  Run,  his  army,  consisting  of  five  hundred  regulars,  a thousand  Penn- 
sylvanians, and  a small  force  of  Virginia  riflemen,  united  at  Carlisle,  whence, 
after  a brief  delay,  he  advanced  to  Fort  Loudon.  There  another  delay  was 
necessary,  and  it  was  while  waiting  at  this  post  that  Colonel  Bouquet 
received  the  presumptuous  letter  from  Bradstreet,  to  which  he  paid  no  at- 
tention. He  reached  Fort  Pitt  on  the  17th  of  September,  having  lost 
only  a few  men,  that  were  picked  off  by  lurking  Indians. 


IO 


COLONEL  BOUQUET’S  CAMPAIGN. 


Some  time  later,  a party  of  Delaware  chiefs  appeared,  pretending  to  be 
deputies,  sent  by  their  people  to  talk  with  the  English  commander.  Three 
of  them  hesitatingly  presented  themselves  at  the  fort,  where  their  conduct 
was  so  suspicious,  that  Bouquet  held  them  as  spies.  Releasing  one  of 
them,  he  sent  him  back  to  his  nation,  with  notice  that  the  commander 
had  received  word  from  Colonel  Bradstreet  of  their  submission,  but  that 
they  had  violated  their  pledges.  Bouquet  added  that  he  had  come  to 
punish  them  for  their  perfidy,  but,  before  doing  so,  he  would  test  their 
sincerity  and  give  them  a chance  to  save  themselves  and  families  from 
destruction. 

The  first  requirement  was  that  they  should  leave  the  path  open  for  his 
expresses  to  Detroit.  He  was  about  to  send  two  men  with  dispatches  to 
Colonel  Bradstreet,  commanding  the  Lakes,  and  he  demanded  that  the  Del- 
awares should  furnish  two  of  their  people  to  bring  them  safely  back  with 
an  answer.  If  the  messengers  received  any  injury  going  or  coming,  or  if 
their  letters  were  taken  from  them,  he  would  instantly  put  to  death  the  two 
prisoners  whom  he  held,  and  show  the  tribe  no  mercy.  Ten  days  were 
allowed  to  reach  Detroit  and  the  same  time  for  the  return. 

The  spy  faithfully  delivered  this  message  to  the  Delawares  and  it  pro- 
duced a marked  impression.  They  knew  what  sort  of  a man  they  now 
had  to  deal  with,  and  those  that  had  been  the  most  clamorous  for  war  were 
eager  for  peace,  as  the  only  means  of  saving  themselves  from  ruin. 

Before  Bouquet  was  ready  to  march,  two  Iroquois  warriors,  pretending 
friendship,  but  desirous  of  holding  back  the  expedition  until  the  season 
was  far  advanced,  came  to  the  fort  and  did  their  best  to  convince  the 
colonel  of  the  insurmountable  difficulties  in  his  path,  assuring  him  that,  if 
he  would  tarry  where  he  was,  the  hostile  chiefs,  who  were  already  collecting 
their  prisoners,  would  soon  come  in  and  make  submission.  Bouquet  would 
not  heed  such  talk,  but  told  them  to  go  at  once  to  the  Delawares  and 
Shawanoes,  and  tell  them  that  he  was  on  his  way  to  punish  them,  and  they 
could  escape  only  by  ample  and  speedy  atonement. 

In  accordance  with  what  he  had  declared,  Bouquet  left  Fort  Pitt  early 
and  began  his  westward  march,  through  a wilderness,  thus  penetrated  for 
the  first  time  by  an  army.  Ten  days  later,  the  forces  reached  the  Mus- 
kingum, near  the  Indian  villages  whose  warriors  had  so  long  devastated 
the  border.  The  savages  were  filled  with  dismay,  for  the  invaders  were 
too  numerous  and  their  leader  was  too  skillful  for  them  to  hope  to  check 
him  by  any  concentration  of  their  warriors.  Furthermore,  they  knew  that 
Colonel  Bradstreet  was  at  Sandusky,  ready  to  assail  them  in  the  rear.  It 
may  be  said  they  were  caught  between  the  upper  and  nether  millstones. 

The  two  men  sent  from  Fort  Pitt  with  letters  to  Colonel  Bradstreet 
had  been  seized  in  defiance  of  Bouquet’s  threats,  and  were  held  prisoners 


BRINGING  THE  HOSTILES  TO  TERMS. 


II 


by  the  Delawares.  They  now  came  forward  from  their  captors,  with  the 
message  that  the  chiefs  would  shortly  arrive  to  hold  a conference  with  the 
commander.  The  latter  grimly  pushed  down  the  Valley  of  the  Muskingum, 
until  he  reached  a suitable  spot,  where  he  encamped,  erected  a small  pali- 
sade work  as  a depot  for  his  stores  and  baggage,  and,  as  he  anticipated,  re- 
ceived a call  from  a deputation  of  chiefs,  with  the  message  that  their  war- 
riors were  encamped  in  vast  numbers  eight  miles  away,  and  asking  him  to 
name  a time  and  place  for  the  council.  Bouquet  ordered  them  to  meet  him 
next  day  at  a point  on  the  river,  a little  below  the  camp. 

At  this  conference,  the  Indians  delivered  eighteen  prisoners,  promising 
to  bring  in  the  rest  as  soon  as  they  could  be  collected,  and  sued  for  peace  in 
humble  terms.  Bouquet’s  reply  was  a model  in  its  way,  breathing  justice, 


RETURNING  THE  CAPTIVES. 

but  stern  and  tactful,  and  carefully  avoiding  any  expressions  that  could 
cause  needless  irritation.  At  the  same  time,  he  showed  that  he  penetrated 
the  falsehoods  they  uttered,  and  told  them  they  deserved  the  severest  pun- 
ishment for  their  perfidy.  But  he  gave  them  once  more,  and  for  the  last 
time,  the  opportunity  to  prove  their  sincerity.  He  required  them  within 
twelve  days  to  deliver  into  his  hands  every  prisoner,  without  exception. 
They  were  to  be  furnished  with  clothing,  provisions,  and  horses  to  take 
them  to  Fort  Pitt.  When  this  was  done,  Bouquet  said  he  would  let  them 
know  upon  what  conditions  he  would  made  peace. 

The  manner  and  looks  of  the  brave  officer  impressed  the  chiefs  as  much 
as  did  his  words.  The  Indians  hurried  away  to  comply  with  his  demands. 
To  keep  their  fears  alive,  the  commander  moved  his  army  still  nearer  their 
villages,  so  as  to  be  ready  to  strike  when  the  time  came  to  do  so. 

The  Indians  lost  no  time  in  bringing  forward  their  captives,  and, 


A BRILLIANT  CAMPAIGN. 


I 12 

make  the  work  thorough,  Bouquet  sent  detachments  of  soldiers  into  each 
village,  retaining  a number  of  chiefs  and  hostages  against  their  attack.  The 
task  was  finished  to  perfection.  The  Shawanoes,  among  the  most  haughty 
and  defiant  of  all  the  tribes,  were  brought  into  the  negotiation,  so  that  the 
submission  of  the  most  dangerous  hostiles  could  not  have  been  more 
abject. 

Having  fully  accomplished  his  work,  Bouquet  withdrew  from  the  Mus- 
kingum, arriving  in  Fort  Pitt  in  the  latter  part  of  November.  The  restored 
captives,  numbering  several  hundred,  were  sent  to  their  respective  homes 
in  Pennsylvania  and  Virginia,  and  the  provincial  troops  were  disbanded 
with  warm  acknowledgment  of  their  services. 

One  of  the  first  acts  of  the  Pennsylvania  Assembly  was  to  pass  a vote 
of  thanks  to  Colonel  Bouquet  for  his  eminent  services,  and  as  due  to  his 
personal  worth.  Virginia  did  the  same,  and  recommended  him  to  the  king 
;for  promotion.  The  last  recommendation  was  not  needed,  for  on  the  first 
siews  of  his  success  he  was  appointed  to  the  rank  of  brigadier,  and  given 
the  command  of  the  southern  department.  Three  years  later  General 
Bouquet,  while  on  duty  in  Pensacola,  took  fever  and  died,  thus  untimely 
closing  the  career  of  a brilliant  soldier  and  most  estimable  man. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 


PONTIAC’S  CONSPIRACY  (CONCLUDED) — THE  COUNTRY  OF  THE  ILLINOIS — 
PONTIAC’S  LAST  RALLY — FAILURE  OF  HIS  EMBASSY  TO  NEW  ORLEANS 
— CROGHAN’S  MISSION— PONTIAC’S  DESPAIR — HE  MAKES  PEACE — HIS 
ASSASSINATION. 

IN  order  fully  to  comprehend  the  extraordinary  career  of  Pontiac,  chief 
of  the  Ottawas,  a few  words  in  explanation  of  the  “ Illinois  country,” 
as  it  was  termed,  are  proper.  This  section  was  chiefly  embraced  within  the 
present  boundaries  of  the  State  of  that  name. 

In  1680,  La  Salle  built  a fort  in  the  country  of  the  Illinois,  when  on  his 
way  to  the  Mississippi.  Jesuit  missionaries  took  up  the  work,  and  toiled 
hard  with  great  self-sacrifice  among  the  dusky  inhabitants.  They  estab- 
lished missions  at  Kaskaskia  and  Cahokia,  and  labored  with  a faithfulness 
which  must  command  the  admiration  of  the  most  bigoted  of  other  faiths. 

Soldiers  and  fur  traders  followed  in  the  footsteps  of  the  missionaries. 
Military  posts  dotted  the  vast  wilderness  at  wide  intervals,  and  here  and 
there  the  smoke  of  the  settler’s  cabin  stained  the  clear  atmosphere.  The 
new  colonists  were  mostly  emigrants  from  Canada  or  disbanded  soldiers  of 
French  regiments.  They  mingled  with  the  Indians  and  the  two  races 
became  boon  companions.  They  cared  naught  for  the  outside  world,  and 
the  military  commandant  at  Fort  Chartres,  on  the  Mississippi,  ruled  all 
with  absolute  sway.  The  total  population  of  the  colony,  exclusive  of  the 
few  negroes,  did  not  exceed  two  thousand  souls,  distributed  among  several 
small  settlements. 

The  Illinois  Indians  were  a debauched  horde  composed  of  remnants 
of  the  Kaskaskias,  Caliokias,  Peorias,  Mitchigamias,  and  Tamaronas,  a mis- 
erable and  sorry  lot,  all  of  them.  About  the  Wabash  and  its  branches,  to 
the  eastward  of  the  Illinois,  were  the  Miamis,  the  Piankishaws,  and  a por- 
tion of  the  Kickapoos.  They  were  more  warlike  and  less  corrupt  than  the 
Illinois.  Another  settlement  of  the  Miamis  was  on  the  Maumee  River, 
still  further  east.  These  were  the  Indians  whom  Captain  Morris  visited  by 
orders  of  Colonel  Bradstreet,  and  from  whom  he  was  thankful  to  escape 
with  his  life. 

This  country  of  course  was  included  among  the  possessions  ceded  to 
Great  Britain  by  France  in  1763.  The  hostilities  prevailing  among  the  red 
jnen  prevented  its  transfer  at  the  time  specified,  and  the  inhabitants  received 
the  news  of  their  surrender  with  wrath  and  execration.  In  the  summer  of 


PONTIAC’S  JOURNEY  WESTWARD. 


1 14 

1764,  the  military  commandant,  Neyon,  whom  General  Amherst  forced  to 
send  letters  to  the  various  tribes,  as  told  elsewhere,  left  the  country  in  dis- 
gust and  went  to  New  Orleans,  followed  by  many  who  shared  his  senti- 
ments. His  successor  was  St.  Ange  de  Bellerive,  a veteran  Canadian 
officer,  with  whom  remained  about  forty  soldiers.  Fort  Chartres,  how- 
ever, was  a strong  post,  with  stone  ramparts  and  a score  of  cannon. 

It  was  to  this  remote  country  that  the  emissaries  of  Pontiac  went 
when  that  chieftain  was  deserted  by  most  of  his  allies.  It  furnished  him 
the  only  recruiting  ground  left,  for  there  the  flag  of  France  still  floated, 
only  awaiting,  however,  the  coming  of  the  conqueror  to  be  lowered  forever 
before  that  of  King  George. 

Pontiac  received  aid  from  the  French  fur  traders,  who  dreaded  the 
rivalry  of  the  English.  They  repeated  the  old  falsehood,  that  the  nations 
had  not  made  peace,  and  that  the  French  king  would  soon  send  an  army 
to  drive  out  the  intruders.  It  was  Pontiac’s  last  rallying  point,  and  he 
wrought  with  desperate  energy  to  bring  the  inhabitants  to  the  point  of 
revolt. 

It  was  believed  that  the  English  would  soon  advance  into  the  Illinois 
country  to  take  possession.  They  must  do  so  either  by  the  Mississippi 
from  the  south,  or  descend  from  the  east,  by  way  of  Fort  Pitt  and  the 
Ohio.  Pontiac’s  purpose  was  to  meet  and  drive  them  back. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  the  chieftain  withdrew  to  the  Maumee  on 
the  approach  of  Bradstreet’s  army,  and  his  runners  kept  him  apprised  of  the 
continuous  triumph  of  his  enemies.  Late  in  the  autumn,  he  left  his  en- 
campment with  four  hundred  warriors,  and  moved  westward,  visiting  the 
different  tribes  and  gaining  their  promise  to  aid  in  his  plans  for  final  de- 
fense. Quoting  from  Parkman’s  admirable  history  of  the  Ottawa  chieftain  : 
“ Crossing  over  the  Wabash,  he  passed  from  village  to  village,  among  the 
Kickapoos,  the  Piankishaws,  and  the  three  tribes  of  the  Miamis,  rousing 
them  by  his  imperious  eloquence,  and  breathing  into  them  his  own  fierce 
spirit  of  resistance.  Thence,  by  rapid  marches  through  forests  and  over 
prairies,  he  reached  the  banks  of  the  Mississippi,  and  summoned  the  four 
tribes  of  the  Illinois  to  a general  meeting.  But  these  degenerate  savages, 
beaten  by  the  surrounding  tribes  for  many  a generation  past,  had  lost  their 
warlike  spirit,  and,  though  abundantly  noisy  and  boastful,  showed  no  zeal 
for  fight,  and  entered  with  no  zest  into  the  schemes  of  the  Ottawa  war- 
chief.  Pontiac  had  his  own  way  of  dealing  with  such  spirits. 

If  you  hesitate,’  he  exclaimed,  frowning  on  the  cowering  assembly, 
‘I  will  consume  your  tribes  as  the  fire  consumes  the  dry  grass  on  the 
prairie.’ 

“ The  doubts  of  the  Illinois  vanished  like  a mist,  and  with  marvelous 
alacrity  they  declared  their  concurrence  in  the  views  of  the  orator. 


THE  CROWNING  EVIL. 


nt  iKf 

!ji(Wf«S>tY0nuAH«l8 
■ » 


■.  ' - 

- 


. 


. 


PONTIAC  AT  FORT  CHARTRES. 


II 7 


“ Having  secured  these  allies,  such  as  they  were,  Pontiac  departed,  and 
hastened  to  Fort  Chartres.  St.  Ange,  so  long  tormented  with  embassy 
after  embassy  and  mob  after  mob,  thought  that  the  crowning  evil  was 
come  at  last,  when  he  saw  the  arch-demon  Pontiac  enter  at  the  gate,  with 
tour  hundred  warriors  at  his  back. 

“Arrived  at  the  council-house,  Pontiac  addressed  the  commandant  in 
a tone  of  high  courtesy : ‘ Father,  we  have  long  wished  to  see  you,  to 

shake  hands  with  you,  and,  whilst  smoking  the  calumet  of  peace,  to  recall 
the  battles  in  which  we  fought  together  against  the  misguided  Indians  and 
the  English  dogs.  I love  the  French,  and  I have  come  hither  with  my  war- 
riors to  avenge  their  wrongs.’ 

“Then  followed  a demand  for  arms,  ammunition,  and  troops,  to  act 
in  concert  with  the  Indian  warriors.  St.  Ange  was  forced  to  decline 
rendering  the  expected  aid ; but  he  sweetened  his  denial  with  soothing 
compliments,  and  added  a few  gifts  to  remove  any  lingering  bitterness. 
Pontiac  would  not  be  appeased.  He  angrily  complained  of  such  lukewarm 
friendship,  where  he  had  looked  for  ready  sympathy  and  support.  His 
warriors  pitched  their  lodges  about  the  fort,  and  threatening  symptoms  of 
an  approaching  rupture  began  to  alarm  the  French. 

“ In  the  meantime,  Pontiac  had  caused  the  squaws  to  construct  a belt 
of  wampum  of  extraordinary  size,  six  feet  in  length,  and  four  inches  in 
width.  It  was  wrought  from  end  to  end  with  the  symbols  of  the  various 
tribes  and  villages,  forty-seven  in  number,  still  leagued  together  in  his 
alliance.  He  consigned  it  to  an  embassy  of  chosen  warriors,  directing  them 
to  carry  it  down  the  Mississippi,  displaying  it,  in  turn,  at  every  Indian  vil- 
lage along  its  banks,  and  exhorting  the  inhabitants,  in  his  name,  to  watch 
the  movements  of  the  English,  and  repel  any  attempt  they  might  make 
to  ascend  the  river.  This  done,  they  were  to  repair  to  New  Orleans,  and 
demand  from  the  governor,  M.  D’Abbadie,  the  aid  which  St.  Ange  had 
refused.  The  bark  canoes  of  the  embassy  put  out  from  the  shore,  and 
whirled  down  the  current  like  floating  leaves  in  autumn.” 

Open  rupture  was  prevented  at  this  juncture  by  tidings  of  the  utter 
failure  of  an  English  body  of  troops,  that  had  attempted  to  ascend  the 
Mississippi  to  take  possession  of  Fort  Chartres.  It  was  fired  into  from 
both  shores  by  Indians,  and  compelled  to  turn  back,  no  expedition  suc- 
ceeding in  reaching  the  post  until  the  latter  part  of  1765. 

The  ambassadors  sent  out  by  Pontiac  did  their  work  faithfully,  pene- 
trating as  far  south  as  the  tribes  of  Southern  Louisiana,  to  whom  the  name 
of  the  mighty  Ottawa  chieftain  was  well  known.  Then  they  went  to  New 
Orleans  and  demanded  audience  with  D’Abbadie.  The  governor  was  in 
such  feeble  health  that  he  died  before  the  council  came  to  an  end.  His 


1 1 8 


croghan’s  successful  mission. 


successor,  M.  Aubrey,  gave  them  no  encouragement,  and  they  took  their 
departure,  scowling  and  enraged  with  disappointment. 

General  Gage,  commander-in-chief  of  the  English  forces  in  America, 
had  determined  to  send  a force  westward  to  take  possession  of  the  Illinois 
country.  To  prepare  the  way  for  the  passage  of  his  troops,  he  sent  George 
Croghan,  the  deputy  of  Sir  William  Johnson,  to  go  in  advance,  making  pres- 
ents to  the  various  tribes,  explaining  the  situation  to  them,  exposing  the 
falsehoods  of  the  French,  and  doing  his  utmost  to  smooth  the  path  for 
the  army  of  occupation.  Croghan  was  well  fitted  for  this  delicate  mis- 
sion, and  executed  it  with  excellent  tact  and  brilliant  success.  He  left  Fort 
Pitt  in  February,  1765,  and  reached  his  destination  at  about  the  same  time 
that  Pontiac’s  embassy  entered  New  Orleans  to  hold  conference  with  the 
French.  Through  discouragements  and  dangers  he  persevered  to  the  tri- 
umphant end. 

Despite  the  genius  Pontiac  had  displayed  from  the  first  inception  of 
his  gigantic  conspiracy,  he  saw,  in  the  face  of  his  unsurpassable  eloquence 
and  herculean  labors,  his  followers  rapidly  falling  away  from  him.  The 
crowning  blow  came  when  the  failure  of  his  embassy  to  New  Orleans  be- 
came known  to  him. 

He  then  realized  for  the  first  time  that  all  hope  was  gone.  The 
dream  of  his  life  had  melted  into  nothingness,  and  the  terrible  conspiracy 
was  overwhelmed  by  irretrievable  ruin.  Not  dismissing  the  vision  alto- 
gether, he  formed  his  resolution.  He  would  make  peace  with  his  conquer- 
ors, and  perhaps  await  the  hour  for  striking  a more  fateful  blow  than  ever. 

In  the  pursuit  of  his  mission,  Croghan  was  approaching  Fort  Chartres 
by  invitation  of  St.  Ange,  when  he  met  Pontiac  himself,  with  his  numer- 
ous chiefs  and  warriors.  The  chieftain  gave  his  hand  to  Croghan,  and  the 
two  parties  returned  to  Fort  Ouatanon,  where  was  a vast  assemblage  of 
Indians,  dark,  scowling,  and  sullen,  whom  a single  word  might  rouse  into 
resistless  violence. 

At  a meeting  of  the  chiefs  and  warriors,  Pontiac  offered  the  calumet  of 
peace,  and  uttered  sentiments  of  good  will  toward  the  English.  He  ac- 
cused the  French  of  having  deceived  him,  else  he  never  would  have  dug  up 
the  hatchet,  against  the  English,  whom  he  now  regarded  as  brothers.  At 
the  same  time,  he  reminded  Croghan  that  the  occupation  of  the  country  by 
his  people  did  not  give  them  the  rights  to  the  lands,  since  the  French  had 
been  there  only  by  the  sufferance  of  the  real  owners. 

This  decisive  interview  completed  Croghan’s  work  and  rendered  it  un- 
necessary for  him  to  go  further.  Accordingly,  he  turned  back  toward 
Detroit,  and,  followed  by  Pontiac  and  many  of  the  Indian  chiefs,  crossed 
over  to  Fort  Miami  and  descended  the  Maumee,  holding  conferences  at 
the  different  villages  he  passed  on  the  way.  He  reached  Detroit  on  the 


SUBMISSION  OF  PONTIAC. 


1 19 

17th  of  August,  and  found  an  immense  gathering  of  Ottavvas,  Pottawato- 
mies,  and  Ojibwas  encamped  about  the  fort,  with  others  along  the  banks 
of  the  Rouge  River.  They  readily  responded  to  his  invitation  to  a 
council. 

All  thoughts  of  hostility  had  long  since  vanished  from  the  minds 
of  the  warriors.  They  had  suffered  much  and  were  anxious  for  the 
full  restoration  of  peace.  They  expressed  sorrow  for  what  they  had  done 
and  begged  forgiveness.  Pontiac’s  speech  is  worthy  of  record  : 

“ Father,  we  have  all  smoked  out  this  pipe  of  peace.  It  is  your  chil- 
dren’s pipe  ; and  as  the  war  is  all  over,  and  the  Great  Spirit  and  Giver  of 
Light,  who  has  made  the  earth  and  everything  therein,  has  brought  us 
all  together  this  day  for  our  mutual  good,  I declare  to  all  nations  that  I 
have  settled  my  peace  with  you  before  I came  here,  and  now  deliver  my 
pipe  to  be  sent  to  Sir  William  Johnson,  that  he  may  know  that  I have 
made  peace,  and  taken  the  King  of  England  for  m).  father,  in  presence  of 
all  the  nations  now  assembled  ; and  whenever  any  of  these  nations  go  to 
visit  him,  they  may  smoke  out  of  it  with  him  in  peace.  Fathers,  we  are 
obliged  to  you  for  lighting  up  our  old  council  fire  for  us,  and  desiring  us  to 
return  to  it  ; but  we  are  now  settled  on  the  Miami  River,  not  far  from 
hence  ; whenever  you  want  us  you  will  find  us  there.” 

Croghan  left  Detroit  for  Niagara*  and  thence  went  eastward  to  report  the 
result  of  his  mission  to  the  commander-in-chief.  Before  he  left  he  secured 
Pontiac’s  promise  to  come  in  the  spring  to  Oswego,  and,  in  behalf  of  the 
tribes  lately  composing  his  league,  conclude  a treaty  of  peace  with  Sir 
William  Johnson. 

Pontiac  kept  his  promise.  The  following  spring  he  left  his  encampment 
on  the  Maumee,  accompanied  by  his  chiefs  and  by  an  Englishman  dis- 
patched by  Johnson  to  look  after  the  delegation.  The  journey  was  a long 
one,  the  canoes  coasting  along  the  shore  of  Lake  Erie,  past  the  portage  at 
the  outlet,  thence  out  upon  Lake  Ontario,  and  finally  they  were  welcomed 
by  the  booming  cannon  of  Oswego. 

Sir  William  Johnson  was  waiting  to  receive  them,  attended  by  the  prin- 
cipal sachems  of  the  Six  Nations,  present  by  invitation.  The  council  oc- 
cupied several  days  and  was  marked  by  all  the  pomp  and  ceremony  of 
such  gatherings.  Johnson,  whose  perfect  knowledge  of  the  Indian  char- 
acter enabled  him  to  do  a most  beneficent  work  among  them,  made  a long 
conciliatory  speech,  covering  every  point  that  was  necessary.  Pontiac 
addressed  the  superintendent  as  follows  : 

“ Father,  we  thank  the  Great  Spirit  for  giving  us  so  fine  a day  to  meet 
upon  such  great  affairs.  I speak  in  the  name  of  all  the  nations  to  the 
westward,  of  whom  I am  the  master.  It  is  the  will  of  the  Great  Spirit 
that  we  should  meet  here  to-day ; and  before  him  I now  take  you  by  the 


120 


PONTIAC  AND  SIR  WILLIAM  JOHNSON. 


hand.  I call  him  to  witness  that  I speak  from  my  heart  ; for  since  I took 
Colonel  Croghan  by  the  hand  last  year,  I have  never  let  go  my  hold,  for  I 
see  that  the  Great  Spirit  will  have  us  friends. 

“ Father,  when  our  father  of  France  was  in  this  country,  I held  him 
fast  by  the  hand.  Now  that  he  is  gone,  I take  you,  my  English  father,  by 
the  hand,  in  the  name  of  all  the  nations,  and  promise  to  keep  this  covenant 
as  long  as  I shall  live.” 

Pontiac  at  this  point  handed  a large  belt  of  wampum  to  Sir  William 
Johnson  and  continued  : 

“ Father,  when  you  address  me,  it  is  the  same  as  if  you  addressed  all 
the  nations  of  the  west.  Father,  this  belt  is  to  cover  and  strengthen  our 


DEATH  OF  PONTIAC. 


chain  of  friendship  and  to  show  you  that,  if  any  nation  shall  lift  the  hatchet 
against  our  English  brethren,  we  shall  be  the  first  to  feel  it  and  resent  it.” 

Pontiac  then  took  up  the  points  of  Sir  William  Johnson’s  speech  and 
professed  satisfaction  with  them  all.  He  and  his  chiefs  remained  several 
days,  perfecting  the  details  of  the  various  treaties,  and,  when  they  departed, 
they  carried  a good  load  of  presents  with  them. 

The  chieftain  spent  the  following  winter  with  his  family  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  Maumee,  conducting  himself  like  an  ordinary  warrior.  In  the  spring 
*>f  1767,  there  were  mutterings  of  discontent  among  the  Indians  from  the 
Lakes  to  the  Potomac.  These,  a few  years  later,  resulted  in  a brief  but 
bloody  war  along  the  Virginia  borders.  There  is  no  evidence  that  Pontiac 


ASSASSINATION  OF  PONTIAC. 


21 


took  any  part  in  the  hostilities.  Neither  record  nor  tradition  tells  aught 
of  him,  until  April,  1769,  when  it  is  known  he  visited  the  Illinois.  His 
errand  was  a secret,  but  it  caused  uneasiness  among  the  few  English  there. 
Soon  afterward,  he  went  to  St.  Louis  to  visit  his  old  acquaintance,  St.  Ange, 
then  in  command  at  that  post.  He  remained  several  days,  his  chiefs  and 
himself  receiving  marked  attention. 

While  there,  he  learned  that  a large  number  of  Indians  were  assembled 
at  Cahokia,  on  the  other  side  of  the  river,  holding  a carousal.  He  expressed 
his  intention  of  going  thither.  St.  Ange  protested,  warning  him  that  he 
would  be  in  great  danger,  as  his  visit  was  viewed  with  much  disfavor  by  the 
English.  Pontiac  replied  that  he  had  no  fear  of  them  and  left. 

He  joined  in  the  revelry  and  drank  deeply.  When  the  feast  was  over, 
the  chieftain  strode  down  the  street  to  the  adjacent  woods,  where  he  was 
heard  singing  the  medicine  songs  of  his  people. 

An  English  trader  named  Williamson  was  in  the  village  at  that  time. 
He  hated  the  Ottawa,  and  bribed  a vagabond  Kaskaskia  Indian,  with  a 
barrel  of  liquor,  to  kill  him.  The  miscreant  stole  after  Pontiac  and,  when 
he  was  unsuspicious  of  danger,  buried  his  tomahawk  in  his  brain.  Thus, 
like  Philip,  leader  of  the  Wampanoags,  and  afterward  Sitting  Bull,  medicine 
man  of  the  Sioux,  the  mighty  chieftain  of  the  Ottawas  perished  by  the 
hand  of  one  of  his  own  race. 


CHAPTER  XV. 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF  PETER  WILLIAMSON. 


MONG  the  numerous  stirring  experiences  connected  with  the  French 


and  Indian  war,  was  that  of  Peter  Williamson,  a native  of  Scotland, 
who  was  kidnapped  by  a party  of  sailors  when  a boy  and  brought  to 
America.  He  married  while  yet  a young  man,  and  received  as  a wedding- 
present  from  his  father-in-law,  a deed  of  a tract  of  land  on  the  frontier  of 
Pennsylvania,  near  the  Forks  of  the  Delaware.  Thither  the  couple  re- 
moved and  prospered  for  a number  of  years.  The  Indians,  however,  gave 
the  settlers  much  trouble,  committing  many  outrages,  burning  homes  and 
killing  people.  What  befell  Peter  Williamson  on  October  20,  1754,  is  thus 
related  by  himself : 

“ My  wife,”  says  he,  “ that  day  left  home,  with  the  only  servant  resi- 
dent in  the  house,  on  a visit  to  the  farm  of  a neighbor,  some  five  or  six 
miles  away.  As  I stayed  up  later  than  usual,  expecting  her  return,  none 
being  in  the  house  besides  myself,  how  great  was  my  surprise  and  terror 
when,  about  eleven  o’clock  at  night,  I heard  the  dismal  war-whoop  of  the 
savages,  and  found  that  my  house  was  beset  by  them  ! 

“ The  door  of  my  house  was  fastened.  I flew  to  an  upper  window  and 
looked  out.  The  savages  were  twelve  in  number,  standing  in  the  moon- 
light. Having  my  gun  loaded,  I threatened  them  with  death  if  they  did 
not  retire.  I demanded  what  they  wanted,  but  they  immediately  advanced 
to  the  door  and  tried  to  beat  it  open.  Finding  this  more  difficult  than 
they  looked  for,  one  of  them,  who  could  speak  English,  threatened  me  in 
return  that  ‘ if  I did  not  come  out,  they  would  burn  me  alive,’  adding,  how- 
ever, that  ‘ if  I would  come  out  and  surrender  myself  prisoner,  they  would 
not  kill  me.’  In  such  deplorable  circumstances  I chose  to  rely  on  their 
promises  rather  than  meet  death  by  rejecting  them,  and  accordingly  went 
out  of  the  house  with  my  gun  in  my  hand,  not  knowing  that  I had  it. 
Immediately  on  my  approach  they  rushed  on  me  like  tigers,  and  instantly 
disarmed  me.  Having  me  thus  in  their  power,  they  bound  me  to  a tree, 
went  into  the  house,  plundered  it  of  everything  they  could  carry  off,  and 
then  set  fire  to  it  and  consumed  what  was  left  before  my  eyes.  Not  satis- 
fied with  this,  they  set  fire  to  my  barn,  stable,  and  outhouses,  wherein  were 
about  two  hundred  bushels  of  wheat,  six  cows,  four  horses,  and  five  sheep, 
all  of  which  were  consumed  to  ashes. 

“ Having  thus  finished  the  execrable  business  about  which  they  came, 


122 


BARBAROUS  CRUELTIES. 


23 


one  of  the  monsters  came  to  me  with  a tomahawk,  and  threatened  me  with 
the  worst  of  deaths,  if  I would  not  go  with  them.  This  I agreed  to,  and 
then  they  untied  me — gave  me  a load  to  carry,  under  which  I traveled  all 
that  night,  full  of  the  most  terrible  apprehensions  lest  my  unhappy  wife 
should  likewise  have  fallen  into  their  cruel  power. 

“ At  daybreak,  my  infernal  masters  ordered  me  to  lay  down  my  load  ; 
then,  tying  my  hands  again  round  a tree — forcing  the  blood  out  at  my 
fingers’  ends — they  kindled  a fire  near  the  tree  to  which  I was  bound  ; the 
most  dreadful  agony  seized  me,  for  I concluded  I was  to  be  made  a sacri- 
fice to  their  barbarity. 

“The  fire  being  made,  they  for  some  time  danced  round  me  after  their 
manner,  whooping,  hallooing,  and  shrieking  in  a frightful  manner.  Being 
satisfied  with  this  sort  of  mirth,  they  proceeded  in  another  manner;  taking 
the  burning  coals,  and  sticks  flaming  with  fire  at  the  ends,  holding  them  to 
my  face,  head,  hands,  and  feet,  and  at  the  same  time  threatening  to  burn 
me  entirely  if  I cried  out.  Thus,  tortured  as  I was  almost  to  death,  I 
suffered  their  brutalties  without  being  able  to  vent  my  anguish  otherwise 
than  by  shedding  silent  tears  ; and  these  being  observed,  they  took  fresh 
coals  and  applied  them  near  my  eyes,  telling  me  my  face  was  wet,  and  that 
they  would  dry  it  for  me,  which  indeed  they  cruelly  did.  How  I under- 
went these  tortures  has  been  a matter  of  wonder  to  me,  but  God  enabled 
me  to  wait  with  more  than  common  patience  for  the  deliverance  I daily 
prayed. 

“At  length  they  sat  down  round  the  fire,  and  roasted  the  meat  of 
which  they  had  robbed  my  dwelling.  When  they  had  supped,  they 
offered  some  to  me.  Though  it  may  easily  be  imagined  I had  but  little 
appetite  to  eat,  after  the  tortures  and  miseries  I had  suffered,  yet  I was 
forced  to  seem  pleased  with  what  they  offered  me,  lest  by  refusing  it  they 
should  resume  their  hellish  practices.  What  I could  not  eat  I contrived  to 
hide,  they  having  unbound  me  till  they  imagined  I had  eaten  all;  but  then 
they  bound  me  as  before,  in  which  deplorable  condition  I was  obliged  to 
continue  the  whole  day.  When  the  sun  was  set,  they  put  out  the  fire,  and 
covered  the  ashes  with  leaves,  as  is  their  custom,  that  the  white  people 
might  not  discover  any  traces  of  their  having  been  there. 

“Going  from  thence  along  the  Susquehanna  for  the  space  of  six  miles, 
loaded  as  I was  before,  we  arrived  at  a spot  near  the  Appalachian  Moun- 
tains, or  Blue  Hills,  where  they  hid  their  plunder  under  logs  of  wood. 
From  thence  they  proceeded  to  a neighboring  house,  occupied  by  one 
Jacob  Snider  and  his  unhappy  family,  consisting  of  his  wife,  five  children, 
and  a young  man,  his  servant.  They  soon  got  admittance  into  the  unfor- 
tunate man’s  house,  where  they  immediately,  without  the  least  remorse, 
scalped  both  parents  and  children  ; nor  could  the  tears,  the  shrieks,  or  cries 


124 


COMPANIONS  IN  CAPTIVITY. 


of  poor  innocent  children  prevent  their  horrible  massacre.  Having  thus 
scalped  them,  and  plundered  the  house  of  everything  that  was  movable, 
they  set  fire  to  it,  and  left  the  distressed  victims  amid  the  flames. 

“ Thinking  the  young  man  belonging  to  this  unhappy  family  would  be  of 
service  to  them  in  carrying  part  of  their  plunder,  they  spared  his  life,  and 
loaded  him  and  myself  with  what  they  had  here  got,  and  again  marched  to 
the  Blue  Hills,  where  they  stowed  their  goods  as  before.  My  fellow-sufferer 
could  not  support  the  cruel  treatment  which  we  were  obliged  to  suffer,  and 
complained  bitterly  to  me  of  his  being  unable  to  proceed  any  farther.  I 
endeavored  to  animate  him,  but  all  in  vain,  for  still  he  continued  his  moans 
and  tears,  which  one  of  the  savages  perceiving,  as  we  traveled  along,  came 
up  to  us,  and  with  his  tomahawk  gave  him  a blow  on  the  head  which  felled 
the  unhappy  youth  to  the  ground,  whom  they  immediately  scalped  and  left. 

“ The  suddenness  of  this  murder  shocked  me  to  that  degree  that  I was 
in  a manner  motionless,  expecting  that  my  fate  would  soon  be  the  same. 
However,  recovering  my  distracted  thoughts,  I dissembled  my  anguish  as 
well  as  I could  from  the  barbarians;  but  still  such  was  my  terror  that  for 
some  time  I scarce  knew  the  days  of  the  week,  or  what  I did. 

“ They  still  kept  on  their  course  near  the  mountains,  where  they  lay 
skulking  for  four  or  five  days,  rejoicing  at  the  plunder  they  had  got.  When 
provisions  became  scarce,  they  made  their  way  toward  the  Susquehanna, 
and  passing  another  house,  inhabited  by  an  old  man,  whose  name  was  John 
Adams,  with  his  wife  and  four  small  children,  and  meeting  with  no  resistance, 
they  immediately  scalped  the  mother  and  her  children  before  the  old  man’s 
eyes.  Inhuman  and  horrid  as  this  was,  it  did  not  satisfy  them  ; for  when 
they  had  murdered  the  poor  woman  and  her  children,  they  proceeded  to 
mutilate  the  bodies  in  a most  brutal  manner.  The  unhappy  Adams,  not 
being  able  to  avoid  the  sight,  entreated  them  to  put  an  end  to  his  miserable 
being;  but  they  were  as  deaf  to  the  tears  and  entreaties  of  this  venerable 
sufferer  as  they  had  been  to  those  of  the  others,  and  proceeded  to  burn  and 
destroy  the  house,  barn,  corn,  hay,  and  cattle,  and  everything  the  poor  man 
a few  hours  before  was  master  of.  Having  saved  what  they  thought  proper 
from  the  flames,  they  gave  the  old  man,  feeble,  weak,  and  in  the  miserable 
condition  he  then  was,  as  well  as  myself,  burdens  to  carry,  and  loading  them- 
selves likewise  with  bread  and  meat,  pursued  their  journey  toward  the  Great 
Swamp.  Here  they  lay  for  eight  or  nine  days,  diverting  themselves  at  times 
with  barbarous  cruelties  on  the  old  man,  sometimes  they  would  strip  him 
naked,  and  paint  him  all  over  with  various  sorts  of  colors ; at  other  times 
they  would  pluck  the  white  hairs  from  his  head,  and  tauntingly  tell  him  he 
was  a fool  for  living  so  long,  and  that  they  would  show  him  kindness  in 
putting  him  out  of  the  world.  In  vain  were  all  his  tears,  fordaily  did  they 
tire  themselves  with  the  various  means  they  tried  to  torment  him. 


TWENTY-FIVE  OTHER  INDIANS  ARRIVED. 


IN  CAPTIVITY. 


127 


“ One  night,  after  lie  had  as  usual  been  tormented,  while  he  and  I were 
condoling  each  other  at  the  miseries  we  daily  suffered,  twenty-five  other 
Indians  arrived,  bringing  with  them  twenty  scalps  and  three  prisoners,  who 
had  unhappily  fallen  into  their  hands  in  Conogocheague,  a small  town 
near  the  river  Susquehanna,  chiefly  inhabited  by  the  Irish.  These 
prisoners  gave  us  some  shocking  accounts  of  the  murders  and  devastations 
committed  in  their  parts. 

“The  three  prisoners  that  were  brought  with  these  additional  forces, 
constantly  repining  at  their  lot,  and  almost  dead  with  their  excessive  hard 
treatment,  contrived  at  last  to  make  their  escape;  but  being  far  from  their 
own  settlements,  and  not  knowing  the  country,  were  soon  after  met  by 
some  others  of  the  tribes  or  nations  at  war  with  us,  and  brought  back. 
The  poor  creatures,  almost  famished  for  want  of  sustenance,  having  had 
none  during  the  time  of  their  escape,  were  no  sooner  in  the  power  of  the 
barbarians  than  they  were  put  to  death,  in  a most  cruel  manner.  And 
after  their  death,  it  was  my  task  to  dig  their  graves,  which,  feeble  and  terri- 
fied as  I was,  the  dread  of  suffering  the  same  fate  enabled  me  to  do. 

“A  great  snow  now  falling,  the  barbarians  were  fearful  lest  the  white 
people  should,  by  their  tracks,  find  out  their  skulking  retreats,  which 
obliged  them  to  make  the  best  of  their  way  to  their  winter  quarters,  about 
two  hundred  miles  farther  from  any  plantations  or  inhabitants.  After  a 
long  and  painful  journey,  being  almost  starved,  I arrived  with  this  dreadful 
band  at  Alamingo.  There  I found  a number  of  wigwams  full  of  their 
women  and  children.  Dancing,  singing,  and  shouting  were  their  general 
amusements.  And  in  all  their  festivals  and  dances  they  relate  what  suc- 
cesses they  have  had,  and  what  damages  they  have  sustained  in  their 
expeditions,  in  which  I now  unhappily  became  a part  of  their  theme.  The 
severity  of  the  cold  increasing,  they  stripped  me  of 'my  clothes  for  their 
own  use,  and  gave  me  such  as  they  usually  wore  themselves,  being  a piece 
of  blanket,  and  a pair  of  moccasins  or  shoes,  with  a yard  of  coarse  cloth  to 
put  round  me  instead  of  breeches. 

“At  Alamingo  I remained  near  two  months,  till  the  snow  was  off  the 
ground.  Whatever  thoughts  I might  have  had  of  making  my  escape,  to 
carry  them  into  execution  was  impracticable,  being  so  far  from  any  planta- 
tions or  white  people,  and  the  severe  weather  rendering  my  limbs  in  a 
manner  quite  still  and  motionless.  However,  I contrived  to  defend  myself 
against  the  inclemency  of  the  weather  as  well  as  I could  by  making  myself  a 
little  wigwam  with  the  bark  of  the  trees,  covering  it  with  earth,  which  made 
it  resemble  a cave ; and  to  prevent  the  ill  effects  of  the  cold,  I kept  a good 
fire  always  near  the  door.  My  liberty  of  going  about  was,  indeed,  more 
than  I could  have  expected,  but  they  well  knew  the  impracticability  of  my 
escaping  from  them.  Seeing  me  outwardly  easy  and  submissive,  they 


128 


THOUGHTS  OF  ESCAPE. 


would  sometimes  give  me  a little  meat;  but  my  chief  food  was  Indian 
corn.  At  length  the  time  came  when  they  were  preparing  themselves  for 
another  expedition  against  the  planters  and  white  people;  but  before  they 
set  out,  they  were  joined  by  many  other  Indians. 

“ As  soon  as  the  snow  was  quite  gone,  they  set  forth  on  their  journey 
toward  the  back  parts  of  the  province  of  Pennsylvania,  all  leaving  their 
wives  and  children  behind  in  their  wigwams.  They  were  now  a formid- 
able body,  amounting  to  near  one  hundred  and  fifty.  My  business  was  to 
carry  what  they  thought  proper  to  load  me  with,  but  they  never  trusted 
me  with  a gun.  We  marched  on  several  days  without  anything  particular 
occurring,  almost  famished  for  want  of  provisions;  for  my  part,  I had  noth- 
ing but  a few  stalks  of  Indian  corn,  which  I was  glad  to  eat  dry.  Nor  did 
the  Indians  themselves  fare  much  better;  for  as  we  drew  near  the  planta- 
tions, they  were  afraid  to  kill  any  game  lest  the  noise  of  their  guns  should 
alarm  the  inhabitants. 

“When  we  again  arrived  at  the  Blue  Hills,  about  thirty  miles  from  the 
Irish  settlements  before  mentioned,  we  encamped  for  three  days,  though 
God  knows  we  had  neither  tents  nor  anything  else  to  defend  us  from  the 
inclemency  of  the  weather,  having  nothing  to  lie  on  by  night  but  the  grass; 
their  usual  method  of  lodging,  pitching  or  encamping  by  night  being  in 
parcels  of  ten  or  twelve  men  to  a fire,  where  they  lie  upon  the  grass  or 
brush  wrapped  up  in  a blanket,  with  their  feet  to  the  fire. 

“ During  our  stay  here,  a sort  of  council  of  war  was  held,  when  it  was 
agreed  to  divide  themselves  into  companies  of  about  twenty  men  each, 
after  which  every  chief  marched  with  his  party  where  he  thought  proper. 
I still  belonged  to  my  old  masters,  but  was  left  behind  on  the  mountains 
with  ten  Indians,  to  stay  till  the  rest  should  return,  not  thinking  it  proper 
to  carry  me  nearer  Conogocheague  or  the  other  plantations. 

“ Here  I began  to  meditate  an  escape ; and  though  I knew  the  country 
round  extremely  well,  yet  I was  very  cautious  of  giving  the  least  suspicion 
of  any  such  intention.  However,  the  third  day  after  the  grand  body  left, 
my  companions  thought  proper  to  traverse  the  mountains  in  search  of 
game  for  their  sustenance,  leaving  me  behind  in  such  a manner  that  I 
could  not  escape.  At  night,  when  they  returned,  having  unbound  me,  we 
all  sat  down  together  to  supper  on  what  they  had  killed,  and  soon  after, 
being  greatly  fatigued  with  their  day’s  excursion,  they  composed  them- 
selves to  rest  as  usual.  I now  tried  various  ways  to  discover  whether  it 
was  a scheme  to  prove  my  intentions  or  not ; but  after  making  a noise 
and  walking  about,  sometimes  touching  them  with  my  feet,  I found  there 
was  no  fallacy. 

“ Then  I resolved,  if  possible,  to  get  one  of  their  guns,  and,  if  dis- 
covered, to  die  in  my  defense  rather  than  be  taken.  For  that  purpose,  I 


FLIGHT  THROUGH  THE  WILDERNESS. 


129 


made  various  efforts  to  get  one  from  under  their  heads,  where  they  always 
secured  them,  but  in  vain.  Disappointed  in  this,  I began  to  despair  of 
carrying  my  design  into  execution;  yet,  after  a little  recollection,  and  trust- 
ing myself  to  the  Divine  protection,  I set  forward,  naked  and  defenseless  as 
I was. 

“ Such  was  my  terror,  however,  that  in  going  from  them  I halted  and' 
paused  every  four  or  five  yards,  looking  fearfully  toward  the  spot  where  I 
had  left  them,  lest  they  should  awake  and  miss  me  ; but  when  I was  two 
hundred  yards  from  them,  I mended  my  pace,  and  made  as  much  haste  as 
I possibly  could  to  the  foot  of  the  mountains,  when,  on  a sudden,  I was 
struck  with  the  greatest  terror  at  hearing  the  wood-cry,  as  it  is  called., 
which  the  savages  I had  left  were  making  upon  missing  their  charge. 

“ The  more  my  terror  increased,  the  faster  I rushed  on,  and,  scarce 
knowing  where  I trod,  drove  through  the  woods  with  the  utmost  precipita- 
tion, sometimes  falling  and  bruising  myself,  cutting  my  feet  and  legs 
against  the  stones  in  a miserable  manner.  But  faint  and  maimed  as  I was, 
I continued  my  flight  till  daybreak,  when,  without  having  anything  to  sus- 
tain nature  but  a little  corn  left,  1 crept  into  a hollow  tree,  where  I lay  very 
snug,  and  returned  my  prayers  and  thanks  to  the  Divine  Being,  who  had 
thus  far  favored  my  escape.  But  my  repose  was  in  a few  hours  destroyed 
at  hearing  the  voices  of  the  savages  near  the  place  where  I was  hid,  threat- 
ening and  talking  how  they  would  use  me  if  they  got  me  again.  However,, 
they  at  last  left  the  spot  where  I heard  them,  and  I remained  in  my  apart- 
ment all  that  day  without  further  molestation. 

“At  night  I ventured  forward  again,  frightened,  thinking  each  twig 
that  touched  me  a savage.  The  third  day  I concealed  myself  in  like  man- 
ner as  before,  and  at  night  traveled,  keeping  off  the  main  road  as  much  as 
possible,  which  lengthened  my  journey  many  miles.  But  how  shall  I de- 
scribe the  terror  I felt  on  the  fourth  night,  when,  by  the  rustling  I made 
among  the  leaves,  a party  of  Indians  that  lay  around  a small  fire,  which  I 
did  not  perceive,  started  from  the  ground,  and,  seizing  their  arms,  ran  from 
the  fire  among  the  woods  ? Whether  to  move  forward  or  rest  where  I was 
I knew  not,  when,  to  my  great  surprise  and  joy,  I was  relieved  by  a parcel 
of  swine  that  made  toward  the  place  where  I guessed  the  savages  to  be^ 
who,  on  seeing  them,  very  merrily  returned  to  the  fire,  and  lay  down  again 
to  sleep.  Bruised,  crippled,  and  terrified  as  I was,  I pursued  my  journey  till 
break  of  day,  when,  thinking  myself  safe,  I lay  down  under  a great  log,  and 
slept  till  about  noon.  Before  evening,  I reached  the  summit  of  a great 
hill,  and  looking  out  if  I could  spy  any  habitations  of  white  people,  to  my^ 
inexpressible  joy  I saw  some,  which  I guessed  to  be  about  ten  miles  distant, 

“ In  the  morning  I continued  my  journey  toward  the  nearest  cleared 
. lands  I had  seen  the  day  before,  and  about  four  o’clock  in  the  afternoon 


I3° 


SAFETY  AT  LAST. 


arrived  at  the  house  of  John  Bell,  an  old  acquaintance,  where,  knocking 
at  the  door,  his  wife,  who  opened  it,  seeing  me  in  such  a frightful  condi- 
tion, flew  from  me  screaming  into  the  house.  This  alarmed  the  whole 
family,  who  immediately  fled  to  their  arms,  and  I was  soon  accosted  by 
the  master  with  his  gun  in  his  hand.  But  on  making  myself  known,  for  he 
before  took  me  for  an  Indian,  he  immediately  caressed  me,  as  did  all  his 

family,  with  extraordi- 
nary friendship,  the  re- 
port of  my  being  mur- 
dered by  the  savages 
having  reached  them 
some  months  before. 

“ For  two  days  and 
nights  they  very  affec- 
tionately supplied  me 
with  all  necessaries,  and 
carefully  attended  me 
till  my  spirits  and  limbs 
were  pretty  well  recov- 
ered, and  I thought  my- 
self able  to  ride,  when  I 
borrowed  of  these  good 
people,  whose  kindness 
merits  my  most  grateful 
returns,  ahorse  and  some 
clothes,  and  set  forward 
for  my  father-in-law’s 
house  in  Chester  County, 
about  one  hundred  and 
forty  miles  from  thence, 
where  I arrived  on  the 
4th  of  January,  1755  ; but  scarce  one  of  the  family  could  credit  his 
eyes,  for  all  believed  that  I had  fallen  a prey  to  the  Indians,  and  had 
been  burned  in  my  house.  They  all  embraced  me  affectionately,  but,  as 
I noticed,  with  some  constraint.  ‘ Where  is  Rose — my  wife  ? ’ I asked  ; 
‘ I am  told  she  returned  here.’  They  told  me  she  had  been  dead  two 
months — that  her  griefs  had  killed  her  within  a week  after  she  returned 
home.” 


CHAPTER  XVI. 


EMIGRATION  WESTWARD — THE  WYOMING  MASSACRE. 

TIDE  of  emigration  westward  set  in  after  the  close  of  the  French  and 


Indian  war.  Hundreds  of  settlers  made  their  way  into  the  vast  ter- 
ritory beyond  the  Alleghenies,  and  founded  homes  in  the  present  States  of 
Ohio  and  Kentucky,  where  they  cleared  the  land,  built  log  cabins,  and 
fought  the  wild  Indians,  who  harassed  them  without  cessation.  Sometimes 
these  attacks  were  so  overwhelming  that  whole  settlements  were  destroyed, 
and  the  wave  of  emigration  was  rolled  backward. 

But  only  for  a time.  The  daring  pioneers  pushed  steadily  forward, 
and  the  development  of  the  Great  West  continued  in  the  face  of  obstacles 
that  would  have  disheartened  less  brave  and  hardy  men,  until  the  Indians 
were  driven  from  their  ancient  hunting  grounds,  and  flourishing  towns  and 
cities  rose  in  the  region,  which,  a few  years  before,  formed  a portion  of  the 
primeval  forest,  where  the  foot  of  the  Caucasian  had  never  trod. 

The  famous  hunter,  Daniel  Boone,  roamed  through  the  “Dark  and 
Bloody  Ground”  for  two  years,  charmed  with  the  picturesque  scenery  and 
abundance  of  game.  He  met  with  many  thrilling  adventures  and  narrow 
escapes  from  the  red  men,  finally  establishing  a fort  at  Boonesborough, 
whither  he  removed  with  his  family  in  the  early  summer  of  1775,  thus 
forming  the  first  permanent  settlement  in  the  State. 

The  Indians  were  not  the  people  to  remain  neutral  when  the  Revolu- 
tion broke  out.  The  powerful  influence  of  Sir  William  Johnson  held  nearly 
all  the  Six  Nations  loyal  to  the  mother  country,  but  in  other  portions  of 
the  colonies  they  gave  great  trouble,  due  as  much  perhaps  to  their  innate 
propensity  for  mischief,  as  to  their  sentiments  toward  those  who  had  con- 
quered the  French,  to  whom,  as  has  been  shown,  the  aborigines  manifested 
a strong  attachment. 

Joseph  Brandt,  the  noted  Mohawk  chief,  had  received  a fair  English 
education,  and  his  sister  lived  with  Sir  William  Johnson,  the  superintendent 
of  Indian  affairs.  The  Six  Nations  had  lost  many  of  their  warriors  at  Oris- 
kany  in  1777,  and  longed  for  a chance  to  retaliate  on  the  Americans. 
Brandt  was  brave,  cruel,  and  skillful,  and  the  one  to  lead  them  on  a 
marauding  expedition  against  the  patriots.  The  English  governors  at 
Detroit  and  Niagara  used  their  utmost  efforts  to  rouse  the  Indians  to 
enmity  toward  the  Americans. 

In  the  summer  of  1778,  a band  of  Tories  and  Indians  invaded  the  lovely 


132 


INVASION  OF  THE  MOHAWK  VALLEY. 


Wyoming  Valley.  The  leader  of  the  former  was  Colonel  John  Butler, 
while  his  cousin,  Colonel  Zebulon  Butler,  was  the  commander  of  the  patriot 
forces.  At  that  time,  most  of  the  men  in  the  valley  were  absent,  fighting 
the  battles  of  their  country  against  King  George.  Those  that  remained 
were  mostly  old  men  and  boys,  who,  upon  being  mustered  together  to 
resist  the  invaders,  were  found  to  number  between  three  and  four  hundred. 


MONUMENT  ERECTED  AT  WYOMING. 


Driven  out  of  the  two  forts  they  had  built  in  the  valley,  the  defenders  took 
refuge  in  the  remaining  one,  known  as  “ Forty  Fort.” 

It  was  on  the  29th  and  30th  of  June  that  Colonel  John  Butler,  with 
about  four  hundred  British  provincials,  partly  composed  of  Tories,  together 
with  six  or  seven  hundred  Indians,  entered  the  head  of  the  valley  and  took 
possession  unopposed  of  Fort  Wintermoot.  Colonel  Zebulon  Butler,  know- 
ing of  the  threatened  peril,  had  obtained  leave  to  visit  the  valley,  and, 
by  common  consent,  assumed  the  leadership  of  the  little  band  of  defend- 
ers. “ Indian  Butler,”  as  he  was  called,  summoned  Forty  Fort  to  surren- 
der. A council  of  war  was  called  on  the  3d  of  July,  and  the  leaders 
decided  that  the  most  prudent  course  was  to  secure  delay,  in  the  hope  ol 
the  arrival  of  re-enforcements.  A large  majority,  however,  favored  march- 
ing out  and  giving  battle  to  the  invaders.  The  sentiment  was  so  strong 


THE  ORDER  OF  BATTLE.  1 33 

for  such  a course  that  Colonel  Butler  sprang  upon  his  horse,  saying  : “ We 
are  going  into  great  danger,  but  I will  lead  you.’' 

It  was  about  three  o’clock  in  the  afternoon  that  the  little  band 
marched  out  of  the  fort,  with  drums  beating  and  colors  flying.  They 
moved  up  the  plain,  with  the  river  on  the  right  and  a marsh  on  the  left, 
until  they  arrived  at  Fort  Wintermoot,  which  had  been  set  on  fire  to 
deceive  the  patriots  into  the  belief  that  the  invaders  were  withdrawing  from 
the  valley. 

Miner’s  History  says  : 

“Colonel  Z.  Butler,  on  approaching  the  enemy,  sent  forward  Captains 
Ransom  and  Durkee,  Lieutenants  Ross  and  Wells,  as  officers  whose  skill 
he  most  relied  on,  to  select  the  spot,  and  mark  off  the  ground  on  which  to 
form  the  order  of  battle.  On  coming  up,  the  column  displayed  to  the  left, 
and  under  those  officers  every  company  took  its  station,  and  then  advanced 
in  line  to  the  proper  position,  where  it  halted,  the  right  resting  on  the 
steep  bank  noted,  the  left  extending  across  the  gravel  flat  to  a morass,  thick 
with  timber  and  brush,  that  separated  the  bottom  land  from  the  mountain. 
Yellow  and  pitch-pine  trees,  with  oak  shrubs,  were  scattered  all  over  the 
plain.  On  the  American  right  was  Captain  Bidlack’s  company.  Next  was 
Captain  Hewitt’s,  Daniel  Gore  being  one  of  his  lieutenants.  On  the 
extreme  left  was  Captain  Whittlesey’s.  Colonel  Butler,  supported  by 
Major  John  Garrett,  commanded  the  right  wing.  Colonel  Denison,  sup- 
ported by  Lieutenant  Colonel  George  Dorrance,  commanded  the  left. 
Such  was  the  ground,  and  such  was  the  order  of  battle.  Everything 
was  judiciously  disposed,  and  constructed  in  a strictly  military  and 
prudent  manner.  Captains  Durkee  and  Ransom,  as  experienced  offi- 
cers, in  whom  great  confidence  was  placed,  were  stationed : Durkee,  with 
Bidlack,  on  the  right  wing,  Ransom,  with  Whittlesey,  on  the  left.  Colonel 
Butler  made  a very  brief  address  just  before  he  ordered  the  column  to  dis- 
play. ‘ Men,  yonder  is  the  enemy.  The  fate  of  the  Hardings  tells  us 
what  we  have  to  expect  if  defeated.  We  come  out  to  fight,  not  only  for 
liberty,  but  for  life  itself,  and,  what  is  dearer,  to  preserve  our  homes  from 
conflagration,  our  women  and  children  from  the  tomahawk.  Stand  firm 
the  first  shock,  and  the  Indians  will  give  way.  Every  man  to  his  duty.’ 

“ The  column  had  marched  up  the  road  running  near  the  bank  on 
which  our  right  rested.  On  its  display,  as  Denison  led  off  his  men,  he 
repeated  the  expression  of  Colonel  Butler,  1 Be  firm  ; everything  depends 
on  resisting  the  first  shock.’ 

“About  four  in  the  afternoon  the  battle  began.  Colonel  Z.  Butler 
ordered  his  men  to  fire,  and  at  each  discharge  to  advance  a step.  Along 
the  whole  line  the  discharges  were  rapid  and  steady.  It  was  evident  that 
on  the  more  open  ground  the  Yankees  were  doing  more  execution.  As 


J34 


OPENING  OF  THE  BATTLE, 


our  men  advanced,  pouring  in  their  platoon  fires  with  great  vivacity,  the 
British  line  gave  way,  in  spite  of  all  their  officers’  efforts  to  prevent  it. 
The  Indian  flanking  party  on  our  right  kept  up  from  their  hiding  places  a 


THE  VALE  OF  WYOMING. 


galling  fire.  Lieutenant  Daniel  Gore  received  a ball  through  the  left  arm. 
‘Captain  Durkee,’  said  he,  ‘look  sharp  for  the  Indians  in  those  bushes.’ 
Captain  Durkee  stepped  to  the  bank  to  look,  preparatory  to  making  a 


DEFEAT  OF  THE  PATRIOTS. 


135 


charge  to  dislodge  them,  when  he  fell.  On  the  British  Butler’s  right,  his 
Indian  warriors  were  sharply  engaged.  They  seemed  to  be  divided  into 
six  bands,  for  a yell  would  be  raised  at  one  end  of  their  line,  taken  up  and 
carried  through,  six  distinct  bodies  appearing  at  each  time  to  repeat  the 
cry.  As  the  battle  waxed  warmer,  that  fearful  yell  was  renewed  again  and 
again  with  more  and  more  spirit.  It  appeared  to  be  at  once  their  animat- 
ing shout  and  their  signal  of  communication.  As  several  fell  near  Colonel 
Dorrance,  one  of  his  men  gave  way:  ‘Stand  to  your  work,  sir,’  said  lie 
firmly,  but  coolly,  and  the  soldier  resumed  his  place. 

“ For  half  an  hour,  a hot  fire  had  been  given  and  sustained,  when  the 
vastly  superior  numbers  of  the  enemy  began  to  develop  their  power.  The 
Indians  had  thrown  into  the  swamp  a large  force  which  now  completely 
outflanked  our  left.  It  was  impossible  it  should  be  otherwise:  that  wing 
was  thrown  into  confusion.  Colonel  Denison  gave  orders  that  the  company 
of  Whittlesey  should  wheel  back,  so  as  to  form  an  angle  with  the  main 
line,  and  thus  present  his  front  instead  of  flank  to  the  enemy.  The  diffi- 
culty of  performing  evolutions  by  the  bravest  militia  on  the  field  under  a 
hot  fire  is  well  known.  On  the  attempt,  the  savages  rushed  in  with  horrid 
yells.  Some  had  mistaken  the  order  to  fall  back  as  one  to  retreat,  and 
that  word — that  fatal  word — ran  along  the  line.  Utter  confusion  now  pre- 
vailed on  the  left.  Seeing  the  disorder,  and  his  own  men  beginning  to 
give  way,  Colonel  Z.  Butler  threw  himself  between  the  fires  of  the  opposing 
ranks  and  rode  up  and  down  the  line  in  the  most  reckless  exposure.  ‘ Don’t 
leave  me,  my  children,  and  the  victory  is  ours.’  But  it  was  too  late. 

“ Every  captain  that  led  a company  into  action  was  slain,  and 
in  every  instance  fell  on  or  near  the  line.  As  was  said  of  Bidlack,  so 
of  Hewitt,  Whittlesey,  and  the  others ; ‘ they  died  at  the  head  of 
their  men.’  They  fought  bravely;  every  man  and  officer  did  his  duty;  but 
they  were  overpowered  by  threefold  their  force.  In  point  of  numbers  the 
enemy  was  overwhelmingly  superior.” 

This  was  the  beginning  of  the  massacre,  which  is  one  of  the  most  famous 
in  our  history.  More  than  two  hundred  patriots  fell,  while  about  one- 
fourth  as  many  of  the  British  and  Indians  were  slain.  Many  were  first  made 
prisoners  and  then  put  to  death.  When  the  Indians  saw  that  victory  was 
theirs,  numbers  would  fire  at  the  retreating  old  men  and  boys,  so  as  to 
wound  them  in  the  knee  or  hip.  Then  leaving  them  helpless  on  the 
ground,  until  they  could  return  to  finish  them,  they  hurried  after  the 
other  fugitives. 

Colonels  Butler  and  Denison,  being  mounted,  were  the  first  to  appear 
at  Forty  Fort,  with  the  fearful  news.  Sitting  down  in  a cabin,  they  agreed  f 0 
upon  the  terms  of  capitulation  to  be  offered  the  enemy.  Then  Colonel 
Bui-W  crossed  over  to  Wilkesbarre,  and  the  following  day  threw  a feather 


THE  FLIGHT  AND  THE  SURRENDER. 


136 

bed  across  his  horse,  and,  placing  his  wife  behind  him,  left  the  valley. 
There  was  no  way  by  which  he  could  be  of  further  use  to  the  patriots,  and 
he  had  done  such  good  service  against  the  enemy  that  he  was  only  wise  not 
to  run  the  risk  of  falling  into  their  hands. 

The  people  of  the  Wilkesbarre  fort,  on  the  east  side  of  the  river,  began 
their  flight  so  early  and  in  such  haste  the  next  morning,  that  they  were 
unprovided  with  provisions  for  the  long  tramp  before  them.  A great  many 
took  the  old  path  toward  the  Delaware,  and  of  these  large  numbers 
perished  in  the  depths  of  a great  pine  forest,  which  is  known  to  this  day 
as  the  “Shades  of  Death.” 

On  the  morning  of  the  4th,  Colonel  John  Butler  summoned  Colonel 
Denison  to  surrender  Forty  Fort,  inviting  him  to  his  headquarters  to  agree 
upon  the  terms.  These  stipulated  that  the  lives  of  the  inhabitants  should 
be  preserved,  that  Colonel  Butler  would  do  his  utmost  to  protect  the  prop- 
erty, and  that  the  property  taken  from  the  Tories  should  be  made  good. 

The  surrender  was  made  on  the  5th.  Butler  presented  the  stacked 
arms  to  the  Indians,  who  behaved  quite  well  until  the  following  day,  when 
they  began  plundering  the  people.  Colonel  Denison  protested  repeatedly 
to  Colonel  Butler,  who,  after  checking  the  savages  several  times,  said  he 
could  not  restrain  them,  and  left  the  fort. 

A couple  of  weeks  later,  it  was  reported  that  the  Indians  and  Tories 
were  again  entering  the  valley  with  the  intention  of  killing  all  that  were 
left.  This  threw  the  miserable  people  into  a panic,  and  they  hastily  fled, 
some  going  down  the  river  in  canoes,  and  others  hurrying  through  the 
“Shades  of  Death”  to  Stroudsburg.  Thus  Wyoming  was  deserted  by  its 
inhabitants  and  became  the  abode  of  desolation  and  woe. 


: CHAPTER  XVII. 

THE  ESCAPE  OF  RUFUS  BENNET  — QUEEN  ESTHER’S  ROCK — THE  EX- 
PLOITS OF  LEBBEUS  HAMMOND  AND  JOSEPH  ELLIOTT — SAVED  BY  A 
SPIDER’S  WEB — THE  FRATRICIDE. 

IT  may  be  doubted  whether  any  episode  in  our  history  was  attended  by 
so  many  singular  and  almost  unaccountable  escapes  as  marked  the 
massacre  of  Wyoming. 

It  may  be  said  further  that  one  cause  of  the  defeat  of  the  patriots  on 
that  fatal  day  was  whisky.  There  was  no  intentional  intoxication,  but,  be- 
fore going  out  on  the  plain  to  give  battle  to  the  Tories  and  Indians,  the  de- 
fenders fortified  themselves  with  stimulants,  which  was  a very  common 
thing  to  do  in  those  times.  In  the  excitement  of  the  hour,  a number  im- 
bibed too  freely,  with  the  result  that  it  incapacitated  them  in  some  cases 
for  the  task  they  had  assumed  with  such  eager  bravery. 

No  special  censure  can  be  visited  upon  those  who  fell  that  day,  for  at 
most  it  was  only  a mistake,  excusable,  perhaps,  under  the  circumstances, 
but  that  some  of  the  defenders  were  intoxicated  has  been  established 
beyond  all  question.  To  this  fact  was  due  one  of  the  astonishing  escapes 
to  which  we  have  referred. 

In  the  headlong  flight  of  the  fugitives,  after  the  defeat  of  the  soldiers, 
and  while  the  panic  was  at  its  height,  Rufus  Bennet,  seventeen  years  old, 
made  the  startling  discovery  that  two  sinewy  Indians  had  singled  him  out 
as  their  victim.  The  youth  was  tall  and  slender,  and  it  need  not  be  said 
that  he  ran  as  never  before.  But  one  of  the  savages  was  remarkably 
fleet,  and,  despite  the  utmost  efforts  of  the  boy,  gained  upon  him. 

At  that  critical  moment,  Colonel  Butler  galloped  by.  Young  Bennet 
reached  out  and  seized  hold  of  the  long,  flowing  tail  of  the  horse.  This 
helped  him  to  draw  slightly  away  from  his  pursuers,  who,  he  hoped,  would 
abandon  the  chase ; but  they,  doubtless  believing  the  odd  flight  could 
not  be  long  maintained,  continued  the  chase. 

Bennet’s  hold  was  broken,  and  he  believed  it  was  all  over  with  him. 
Just  then,  when  the  foremost  pursuer,  with  tomahawk  in  hand,  was  close 
upon  the  panting  fugitive,  the  latter  caught  sight  of  Richard  Inman,  an 
old  friend.  Inman  was  unmistakably  drunk,  and  had  lain  down  in  the 
wheat  field  to  sleep.  The  clatter  of  hoofs  awoke  him,  and  he  raised  partly 
up  and  began  rubbing  his  eyes.  Colonel  Butler  shouted  to  him  to  shoot 


137 


138  A PROVIDENTIAL  ESCAPE. 


The  Indian  dropped  dead,  killed  by  one  of  those  providential 
accidents  which  occasionally  take  place,  and  his  companion,  be- 
lieving that  more  of  the  fugitives  were  in  the  wheat  field,  ready  to 
fight  to  the  last,  wheeled  about  and  made  off,  glad  enough  to  escape 
with  his  life. 

The  multitude  of  visitors  to  Wyoming  never  fail  to  study,  with  strong 
interest,  a bowlder  rising  about  a foot  and  a half  above  the  ground,  and 


ESCAPE  OF  LEBBEUS  HAMMOND.  1 39 

lying  east  of  a straight  line  between  the  monument,  since  erected,  and  the 
site  of  Fort  Wintermoot.  This  is  the  famous  Queen  Esther’s  Rock. 

Catherine  Montour,  or  Queen  Esther,  of  the  Seneca  tribe,  was  a half- 
breed,  who  had  been  educated  in  Canada.  At  one  time,  she  was  a pop- 
ular lady  in  Philadelphia,  and  mingled  in  the  best  society.  She  accom- 
panied the  Tories  and  Indians  to  Wyoming,  where  she  had  a son  killed. 
She  was  an  old  woman  at  the  time,  but  she  was  aroused  to  a pitch  of 
indescribable  fury  by  her  affliction  and  the  sight  of  blood. 

On  the  night  after  the  battle,  sixteen  prisoners  were  ranged  round  the 
rock  referred  to,  while  the  aged  fury  prepared  to  take  revenge  upon  the 
innocent  ones  for  the  death  of  her  son.  Armed  with  a death-mall  and 
hatchet  she  began  the  terrible  work.  The  captives,  one  after  the  other, 
were  seated  on  the  rock  and  securely  held  by  two  warriors,  while  the  savage 
queen,  chanting  a dismal  dirge,  raised  the  death-mall  with  both  hands  and 
dashed  out  the  brains  of  the  helpless  prisoner  or  sank  her  hatchet  in  his 
skull. 

The  sacrifice  went  on  until  eleven  had  been  killed.  Among  those 
awaiting  their  turn  were  Lebbeus  Hammond  and  Joseph  Elliott,  young, 
sinewy,  and  active.  At  the  moment  Hammond  saw  his  brother  placed 
upon  the  rock,  he  turned  to  Elliott  and  said  in  a low  voice : “ Let's 
try  it ! ” 

At  the  same  instant,  both  bounded  to  their  feet  and  were  off  like  a 
couple  of  deer.  They  expected  to  be  shot  down  before  they  could  run 
fifty  feet,  but  in  the  confusion  the  Indians  refrained  from  firing  and  devoted 
themselves  to  pursuit. 

The  fugitives  diverged  as  they  ran,  Hammond  heading  up  the  river  and 
continually  glancing  over  his  shoulder.  He  saw  the  Indians  were  shaping 
their  course  so  as  to  intercept  the  flight  of  the  two  in  the  direction  of 
Forty  Fort.  This  led  him  to  turn  more  directly  up  the  stream.  He  was 
running  desperately,  when  his  foot  caught  in  a root  and  he  fell  headlong, 
rolling  down  the  bank  and  coming  to  a halt  amid  the  thick  foliage  of  a 
fallen  tree. 

He  was  about  to  spring  to  his  feet,  when  it  occurred  to  him  that  it  was 
safer  to  stay  where  he  was.  He  did  so,  and  soon  heard  the  Indians  all 
around  him.  They  were  so  close  and  his  heart  throbbed  so  tumultuously  that 
he  was  sure  it  would  betray  him.  Time  and  again  they  seemed  on  the 
point  of  finding  him,  and  he  was  in  despair,  but  finally  they  left.  He  stayed 
where  he  was  until  dark,  when  he  stole  out,  swam  the  river,  and  reached 
Wilkesbarre. 

Meanwhile,  Elliott  was  giving  a good  account  of  himself.  Running  at 
great  speed,  he  plunged  into  the  river  and  swam  a long  distance  under 
water.  When  he  came  up  to  breathe  he  was  fired  upon  and  severely 


140 


A STRANGE  DELIVERANCE. 


wounded  in  the  shoulder,  but  he  persevered,  and  reaching  the  other  side 
of  the  stream,  found  a wandering  horse,  which  he  mounted,  using  a hickory 
withe  as  a bridle,  and  galloped  to  Wilkesbarre,  where  his  friend  Hammond 
soon  after  joined  him.  Both  men  lived  many  years  afterward. 

Among  the  fugitives  from  Wyoming  on  that  fateful  summer  day  in  1778, 
was  Noah  Hopkins,  a wealthy  man  from  Dutchess  County,  New  York.  At 
the  beginning  of  his  flight  he  obtained  such  a good  start  that  he  was  hope- 
ful of  escape.  He  was  pretty  nearly  exhausted  when  he  discovered,  to 
his  terror,  that  the  Indians  were  on  his  track  and  must  soon  overtake  him 
if  he  persisted  in  flight. 

Casting  about  for  some  place  in  which  to  hide  himself,  he  observed  a 
large,  hollow  tree,  extended  on  the  ground.  Into  this  he  backed  and 


SAVED  BY  A SPIDER’S  WEB. 

anxiously  awaited  his  fate.  As  he  lay  listening  and  watching,  he  saw  an 
industrious  spider  weaving  its  web  across  the  door  of  his  retreat.  He 
watched  the  creature,  as  it  deftly  toiled,  though  it  is  not  to  be  supposed  that 
he  felt  much  interest  in  the  operation. 

Suddenly  he  heard  the  voices  of  Indians.  They  had  reached  the 
place,  and,  as  if  nothing  was  to  be  lacking  in  the  intensity  of  his  emotions, 
a couple  sat  down  on  the  very  log  which  sheltered  him.  Their  voices  were 
distinct,  and  he  noticed  even  the  bullets  rattling  in  their  pouches  as  they 
moved  about. 

The  sight  of  the  opening  in  the  tree  could  not  fail  to  attract  the  notice 
of  the  Indians.  While  watching  the  opening,  the  painted  face  of  one 


THE  FRATRICIDE. 


141 


showed  itself  in  front  of  it.  The  savage,  stooping  down,  peered  into  the 
darkness,  his  features  distinctly  revealed  to  the  terrified  fugitive. 

The  Indian  was  about  to  explore  further,  for  he  could  not  fail  to  un- 
derstand how  inviting  such  a refuge  would  be  to  a wearied  fugitive,  when 
he  saw  the  web  spun  across  the  opening.  Such  a thing  is  accepted  the 
world  over  as  evidence  of  age,  and  the  warrior  took  it  as  proof  that  no  one 
was  in  the  log.  He  and  his  companions  remained  awhile  longer,  and  then 
departed  and  were  seen  no  more. 

Hopkins  stayed  in  the  tree  as  long  as  he  could,  and  then  stole  out. 
He  wandered  about  for  days,  and  suffered  severe  hardships  before  finding 
friends,  but  he,  too,  lived  many  years  afterward  to  tell  of  his  remarkable 
escape. 

Among  the  Tories  who  devastated  Wyoming  Valley  was  John  Pencil. 
Monocacy  Island  is  a short  distance  below  the  battle  ground.  During  the 
flight  and  pursuit,  a number  of  the  settlers  swam  to  this  island,  where  they 
hid  themselves  among  the  logs  and  brushwood.  They  had  thrown  away 
their  weapons  during  the  flight,  and,  therefore,  were  without  any  means  of 
defending  themselves. 

Several  of  the.  Tories  followed.  On  reaching  the  island  they  wiped 
their  guns  and  reloaded  them.  A fugitive  furtively  watching  them  from 
his  concealment,  recognized  one  of  them,  John  Pencil,  as  the  brother  of 
Henry  Pencil,  who  was  a patriot  hiding  near  by. 

The  Tory,  while  closely  searching,  came  upon  his  brother.  The  latter, 
on  finding  himself  discovered,  fell  on  his  knees  and  begged  that  his  life 
might  be  spared.  The  other  raised  his  gun  with  an  oath  and  blew  out  his 
brains.  The  fratricide  would  have  returned  to  Wyoming,  after  the  war, 
had  he  not  learned  that  there  was  a witness  of  the  deed,  who  had  made  it 
known.  He,  therefore,  took  up  his  abode  in  Canada. 

It  is  said  that  when  the  Indians  learned  what  John  Pencil  had  done, 
they  expressed  their  horror,  for,  savage  though  they  were,  none  of  them 
was  capable  of  such  a deed. 

While  living  in  the  Canadian  wilderness,  Pencil  was  twice  pressed  so 
closely  by  wolves  that  he  would  have  been  killed,  but  for  the  Indians. 
The  latter  finally  came  to  the  belief  that  the  Great  Spirit  was  angry  with 
him,  and  they  determined  to  befriend  him  no  more.  The  fatal  third  time 
came,  when  he  was  again  beset  with  famishing  wolves,  who  were  allowed 
to  rend  him  limb  from  limb. 

But  there  is  one  story  connected  with  the  sad  tragedy  of  Wyoming, 
so  strangely  touching,  that  we  must  devote  a chapter  to  its  relation. 


CHAPTER  XVIII. 


THE  SINGULAR  STORY  OF  FRANCES  SLOCUM. 

JONATHAN  SLOCUM,  a Quaker,  removed  from  Rhode  Island  in  1777, 
and  settled  with  his  wife  and  nine  children  in  Wyoming  Valley.  His 
son,  despite  the  peace  principles  of  his  father,  took  part  in  the  defense  of 
the  place  in  the  following  year,  and  to  this  fact  was  probably  due  the  ven- 
geance the  red  men  took  upon  the  family. 

On  the  2d  of  November,  1778,  three  Delaware  Indians  stole  into 
Wyoming  Valley,  and  made  their  way  toward  the  Slocum  dwelling.  A 
Mr.  Kingsley  had  been  taken  prisoner  by  the  savages  some  time  before, 
and  his  wife  and  two  boys  made  their  home  with  the  Slocums.  As  the 
warriors  approached,  they  saw  the  Kingsley  boys  grinding  a knife  near 
the  door.  The  oldest  one  was  shot. 

Mrs.  Slocum  ran  to  the  door  and  saw  the  Indians  scalping  the  dead 
boy  with  the  knife  he  had  been  sharpening.  She  hid  herself,  until  one  of 
the  savages  laid  hold  of  her  boy  Ebenezer,  who  was  lame.  Then  her 
mother’s  solicitude  caused  her  to  forget  her  own  danger,  and  running  to  the 
Indian,  she  pointed  down  to  the  injured  foot  and  said  : 

“ The  child  can  do  no  good  to  thee  : he  is  lame.” 

Meanwhile,  little  Frances,  about  five  years  old,  was  hidden  under  the 
stairs,  but  was  found  by  the  Indians.  One  of  them  dropped  the  boy  and 
caught  up  the  girl.  The  mother  begged  piteously  for  them  to  spare  her, 
but  the  savages  paid  no  heed  and  left,  carrying  little  Frances,  who  reached 
out  her  arms  to  her  distracted  mother  and  called  “Mamma!  mamma!” 
until  they  were  out  of  sight.  The  Indians  took  also  the  other  Kingsley 
boy  and  a colored  girl  with  them. 

The  fort  was  about  a hundred  rods  from  the  Slocum  house  and  the 
alarm  was  quickly  given.  The  brief  start  gained  by  the  Indians,  however, 
rendered  all  pursuit  useless  and  nothing  was  ever  learned  of  them. 

Who  shall  picture  the  sorrow  of  that  household,  when  the  father  and 
sons  returned  home  and  found  that  baby  Frances  had  been  carried  off  by 
the  merciless  red  men?  Their  hearts  were  breaking,  and  the  vision  of  the 
little  one,  with  arms  outstretched,  piteously  appealing  to  her  mother, 
haunted  her  for  years  and  weighed  her  down  with  a woe  which  time  never 
removed. 

A few  weeks  later,  Mr,  Slocum  and  his  father-in-law  were  killed  by 
Indians  while  at  work  in  the  fields,  and  the  son  of  the  former  was 


142 


THE  LIVING  SORROW. 


Hi 


wounded.  He  escaped  and  gave  the  alarm,  but,  as  before,  the  marauders 
fled  ere  any  punishment  could  be  inflicted.  Husband  and  father  were 
buried  and  the  poignant  grief  of  the  stricken  wife  was  gradually  softened 
by  time.  She  knew  they  had  gone  to  their  long  rest  and  were  at  peace. 
But  she  never  failed  to  mourn  for  little  Frances,  for  she  could  not  know 


her  fate.  Had  she  been  assured  that  she,  too,  was  dead,  she  would  have 
been  content  ; but,  so  long  as  there  remained  the  possibility  of  her  being 
alive,  the  mother  could  know  no  assuagement  of  her  grief. 

But  the  years  wore  on,  and  no  tidings  came  to  the  sorrowing  parent  of 
the  loved  and  lost  one.  Her  sons  grew  to  be  prosperous  business  men. 
Peace  having  been  made  between  Great  Britain  and  the  United  States,  the 
brothers  decided  to  make  a systematic  effort  to  recover  the  stolen  sister  or 
to  learn  what  had  become  of  her.  Accordingly,  in  1784,  two  of  them 


144 


PEACE  AND  REST  AT  LAST. 


visited  Niagara,  made  inquiries  and  offered  generous  payment  for  any  infor- 
mation concerning  Frances  Slocum. 

This  'mission  met  with  no  success,  and  they  came  back  almost 
convinced  that  she  was  dead.  The  mother  would  have  been  re- 
lieved could  she  have  shared  their  belief,  but  she  continued  to  mourn 
for  the  one  that  was  and  yet  was  not.  Her  hopes  communicated  them- 
selves to  the  sons,  and  four  years  later  they  spent  several  months  among 
the  western  Indians,  where  they  offered  five  hundred  dollars  reward  for 
information  oi  the  missing  one,  but  were  compelled  again  to  return  without 
the  first  clew. 

In  1789,  a large  number  of  Indians  met  Colonel  Proctor  at  Tioga 
Point,  for  the  purpose  of  making  a treaty.  Many  prisoners  were  brought 
in  to  be  surrendered  to  their  friends.  Mrs.  Slocum,  now  growing  old, 
made  a laborious  journey  thither  and  spent  several  weeks  in  examining 
the  captives  ; but  among  them  all  she  found  none  whose  features  were 
those  of  her  beloved  Frances. 

The  mother  still  clung  to  the  belief  that  her  child  would  be  found-,  and 
her  loving  children  did  everything  in  their  power  to  gain  the  knowledge 
she  sought  so  longingly,  and  yet  in  vain.  The  four  brothers  spent  almost 
the  entire  summer  of  1797  traveling  through  the  western  wilderness,  visit- 
ing the  Indian  settlements  and  hiring  hunters  and  trappers,  and  indeed 
doing  whatever  promised  to  bring  the  slightest  success,  but  as  before,  only 
disappointment  rewarded  all  their  efforts. 

A gleam  of  hope  appeared  when  a female  captive,  hearing  of  the 
rewards  offered  for  the  lost  one,  came  to  the  sorrowing  mother  and  told 
her  that  she  was  taken  prisoner,  somewhere  on  the  Susquehanna,  when  a 
small  child,  and  she  was  anxious  to  find  her  relatives  and  friends.  She 
could  not  recall  the  name  of  her  parents,  nor  did  she  know  her  own,  but  she 
hoped  she  might  prove  the  lost  one.  The  mother  scanned  her  counten- 
ance and  questioned  her  closely,  but  she  was  not  the  one  for  whom  she 
sighed  with  an  unappeasable  yearning.  She  told  the  stranger  she  was 
welcome  to  stay  with  her  so  long  as  she  chose.  “ Perhaps  someone  may 
extend  the  same  kindness  to  Frances,”  she  said.  The  young  woman  remained 
several  months,  but,  finding  herself  an  object  of  charity  rather  than  affec- 
tion, took  her  departure  and  nothing  more  was  heard  of  her. 

At  last  the  weary,  sorrowing,  patient,  but  heart-broken  mother  lay 
down  and  died,  without  having  obtained  a glimpse  of  the  face  of  the  little 
Frances,  who  was  carried  away  many  long,  long  years  before.  Nor  did  she 
gain  the  most  indistinct  information  of  her  fate.  Mrs.  Slocum  died  in  1807. 

And  yet  the  lost  daughter  Frances  was  alive,  and  time  and  again  she 
and  her  mother  were  close  to  one  another.  The  brothers,  too,  narrowly 
missed  finding  her.  But  it  was  fortunate  that  mother  and  child  did  not 


AN  INDIAN  IN  ALL  BUT  BLOOD.  145 

meet  in  this  life;  for  surely  the  heart  of  the  parent  would  have  died  within 
her  of  grief. 

In  1835,  Colonel  George  W.  Ewing,  connected  with  the  public  service 
among  the  Indians,  was  benighted  near  “ Deaf  Man’s  Village,”  on  the 
Missisinewa,  a branch  of  the  Wabash.  He  applied  to  an  Indian  dwelling 


and  was  made  welcome.  Not  feeling  well,  Colonel  Ewing  lay  down  upon 
some  skins  in  the  corner  of  the  room.  By  and  by  the  family  disappeared, 
with  the  exception  of  the  venerable  head  of  the  household. 

As  Colonel  Ewing  lay  on  his  primitive  couch,  watching  the  old  lady, 
the  color  of  her  skin  and  hair  led  him  to  suspect  that  she  was  a white 
woman.  After  some  questioning,  she  admitted  that  his  suspicions  were 
right.  She  said  she  was  carried  into  captivity  when  a small  child,  and  that 
her  parents’  name  was  Slocum.  She  had  never  told  the  secret  before, 
through  fear  that  her  relatives  would  take  her  away.  She  would  not  have 
revealed  it  even  then,  but  for  the  belief  that  she  was  close  to  death.  She 
was  a thorough  Indian  in  every  respect,  except  blood,  and  there  can  be 
little  doubt  that,  while  the  mother  was  making  her  weary  search  for  her, 
she,  with  the  help  of  her  dusky  friends,  studiously  kept  out  of  her  way. 


1 46 


MOTHER  AND  DAUGHTER  REUNITED. 


Had  she  been  recognized  by  the  parent,  she  never  would  have  consented  to 
go  with  her,  and  the  disappointment  would  have  been  more  than  the 
mother  could  bear. 

Colonel  Ewing  had  never  heard  the  story  of  Frances  Slocum  ; but  be- 
lieving that  the  information  would  prove  of  importance,  he  sent  a letter  to 
the  postmaster  of  Lancaster,  Pennsylvania,  giving  the  particulars  and  ask- 
ing him  to  make  inquiry.  The  postmaster  read  the  letter,  but  suspecting  it 
to  be  a hoax,  flung  it  aside.  Two  years  later  he  died,  and  his  widow,  in 
overhauling  his  papers,  found  the  letter. 

She  was  impressed  by  the  strange  story,  and  sent  it  to  the  Lancaster 
Intelligencer,  which  immediately  published  it.  A copy  fell  into  the  hands 
of  an  acquaintance  of  the  Slocum  family,  who  mailed  it  to  the  brother  of 
Frances  at  Wilkesbarre.  The  family  and  their  friends  were  thrown  into 
excitement.  A correspondence  was  opened  with  Colonel  Ewing,  who  re- 
plied that  the  old  lady  was  still  living  near  Logansport,  and  there  could  be 
no  doubt  that  she  was  the  relative  whom  they  had  sought  so  many  years 
in  vain. 

Members  of  the  family  made  their  way  thither  and  it  proved  to  be  the 
long-lost  Frances,  found  after  fifty-nine  years  ! 

Her  recollection  of  her  infancy,  before  she  was  take'n  away  by  the 
Indians,  was  vague  and  uncertain,  but  it  revived  under  the  questioning  of 
her  relatives,  and  she  recognized  them  beyond  all  possibility  of  doubt. 
But,  as  has  been  stated,  she  was  an  Indian  in  sentiment  and  feeling,  and 
kindly  but  firmly  declined  the  urgent  invitation  to  end  her  days  with  them. 
She,  in  turn,  asked  them  to  live  with  her.  She  was  a widow,  highly 
esteemed  among  the  Indians,  and  possessed  considerable  means. 

When  our  Government  arranged  to  remove  the  Indians  of  Indiana 
west  of  the  Mississippi,  Mr.  Slocum  petitioned  Congress  in  behalf  of  his 
sister,  and  enlisted  strong  support.  Hon.  B.  A.  Bidlack  assumed  charge 
of  the  bill,  and  John  Quincy  Adams  made  an  eloquent  appeal  in  its  behalf. 
The  bill,  which  became  law,  provided  that  one  mile  square  of  the  reserve, 
embracing  the  house  and  improvements  of  Frances  Slocum,  should  be 
granted  in  fee  to  her  and  her  heirs  forever.  She  never  forgot  the  kindness 
of  her  good  brother,  by  which  her  last  days  were  made  contented  and 
happy. 

Frances  Slocum  died  March  9,  1847,  and  her  grave  was  made  on  a 
beautiful  knoll,  near  the  union  of  the  Missisinewa  and  the  Wabash,  by  the 
side  of  her  chief  and  children,  but  long  since  the  spirits  of  mother  and 
daughter  have  been  reunited  in  the  Beautiful  Beyond. 


A VAIN  APPEAL 


CHAPTER  XIX. 


THE  MASSACRE  AT  CHERRY  VALLEY-MAJOR  CLARKE’S  BRILLIANT  EXPE- 
DITION— A STRANGE  SURRENDER — THE  SIX  OR  FIVE  NATIONS — 
SULLIVAN’S  CRUSHING  CAMPAIGN  AGAINST  THE  INDIANS. 

> *>  V 

WHEN  Lafayette  was  at  Albany  in  1777,  preparing  for  an  invasion  of 
Canada,  which  was  never  made,  he  ordered  the  erection  of  a fort 
at  Cherry  Valley,  N.  Y.  The  post  was  placed  in  charge  of  Colonel  Ich- 
abod  Alden,  an  able  officer,  who  made  the  mistake  of  discrediting  the 
warnings  which  reached  him  of  a contemplated  raid  into  the  valley  by  a 
force  of  Tories  and  Indians.  When  appealed  to  by  the  villagers,  he  airily 
told  them  there  was  no  cause  for  fear,  and  they  would  show  their  wisdom 
by  staying  at  home  and  looking  after  their  domestic  affairs.  Unfortunately, 
this  advice  was  followed. 

Colonel  Alden  had  a startling  awakening.  One  day,  while  outside  of 
his  fort,  a war  whoop  sounded  on  his  ears,  and  he  saw  an  Indian  warrior 
coming  furiously  toward  him.  The  colonel  dashed  for  the  fort,  drawing 
his  pistol  as  he  did  so.  His  pursuer  continued  to  gain  and  the  officer 
leveled  his  weapon  at  him.  He  pulled  the  trigger,  but  the  pistol  missed 
fire.  He  tried  it  again  and  again,  but  something  was  the  matter  and  it 
refused  to  go  off.  When  only  a few  paces  from  his  refuge  the  Indian 
buried  his  tomahawk  in  his  brain. 

The  savages  at  this  time  were  massacring  the  inhabitants  right  and 
left.  Walter  N.  Butler,  son  of  the  Tory  who  devastated  Wyoming,  and 
Brandt,  the  Mohawk  chief,  were  the  leader  of  the  Tories  and  Indians,  who 
killed  fifty  persons,  mostly  women  and  children. 

The  Americans  were  prompt  to  adopt  retaliatory  measures.  Several 
expeditions  were  sent  against  the  Indians  on  the  upper  Susquehanna  and 
in  other  directions.  The  most  remarkable  was  that  of  Major  George 
Rogers  Clarke,  a Kentucky  pioneer,  who  was  commissioned  by  Patrick 
Henry,  governor  of  Virginia,  to  lead  a force  against  the  Indians  west 
of  the  Alleghenies. 

In  May,  1778,  Major  Clarke,  with  one  hundred  and  fifty  men, 
descended  the  Ohio,  halting  at  Corn  Island  long  enough  to  erect  a block- 
house and  to  receive  some  additions  to  his  company.  He  left  five  men, 
who,  after  the  departure  of  the  command,  crossed  to  the  mainland,  cleared 
off  some  timber,  and  put  up  several  cabins.  Gradually  others  were  added 
until  the  important  city  of  Louisville  came  into  existence. 


149 


MAJOR  CLARKE’S  EXPEDITION. 


150 

At  the  mouth  of  the  Tennessee,  Clarke  left  his  boats  and  tramped 
through  the  swamps  and  woods  to  Kaskaskia,  which  belonged  to  Canada. 
The  inhabitants  had  no  thought  of  danger,  and,  when  they,  found  them- 
selves confronted  by  the  Kentuckians,  they  could  do  nothing  less  than  sur- 
render off  hand.  The  governor  was  sent  a prisoner  to  Virginia  and  the 
people  declared  their  loyalty  to  the  United  States. 

Clarke  next  captured  Cahokia,  farther  up  the  river,  where  the  inhabi- 
tants also  avowed  their  allegiance.  By  this  time  the  situation  of  the 
Kentuckians  had  become  critical.  They  had  penetrated  far  into  the  hostile 
country,  warlike  Indians  were  on  every  side,  and  they  were  liable  to  be 
overwhelmed  at  any  hour.  It  was  the  rapid  work  of  the  invaders  which 
gave  the  enemy  no  time  to  concentrate  against  them. 

But  there  was  no  thought  of  turning  back  till  the  object  of  the  expe- 
dition was  accomplished.  Vincennes  was  captured  without  difficulty,  and 
they  struck  the  Indian  villages  with  such  energy  that  the  savages  were 
terrified. 

When  Governor  Hamilton  of  Detroit  learned  of  the  capture  of  Vin- 
cennes, he  set  out  with  eight  hundred  men  to  retake  it.  Major  Clarke 
had  passed  on  and  was  otherwise  engaged,  so  there  was  no  danger  from 
him  and  his  Kentuckians.  Hastening  to  the  fort,  the  governor  sent  a 
peremptory  summons  to  Captain  Helm  to  surrender.  The  captain  as 
peremptorily  refused  to  do  so  until  assured  of  satisfactory  terms.  The 
governor  replied  guaranteeing  to  the  captain  and  his  men  the  honors  of 
war.  Captain  Helm  accepted  the  terms,  and  he  and  his  garrison  surren- 
dered. 

And  then  came  the  surprise  of  Governor  Hamilton’s  life.  The  entire 
garrison  of  the  fort  consisted  of  Captain  Helm  and  one  solitary  private. 
These  two  marched  solemnly  out  and  were  received  with  the  honors  of 
war,  while  it  is  easy  to  believe  that  the  governor  and  his  officers  laughed 
heartily  at  the  scene. 

While  Major  Clarke  was  at  Kaskaskia,  he  found  the  written  orders 
that  had  been  sent  to  the  governor  from  the  government  of  Quebec,  instruct- 
ing him  to  make  use  of  the  Indians  in  the  war  against  the  Americans. 

In  the  depth  of  winter  Governor  Hamilton  advanced  to  Vincennes, 
determined  to  bring  the  audacious  Kentuckians  to  terms.  Major  Clarke 
marched  across  a country  which  was  a vast  watery  swamp,  with  ice  not 
quite  strong  enough  to  bear  the  men’s  weight.  They  sank  into  the 
chilling  water  and  mud  to  their  waists,  but  pushed  resolutely  on,  and  again 
appearing  unexpectedly  before  Vincennes,  demanded  its  surrender.  Ham- 
ilton was  astounded,  but  was  obliged  to  yield.  He  had  incited  the  Indians 
to  so  many  outrages  against  the  settlers  that  the  council  of  Virginia  kept 
him  a long  time  in  irons. 


VALUE  OF  MAJOR  CLARKE’S  SERVICES. 


51 


It  is  impossible  to  overestimate  the  value  of  the  services  rendered  by 
Major  Clarke.  It  lay  not  in  what  he  actually  accomplished  while  on  his 
brilliant  march,  but  in  the  consequences  of  these  exploits.  He  overturned 
Governor  Hamilton’s  projects,  and  put  an  end  to  all  danger  in  that  section 
from  Indians.  It  has  been  claimed  with  reason  that  but  for  Major  Clarke, 
the  boundary  of  the  United  States  at  the  close  of  the 
Revolution  would  have  been  the  Allegheny  Mountains 
instead  of  the  Mississippi  River.  The  entire  territory 
north  of  the  Ohio  was  organized  as  the 
u County  of  Illinois,”  and  Major  Clarke 
and  each  of  his  men  were  publicly 
thanked  by  Virginia  for  their  services, 
and  were  rewarded  with  two  hundred 
acres  of  land  apiece. 

The  most  powerful  league  of  Indians 
ever  known  on  this  continent  was  that 


DEATH  OF  COLONEL  ALDEN. 


of  the  Five  Nations,  or,  as  they  came  latterly  to  be  known,  the  Six 
Nations.  They  originally  occupied  most  of  the  territory  of  the  present 
State  of  New  York.  The  English  gave  to  them  the  name  of  Five  Nations, 
because  they  constituted  a confederacy  of  that  number  of  distinct  tribes. 
The  French'  called  them  Iroquois;  the  Dutch,  Maquas ; the  Virginia 
Indians,  Massawomekes,  and  at  home  they  were  variously  called  Mingoes 


GENERAL  SULLIVAN’S  EXPEDITION. 


152 

and  Aganuschion,  or  United  People.  It  is  said  that  the  Mohawks  were 
the  oldest  of  the  confederacy  ; next  came  the  Oneidas,  then  the  Onondagas, 
the  Senecas,  and  the  Cayugas.  The  Tuscaroras  from  Carolina  joined  them 
in  1712,  but  were  not  formally  admitted  until  ten  years  later.  It  was  this 
new  member  which  gave  the  league  the  name  of  the  Six  Nations,  though 
it  will  always  be  more  generally  known  by  the  other  title. 

The  ravages  of  the  Indians  on  our  northwestern  frontiers  became  so 
intolerable  that  Washington  determined  to  strike  them  a fatal  blow. 
With  the  wisdom  which  always  characterized  that  great  man,  he  organized 
the  expedition  on  a scale  that  insured  success.  It  consisted  of  four  thou- 
sand Continental  troops,  the  militia  from  the  State  of  New  York,  and  a 
number  of  independent  companies  from  Pennsylvania.  The  command  of 
the  expedition  was  offered  to  General  Gates,  but  that  vain  officer,  in  his 
envy  of  the  growing  fame  of  Washington,  refused  it  in  an  insolent  letter. 
It  was  then  assumed  by  Sullivan,  who  went  to  work  like  one  who  “ meant 
business.” 

It  was  the  summer  following  the  massacre  at  Wyoming,  to  which  point 
Sullivan  moved  his  headquarters.  He  decided  that  the  expedition  should 
advance  in  three  divisions.  The  left  was  to  move  from  Pittsburgh,  under 
Colonel  Daniel  Brodhead  ; the  right  from  the  Mohawk,  under  General 
James  Clinton,  while  Sullivan  was  to  lead  the  center  from  Wyoming. 

Exasperating  delays  followed,  and  Sullivan  protested  so  indignantly 
that  he  aroused  considerable  feeling  against  himself.  He  cared  nothing 
for  that,  however,  and  kept  on  protesting  until  the  authorities  were  com- 
pelled to  pay  attention  to  him  and  his  wants. 

General  Clinton,  with  seventeen  hundred  men,  reached  Otsego  Lake, 
the  source  of  the  Susquehanna.  The  stream  being  too  small  at  that  place 
to  float  his  boats,  the  outlet  was  dammed  until  the  accumulated  waters 
raised  the  surface  of  the  lake  several  feet.  Then  the  dams  were  torn  away, 
and  the  outrushing  torrent  carried  with  them  two  hundred  and  twenty 
boats  filled  with  troops  and  supplies. 

On  arriving  at  the  site  of  the  present  town  of  Union,  Clinton  was 
joined  by  Sullivan,  the  united  forces  numbering  nearly  five  thousand  men. 
On  the  26th  of  August,  this  powerful  body  left  Fort  Sullivan,  on  Tioga 
Point  (now  the  village  of  Athens,  Pa.),  and  marched  into  the  Indian 
country. 

The  Indians  knew  what  was  coming  and  sent  out  a deputation  to  meet 
Sullivan.  At  the  Indian  village  of  Newtown,  where  Elmira  now  stands, 
Sullivan  found  a force  of  twelve  hundred,  composed  of  British  regulars, 
Tories,  and  Indians,  under  the  command  of  Captain  Macdonald,  Colonel 
John  Butler,  his  son,  Walter  N.  Butler,  and  the  ferocious  Mohawk  chief, 
Joseph  Brandt. 


SULLIVAN’S  OVERWHELMING  SUCCESS. 


153 

This  force  was  so  much  smaller  than  that  of  the  Americans  that  it 
would  not  have  ventured  to  make  a stand,  but  for  the  hope  of  drawing  the 
patriots  into  a trap,  similar  to  that  which  resulted  in  the  destruction  of 
Braddock  and  his  army.  An  American  rifleman  climbed  a tree  and  discov- 
ered the  scheme  of  the  enemy.  This  enabled  Sullivan  to  flank  the  forces, 
and  he  scattered  the  whole  lot  of  them  like  so  much  chaff,  inflicting  a 


AN  IROQUOIS  HOME. 


heavy  loss.  The  Indians  were  so  panic  stricken  that  nothing  could  induce 
them  to  make  another  stand. 

The  savages  had  caused  such  suffering  on  the  frontiers  that  Sullivan 
refused  to  treat  with  them.'  He  had  been  sent  there  to  punish  them,  and 
he  meant  to  do  it  so  thoroughly  that  they  would  never  forget  the  lesson. 

The  Indians  had  attained  a surprising  degree  of  civilization  in  the  fer- 
tile country  of  the  Senecas  and  Cayugas.  They  had  towns  and  villages 
regularly  laid  out ; framed  houses,  some  of  which  were  finely  finished, 
painted,  and  provided  with  chimneys.  They  owned  broad  and  productive 
fields,  with  orchards  of  apple,  peach,  and  pear.  A person  traveling  through 
the  section  would  have  found  it  hard  to  believe  that  there  was  the  home  of 
the  fierce  Iroquois,  who,  it  is  claimed,  but  for  the  coming  of  the  white  man, 
would  have  subjugated  all  the  aborigines  in  America. 

Into  this  region,  as  fair  as  a garden  of  the  Lord,  swept  the  aveng- 
ing army.  Forty  of  the  villages  were  laid  in  ruins  ; the  fruit  trees  were  cut 
down  and  the  harvests  utterly  destroyed.  The  winter  which  followed  was 


154 


OPERATIONS  OF  COLONEL  BRODHEAD. 


one  of  frightful  severity.  Hundreds  of  the  impoverished  Indians  died  of 
disease  and  want,  and  the  blow,  as  has  been  said,  was  probably  the  most 
fearful  ever  received  by  the  people. 

It  may  seem  cruel,  and  it  unquestionably  was  cruel.  But  those 
savages  deserved  it.  It  was  they  who  had  helped  to  murder  and  torture 
the  unoffending  settlers  at  Cherry  Valley  and  Wyoming,  and  the  fiends 
deserved  no  sympathy.  General  Sullivan  made  certain,  among  the  first 
things  he  did,  of  finding  the  home  of  Queen  Esther,  or  Catherine  Montour 
— she  who  had  murdered  more  than  a dozen  captives  about  the  rock  at 
Wyoming,  which  will  forever  bear  her  name.  Having  found  it,  he  left  it  in 
ashes,  though  the  withered  Hecate  at  the  time  was  fully  fourscore  years 
of  age. 

Colonel  Brodhead,  leading  the  expedition  from  Pittsburgh,  ascended  the 
Allegheny  with  six  hundred  men.  His  purpose  was  to  create  a diversion 
that  would  help  the  general  campaign.  Beside  doing  that,  he  destroyed 
many  villages  and  corn  fields,  and  returned  after  a month’s  absence  with- 
out the  loss  of  a man. 

The  following  spring  some  of  the  savages  again  took  the  warpath  and 
attempted  to  harass  the  settlements,  but  their  power  was  so  effectually 
broken  that  it  may  be  said  comparative  peace  reigned  on  the  frontier. 


CHAPTER  XX. 


\ 


A WHITE  MISCREANT— A DARK  PAGE  IN  AMERICAN  HISTORY- 

RETRIBUTION. 

IT  must  not  be  supposed  that  atrocities  were  confined  to  the  Indians  on 
the  frontier.  The  long  continued  hostilities  between  the  races  devel- 
oped some  of  the  most  execrable  white  miscreants  that  ever  lived. 

While  Colonel  Brodhead  was  returning  to  Pittsburgh  from  his  expedi- 
tion into  the  Indian  country,  a warrior  approached  the  side  of  the  river 
opposite  to  the  encampment,  and  called  out  that  he  wished  to  see  the  “ big 
captain.”  Colonel  Brodhead  came  forward  and  asked  what  he  wanted, 
“To  make  peace,”  was  the  reply.  Colonel  Brodhead  told  him  to  send 
over  some  of  his  chiefs.  The  Indian  asked  whether  they  would  be  harmed. 
The  colonel  assured  him  they  should  not  suffer  the  least  injury. 

Under  this  guarantee,  one  of  the  finest  looking  chiefs  ever  seen  by 
Colonel  Brodhead  crossed  the  river,  and  began  conversation  with  the  offi- 
cer. While  thus  engaged,  a militiaman  sneaked  up  behind  the  chief, 
whipped  out  a tomahawk  he  had  concealed  under  his  clothing,  and  clove 
the  skull  of  the  guest  in  twain.  The  name  of  this  wretch  was  Wetzel,  and 
he  was  never  punished  for  his  crime.  The  attempts  to  do  so  almost 
caused  a revolution  in  a portion  of  the  West,  where  the  people  regarded 
him  as  a hero.  Since  that  day  the  miscreant  has  figured  in  unnumbered 
histories  and  romances  as  the  ideal  frontiersman,  worthy  only  of  admiration 
for  his  exploits. 

One  of  the  darkest  pages  in  American  history  is  that  of  the  massacre 
of  the  Moravian  Indians,  in  1782.  The  self-sacrificing  Moravian  mission- 
aries had  toiled  long  and  faithfully  in  the  Western  wilds,  and  had  succeeded 
in  establishing  missions  on  the  Tuscarawas,  among  the  Delaware  Indians. 
There  were  three  stations  on  the  river : Gnadenhutten,  Shoenbrun,  and 
Salem.  All  these  villages  were  occupied  by  the  red  men  who  had  become 
Christianized,  and  were  engaged  in  the  peaceful  pursuits  of  civilization. 
The  depredations  of  hostiles  on  the  frontiers  of  Western  Pennsylvania  and 
Virginia  led  the  inhabitants  to  retaliate,  and  a company  of  one  hundred 
men  was  raised  and  placed  under  the  command  of  Colonel  Williamson,  as  a 
corps  of  volunteer  militia.  They  marched  to  the  Moravian  towns  on  the 
Tuscarawas,  arriving  within  a mile  of  Gnadenhutten  on  the  night  of  the 
5th  of  March. 


i55 


i56 


MASSACRE  OF  THE  MORAVIAN  INDIANS. 


On  the  following  morning  sixteen  of  Williamson’s  men  crossed  the 
river,  two  at  a time,  in  a large  sugar  trough,  to  the  west  bank,  where  some 
Indians  were  at  work  in  a corn  field.  The  rest  of  the  men  went  to  the 
village,  finding  only  an  Indian  and  a squaw.  They  killed  both. 

The  sixteen,  on  reaching  the  corn  field,  saw  more  Indians  than  they 
anticipated.  They  noted,  too,  that  they  had  their  guns  with  them  for  the 
purpose  of  killing  game.  The  whites  talked  kindly,  saying  they  had  come 
to  take  them  to  a place  of  safety,  and  advised  them  to  quit  work  and  go  to 
Fort  Pitt.  Some  of  the  tribe  had  been  to  the  fort  the  previous  year  and 
received  pleasant  treatment,  returning  with  numerous  presents.  The 
unsuspecting  Indians  naturally  believed  what  was  told  them,  gave  up 
their  guns,  and  placed  themselves  under  the  protection  of  Williamson  and 
his  men. 

An  Indian  messenger  was  sent  to  Salem  to  tell  the  brethren  of  the 
arrangement,  and  then  both  companies  returned  to  Gnadenhutten.  A 
number  of  mounted  militia  started  for  the  Salem  settlement,  but  before 
reaching  it  they  met  the  Moravian  Indians,  who  had  left  their  corn  fields 
and  were  on  the  way  to  join  their  brethren  at  Gnadenhutten.  The  Indians, 
already  secured  by  treachery,  had  been  bound  and  were  confined  in  two 
houses  under  a strong  guard.  Those  from  Salem,  whose  arms  had  been 
given  up,  were  also  bound  and  imprisoned,  the  males  in  one  house  and 
females  in  another.  The  total  of  men,  women,  and  children  was  between 
ninety  and  one  hundred. 

Colonel  Williamson  now  put  it  to  a vote  whether  the  captives  should 
suffer  death  or  be  taken  to  Fort  Pitt  in  accordance  with  the  pledge  made 
them.  Eighteen  only  out  of  the  whole  number  of  whites  favored  keeping 
the  pledge.  It  was  therefore  decided  by  a large  majority  to  put  them  to 
death. 

An  Indian  female,  who  spoke  good  English,  fell  on  her  knees  before 
Williamson  and  begged  that  the  lives  of  herself  and  friends  might  be 
spared,  assuring  him  (what  he  already  knew)  that  not  one  of  them  was 
guilty  of  any  wrong  toward  the  white  people.  His  reply  was  an  order  for 
her  to  prepare  for  death. 

The  Indians  had  anticipated  this  answer.  The  entire  night  was  spent 
in  prayer  and  the  singing  of  hymns.  The  scene  of  the  morrow  was  too 
shocking  to  describe.  A little  girl,  only  twelve  years  old,  when  it  came 
her  turn  to  kneel  to  receive  the  fatal  blow,  pleaded  for  her  life  in  such 
piteous  accents,  turning  her  dark  eyes,  swimming  with  tears,  upward  to  her 
white  executioners,  and  clasping  her  tiny  hands,  that  several  of  the  men 
turned  away  sick  at  heart.  The  innocent  child  died,  as  did  every  man, 
woman,  and  child  of  the  Christian  band.  The  massacre  was  as  devoid  of 
palliation  as  the  butchery  of  the  missionaries’  families  at  Cawnpore  by 


COLONEL  CRAWFORD’S  EXPEDITION.  157 

Nana  Sahib  daring  the  Sepoy  mutiny,  which  caused  a shudder  of  horror 
throughout  the  civilized  world. 

Revenge  came  very  soon,  though,  alas,  as  is  often  the  case,  it  did  not 
fall  upon  the  guilty  perpetrators  of  the  crime. 

On  the  22d  of  the  following  May,  Colonel  Crawford  headed  another 
expedition  from  Western  Pennsylvania.  His  force  consisted  of  four 


A PITEOUS  APPEAL. 


hundred  and  fifty  men.  Passing  the  Moravian  towns  on  their  way,  they 
were  attacked  by  the  Indians  near  the  Upper  Sandusky  and  overwhelm- 
ingly defeated.  A hundred  were  killed  and  taken  prisoners.  Of  the 
latter  only  two  succeeded  in  escaping. 

In  the  disorganized  flight,  Colonel  Crawford’s  anxiety  for  his  son  and 
several  relatives  caused  him  to  linger  too  long  at  the  rear,  and  he,  Dr. 
Knight,  and  several  others,  were  captured  by  a party  of  Delawares  and 
taken  to  the  old  Wyandot  town.  There  the  famous  Delaware  chief,  Cap- 


158 


COLONEL  CRAWFORD  AND  WINGENUND. 


tain  Pipe,  painted  Crawford  and  Knight  black.  The  other  prisoners  were 
tomahawked. 

They  had  halted  a short  distance  from  the  town,  and  on  their  way 
thither  were  accompanied  by  the  notorious  renegade,  Simon  Girty,  whose 
name  is  so  infamously  connected  with  the  settlement  of  the  West.  He 
taunted  them  with  the  fate  that  awaited  them  and  gloated  over  their  com- 
ing torture. 

In  the  village  was  a chief  known  as  Wingenund,  an  old  acquaintance 
and  friend  of  Crawford.  Not  wishing  to  witness  the  dreadful  scene, 
he  withdrew  to  his  cabin,  but  came  forth  at  the  earnest  solicitation 
of  Crawford. 

“ Don’t  you  know  me?  ” asked  the  despairing  officer. 

“ Are  you  not  Colonel  Crawford  ?”  inquired  the  chief  in  turn. 

“ I am.” 

“ So  ! ah,  yes,  indeed,”  replied  Wingenund  with  much  embarrassment. 

“ You  and  I have  long  been  friends ; you  have  sat  at  my  table  and  we 
have  never  had  an  unkind  word:  you  have  not  forgotten  all  this?” 

“ No  ; I never  could  forget  your  kindness;  an  Indian  always  remem- 
bers such  things.” 

“ Then  our  friendship  is  still  alive,  is  it  not  ? ” 

“ It  would  be  if  you  were  not  here  under  such  circumstances.” 

“ And  why  not  here  ? I hope  you  would  not  desert  a friend  in  need. 
Now  is  the  time  to  prove  your  friendship,  as  I would  do  were  our  situa- 
tions reversed.” 

“ Colonel  Crawford,”  said  the  chief  impressively,  “you  have  put  your- 
self and  your  friends  in  a situation  where  I can  do  nothing  for  you.” 

“ How  is  that  ? ” 

“ By  joining  yourself  to  that  man  Williamson,  who  but  a short  time 
ago  murdered  the  Moravian  Indians,  knowing  them  to  be  his  friends.  He 
knew  he  ran  no  risk  in  killing  men  and  women  whose  business  is  to  pray 
and  not  to  fight.” 

“ I assure  you,  Wingenund,  that  had  I been  there,  Williamson  would 
never  have  been  permitted  to  commit  that  crime.  All  good  men  every- 
where condemn  him,  and  none  more  than  I.” 

The  chief  expressed  his  sympathy  for  his  unfortunate  friend,  whom  he 
would  have  willingly  saved  had  it  been  in  his  power,  but  he  repeated  that 
he  could  do  nothing,  and  sorrowfully  bade  him  good-by,  shedding  tears,  it 
is  said,  as  he  walked  slowly  away. 

A large  stake  was  driven  into  the  ground  and  piles  of  wood  heaped 
about  it.  Colonel  Crawford’s  hands  were  tied  behind  his  back,  one  end  of 
a rope  was  fastened  to  the  ligature  at  the  wrists  and  the  other  to  the 
bottom  of  the  stake.  The  length  of  the  rope  permitted  him  to  walk  several 


TORTURE  OF  COI.ONEL  CRAWFORD. 


TORTURE  OF  COLONEL  CRAWFORD. 


161 


times  around  the  stake.  Fire  was  then  applied  to  the  piles  of  wood,  which 
lay  six  or  seven  yards  from  the  stake. 

Among  the  spectators  of  this  awful  scene  was  Girty,  the  renegade. 
He  sat  on  a horse  a few  feet  beyond  the  fire,  and  showed  by  his  manner 
that  he  enjoyed  the  coming  tragedy  as  much  as  the  Indians.  Colonel 
Crawford  asked  Girty  whether  the  Indians  intended  to  burn  him.  Receiv- 
ing an  affirmative  reply,  he  said  he  would  try  to  die  like  a man.  He  made 
no  appeal  to  the  miscreant,  knowing  it  would  only  give  him  occasion  to 
taunt  him. 

Colonel  Crawford  was  burned  at  the  stake,  suffering  every  torture  of 
which  the  mind  can  conceive.  His  ears  were  cut  off,  and  charges  of  powder 
shot  into  his  body  as  he  ran  back  and  forth  around  the  stake  in  his  frantic 
efforts  to  escape  his  tormentors  ; the  squaws  threw  coals  and  hot  ashes 
upon  him,  and  he  underwent  still  further  suffering  until  nature  at  last 
succumbed,  and  he  died. 

It  was  intended  that  Dr.  Knight  should  suffer  the  same  fate  as 
Crawford,  but  he  succeeded  in  making  his  escape,  and  from  him  and  some 
of  the  Indians  that  were  present,  the  particulars  of  the  unfortunate  officer’s 
death  were  obtained.  His  sorrowful  fate  was  directly  due  to  the  atrocity 
of  his  own  race,  the  instance  being  another  of  the  innumerable  ones  in 
which,  as  already  stated,  the  innocent  are  made  to  suffer  for  the  guilty. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 


A SCRIMMAGE  WITH  THE  DELAWARES— BRAD V’S  LEAP. 

BEFORE  giving  an  account  of  the  several  campaigns  against  the  Western 
Indians  after  the  Revolution,  we  will  relate  one  or  two  incidents  as 
typical  of  the  times  and  the  men  who  were  involved  by  the  continual  war- 
fare between  the  rival  claimants  for  the  soil. 

We  will  let  the  hero  himself  tell  the  following  story: 

“ I have  been  a trader  among  the  red  men  for  about  twenty-five  years  ; 
and  in  the  course  of  these  years  I have  managed  to  make  a good  many 
friends  among  the  Delawares,  Shawnees,  and  Wyandots.  Also,  I regret  to 
say,  I have  made  a few  bitter  enemies.  You  see,  I was  always  noted  for 
taking  a decided  course  upon  every  occasion  when  the  red  men  came  into 
conflict  with  the  whites.  For  I was  no  mere  trader — a man  willing  to  sac- 
rifice his  honor  and  conscience  and  race  to  fill  his  pocket.  I never  hesitated 
to  tell  the  red  men  when  they  were  wrong,  and  several  times  I have  gone 
further  and  told  them  they  ought  to  be  punished.  By  this  bold  and  open 
course  of  action  I won  the  respect  of  most  men  with  whom  I was  brought 
into  contact.  But  there  was  one  man,  Custaloga,  a chief  of  the  Delawares, 
who  bore  an  unconquerable  hatred  toward  the  whites  and  toward  me  in 
particular.  Nor  did  he  fail  to  persuade,  in  time,  a considerable  number  of 
his  tribe  that  I was  their  secret  foe.  It  was  intolerable,  he  persuaded 
them,  that  I should  be  allowed  to  come  among  the  Delawares  and  accuse 
them  of  acting  treacherously. 

“ For  some  time  I feared  this  Custaloga’s  influence,  and  kept  on  the 
borders  of  the  Delaware  country.  But  the  temptations  of  a very  profitable 
trade,  and  the  probabilities  of  evading  injuries  from  my  foes,  determined 
me  to  visit  the  Delawares  again  in  the  year  1793. 

“ Accordingly,  in  the  spring  of  that  year,  I set  out  from  Fort  Pitt,  in 
company  with  another  trader  and  a Wyandot  named  Hochela,  who  had 
long  been  an  intimate  friend  and  guide  to  me.  We  journeyed  in  safety, 
meeting  many  friendly  Delawares  and  red  men  of  other  tribes,  and  arrived 
on  the  Muskingum,  up  which  we  intended  to  proceed  till  we  reached  the 
Delaware  villages. 

“One  morning  we  were  getting  things  ready  to  start  from  the  place 
where  we  had  camped  the  night  before,  when  Hochela  came  running  to  us 
from  a thick  wood.  He  informed  us  that  he  had  seen  Custaloga  and  two 

162 


A DESPERATE  ENCOUNTER.  163 

other  Delawares  advancing  cautiously  through  the  wood  in  the  direction  of 
our  camping  place. 

“ We  instantly  seized  our  rifles,  but  our  foes  were  upon  us  before  we 
expected  them.  They  rushed  straight  at  us  out  of  the  wood,  yelling  like 
fiends. 

“Custaloga  fired  as  he  came,  and  the  two  other  Delawares  discharged 
their  pieces  immediately  after.  A ball  passed  through  my  wrist,  but  my 
friends  were  unhurt.  My  fire  killed  the  Delaware  who  was  nearest  as  they 
broke  cover,  and  then  the  struggle  began. 

“Our  camping  place  was  close  to  the  edge  of  a high  bank,  and  the 
descent  from  it  was  almost  perpendicular.  Custaloga  was  a very  powerful 
man,  and  my  wound  had  disabled  one  of  my  arms.  But  I struck  at  him 
with  my  tomahawk.  I received  the  stroke  of  his,  however,  upon  my 
wounded  arm,  and  rolled  on  the  ground. 

“The  Wyandot  at  this  instant  came  to  my  relief.  He  struck  at 
Custaloga,  who  parried  the  blow,  and,  grappling  with  the  Wyandot  by 
neck  and  waist,  threw  him  from  the  height.  Meantime  I arose,  drew  my 
knife,  and  stabbed  the  chief  in  the  back. 

“I  drove  the  knife  in  with  all  my  might,  and  the  wound  was  mortal. 
Custaloga  reeled  round,  struck  at  me  with  his  knife,  and  fell  from  the 
height,  uttering  an  awful  scream. 

“I  had  time,  now,  to  look  around  for  my  friend  Jones.  I found  him 
just  giving  the  other  Delaware  a mortal  blow  in  the  throat.  They  had 
engaged  in  a desperate  grapple,  and  Jones  had  been  severely  hacked  by 
his  opponent’s  knife. 

“ However,  his  foe  fell,  and  the  scalp  was  soon  in  his  possession.  I 
scalped  the  other  Delaware  whom  I had  shot.  We  then  had  breathing 
time.  My  arm  was  broken,  and  the  wound  in  the  wrist  bled  a great  deal. 
Jones  was  cut  on  both  arms,  and  slightly  on  the  back.  But  we  agreed  to 
go  round  to  a place  where  we  could  easily  descend  the  bank  and  see 
what  had  become  of  the  bodies  of  the  two  who  had  gone  over  the 
height. 

“We  found  both  lying  in  the  shallow  water  at  the  foot.  Hochela’s 
head  had  struck  against  a projecting  rock  in  his  fall,  and  he  was  quite  dead 
when  we  found  him.  Custaloga  still  clenched  his  knife,  while  his  features 
were  frightfully  distorted.  I managed  to  scalp  him,  and  then  we  threw 
both  bodies  into  deep  water  as  the  readiest  grave.  Returning  to  our 
camping  place,  we  dressed  each  other’s  wounds  after  a fashion,  secured  our 
goods,  and  determined  to  hurry  away  from  that  part  of  the  country. 

“ It  was  severe  traveling  with  heavy  packs  in  our  condition  ; but  we 
knew  that  if  the  death  of  Custaloga  and  his  friends  reached  the  ears  of 
the  people  of  their  village  our  lives  would  be  sought  in  revenge.  So  we 


164 


CAPTAIN  SAMUEL  BRADY’S  ADVENTURE. 


traveled  hard  till  we  reached  Farmer’s  Castle,  on  the  Ohio.  There  we 
were  sure  of  protection. 

“The  Delawares  found  the  bodies  of  their  friends — that  of  Custaloga 
drifting  ashore  a short  distance  below  the  place  where  he  \vas  killed.  For 
a while  they  weresvery  much  excited,  and  threatened  us  with  the  most 
horrible  torture  if  we  should  fall  into  their  hands.  But  the  Major-Com- 
mandant at  the  Castle  sent  a friendly  Wyandot  to  their  principal  chief  to 
inform  him  of  the  true  state  of  the  affair,  and  to  offer  presents  from  us  as 
marks  of  our  esteem  and  friendship.  The  chief  was  fully  satisfied  that 
Custaloga  had  deserved  his  fate,  and  succeeded  in  convincing  his  relatives 
of  the  fact.  At  least  they  said  they  were  convinced.  Jones  and  I much 
doubted  it,  and  kept  away  from  the  Delawares  for  more  than  a year 
afterward.” 

Captain  Samuel  Brady  was  a powerful  man,  possessing  great  activity 
and  a daring  that  made  him  famous  among  the  veteran  frontiersmen 
around  him.  His  hopne  was  on  the  banks  of  Chartier  Creek,  a dozen  miles 
below  Fort  Pitt.  He  was  the  hero  of  many  thrilling  adventures  and 
remarkable  escapes  from  the  Indians. 

In  1780,  when  he  had  barely  reached  his  majority,  and  while  he  was 
still  living  on  Chartier  Creek,  it  happened  that  a large  band  of  Indian  warriors 
from  the  Falls  of  Cuyahoga  and  the  country  round  had  made  an  incursion 
on  the  southern  side  of  the  Ohio  River.  The  settlement  attacked  was 
known  as  “ Catfish  Camp,”  after  an  old  Indian  chief  of  that  name,  who  had 
been  living  on  the  Monongahela  River  at  the  time  when  the  white  men 
first  came  to  settle  in  the  country.  The  spot  where  the  settlement  stood 
is  now  part  of  Washington  County. 

The  Indians,  coming  on  the  place  suddenly,  had  murdered  several 
families,  looted  the  settlement,  and  recrossed  the  Ohio  with  their  spoil 
before  word  of  the  outrage  came  to  Chartier  Creek. 

The  news,  however,  acted  on  Brady  as  a trumpet-call.  He  at  once 
started  off,  summoned  a party  together,  and  hastened  on  the  track  of  the 
Indians.  These,  however,  had  a start  of  a couple  of  days  and  were  well 
back  on  their  way  to  their  villages. 

Brady,  following  their  trail,  found  it  divide  close  to  the  spot  where 
now  stands  the  town  of  Ravenna.  One  body  of  the  Indians  had  traveled 
northward,  the  other  to  the  west,  toward  the  Falls  of  the  Cuyahoga.  Brady 
wished  to  lose  nothing  of  his  revenge,  and  therefore  divided  his  company 
also  in  two.  One  part  pursued  the  northern  trail ; the  other,  with  Brady 
at  its  head,  struck  off  toward  the  Indian  village  which  lay  in  what  after- 
ward became  the  township  of  Northampton,  in  Portage  County. 

The  village  lay  close  to  the  river.  The  Indians  there,  being  probably 
informed  by  spies  that  Brady  was  after  them,  were  keeping  a sharp  look- 


THE  LEAP. 


THE  LAST  RESORT. 


6 7 


out.  They  had,  moreover,  managed  to  supplement  their  army,  so  that  it 
outnumbered  Brady’s  party  by  more  than  four  to  one.  The  consequence 
was  that  the  whites,  advancing  with  all  caution,  soon  found  they  must 
retreat  at  once  if  they  valued  their  lives;  and  that,  before  they  set  about 
retreating,  the  Indians  were  upon  them. 

Brady  at  once  ordered  his  men  to  separate,  and,  scattering  in  all  direc- 
tions, to  shift  each  man  for  himself.  They  did  so ; but  so  great  was  the 
Indians’  thirst  to  avenge  the  innumerable  punishments  that  this  one  man 
had  inflicted  on  them,  that  they  disregarded  all  the  others  and  concen- 
trated their  pursuit  on  Brady  alone. 

He  knew  the  country  here  as  well  as  a man  knows  his  own  street,  hav- 
ing hunted  over  the  ground  many  scores  of  times.  The  Cuyahoga  just  at 
this  point  takes  a long  bend  to  the  south  and  almost  comes  back  upon 
itself,  inclosing,  in  the  loop  thus  formed,  a peninsula  of  many  square  miles. 
Along  this  peninsula  the  Indians  hunted  Brady  ; and  by  stretching  out 
their  line  to  right  and  left,  and  outflanking  him,  forced  him  little  by  little 
to  the  bank  of  the  river,  or  rather  stream,  where  the  rugged  nature  of  the 
ground  made  running  more  difficult. 

Brady  saw  the  stratagem.  He  must  cross  the  river  : but  to  do  so 
under  the  bullets  of  his  enemies  was  almost  certain  death.  They  were  in 
full  cry  behind  him,  but  as  yet  forbore  to  shoot,  as  they  wanted  to  capture 
him  alive  and  torture  him.  Death  from  a rifle-bullet  would  be  a very  poor 
satisfaction  to  the  hatred  they  nursed  against  this  man.  Brady  knew  well 
enough  the  reason  why  they  did  not  fire  : but  he  also  knew  very  well  that 
if  he  tried  to  cross  the  river  he  would  be  riddled  with  balls  at  once. 

As  a last  resource,  he  collected  all  his  energies  for  a spurt,  and  made 
for  a spot  well  known  to  him,  where  the  whole  volume  of  the  Cuyahoga  is 
compressed  between  two  precipices,  but  twenty-two  feet  apart  at  the  top 
— a deep  and  gloomy  chasm,  at  the  foot  of  which  the  current  boils  impa- 
tiently, fifty  feet  down.  A short  way  above,  the  stream  is  fifty  yards  wide 
at  least,  and  widens  again  immediately  below  this  rocky  pass.  The  ques- 
tion which  flashed  across  Brady’s  brain  was,  “ Can  I by  any  possibility  leap 
across  from  one  precipice  to  the  other?  ” 

It  was  better  to  fail  and  be  dashed  to  pieces  in  the  depths  of  the 
chasm  than  to  be  caught  and  burned  alive.  He  made  up  his  mind. 
Hitherto  he  had  been  running  well,  but  husbanding  his  powers:  but  now 
he  leaped  ahead  as  if  he  were  running  a hundred  yards’  race.  With  one 
look  over  his  shoulder  he  saw  his  enemies  closing  down  upon  him  in  a 
semicircle.  This  was  the  one  spot  of  all  others  they  would  have  wished 
him  to  run  for.  With  his  back  to  the  precipice,  they  would  take  him  alive, 
like  a rat  in  a trap. 

He,  on  the  other  hand,  though  expecting  a swift  death,  exulted  in 


THE  PRODIGIOUS  LEAP. 


1 68 

spirit.  He  did  not  care  to  measure  the  chasm  with  his  eye.  Whatever  its 
width,  he  must  leap.  Within  twenty  yards  of  the  lip  he  shortened  his 
stride;  hung  back  a moment,  took  a swift  run,  and  spurning  the  edge, 
sprang  forward  in  air  over  the  swirling  water. 

The  leap,  as  we  have  said,  was  twenty-two  feet  across,  and  the  man 
was  somewhat  spent  with  running.  Now  twenty-two  feet  is  a big  jump 
even  for  a modern  athlete  who  has  been  training  for  weeks  and  jumps  in 
thin  clothing  and  light  shoes,  on  a carefully  leveled  ground. 

Brady  did  not  quite  strike  the  opposite  lip  of  the  chasm.  But  it 
so  happened  that  just  below  this  lip  a narrow  ledge  protruded,  and 
into  this  the  hunted  man  dropped,  catching  at  the  shrubs  as  he  fell, 
to  prevent  his  toppling  backward.  For  a moment  he  hung,  panting, 
against  the  wall  of.  the  cliff ; then  seizing  the  shrubs  again,  pulled  himself 
up  to  the  crest. 

The  Indians  came  by  ones  and  twos  to  the  brink  and  peered  over. 
Amazement  held  them  dumb,  and  before  they  recovered,  Brady  was  half 
way  up  the  hillside  opposite.  They  sent  a volley  after  him  at  length  ; 
and  one  ball  struck  him  in  the  hip,  but  not  so  badly  as  to  prevent  his 
running  still. 

The  Indians  looked  at  that  mighty  leap  and  turned  back  from  it.  It 
was  lucky  that  they  had  to  make  a large  circuit  before  they  could  get  down 
to  a safer  place  and  cross  the  stream,  for  Brady’s  wound  was  telling  on 
him.  With  the  advantage  he  had  gained,  however,  he  managed  to  reach 
the  shore  of  a small  lake  which  still  bears  his  name.  Plunging  down  its 
bank,  he  dived,  swam  as  far  as  he  could  under  water,  and  came  up  again 
under  the  trunk  of  a gigantic  oak  that  had  fallen  across  the  water. 

The  Indians  followed  his  blood  stains  down  to  the  pond,  and  searched 
all  along  the  shore.  They  found  nothing,  however,  though  a couple  of 
them  came  near  enough  to  stand  on  the  very  tree  under  which  Brady 
lurked.  At  last,  concluding  that  he  had  sunk  and  was  lying  at  the  bottom 
of  the  lake,  they  went  off  extremely  disappointed.  The  hunted  man 
waited  for  an  hour  or  two  before  creeping  out,  and  reached  his  home  in 
safety.  All  his  followers  had  already  returned. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 


RAVAGES  BY  THE  INDIANS— MAJOR  DOUGHTY’S  ENCOUNTER  ON  THE 
TENNESSEE — GENERAL  HARMAR’S  EXPEDITION — DEFEAT  OF  ST. 
CLAIR— GENERAL  WAYNE’S  SUCCESSFUL  CAMPAIGN — THE  TREATY  OF 
FORT  GREENVILLE. 

INVESTIGATION  proved  that,  between  the  year  1783  and  the  month 
of  October,  1790,  when  our  government  began  offensive  operations 
against  the  Indians,  they  killed,  wounded,  and  took  prisoners  fully  fifteen 
hundred  men,  women  and  children,  on  the  Ohio  or  the  frontiers  on  the 
southern  side,  besides  stealing  upward  of  two  thousand  horses  and  other 
property,  to  the  value  of  fifty  thousand  dollars. 

It  was  high  time  that  something  was  done  to  check  this  devastation, 
for  the  savages  had  become  so  bold  as  to  attack  detachments  of  troops. 
In  April,  1790,  Major  Doughty  was  ordered  to  the  friendly  Chicka- 
saws,  on  public  business.  While  ascending  the  Tennessee  River  in  a boat 
with  fifteen  men,  he  met  a party  of  Indians  in  four  canoes,  consisting  of 
Shawanoes  and  vagabond  Cherokees.  They  displayed  a white  flag  and 
were  made  welcome  on  the  major’s  boat.  They  received  a number  of 
presents,  stayed  the  better  part  of  an  hour,  and  then  left  with  many 
expressions  of  good  will. 

They  had  hardly  shoved  off,  however,  when  they  turned  and  poured  a 
murderous  volley  into  the  boat  they  had  just  left.  The  soldiers  returned 
the  fire  as  quickly  as  they  could  recover  themselves,  but  when  the  conflict 
ended  eleven  out  of  the  fifteen  had  been  killed  or  wounded. 

It  being  apparent  that  nothing  but  vigorous  measures  could  check 
these  outrages,  President  Washington,  on  the  30th  of  September,  1790, 
with  the  consent  of  Congress,  despatched  General  Harmar,  with  three 
hundred  Federal  troops  and  eleven  hundred  and  thirty-three  militia, 
against  the  principal  Indian  villages. 

General  Harmar  entered  the  country  from  Fort  Washington,  on  the 
present  site  of  Cincinnati,  with  Colonel  Hardin  and  six  hundred  Kentucky 
militia,  forming  a reconnoitering  party  in  advance.  The  Indians  every- 
where fled  on  their  approach,  burning  their  own  villages  and  property. 
Determined  to  overtake  them,  Colonel  Hardin  placed  himself  at  the  head 
of  two  hundred  and  ten  men,  and  pushed  on  with  all  haste.  This  scout 
was  attacked  by  a comparatively  weak  force  of  Indians,  when  the  raw 
militia  broke  and  fled,  leaving  the  brave  regulars  to  their  fate.  Twenty* 

169 


170  DEFEAT  OF  GENERALS  HARMAR  AND  ST0  CLAIR. 

three  were  killed  and  the  rest  succeeded,  after  much  difficulty,  in  joining 
the  main  body. 

General  Harmar  pushed  on.  Ten  miles  beyond  the  destroyed  town  of 
the  Miamis  he  halted  and  detached  between  four  and  five  hundred  militia 
and  sixty  regular  soldiers,  under  the  command  of  Major  Wileys  and  Colonel 
Hardin,  who  were  ordered  to  march  back  to  the  town.  A small  number 
of  Indians  were  seen,  who  fled,  apparently  in  great  fright,  in  different  direc- 
tions. Most  of  the  militia  followed  them  pell  mell,  leaving  the  small  force 
of  regulars,  who  shortly  were  attacked  by  overwhelming  numbers. 

The  fight  was  a desperate  one,  some  of  the  returning  militia  again  show- 
ing the  white  feather.  More  than  one  hundred  of  them  and  fifty  of  the  reg- 
ulars were  killed,  including  the  brave  Major  Wileys,  Fontaine,  and  Froth- 
ingham.  Many  Indians,  too,  fell,  and  General  Harmar,  in  his  official  report, 
claimed  a victory,  because  he  was  allowed  to  retire  without  molestation; 
but  a few  more  victories  like  that  would  have  ended  him  and  his  army. 

Major  General  Arthur  St.  Clair  succeeded  Harmar  in  command  of  the 
forces  in  the  West.  Before  he  set  out,  Washington  warned  him  in  the 
most  impressive  manner  against  making  the  mistake  of  his  predecessors. 

“ Beware  of  a surprise,”  said  the  President ; “ you  know  how  the  Indians 
fight,  and  I repeat,  BEWARE  OF  A SURPRISE  ! ” 

St,  Clair  organized  a force  of  two  thousand  men,  with  cavalry  and 
artillery,  with  which  he  left  Fort  Washington,  October  3,  1791.  Advanc- 
ing twenty  miles  to  F*ort  Hamilton  on  the  Miami,  he  turned  north,  build- 
ing Forts  St.  Clair  and  Jefferson  by  the  way.  He  lost  so  many  men  by 
desertions  and  detachments  that  only  about  fourteen  hundred  were  left. 

At  the  close  of  day,  November  3,  St.  Clair  reached  a point  nearly  a 
hundred  miles  north  of  Fort  Washington,  and  encamped  on  one  of  the 
upper  tributaries  of  the  Wabash.  The  following  morning,  just  after  the 
troops  were  dismissed  from  parade,  the  Indians  assailed  them  with  great 
fury.  They  were  led  by  skillful  chiefs,  and  among  them  was  the  renegade 
Simon  Girty.  The  raw  recruits,  who  received  the  first  shock  of  attack,  fell 
back  in  confusion,  and  threw  the  rest  into  a panic. 

St.  Clair,  although  quite  feeble  and  ill,  displayed  great  personal  bravery, 
as  did  his  officers  and  the  regulars ; but  the  savages  fought  with  undaunted 
bravery,  for  they  were  protected  by  cover,  as  in  the  case  of  Braddock.  A 
bayonet  charge  routed  a large  body,  but  as  soon  as  the  soldiers  returned 
the  fight  was  renewed  with  the  same  fierceness  as  at  first.  The  left  wing 
was  broken  and  the  artillerists  killed  almost  to  a man.  The  panic-stricken 
soldiers  huddled  together  and  were  slaughtered  like  sheep.  Nothing  could 
be  done,  and  St.  Clair  gave  orders  for  a retreat.  His  men  fled,  closely 
followed  by  the  Indians,  who  might  have  cut  them  all  down  had  not  their 
greed  led  them  to  stop  and  gather  the  rich  plunder. 


EXTENT  OF  THE  DISASTER. 


171 

St.  Clair  himself  had  a narrow  escape.  Eight  balls  passed  through  his 
clothing  and  his  tent  was  surrounded,  but  the  Indians  were  driven  back  by 
the  regulars  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet.  The  most  valiant  service  was 
done  by  a Chickasaw,  who,  with  a party  of  his  people,  was  on  his  way  to 
join  the  Americans,  but  the  rest  did  not  arrive  in  time.  This  single  red 
man  killed  and  scalped  eleven  of  his  countrymen,  and  was  at  work-  on  the 
twelfth,  when  he  succumbed,  greatly  mourned  by  his  friends. 

This  was  a woeful  disaster.  Of  the  Americans,  six  hundred  and  thirty- 
one  were  left  dead  on  the  field,  of  whom  thirty-eight  were  officers;  two 


A PIONEER  HOME. 


hundred  and  sixty-three  were  wounded.  The  Indians  reported  a loss  of 
sixty-five,  but  it  was  undoubtedly  greater.  They  captured  seven  cannon, 
two  hundred  oxen,  and  many  horses,  but  took  no  prisoners. 

The  Indians  were  about  four  thousand  strong,  and  were  led  by  a 
remarkable  Indian — a chief  of  the  Mississayo  tribe.  He  had  been  in  the 
British  service  during  the  Revolution,  was  six  feet  tall,  and  so  morose  that 
he  was  disliked  by  his  brother  chiefs  ; but  they  knew  he  understood  the 
art  of  war  better  than  any  of  them,  and  gave  him  full  charge.  He  planned 
and  conducted  the  attack,  which  was  contrary  to  the  advice  of  the  rest,  and 
checked  the  pursuit,  saying  they  had  killed  enough  Americans,  and  it  was 
proper  to  gather  in  the  plunder  strewn  along  the  way. 


172 


GENERAL  WAYNE’S  EXPEDITION. 


This  strange  individual  must  have  formed  a picturesque  figure  in  the 
battle.  He  wore  the  Indian  hose  and  moccasins,  a blue  petticoat  that  came 
half  way  down  his  thighs,  and  an  European  waistcoat  and  surtout.  His  head 
was  bound  with  an  Indian  cap,  reaching  half  way  down  his  back,  and  al- 
most filled  with  plain  silver  brooches,  to  the  number  of  more  than  two  hun- 
dred. The  ears  were  adorned  with  two  rings  apiece,  the  upper  part  of 
each  being  formed  of  three  silver  medals  about  the  size  of  a dollar;  the 
lower  portion  was  formed  of  quarters  of  dollars  and  depended  more  than 
twelve  inches  from  his  ears,  besides  which  he  wore  three  nose  jewels  of  won- 
derful pattern. 

The  news  of  this  defeat  spread  consternation  in  Philadelphia.  Wash- 
ington was  so  indignant  that  he  strode  back  and  forth,  recalling  his  instruc- 
tions to  St.  Clair  and  asserting  that  the  blood  of  the  slain  rested  upon  the 
incompetent  leader. 

The  wrath  of  Washington,  however,  soon  abated,  and  he  declared  that 
the  officer  should  receive  justice.  St.  Clair  was  acquitted  by  a committee 
of  Congress,  but  he  was  so  strongly  condemned  by  his  countrymen  that 
he  resigned  and  was  succeeded  by  General  Anthony  Wayne. 

“Mad  Anthony”  was  made  a major  general  in  1792,  and  given  com- 
mand in  the  West,  with  authority  to  raise  three  more  regiments  of  infantry 
and  two  thousand  dragoons,  for  a term  of  three  years.  He  began  collect- 
ing troops  early  in  the  year,  and  moved  so  slowly  that  much  complaint  was 
made,  as  is  always  the  case  at  such  times;  but  he  was  simply  cautious,  and 
did  not  intend  to  make  any  mistake. 

The  Indians  along  the  Maumee  were  vigilant  through  the  winter, 
attacking  whenever  a chance  offered.  There  were  many  skirmishes,  with 
little  advantage  on  either  side,  and  the  savages,  knowing  that  a decisive 
conflict  must  eventually  take  place,  gathered  their  warriors  and  made  full 
preparation. 

In  July,  General  Wayne  received  a re-enforcement  of  sixteen  hundred 
Kentuckians,  under  the  brave  General  Charles  Scott.  This  made  the 
strength  of  the  Americans  about  four  thousand,  and  Wayne  was  ready  for 
work. 

He  used  every  caution  on  his  march  into  the  Indian  country.  He 
invariably  went  into  camp  about  the  middle  of  the  afternoon,  in  a hollow 
square,  which  was  enclosed  by  a rampart  of  logs.  He  knew  that  hundreds 
of  eyes  were  watching  his  every  movement  from  the  woody  recesses,  and 
he  forgot  none  of  the  minute  instructions  of  Washington,  who  had  proven 
himself  a consummate  Indian  fighter  when  a young  man,  during  the  French 
and  Indian  war. 

Reaching  St.  Mary’s  on  the  2d  of  August,  Wayne  built  Fort  Adams 
and  garrisoned  it.  He  next  crossed  the  Auglaize,  and  marched  down  that 


WASHINGTON  IN  A RAGE. 


A DECISIVE  VICTORY. 


175 


stream,  through  deserted  villages  and  fields  to  the  junction  with  the  Mau- 
mee, where  he  erected  Fort  Defiance.  He  now  followed  the  Maumee 
to  the  head  of  the  rapids,  and  built  Fort  Deposit. 

All  this  time,  General  Wayne  was  striving  to  avoid  the  effusion  of 
blood  by  persuading  the  Indians  to  make  peace.  At  the  beginning  of 
preparations,  he  sent  Colonel  Hardin  and  Major  Truman  with  overtures,, 
but  both  men  were  treacherously  murdered.  When  a great  battle  was 
imminent  he  tried  it  again,  but  the  Indians  seemed  to  look  upon  the 
proposition  as  proof  of  timidity  on  his  part,  and  returned  such  exasperat- 
ing replies  that  Wayne  determined  to  delay  the  blow  no  longer. 

On  the  20th  of  August  the  army  advanced  in  three  columns.  Major 
Price  was  at  the  head,  with  a reconnoitering  scout.  Five  miles  out,  they 
were  attacked  by  a large  force  of  concealed  savages.  Price  fell  back,  and* 
Wayne  made  ready  for  battle.  The  Indians  had  selected  their  position 
with  much  skill,  having  moved  into  a thick  wood  in  front  of  the  British 
post  and  taken  position  among  a large  number  of  trees  that  had  been  pros- 
trated by  a tornado.  Because  of  this,  the  battle  is  known  as  that  of  the 
Fallen  Timbers. 

The  savages  were  formed  in  three  lines,  and  were  beyond  reach  of  the 
horse.  The  American  legion  was  ordered  to  charge  with  trailed  arms, 
rouse  the  enemy  from  his  hiding  place,  and  then  deliver  a volley.  The 
cavalry  was  to  advance  between  the  Indians  and  the  river,  where  the  wood 
allowed  them  to  penetrate  and  charge  the  left  flank.  General  Scott,  with 
his  mounted  volunteers,  was  to  make  a circuit,  so  as  to  turn  the  right. 

This  well  arranged  programme  was  carried  out  with  brilliant  success, 
but  the  first  line  of  infantry  was  so  impetuous  that  the  enemy  was  drivers 
headlong  out  of  their  position.  Those  who  had  dislodged  them  did  it  with 
such  a rush  that  only  a few  of  the  second  line  of  the  mounted  volunteers 
gained  a chance  to  take  part.  The  panic-stricken  savages  were  chased  with 
great  slaughter  to  the  British  fort  of  Maumee,  several  miles  distant.  The 
commander  of  this  post  had  promised,  in  case  of  defeat,  to  open  the  gates 
and  give  them  protection.  But  he  did  not  do  so,  and,  while  the  horde  were- 
huddled  about  the  gates,  clamoring  for  admission,  the  cavalry  and  infantry 
cut  them  down  without  mercy.  General  Wayne,  in  his  official  report,  gave 
his  killed  as  thirty-eight,  and  his  wounded  one  hundred  and  one.  The  loss 
of  the  Indians  could  not  be  definitely  ascertained,  but,  inasmuch  as  they 
had  two  thousand  warriors  engaged,  it  must  have  been  great. 

This  blow  was  a decisive  one.  The  formidable  confederation  of 
tribes  was  overthrown  so  utterly  that  they  did  not  recover  for  twenty 
years.  General  Wayne  remained  three  days  on  the  site  of  the  battle,  burn- 
ing houses  and  cornfields  above  and  below  the  fort.  He  paid  his  compli- 
ments particularly  to  Colonel  McKee,  an  English  trader,  who  had  used  his^ 


76 


THE  TREATY  OF  FORT  GREENVILLE. 


influence  for  years  to  incite  the  savages  to  annoy  the  Americans.  All  of 
this  man’s  houses  and  stores  were  reduced  to  ashes.  The  commander  of 
the  fort  protested  to  Wayne,  who  gave  him  to  understand  that  he  could 
only  save  himself  and  garrison  by  attending  to  his  own  business,  and  not 
seeking  to  interfere  with  him. 

It  should  be  remembered  that,  although  peace  had  been  made  between 
Great  Britain  and  the  United  States,  a number  of  British  posts  were 
held  by  their  garrisons  for  years,  and  these  did  much  to  excite  the  Indians 
to  hostilities. 

Nothing  being  left  to  destroy,  General  Wayne  returned  to  Auglaize  and 
laid  waste  all  the  Indian  towns  and  corn  within  fifty  miles  of  the  river. 
He  gave  the  savages  to  understand  that  their  alternative  was  peace  or 
.destruction. 

On  the  3d  of  August,  1795,  eleven  hundred  chiefs  and  warriors  met  the 
United  States  Commissioners  at  Fort  Greenville,  where  a treaty  of  peace 
was  signed,  by  which  the  red  men  ceded  to  our  government  a vast  tract  of- 
land,  lying  in  the  present  States  of  Indiana  and  Michigan.  As  a result, 
western  emigration  was  given  a great  impetus  and  was  little  interrupted 
for  many  years. 

Augilst  20,  1885,  just  ninety-one  years  after  the  victory  of  Fallen 
Timbers,  a concourse  of  more  than  five  thousand  people,  mainly  from 
Michigan,  Indiana,  and  Ohio,  came  together  on  the  site  of  the  battle  ground 
to  celebrate  the  victory  of  General  Wayne.  It  was  decided  that  a monu- 
ment should  be  erected  on  the  spot  where  the  famous  Indian  leader, 
Turkey  Foot,  fell.  This  place  receives  its  name  from  a large  gray  rock,  on 
the  top  of  which  the  warriors  had  cut  with  their  tomahawks  rude  repre- 
sentations of  turkey  feet  tracks,  in  honor  of  their  chief. 


CHAPTER  XXIII. 


THE  GREATEST  AMERICAN  INDIAN  THAT  EVER  LIVED — TECUMSEH’S 
BIRTH  AND  YOUTH — AT  THE  BATTLE  OF  FALLEN  TIMBERS — A TIMID 
KENTUCKIAN — TECUMSEH’S  INTERVIEW  WITH  GOVERNOR  HARRISON — 
A DRAMATIC  SCENE. 

IN  the  year  1768,  an  Indian  woman  named  Meetheetashe,  the  wife  of 
Chief  Pukeesheno,  gave  birth  to  three  male  infants.  They  were,  Ells- 
kwatawa,  signifying  in  the  picturesque  Shawanoe  tongue,  a door  opened ; 
the  second  was  Kumskaka,  meaning  a tiger  that  flies  in  the  air , and  the 
third  was  Tecumseh,  a tiger  crouching  for  his  prey.  The  mother  died 
among  the  Cherokees,  and  the  father  was  killed  at  the  battle  of  Kanawha 
in  1774.  His  eldest  son  was  slain  while  on  a scouting  expedition  against 
the  settlers  of  Kentucky. 

In  studying  the  character  of  the  American  Indians  who  have  made  a 
name  for  themselves,  Tecumseh  stands  head  and  shoulders  above  them  all. 
Trumbull,  in  his  “ Indian  Wars,”  thus  refers  to  this  renowned  leader : 

He  was  the  most  extraordinary  Indian  that  has  ever  appeared  in  his- 
dmry.  He  would  have  been  a great  man  in  any  age  or  nation.  Independ- 
ent, of  the  most  consummate  courage  and  skill  as  a warrior,  and  with  all  the 
characteristic  acutenesss  of  his  race,  he  was  endowed  by  nature  with  the 
attributes  of  mind  necessary  for  great  political  combinations.  His  acute 
understanding,  very  early  in  life,  informed  him  that  his  countrymen  had 
\lost  their  importance  ; that  they  were  gradually  yielding  to  the  whites,  who 
were  acquiring  an  imposing  influence  over  them.  Instigated  by  these  con- 
siderations, and  perhaps  by  his  natural  ferocity  and  attachment  to  war,  he 
1 became  a decided  enemy  to  the  whites,  and  imbibed  an  invincible  determi- 
nation (he  surrendered  it  with  his  life)  to  regain  for  his  country  the  proud 
independence  she  had  lost.  For  a number  of  years  he  was  foremost  in 
every  act  of  hostility  committed  against  those  he  conceived  the  oppressors 
of  his  countrymen,  and  was  equally  remarkable  for  intrepidity  as  skill  in 
many  combats  that  took  place  under  his  banner.  Aware,  at  length,  of  the 
extent,  number,  and  power  of  the  United  States,  he  became  fully  con- 
vinced of  the  futility  of  any  single  nation  of  red  men  attempting  to  cope 
with  them.  He  formed,  therefore,  the  grand  scheme  of  uniting  all  the 
tribes  east  of  the  Mississippi  into  hostility  against  the  United  States. 
This  was  a field  worthy  of  his  great  and  commanding  genius.  He  com- 
menced in  the  year  1809;  and  in  the  execution  of  his  project,  he  displayed 


77 


i;8 


THE  BEAU  IDEAL  AMERICAN  INDIAN. 


an  unequaled  adroitness,  eloquence,  and  courage.  He  insinuated  himself 
into  every  tribe  from  Michillimackinac  to  Georgia,  and  was  invariably  suc- 
cessful in  his  attempts  to  bring  them  over  to  his  views.” 

Tecumseh  in  appearance  was  the  beau  ideal  American  Indian.  Some- 
what inclined  to  stoutness,  he  was  as  agile  as  a panther.  He  was  of  dig- 
nified mien,  his  eye  penetrating,  his  features  handsome,  with  a certain 
austerity,  and  his  whole  deportment  lofty  and  impressive  to  a striking 
degree.  We  remember  an  old  soldier  years  ago  who  knew  the  chieftain 
well.  He  said  he  had  the  most  wonderful  voice  to  which  he  ever  listened. 
It  possessed  the  vibrating  resonance  of  an  organ,  and,  when  roused  to  one 
of  his  fiery  outbursts,  seemed  to  pulsate  through  the  air  with  a magnetic 
power  that  was  irresistible. 

“ There  was  nothing  to  which  I could  compare  it,”  added  the  soldier, 
“but  the  sound  made  by  thrusting  your  head  into  a barrel,  and  shouting. 
It  absolutely  filled  and  echoed  through  the  surrounding  air.” 

When  Tecumseh,  impatient  at  the  hesitation  and  timidity  of  some 
of  the  chiefs,  to  whom  he  unfolded  his  plans,  broke  forth  into  one  of 
his  magnificent  appeals,  no  Indian  could  withstand  him.  If  there  ever 
lived  a heaven-born  orator,  this  Shawanoe  chieftain  was  the  man. 

That  which  compels  admiration  of  this  remarkable  person  was  his 
freedom  from  many  of  the  weaknesses  of  his  race,  and  the  unquestioned 
possession  of  magnanimity,  chivalry,  and  the  power  of  governing  and  con- 
trolling those  upon  whose  ferocious  passions  no  other  being  could  exert 
any  effect. 

All  know  the  fondness  of  the  Indian  for  gaudy  ornament  and  display.  He 
left  the  gewgaws  and  spoils  to  his  warriors,  and  wore  a deerskin  coat  and 
pantaloons.  He  often  levied  subsidies  to  a large  amount,  but  none  of  it 
ever  clung  to  his  hands.  His  commanding  abilities  led  the  British  govern- 
ment, in  the  war  of  1812,  to  make  him  a brigadier-general,  and  no  white  man 
was  more  worthy  of  the  honor  than  he.  Who  could  have  resisted  the 
brilliant  uniform  and  crimson  sash?  Rarely  did  Tecumseh  wear  them. 
Frequently,  he  turned  over  the  insignia  of  his  honors  to  some  other  chief, 
with  the  gracious  remark  that  he  was  more  worthy  to  wear  them  than 
himself. 

He  drank  heavily  when  a young  man,  but,  quick  to  see  what  ruin  the 
white  man’s  firewater  was  working  upon  his  race,  he  resolutely  refrained. 
Had  he  devoted  himself  to  the  education  and  enlightenment  of  his  people, 
accepting  the  inevitable  decrees  of  progress,  he  would  have  done  incalcu- 
lable good;  but  he  was  a genuine  Indian,  whose  hatred  of  the  pale-faced 
invaders  was  the  ruling  passion  of  his  life.  It  is  said  that  Tecumseh  made 
Pontiac  his  model,  but,  if  so,  he  far  surpassed  his  teacher  in  all  that  com- 
pels the  admiration  and  respect  of  mankind.  The  halo  that  still  lingers 


TECUMSEH  AS  A YOUNG  WARRIOR. 


1/9 


around  his  name  is  shown  in  the  number  of  towns  christened  in  his  honor, 
while,  as  everyone  knows,  the  late  General  of  the  United  States  Army  was 
named  for  the  illustrious  Shawanoe  chieftain.  At  the  meeting  of  the  Re- 
publican National  Committee  in  Washington,  November  23,  1891,  to  select 
a city  in  which  to  hold  the  presidential  convention,  President  Palmer,  of 
the  World’s  Fair  Commission,  gave,  in  an  eloquent  plea  for  the  selection  of 
Detroit,  the  promise  to  take  the  visitors  thirty  miles  over  into  Canada  to 


AT  THE  BATTLE  OF  FALLEN  TIMBERS. 


view  the  spot  where  Tecumseh,  “ the  greatest  Indian  the  American  con- 
tinent ever  knew,”  was  slain. 

Tecumseh  took  a leading  part  in  the  battle  of  the  Fallen  Timbers, 
where  the  combined  tribes  received  such  a disastrous  blow  from  General 
Wayne  in  1794.  Although  but  a young  warrior,  he  was  a powerful 
leader  from  the  first,  exposing  himsel-f  with  a recklessness  and  intrepidity 
which,  had  it  been  equaled  by  the  others,  might  have  turned  the  tide  of 
battle. 

At  the  opening  of  the  conflict,  Tecumseh  held  an  advanced  position, 
and,  in  the  flurry  of  the  moment,  dropped  a bullet  into  his  rifle  before  the 
powder.  This  rendered  the  weapon  useless,  and  just  then  the  Kentuck- 


i8o 


u A BIG  BABY!  WON’T  HURT  YOU  ! ” 


ians  pressed  the  Indians  so  hard  that  he  was  forced  back  with  the  rest  of 
his  warriors,  until  they  met  another  detachment  of  Indians.  Tecumseh 
urged  all  to  stand  fast  and  fight,  calling  out  that,  if  anyone  would  lend 
him  a gun,  he  would  show  how  to  use  it.  A fowling  piece  was  handed  to 
him,  which  he  loaded  and  fired  with  great  rapidity  and  effect,  until,  left 
almost  alone,  he  was  compelled  to  fall  back  again  with  his  savages,  for,  as 
has  been  shown,  the  onset  of  Wayne’s  men  was  irresistible. 

Meeting  another  party  of  Shawanoes,  Tecumseh  rallied  them,  despite 
the  fact  that  the  Americans  were  pressing  them  on  all  sides,  and  made  a 
stand  in  a thicket.  Only  when  destruction  was  inevitable  did  he  permit 
his  men  to  retreat  and  join  the  main  body  of  the  enemy  below  the  rapids 
of  the  Maumee. 

When  the  treaty  of  Greenville  was  made,  Tecumseh  absented  himself. 
He  was  too  proud  to  submit  to  such  humiliation.  At  that  time  he  was 
living  on  Buck  Creek,  near  where  Urbana  has  since  been  erected.  Some 
years  later,  on  the  invitation  of  the  Delawares,  he  moved  into  their  terri- 
tory, settling  on  White  River,  in  Indiana.  He  conducted  himself  like  an 
ordinary  warrior,  hunting,  fishing,  and  visiting  his  people.  Despite  the 
comparative  quiescence  of  his  life,  his  influence  rapidly  extended  among 
the  Indians,  for  all  instinctively  saw  in  him  true  genius  and  power. 
Although  he  took  no  part  in  the  treaty  of  Greenville,  he  was  so  conscien- 
tiously exact  in  observing  its  conditions  that  the  whites  yielded  him  full 
confidence  and  respect. 

A characteristic  anecdote  is  told  of  Tecumseh,  while  he  and  a party  of 
Indians  were  on  a visit  to  Ohio,  in  1803.  A corpulent  Kentuckian  was  in 
the  territory  at  the  time,  whither  he  went  for  the  purpose  of  exploring 
lands  on  Mad  River.  He  lodged  one  night  at  the  house  of  Captain 
Barrett.  He  was  greatly  frightened  that  evening  on  learning  that  a party 
of  Indians  were  encamped  in  the  neighborhood. 

While  the  conversation  was  going  on,  the  door  opened  and  Tecumseh 
stalked  in  with  his  dignified  manner.  He  saluted  Captain  Barrett,  and 
then,  observing  the  agitated  visitor,  contemplated  him  scornfully  for  a 
minute  or  two  and  said  to  the  host,  pointing  to  the  scared  fellow  : “A  big 
baby!  A big  baby!”  He  stepped  across  the  room  and,  patting  the  Ken- 
tuckian on  the  shoulder,  repeated  the  contemptuous  remark  : “ A big  baby  ! 
Won’t  hurt  you  ! ” 

It  was  about  this  period  that  the  brother  of  Tecumseh,  generally 
known  as  The  Prophet,  because  of  his  religious  pretensions,  began  to 
acquire  a great  influence  over  the  tribes  in  that  region.  Tecumseh  was 
angered  against  the  whites,  because  of  the  purchase  from  the  Delawares, 
Miamis,  and  Pottawatomies,  of  a large  tract  of  land  in  Indiana.  The 
Prophet  gathered  a thousand  warriors  from  the  Shawanoes,  Delawares, 


TECUMSEli’S  PECULIAR  VIEWS. 


1 8 1 


Wyandots,  Pottavvatomies,  Ottawas,  Kickapoos,  Chippewas,  and  other 
tribes,  and,  entering  the  ceded  territory,  refused  to  give  it  up  or  to  leave. 
So  cunning  was  The  Prophet  that,  for  several  years,  it  was  uncertain 
whether  he  was  trying  to  combine  the  red  men  against  the  whites,  or 
whether  he  was  actuated  simply  by  a religious  craze  similar  to  that  which 
lately  turned  things  topsy  turvy  among  the  Sioux  and  other  Western 
tribes.  But,  finally,  it  became  evident  that  a master  mind  was  behind  the 
scenes  directing  the  combinations  : that  master  mind  was  Tecumseh. 

This  chieftain’s  position  was  that  the  Great  Spirit  had  given  the  land 
to  all  the  Indians,  and  no  tribe  could  sell  any  portion  without  the  consent  of 


THE  FRIGHTENED  KENTUCKIAN. 


all  the  tribes.  This  not  having  been  obtained  in  the  case  mentioned, 
Tecumseh  insisted  that  the  sale  was  not  valid  and  the  Indians  should  not 
assent  to  it. 

The  vast  territory  of  Indiana,  as  it  was  then  known,  was  under  the 
governorship  of  General  William  Henry  Harrison,  afterward  President  of 
the  United  States  and  grandfather  of  the  President  elected  in  1888.  In 
August,  1810,  Tecumseh  descended  the  Wabash  for  the  purpose  of  holding 
a council  with  General  Harrison,  whose  headquarters  were  at  Vincennes. 
He  was  accompanied  by  four  hundred  warriors. 

Governor  Harrison,  appreciating  the  character  and  influence  of  his 


1 82  CONFERENCE  BETWEEN  GEN.  HARRISON  AND  TECUMSEH. 

visitor,  arranged  to  hold  the  conference  on  the  portico  of  his  own  house. 
There,  on  the  morning  of  August  15,  he  awaited  the  coming  of  the  chief 
and  his  delegation.  The  governor  was  attended  by  the  Judges  of  the 
Supreme  Court,  several  army  officers,  a sergeant  and  twelve  men  from  Fort 
Knox,  and  a large  number  of  citizens. 

At  the  hour  fixed,  Tecumseh  came,  supported  by  forty  of  his  warriors, 
the  rest  being  encamped  a short  distance  away.  When  about  a hundred 
feet  distant,  Tecumseh  stopped  and  looked  inquiringly  at  the  throng  on 
the  portico.  Harrison  sent  an  interpreter  to  inquire  what  was  the  matter, 
and  invited  the  Indians  to  join  him.  Tecumseh  replied  that  the  porch  of  a 
house  was  not  a suitable  place  to  hold  the  conference,  which  should  be  in  a 
grove  of  trees,  pointing  at  the  same  time  to  one  near  the  house.  The  gov 
ernor  assented,  and  the  seats  and  chairs  were  removed  thither,  the  Indians 
seating  themselves  on  the  ground. 

The  conference  was  opened  by  Tecumseh,  who  stated  his  position  on 
the  irritating  question  between  the  whites  and  his  race.  Referring  to  the 
treaty  made  by  Harrison  at  Fort  Wayne  the  previous  year,  he  boldly 
declared  that  he  was  determined  to  fight  against  the  cession  of  lands  by  the 
Indians  unless  assented  to  by  all  the  tribes.  He  admitted  that  he  had 
threatened  to  kill  the  chiefs  who  signed  the  Fort  Wayne  treaty,  and  fur- 
thermore, he  did  not  intend  to  let  the  village  chiefs  manage  their  affairs 
longer,  but  would  place  the  power  heretofore  invested  in  them  in  the  hands 
of  the  war  chiefs.  The  Americans  had  driven  the  Indians  from  the  sea 
coast,  and  would  soon  drive  them  into  the  lakes ; and  while  he  disowned 
any  intention  of  making  war  upon  the  United  States,  he  asserted  in  the 
most  emphatic  language,  that  he  would  oppose  any  further  intrusion  of  the 
whites  upon  their  lands.  He  made  a summary  of  the  wrongs  his  people 
had  suffered  from  the  close  of  the  Revolution  to  that  day.  It  was  plain 
that  this  appeal  “ struck  fire  ” in  the  hearts  of  his  own  people,  who  would 
have  followed  his  commands  to  the  death. 

Having  finished  his  speech,  Tecumseh  turned  to  seat  himself,  when  he 
observed  that  no  chair  had  been  provided  for  him.  Governor  Harrison  im- 
mediately ordered  one,  and,  as  the  interpreter  handed  it  to  him,  he  said, 
“ Your  father  requests  you  to  take  a chair.” 

“ My  father?”  said  Tecumseh,  with  great  dignity;  “the  sun  is  my 
father  and  the  earth  is  my  mother,  and  I will  rest  on  her  bosom.” 

He  then  seated  himself  among  his  warriors  on  the  ground. 

Replying  to  this  address,  Governor  Harrison  declared  that  the  Indians 
were  not  one  nation,  having  a common  property  in  the  land.  The  Miamis 
were  the  real  owners  of  the  tract  on  the  Wabash,  ceded  by  the  late  treaty, 
and  the  Shawanoes  had  no  business  to  interfere,  since,  on  the  arrival  of  the 
whites  in  this  country,  they  had  found  the  Miamis  in  possession  of  the 


A CRITICAL  MOMENT. 


183 


land,  the  Shawanoes  at  that  time  being  residents  of  Georgia,  from  which 
they  had  been  driven  by  the  Creeks.  It  was  absurd  to  contend  that  the 
Indians  constituted  one  nation,  for  had  such  been  the  will  of  the  Great 
Spirit,  he  would  not  have  put  different  tongues  in  their  head. 

The  interpretation  of  this  speech  to  Tecumseh  threw  him  into  a tower- 
ing passion.  He  sprang  to  his  feet,  and  began  declaiming  with  great  vehe- 
mence, but  as  the  governor  did  not  understand  his  language,  he  looked 
toward  a friendly  Indian  lying  on  the  grass  near  him.  He  saw  him  stealthily 


“the  sun  is  my  father,  and  the  earth  is  my  mother,  AND  I WILL 
REST  ON  HER  BOSOM.” 


renewing  the  priming  of  his  pistol,  which  he  had  kept  hidden  from  the 
other  Indians,  though  in  full  view  of  the  governor. 

Harrison’s  attention  was  brought  back  to  Tecumseh  by  hearing  Gen- 
eral Gibson,  who  understood  the  Shawanoe  tongue,  say  : “ Those  fellows 
intend  mischief ; you  had  better  bring  up  the  guard.”  At  the  same  in- 
stant, the  whole  forty  warriors  grasped  their  tomahawks,  leaped  to  their 
feet,  and  glowered  threateningly  on  the  governor.  The  latter  also  sprang 
up,  and,  drawing  his  sword,  stood  on  the  defensive,  expecting  an  instant 
attack.  Captain  Floyd,  standing  near,  drew  a dirk,  and  the  friendly  Indian 
cocked  his  pistol.  The  citizens  caught  up  clubs,  brickbats,  and  anything  on 
which  they  could  lay  hands.  One  of  them,  a minister,  ran  to  the  governor’s 


FURTHER  NEGOTIATIONS. 


184 

house,  seized  a gun  and  stationed  himself  at  the  door  to  defend  the  family. 
Only  a spark  was  needed  to  fire  the  magazine. 

Turning  to  the  interpreter,  Governor  Harrison  demanded  to  know 
what  Tecumseh  meant  by  his  action.  The  reply  was  that  the  chieftain 
asserted  that  all  that  the  governor  said  was  false,  and  the  Seventeen  Fires 
(the  number  of  States  then  composing  the  Union)  had  cheated  and  imposed 
upon  the  Indians. 

Governor  Harrison  then  told  Tecumseh  that  he  was  a bad  man  and  he 
would  have  nothing  further  to  do  with  him.  Inasmuch  as  he  had  come  to 
Vincennes  under  the  protection  of  a council  fire,  he  could  go  away  in 
safety,  but  he  must  immediately  leave  the  village.  Tecumseh  and  his 
escort  sullenly  withdrew,  and  the  council  terminated  for  the  time. 

That  night,  two  companies  of  militia  were  brought  into  the  town,  and 
the  one  belonging  there  was  also  embodied.  The  following  morning, 
Tecumseh  sent  an  apology  to  the  governor  for  his  hasty  action.  He  dis- 
claimed any  intention  of  attacking  him  and  said  he  had  followed  the  advice 
of  some  white  men.  He  begged  the  opportunity  of  another  interview  that 
he  might  make  full  explanation.  The  governor  consented,  it  being  under- 
stood that  each  party  should  have  the  same  armed  force  as  on  the 
previous  day. 

Tecumseh  comported  himself  with  dignity  and  courtesy.  Repeating 
his  declaration  that  he  had  had  no  thoughts  of  attacking  the  executive,  he 
said  that  two  white  men  had  told  him  that  one-half  of  the  citizens  were  op- 
posed to  him,  and  were  willing  to  restore  the  land  in  dispute.  They  said 
further,  that  the  governor  would  soon  be  out  of  office,  and  a good  man 
would  be  sent  to  take  his  place,  who  would  see  that  the  land  was  restored 
to  the  Indians. 

Governor  Harrison  asked  Tecumseh  whether  he  would  oppose  the  sur- 
vey of  the  lands.  He  replied  that  nothing  could  shake  the  determination 
of  himself  and  followers  to  insist  on  the  old  boundary.  When  he  sat  down, 
his  leading  chiefs  followed  with  the  declaration  that  the  Wyandots,  Kicka- 
poos,'Pottawatomies,  Ottawas,  and  Winnebagoes  had  entered  the  Shawanoe 
league  and  would  stand  by  Tecumseh  to  the  end.  Harrison  said  he  would 
make  known  this  decision  to  the  President,  but  he  was  certain  that  the 
claim  of  Tecumseh  would  never  be  acknowledged  ; that  since  the  disputed 
land  had  been  lawfully  bought  from  the  Miamis,  who  occupied  it  when  the 
whites  first  came  to  America,  they  would  be  regarded  as  the  only  ones  com- 
petent to  treat  with  the  United  States  in  the  matter. 

On  the  following  day,  the  governor  visited  Tecumseh  in  his  camp  and 
the  two  had  a long  talk.  The  chieftain  repeated  his  sentiments,  uttered 
during  the  council.  He  viewed  the  policy  of  the  United  States,  in  purchas- 
ing lands  from  the  Indians,  as  a mighty  flood  which,  unless  checked,  would 


A PLEDGE  THAT  WAS  NEVER  BROKEN. 


185 


drown  all  his  people.  The  confederacy  which  he  had  formed  to  prevent 
such  sales,  without  the  consent  of  all  the  tribes,  was  the  dam  he  was  build- 
ing to  resist  the  flood.  He  added  that  he  should  be  reluctant  to  enter  a 
war  against  the  United  States;  that,  if  the  governor  would  persuade  the 
President  to  give  up  the  lands  lately  bought  and  agree  to  make  no  more 
treaties  without  the  consent  of  the  tribes,  he  would  be  their  faithful  ally 
and  give  all  his  aid  in  the  war  which  he  knew  would  soon  break  out 
beween  the  U nited  States  and  Great  Britain.  If  this  was  not  done,  he  would 
be  compelled  to  unite  with  the  British. 

The  governor  replied  that  he  would  make  known  his  views  to  the 
President,  but  there  was  no  hope  of  their  being  agreed  to. 

“ Well,”  said  Tecumseh,  “ as  the  Great  Chief  is  to  settle  the  matter,  I 
hope  the  Great  Spirit  will  put  enough  sense  into  his  head  to  cause  him  to 
give  up  the  land.  It  is  true,  he  is  so  far  off  that  he  will  not  be  hurt  by  the 
war.  He  can  sit  down  and  drink  his  wine,  while  you  and  I will  have  to 
fight  it  out.” 

As  the  governor  was  about  to  leave,  he  proposed  to  Tecumseh  that  in 
the  event  of  war  between  the  Indians  and  the  United  States,  he  would  use 
his  influence  to  put  an  end  to  the  cruel  mode  of  warfare  which  the  Indians 
were  accustomed  to  wage  upon  prisoners  and  women  and  children.  Tecum- 
seh listened  with  the  grave  courtesy  which  always  marked  his  conduct  and 
assured  General  Harrison  that  he  would  do  as  he  requested.  To  his  ever- 
lasting credit  be  it  recorded  that  he  never  broke  the  pledge. 


CHAPTER  XXIV. 


TECUMSEH  TAKES  THE  WARPATH — ADDRESS  OF  GOVERNOR  HARRISON — 
REPLY  OF  THE  SHAWANOE  CHIEFTAIN — THE  BATTLE  OF  TIPPECANOE 
— DEFEAT  OF  THE  SHAWANOES — COLONEL  DUDLEY’S  REPULSE — 
TECUMSEH’S  REPROOF  OF  GENERAL  PROCTOR — THE  BATTLE  OF  THE 
THAMES — DEATH  OF  TECUMSEH. 

TECUMSEH  must  have  known  that  his  demands  would  never  be  ac- 
ceded to  by  the  United  States,  for  from  this  time  forward  the  atti- 
tude of  himself  and  brother  became  distinctively  hostile.  The  great  war- 
belt  was  sent  around  to  the  neighboring  tribes,  who  were  invited  to  join  in 
a confederacy  to  “ confine  the  great  water”  and  prevent  it  from  overflowing 
them.  The  matchless  eloquence  and  sagacity  of  Tecumseh  brought  most 
of  the  tribes  into  the  alliance. 

Seeing  the  storm  gathering,  Governor  Harrison  obtained  from  the 
government  a military  force  with  which  to  meet  the  emergency.  Before 
taking  any  active  step,  he  sent  to  Tecumseh  and  The  Prophet  an  address, 
or  speech.  This  was  in  the  latter  part  of  June,  1 8 1 1 , when  a large  body  of 
the  Indians  were  gathered  at  Tippecanoe.  Here  is  the  speech  in  full : 

“ Brothers,  listen  to  me.  I speak  to  you  about  matters  of  importance, 
both  to  white  people  and  yourselves  ; open  your  ears,  therefore,  and  attend 
to  what  I shall  say. 

“Brothers,  this  is  the  third  year  that  all  the  white  people  in  this  coun- 
try have  been  alarmed  at  your  proceedings ; you  threaten  us  with  war;  you 
invite  all  the  tribes  of  the  north  and  west  of  you  to  join  against  us. 

“ Brothers,  your  warriors,  who  have  lately  been  here,  deny  this ; but  I 
have  received  the  information  from  every  direction;  the  tribes  on  the 
Mississippi  have  sent  me  word  that  you  intended  to  murder  me  and  then 
commence  a war  upon  our  people.  I have  also  received  the  speech  you 
sent  to  the  Pottawatomies  and  others,  to  join  you  for  that  purpose;  but  if 
I had  no  other  evidence  of  your  hostility  to  us,  your  seizing  the  salt  I lately 
sent  up  the  Wabash  is  sufficient. 

“ Brothers,  our  citizens  are  alarmed,  and  my  warriors  are  preparing 
themselves;  not  to  strike  you,  but  to  defend  themselves  and  their  women 
and  children,  ^ou  shall  not  surprise  us,  as  you  expect  to  do  ; you  are  about 
to  undertake  a very  rash  act;  a little  reflection  may  save  us  a great  deal  of 
trouble,  and  prevent  much  mischief ; it  is  not  yet  too  late. 

“ Brothers,  what  can  be  the  inducement  for  you  to  undertake  an  enter- 

186 


ADDRESS  OF  GENERAL  HARRISON. 


87 


prise,  when  there  is  so  little  probability  of  success?  Do  you  really  think 
that  the  handful  of  men  that  you  have  about  you  are  able  to  contend  with 
the  Seventeen  Fires,  or  even  that  the  whole  of  the  tribes  united  could  con- 
tend against  the  Kentucky  Fire  alone? 

“Brothers,  I am  myself  of  the  long-knife  fire;  as  soon  as  they  hear  my 
voice,  you  will  see  them  pouring  forth  their  swarms  of  hunting-shirt  men, 
as  numerous  as  the  mosquitoes  on  the  shores  of  the  Wabash.  Brothers, 
take  care  of  their  stings. 

“Brothers,  it  is  not  our  wish  to  hurt  you  ; if  we  did,  we  certainly  have 
power  to  do  it.  Look  at  the  number  of  warriors  to  the  east  of  you,  above 
and  below  the  Great  Miami  to  the  south,  on  both  sides  of  the  Ohio,  and 
below  you  also.  You  are  brave  men  ; but  what  could  you  do  against  such 
a multitude?  But  we  wish  you  to  live  in  peace  and  happiness. 

“Brothers,  the  citizens  of  this  country  are  alarmed;  they  must  be 
satisfied  that  you  have  no  design  to  do  them  mischief,  or  they  will  not  lay 
aside  their  arms.  You  have  also  insulted  the  government  of  the  United 
States,  by  seizing  the  salt  that  was  intended  for  other  tribes ; satisfaction 
must  be  given  for  that  also. 

“ Brothers,  you  talk  of  coming  to  see  me,  attended  by  all  your  men  ; 
this,  however,  must  not  be  so.  If  your  intentions  are  good,  you  have  no 
need  to  bring  but  a few  of  your  young  men  with  you.  I must  be  plain  with 
you  : I will  not  suffer  you  to  come  into  our  settlements  with  such  a force. 

“ Brothers,  if  you  wish  to  satisfy  us  that  your  intentions  are  good,  fol- 
low the  advice  that  I have  given  you  before ; that  is,  that  one  or  both  of 
you  should  visit  the  President  of  the  United  States,  and  lay  your  grievances 
before  him.  He  will  treat  you  well,  will  listen  to  what  you  say,  and,  if  you 
can  show  that  you  have  been  injured,  you  will  receive  justice.  If  you  will 
follow  my  advice  in  this  respect,  it  will  convince  the  citizens  of  this  country, 
and  myself,  that  you  have  no  design  to  attack  them. 

“ Brothers,  with  respect  to  the  lands  that  were  purchased  last  fall,  I can 
enter  into  no  negotiations  with  you  on  that  subject  ; the  affair  is  in  the 
hands  of  the  President ; if  you  wish  to  go  and  see  him,  I will  supply  you 
with  the  means. 

“ Brothers,  the  person  who  delivers  this  is  one  of  my  war  officers.  He 
is  a man  in  whom  I have  entire  confidence.  Whatever  he  says  to  you, 
although  it  may  not  be  contained  in  this  paper,  you  may  believe  comes 
from  me. 

“ My  friend  Tecumseh,  the  bearer  is  a good  and  brave  warrior.  I hope 
you  will  treat  him  well.  You  are  yourself  a warrior,  and  all  such  should 
have  esteem  for  each  other.” 

Tecumseh  returned  this  reply  : 

“ Brother,  I give  you  a few  words  till  I will  be  with  you  myself. 


1 88 


tecumseh’s  reply  and  journey  southward. 


“ Brother,  at  Vincennes,  I wish  you  to  listen  to  me  while  I send 
you  a few  words,  and  I hope  they  will  ease  your  heart  ; I know  you 
look  on  your  young  men,  and  young  women,  and  children,  with  pity,  to 
see  them  so  much  alarmed. 

“ Brother,  I wish  you  now  to  examine  what  you  have  from  me;  I hope 
that  it  will  be  a satisfaction  to  you,  if  your  intentions  are  like  mine,  to  wash 
away  all  these  bad  stories  that  have  been  circulated.  I will  be  with  you 
myself  in  eighteen  days  from  this  day. 

“ Brother,  we  cannot  say  what  will  become  of  us,  as  the  Great  Spirit 
has  the  management  of  us  at  his  will.  I may  be  there  before  the  time, 
and  may  not  be  there  till  the  day.  I hope  that  when  we  come  to- 
gether, all  these  bad  tales  will  be  settled  ; by  this  I hope  your  young 
men,  women,  and  children,  will  be  easy.  I wish  you,  brother,  to  let 
them  know  when  I come  to  Vincennes  and  see  you,  all  will  be  settled  in 
peace  and  happiness. 

“ Brother,  these  are  only  a few  words,  to  let  you  know  I will  be  with 
you  myself,  and  when  I am  with  you  I can  inform  you  better. 

“ Brother,  if  I find  I can  be  with  you  in  less  time  than  eighteen 
days,  I will  send  one  of  my  young  men  before  me,  to  let  you  know 
what  time  I will  be  with  you.” 

In  July,  another  council  was  held  with  Tecumseh,  but  nothing  was 
accomplished.  The  chasm  could  not  be  bridged,  since  neither  of  the  parties 
concerned  would  yield  a point.  War  must  come. 

At  the  close  of  the  council,  Tecumseh  went  south,  where  he  visited  the 
Creeks,  Choctaws,  Seminoles,  and  other  tribes.  His  success  was  marvel- 
ous. There  seemed  no  resisting  his  persuasive  eloquence.  In  most  in- 
stances, the  determination  was  unanimous  to  dig  up  the  hatchet  whenever 
he  called  them.  One  of  the  most  extraordinary  incidents,  and  which  is  be- 
yond explanation,  except  on  the  ground  of  almost  miraculous  coincidence, 
is  the  following  : 

At  a Creek  town,  Tecumseh  called  upon  Big  Warrior,  a famous  chief, 
made  his  war  speech,  presented  a bundle  of  wampum  and  a hatchet.  Big 
Warrior  accepted  them,  but  Tecumseh  read  the  timidity  of  the  chief  in 
his  face  and  manner.  Fixing  his  blazing  eyes  upon  him,  the  Shawanoe 
pointed  his  finger  and  said:  “Your  blood  is  white ; you  have  taken  my 
talk,  and  the  wampum  and  the  hatchet,  but  you  do  not  mean  to  fight ; I 
know  the  reason  ; you  do  not  believe  the  Great  Spirit  has  sent  me  ; you 
shall  know.  From  here  I shall  go  straight  to  Detroit;  when  I arrive  there 
I shall  stamp  the  ground  with  my  foot,  and  shake  down  every  house  in  this 
village.” 

This  was  a wild  threat,  and  Big  Warrior  was  dumfounded.  He  and 
his  people  were  superstitious  and  began  to  dread  Tecumseh’s  arrival  at 


A MARVELOUS  OCCURRENCE. 


89 


Detroit.  They  often  met,  talked  over  the  strange  affair,  and  carefully 
estimated  the  time  it  would  take  Tecumseh  to  reach  the  town.  Finally, 
the  morning  of  the  day  fixed  upon  arrived. 

An  awful  rumbling  of  the  ground  was  heard  ; the  earth  began  to  shake 
and  down  came  the  flimsy  lodges.  The  frantic  Indians  ran  to  and  fro 


“TECUMSEH  HAS  GOT  TO  DETROIT!” 


shouting:  “ Tecumseh  has  got  to  Detroit  ! ” The  threat  had  been  fulfilled 
and  the  warriors  no  longer  hesitated  to  go  to  war  with  the  great  leader. 

All  this  was  produced  by  the  historical  earthquake  of  New  Madrid,  on 
the  Mississippi.  The  unaccountable  fact  is  that  it  occurred  on  the  very 
day  that  Tecumseh  reached  Detroit  and  in  exact  fulfillment  of  his  threat. 

While  the  Shawnanoe  was  in  the  south,  the  Indians  were  so  warlike 
and  aggressive  that  Governor  Harrison  determined  to  penetrate  The 
Prophet’s  town,  and,  if  possible,  make  a last  attempt  to  settle  the  diffi- 
culties. At  the  head  of  nine  hundred  troops,  he  encamped  on  the  6th  of 
November,  1811,  within  a mile  of  The  Prophet’s  headquarters.  In  the 
communications  which  followed,  The  Prophet  repeated  his  good  intentions 
and  his  willingness  to  adjust  all  quarrels.  Harrison,  however,  was  too 
prudent  to  rely  upon  this  promise,  or  to  be  deluded  into  a belief  that  no 
danger  threatened. 


TECUMSEH  JOINS  THE  BRITISH. 


190 

It  was  well  he  did  so,  for  at  four  o’clock  the  Indians,  to  the  number  of 
one  thousand,  furiously  attacked  him.  The  fight  was  desperate.  During 
its  continuance  The  Prophet  kept  busy  performing  his  conjurations  upon 
an  eminence  near  by,  but  far  enough  removed  to  be  beyond  danger.  The 
Americans  had  sixty-two  killed  and  one  hundred  and  twenty-six  wounded, 
but  the  Indians  were  utterly  routed. 

This  defeat  ended  The  Prophet’s  influence.  He  had  persuaded  the 
warriors  into  the  belief  that  nothing  could  prevent  their  victory,  and  they 
were  so  enraged  over  the  deception  that  some  of  them  wanted  to  put  him 
to  death.  As  it  was,  they  bound  him  with  cords,  refusing  to  receive  any 
explanation,  and  retreated  twenty  miles  and  encamped  on  Wild  Cat  Creek. 

Tecumseh  came  back  from  the  south  through  Missouri,  visiting  the 
tribes  on  the  Des  Moines,  and,  crossing  the  headwaters  of  the  Illinois, 
arrived  at  the  Wabash  a few  days  after  the  defeat  at  Tippecanoe.  He 
was  exasperated,  for  the  battle  had  been  fought  in  opposition  to  his  wishes, 
and  he  saw  its  disastrous  effect  upon  the  great  scheme  which  had  engaged 
his  energies  so  long.  He  bitterly  reproached  his  brother,  and  was  so 
vrrathful,  indeed,  that  he  seized  him  by  the  hair  and  almost  shook  the  life 
out  of  him. 

Tecumseh  continued  to  protest  that  he  was  in  favor  of  peace,  saying 
that,  had  he  not  been  away  from  home,  the  lamentable  affair  at  Tippecanoe 
never  would  have  taken  place ; but,  with  these  professions  on  his  lips,  he 
went  to  Malden  and  enlisted  under  the  British  standard.  He  was  there 
when,  on  the  1 8th  of  June,  1812,  Congress  made  a formal  declaration  of 
war  against  Great  Britain.  Some  of  the  neighboring  tribes  were  inclined 
to  remain  neutral  and  invited  Tecumseh  to  a conference. 

“ No,”  he  replied  indignantly,  “I  have  taken  sides  with  the  king,  my 
father,  and  my  bones  shall  bleach  on  this  shore  before  I recross  the  stream,” 
pointing  to  the  Detroit  River,  “to  join  in  any  council  of  neutrality.” 

Tippecanoe,  however,  had  broken  his  power.  All  his  plans  were  over- 
turned, and  the  dream  of  a grand  confederacy  of  his  race  had  passed  away 
forever.  But  the  great  man  was  fighting  for  a principle,  and  was  ready  to 
give  his  life  for  it  at  any  time. 

Tecumseh,  at  the  head  of  his  Indians,  crossed  the  river  to  Brownstown, 
where,  on  the  5th  of  August,  he  attacked  a small  detachment  of  troops 
under  Major  Van  Horne.  The  latter  was  driven  back  with  a loss  of  seven- 
teen killed  and  several  wounded.  The  Indians  probably  lost  as  many,  but 
they  prevented  Major  Van  Horne  from  joining  the  troops  under  Captain 
Brush  on  the  Raisin. 

General  Hull  withdrew  from  Canada  and  took  position  at  Detroit, 
from  which  post  he  made  another  attempt  to  open  communication  with 
Captain  Brush.  He  detached  Colonel  Miller,  with  Majors  Van  Horne  and 


DEFEAT  OF  THE  BRITISH  AND  INDIANS. 


191 

Morrison,  and  six  hundred  troops,  including  several  artillerists,  with  a six- 
pounder  and  howitzer.  This  detachment  left  Detroit  on  the  8th,  and  on 
the  afternoon  of  the  following  day  the  front  guard,  under  Captain  Snelling, 
was  fired  upon  by  a line  of  British  and  Indians,  about  two  miles  below  the 
village  of  Maguaga.  When  the  attack  was  made  the  main  body  was 
moving  in  two  lines.  Captain  Snelling  bravely  held  his  position  till  the 
line  was  formed  and  marched  to  the  ground  he  occupied,  where  the  whole 
body,  excepting  the  rear  guard,  was  brought  into  action.  The  British  had 
entrenched  themselves  behind  a breastwork  of  logs,  while  the  Indians,  on 
the  left,  were  protected  by  a thick  wood.  The  American  line  advanced. 


HE  SEIZED  HIM  BY  THE  HAIR  AND  ALMOST  SHOOK  THE 
LIFE  OUT  OF  HIM. 


fired  upon  the  enemy,  and  followed  it  up  with  a bayonet  charge,  when  the 
British  and  Indians  broke  and  fled. 

A vigorous  pursuit  was  kept  up  for  nearly  two  miles.  The  Indians  on 
the  left  were  under  the  command  of  Tecumseh,  who  fought  with  his  usual 
gallantry,  but  was  obliged  to  retreat.  Forty  of  them  were  left  dead  on  the 
field,  and  fifteen  of  the  British  regulars  were  killed  and  wounded  and  four 
taken  prisoners.  The  American  loss  was  ten  killed  and  thirty-two  wounded 
of  the  regular  troops,  and  eight  killed  and  twenty-eight  wounded  of  the 
Ohio  and  Michigan  militia.  Tecumseh  was  among  the  wounded. 

As  is  well  known,  General  Hull  made  a cowardly  surrender  of  Detroit, 
some  of  his  officers  being  so  angry  at  his  course  that  they  broke  their 


1 92 


EXPOSURE  OF  THE  NORTHWESTERN  FRONTIER. 


swords  and  denounced  him.  He  was  courtmartialed  and  sentenced  to  be 
shot,  but  was  pardoned  because  of  his  services  during  the  Revolution.  He 
was  an  old  man  at  the  time,  and,  as  many  of  his  relatives  were  in  Detroit, 
was  afraid  they  would  be  massacred  if  he  persisted  in  the  defense  of  the 
place. 

At  the  time  of  the  surrender  Tecumseh  was  at  the  head  of  the  Indians. 
It  is  said  that  before  General  Brock  crossed  over  to  Detroit  he  asked  the 
Shawanoe  what  sort  of  a country  he  had  to  pass  through.  Tecumseh  took 
a roll  of  elm  bark,  and,  flattening  it  on  the  ground,  drew  his  hunting  knife 
and  etched  upon  the  bark  a plan  of  the  section,  showing  its  hills,  rivers, 
woods,  morasses,  and  roads.  General  Brock  was  so  pleased,  not  only  with 
this  work,  but  because  Tecumseh  had  induced  the  Indians  not  of  his  own 
immediate  party  to  cross  to  Detroit  before  the  embarkation  of  the  regulars 
and  militia,  that  he  publicly  took  off  his  sash  and  placed  it  around  the 
body  of  the  chief.  Tecumseh  thanked  him,  but  the  next  day  appeared 
without  the  ornament.  Fearing  that  something  had  displeased  him,  Gen- 
eral Brock  sent  the  interpreter  to  learn  the  explanation.  Tecumseh  replied 
that,  not  wishing  to  wear  such  a mark  of  distinction  when  an  older  and 
abler  warrior  was  present,  he  had  transferred  the  sash  to  Roundhead,  the 
Wyandot  chieftain. 

After  the  surrender,  General  Brock  asked  Tecumseh  not  to  allow  the 
Indians  to  abuse  the  prisoners.  “ Have  no  fear,”  he  replied  ; “ I despise 
them  too  much  to  meddle  with  them.” 

The  surrender  of  Detroit  exposed  the  whole  northwestern  frontier  to 
the  ravages  of  the  enemy.  Brock  was  killed  at  the  battle  of  Queenstown, 
and  the  command  of  the  British  army  devolved  upon  General  Proctor. 
He  had  under  him  a large  body  of  regular  troops,  with  all  the  Indians 
friendly  to  the  English  under  the  leadership  of  Tecumseh.  They  estab- 
lished their  headquarters  at  Malden  and  made  frequent  attacks  on  the 
frontier  settlements  of  Ohio  and  Indiana. 

Upon  the  opening  of  the  spring  of  1813,  the  British  forces  and  Indians, 
under  the  command  of  Proctor  and  Tecumseh,  invested  Fort  Meigs,  on  the 
Miami  of  the  Lakes.  There  were  fourteen  hundred  British  and  eighteen 
hundred  Indians,  opposed  to  which  were  twelve  hundred  troops  under 
General  Harrison.  The  enemy  opened  the  siege  on  the  28th  of  April,  but 
after  severe  fighting  were  compelled  to  retire,  without  success,  on  the  7th 
of  May.  It  is  conceded  that  the  Indians  under  Tecumseh  fought  with  the 
greatest  intrepidity  and  did  effective  service  against  the  Americans.  Te- 
cumseh did  not  believe,  from  the  first,  that  there  was  much  hope  of  suc- 
cess, but  once  entered  upon  the  scheme  he  threw  his  whole  ability  and 
energy  into  it. 

The  most  disastrous  affair  connected  with  the  attack  upon  Fort  Meigs 


YOU  ARE  NOT  FIT  TO  COMMAND — GO  HOME  AND  PUT  ON  PETTICOATS. 


A BURNING  REPROOF. 


*95 


was  the  capture  of  Colonel  Dudley  and  his  force.  He  had  been  sent  to 
the  opposite  side  of  the  river  to  seize  a battery  erected  by  the  enemy,  and 
to  spike  the  cannon.  They  gained  possession  of  the  battery,  but  before 
they  could  complete  their  work  the  enemy  rallied  in  overwhelming  numbers. 
Nearly  everyone  who  escaped  the  rifle  and  tomahawk  was  captured,  Dud- 
ley being  one  of  those  who  was  tomahawked  and  scalped. 

The  prisoners  were  taken  to  Proctor’s  headquarters  at  Fort  Miami. 
They  were  huddled  together  in  an  old  British  garrison,  with  the  Indians 
around  them,  selecting  such  as  their  fancy  dictated  and  visiting  frightful 
tortures  upon  them.  General  Proctor  made  no  attempt  to  restrain  them, 
but  was  looking  calmly  upon  the  horrible  work,  when  he  heard  a voice  in 
the  Indian  tongue  shouting  something  at  the  rear.  Turning  his  head  he 
saw  Tecumseh  dashing  forward  with  his  horse  on  a dead  run.  The  instant 
he  reached  the  spot  he  leaped  off,  and  seeing  two  Indians  in  the  act  of 
killing  an  American,  seized  one  by  the  throat  and  the  other  by  the  breast, 
and  hurled  them  to  the  ground.  Drawing  his  tomahawk  and  scalping 
knife  he  sprang  between  the  Americans  and  Indians,  and,  brandishing  the 
weapons  with  the  fury  of  a madman,  he  dared  anyone  of  the  terrified  war- 
riors to  lay  hand  on  another  prisoner.  His  consuming  wrath  cowed  all, 
and  they  slunk  away  from  him.  Turning  to  Proctor  he  demanded  why  he 
had  not  stopped  the  massacre. 

“ Sir,”  replied  the  British  general,  “your  Indians  cannot  be  restrained.” 

“ Begone  !”  thundered  Tecumseh;  “you  are  not  fit  to  command  ! go 
home,  and  put  on  petticoats  ! ” 

Another  instance  in  the  career  of  this  truly  great  man  is  given  by 
Drake.  Shortly  after  he  had  stopped  the  massacre  of  the  captives,  he 
noticed  a small  group  of  Indians  interested  in  something.  Colonel  Elliott 
said  to  him:  “Yonder  are  four  of  your  people,  who  have  been  taken 
prisoners;  you  may  do  what  you  please  with  them.” 

Tecumseh  walked  over  to  the  group,  and  found  four  Shawanoes,  who, 
while  fighting  on  the  side  of  the  Americans,  has  fallen  into  the  hands  of 
those  opposed  to  them.  “ Friends,”  said  Tecumseh,  “ Colonel  Elliott  has 
placed  you  under  my  charge  and  I will  send  you  back  to  your  nation,  with 
a talk  to  your  people.” 

Accordingly,  he  took  them  with  the  army  as  far  as  the  Raisin,  from 
which  point  their  return  home  would  be  less  dangerous,  and  then  sent  two 
of  his  warriors  to  accompany  them  with  a friendly  message  to  their  chiefs. 
They  were  thus  discharged,  under  their  parole  not  to  fight  against  the 
British  during  the  war. 

The  ill  success  which  attended  the  efforts  of  the  British  caused 
Tecumseh  not  only  to  lose  heart,  but  dissipated  what  little  faith  he  had 
felt  in  Proctor,  whom  he  had  never  fancied.  He  seriously  meditated  with- 


196 


tecumseh's  address  to  proctor. 


drawing  from  the  contest.  He  assembled  the  Shawanoes,  Wyandots,  and 
Ottawas  under  his  command,  and  made  known  his  feelings  to  them.  They 
agreed  with  him,  but  the  Sioux  and  Chippewas,  learning  his  intention, 
went  to  him,  and  insisted  that,  inasmuch  as  he  was  the  first  to  unite  with 
the  British,  and  had  been  the  means  of  bringing  in  the  others,  he  must  not 
leave  them.  Tecumseh  admitted  the  force  of  this  reasoning,  and  agreed 
to  stay.  Perceiving  indications  of  a retreat  from  Malden,  he  asked  what  it 
meant.  General  Proctor  told  him  that  he  only  intended  to  send  their 
valuable  property  up  the  Thames,  where  it  would  meet  re-enforcements  and 
be  safe.  Tecumseh  knew  this  was  false,  and  angrily  remonstrated  against 
a retreat.  His  appeal  not  being  heeded,  he  demanded,  in  the  name  of  the 
Indians  under  his  command,  to  be  heard  by  the  general.  On  the  1 8th  of 
September,  he  addressed  to  Proctor,  as  the  representative  of  their  great 
father,  the  king,  the  following  address : 

“ Father,  listen  to  your  children  ! you  now  have  them  all  before  you. 

“The  war  before  this,  our  British  father  gave  the  hatchet  to  his  red 
children,  when  our  old  chiefs  were  alive.  They  are  now  dead.  In  that 
war,  our  father  was  thrown  on  his  back  by  the  Americans;  and  our  father 
took  them  by  the  hand  without  our  knowledge  ; and  we  are  afraid  our 
father  will  do  so  again  at  this  time. 

“ Summer  before  last,  when  I came  forward  with  my  red  brethren, 
and  was  ready  to  take  up  the  hatchet,  we  were  told  not  to  be  in  a hurry, 
that  he  had  not  yet  determined  to  fight  the  Americans. 

“ Listen  ! when  war  was  declared,  our  father  stood  up  and  gave  us  the 
tomahawk,  and  told  us  that  he  was  then  ready  to  strike  the  Americans; 
that  he  wanted  our  assistance,  and  that  he  would  certainly  get  our  lands 
back,  which  the  Americans  had  taken  from  us. 

“ Listen  ! you  told  us  at  that  time  to  bring  forward  our  families  to 
this  place,  and  we  did  so  ; and  you  promised  to  take  care  of  them,  and  they 
should  want  for  nothing,  while  the  men  would  go  and  fight  the  enemy; 
that  we  need  not  trouble  ourselves  about  the  enemy’s  garrisons  ; that  we 
knew  nothing  about  them, and  that  our  father  would  attend  to  that  part  of 
the  business.  You  also  told  your  red  children  that  you  would  take  good 
care  of  your  garrison  here,  which  made  our  hearts  glad. 

“ Listen  ! when  we  were  last  at  the  Rapids,  it  is  true  we  gave  you  little 
assistance.  It  is  hard  to  fight  people  who  live  like  ground  hogs. 

“ Father,  listen  ! our  fleet  has  gone  out  ; we  know  they  have  fought ; 
we  have  heard  the  great  guns;  but  we  know  nothing  of  what  has  happened 
to  our  father  with  one  arm.  [Tecumseh  alluded  to  the  defeat  of  the  British 
fleet  on  Lake  Erie  by  Commodore  Perry.  Commodore  Barclay,  the 
English  commander,  had  but  one  arm.] 

“ Our  ships  have  gone  oneway,  and  we  are  much  astonished  to  see  our 


CONTINUED  RETREAT  OF  THE  BRITISH. 


19  7 


father  tying  up  everything  and  preparing  to  run  the  other  way,  without 
letting  his  red  children  know  what  his  intentions  are.  You  always  told  us 
to  remain  here  and  take  care  of  our  lands.  It  made  our  hearts  glad  to  hear 
that  was  your  wish.  Our  great  father,  the  king,  is  the  head  and  you 
represent  him.  You  always  told  us  you  would  never  draw  your  foot  off 
British  ground  ; but  now,  father,  we  see  that  you  are  drawing  back,  and  we 
are  sorry  to  see  our  father  doing  so  without  seeing  the  enemy.  We  must 
compare  our  father’s  conduct  to  a fat  dog  that  carries  his  tail  on  his  back, 
but  when  affrighted,  drops  it  between  his  legs  and  runs  off. 

“ Father,  listen  ! the  Americans  have  not  yet  defeated  us  by  land, 
neither  are  we  sure  that  they  have  done  so  by  water  ; we,  therefore,  wish 
to  remain  here  and  fight  our  enemy,  should  they  make  their  appearance. 
If  they  defeat  us,  we  will  then  retreat  with  our  father. 

“ At  the  battle  of  the  Rapids,  last  war,  the  Americans  certainly 
defeated  us;  and  when  we  returned  to  our  father’s  fort  at  that  place,  the 
gates  were  shut  against  us.  We  were  afraid  that  it  would  now  be  the 
case  ; but,  instead  of  that,  we  now  see  our  British  father  preparing  to  march 
out  of  his  garrison. 

“ Father,  you  have  got  the  arms  and  ammunition  which  our  great 
father  sent  for  his  red  children.  If  you  have  an  idea  of  going  away,  give 
them  to  us,  and  you  may  go  and  welcome,  for  us.  Our  lives  are  in  the 
hands  of  the  Great  Spirit.  We  are  determined  to  defend  our  lands,  and  if 
it  be  his  will,  we  wish  to  leave  our  bones  upon  them.” 

General  Proctor  disregarded  the  advice  of  Tecumseh,  and  thereby 
threw  away  his  only  chance  of  making  an  effective  stand  against  the 
American  army.  Had  he  attacked  General  Harrison  at  the  moment  of  his 
landing  on  the  Canadian  shore,  the  result  probably  would  have  been  far 
different  from  that  seen  shortly  afterward  on  the  banks  of  the  Thames. 

The  dissatisfaction  among  the  Indians  was  so  great  at  the  action  of 
Proctor,  that  a large  body  of  warriors  abandoned  him  and  crossed  the 
strait  to  the  American  shore.  Tecumseh  himself  was  so  embittered  at 
what  he  regarded  as  the  cowardice  of  the  commander  that  he,  too,  would 
have  gone,  but  for  the  protests  of  the  Sioux  and  Chippewas. 

The  retreat  continued  toward  the  Thames.  The  army  reached  Dal- 
son’s  farm  on  the  2d  of  October,  and  Proctor  and  Tecumseh,  with  a small 
escort,  returned  to  examine  the  ground  at  a place  called  Chatham.  It  was 
excellent,  and  Proctor  remarked  that  he  would  either  defeat  Harrison 
there,  or  leave  his  bones  on  the  spot.  Tecumseh  was  pleased  with  this 
kind  of  talk,  and  declared  that  a better  place  could  not  have  been  selected, 
and  he  was  right. 

General  Proctor,  however,  changed  his  mind,  and  leaving  Tecumseh 
with  his  Indians  to  defend  the  stream,  marched  with  his  main  body  to  the 


198 


THE  STAND  ON  THE  THAMES. 


Moravian  towns.  The  Shawanoe  arranged  his  forces  with  promptness  and 
judgment,  but  little  resistance  was  made  to  the  advance  of  the  Americans. 
He  did  not  mean  that  Proctor  should  escape  the  brunt  of  the  battle.  He 
came  up  with  him  at  the  Moravian  towns,  and  declared  he  would  retreat 
no  further.  The  ground  was  favorable,  and  Proctor  was  forced  to  make  a 
stand  by  Tecumseh. 

After  the  Indians  were  posted  in  the  swamp,  which  was  their  position 
during  the  battle,  their  leader  said  to  the  chiefs  who  surrounded  him  : 
“ Brother  warriors  ! we  are  now  about  to  enter  into  an  engagement  from 
which  I shall  never  come  out ; my  body  will  be  left  on  the  field  of  battle.” 

Unbuckling  his  sword,  he  handed  it  to  one  of  his  chiefs,  with  the  re- 
quest that  he  would  keep  it  until  Tecumseh’s  young  son  became  a noted 
warrior  and  able  to  wield  a sword,  when  it  was  to  be  given  to  him.  He 
next  laid  aside  his  British  military  dress  and  took  his  place  in  the  line, 
clothed  only  in  the  ordinary  deer-skin  hunting  shirt. 

The  British  troops,  amounting  to  about  nine  hundred,  were  posted  with 
their  left  upon  the  river,  which  was  unfordable  at  that  point;  their  right 
extended  to  and  across  a swamp,  and  joined  them  to  the  Indians  under 
Tecumseh.  They  numbered  about  eighteen  hundred.  The  British  artillery 
was  placed  in  the  road  along  the  margin  of  the  river,  near  to  the  left  of 
the  line. 

Some  two  or  three  hundred  yards  from  the  river,  a swamp  extended 
nearly  parallel  to  it,  the  intervening  ground  being  dry.  This  position  of 
the  enemy,  with  his  flank  protected  on  the  left  by  the  river,  and  on  the 
right  by  the  swamp,  where  the  Indians  were  crouching,  prevented  either 
wing  being  turned.  General  Harrison,  therefore,  concentrated  against  the 
British  line. 

About  one  hundred  and  fifty  regulars,  under  Colonel  Ball,  were  ordered 
to  advance,  and,  if  opportunity  presented,  seize  the  cannon  of  the  enemy. 
A small  party  of  friendly  Indians  were  directed  to  go  forward  under  the 
bank,  get  to  the  rear,  and,  by  raising  the  war  whoop,  endeavor  to  make 
Proctor  believe  that  Tecumseh  and  his  warriors  had  turned  against  him. 
Colonel  Johnson’s  regiment  was  drawn  up  in  close  column,  with  its  right  a 
few  yards  distant  from  the  road.  General  Desha’s  division  covered  the 
left  of  Johnson’s  regiment.  General  Cass  and  Commodore  Perry  volun- 
teered as  aids  to  General  Harrison. 

Notwithstanding  the  excellent  judgment  Proctor  showed  in  selecting 
the  battle  ground,  he  committed  the  singular  error  of  forming  his  infantry 
in  open  order.  Learning  this,  and  well  aware  that  troops  so  formed  could 
not  resist  a mounted  onset,  General  Harrison  ordered  Colonel  Johnson  to 
charge  through  the  enemy’s  line  in  column. 

The  assault  was  made  with  such  promptitude  and  vigor  that  the  ene- 


DEATH  OF  TECUMSEH. 


tecumseh’s  last  battle  and  death. 


201 


my’s  line  gave  way,  and  the  Americans,  forming  at  the  rear,  assailed  with 
such  success  that  nearly  all  the  British  regular  force  was  either  killed, 
wounded,  or  captured. 

The  fight  was  more  serious  on  the  left,  where  Colonel  Johnson’s  regi- 
ment was  stationed  ; but  they  bravely  held  their  ground.  The  colonel 
dashed  in  the  midst  of  them  with  his  men,  and  his  horse  was  shot  under 
him.  As  he  was  disentangling  himself,  a chief  rushed  upon  him  with  up- 
raised tomahawk.  Johnson  shot  him  dead  with  his  pistol. 

Thik  incident  gave  rise  to  the  assertion  that  Colonel  Johnson  killed 
Tecumseh.  When  Johnson  was  a candidate  for  the  vice  presidency,  this 
constituted  one  of  his  chief  claims  to  the  suffrages  of  his  party,  just  as 
Harrison’s  victories  at  Tippecanoe  and  the  Moravian  towns  elevated  him  to 
the  presidency.  It  is  hard  to-day  to  understand  the  interest  excited  by 
the  question  as  to  who  slew  the  great  Shawanoe  leader.  Johnson  himself 
never  made  the  claim,  saying  that  his  assailant  was  so  close  upon  him, 
that  he  didn’t  stop  to  ask  him  his  name  before  shooting  him. 

It  is  a question  of  no  importance  whatever  as  to  who  shot  the  famous 
• Shawanoe  chieftain,  but  the  investigation  set  on  foot  established  the  fact 
that  the  one  who  did  it  was  not  Colonel  Johnson,  but  some  unknown 
member  of  his  regiment. 

Tecumseh  received  a severe  wound  in  the  arm,  and  his  warriors  were 
pressed  so  hard  that  they  fled  across  the  hills  and  sought  shelter  in  a piece  of 
woods,  on  the  left,  where  they  were  hotly  pursued  by  the  cavalry.  On  the 
edge  of  the  wood,  Tecumseh  stopped  and  sought  with  all  his  old  time  vigor 
to  rouse  his  warriors  for  the  final  stand.  The  magnetism  of  his  dauntless 
bravery  caused  a number  to  gather  around  him,  although  they,  as  well  as 
Tecumseh  himself,  saw  that  the  day  was  hopelessly  lost. 

Proctor  had  fled  like  the  coward  he  was,  leaving  the  Shawanoe  leader 
and  his  warriors  to  receive  the  brunt  of  the  battle.  The  flight  of  the  Brit- 
ish commander  was  too  rapid  for  him  to  be  overtaken.  With  one  arm 
bleeding  and  almost  useless,  Tecumseh,  too  proud  to  fly,  stood  his  ground, 
dealing  prodigious  blows  right  and  left,  until  a rifle  ball  passed  through  his 
head,  and  he  sank  dead  to  the  ground.  Six  riflemen  and  twenty-two 
Indians  fell  within  twenty-five  yards  of  where  he  was  killed. 

The  Indians  kept  up  a brisk  fire  from  the  margin  of  the  wood  until  a 
fresh  regiment  was  sent  in  against  them.  About  the  same  time  a company 
of  cavalry  gained  the  rear  of  the  savages,  when  they  were  routed  and  sent 
skurrying  in  all  directions. 

When  Tecumseh  fell,  his  son  was  fighting  by  his  side,  but  managed  to 
escape.  In  1826,  he  left  the  Ohio  to  settle  beyond  the  Mississippi,  and 
nothing  further  is  known  of  him. 

On  the  day  following  the  battle,  the  American  troops  took  possession  of 


202 


BRITISH  TRIBUTE  TO  TECUMSEH. 


the  Moravian  towns,  where  they  found  a great  quantity  of  supplies.  These 
people  had  been  very  active  in  ravaging  the  frontiers  and  massacring  the 
inhabitants,  and  the  place  was  destroyed  by  the  conquerors. 

Soon  after  General  Harrison’s  return  to  Detroit,  the  Ottawas,  Chippe. 
was,  Pottawatomies,  Miamis,  and  Kickapoos  asked  for  a suspension  ol 
hostilities,  agreeing  to  “ take  hold  of  the  same  tomahawk  ” with  the  Amer 
icans,  and  to  strike  all  who  were  or  might  be  enemies  of  the  United  States. 
As  a test  of  their  earnestness,  they  offered  their  women  and  children  as 
hostages.  Most  of  these  had  been  lukewarm  in  their  support  of  the  British 
cause,  and  now  that  their  matchless  leader  had  fallen,  all  saw  the  folly  of 
fighting  longer  against  the  people  who,  if  they  chose,  could  grind  them  to 
/ powder. 

“ Thus  fell,”  says  James,  a British  historian,  “the  Indian  warrior,  Tecum- 
seh,  in  the  forty-fourth  year  of  his  age.  He  was  of  the  Shawanoe  tribe, 
five  feet  ten  inches  high,  and  with  more  than  the  usual  stoutness  ; possessed 
of  all  the  agility  and  perseverance  of  the  Indian  character.  His  carriage 

Lwas  dignified,  his  eye  penetrating,  his  countenance,  which  even  in  death 
betrayed  the  indications  of  a lofty  spirit,  rather  of  the  sterner  cast.  Had 
he  not  possessed  a certain  austerity  of  manners,  he  never  could  have  con- 
trolled the  wayward  passions  of  those  who  followed  him  to  battle.  He 
was  of  a silent  habit ; but  when  his  eloquence  became  aroused  into  action 
by  the  reiterated  encroachments  of  the  Americans,  his  strong  intellect  could 
supply  him  with  a flow  of  oratory  that  enabled  him,  as  he  governed  in  the 
field,  so  to  prescribe  in  the  council.  Those  who  consider  that,  in  all  terri- 
torial questions,  the  ablest  diplomatists  of  the  United  States  are  sent  to 
negotiate  with  the  Indians,  will  readily  appreciate  the  loss  sustained  by  the 
latter  in  the  death  of  Tecumseh.  Such  a man  was  this  unlettered  savage, 
and  such  a man  have  the  Indians  lost  forever.” 


CHAPTER  XXV. 


THE  CREEK  WAR— THE  MASSACRE  AT  FORT  MIMMS — GENERAL  JACKSON 
TAKES  THE  FIELD — A VICTORY  AT  TALLUSHATCHES— VICTORY  AT 
TALLADEGA— DEFEAT  OF  THE  CREEKS  AT  AUTOSSE — DEFEAT  OF  THE 
INDIANS  AT  ENOTOCHOPKO  CREEK— VICTORY  AT  HORSESHOE  BEND 
— WEATHERFORD — END  OF  THE  CREEK  WAR. 

MENTION  has  been  made  of  the  visit  of  Tecumseh  to  the  southern 
tribes,  occupying  what  was  then  known  as  the  Mississippi  Territory. 
The  great  orator  and  leader  met  with  unprecedented  success,  and  but  for  the 
blunder  of  his  brother,  The  Prophet,  in  precipitating  a battle  at  Tippecanoe, 
the  war  with  the  Indians  would  have  been  far  more  disastrous  to  the  Ameri- 
cans. 

The  old  chiefs  of  the  tribes  were  opposed  to  the  designs  of  the  Shawa- 
noe  chieftain,  but  the  fiery  young  war-chiefs  were  irrestrainable,  and  the 
Creeks  plunged  into  the  war  with  the  ferocious  impetuosity  natural  to  their 
race. 

Weatherford  was  probably  the  most  conspicuous  chief  among  the 
Creeks.  He  was  as  fine  looking  as  Tecumseh,  possessed  of  eloquence, 
courage,  and  great  ability,  but  was  avaricious,  treacherous,  lustful,  and  mer- 
ciless in  his  disposition.  He  was  a most  dangerous  leader  of  the  hostiles. 

The  outrages  of  the  Indians  became  so  alarming  that  the  militia  of 
the  Southwest  were  called  out  to  meet  the  danger.  A large  number  of 
the  inhabitants  took  refuge  in  a stockade,  known  as  Fort  Mimms,  on  Lake 
Tensas,  Ala.,  and  Governor  Claiborne  sent  one  hundred  and  seventy- 
five  volunteers  to  its  defense.  He  visited  the  post  and  warned  the  garrison 
against  surprise,  concluding  his  order  with  the  words:  “To  respect  an 
enemy  and  prepare  in  the  best  possible  way  to  meet  him,  is  the  certain 
means  to  insure  success.” 

Aware  that  Weatherford  would  attack  some  of  the  forts,  Governor 
Claiborne  marched  to  Fort  Early,  because  it  was  the  farthest  advanced 
in  the  Indian  country.  On  the  way  he  wrote  to  Major  Beasley,  the  com- 
mander of  Fort  Mimms,  informing  him  of  the  imminent  danger  of  attack 
and  urging  him  once  more  to  use  the  utmost  vigilance  against  surprise. 

A few  days  previous,  several  negroes  had  been  sent  up  the  Alabama, 
to  a planter’s  place  for  corn.  Three  were  captured  by  Indians,  but  one 
escaped  and  brought  tidings  of  the  approach  of  the  hostiles.  Major  Beas- 
ley made  light  of  the  news.  The  following  day,  a half  breed  and  some 


203 


204 


MASSACRE  AT  FORT  MIMMS. 


white  men  came  to  the  fort  with  word  that  a considerable  force  of  Indians 
was  in  the  neighborhood.  Full  credence  was  not  given  to  the  report,  but 
the  commandant  was  incited  to  some  activity  in  preparing  against  attack. 

Sunday  morning,  three  negroes,  while  looking  after  cattle,  hurried  back, 
saying  they  had  seen  twenty  Indians.  Scouts  were  sent  out  to  learn  the 
truth,  but  found  no  signs  of  the  hostiles.  Then  one  of  the  negroes  received 
a whipping  for  spreading  what  was  declared  to  be  a false  report.  On  Mon- 
day he  discovered  a body  of  Indians  approaching;  but,  not  caring  to  be 
rewarded  as  before,  did  not  return  to  the  fort. 

Major  Beasley  called  on  the  owner  of  another  of  the  negroes,  and  in- 
sisted that  he  should  whip  his  servant.  The  owner  believed  the  slave,  but 
was  finally  induced  to  chastise  him.  He  was  brought  out  for  that  purpose, 
but  before  the  lash  could  be  applied  the  Indians  arrived. 

They  numbered  1500,  and  were  under  the  leadership  of  the  dreaded 
Weatherford.  They  were  obliged  to  cross  an  open  field,  a hundred  and 
fifty  yards  wide,  and  yet  they  were  within  thirty  paces  of  the  fort  at  eleven 
o’clock  in  the  morning  (August  30,  1813),  before  they  were  discovered. 
The  gates  were  invitingly  open  and  unguarded,  and  the  fierce  host 
swarmed  through  before  they  could  be  closed.  Then  took  place  one  of  the 
most  desperate  fights  of  the  war.  Major  Beasley  placed  himself  at  the 
head  of  his  men,  and  all  fought  as  do  those  who  know  that  it  is  for  their 
lives.  The  garrison  numbered  275,  of  whom  only  160  were  soldiers,  the 
rest  being  old  men,  women,  and  children. 

The  struggle  was  to  keep  the  whole  force  from  entering  the  outer  gate. 
For  a quarter  of  an  hour,  tomahawk,  knife,  sword,  and  bayonet  did  their 
fearful  work.  Every  officer  was  killed  fighting  at  this  point.  A lieutenant, 
badly  wounded,  was  carried  by  a couple  of  women  to  a blockhouse.  In  a 
few  minutes  he  revived,  and  insisted  on  being  taken  back  into  the  thickest 
of  the  fight.  This  was  done,  and  shortly  after  he  was  dispatched. 

Nearly  all  of  the  defenders  at  the  gate  being  slain,  the  women  and 
children  shut  themselves  up  in  the  blockhouse,  and,  catching  up  what 
weapons  were  within  reach,  made  the  last  defense.  The  assailants,  how- 
ever, succeeded  in  setting  the  structure  on  fire,  and  the  miserable  company 
were  burned  to  death.  Seventeen  only  of  the  garrison  escaped,  and  most 
of  them  were  badly  wounded.  Major  Beasley  was  among  the  wounded, 
and  was  carried  into  the  kitchen  of  the  fort,  where  he  was  consumed  by 
fire,  paying  the  heaviest  penalty  possible  for  his  blindness  to  danger. 

The  massacre  of  Fort  Mimms  sent  a shudder  of  horror  through  the 
country,  and  aroused  inextinguishable  wrath  against  the  criminals.  Ten- 
nessee appropriated  $300,000  and  placed  5000  men  under  General  Jackson, 
for  the  purpose  of  punishing  the  criminals.  Under  this  indomitable  leader, 
who  had  not  yet  fully  recovered  from  a wound  received  in  a duel,  were 


205 


GENERAL  JACKSON’S  CAMPAIGN. 

some  of  the  finest  Indian  fighters  in  the  Southwest.  Among  them  were  the 
eccentric  Davy  Crockett  and  the  equally  eccentric  and  more  famous  Sam 
Houston,  afterward  the  hero  of  San  Jacinto. 

Colonel  Coffee  was  already  in  the  field.  Jackson’s  march  was  hastened 
by  a false  alarm,  so  that,  when  he  reached  the  Indian  country,  his  men 
were  on  the  point  of  revolt,  because  the  lack  of  food  had  reduced  them 
almost  to  the  starvation  point.  He  conquered  the  rebellion  with  the  same 
unquenchable  courage  which  marked  his  whole  life. 

Jackson,  who  had  two  thousand  men  with  him,  met  Colonel  Coffee  at 
Ditto’s  Landing,  on  the  Tennessee.  They  halted  for  several  days,  when 


THE  ATTACK  ON  FORT  MIMMS. 


Jackson  sent  Coffee  with  seven  hundred  men  to  scout  through  the  Black 
Warrior  River  country.  Chinnaby,  a friendly  Creek,  was  encamped  at 
Ten  Islands,  on  the  Coosa,  within  a rude  fort,  where  he  was  blockaded  by 
the  hostile  Creeks.  Chinnaby  sent  his  son,  also  a chief,  to  Jackson  pray- 
ing for  instant  relief,  since  he  must  soon  succumb  to  superior  forces  unless 
he  received  it.  Jackson  started  at  once,  but  was  obliged  to  halt  on 
account  of  lack  of  supplies.  While  there,  Pathkiller,  a friendly  Cherokee 
chief  (afterward  a famous  Christian  Indian),  sent  word  to  Jackson  that  the 
danger  to  him  was  most  imminent,  as  the  hostiles  were  hastily  gathering 
from  nine  different  towns  to  overwhelm  him.  Jackson  started  ahead 
again,  sending  the  following  characteristic  message  to  Pathkiller : 


206 


THE  VICTORY  AT  TALLUSHATCHES. 


“ The  hostile  Creeks  will  not  attack  you  until  they  have  had  a brush  \ 
with  me,  and  that,  I think,  will  put  them  out  of  the  notion  of  fighting  for 
some  time.” 

When  within  a few  miles  of  Ten  Islands,  Chinnaby  met  Jackson,  to 
whom  he  surrendered  two  hostile  Creeks.  The  American  army  was  still 
sixteen  miles  from  the  Indian  encampment,  and  on  the  verge  of  starvation. 
Almost  any  other  leader  than  Jackson  would  have  given  up  in  despair,  but 
in  a letter  to  the  governor  he  said  that,  as  long  as  they  could  procure  an 
ear  of  corn  apiece,  they  would  keep  at  it. 

The  Indians  withdrew  from  Ten  Islands  and  took  post  at  Tallus- 
hatches  (now  Jacksonville,  Ala.),  on  the  southern  shore  of  the  Coosa. 
Colonel  Coffee,  with  nine  hundred  men,  was  sent  to  attack  them,  which  he 
did  on  the  28th  of  October.  He  first  sent  forward  a part  of  his  force  to 
open  the  fight.  This  was  no  more  than  fairly  under  way  when  the 
assailants  began  falling  back.  The  Creeks,  believing  they  wer..  defeated, 
swarmed  out  from  their  village  and  followed  them  up  with  great  impet- 
uosity. But  the  recoil  was  in  accordance  with  Colonel  Coffee’s  plan  of 
battle,  and  he  thereby  drew  out  the  entire  force  of  Indians,  and  gained 
a fair  chance  at  them. 

The  Americans  fell  fiercely  upon  them;  the  Creeks  skurried  back  to 
their  village  and  took  refuge  in  their  houses.  They  asked  no  quarter,  for 
they  knew  none  would  be  given,  but  fought  with  a desperation  which 
could  not  be  surpassed.  When  driven  into  corners,  they  struggled  like 
rabid  dogs,  never  ceasing  their  resistance,  no  matter  how  badly  wounded, 
so  long  as  they  had  the  power  to  move  a limb. 

The  nature  of  this  fight  may  be  summed  up  in  the  single  statement 
that  every  warrior  was  killed. 

The  number  who  thus  fell  was  about  two  hundred,  among  whom  were 
some  women  and  children.  It  was  claimed  that  the  killing  of  these  was 
unavoidable,  because  of  the  mixing  of  the  combatants  with  their  families, 
in  the  hand-to-hand  fighting  in  the  wigwams.  The  Americans  had  five 
killed  and  forty-one  wounded. 

In  the  meantime  the  detachment  sent  to  relieve  Pathkiller  had  been 
ordered  to  join  the  main  body  with  all  dispatch.  An  Indian  runner 
arrived  on  the  evening  of  the  7th,  with  news  that  Talladega  was  besieged 
by  an  enormous  number  of  Creeks,  and  would  be  destroyed  unless  imme- 
diate relief  was  sent. 

Jackson  was  off  at  once,  and  by  midnight  was  within  six  miles  of  the 
enemy.  Moving  forward  at  daybreak,  he  came  within  half  a mile  of  the 
Indian  encampment,  which  was  less  than  a hundred  rods  from  Fort  Talla- 
dega. The  Creeks  were  not  taken  by  surprise,  but  turned  upon  the  Ameri- 
cans with  such  vigor  that  many  of  the  militia  gave  way.  Their  places* 


AN  INVITATION  TO  DINNER. 


20; 

however,  were  immediately  taken  by  the  mounted  men,  and  ere  long  the 
Indians  were  forced  to  fly  for  refuge  to  the  mountains,  three  miles  distant. 
The  Americans  pressed  them  remorselessly,  cutting  down  scores  on  the 
way.  The  pursuers  lost  fifteen,  and  eighty-five  wounded.  Fully  a thou 
sand  Indians  were  engaged,  and  half  that  number  were  slain. 

The  expected  supply  of  provisions  did  not  arrive,  and  the  men  grew  s© 
desperate  from  starvation  that  many  revolted,  and  the  expedition  came 
near  being  abandoned.  One  of  the  famishing  soldiers  went  to  Jackson,  as 


GENERAL  JACKSON’S  INVITATION  TO  DINNER. 


he  sat  munching  something  at  the  foot  of  a tree,  and  said  he  could  stand  it 
no  longer  : he  must  have  food. 

“ I’m  always  ready  to  divide  with  a hungry  man,”  replied  Jackson, 
“here  is  half  of  my  supply.” 

Saying  which,  he  drew  from  his  pocket  a handful  of  acorns.  The 
heroic  example  of  “Old  Hickory”  did  much  to  allay  dissatisfaction  among 
his  men. 

On  the  nth  of  November,  a detachment  of  the  Tennessee  militia, 
under  General  White,  was  sent  against  the  Hillibee  towns,  to  punish  the 
hostile  Creeks  in  that  quarter.  He  performed  the  duty  most  effectually, 
without  the  loss  of  a man. 

The  Georgia  militia,  under  General  Floyd,  on  the  29th  of  November 
attacked  and  defeated  a large  body  of  Creeks  at  Autosse,  on  the  south 
bank  of  the  Tallapoosa,  eighteen  miles  from  the  Hickory  Ground,  and 


208 


THE  FIGHT  AT  EMUCKFAU  CREEK. 


r 


twenty  miles  above  the  junction  of  that  river  with  the  Coosa.  General 
Floyd  had  950  men,  besides  350  Indians,  so  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  he 
intended  to  make  thorough  work. 

Arriving  at  the  place  where  he  expected  to  find  the  Indians,  he  was  sur- 
prised to  discover  a second  town.  In  the  latter  were  gathered  the  warriors, 
prepared  for  battle.  The  army  was  divided,  and  both  towns  attacked 
simultaneously,  the  artillery  of  the  soldiers  enabling  them  to  drive  out  the 
Indians ; but  before  this  was  accomplished  the  Georgians  had  eleven 
killed  and  fifty-four  wounded,  among  the  latter  being  General  Floyd.  The 
friendly  Indians  lost  a considerable  number,  but  did  not  slaughter  as  many 
of  their  countrymen  as  they  had  promised. 

Resting  a few  days,  General  Floyd  marched  to  Camp  Defiance,  fifty 
miles  further  in  the  Indian  country,  and  west  of  Autosse.  Early  on  the 
morning  of  January  2 his  sentinels  were  killed  by  Indians,  who  attacked 
with  such  spirit  that  seventeen  were  killed  and  more  than  a hundred 
wounded  before  the  assailants  were  beaten  off. 

On  the  17th  of  the  same  month,  General  Jackson,  with  930  men, 
marched  from  near  Fort  Strother,  for  the  center  of  the  Indian  country.  At 
Talladega,  which  lay  on  his  route,  he  was  joined  by  Fife,  a noted  chief, 
with  two  hundred  warriors.  The  Indians  were  believed  to  be  assem- 
bled in  great  numbers  at  the  Great  Bend  of  the  Tallapoosa,  and  Fort  Arm- 
strong, ill-prepared  for  defense,  was  in  danger  of  being  attacked.  The 
prime  object  of  Jackson’s  expedition  was  the  relief  of  this  post. 

The  Indians  were  found  to  be  on  an  island  in  the  Tallapoosa,  near  the 
mouth  of  Emuckfau  Creek.  Jackson  advanced  with  great  care,  and  took 
every  precaution  against  surprise.  In  the  gray  dawn  of  the  22d,  his  left 
flank  was  attacked  in  great  force,  and  the  left  of  his  rear.  The  assailants 
fought  with  such  bravery  that  it  was  a full  half-hour  before  they  were 
beaten  off  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet.  The  pursuit  was  kept  up  for 
two  miles,  being  led  by  Fife  at  the  head  of  his  warriors. 

Instead  of  being  discouraged  by  their  defeat,  the  Indians  returned  and 
attacked  with  greater  success  than  before.  General  Coffin  would  have 
been  cut  off  but  for  the  prompt  help  of  Fife  and  his  warriors,  sent  to  his 
assistance  by  Jackson,  who  personally  directed  and  took  part  in  the  fight. 

The  provisons  being  exhausted,  Jackson  began  a retreat  to  Fort 
Strother.  The  Indians  accepted  this  as  a proof  that  the  Americans 
were  beaten,  and  set  out  to  pursue  and  harass  them.  Jackson  expected 
this  and  marched  in  order  of  battle  through  one  dangerous  defile  after 
another.  When  nearly  through  one  of  these  at  Enotochopko  Creek,  his 
rear  was  assailed  with  such  spirit  that  the  columns  gave  way,  and  great 
confusion  existed  for  a time.  After  much  difficulty  a six-pounder  was 
dragged  to  the  top  of  a small  elevation  and  did  effective  work.  The 


END  OF  THE  CREEK  WAR.  209 

Americans  rallied  from  their  panic,  and  pursued  the  defeated  Indians 
for  several  miles,  inflicting  a loss  of  nearly  two  hundred. 

The  last  stand  of  the  Creeks  was  made  at  the  Great  Horseshoe  Bend 
of  the  Tallapoosa  River,  in  the  present  State  of  Alabama.  The  Indians 
had  suffered  defeat  after  defeat,  and  they  now  decided  to  stake  all  on 
one  battle.  They  had  a tolerably  well  fortified  camp,  built  with  such  skill 
that  the  only  way  to  carry  it  was  by  storm.  Behind  these  intrenchments 
crouched  a thousand  warriors,  revengeful,  fierce,  and  resolved  to  fight  to 
the  last. 

With  a resolution  to  crush  them,  Jackson  marched  in  strong  force 
against  them.  Early  on  the  morning  of  March  27,  General  Coffee,  with 
the  mounted  and  most  of  the  Indian  force,  was  sent  across  the  river,  two 
miles  below  the  encampment,  and  so  disposed  as  to  cut  off  the  retreat  of 
the  hostiles.  A company  of  spies  crossed  over  in  canoes  to  the  extremity 
of  the  bend,  and  set  fire  to  several  of  the  buildings.  Then  they  advanced 
upon  the  breastworks  and  opened  fire.  They  did  not  meet  with  the 
success  anticipated,  and  the  rest  of  the  forces  was  eager  to  attack. 

The  regulars,  under  their  gallant  leadership,  gained  possession  of  the 
works  in  the  midst  of  the  murderous  fire.  The  militia  joined  in  the  charge, 
and  the  decisive  battle  of  Tohopeka,  or  the  Great  Horseshoe  Bend,  was  won. 

The  fighting  lasted  for  five  hours  and  the  slaughter  was  frightful. 
Fully  six  hundred  Indians  were  killed,  the  pursuit  being  kept  up  until 
ended  by  darkness.  Of  the  two  hundred  and  fifty  prisoners  taken,  all 
were  women  and  children.  The  Americans  lost  twenty-five  killed  and 
more  than  a hundred  wounded.  But  the  spirit  of  the  Indians  was  crushed 
and  the  Creek  War  ended. 

Convinced  that  further  resistance  meant  their  own  extermination,  hun- 
dreds of  Creeks  came  forward  to  offer  their  submission.  Weatherford  and 
several  of  the  leaders  still  held  out,  possibly  through  fear.  Jackson  was 
determined  to  secure  this  dangerous  man,  before  leaving  the  country,  for 
there  was  no  saying  what  mischief  he  might  plot.  Besides,  Weatherford 
had  committed  so  many  atrocities  (he  was  the  leader,  it  will  be  remem- 
bered, at  Fort  Mimms),  and  he  was  anxious  to  punish  him.  When,  there- 
fore, the  frightened  Creeks  wished  to  surrender,  he  told  them  he  would 
test  their  earnestness  by  making  a requirement  that  they  should  deliver 
Weatherford,  bound,  to  him,  to  do  as  he  chose  with  him. 

When  these  chiefs  told  the  sachem  the  hard  requirements,  he  declared 
that  he  would  not  permit  such  degradation,  but  would  surrender  himself 
without  compulsion. 

General  Jackson  was  sitting  in  his  tent,  busy  with  his  dispatches,  when 
a half  breed  of  striking  appearance  stalked  in.  As  the  astonished  general 
looked  around,  his  visitor  said  : 


210 


SURRENDER  OF  WEATHERFORD. 


“ I am  Weatherford,  the  chief  who  commanded  at  Fort  Mimms.  I 


desire  peace  for  my  people  and  have  come  to  ask  it.” 

“I  am  surprised,”  said  Jackson,  “that  you  should  come  into  my 


WEATHERFORD  AND  GENERAL  JACKSON. 

and  had  you  been  brought  in  that  manner  I should  have  known  how  to 
treat  you.” 

“ I am  in  your  power,”  said  Weatherford  ; “ do  with  me  as  you  please ; 
2 am  a soldier.  I have  done  the  whites  all  the  harm  I could.  I have  fought 
them  and  fought  them  bravely.  If  I had  an  army,  I would  yet  fight  ; I 
would  contend  to  the  last : but  I have  none.  My  people  are  all  gone.  I 
can  only  weep  over  the  misfortunes  of  my  nation.” 


WEATHERFORD’S  REPLY  TO  JACKSON. 


21  I 


General  Jackson,  brave  himself,  could  not  help  admiring  the  boldness 
of  this  remarkable  man. 

“ I will  take  no  advantage  of  you  ; you  may  yet  join  your  war  party 
and  fight  us-.  But  if  you  are  taken,  you  shall  receive  no  quarter.  Uncon- 
ditional submission  is  the  only  safety  for  you  and  your  people.” 

With  dignity,  Weatherford  said  : 

“ You  can  safely  address  mein  such  terms  now.  There  was  a time 
when  I could  have  answered  you  ; there  was  a time  when  I had  a choice  ; 
I have  none  now.  I have  not  even  a hope.  I could  once  animate  my  war- 
riors to  battle,  but  I cannot  animate  the  dead.  My  warriors  can  no  longer 
hear  my  voice.  Their  bones  are  at  Talladega,  Tallushatches,  Emuckfau, 
and  Tohopeka.  I have  not  surrendered  myself  without  thought.  While 
there  was  a single  chance  of  success,  I never  left  my  post  nor  supplicated 
for  peace.  But  my  people  are  gone  and  I now  ask  it  for  my  nation,  not  for 
myself.  I look  back  with  deep  sorrow,  and  wish  to  avert  still  greater 
calamities.  If  I had  been  left  to  contend  with  the  Georgia  army,  I would 
have  raised  my  corn  on  one  bank  of  the  river,  and  fought  them  on  the  other. 
But  your  people  have  destroyed  my  nation.  You  are  a brave  man.  I rely 
upon  your  generosity.  You  will  exact  no  terms  of  a conquered  people, 
but  such  as  they  should  accede  to.  Whatever  they  may  be,  it  would  now 
be  madness  and  folly  to  oppose  them.  If  they  are  opposed,  you  shall  find 
me  among  the  sternest  enforcers  of  obedience.  Those  who  would  still  hold 
out,  can  be  influenced  only  by  a mean  spirit  of  revenge.  To  this  they 
must  not,  and  shall  not  sacrifice  the  last  remnant  of  their  country.  You 
have  told  our  nation  where  we  might  go  and  be  safe.  This  is  good  talk, 
and  they  ought  to  listen  to  it.  They  shall  listen  to  it.” 

This  speech  produced  its  effect.  General  Jackson  declined  to  con- 
sider Weatherford  a prisoner  of  war,  and  the  great  leader  departed  as 
proudly  as  he  had  come,  no  one  offering  him  hindrance  or  molestation. 

The  Creek  War  being  ended,  General  Jackson,  after  informing  the 
survivors  as  to  the  terms  on  which  he  was  authorized  to  make  peace,  with- 
drew his  forces  in  the  latter  part  of  April.  Little  trouble  was  apprehended 
from  the  fugitives,  who  had  fled  toward  Pensacola,  and  who  continued 
hostile  to  the  Americans,  but  this  expectation  was  doomed  to  disappoint- 
ment. 


CHAPTER  XXVI. 


THE  ADVENTURES  OF  MICHIGAN  JOHN. 


N English  contributor  to  the  “ World  of  Adventure,”  relates  the 


following  story  of  the  adventure  of  one  of  his  countrymen,  during  the 
War  of  1812.  It  is  interesting  to  read  a narrative  like  this,  told  by  one  who 
belonged  to  “the  other  side.” 

Uncle  Charles  was  a fine,  tall,  handsome  looking  youth,  about  nineteen, 
when  he  decided  upon  going  into  the  army;  and  a commission  having  been 
procured  for  him  in  the  gallant  42d,  he  left  home  to  join  the  regiment, 
which,  in  the  course  of  a few  months,  embarked  at  a very  short  notice  for 
the  American  provinces,  betwixt  which  and  Great  Britain  a regular  war  had 
commenced.  Mrs.  Grant,  whose  favorite  son  Charles  was,  parted  from  him 
with  great  reluctance;  but  having  fortified  his  mind  by  good  principles, 
and  the  best  example,  she  committed  him  to  the  care  of  Providence. 
Charles  had  lost  his  father  when  he  was  quite  a child,  so  that  he  was  left 
entirely  to  the  instruction  of  his  mother ; and  it  was  fortunate  that  she  had 
such  a soil  wherein  to  sow  the  good  seed  that  produced  the  fruits  that  will 
be  seen  in  his  adventurous  life. 

The  regiment  arrived  safe  at  New  York.  And  as  soon  as  they  had 
recovered  from  the  voyage,  they  were  ordered  to  march  into  the  interior  to 
join  their  brethren  in  arms,  as  the  officer  commanding  the  troops  in  that 
part  of  the  country  understood  that  the  Americans  had  prevailed  upon  a 
tribe  of  Indians  from  Lake  Michigan  to  aid  them  against  the  British. 

The  chief  of  this  tribe  had  become  well  known  to  the  Americans,  as  he 
and  his  followers  were  in  the  habit  of  visiting  the  frontiers  yearly,  to 
exchange  their  furs,  fish,  and  other  products  of  the  country  for  firearms, 
powder,  and  shot,  which  were  most  useful  to  them,  so  that  the  Americans 
found  it  no  difficult  matter  to  engage  Michigan  John  and  his  tribe  as  an 
ally  in  the  war,  and  John,  who  was  a man  of  no  common  mind,  not  only 
picked  up  sufficient  of  the  English  language  to  make  himself  intelligible, 
but  he  had  a powerful  mind  and  ruled  over  his  tribe  with  despotic  sway. 
The  Indians,  who  were  well  acquainted  with  every  foot  of  the  country, 
were  found  by  the  Americans  to  be  invaluable;  and  an  ambuscade  was 
placed  to  entrap  the  42d  ere  it  could  reach  its  destination.  * 

They  were  only  too  successful,  for  in  marching  through  a wood  the  sol- 
diers were  attacked  suddenly  and  taken  at  a disadvantage.  From  behind 
the  trees  the  deadly  rifle  laid  low  many  a poor  fellow.  Fearing  to  be  cut 


212 


SI*  A RED  BY  MICHIGAN  JOHN. 


213 


off  to  a man,  the  colonel  ordered  a retreat  to  be  sounded,  with  the  hope  of 
retiring  to  more  open  ground.  And  the  dreadful  war-whoop  of  the  savages 
could  hardly  fail  to  strike  terror  into  the  minds  of  soldiers  who  had  never 
encountered  such  a ferocious  looking  enemy. 

The  Americans,  being  aware  that  the  loss  of  their  officers  would  render 
the  men  a more  easy  conquest,  took  aim  accordingly.  Charles,  who  nobly 
stood  his  ground,  was  singled  out  by  the  Indian  chief,  and  fell,  severely 
wounded;  while  the  Indians,  rushing  into  the  meMe,  began  to  strip  the 
dead  and  scalp  the  dying. 

Michigan  John,  who  had  perceived  from  his  dress  that  Charles  was  an 
officer,  advanced  to  where  he  lay,  raised  his  head  by  the  long  hair,  lifted 
his  deadly  knife,  and,  whirling  it  round,  was  on  the  point  of  scalping  his 
victim,  when  my  Uncle  Charles  moved  one  of  his  arms,  as  if  to  put  his  hand 
upon  the  wound;  and  Michigan  John,  finding  he  still  breathed,  spared  his 
life. 

Summoning  four  of  his  tribe,  he  ordered  them  hastily  to  cut  down 
some  branches  from  the  trees,  and  make  a sort  of  litter.  A bandage  was 
tied  over  my  uncle’s  wound  ; he  was  placed  in  the  litter,  and  by  nightfall 
the  party  were  on  their  way  to  Lake  Michigan,  laden  with  the  booty  which 
the  Americans  and  they  had  divided.  Some  days  elapsed  ere  they  reached 
their  home.  The  poor  captive  was  so  weak  and  exhausted  by  the  loss  of 
blood  that  he  could  scarcely  make  the  smallest  exertion,  and  it  required  all 
the  care  of  the  Indian  chief  to  keep  him  alive. 

The  warriors  were  received  with  shouts  of  triumph  by  their  wives  and 
companions  who  had  remained  to  guard  their  encampment,  mingled  with 
cries  and  lamentations  for  those  who  had  fallen  in  battle.  My  uncle,  upon 
the  arrival  of  the  Indians  in  the  Michigan  territory,  was  taken  to  the  wig- 
wam of  their  chief,  and  herbs  were  gathered  and  applied  to  his  wound,  so 
that  he  gradually  recovered  ; and  in  the  midst  of  such  kind-hearted  savages 
he  felt  exceedingly  grateful,  but  above  all  to  the  chief. 

One  may,  therefore,  imagine  his  horror  and  dismay  when  John  in- 
formed him  that  his  life  was  only  preserved  that  he  might  be  offered  to  the 
spirits  of  those  who  had  been  killed  on  the  day  of  the  battle  ! To  have  met 
with  death  in  the  field  would  have  been  little  compared  with  the  fate  that 
awaited  him  ; and  his  entreaties  that  the  chief  would  at  once  put  an  end  to 
his  life  were  not  listened  to.  John  replied  that  it  was  the  custom  of  the 
tribe,  and  that  he  ought  not  to  have  invaded  the  land  of  the  red  men  ; and 
my  uncle,  perceiving  that  there  existed  not  the  smallest  chance  of  escape 
for  him,  endeavored  to  prepare  his  mind  for  the  trial  that  awaited  him  ; 
and  he  employed  many  hours  of  the  day,  and  the  silent  watches  of  the 
night,  in  praying  for  fortitude  and  strength  to  die  as  a Christian,  from  the 
only  source  at  which  it  can  be  found. 


214 


A STRANGE  DELIVERANCE. 


With  a composure  of  manner  and  appearance  which  even  to  himself 
appeared  somewhat  unnatural,  my  uncle  saw  the  preparations  that  were 
taking  place,  and  was  relieved  in  a great  measure  by  learning  that  he  was 
not  to  be  put  to  torture,  but  that  he  was  to  be  shot — a favor  that  he  did  not 
expect.  His  manly  bearing  and  amiable  manners  had  softened  the  heart 
of  old  John,  who  would  gaze,  with  a steadfast  and  thoughtful  look,  when 
in  a corner  of  the  wigwam  he  saw  the  young  white-skin  speaking  to  the 
Great  Spirit,  and  heard  the  earnest  petitions  of  the  young  soldier  for  his 
mother,  and  for  forgiveness  of  his  own  sins.  And  old  John  felt  how  proud 
he  would  have  been  of  such  a son  to  succeed  him  as  chief  of  the  Michigans. 

At  length,  my  uncle  having  recovered,  a day  was  fixed,  and  the  whole 
tribe  were  assembled  in  their  war-dresses,  the  women  and  children  shout- 
ing and  singing  the  death  song,  as  John,  accompanied  by  his  captive, 
appeared.  The  chief  made  a short  palaver  to  his  followers,  and  they  all 
followed  their  leader  to  a wood  that  adjoined  the  encampment. 

Here  a tree  was  selected  for  the  purpose,  and  my  uncle  was  placed 
against  it,  John  having  granted  him  the  favor  that  he  should  not  be  bound 
nor  his  eyes  covered,  as  he  said  he  was  not  afraid  to  look  death  in  the  face, 
and  hoped  that  the  Indian  would  take  so  sure  an  aim  as  to  be  fatal  at  the 
moment. 

John  loaded  the  rifle,  and,  when  the  signal  was  given,  presented  it  at 
his  victim. 

The  trigger  was  pulled — but  the  powder  flashed  in  the  pan. 

With  an  impatient  air,  John  examined  the  rifle,  put  in  fresh  powder, 
and  again  presented.  Again  was  the  attempt  unsuccessful.  A third  time 
would  surely  finish  the  affair,  for  the  flint  was  sharpened,  and  fresh  prim- 
ing put  in  the  pan.  The  rifle  again  missed  fire. 

Anxiety,  doubt,  and  consternation  sat  upon  every  face,  as  the  chief 
looked  round  upon  his  tribe.  As  if  struck  by  the  thought  of  the  moment, 
he  raised  his  gun  in  his  hand,  and  fired  into  the  air,  when  it  exploded  with 
a tremendous  noise,  as  the  Indians  gave  vent  to  outcries  and  shouts  of 
surprise. 

After  a pause  of  a few  minutes,  silence  being  restored,  the  chief  ad- 
dressed them:  ‘‘My  children,  it’s  of  no  use  to  kill  this  white-skin;  he  is 
protected  by  the  Great  Spirit.  When  did  you  see  the  gun  of  Michigan 
John  miss  fire?  The  Great  Spirit  says  ‘No.’  Listen,  my  children:  I 
have  no  son,  and  this  young  white-skin  shall  become  as  one  to  your  father. 
When  I am  old,  and  go  to  the  land  of  my  fathers,  he  shall  be  your  chief. 
We  shall  teach  him  to  hunt  and  fish,  and  he  will  be  as  the  son  of  the  red 
man.” 

This  address  was  received  with  joyful  acclamations  ; and  my  uncle, 
like  one  in  a dream,  was  carried  back  to  the  wigwam  upon  the  shoulders 


A DARING  EXPLOIT.  21 5 

of  Indians,  who,  leaving  him  to  the  care  of  his  adopted  father,  spent  the 
day  in  mirth  and  dancing. 

My  uncle,  whose  life  was  thus  wonderfully  spared,  never  for  a moment 
doubted  that  it  was  solely  by  the  interposition  of  Providence,  and  gave 
thanks  where  it  was  due.  A day  was  soon  after  appointed  to  adopt  my 
uncle  as  the  chief  who  was  to  rule  after  his  father’s  death,  and  he  under- 
went the  ceremonies  observed  among  the  savage  tribes  of  North  America. 
His  body  was  handsomely  tattooed  ; his  ears  pierced,  and  also  his  nose,  to 
all  of  which  were  appended  ornaments;  and  his  skin  being  stained,  and  at- 
tired in  the  full  war-dress  of  an  Indian  chief,  with  the  rifle,  the  deadly  tom- 
ahawk and  scalping  knife,  he  was,  I am  told,  a very  handsome  looking 
person.  The  ceremony  concluded  by  his  having  the  name  of  John 
bestowed  upon  him. 

Only  too  grateful  to  have  his  life  spared,  young  John  soon  fell  into  all 
the  customs  of  his  new  friends.  He  accompanied  his  father  in  the  chase, 
and  became  an  expert  huntsman  ; and  this  roving  and  exciting  occupation 
soon  became  delightful  to  him.  If  he  had  any  ambition,  here  it  might  be 
gratified.  He  would,  at  some  future  period,  preside  over  a numerous  body 
of  Indians,  who  felt  some  degree  of  awe  for  one  who  was  guarded  by  the 
Great  Spirit.  Youth  soon  reconciles  itself  to  a situation  that  is  not  un- 
comfortable upon  the  whole;  and  young  “John,”  who  was  particularly 
attached  to  the  chief,  seemed  to  forget  that  he  was  not  a red-skin  from  the 
first.  But  his  promotion,  though  approved  of  by  the  greater  number  of 
the  tribe,  had  raised  some  envy  and  jealousy  among  those  who  were 
related  to  John,  and  they  only  waited  an  opportunity  to  do  him  an  injury. 

And  so  it  chanced.  When  some  of  the  tribe,  accompanied  by  my 
uncle,  were  out  hunting,  a huge  panther  was  tracked  and  fired  at  ; and  as 
the  Indians  pursued  the  animal  closely,  he  took  refuge  in  a cave,  and  every 
attempt  to  dislodge  him  was  found  to  be  vain.  It  was  now  time  for  the 
discontented  to  endeavor  to  get  rid  of  their  rival,  and,  with  furious  threats, 
they  insisted  that  he  should  enter  the  cave  and  drive  out  the  panther. 
This  attempt  he  looked  upon  as  certain  death,  as  the  cave  was  so  low  that 
he  must  have  gone  in  on  his  hands  and  knees.  But  expostulation  and  re- 
marks upon  the  injustice  of  their  conduct  were  only  answered  by  a blow  of 
the  tomahawk ; and  seeing  there  was  no  alternative,  he  crept  in  upon  his 
hands,  holding  his  scalping-knife  between  his  teeth. 

The  cave  was  so  dark  that  some  minutes  elapsed  before  he  could  dis- 
tinguish the  animal,  which  had  retreated  into  a corner  of  the  den  in  the 
agonies  of  death,  having  been  mortally  wounded  by  one  of  the  Indians. 
My  uncle,  having  advanced  cautiously,  drew  his  knife  across  the  throat  of 
the  panther,  and  seizing  him  by  the  tail,  dragged  him  out  of  the  den,  and 
with  an  air  of  indignation  threw  him  down  before  the  astonished  savages, 


216 


MEETING  WITH  OLD  FRIENDS. 


who,  humble  and  crestfallen,  were  convinced  that  he  bore  a charmed  life, 
and  that  it  was  fruitless  to  endeavor  to  injure  him. 

Three  years  were  passed  away  by  my  uncle  among  the  Indians;  and 
having  accumulated  a considerable  number  of  skins  and  other  products  of 
the  country,  John  proposed  that  a party  of  the  tribe  should  proceed  to  the 
United  States  to  exchange  them  for  powder  and  shot,  of  which  they  now 


“HE  . . . DRAGGED  HIM  OUT  OF  THE  DEN.” 

stood  much  in  need.  Accordingly  he,  with  his  adopted  son  and  seven  of 
their  followers,  proceeded  to  Charleston. 

Here  it  was  that  my  uncle  recognized  one  of  the  officers  of  the  42d. 
Home  and  all  its  sweet  associations  rushed  into  his  heart,  and  he  went 
directly  and  addressed  his  old  companion  in  arms,  who,  if  possible,  was  more 
astonished  at  hearing  a young  Indian  speak  in  his  own  language.  It  was 
some  time  before  he  could  be  brought  to  acknowledge  my  uncle’s  identity. 
His  adopted  father  was  all  this  while  beside  them,  his  piercing  looks  full 
of  anxiety,  which  was  increased  when  he  found  that  my  uncle  intended 
accompanying  the  officer  to  his  quarters,  whither  he  followed  them. 

A long  and  interesting  conversation  took  place,  and  his  friend  repre- 


A HAPPY  ENDING  AND  A NEW  CAPTIVITY. 


217 


sented  in  the  strongest  terms  the  folly  of  spending  his  life  amid  a tribe  of 
savages,  and  recalled  to  my  uncle  the  duty  he  owed  to  his  parent,  his  king, 
and  his  country.  In  return,  my  uncle  pleaded  all  he  owed  to  his  adopted 
father.  His  friend  did  not  press  the  subject  too  keenly  at  the  moment ; 
but  having  written  to  the  commanding  officer  the  history  of  Charles’s  cap- 
tivity, brought  it  about  that  an  order  was  despatched  to  Charles,  claiming 
him  as  a British  officer,  and  commanding  him  to  join  his  regiment  with  as 
little  delay  as  possible. 

There  was  no  disputing  this  order,  unless  he  would  be  considered  a 
deserter  ; and  he  had  the  painful  duty  of  explaining  this  to  Michigan  John, 
who  was  overwhelmed  with  grief.  He  endeavored  by  every  means  in  his 
power  to  prevail  on  my  uncle  to  go  home  with  him. 

“ Return,  return,  my  son  John,  with  your  old  father.  Why  should  you 
seek  again  to  become  a white-skin?  Oh,  my  own  John,  break  not  the 
heart  of  your  Indian  father  ! ” 

Everything  was  done  to  comfort  and  console  him,  but  with  little  suc- 
cess, until  the  old  chief  made  up  his  mind  that  the  Good  Spirit  called  his 
son  away  to  his  own  people.  And  after  choosing  the  best  of  the  furs,  and 
everything  that  he  thought  would  be  valued,  he  took  a last  parting  farewell, 
and  turned  his  face  toward  Lake  Michigan. 

My  uncle  proceeded  to  New  York,  whither  his  extraordinary  adven- 
tures had  traveled  before  him  ; and  everyone  was  anxious  to  see  the  Indian 
chief.  This  desire  was  most  strongly  felt  by  the  ladies  ; and  a fair  Ameri- 
can girl,  who  heard  him  relate  his  romantic  tale  with  modesty  and  ingen- 
uousness, showed  that  she  loved  him  for  the  dangers  he  had  passed.  My 
uncle  was  too  gallant  a soldier  not  to  be  flattered  by  the  interest  she 
expressed.  Thus,  while  he  gained  a step  in  the  42d,  he  lost  his  heart  in 
New  York;  and  fearing  to  be  called  a heartless  man,  he  had  nothing  for  it 
but  to  agree  to  an  exchange  or  barter. 

The  regiment  was  ordered  to  England,  and  Charles  along  with  it.  If 
his  adventures  had  made  a sensation  in  New  York,  he  was  a still  greater 
lion  in  London.  After  remaining  a short  time  in  that  city,  my  uncle  re- 
turned home  to  his  native  Glen  to  visit  his  relations  ; and  recollecting,  after 
a reasonable  time,  that  his  heart  was  on  the  other  side  of  the  Atlantic,  and 
finding  himself  uncomfortable  without  it,  he  set  out  again  for  New  York  to 
unite  himself  to  his  lady-love,  leaving,  as  parting  gifts,  his  Indian  dress, 
tomahawk,  and  scalping  knife,  which  are  hung  up  in  the  hall  as  memorials 
of  the  true  tale  of  Michigan  John,  alias  Charles  Grant  of  Glen. 


CHAPTER  XXVII. 


THE  FIRST  SEMINOLE  WAR— HIGH-HANDED  PROCEEDINGS  OF  GENERAL 
JACKSON — END  OF  THE  WAR. 

IT  was  stated  in  a previous  chapter  that  little  trouble  was  apprehended 
from  the  fugitives  who,  at  the  close  of  the  Creek  War,  fled  in  the 
direction  of  Pensacola,  and  continued  embittered  against  the  United 
States.  It  was  soon  discovered,  however,  that  these  Indians  had  sought 
refuge  among  the  tribes  living  within  and  on  the  borders  of  the  Floridas, 
known  under  the  general  name  of  Seminoles.  Our  government  deemed  it 
necessary  to  establish  a line  of  forts  near  the  then  southern  boundary  of 
the  United  States,  and  to  garrison  them  with  regular  troops. 

The  result  of  these  precautionary  measures  was  that  peace  was  main- 
tained until  the  summer  of  1817,  when  the  forces  were  withdrawn  from  the 
posts  on  the  Georgia  frontier,  and  concentrated  at  Fort  Montgomery,  on 
the  Alabama,  considerably  westward  of  the  Georgia  line. 

It  was  about  this  time  that  a border  warfare  broke  out  between  the 
Seminoles  and  the  settlers  on  the  frontier  of  Georgia.  The  house  of  a man 
living  near  the  boundary  of  Wayne  County  was  attacked  during  his  ab- 
sence. The  Indians  shot  his  wife  and  ended  her  life  by  stabbing  and 
scalping.  Two  small  children  were  also  killed,  but  the  eldest  escaped. 
The  house  was  then  burned. 

Some  time  later  a boat,  while  ascending  the  Alabama,  was  captured 
by  the  Indians  and  about  a score  of  the  passengers  murdered.  Other 
atrocious  crimes  were  committed,  and  General  Gaines  demanded  the  sur- 
render of  the  guilty  parties.  The  Indians  refused,  claiming  that  the  first 
aggressions  were  by  the  white  men.  In  consequence  of  this  refusal,  Gem 
eral  Gaines  was  authorized  by  the  Secretary  of  War  to  remove  the  Indians 
still  remaining  on  the  lands  ceded  to  the  United  States  by  the  treaty  with 
the  Creeks.  He  was  told  that  it  might  be  proper  to  hold  some  of  them  as 
hostages  until  reparation  was  made  for  the  outrages  committed  by  the 
savages.  General  Gaines,  therefore,  ordered  Major  Twiggs  to  surround 
and  capture  an  Indian  village  called  Fowl  Town,  near  the  Florida  line. 
„ This  was  partially  done.. 

This  occurrence  gave  a more  serious  aspect  to  the  war.  The  Indians 
collected  in  large  numbers  and  attacked  Fort  Scott,  standing  within  about 
a dozen  miles  of  the  captured  Indian  village.  General  Gaines,  with  six 
hundred  regulars,  formed  the  garrison.  In  this  emergency,  General 

218 


CHARACTERISTIC  ACTS  OF  GENERAL  JACKSON. 


219 


Jackson  was  ordered  to  take  the  field.  He  was  given  command  of  the 
regular  and  militia  force,  amounting  to  eighteen  hundred  men.  The 
enemy  was  estimated  at  a thousand  more,  and  Jackson  was  directed,  if  he 
considered  his  own  force  insufficient,  to  call  on  the  Governors  of  the 
adjoining  States  for  such  militia  as  he  needed. 

Instead  of  doing  so,  Jackson  appealed  to  the  patriotism  of  the  West 
Tennesseeans,  who  had  served  under  him  in  the  late  war.  He  did  not  call 
in  vain'.  One  thousand  mounted  riflemen  and  two  companies  of  life  guards 
immediately  volunteered,  and  Jackson  appointed  his  own  officers. 

At  the  same  time,  General  Gaines  was  busily  employed  in  raising 
forces  among  the  Creek  Indians.  He  secured  sixteen  hundred,  and,  like 
Jackson,  mustered  them  into  the  service  of  the  United  States,  neither  of 
the  generals  having  the  authority  to  take  such  a course. 

General  Jackson  entered  Florida  with  a force  of  eighteen  hundred  men,, 
and  was  joined  later  by  General  MTntosh  and  his  brigade  of  sixteen  hun- 
dred Indians,  the  fruit  of  General  Gaines’  work.  Opposed  to  these,  the 
combined  forces  of  Seminoles  and  runaway  negroes  did  not  amount  to  one 
thousand  men. 

The  first  aggressive  act  was  the  destruction  of  the  Miskasmusky 
towns.  Then  the  army  advanced  upon  St.  Marks,  a feeble  Spanish  gar- 
rison. In  this  place  was  found  Alexander  Arbuthnot,  who  was  put  in 
confinement,  until  the  degree  of  his  guilt  could  be  established.  Robert  C- 
Ambrister,  formerly  a British  officer,  was  made  prisoner  at  Suwanee. 
Both  were  accused  of  inciting  the  Seminoles  to  hostilities  against  the 
United  States.  It  was  Arbuthnot  who  warned  the  Indians  of  the  march 
of  Jackson  against  them. 

The  two  men  were  tried  by  court-martial,  found  guilty,  and  Arbuthnot 
was  sentenced  to  be  hanged,  and  Ambrister  to  be  shot.  The  court  recon- 
sidered the  sentence  of  Ambrister,  and  ordered  him  to  receive  fifty  lashes 
and  one  year’s  imprisonment.  Jackson  set  aside  this  revised  sentence,  and 
the  Englishman  was  shot.  Arbuthnot,  of  course,  was  hanged. 

It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that,  at  that  time,  Florida  belonged  ta 
Spain,  though  the  only  points  over  which  she  held  control  were  Pensacola 
and  St.  Augustine.  Spain  protested  against  the  high-handed  proceedings 
of  Jackson,  and  Congress  could  do  no  less  than  appoint  a committee  of 
investigation  into  the  conduct  of  the  Seminole  War.  There  was  no  avoid- 
ing severe  censure  of  Jackson,  for  he  had  paid  little  attention  to  the  orders 
of  the  War  Department,  or  to  the  Constitution  and  laws.  It  will  be 
remembered  that,  instead  of  calling  on  the  various  States  for  their  quotas 
of  soldiers,  he  had  raised  them  on  his  own  responsibility,  appointed  the 
officers,  numbering  two  hundred  and  thirty,  out  of  whom  court-martial 
had  been  formed  to  pass  upon  the  question  of  life  and  death,  with  no 


220 


GENERAL  JACKSON’S  EXPLANATION. 


more  right  to  do  so  than  they  had  to  seize  and  try  a citizen  of  one  of  the 
sovereign  States  themselves.  Still  further,  his  entrance  into  Pensacola 
was  directly  contrary  to  orders. 

The  condemnation  of  “ Old  Hickory,”  perforce,  satisfied  Spain,  but  it 
didn’t  hurt  Jackson.  His  victory  at  New  Orleans,  a couple  of  years  be- 
fore, had  made  him  one  of  the  idols  of  the  American  nation,  and  his  cam- 
paign in  Florida  was  not  only  brilliantly  successful,  but  gained  for  us  an 
immense  tract  of  valuable  territory.  He  was  popular  with  the  masses,  and 
with  the  President,  Cabinet,  and  most  of  the  political  leaders  of  the  country. 
The  report  of  the  committee  caused  considerable  debate,  but  Congress 
passed  a resolution  acquitting  the  general  of  all  blame. 

Pensacola  surrendered  to  Jackson  on  the  27th  of  May,  and  with  its 
fall  terminated  what  may  be  called  the  First  Seminole  War.  General  Jack- 
son  thus  referred  to  what  had  been  done: 

“ The  Seminole  War  may  now  be  considered  at  a close,  tranquillity 
again  restored  to  the  southern  frontier  of  the  United  States,  and  as  long 
as  a cordon  of  military  posts  is  maintained  along  the  Gulf  of  Mexico, 
America  has  nothing  to  apprehend  from  either  foreign  or  Indian  hostilities. 
Indeed,  sir,  to  attempt  to  fortify  or  protect  an  imaginary  line,  or  to  sup- 
pose that  a frontier  on  the  thirty-first  degree  of  latitude,  in  a wilderness, 
can  be  secured  by  a cordon  of  military  posts,  while  the  Spanish  authorities 
were  not  maintained  in  the  Floridas,  that  the  country  lay  open  to  the  use 
and  excitement  of  an  enemy,  is  visionary  in  the  extreme.  On  the  immu- 
table principle,  therefore,  of  self-defense,  authorized  by  the  law  of  nature 
and  of  nations,  have  I bottomed  all  my  operations.  On  the  fact  that  the 
Spanish  officers  had  aided  and  abetted  the  Indians,  and  thereby  become  a 
party  in  hostility  against  us,  do  I justify  my  occupying  the  Spanish  for- 
tresses. Spain  has  disregarded  the  treaties  existing  with  the  American 
Government,  or  had  not  powder  to  enforce  them.  The  Indian  tribes 
within  her  territory,  and  which  she  was  bound  to  keep  at  peace,  visited 
our  citizens  with  all  the  horrors  of  savage  war.  Negro  brigades  were  es- 
tablishing themselves  when  and  where  they  pleased,  and  foreign  agents 
were  openly  and  knowingly  practicing  their  intrigues  in  this  neutral  terri- 
tory. The  immutable  principles  of  self-defense  justified,  therefore,  the 
occupancy  of  the  Floridas,  and  the  same  principles  will  warrant  the 
American  Government  in  holding  it  until  such  time  as  Spain  can  guarantee, 
by  an  adequate  military  force,  the  maintaining  of  her  authority  within  the 
colony.” 

In  February,  1819,  a treaty  was  framed  at  Washington,  by  which 
Spain  ceded  to  the  United  States  East  and  West  Florida,  including  the 
adjacent  islands.  After  some  delay  the  treaty  was  ratified,  in  October, 

1820. 


CHAPTER  XXVIII. 


THE  BLACK  HAWK  WAR — RED  BIRD — BLACK  HAWK'S  GRIEVANCES — - 
PREPARATIONS  BY  THE  GOVERNOR  AND  MILITARY  AUTHORITIES — 
GENERAL  GAINES’  MOVEMENTS— GENERAL  ATKINSON’S  EXPEDITION — 
DEFEAT  OF  MAJOR  STILLMAN — INDIAN  ALLIES — RAVAGES  OF  THE 
CHOLERA — THE  ATTACK  BY  THE  “ WARRIOR  ” — THE  DECISIVE  BATTLE 
—SURRENDER  OF  BLACK  HAWK. 

IN  the  year  1823  the  United  States  agent  held  a treaty  at  Prairie  du 
Cliien  with  the  Winnebagoes,  Menomonees,  Pottawatomies,  Chippewas, 
Sioux,  Sacs  and  Foxes,  with  a view  of  bringing  about  peace  between  the 
Sacs  and  the  other  Indians,  to  accomplish  which  bounds  were  set  to  each 
tribe.  Since  parties  from  these  various  tribes  were  continually  visiting  the 
United  States  forts,  it  was  agreed  that  they  should  be  protected  from 
molestation  while  on  the  way  back  and  forth. 

In  the  summer  of  1827,  twenty-four  Chippewas,  approaching  Fort 
Snelling,  were  set  upon  by  a band  of  Sioux,  who  killed  and  wounded  eight 
of  them.  The  commandant  captured  fear  of  the  guilty  and  delivered  them 
to  the  Chippewas,  who  immediately  shot  them.  Red  Bird,  a Sioux  chief, 
tvas  so  angered  by  what  he  considered  the  unjustifiable  interference  of  the 
commandant,  that  he  led  a war  party  against  the  Chippewas.  He  was 
defeated,  however,  and  on  his  return  to  his  people  was  jeered  at  as  being 
no  brave. 

Naturally,  perhaps,  Red  Bird  next  turned  for  revenge  to  the  whites. 
On  the  24th  of  July,  1827,  he,  with  several  dusky  desperadoes,  among 
whom  was  probably  Black  Hawk,  killed  two  persons  and  wounded  a third 
at  Prairie  du  Chien.  Buying  a keg  of  whisky  from  a trader,  they  went  to 
the  mouth  of  Bad  Axe  River.  Six  days  later,  with  his  company  increased, 
Red  Bird  waylaid  two  keel  boats,  that  had  been  conveying  commissary 
stores  to  Fort  Snelling.  The  first  escaped  with  the  loss  of  two  killed  and 
four  wounded,  and  the  other  got  away  during  the  darkness  without  particu- 
lar injury. 

In  September,  1827,  General  Atkinson,  with  a brigade  of  regulars  and 
militia,  invaded  the  Winnebago  country  and  captured  Red  Bird  and  six 
others  of  his  tribe,  who  were  imprisoned  at  Prairie  du  Chien  until  they 
could  be  given  a trial.  Red  Bird  died  in  prison.  The  trial  was  delayed  for 
a year,  and  some  were  acquitted  and  others  found  guilty.  Among  the 
former  was  Black  Hawk,  who  was  charged  with  firing  on  the  keel  boats. 


221 


222 


RESENTMENT  OF  BLACK  HAWK. 


He  was  discharged  for  want  of  evidence,  as  was  the  son  of  Red  Bird. 
Years  afterward  Black  Hawk,  in  his  published  statement,  admitted  his 
guilt  of  the  charge. 

Matters  continued  in  this  irritable  state  until  1831,  when  the  authori- 
ties became  convinced  that  efforts  were  on  foot  to  unite  all  the  In- 
dians from  Rock  River  to  Mexico  in  a general  war.  Black  Hawk  afterward 
confessed  that  this  was  the  truth. 

The  feuds  between  the  tribes  continued,  and  was  the  real  cause  of  the 
trouble,  the  parties  concerned  insisting  that  the  United  States  had  no  busi- 


1830,  some  of 


Black  Hawk’s  THE  ATTACK  0N  THE  KEEL  boats. 

Foxes  were  killed 

by  the  Sioux,  and  the  following  year  they  took  a double  revenge.  The 
authorities  demanded  the  murderers,  but  Black  Hawk  refused,  with  the 
reminder  that  they  had  not  asked  for  the  offenders  of  the  preceding  year. 

The  treaty  of  July  15,  1830,  ceded  to  the  United  States  the  lands  of 
the  Sacs  and  Foxes.  The  Sioux,  Omahas,  Iowas,  and  Ottoes,  and  several 
^©-ther  tribes,  took  part  in  the  sale,  but  Black  Hawk  was  absent.  He  was 
highly  displeased.  Keokuk  was  the  chief  who  represented  him.  He 
consented  to  remove  beyond  the  Mississippi,  and  did  his  utmost  to  per- 
suade the  tribe  to  go  with  him.  Black  Hawk  opposed,  and  began  organiz- 
ing a party  against  his  rival.  He  told  his  friends  he  would  never  consent 
to  leave  the  village.  The  Sac  land  was  on  the  point  formed  by  the  Missis- 
sippi and  Rock  rivers.  The  Indians  claimed  that  a village  had  stood  there 
fora  hundred  and  fifty  years.  The  tribe  had  usually  about  700  acres  under 
cultivation,  the  whole  extent  of  the  Sac  country  being  from  the  mouth  of 
the  Ouisconsin  to  the  Portage  des  Sioux,  nearly  to  the  mouth  of  the  Mis- 
souri, a distance  of  about  700  miles. 


/<fs 


^<-tC^  {rtcc 1 


P*  ib 


SuAN 

'2iiWoj- 


yj(w?^  M Xo^~  'ic'-ml 


Q,k«^ 

jtCu. 


W~d  K 

- f^'W  }c^ 


INJUSTICE  TOWARD  THE  SACS  AND  FOXES.  223 

Incidents  were  continually  occurring  to  add  to  the  growing  irritation. 
Some  whites  robbed  an  Indian  of  his  bees  and  all  his  furs,  and  another 
party,  meeting  Black  Hawk  in  the  woods  one  day,  while  hunting,  beat  him 
so  unmercifully  that  it  was  several  weeks  before  he  fully  recovered. 
Their  excuse  was  that  he  had  done  them  some  injury.  The  angered  chief 
finally  determined  to  go  to  war. 

He  was  sorely  disappointed,  however,  in  his  estimate  of  the  strength 
of  those  who  united  with  him.  He  had  been  led  to  expect  that  the  Chippe- 
was,  Ottawas,  Winnebagoes,  and  Pottawatomies  would  join  him,  but  they 
held  aloof.  They  had  not  forgotten  the  lessons  of  the  preceding  half- 
century  and  more. 

Black  Hawk  convinced  Keokuk  that  he  had  made  a great  mistake  in 
selling  the  Sac  village,  and  that  chief  promised  to  go  to  the  authorities  and 
try  to  persuade  them  to  exchange  the  village  for  some  other  land.  The 
Galena  lead  mines  were  attracting  much  attention,  and  several  thousand 
miners  had  flocked  thither.  Black  Hawk  said  he  was  willing  to  yield  the 
lead  mines  for  the  sake  of  retaining  the  corn  fields  and  their  burying 
ground. 

Sanguine  that  some  such  arrangement  would  be  made,  the  Sacs  set  out 
on  their  winter  hunt,  in  the  fall  of  1830,  and  on  their  return  found  that 
the  despoilers  had  taken  possession  of  their  village.  The  families  of  the 
intruders  were  in  their  wigwams;  their  own  wives  and  children  were 
huddled  on  the  bank  of  the  Mississippi,  without  shelter  ! What  wonder 
that  the  souls  of  the  warriors  were  filled  with  resentment  ! 

It  was  news  of  this  outrage  that  brought  the  warriors  back  from  their 
winter  hunt  sooner  than  usual.  In  their  anger,  they  retook  possession  of 
their  own  homes.  The  alarmed  whites  said  they  would  occupy  them 
together.  They  did  so  for  a time,  treating  the  women  and  children  of 
the  Indians  with  great  indignity.  In  one  case,  they  beat  a young  Sac 
to  death.  The  white  intruders  brought  ardent  spirits  with  them,  and  did 
much  to  demoralize  their  detested  neighbors.  

The  Indians  had  been  warned  that  they  must  not  return  to  the  east 
side  of  the  river,  but  in  the  spring  of  1831,  the  Sacs  recrossed  the  stream 
in  a body  to  their  old  corn  fields,  and  in  a threatening  manner  took  posses- 
sion. They  had  the  unquestioned  right  to  occupy  the  government  lands 
so  long  as  they  remained  unsold.  The  settlers,  however,  raised  a great 
clamor  against  the  encroachment  of  the  Indians,  and  finally  Governor 
Reynolds  declared  the  State  of  Illinois  invaded  by  hostile  Indians.  He 
wrote  from  Belleville  (then  the  capital),  on  the  28th  of  May,  1831,  to  General 
Gaines,  military  commander  of  the  Western  Department  to  that  effect, 
notifying  him  that  he  had  called  on  seven  hundred  of  the  militia  of  the 
State  to  be  mounted  and  ready  for  service. 


22  4 


VIOLATION  OF  THE  TREATY  BY  THE  WHITES. 


General  Gaines  replied  the  following  day  that  he  had  ordered  six 
companies  of  regular  troops  to  proceed  from  Jefferson  Barracks,  on  May 
30,  to  the  Sac  village,  and,  if  necessary,  he  would  add  two  companies 
more  from  Prairie  du  Chien. 

General  Gaines  proceeded  to  the  threatened  point,  and,  by  his  calm- 
ness and  good  judgment,  settled  the  trouble,  which,  after  all,  amounted  to 
little.  General  Gaines,  under  date  of  June  20,  1831,  gives  the  following 
account,  which  agrees  with  that  of  Black  Hawk: 

“ I have  visited  the  Rock  River  villages,  with  a view  to  ascertain  the 
localities,  and,  as  far  as  possible,  the  disposition  of  the  Indians.  They 
confirm  me  in  the  opinion  I had  previously  formed,  that,  whatever  may 
be  their  feelings  of  hostility,  they  are  resolved  to  abstain  from  the  use  of 
the  tomahawk  and  firearms,  except  in  self-defense.  But  few  of  the 
warriors  were  to  be  seen  ; their  women  and  children  and  their  old  men 
appeared  anxious,  and  at  first  somewhat  confused,  but  none  attempted  to 
run  off.  Having  previously  notified  their  chiefs  that  I would  have  nothing 
more  to  say  to  them,  unless  they  should  desire  to  inform  me  of  their 
intention  to  move  forthwith,  as  I had  directed  them,  I did  not  speak  to 
them,  though  within  fifty  yards  of  many  of  them.  I had  with  me  on 
board  the  steamboat  some  artillery  and  two  companions  of  infantry. 
Their  village  is  immediately  on  Rock  River,  and  so  situated  that  I could 
from  the  steamboat  destroy  all  their  bark  houses  (the  only  kind  of  houses 
they  have),  in  a few  minutes,  with  the  force  now  with  me,  probably  with- 
out the  loss  of  a man.  But  I am  resolved  to  abstain  from  firing  a shot 
without  some  bloodshed,  or  some  manifest  purpose  to  shed  blood,  on  the 
part  of  the  Indians.  I have  already  induced  nearly  one-third  of  them  to 
cross  the  Mississippi  to  their  own  land.  The  residue,  however,  say,  as  the 
friendly  chiefs  report,  that  they  will  never  move  ; and,  what  is  very  un- 
common, their  women  urge  their  hostile  husbands  to  fight  rather  than  to 
move  and  thus  to  abandom  their  homes.” 

A week  later,  Black  Hawk  met  General  Gaines  in  council  and  told 
him  distinctly  he  would  not  move.  The  general,  finding  that  nothing 
could  be  effected,  awaited  the  arrival  of  the  militia,  who  appeared  on  the 
25th  of  June.  Thereupon,  the  Indians  fled  across  the  Mississippi,  and, 
the  following  day,  the  army  took  possession  of  the  Sac  village,  without 
the  firing  of  a gun.  On  the  27th,  Black  Hawk  displayed  a white  flag,  and 
; a treaty  was  made.  General  Gaines  believed  all  trouble  was  ended,  and  so 
it  probably  would  have  been  had  the  whites  observed  the  provisions  of 
the  treaty.  The  Indians  had  been  promised  corn  to  supply  the  wants  of 
their  families,  but  the  amount  was  so  meager  that  they  began  to  suffer. 
In  this  emergency,  a party  of  Sacs,  to  quote  the  language  of  Black 
Hawk,  crossed  the  river  “ to  steal  corn  from  their  own  fields.” 


GENERAL  ATKINSON’S  EXTEDITION. 


22r 


In  the  spring  of  1832  General  Atkinson  set  out  for  the  Upper  Mis- 
souri with  the  sixth  regiment  of  infantry,  at  whose  approach  Black  Hawk 
and  his  warriors  left  their  camp  on  the  Mississippi  and  ascended  Rock 
River.  He  hoped  by  taking  this  course  to  be  re-enforced  by  the  Pottawat- 
omies,  Winnebagoes,  and  Kickapoos,  but  they  declined  to  enter  into  the 
hopeless  conflict. 

On  his  way  up  the  river,  Black  Hawk  received  several  expresses  from 
General  Atkinson,  ordering  him  to  leave  the  country.  The  chief  replied 


that  he  would  do  as  he  chose ; that  he  was  on  his  way  to  the  Prophet’s 
village  to  make  corn,  as  he  had  been  invited  to  do.  If  the  whites  chose 
to  attack  him,  he  was  not  afraid,  but  he  would  not  begin  hostilities. 
Instead  of  pursuing  Black  Hawk  up  Rock  River,  Atkinson  halted  at 
Dixon’s  Ferry  and  waited  for  re-enforcements.  He  found  that  General 
Whitesides  had  preceded  him  to  that  point,  with  a considerable  force  of 
mounted  men,  and  a reconnoissance  was  decided  upon. 


226 


CIVILIZED  AND  SAVAGE  WARFARE. 


About  the  middle  of  May,  Major  Stillman,  with  270  men,  advanced 
toward  Sycamore  Creek.  Learning  of  their  coming,  Black  Hawk  sent  out 
three  of  his  warriors  with  a flag  of  truce,  and  an  invitation  for  the  officers 
to  visit  his  camp.  The  whites  paid  no  attention  to  the  flag,  but  took  the 
bearers  prisoners.  Black  Hawk  had  sent  five  others  to  look  after  the  first. 
They  were  pursued  and  two  killed.  This  was  civilized  war  with  a 
vengeance ! 

•When  the  party  that  had  killed  the  two  messengers  returned  and  told 
what  had  taken  place,  night  was  closing  in.  All  mounted  their  horses  and 
hurried  forward.  Black  Hawk  was  not  expecting  an  attack,  and  he  had  only 
about  forty  of  his  warriors  with  him,  the  others  being  absent  on  a hunting 
excursion.  On  learning  that  two  of  his  men  had  been  murdered,  the  war- 
whoop  was  sounded  and  preparations  made  to  meet  the  whites. 

The  latter  advanced  in  disorderly  fashion  to  Sycamore  Creek.  The 
Indians  quietly  waited  till  enough  had  crossed,  when  they  fiercely  attacked 
them.  The  situation  of  the  soldiers  became  so  desperate  that  Major  Still- 
man, who  was  at  the  rear,  ordered  a retreat.  The  forty  Indians  put  the 
two  hundred  and  seventy  to  flight,  killing  a dozen  and  losing  only  two  or 
three. 

As  a proof  of  the  superiority  of  the  aboriginal  telegraph  over  that  of 
the  whites  in  those  days,  it  may  be  stated  that  a runner  from  Black  Hawk 
and  his  allies  arrived  with  the  news  of  the  victory  at  Des  Moines  Rapids 
twenty-four  hours  ahead  of  the  express  sent  by  Governor  Reynolds  to  the 
same  point. 

At  the  beginning  of  the  troubles  many  Menomonees  and  Sioux,  who 
hated  the  Sacs,  offered  their  help  to  the  whites.  Their  offer  had  been 
declined,  but  now  it  was  gladly  accepted.  Several  hundred  were  soon 
engaged  in  doing  all  they  could  to  help  extirpate  Black  Hawk  and  his 
band. 

The  Sacs  conducted  themselves  much  after  the  manner  of  the  Apaches 
of  the  Southwest,  striking  in  the  most  unexpected  places  and  at  the  most 
unexpected  times.  They  avoided  the  large  companies  of  soldiers,  and 
many  of  their  acts  were  atrocious.  General  Dodge,  not  to  be  outdone  in 
that  line,  scalped  twelve  Indians  whom  he  had  killed.  Tire  barbarities 
continued  almost  without  intermission  for  months. 

Congress  having  set  on  foot  measures  for  the  relief  of  the  frontiers, 
General  Scott  was  ordered  from  the  sea-board  with  nine  companies  of 
artillery.  Nine  companies  were  also  ordered  from  the  lakes,  and  two  com- 
panies from  Baton  Rouge.  It  was  intended  by  these  vigorous  measures  to 
end  the  war. 

It  may  be  said  in  this  place  that  two  men  who  took  part  in  the  Black 
Hawk  War  were  afterward  heard  of  again.  One  of  them  was  Abraham 


RAVAGES  OF  THE  CHOLERA. 


227 


Lincoln,  who  commanded  a company,  and  the  other  was  Jefferson  Davis, 
who,  as  a United  States  officer,  mustered  him  and  his  soldiers  into  the 
service  of  his  country. 

But  the  American  troops  were  called  upon  to  encounter  an  unex- 
pected enemy,  and  one  a hundred-fold  more  dangerous  than  Black  Hawk. 
During  the  summer  of  1832  the  cholera  raged  with  awful  virulence  in 
many  parts  of  the  country.  The  detachment  of  troops  ordered  from 
Fortress  Monroe  was  attacked  on  the  route  and  all  rendered  unfit  to  take 


THE  DESERTERS  IN  THE  WOODS. 


the  field.  Several  of  the  companies  were  broken  up.  In  a corps  under 
the  command  of  Colonel  Twiggs,  numbering  208  men,  only  nine  were  left 
alive ! 

A correspondent  writing  from  Detroit  to  the  Philadelphia  Inquirer , 
under  date  of  July  12,  gives  this  horrifying  picture  : 

“ Of  the  three  companies  of  artillery  under  Colonel  Twiggs,  and  two 
or  three  companies  more  of  infantry  with  them,  few  remain.  These 
troops,  you  will  recollect,  landed  from  the  steamboat  Henry  Clay,  below 
Fort  Gratiot.  A great  number  of  them  have  been  swept  off  by  the  dis- 
ease. Nearly  all  the  others  have  deserted.  Of  the  deserters,  scattered  all 
over  the  country,  some  have  died  in  the  woods,  and  their  bodies  been 
devoured  by  wolves.  Others  have  taken  their  flight  to  the  world  of 


228 


HOPELESSNESS  OF  THE  INDIAN  STRUGGLE. 


spirits,  without  a companion  to  close  their  eyes  or  console  the  last 
moments  of  their  existence.  Their  straggling  survivors  are  occasionally 
seen  marching,  some  of  them  know  not  whither,  with  their  knapsacks  on 
their  backs,  shunned  by  the  terrified  inhabitants  as  the  source  of  a mortal 
pestilence.  Colonel  Twiggs  himself  and  Surgeon  Everett  are  very  low. 

“You  will  remember  that  the  troops  under  Colonel  Cummings,  sev- 
eral of  whom  died  here,  embarked  on  board  the  steamboat  William  Penn 
on  Sunday  last  for  Chicago.  The  sickness  among  them  increased  as  they 
proceeded  to  Fort  Gratiot,  and  became  so  great  by  the  time  they  arrived 
there  that  they  were  disembarked  and  have  returned  to  the  vicinity  of 
this  city  and  encamped  at  Springwells,  about  three  miles  below  the  town. 
Seventeen  or  eighteen  of  them  have  died,  and  some  still  remain  sick, 
probably  never  to  recover.  One-half  of  the  command  of  General  Scott, 
ordered  to  Chicago  by  the  lakes,  will  never  reach  him,  a large  portion  of 
them  dying;  a still  larger  number  deserting  from  an  overwhelming  dread 
of  the  disease,  and  the  residue  obliged  to  march  back  again.” 

General  Scott  informed  General  Atkinson  that  he  could  not  co- 
operate with  him  without  endangering  the  troops  already  in  the  field,  and 
directed  him  to  act  without  reference  to  his  forces. 

Black  Hawk,  with  a thousand  warriors,  concentrated  at  a point  be- 
tween Rock  and  Ouisconsin  rivers,  with  the  purpose  of  meeting  the  whites 
in  a decisive  battle.  General  Atkinson,  having  nearly  double  the  number 
of  men,  pressed  on  to  meet  him,  but  the  leader  was  too  wily  to  incur  such 
a risk,  and  withdrew  into  the  wilderness.  General  Atkinson  followed, 
enduring  great  hardships,  continually  incurring  the  danger  of  ambuscade, 
but  Black  Hawk  could  not  be  brought  to  a stand. 

Meanwhile,  General  Dodge  was  about  forty  miles  from  Fort  Winne- 
bago, following  an  Indian  trail.  He  attacked  the  party  and  slew  sixteen, 
but  the  rest  escaped.  At  a loss  where  the  enemy  would  be  found,  General 
Dodge  recommended  that  a cannon  should  be  placed  on  the  river  to  cut 
off  the  Indians,  thinking  it  likely  they  had  descended  the  Ouisconsin  and 
fled  across  the  stream. 

Black  Hawk,  seeing  that  his  whole  force  could  not  escape  together, 
approached  the  Mississippi  some  distance  above  the  mouth  of  the  Ouiscon- 
sin. For  the  safety  of  his  warriors,  he  let  most  of  the  women  and  children 
descend  the  river  in  canoes.  The  majority  were  captured  by  the  whites, 
quite  a number,  however,  being  drowned. 
r Black  Hawk  approached  with  his  main  body,  intending  to  cross,  but 
was  scared  back  by  the  sight  of  the  steamboat  Warrior . The  chief  was  so 
touched  by  the  suffering  of  the  women  and  children,  by  the  starving  con- 
dition of  his  men,  and  the  utter  hopelessness  of  continuing  the  struggle, 
I that  he  decided  to  surrender.  Accordingly,  he  sent  a hundred  and  fifty 


CAPTAIN  THROCKMORTON’S  ACCOUNT. 


229 


warriors  to  the  edge  of  the  stream  with  a flag  of  truce.  Whether  the  in- 
terpreter on  board  the  steamer  was  too  frightened  to  understand  the  calls 
made  to  the  captain,  or  whether  all  were  suspicious  of  an  attempt  to  decoy 
them,  is  uncertain.  Black  Hawk  insisted  that  his  only  purpose  was  to 
submit  and  end  the  war.  Captain  Throckmorton,  of  the  Warrior , thus 
describes  the  incident : 

“I  was  dispatched  with  the  Warrior  alone  to  Wapashaw’s  village,  120 
miles  above  Prairie  du  Chien,  to  inform  them  of  the  approach  of  the  Sacs, 
and  to  order  down  all  the  friendly  Indians  to  Prairie  du  Chien.  On  our 
way  down  we  met  one  of  the  Sioux  band,  who  informed  us  that  the  Indians 
(our  enemies)  were  on  Bad  Axe  River,  to  the  number  of  400.  We  stopped 


THE  ATTACK  OF  THE  “ WARRIOR. 


to  cut  some  wood,  and  prepared  for  action.  About  four  o’clock  on  Wednes- 
day afternoon  (August  1),  we  found  the  gentlemen  where  he  stated  he  had 
left  them.  As  we  neared  them,  they  raised  a white  flag  and  endeavored  to 
decoy  us,  but  we  were  a little  too  old  for  them  ; for,  instead  of  landing,  we 
ordered  them  to  send  a ooat  on  board,  which  they  declined.  After  some 
fifteen  minutes’  delay,  giving  them  time  to  remove  a few  of  their  women 
and  children,  we  let  slip  a six-pounder,  loaded  with  canister,  followed  by  a 
severe  fire  of  musketry  ; and  if  ever  you  saw  straight  blankets  you  would 
have  seen  them  there.  I fought  them  at  anchor  most  of  the  time,  and  we 
were  all  very  much  exposed.  I have  a ball  which  came  in  close  by  where  I 
was  standing,  and  passed  through  the  bulkhead  of  the  wheel-room.  We 


230 


PURSUIT  OF  THE  INDIANS  BY  GEN.  ATKINSON. 


fought  them  for  about  an  hour  or  more,  until  our  wood  began  to  fail,  and, 
night  coming  on,  we  left  and  went  on  to  the  Prairie.  This  little  fight  cost 
them  twenty-three  killed,  and,  of  course,  a great  many  wounded.  We  never 
lost  a man,  and  had  but  one  wounded — shot  through  the  leg.  The  next 
morning,  before  we  could  get  back  again,  on  account  of  a heavy  fog,  they 
had  the  whole  of  General  Atkinson’s  army  upon  them.  We  found  them  at 
it,  walked  in,  and  took  a hand  ourselves.  The  first  shot  from  the  Warrior 
laid  out  three.  I can  hardly  tell  you  anything  about  it,  for  I am  in  great 
haste,  as  I am  now  on  my  way  to  the  field  again.  The  army  lost  eight  or 
nine  killed,  and  seventeen  wounded,  whom  we  brought  down.  One  died  on 
deck  last  night.  We  brought  down  thirty-six  prisoners,  women  and  chil- 
dren. There  is  no  fun  in  fighting  Indians,  particularly  at  this  season,  when 
the  grass  is  bright.” 

The  combined  army,  numbering  1600  men,  under  General  Atkinson, 
crossed  over  to  the  north  side  of  the  Ouisconsin  at  Helena,  on  the  28th  and 
29th  of  July.  They  marched  north  with  a view  of  intersecting  the  Indian 
trail.  It  was  discovered  five  miles  out,  leading  toward  the  Mississippi,  and 
supposed  to  be  about  four  days  old.  In  his  eagerness  to  overtake  the  In- 
dians, General  Atkinson  left  the  baggage  wagons  behind,  and  made  a 
forced  march. 

The  country  through  which  the  trail  led,  between  the  Ouisconsin  bluffs 
and  the  Kickapoo  River,  was  one  continued  series  of  mountains.  Reach- 
ing the  summit  of  an  almost  perpendicular  hill,  they  were  obliged  to  de- 
scend an  equally  abrupt  slope  on  the  other  side.  Deep  ravines  with  muddy 
banks  separated  these  mountains.  The  woods  were  heavy  and  progress 
difficult,  but  the  army  pushed  forward  with  so  much  vigor  that  they  gained 
rapidly  on  the  Indians,  who  could  not  have  known  that  their  enemies  were 
on  their  trail,  or  such  an  advantage  would  not  have  been  secured  by  their 
pursuers. 

On  the  fourth  night  from  Helena,  and  at  a late  encampment  of  the 
enemy,  was  found  an  old  Sac,  from  whrom  it  was  learned  that  the  Indians 
had  gone  to  the  Mississippi,  and  intended  to  cross  on  the  following  day, 
August  2.  The  horses  were  so  worn  out  and  the  men  so  exhausted  by 
their  laborious  march,  that  General  Atkinson  ordered  a halt  for  a few 
hours.  At  two  o’clock  the  bugles  sounded  for  the  march  to  the  Missis- 
sippi, ten  miles  distant.  Twenty  volunteer  spies  were  sent  in  advance  of 
the  army. 

Half  the  distance  to  the  river  was  passed,  when  one  of  the  spies  ran 
back  with  word  that  they  had  seen  th.e  enemy’s  picket  guard.  The  march 
was  hastened,  and,  a few  minutes  later,  firing  was  heard  between  the  spies, 
a quarter  of  a mile  in  advance,  and  the  Indian  pickets.  The  savages  were 
driven  from  hill  to  hill,  firing  briskly  at  the  spies,  who  pressed  them  close, 


DEFEAT  OF  THE  INDIANS.  23I 

until  the  warriors  joined  the  main  body  on  the  bank  of  the  river,  where  it 
was  apparent  the  real  struggle  must  take  place. 

To  prevent  the  escape  of  the  band  up  or  down  stream,  the  right  wing 
was  ordered  to  approach  the  river  above  the  Indian  encampment  and  move 
down  upon  them.  The  left  wing  marched  in  the  main  trail  of  the  enemy, 
and  the  rest  in  the  center.  In  this  order,  the  force  descended  the  almost 
perpendicular  cliff  and  entered  a depressed  valley,  heavily  timbered,  and 
with  a dense  growth  of  brush,  weeds,  and  grass.  Sloughs,  deep  ravines,  and 
old  logs  were  so  plentiful  that  the  enemy  had  the  best  chance  to  make  a 
good  defense. 

A heavy  fire  was  exchanged,  when  the  Indians  scrambled  from  then 
first  hiding  place  and  sought  another.  Then  the  assault  became  so  impetu* 


SURRENDER  OF  BLACK  HAWK. 


ous  that  the  savages  were  scattered  right  and  left,  and  all  slain,  with  the 
exception  of  a few  who  leaped  into  a slough  of  the  Mississippi  and  swam 
across.  Meanwhile,  the  force  coming  down  the  river  fell  in  with  other 
Indians,  and  routed  and  slew  most  of  them. 

The  battle  lasted  three  hours,  and,  after  the  Indians  fell  back,  became 
little  more  than  a massacre.  A number  of  the  women  and  children  were 
accidentally  killed,  as  it  was  claimed,  and  fifty  of  them  taken  prisoners. 
Hundreds  of  women  and  children,  on  being  driven  to  the  bank  of  the 
Mississippi,  sprang  in  and  attempted  to  escape  by  swimming,  but  the  sharp- 
shooters standing  on  shore  picked  off  nearly  every  one  of  them. 

The  loss  of  the  Americans  in  killed  and  wounded  was  twenty-seven. 
That  of  the  Indians  could  not  be  accurately  learned,  but  it  must  have  been 
nearly  two  hundred. 


232 


SURRENDER  OF  BLACK  HAWK. 


In  the  flurry,  Black  Hawk  managed  to  make  his  escape,  but  he  fled  in 
such  haste  that  he  left  all  his  personal  property  behind  him.  Among  his 
papers  was  found  a certificate  of  his  having  fought  bravely  against  the 
United  States  during  the  last  war.  This  was  signed  by  British  officers. 

Three  days  later,  a party  of  Sioux  came  into  camp  and  asked  permis- 
sion to  follow  up  the  fugitive  Sacs.  On  the  same  day  the  army  started  to 
go  down  to  Prairie  du  Chien,  forty  miles  away,  to  await  further  orders.  At 
that  point,  the  Winnebagoes  were  daily  bringing  in  prisoners  and  scalps. 
General  Scott  and  his  staff  left  Galena  for  Prairie  du  Chien  on  the  morning 
of  the  6th,  on  the  Warrior , his  purpose  being  to  join  General  Atkinson. 

This  battle,  as  was  anticipated,  was  the  finishing  stroke  to  the  Black 
Hawk  war.  General  Atkinson  directed  Keokuk  to  send  out  messengers  to 
demand  the  surrender  of  the  rest  of  the  hostiles,  and  to  capture  Black  Hawk, 
and  bring  him  in,  alive  or  dead. 

The  chief,  with  a small  party,  had  fled  to  the  Winnebago  village  at 
Prairie  la  Cross.  There  he  told  the  chief  he  wished  to  surrender  himself 
to  the  whites,  who  were  welcome  to  kill  him  if  they  chose  to  do  so.  The 
squaws  made  him  a dress  of  white  deerskins,  which  he  wore  when  he  set 
out  voluntarily  for  Prairie  du  Chien,  with  the  two  Winnebagoes  sent  after 
him. 

On  the  27th  of  August,  1833,  shortly  before  noon,  Black  Hawk  and  his 
companion,  known  as  The  Prophet,  were  taken  into  the  presence  of  General 
Street  at  Prairie  du  Chien,  and  delivered  up  to  him. 


CHAPTER  XXIX. 


BLACK  HAWK’S  ORATORY— HIS  VISIT  TO  WASHINGTON— IMPRISONMENT 
AND  RELEASE — HIS  RETURN  HOME — HIS  HUMILIATION — DEATH  OF 
THE  SAC  LEADER. 

WHILE  Black  Hawk  cannot  be  compared  in  ability  to  Tecumseh,  yet 
he  possessed  many  traits  which  raised  him  above  the  level  of  his  race. 


That  he  suffered  wrong  from  the  whites  will  be  admitted  by  all,  and  it  is 


hard  to  restrain  sympathy  for  him  and  his  people,  who  were  driven  out  of 


their  homes  that  had  belonged  to  the  nation  for  more  than  a hundred  years. 


He  was  personally  brave,  but  showed  no  special  generalship  in  the  handling 


of  his  forces. 


Black  Hawk’s  skill  in  oratory  has  probably  given  him  his  greatest 


fame.  Many  of  his  speeches  were  made  under  circumstances 


allowed  them  to  be  preserved  ; and,  though  we  cannot  help  suspecting  that 
they  have  been  liberally  “revised,”  in  many  instances,  by  admiring  friends, 
yet  a certain  poetical  eloquence  was  his  own.  In  a record  of  wars  and  vio- 
lence, some  of  these  specimens  will  serve  to  lighten  the  tragical  narrative, 
and  are  worthy  of  preservation  as  proofs  of  the  peculiar  aptitude  of  tbe 
aboriginal  race  in  that  direction. 


When  Black  Hawk  entered  the  presence  of  General  Street,  as  a pris- 
oner, he  addressed  him  : _ 


“You  have  taken  me  prisoner  with  all  my  warriors.  I am  much 
grieved,  for  I expected,  if  I did  not  defeat  you,  to  hold  out  much  longer, 
and  give  you  more  trouble  before  I surrendered.  I tried  hard  to  bring  you 
into  ambush,  but  your  last  general  understands  Indian  fighting.  The  first 
one  was  not  so  wise.  When  I saw  that  I could  not  beat  you  by  Indian 
fighting,  I determined  to  rush  on  you,  and  fight  you  face  to  face.  I fought 
hard.  But  your  guns  were  well  aimed.  The  bullets  flew  like  birds  in  tbe 
air,  and  whizzed  by  our  ears  like  the  wind  through  the  trees  in  winter. 
My  warriors  fell  around  me;  it  began  to  look  dismal.  I saw  my  evil  day 
at  hand.  The  sun  rose  dim  on  us  in  the  morning  and  at  night  it  sunk  in  a 
dark  cloud,  and  looked  like  a ball  of  fire.  That  was  the  last  sun  that  shone 
on  Black  Hawk.  His  heart  is  dead,  and  no  longer  beats  quick  in  his 
bosom.  He  is  now  a prisoner  to  the  white  man  ; they  will  do  with  him  as 
they  wish.  But  he  can  stand  torture,  and  is  not  afraid  of  death.  He  is  no 
coward.  Black  Hawk  is  an  Indian. 

“He  has  done  nothing  for  which  an  Indian  ought  to  be  ashamed.  He 


233 


234 


BLACK  HAWK’S  ADDRESS  TO  GENERAL  STREET. 


has  fought  for  his  countrymen,  the  squaws,  and  pappooses,  against  white 
men,  who  came  year  after  year  to  cheat  him  and  take  away  their  lands. 
You  know  the  cause  of  our  making  war.  It  is  known  to  all  white  men. 
They  ought  to  be  ashamed  of  it.  The  white  men  despise  the  Indians  and 
drive  them  from  their  homes.  But  the  Indians  are  not  deceitful.  The 
white  men  speak  bad  of  the  Indian  and  look  at  him  spitefully.  But  the 
Indian  does  not  tell  lies;  Indians  do  not  steal. 

“An  Indian  who  is  as  bad  as  the  white  men  could  not  live  in  our 
nation  ; he  would  be  put  to  death  and  eat  up  by  the  wolves.  The  white 
men  are  bad  schoolmasters ; they  carry  false  looks  and  deal  in  false  ac- 
tions; they  smile  in  the  face  of  the  poor  Indian  to  cheat  him  ; they  shake 
them  by  the  hand  to  gain  their  confidence,  to  make  them  drunk,  to  deceive 
them,  and  ruin  our  wives.  We  told  them  to  let  us  alone,  and  keep  away 
from  us  ; but  they  followed  on,  and  beset  our  path  as  they  coiled  them- 
selves among  us,  like  a snake.  They  poisoned  us  by  their  touch.  We 
were  not  safe.  We  lived  in  danger.  We  were  becoming  like  them,  hypo- 
crites and  liars,  adulterers,  lazy  drones,  all  talkers  and  no  workers. 

‘‘We  looked  up  to  the  Great  Spirit.  We  went  to  our  great  father. 
We  were  encouraged.  His  great  council  gave  us  fair  words  and  big  prom- 
ises; but  we  got  no  satisfaction.  Things  were  growing  worse.  There 
were  no  deer  in  the  forest.  The  opossum  and  beaver  were  fled  ; the 
springs  were  drying  up,  and  our  squaws  and  papposes  without  victuals  to 
keep  them  from  starving;  we  called  a great  council  and  built  a large  fire. 
The  spirit  of  our  fathers  arose  and  spoke  to  us  to  avenge  our  wrongs  or 
die.  We  all  spoke  before  the  council  fire.  It  was  warm  and  pleasant. 
We  set  up  the  war-whoop,  and  dug  up  the  tomahawk ; our  knives  were 
.ready,  and  the  heart  of  Black  Hawk  swelled  high  in  his  bosom  when  he  led 
his  warriors  to  battle.  He  is  satisfied.  He  will  go  to  the  world  of  spirits 
contented.  He  has  done  his  duty.  His  father  will  meet  him  there  and 
commend  him. 

“ Black  Hawk  is  a true  Indian  and  disdains  to  cry  like  a woman.  He 
feels  for  his  wife,  his  children,  and  friends.  But  he  does  not  care  for  him- 
self. He 'cares  for  his  nation  and  the  Indians.  They  will  suffer.  He 
laments  their  fate.  The  white  men  do  not  scalp  the  head  ; but  they  do 
worse — they  poison  the  heart ; it  is  not  pure  with  them.  His  countrymen 
will  not  be  scalped,  but  they  will,  in  a few  years,  become  like  the  white 
men,  so  that  you  can’t  trust  them,  and  there  must  be,  as  in  the  white  settle- 
ments, nearly  as  many  officers  as  men,  to  take  care  of  them  and  keep  them 
in  order. 

“ Farewell,  my  nation ! Black  Hawk  tried  to  save  you  and  avenge 
your  wrongs.  He  drank  the  blood  of  some  of  the  whites.  He  has  been 
taken  prisoner  and  his  plans  are  stopped.  He  can  do  no  more.  He  is 


TERMS  OF  THE  TREATY.  235 

near  his  end.  His  sun  is  setting,  and  he  will  rise  no  more.  Farewell  to 
Black  Hawk.  ” 

The  Indian  prisoners  and  their  guards  went  on  board  the  steamer 
Winnebago  on  the  7th  of  September,  and  were  taken  down  the  river  to 
Jefferson  Barracks,  where  they  were  put  in  irons.  Besides  Black  Hawk 
and  his  companion,  The  Prophet,  there  were  eleven  chiefs  of  the  Sacs  and 
Foxes.  - 

Black  Hawk  at  this  time  was  about  fifty  years  of  age,  though  he 
looked  much  older.  Although  brought  up  among  the  Sacs  and  always 
identifying  himself  with  them,  he  was  a Pottawatomie  by  birth.  He  was 
six  feet  in  height  and  finely  formed. 

During  the  same  month  the  United  States  made  a treaty  with  the 
Winnebagoes  and  also  with  the  Sacs  and  Foxes.  The  former  ceded  all  their 
valuable  lands,  south  of  the  Ouisconsin  and  east  of  the  Mississippi,  amount- 
ing to  4,600,000  acres.  The  treaty  with  the  Sacs  and  Foxes  secured 
6,000,000  acres,  and,  besides  being  of  excellent  quality,  it  contains  rich 
lead  deposits. 

In  payment  for  this  cession,  the  United  States  agreed  “To  pay  an 
annuity  of  $20,000  annually  for  thirty  years ; to  support  a blacksmith  and 
gunsmith  in  addition  to  those  then  employed  ; to  pay  the  debts  of  the 
tribes;  to  supply  provisions  ; and,  as  a reward  for  the  fidelity  of  Keokuk 
and  the  friendly  band,  to  allow  a reservation  to  be  made  for  them  of  forty 
square  miles,  on  the  Iowa  River,  to  include  Keokuk’s  principal  village.” 

The  same  treaty  required  that  Black  Hawk,  his  two  sons,  The  Prophet 
Naopope,  and  five  other  warriors  of  the  hostile  band  were  to  remain  in  the 
hands  of  the  whites,  as  hostages,  during  the  pleasure  of  the  President  of 
the  United  States. 

April  22,  the  captive  Indians  arrived  in  Washington,  and  the  next  day 
Black  Hawk  had  a long  interview  with  President  Jackson.  It  is  said  that 
on  meeting  the  President  his  first  greeting  was,  “ I am  a man  and  you  are 
another.” 

“Old  Hickory,”  as  detailed  elsewhere,  had  met  and  fought  Indians, 
and  no  one  understood  their  makeup  better  than  he.  He  greeted  his 
visitor  kindly,  and,  after  having  the  articles  of  dress  provided  for  them 
exhibited,  he  told  him  they  would  be  delivered  to  him  for  distribution. 
He  then  said  they  would  have  to  leave  shortly  for  Fortress  Monroe  and 
stay  there  contented,  until  he  gave  them  permission  to  return  to  their 
country.  That  date  depended  upon  the  conduct  of  the  Indians,  who  he 
hoped  would  soon  evince  good  feelings. 

During  the  interview  Black  Hawk  gave  a history  of  the  cause  of  the 
war,  saying  : v 

“We  did  not  expect  to  conquer  the  whites;  no.  They  had  too  many 


236 


BLACK  HAWK’S  TOUR. 


houses,  too  many  men.  I took  up  the  hatchet,  for  my  part,  to  revenge 
injuries  which  my  people  could  no  longer  endure.  Had  I borne  them 
longer  without  striking,  my  people  would  have  said,  ‘ Black  Hawk  is  a 
woman  ; he  is  too  old  to  be  a chief ; he  is  n,o  Sac/  These  reflections  caused 
me  to  raise  the  war-whoop.  I say  no  more  of  it;  it  is  known  to  you. 
Keokuk  once  was  here  ; you  took  him  by  the  hand,  and,  when  he  wished 
to  return  to  his  home,  you  were  willing.  Black  Hawk  expects  that,  like 
Keokuk,  we  shall  be  permitted  to  return,  too.” 

The  President  assured  him  that  he  was  acquainted  with  all  the  facts 
of  the  war,  and  that  the  chief  need  feel  no  uneasiness  about  the  women  and 
children  whom  they  had  left  at  home.  They  would  be  looked  after  and 
protected  from  their  Indian  enemies. 

On  the  26th  of  April  the  captives  were  conducted  from  Washington 
to  Fortress  Monroe.  There  they  were  treated  with  great  kindness,  were 
not  bound,  and  received  gentle  consideration.  But  no  matter  how  well- 
intentioned  these  favors  were,  the  Indians  pined  for  the  free  air  of  their 
forests,  for  their  rude  wigwams,  and  their  families.  Fortunately  an  order 
was  received  on  the  4th  of  June  for  their  release,  and  the  following  day 
they  left  by  steamboat  for  Baltimore,  by  way  of  Norfolk,  Gosport,  Ports- 
mouth, etc. 

Their  progress  was  attended  with  much  excitement  in  all  the  cities 
through  which  they  passed.  Black  Hawk  tasted  to  the  full  the  sweets  of 
popularity,  if  they  can  be  considered  sweets  by  his  race,  for  at  many  points 
they  were  barely  able  to  move  about  because  of  the  multitudes.  They 
were  taken  to  the  theaters,  where  they  interested  the  spectators  more  than 
the  performances  on  the  stage  ; they  were  dined  and  wined,  and  probably 
would  have  been  killed  with  kindness  had  the  thing  been  allowed  to  con- 
tinue long. 

Some  of  the  addresses  to  the  Indians  were  poor  stuff  and  bored  them. 
Probably  the  best  was  that  of  the  Hon.  John  A.  Graham,  made  at  the 
quarters  of  the  Indians,  at  the  Exchange  Hotel,  in  Broad  Street,  New 
York  City: 

“ Brothers,  open  your  ears.  You  are  brave  men.  You  have  fought 
like  tigers,  but  in  a bad  cause.  We  have  conquered  you.  We  are  sorry, 
last  year,  that  you  raised  the  tomahawk  against  us;  but  we  believe  you 
diJ  not  know  us  then  as  you  do  now.  We  think  that  in  time  to  come,  you 
will  be  wise,  and  that  we  shall  be  friends  forever.  You  see  that  we  are  a 
great  people,  numerous  as  the  flowers  of  the  field,  as  the  shells  on  the  sea 
shore,  or  the  fish  in  the  sea.  We  put  one  hand  on  the  eastern,  and,  at  the 
same  time,  the  other  on  the  western  ocean.  We  all  act  together.  Some- 
times our  great  men  talk  loud  and  long  at  our  council  fires,  but  shed  one 
drop  of  white  men’s  blood,  our  young  warriors,  as  thick  as  the  stars  of  the 


MR.  GRAHAM’S  ADDRESS  AND  BLACK  IIAWK’S  REPLY. 


237 


night,  will  leap  on  board  our  great  boats,  which  fly  on  the  waves  and  over 
the  lakes,  swift  as  the  eagle  in  the  air,  then  penetrate  the  woods,  make  the 
big  guns  thunder,  and  the  whole  heavens  red  with  the  flames  of  the  dwell- 
ings of  their  enemies. 

“ Brothers,  the  President  made  you  a great  talk.  He  has  but  one 
mouth.  That  one  has  sounded  the  sentiments  of  all  the  people.  Listen 
to  what  he  has  said  to  you.  Write  it  on  your  memories.  It  is  good,  very 
good. 

“ Black  Hawk,  take  these  jewels,  a pair  of  topaz  ear-rings,  beautifully 
set  in  gold,  for  your  wife  or  daughter,  as  a token  of  friendship,  keeping 
always  in  mind  that  women  and  children  are  the  favorites  of  the  Great 
Spirit.  These  jewels  are  from  an  old  man,  whose  head  is  whitened  by  the 
snows  of  seventy  winters;  an  old  man,  who  has  thrown  down  his  bow, 
put  off  his  sword,  and  now  stands  leaning  on  his  staff,  waiting  the  com- 
mand of  the  Great  Spirit. 

“ Look  around  you  ; see  all  these  mighty  people ; then  go  to  your 
homes,  open  your  arms  to  receive  your  families.  Tell  them  to  bury  the 
hatchet,  to  make  bright  the  chain  of  friendship,  to  love  the  white  men  and 
to  live  in  peace  with  them,  as  long  as  the  rivers  run  into  the  sea  and  the 
sun  rises  and  sets.  If  you  do  so,  you  will  be  happy.  You  will  then  insure 
the  prosperity  of  unborn  generations  of  your  tribes,  who  will  go  hand  in 
hand  with  the  sons  of  the  white  men,  and  all  shall  be  blessed  by  the  Great 
Spirit.  Peace  and  happiness,  by  the  blessing  of  the  Great  Spirit,  attend 
you  ! Farewell ! ” 

Black  Hawk,  who  was  much  pleased  with  the  address  and  the  hand- 
some present  accompanying  it,  made  answer: 

“Brother:  We  like  your  talk.  We  will  be  friends.  We  like  the 
white  people;  they  are  very  kind  to  us.  We  shall  not  forget  it.  Your 
counsel  is  good  ; we  shall  attend  to  it.  Your  valuable  present  shall  go  to 
my  squaw  ; it  pleases  me  very  much.  We  shall  always  be  friends.” 

One  of  the  most  interesting  incidents  of  what  may  be  properly  termed 
their  triumphal  tour  was  their  call  upon  the  Seneca  Indians,  at  their 
council  house,  on  their  reservation  in  New  York.  The  Seneca  chieftain, 
Captain  Pollard  (Karlundawana),  an  old  and  respected  man,  expressed 
his  pleasure  at  meeting  them,  urging  them  to  go  to  their  homes  in  a 
peaceable  frame  of  mind,  to  cultivate  the  earth,  and  nevermore  to  fight 
against  the  white  men. 

Black  Hawk  said,  in  reply: 

“ Our  aged  brother  of  the  Senecas,  who  has  spoken  to  us,  has  spoken 
the  words  of  a good  and  wise  man.  We  are  strangers  to  each  other, 
though  we  have  the  same  color,  and  the  same  Great  Spirit  made  us  all, 
and  gave  us  this  country  together.  Brothers,  we  have  seen  how  great  a 


38 


END  OF  BLACK  HAWK’S  TOUR. 


people  the  whites  are.  They  are  very  rich  and  very  strong.  It  is  folly  for 
us  to  fight  with  them.  We  shall  go  home  with  much  knowledge.  For 
myself,  I shall  advise  my  people  to  be  quiet,  and  live  like  good  men.  The 
advice  which  you  gave  us,  brother,  is  very  good,  and  we  tell  you  now  we 
mean  to  walk  the  straight  path  in  future,  and  to  content  ourselves  with 
what  we  have  and  with  cultivating  our  lands.” 

From  Buffalo  the  Indians  were  conveyed  by  water  to  Detroit.  They 
were  now  approaching  the  section  which  had  lately  suffered  at  the  hands  of 
their  people,  and  the  citizens  showed  a less  friendly  spirit  toward  them. 
They  looked  at  the  dusky  visitors  askance,  and,  it  is  said,  they  were 
burned  in  effigy.  No  violence,  however,  took  place. 

From  Green  Bay  they  had  to  pass  through  the  country  of  the  Me- 
nomonees  and  Winnebagoes,  who  were  their  bitter  enemies.  To  guard 
against  molestation,  a detachment  of  troops  accompanied  them  to  Chicago. 
Passing  up  Fox  River  and  down  the  Ouisconsin,  Black  Hawk,  with  much 
depression  of  spirits,  pointed  out  the  favorite  spots  where  once  stood  the 
flourishing  villages  of  his  people. 

The  captives  arrived  at  Fort  Armstrong,  on  the  Upper  Mississippi, 
about  the  first  of  August.  They  were  gloomy  and  taciturn  on  entering 
their  own  forests,  the  reminder  of  so  many  sad  occurrences  to  them,  but 
soon  rallied,  and  showed  considerable  vivacity  in  recalling  some  of  their 
amusing  experiences  among  the  whites. 

Fort  Armstrong,  Rock  Island,  had  been  selected  as  the  most  appro- 
priate place  for  the  dismissal  of  the  Indians.  The  latter  were  disappointed 
at  not  meeting  friends  to  tell  them  of  their  families.  While  waiting  for 
some  of  them  to  come  in,  they  undid  their  bundles  and  examined  their 
presents.  They  were  many  and  valuable,  and  were  distributed  with  a 
generous  hand  to  their  old  comrades  when  they  put  in  an  appearance  with 
good  news  of  the  loved  ones. 

Keokuk  was  away  on  a buffalo  hunt  when  Black  Hawk  arrived,  but 
about  noon  the  following  day  a great  din  and  shouting  announced  his 
approach.  He  was  seated  on  one  of  two  large  canoes,  lashed  side  by  side, 
and  followed  by  a score  of  others,  each  carrying  eight  warriors,  who  awoke 
the  echoes  with  their  weird  songs.  Ascending  the  river,  they  encamped 
on  the  opposite  side  from  Black  Hawk’s  camp. 

Devoting  a couple  of  hours  to  their  toilets,  they  resumed  their  wild 
singing  and  paddled  across  the  river.  Keokuk  was  the  first  to  step  ashore. 
He  and  his  companions  were  decorated  with  all  their  medals  and  orna- 
ments and  made  a striking  picture.  Turning  to  his  party,  as  the  last 
landed,  Keokuk  said  : 

“The  Great  Spirit  has  sent  our  brother  back;  let  us  shake  .hands  in 
friendship.” 


BLACK  HAWK  AND  KEOKUK. 


239 


Black  Hawk  was  seated  in  front  of  his  tent  with  his  party.  He  was 
leaning  on  his  cane  and  looking  down  at  the  ground  in  gloomy  medita- 
tion. Walking  up  to  the  fallen  chieftain,  Keokuk  extended  his  hand  and 
Black  Hawk  returned  the  pressure.  Then  Keokuk  saluted  the  rest  of  the 
party  and  sat  down.  His  companions  did  the  same  and  all  remained 
silent,  waiting  for  the  fallen  chieftain  to  speak.  3 

Fifteen  minutes  of  oppressive  silence  followed,  during  which  strange' 
emotions  must  have  stirred  the  breasts  of  the  red  men. 

Seeing  that  Black  Hawk  was  waiting  to  be  addressed,  Keokuk  turned 
to  him  and  inquired  how  long  he  had  been  on  the  road.  He  answered* 


TRIUMPH  AND  HUMILIATION. 


and  then  pipes  were  brought  out  and  lighted,  all  smoking  and  talking 
freely  for  an  hour.  Then  Keokuk  arose,  shook  hands  all  around,  and 
departed  with  the  promise  to  return  on  the  morrow,  when  the  grand 
council  was  to  be  held. 

A large  room  in  the  garrison  was  prepared  for  the  reception  of  the 
two  parties.  About  ten  o’clock  Keokuk  appeared  at  the  head  of  a hun- 
dred warriors,  and  seated  himself  among  several  of  his  chiefs,  directing 
the  rest  to  place  themselves  behind  him.  This  was  done,  and  profound 
stillness  prevailed  until  the  arrival  of  Black  Hawk  and  his  companions. 
As  they  came  in,  Keokuk  and  his  brother  chiefs  arose  and  shook  hands 
with  him  and  the  rest.  They  moved  around  and  seated  themselves 
opposite  Keokuk.  Black  Hawk  and  his  son  showed  in  their  looks  their 


240 


INSULT  TO  BLACK  HAWK. 


dejection  and  humiliation,  for  they  felt  that  after  years  of  rivalry  between 
him  and  the  younger  chief,  the  hour  of  triumph  for  the  latter  had  come. 

Major  Garland  was  the  first  to  break  the  silence.  He  said  that  he 
was  glad  to  find  so  much  good  feeling  in  the  tribe  toward  Black  Hawk 
and  his  party.  He  was  confident  from  what  he  had  seen  and  learned, 
that  they  would  have  no  more  trouble  among  themselves.  He  had  but 
little  to  say,  as  the  President’s  speech  to  Black  Hawk  said  all,  and  it  would 
be  read  to  them.  This  speech  was  interpreted  to  the  Indians,  who 
responded  at  the  end  of  each  sentence. 

Keokuk  then  said  impressively  : 

“ I have  listened  to  the  talk  of  our  great  father.  It  is  true  ; we 
pledged  our  honors,  with  those  of  our  young  braves,  for  their  liberation. 
We  thought  much  of  it  ; our  councils  were  long  ; their  wives  and  children 
were  in  our  thoughts.  When  we  talked  of  them,  our  hearts  were  full. 
Their  wives  and  children  came  to  us,  which  made  us  feel  like  women  ; but 
we  were  men.  The  words  which  we  sent  to  our  great  father  was  one  word, 
the  word  of  all.  The  heart  of  our  great  father  was  good ; he  spoke  like 
the  father  of  children.  The  Great  Spirit  made  his  heart  big  in  council. 
We  receive  our  brothers  in  friendship ; our  hearts  are  good  toward  them. 
They  once  listened  to  bad  counsel;  now  their  ears  are  closed.  I give  my 
hand  to  them  ; when  they  shake  it,  they  shake  the  hands  of  all.  I will 
shake  hands  with  them,  and  then  I am  done.” 

Major  Garland  then  delivered  the  most  humiliating  insult  that  had 
ever  been  put  upon  Black  Hawk.  He  said  he  wished  all  present  clearly 
to  understand  that  the  President  considered  Keokuk  the  principal  chief 
of  the  nation,  and  that  in  the  future  he  should  be  acknowledged  as 
the  only  one  entitled  to  that  distinction.  He  wished  Black  Hawk  to  listen 
and  conform  to  his  counsels.  The  two  bands  that  had  heretofore  existed 
in  the  tribe  must  be  broken  up. 

This  cutting  speech,  when  translated  to  Black  Hawk,  was  made  worse 
through  a mistake  of  the  interpreter,  who  represented  Major  Garland  as 
declaring  that  Black  Hawk  must  conform  to  the  counsels  of  Keokuk.  The 
chief  was  infuriated,  and,  rising  to  his  feet  in  a towering  rage,  replied  : 

“I  am  an  old  man;  I will  not  conform  to  the  counsel  of  anyone;  I 
will  act  for  myself ; no  one  shall  govern  me.  I am  old  ; my  hair  is  gray. 
I once  gave  counsels  to  my  young  men  : am  I to  conform  to  others’  ? I 
shall  soon  go  to  the  Great  Spirit,  where  I shall  rest.  What  I said  to  our 
great  father  in  Washington,  I say  again:  I will  always  listen  to  him.  I 
am  done.” 

It  was  the  last  flicker  of  expiring  grandeur  and  greatness.  His  excite- 
ment caused  a stir  among  the  listeners.  The  interpreter  explained  that  he 
was  only  requested  to  listen  to  the  counsels  of  Keokuk.  Black  Hawk  made 


A SAD  SPEECH. 


24I 


no  reply,  but  sat  absorbed  in  his  own  gloomy  thoughts.  Keokuk  said  in 
an  undertone  to  him  : 

“ Why  do  you  speak  thus  before  the  white  men  ? I will  speak  for  you  ; 
you  trembled  and  did  not  mean  what  you  said.” 

Black  Hawk  nodded  assent  and  Keokuk  said  : 

“ Our  brother,  who  has  again  come  among  us,  has  spoken,  but  he  spoke 
in  wrath  ; his  tongue  was  forked  ; he  spoke  not  like  a man,  a Sac.  He 
knew  his  words  were  bad  ; he  trembled  like  the  oak,  whose  roots  have  been 
washed  by  many  rains.  He  is  old  ; what  he  said,  let  us  forget.  He  says 
he  did  not  mean  it ; he  wishes  it  were  forgotten.  I have  spoken  for  him. 
What  I have  said  is  his  own  words,  not  mine.  Let  us  say  he  spoke  in 
council  to-day  ; that  his  words  were  good  : I have  spoken.” 

That  evening,  Major  Garland  invited  the  principal  chiefs,  including 
Black  Hawk,  to  meet  him  at  his  quarters.  After  a number  of  speeches  had 
been  made  by  the  chiefs,  Black  Hawk  said  in  a calm,  but  depressed, 
manner : 

“ I feel  that  I am  an  old  man.  Once  I could  speak,  but  now  I have  little 
to  say.  To-day  we  meet  many  of  our  brothers.  We  are  glad  to  see  them. 
I have  listened  to  what  my  brothers  said;  their  hearts  are  good  ; they  have 
been  like  Sacs  since  I left  them;  they  have  taken  care  of  my  wife  and 
children,  who  had  no  wigwam.  I thank  them  for  it ; the  Great  Spirit 
knows  I thank  them.  Before  the  sun  sets  behind  the  hills  to-morrow,  I 
shall  see  them.  I want  to  see  them.  When  I left  them,  I expected  to 
return.  I told  our  great  father,  when  in  Washington,  I would  listen  to  his 
counsels.  I say  so  to  you.  I will  listen  to  the  counsel  of  Keokuk.  I shall 
soon  be  far  away.  I shall  have  no  village,  no  band  ; I shall  live  alone. 
What  I said  in  council  to-day,  I wish  forgotten.  If  it  has  been  put  upon 
paper,  I wish  a mark  to  be  drawn  over  it.  I did  not  mean  it.  Now  we  are 
alone  ; let  us  say  we  will  forget  it.  Say  to  our  great  father  and  Governor 
Cass  that  I will  listen  to  them.  Many'years  ago,  I met  Governor  Cass  in 
councils,  far  across  the  prairies  to  the  rising  sun.  His  counsels  were  good. 
My  ears  were  closed.  I listened  to  the  great  father  across  the  waters. 
My  father  listened  to  him  whose  band  was  large.  My  band  was  once 
large,  but  now  I have  no  band.  I and  my  son,  and  all  our  party,  thank  our 
great  father  for  what  he  has  done.  He  is  old  ; I am  old  ; we  shall  soon  go 
to  the  Great  Spirit,  where  we  shall  rest.  He  sent  us  though  his  great  vil- 
lages. We  saw  many  white  men,  who  treated  us  with  kindness.  We  thank 
them.  We  thank  you  and  Mr.  Sprague  for  coming  with  us.  Your  road 
was  long  and  crooked.  We  never  saw  so  many  white  men  before.  When 
you  were  with  us,  we  felt  as  though  we  had  some  friends  among  them. 
We  felt  safe.  You  knew  them  all.  When  you  come  upon  the  Mississippi 
again,  you  shall  come  to  my  wigwam.  I have  none  now.  On  your  road 


242 


THE  LAST  TOUR  OF  BLACK  HAWK. 


home,  you  pass  where  my  village  once  was.  No  one  lives  there  now:  all 
are  gone.  I give  you  my  hand  ; we  may  never  meet  again.  I shall  long 
remember  you.  The  Great  Spirit  will  be  with  you  and  your  wives  and 
children.  Before  the  sun  rises  I shall  go  to  my  family.  My  son  will  be 
here  to  see  you  before  you  go.  I will  shake  hands  with  my  brothers  now, 
and  then  I am  done.” 

No  incident  worthy  of  record  took  place  for  three  years  after  the  libera- 
tion of  Black  Hawk.  A battle  occurred  between  the  Sacs  and  Foxes  on 
one  hand  and  the  Sioux  on  the  other,  in  the  summer  of  1837,  our  authori- 
ties having  failed  to  give  the  protection  to  the  former  that  was  promised. 
The  Sacs  and  Foxes  had  sold  the  best  portions  of  Illinois-  Missouri,  and 


“OUR  ILLUSTRIOUS  GUEST.” 


Wisconsin,  amounting  to  26,500,000  acres,  which  included  the  valuable 
lead  mines,  at  three  cents  an  acre  ! They  received,  in  addition,  many  guar- 
ant  3es,  most  of  which  were  disregarded. 

A delegation  of  Sacs  and  Foxes,  and  another  of  Sioux  and  Iowas, 
visited  Washington,  in  September,  1837,  and,  by  the  advice  of  the  Presi- 
dent, were  induced  to  make  a tour  through  the  country,  he  thinking  that  it 
would  be  wise  to  impress  them  with  our  importance  and  greatness. 

This  delegation  numbered  thirty-five  in  all,  and  Black  Hawk  was  with 
Ihe  Sacs  and  Foxes.  It  is  not  worth  while  to  describe  their  tour,  so  similar 
in  many  respects  to  the  former  one,  and  which  was  without  special  incident. 
No  doubt  the  delegation  was  suitably  impressed,  as  have  been  the  numerous 
wones  that  have  followed  in  their  footsteps. 

Black  Hawk,  his  son,  Nasheuskuk,  and  his  handsome  wife,  attended  a 


DEATH  AND  BURIAL  OF  BLACK  HAWK. 


243 


ball  by  invitation  at  Fort  Madison,  Wis.,  in  honor  of  Washington’s  Birth- 
day, February  22,  1838.  Black  Hawk  was  present  at  the  same  place 
during  the  celebration  on  the  Fourth  of  July  following.  At  the  table  he 
received  the  honor  of  the  following  sentiment : 

“ Our  illustrious  guest.  May  his  declining  years  be  as  calm  as  his  pre- 
vious life  has  been  boisterous  from  warlike  events.  His  present  friendship 
to  the  whites  fully  entitles  him  to  a seat  at  our  board.” 

Black  Hawk  responded  with  the  following  sensible  words : 

“ It  has  pleased  the  Great  Spirit  that  I am  here  to-day.  The  earth  is 
our  mother  and  we  are  now  permitted  to  look  upon  it.  A few  snows  ago 
I was  fighting  against  the  white  people  ; perhaps  I was  wrong  ; let  it  be 
forgotten.  I love  my  towns  and  corn  fields  on  the  Rock  River  ; it  was  a 
beautiful  country.  I fought  for  it,  but  now  it  is  yours.  Keep  it  as  the 
Sacs  did.  I was  once  a warrior,  but  I am  now  poor.  Keokuk  has  been 
the  cause  of  what  I am,  but  I do  not  blame  him.  I love  to  look  upon  the 
Mississippi.  I have  looked  upon  it  from  a child.  I love  that  beautiful 
river.  My  home  has  always  been  upon  its  banks.  I thank  you  for  your 
friendship.  I will  say  no  more.” 

Black  Hawk  died  October  3,  1838.  Many  whites,  as  well  as  Indians, 
assembled  at  his  lodge  to  pay  their  last  respects  to  the  departed  chieftain 
and  warrior.  He  had  requested  that  he  might  be  buried  as  were  the  Sac 
chieftains  in  the  olden  times.  His  wishes  were  followed.  Instead  of  mak- 
ing a grave,  his  body  was  placed  upon  the  ground  in  a sitting  posture,  with 
his  cane  between  his  knees  and  grasped  in  his  hands.  Slabs  and  rails  were 
then  piled  about  him.  Such  was  the  end  and  burial  of  Black  Hawk. 

The  following  winter  his  bones  were  stolen,  and  a year  later  were  found 
in  the  possession  of  a surgeon  of  Quincy,  111.  Governor  Lucas,  of  Iowa, 
learning  of  the  outrage,  compelled  them  to  be  restored  to  his  friends. 


CHAPTER  XXX. 


THE  SECOND  SEMINOLE  WAR— THE  TREATY  OF  1 823— DISSATISFACTION  OF 
THE  WHITES  AND  INDIANS  — HOSTILITIES — TREATY  OF  PAYNE’S  LAND- 
ING—OSCEOLA — MESSAGE  OF  PRESIDENT  JACKSON— IMPRISONMENT 
OF  OSCEOLA — OUTRAGES  BY  INDIANS— MASSACRE  OF  DADE’S  COM- 
MAND— ASSASSINATION  OF  GENERAL  THOMPSON— FIGHT  ON  THE 
OUITHLACOOCHEE. 

T"7  AST  and  West  Florida  were  ceded  to  the  United  States  by  the  Span- 
ish  Government  in  1821  as  a set-off  for  claims  against  them  for  spoli- 
ations on  our  commerce  to  the  extent  of  half  a million  dollars.  The 
country  having  thus  come  into  our  possession,  the  next  step  was  to  rid  it 
of  the  Indians  who  occupied  the  lands.  Two  courses  were  open— by  hon- 
est purchase,  or  by  conquest.  The  former  was  decided  upon.  In  Septem- 
ber of  the  year  named,  a council  was  held  with  a number  of  the  chiefs,  and 
a treaty  entered  into  by  them. 

The  terms  of  this  treaty  bound  the  Seminoles  to  relinquish  the  better 
part  of  their  lands,  and  retire  to  the  center  of  the  peninsula,  composed  of 
pine  barrens  and  terminating  toward  the  south  in  unexplored  and  almost 
inaccessible  marshes.  Our  government  bound  itself  to  pay  the  Indians 
certain  annuities,  to  take  them  under  its  care  and  patronage,  and  protect 
them  against  all  persons  whatsoever.  The  Seminoles  further  agreed  to 
move  westward  at  the  expiration  of  twenty  years  from  the  date  of  the 
treaty. 

This  treaty  was  opposed  by  many  of  the  chiefs  who  were  not  parties 
to  it,  and  gave  little  satisfaction  to  the  whites,  who  suffered  from  a peculiar 
irritation  that  can  never  again  exist  in  this  country.  The  morasses  and 
swamps  of  the  Floridas  afforded  a tempting  refuge  to  runaway  slaves. 
When  they  once  succeeded  in  reaching  those  dismal  solitudes,  it  was  use- 
less for  overseer  and  bloodhound  to  attempt  to  follow  them.  The  runaway 
negroes  found  refuge  among  the  Seminoles,  intermarried  with  them,  and 
formed  a powerful  factor  in  the  subsequent  troubles.  One  clause  of  the 
treaty  required  the  Seminoles  to  surrender  all  runaway  slaves.  Naturally 
they  were  slow  to  do  this.  They  could  give  the  fugitives  warning  of  their 
danger  and  then  report  their  inability  to  secure  them.  Besides,  some  of 
the  Indians  themselves  were  slaveholders.  The  bondage,  however,  of  their 
black  men  was  only  nominal.  They  did  about  as  they  pleased,  working 
when  they  chose,  and  gave  small  tithe  to  their  indulgent  owners. 


244 


THE  TREATY  OF  PAYNE’S  LANDING. 


245 


The  government  had  bound  itself  to  protect  the  Indians  against  all 
intruders,  but  did  not  do  so.  A gang  of  miscreants  insinuated  themselves 
among  them,  and  perpetrated  every  kind  of  fraud.  Their  cattle  were  stolen, 
their  slaves  run  off,  and  no  redress  was  possible.  More  than  once  an 
Indian  owner,  who  pursued  the  white  thieves  and  recovered  his  own  cattle, 
was  punished  for  stealing,  even  though  he  showed  his  brand  on  them.  In 
short,  the  treatment  of  the  Seminoles  was  precisely  that  which  has  been 
followed  by  our  government  with  the  majority  of  the  tribes  with  whom  it 
has  had  dealings.  There  seems  to  be  reason  for  the  charges  that  the  gov- 
ernment winked  at  this  persecution,  in  the  hope  of  disgusting  the  Indians 
to  that  extent  that  they  would  abandon  the  country  before  the  date  agreed 
upon. 

The  Seminoles  soon  revolted.  Murders  and  outrages  were  committed 
by  both  sides,  and  the  white  inhabitants  petitioned  the  government  to  re- 
move the  savages  westward  with  as  little  delay  as  possible.  It  was  decided 
that  this  should  be  done.  The  preliminary  step  was  the  Treaty  of  Payne’s 
Landing,  made  May  9,  1832. 

The  terms  of  this  agreement  bound  the  Seminoles  to  relinquish  all 
their  possessions  in  Florida,  and  migrate  to  the  country  allotted  to  the 
Creeks,  west  of  the  Mississippi.  The  removal  was  to  take  place  within 
three  years  after  the  ratification  of  the  treaty,  the  consideration  to  be  given 
to  the  Indians  being  $15,400,  on  their  arrival  at  their  new  home,  and  the 
present  to  each  of  the  warriors,  women,  and  children,  of  one  blanket  and 
one  homespun  frock.  It  was  also  stipulated  that  the  demands  for  “slaves 
and  other  property,”  stolen  or  destroyed  by  the  Seminoles,  should  be 
investigated,  and,  if  just,  liquidated  to  the  United  States  to  the  extent  of 
$7000.  President  Jackson  was  determined  on  the  removal  of  the  Indians, 
and  secured  the  consent  of  seven  chiefs  thereto.  These,  however,  did  not 
represent  the  majority,  who  were  unalterably  opposed  to  the  change  through 
fear  of  the  Creeks,  from  whom  they  had  seceded  eight  years  before.  Two 
chiefs  who  had  favored  the  removal  were  killed  by  their  own  people, 
who  elected  a warrior  well  known  for  his  hostility  to  the  project. 

In  the  strong  and  growing  opposition  to  the  departure,  the  famous  and 
unfortunate  Osceola  came  to  the  front  as  one  of  the  most  bitter  partisans. 
He  expressed  his  opinion  of  the  Payne’s  Landing  Treaty  by  driving  his 
hunting  knife  clean  through  it  and  the  top  of  the  table  on  which  it  lay. 

The  contemplated  removal  hinged  on  the  condition  expressed  in  the 
words,  “ should  they  be  satisfied  with  the  character  of  the  country,”  etc. 

Now,  who  was  meant  by  “ they  ” ? It  may  be  said  that  the  second 
or  real  Seminole  war  turned  on  the  meaning  of  the  pronoun.  President 
Jackson — and  who  was  better  qualified  to  judge,  since  he  was  a doctor  of 
laws? — insisted  that  “they”  referred  to  the  seven  deputies,  while  Osceola 


246  PRESIDENT  JACKSON’S  MESSAGE  TO  THE  SEMINOLES. 

and  his  party  maintained  that  “they”  meant  the  opinion  of  the  whole 
tribe,  after  the  report  of  the  deputation  had  been  heard. 

It  became  so  apparent  that  the  Indians  intended  no  removal,  that 
General  Wiley  Thompson,  the  agent,  called  together  the  real  leaders  of  the 
Seminoles,  in  October,  1834.  They  expressed  themselves  in  the  most  em- 
phatic terms  against  removal.  Osceola,  who  had  never  signed  the  treaty, 
was  determined  in  his  attitude,  and  the  council  ended  without  accomplish- 
ing anything.  General  Thompson  said  to  them: 

“ I have  told  you  that  you  must  stand  to  your  bargain  ; my  talk  is  the 
same.  Your  father,  the  President,  who  is  your  friend,  will  compel  you  to 
go.  Therefore,  be  not  deluded  by  any  hope  or  expectation  that  you  will 
be  permitted  to  remain  here.” 

The  Indians  began  laying  in  stores  of  ammunition  and  making  ready 
for  the  war  that  was  sure  to  come.  Six  months  later,  on  invitation,  they 
came  together  again  to  hear  the  message  of  their  father,  President  Jack- 
son,  which  was  as  follows: 

“My  children,  I am  sorry  to  have  heard  that  you  have  been  listening 
to  bad  counsel.  You  know  me,  and  you  know  that  I would  not  deceive 
you,  nor  advise  you  to  do  anything  that  was  unjust  or  injurious.  Open 
your  ears  and  attend  now  to  what  I am  going  to  say  to  you.  They  are 
the  words  of  a friend,  and  the  words  of  truth. 

“ The  white  people  are  settling  around  you.  The  game  has  disap- 
peared from  your  country.  Your  people  are  poor  and  hungry.  All  this 
you  have  perceived  for  some  time.  And  nearly  three  years  ago  you  made 
an  agreement  with  your  friend,  Colonel  Gadsden,  acting  on  the  part  of  the 
United  States,  by  which  you  agreed  to  cede  your  lands  in  Florida,  and  to 
remove  and  join  your  brothers,  the  Creeks,  in  the  country  west  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi. You  annexed  a condition  to  this  agreement,  that  certain  chiefs 
named  therein,  in  whom  you  placed  confidence,  should  proceed  to  the 
western  country,  and  examine  whether  it  was  suitable  to  your  wants  and 
habits,  and  whether  the  Creeks  residing  there  were  willing  to  permit  you 
to  unite  with  them  as  one  people;  and  if  the  persons  thus  sent  were  satis- 
fied on  these  heads,  then  the  arrangement  with  Colonel  Gadsden  was  to  be 
in  full  force. 

“ In  conformity  with  these  provisions,  the  chiefs  named  by  you  pro- 
ceeded to  that  country,  and  having  examined  it,  and  having  become  satisfied 
respecting  its  character  and  the  favorable  disposition  of  the  Creeks,  they 
entered  into  an  agreement  with  commissioners  on  the  part  of  the  United 
States,  by  which  they  signified  their  satisfaction  on  these  subjects,  and 
finally  ratified  the  treaty  made  with  Colonel  Gadsden. 

“I  now  learn  that  you  refuse  to  carry  into  effect  the  solemn  promises 
thus  made  by  you,  and  that  you  have  stated  to  the  officers  of  the  United 


OSCEOLA,  CHIEF  OF  THE  SEMINOLES. 


EFFECT  OF  PRESIDENT  JACKSON’S  APPEAL. 


249 

States,  sent  among  you,  that  you  will  not  remove  to  the  western 
country. 

“ My  children,  I have  never  deceived,  nor  will  I ever  deceive  any  of  the 
red  people.  I tell  you  that  you  must  go,  and  that  you  will  go.  Even  if 
you  had  a right  to  stay,  how  could  you  live  where  you  now  are  ? You  have 
sold  all  your  country.  You  have  not  a piece  as  large  as  a blanket  to  sit 
down  upon.  What  is  to  support  yourselves,  your  women  and  children  ? 
The  tract  you  have  ceded  will  soon  be  surveyed  and  sold,  and  immediately 
afterward  will  be  occupied  by  a white  population.  You  will  soon  be  in  a 
state  of  starvation.  You  will  commit  depredations  upon  the  property  of  our 
citizens.  You  will  be  resisted,  punished,  perhaps  killed.  Now  is  it  not 
better  peaceably  to  remove  to  a fine  fertile  country,  occupied  by  your  own 
kindred,  and  where  you  can  raise  all  the  necessaries  of  life,  and  where 
game  is  yet  abundant?  The  annuities  payable  to  you,  and  the  other 
stipulations  made  in  your  favor,  will  make  your  situation  comfortable,  and 
will  enable  you  to  increase  and  improve.  If,  therefore,  you  had  a right  to 
stay  where  you  are,  still  every  true  friend  would  advise  you  to  remove  ; 
but  you  have  no  right  to  stay,  and  you  must  go.  I am  very  desirous  that 
you  should  go  peaceably  and  voluntarily.  You  shall  be  comfortably  taken 
care  of  and  kindly  treated  on  the  road,  and  when  you  arrive  in  your  new 
country  provisions  will  be  issued  to  you  fora  year,  so  that  you  can  have 
ample  time  to  provide  for  your  future  support. 

“But  lest  some  of  your  rash  young  men  should  forcibly  oppose  your 
arrangements  for  removal,  I have  ordered  a large  military  force  to  be  sent 
among  you.  I have  directed  the  commanding  officer,  and  likewise  the 
agent,  your  friend,  General  Thompson,  that  every  reasonable  indulgence  be 
held  out  to  you.  But  I have  also  directed  that  one-third  of  your  people, 
as  provided  for  in  the  treaty,  be  removed  during  the  present  season.  If 
you  listen  to  the  voice  of  friendship  and  truth,  you  will  go  quietly  and 
voluntarily.  But  should  you  listen  to  the  bad  birds  that  are  always  flying 
about  you,  and  refuse  to  remove,  I have  directed  the  commanding  officer 
to  remove  you  by  force.  This  will  be  done.  I pray  the  Great  Spirit, 
therefore,  to  incline  you  to  do  what  is  right.” 

This  appeal,  whose  force  cannot  be  questioned,  divided  the  Indians, 
and  a considerable  number  gave  their  consent  to  the  removal.  Osceola, 
however,  remained  as  defiant  as  ever.  His  wrath  was  specially  roused  by 
the  fact  that  among  those  won  over  to  the  President’s  views  were  several 
whom  he  had  counted  upon  as  his  partisans.  He  protested  strongly  to 
General  Thompson  for  taking  such  an  unfair  advantage.  The  interview 
grew  into  a heated  quarrel,  with  the  result  that  Osceola  was  arrested  and 
kept  one  night  and  a part  of  two  days  in  irons. 

This  treatment  roused  the  devil  in  the  mongrel’s  heart.  Determined 


250 


OSCEOLA’S  DUPLICITY. 


to  revenge  himself  on  the  agent,  he  agreed  to  sign  the  treaty  and  to  do  what 
he  could  to  persuade  others  to  join  him.  He  was  thereupon  released, 
and  came  to  Fort  King  with  seventy-nine  of  his  people,  men,  women, 
and  children,  and  the  signing  took  place.  Osceola  was  playing  a 
part  and  deceived  the  whites. 


ARREST  OF  OSCEOLA. 


after  Osceola  signed  the  treaty,  seven  Indians  were  discovered  hunting  at 
a place  called  Hogtown.  The  whites  claimed  they  were  “beyond  bounds,” 
and,  disarming  them,  began  beating  them.  While  they  were  doing  this,  two 
other  Indians  came  up,  raised  the  war-whoop,  and  fired  without  slaying  any- 
one. The  whites  returned  the  fire  and  killed  both  Indians. 

During  the  same  summer — 1835— a ma^  carrier  was  killed  and  robbed 


OUTRAGES  BY  THE  SEMINOLES. 


251 


between  St.  Augustine  and  Camp  King,  and  several  houses  were  looted. 
Matters  continued  in  a ruffled  state  until  the  following  December,  when 
the  agent  notified  such  of  the  Indians  as  he  could  reach  that  their  time 
had  expired,  and  they  must  prepare  for  their  journey  beyond  the  Missis- 
sippi. The  agent  was  so  confident  that  his  order  would  be  obeyed  that 
he  advertised  their  horses  and  cattle  for  sale  between  the  first  and  fifteenth 
of  the  month.  Not  a solitary  Indian  presented  himself,  and  it  was  then 
discovered  that,  Osceola  having  killed  a friendly  chief,  the  Seminoles  had 
abandoned  all  the  towns,  and  hiding  their  trails,  had  removed  their  families 
to  a place  of  safety.  The  skill  with  which  this  was  done,  as  shown  by  the 
futile  efforts  to  locate  the  families  of  the  hostiles,  was  one  of  the  most 
extraordinary  feats  ever  accomplished  by  the  American  race. 

In  January,  1836,  a party  of  twenty  or  thirty  Seminoles  attacked  the 
home  of  the  lighthouse  keeper  at  New  River,  about  twenty  miles  to  the 
north  of  Cape  Florida.  A gentleman  employed  as  teacher  was  killed,  and 
the  wife,  mother,  and  three  children  of  the  lighthouse  keeper.  The 
Indians  carried  off  several  barrels  of  provisions,  thirty  hogs,  three  horses, 
five  hundred  dollars  in  silver,  a keg  of  powder,  two  hundred  pounds  of 
lead,  and  a lot  of  dry  goods. 

A neighboring  family  discovered  the  murders  in  time  to  make  their 
own  escape.  Another,  a widow  with  her  two  daughters  and  son,  fled  to  Cape 
Florida.  At  that  point  were  soon  gathered  over  fifty  persons,  who  would 
have  starved  had  not  a vessel  noticed  their  signal  of  distress  and  taken  them 
to  St.  Augustine. 

Thomas  Godfrey's  wife  and  four  children  escaped  to  a swamp,  where 
they  wandered  about  for  four  days  without  a mouthful  of  food.  The  moan- 
ing of  the  youngest  children  was  heard  by  a negro  who  belonged  to  the  hos- 
tiles. He  rushed  upon  the  wretched  fugitives  with  uplifted  ax,  but  the 
sight  of  the  suffering  children  touched  him.  He  told  them  the  Indians 
were  all  around  them,  but  if  they  would  remain  quiet  until  dark  he  would 
bring  them  something  to  eat.  He  not  only  did  this,  but  provided  them 
with  blankets  to  sleep  upon.  The  Indians  were  dispersed  the  following  day 
by  a party  of  whites.  The  negro  conducted  the  fugitives  to  a point  where 
their  friends  saw  them,  and  then  hurried  off.  Colonel  Warren  was  convey- 
ing a train  of  wagons,  containing  provisions  and  ammunition,  from  St. 
Augustine  to  the  main  army  at  Fort  Croom.  He  had  a small  detachment, 
and,  while  on  the  march,  was  attacked  by  a large  body  of  Indians,  who 
killed  ten,  scattered  the  rest,  captured  the  wagons,  and  burned  what  they 
did  not  take  away. 

Outrages  multiplied,  the  Indians  showing  such  activity  that  fears 
began  to  be  felt  for  the  safety  of  the  strongest  places,  even  in  Florida. 
Loud  calls  were  made  by  the  people  for  protection,  very  few  precautions 


252 


MASSACRE  OF  DADE’S  COMMAND. 


having  been  taken  until  the  peril  was  upon  them.  General  Clinch,  at  Fort 
King,  was  known  to  be  in  imminent  danger.  Major  Dade  of  the  Fourth 
Regiment  of  infantry  reached  that  point  with  re-enforcements  for  him. 

Two  companies  were  now  made  ready  to  march  against  the  Seminoles. 
On  the  24th  of  December,  1835,  one  hundred  men  and  eight  officers  with 
a field  piece  set  out  under  the  command  of  Major  Dade. 

On  the  morning  of  the  28th,  when  four  miles  from  the  encampment  of 
the  previous  night,  this  force  was  suddenly  assailed  by  the  Indians,  who 


A FRIEND  IN  NEED. 


poured  in  a destructive  volley.  Major  Dade  and  his  horse  were  killed  at 
the  first  fire,  with  most  of  the  advance  guard.  Captain  Belton  of  the 
Second  Artillery,  in  his  official  report  of  this  shocking  catastrophe,  says: 

“ Lieutenant  Mudge,  Third  Artillery,  received  his  mortal  wound  the  first 
fire,  and  afterward  received  several  other  wounds.  Lieutenant  Basenger, 
Third  Artillery,  was  not  wounded  until  after  the  second  attack;  and,  at  the 
latter  part  of  it,  he  was  wounded  several  times  before  he  was  tomahawked. 
Captain  Gardener,  Second  Artillery,  was  not  wounded  until  the  second 
attack,  and,  at  the  last  part  of  it,  Mr.  Basenger,  after  Captain  Gardener  was 
killed,  remarked,  ‘ I am  the  only  officer  left ; and,  boys,  we  will  do  the 


THE  ALARMING  SITUATION. 


253 


best  we  can.’  Lieutenant  Keays,  Third  Artillery,  had  both  arms  broken  at 
the  first  shot,  was  unable  to  act,  and  was  tomahawked  the  latter  part  of 
the  second  attack  by  a negro.  Lieutenant  Henderson  had  his  left  arm 
broken  at  the  first  fire,  and  after  that,  with  a musket,  fired  at  least  thirty 
or  forty  shots.  Dr.  Gatlin  was  not  killed  until  after  the  second  attack, 
nor  was  he  wounded  ; he  placed  himself  behind  the  breastwork,  and,  with 
two  double-barreled  guns,  said  he  had  four  barrels  for  them.  Captain 
Frazer  fell  early  in  the  action  with  the  advanced  guard.” 

After  the  repulse  of  the  Indians  by  the  troops  under  Captain  Gardener, 
the  Americans  began  hurriedly  throwing  up  breastworks ; but  before  they 
could  be  raised  high  enough  to  be  of  use,  the  Indians  attacked  them  again. 
The  field  piece  was  brought  into  play,  but  the  Seminoles  and  negroes  shot 
down  everyone  who  attempted  to  serve  it.  Two-thirds  of  the  men  and 
all  the  officers  had  fallen,  when  the  ammunition  gave  out.  Quick  to  per- 
ceive this,  the  assailants  rushed  in  and  killed  every  one,  excepting  three? 
who,  badly  wounded,  imitated  death,  and  found  opportunity  to  get  into  the 
woods  unnoticed. 

The  situation  was  graphically  described  by  an  officer  stationed  at  Fort 
Brooke,  in  a letter  dated  January  1,  1836 : “ We  are  really  in  the  theater  of 
war  of  the  most  horrible  kind.  We  arrived  here  on  Christmas  Day,  and 
found  the  inhabitants  flying  in  from  all  quarters  to  camp.  Major  Dade, 
with  seven  officers  and  one  hundred  and  ten  men,  started  the  day  before 
we  came  to  Fort  King.  We  were  all  prepared  to  overtake  them  the 
next  day,  and  were  upon  the  eve  of  departure  when  an  intervention  of 
circumstances  deferred  it  for  one  day  ; and,  in  the  course  of  that  day, 
three  soldiers,  horribly  mangled,  came  into  camp,  and  brought  the  melan- 
choly tidings  that  Major  Dade  and  every  officer  and  man,  except  them- 
selves, were  murdered  and  terribly  mangled.  We  are  at  work,  night  and 
day,  entrenching  ourselves  in  every  possible  manner.  We  expect  every 
moment  to  be  attacked,  as  the  savages  have  sworn  we  shall  all  be  massacred 
before  the  6th  of  January.  We  are  about  two  hundred  strong,  with  offi- 
cers and  men,  and  about  fifty  citizens,  and  one  hundred  friendly  Indians, 
under  their  chief,  Black  Dirt.  The  savages  are  said  to  number  four 
thousand.” 

The  fort,  however,  was  not  attacked,  and  General  Gaines  arrived  from 
New  Orleans  the  following  month  with  seven  hundred  men.  He  ordered 
a detachment  under  Captain  Hitchcock  to  visit  the  scene  of  the  massacre. 
Captain  Hitchcock,  in  his  report,  said: 

“The  force  encamped  on  the  night  of  February  19,  on  the  ground 
occupied  by  Major  Dade  on  the  night  of  the  27th  of  December.  He  and 
his  party  were  destroyed  on  the  morning  of  the  28th,  about  four  miles  in 
advance  of  that  position.  He  was  advancing  toward  this  post  (Fort 


254  A VISIT  TO  THE  SCENE  OF  THE  MASSACRE. 

King),  and  was  attacked  from  the  north,  so  that  on  the  20th  instant  we 
came  on  the  rear  of  his  battle  ground  about  nine  o’clock  in  the  morning. 
Our  advanced  guard  had  passed  the  ground  without  halting,  when  the 
general  and  his  staff  came  upon  one  of  the  most  appalling  spectacles  that 
can  be  imagined.  We  first  saw  some  broken  and  scattered  boxes  ; then  a 
cart  ; then  two  oxen  which  were  lying  dead,  as  if  they  had  fallen  asleep, 
their  yokes  still  on  them  ; a little  to  the  right,  one  or  two  horses  were  seen. 
We  then  came  to  a small  enclosure,  made  by  felling  trees  in  such  a man- 
ner as  to  form  a triangular  breastwork  for  defense.  Within  the  triangle, 
along  the  north  and  west  faces  of  it,  were  about  thirty  bodies,  mostly  mere 
skeletons,  although  much  of  the  clothing  was  left  upon  them.  These  were 
lying,  almost  every  one  of  them,  in  precisely  the  position  they  must  have 
occupied  during  the  fight,  their  heads  next  to  the  logs,  over  which  they 
had  delivered  their  fire,  and  their  bodies  stretched,  with  striking  regularity, 
parallel  to  each  other.  They  had  evidently  been  shot  dead  at  their  posts, 
and  the  Indians  had  not  disturbed  them,  except  by  taking  the  scalps  of 
most  of  them. 

“ Passing  this  little  breastwork,  we  found  other  bodies  along  the  road, 
and  by  the  side  of  the  road,  generally  behind  trees,  which  had  been  resorted 
to  for  covers  from  the  enemy’s  fire.  Advancing  about  two  hundred  yards 
further,  we  found  a cluster  of  bodies  in  the  middle  of  the  road.  These 
were  evidently  the  advanced  guard,  in  the  rear  of  which  was  the  body  of 
Major  Dade,  and,  to  the  right,  that  of  Captain  Frazer. 

“ These  were  all  doubtless  shot  down  on  the  first  fire  of  the  Indians, 
except,  perhaps,  Captain  Frazer,  who  must,  however,  have  fallen  very  early 
in  the  fight.  Those  in  the  road  and  by  the  trees  fell  during  the  first 
attack.  It  was  during  a cessation  of  the  fire  that  the  little  band  still 
remaining,  about  thirty  in  number,  threw  up  the  triangular  breastwork, 
which,  from  the  haste  with  which  it  was  constructed,  was  necessarily  defec- 
tive, and  could  not  protect  the  men  in  the  second  attack. 

“We  had  with  us  many  of  the  personal  friends  of  the  officers  of  Major 
Dade’s  command ; and  it  is  gratifying  to  be  able  to  state  that  every  officer 
was  identified  by  undoubted  evidence.  They  were  buried,  and  the  cannon, 
a six  pounder,  that  the  Indians  had  thrown  into  a swamp,  was  recovered, 
and  placed  vertically  at  the  head  of  the  grave,  where,  it  is  to  be  hoped,  it 
will  long  remain.  The  bodies  of  the  non-commissioned  officers  and  privates 
were  buried  in  two  graves,  and  it  was  found  that  every  man  was  accounted 
for.  The  command  was  composed  of  eight  officers  and  one  hundred  and 
two  non-commissioned  officers  and  privates.  The  bodies  of  eight  officers 
and  ninety-eight  men  were  interred — four  men  having  escaped,  three  of 
whom  reached  Tampa  Bay;  the  fourth  was  killed  the  day  after  the  battle. 
It  may  be  proper  to  add  that  the  attack  was  not  made  from  a hummock, 


MAJOR  DADE’S  BATTLEGROUND. 


OSCEOLA  AND  GENERAL  THOMPSON. 


257 


but  in  a thinly  wooded  country,  the  Indians  being  concealed  by  palmetto 
and  grass,  which  has  since  been  burned.” 

Osceola  took  part  in  this  massacre,  and  on  the  same  day  did  a 
thing  which,  in  its  way,  was  hardly  less  startling  to  the  country. 

It  will  be  remembered 
that  General  Thompson,  the 
Indian  agent,  wound  up  a 
quarrel  with  the 
chief  by  putting  £ 
him  in  irons,  and 
Osceola  ^ 


his  freedom 
by  pretending  to  be 
won  over  to  his  views 
and  by  signing  the 
^ detested  treaty.  He 

& was  only  dissem- 

DEATH  OF  GENERAL  THOMPSON.  1 1 • 1 j 

bling,  however,  and 

asserted  that  General  Thompson  should  pay  for  the  outrage  put 
upon  him.  On  the  28th  of  December,  General  Thompson  was  dining  at 


258 


FIGIIT  ON  THE  OUITHLACOOCHEE. 


the  storehouse  of  Mr.  Rogers,  two  hundred  and  fifty  yards  from  Fort 
King,  there  being  nine  other  gentlemen  seated  at  the  table.  Mr.  Rogers 
was  at  the  head,  and  the  weather  being  unusually  mild,  the  door  and 
windows  were  open.  The  guests  were  chatting  and  laughing  in  the  enjoy- 
ment of  their  feast,  when  a volley  was  fired  at  them  and  Osceola  and  his 
party  dashed  into  the  room.  Those  who  were  not  killed  leaped  out  of  the 
windows  and  fled.  The  five  who  were  fortunate  enough  to  start  toward 
the  fort  escaped  ; the  others,  in  running  for  a hummock  near  by,  were  shot 
down.  The  cook,  a negro  woman,  crouched  behind  a barrel  and  was  not 
observed  by  Osceola,  who,  pausing  but  a minute,  darted  out  again. 

Five  men  were  killed:  General  Thompson,  Lieutenant  Constantine 
Smith,  Erastus  Rogers,  sutler,  a Mr.  Suggs,  and  Mr.  Hitzler.  Each  was 
scalped,  and  as  the  Indians  withdrew,  Osceola  emitted  his  peculiar  shrill 
yell,  that  those  at  the  fort  might  know  who  was  the  leader  in  the  dreadful 
business. 

General  Clinch  having  re-enforced  Fort  Brooke  with  five  hundred 
volunteers,  whose  terms  of  service  were  soon  to  expire,  sent  the  whole 
force  of  seven  hundred  men,  under  the  command  of  General  Call,  into  the  t 
Indian  country.  They  aimed  for  a point  on  the  Ouithlacoochee  River, 
where  it  was  said  a good  ford  existed.  When  a part  were  over,  Osceola 
and  his  warriors  fell  upon  them.  The  fight  raged  for  an  hour,  when  the 
Indians  were  beaten  off,  but  the  Americans  suffered  a loss  of  sixty-three 
killed  and  wounded,  that  of  the  Indians  being  much  greater. 

Nothing  could  exceed  the  valor  displayed  by  the  leaders  of  the  two 
forces.  But  for  General  Clinch’s  coolness  and  intrepidity  his  men  would 
have  been  thrown  into  a panic.  He  was  everywhere  in  the  thickest  of  the 
fight.  His  horse  was  killed  under  him,  and  a bullet  passed  through  his 
cap  and  another  through  his  coat  sleeve,  but,  knowing  that  nothing  could 
avert  a repetition  of  the  Dade  massacre,  except  the  defeat  of  the  Indians, 
he  inspired  his  men  by  his  own  example,  and  their  assailants,  after  a des- 
perate struggle,  were  beaten  off. 

Osceola  was  recognized  by  many  of  the  Americans,  a number  of  whom 
attempted  to  bring  him  down ; but,  though  he  was  wounded,  he  was  not 
incapacitated  from  continuing  the  fight  and  arranging  further  mischief. 
He  wore  a red  belt  and  three  long  feathers,  which  helped  to  identify  him. 
Stationing  himself  behind  a tree,  he  would  load  his  rifle,  step  out  in  plain 
view,  take  deliberate  aim,  and  always  bring  down  his  man. 

It  was  not  until  several  platoons  had  fired  their  volleys  at  him,  and 
riddled  the  tree  behind  which  he  sheltered  himself,  that  he  was  forced  to 
dodge  to  some  other  cover.  He  aimed  at  General  Clinch  several  times, 
and  the  wonder  is  that  he  did  not  kill  him.  The  general  himself  gave 
Osceola  the  credit  of  firing  the  bullet  that  passed  through  his  clothing. 


CHAPTER  XXXI. 


THE  SECOND  SEMINOLE  WAR  (CONTINUED) — DEFEAT  OF  MAJOR  PUTNAM — 
SECOND  FIGHT  AT  THE  OUITHLACOOCHEE — PROGRESS  OF  THE  WAR 
— HELP  FROM  THE  NORTHERN  INDIANS — ^CREEKS  ENLISTED  IN  THE 
UNITED  STATES  SERVICE — COLONEL  LANE’S  EXPEDITION — DEATH  OF 
COLONEL  LANE — BATTLES  IN  WAHOO  SWAMP — FRUITLESS  NEGOTIA- 
TIONS. 

THE  strength  of  the  Seminoles  seemed  to  increase  rather  than  diminish 
as  the  war  progressed.  The  fear  of  this  gang  of  mongrels  ever 
causing  the  United  States  army  serious  trouble  had  been  ridiculed  in  every 
quarter  ; yet  they  had  not  only  inflicted  effective  blows,  but  were  more 
defiant  and  dangerous  than  ever. 

Their  numbers  were  increased  by  runaway  negroes  and  the  criminals 
of  adjoining  tribes,  who  sneaked  into  the  Everglades  out  of  a craving  for 
the  carnival  of  crime  and  death.  These  desperadoes  when  driven  into  a 
corner  fought  like  wildcats  and  without  any  thought  of  surrender. 

It  was  not  often,  however,  that  they  were  cornered,  for  with  the  inter- 
minable swamps,  morasses,  and  wild  forests  behind  them,  with  every  mile 
of  which  they  were  familiar,  they  skurried  to  cover  like  the  Apaches  when 
driven  into  the  mountains  by  the  American  cavalry.  They  threw  the 
whole  territory  into  a panic,  and  threatened  to  overrun  and  destroy  every 
post  in  it.  The  fleeing  fugitives  were  reduced  to  such  sore  straits  that 
Congress  passed  a bill  to  relieve  their  necessities  until  they  could  be  re- 
stored to  their  possessions. 

As  proof  of  the  boldness  of  the  Indians,  it  may  be  related  that  while 
the  sloop  Pilot  was  ascending  the  Halifax,  on  the  17th  of  January,  it  was 
repeatedly  fired  upon  by  a large  body  of  Indians.  The  sails  were  per- 
forated, but  the  marksmanship  of  the  Indians  was  too  poor  to  injure  any 
of  the  crew. 

On  the  following  day,  Major  Putnam,  at  the  head  of  an  independent 
company  stationed  at  Mosquito,  made  his  way  to  a plantation  about  fifty 
miles  south  of  St.  Augustine.  This  place  had  been  devastated  some  weeks 
before  by  the  Indians,  and  Putnam  was  engaged  upon  an  exploring  expe- 
dition, as  it  may  be  called.  He  had  about  forty  men,  and  shortly  after 
reaching  his  destination  was  attacked  by  three  or  four  times  as  many 
Indians. 


259 


26o 


ATTACK  ON  MAJOR  PUTNAM. 


The  two  guards  saw  a couple  approaching  and  fired  upon  them.  One 
Indian  was  killed  and  the  other  wounded.  A sentinel  ran  to  the  fallen 
warrior,  and  was  stooping  over  him,  when  he  received  a ball  in  the  neck. 
At  the  same  moment  the  whole  force  of  Indians  charged  out  of  the  bush 
near  at  hand.  The  Americans,  from  behind  the  ruins  of  the  burned  build- 
ings,  gave  their  assailants  a hot  reception.  The  soldiers  were  so  well 


ATTACK  ON  THE  SLOOP  “PILOT.” 


protected  that  only  one  of  their  number  was  w-ounded,  but  the  savages 
pressed  them  hard,  and  it  was  evident  the  only  escape  lay  in  fleeing  to  the 
boats,  which  were  a considerable  way  off. 

The  whooping  Indians  followed  at  their  heels,  and,  as  the  water  was 
quite  shallow,  threatened  to  clamber  into  the  boats  with  the  soldiers,  or  to 
overwhelm  them  before  they  could  reach  deep  water. 

To  make  matters  worse,  every  gun  except  one  was  useless  from  wet- 
ting. This  single  weapon  was  turned  to  good  account,  and  most  of  the 
men  got  off,  with  nineteen  wounded,  among  whom  were  several  with 
mortal  injuries. 

The  Indians  captured  a boat  containing  ten  men,  who  plunged  over- 
board and  escaped,  excepting  one.  He  swam  to  Pelican  Island,  where  his 


SECOND  FIGHT  AT  THE  OUITHLACOOCHEE. 


26l 


comrades  were  obliged  to  leave  him,  since  they  were  pursued  by  the  Indians 
in  the  captured  craft.  He  was  never  heard  of  again,  and  was  believed  to 
have  been  drowned  in  an  attempt  to  swim  from  the  island  the  next  day. 

General  Gaines  having  arrived  a second  time  at  Tampa,  on  the  9th  of 
February,  1836,  with  a large  force  in  three  steamboats,  set  out  four  days 
later  for  the  Indian  country.  Pie  moved  eastward,  on  the  Alafia  River, 
where  he  heard  there  had  been  a fight  between  the  friendly  Indians  and 
the  hostiles.  Meeting  with  no  enemy,  he  changed  his  march  to  Fort  King, 
arriving  there  on  Washington’s  birthday.  The  place  being  short  of  sup- 
plies, a troop  of  horse  was  dispatched  to  Fort  Draine,  twenty-two  miles 
distant,  whence  they  returned  with  enough  provisions  to  last  a week.  In 
doubt  what  course  to  adopt,  the  general  finally  decided  to  pass  down  the 
Ouithlacoochee,  over  General  Clinch’s  battle  ground,  then  to  Tampa, 
hoping  by  this  means  to  bring  about  a battle  with  the  main  body  of 
Indians.  The  crossing  place  was  reached  on  the  27th. 

While  examining  the  fording  place,  the  war  whoops  sounded  and  the 
soldiers  were  fired  upon.  A desultory  fight  was  kept  up  for  half  an  hour, 
during  which  the  Americans  lost  one  killed  and  one  wounded.  The  hos- 
tiles did  not  seem  strong  enough  to  make  an  impression  on  the  troops,  and 
withdrew.  The  following  day,  when  two  miles  on  its  march,  the  army  was 
again  attacked,  and  two  were  killed  and  two  wounded,  among  the  former 
being  Lieutenant  Izard  of  the  United  States  dragoons. 

That  night  an  express  was  sent  to  Fort  Draine  with  orders  for  the 
commanding  officer  to  march  with  a strong  force  to  the  opposite  side  of 
the  Ouithlacoochee  and  attack  the  Indians  in  the  rear.  On  the  29th,  a 
party  preparing  rafts  for  crossing  the  river  were  fired  upon,  and  the  camp 
itself  was  attacked  on  all  sides  by  a force  of  hostiles,  estimated  at  more 
than  a thousand.  The  fight  was  kept  up  for  two  hours,  during  which  one 
American  was  killed  and  thirty-three  wounded.  Among  the  latter  was  Gen- 
eral Gaines,  who  was  struck  in  the  lip  by  a bullet  which  knocked  out  one 
tooth  and  injured  two  others.  He  treated  the  matter  lightly,  remarking  . 
that,  as  no  dentist  was  within  reach,  he  would  have  to  get  along  as  best  he 
could. 

The  Indians  appeared  again  on  the  2d  of  March,  and  kept  up  the 
attack  at  intervals  for  three  days.  Late  at  night  on  the  5th,  a call  was 
heard  from  the  woods,  and  the  savages  requested  a parley,  saying  they 
were  tired  of  fighting.  The  reply  was  returned  that  if  the  hostiles  wished 
to  treat,  they  must  send  a messenger  with  a white  flag  on  the  morrow. 
He  would  be  allowed  to  come  and  go  in  safety. 

Accordingly,  the  next  day  several  hundred  Indians  emerged  from  the 
woods  and  took  position  about  a fourth  of  a mile  to  the  rear  of  the  whites. 
They  hesitated  a while  as  to  what  they  should  next  do,  when  several  ad- 


26z 


THE  FARCE  OF  THE  FLORIDAS. 


vanced  to  within  hailing  distance  and  repeated  their  words  of  the  evening 
before.  General  Gaines  sent  a staff  officer  to  them.  He  was  told  that  the 
Indians  were  sick  of  fighting,  and  wished  the  army  to  withdraw  from  the 
Ouithlacoochee.  Osceola  was  at  the  head  of  the  delegation. 

This  message  having  been  carried  to  General  Gaines,  he  sent  back 
answer  that  the  Indians  would  be  subdued  ; that  a large  force  was  then  on 
its  way  to  their  country,  and  every  hostile  taken  in  arms  would  be  shot. 

This  not  very  soothing  message  reaching  Osceola,  he  replied  that  his 
people  would  go  into  council,  and  return  their  final  reply  in  the  course  of 
the  afternoon.  Finally,  they  sent  word  that  they  could  not  give  an  answer, 
as  their  head  chief,  Micanopy,  was  not  with  them,  and  he  would  have  to  be 
consulted.  They  were  told  that  if  they  would  cease  fighting,  go  south  of 
the  Ouithlacoochee,  and  attend  a council  when  directed  by  the  U nited  States 
Commissioners,  they  would  not  be  molested. 

Osceola  and  his  warriors  had  barely  assented  to  this  arrangement,  when 
General  Clinch,  with  five  hundred  men,  unexpectedly  appeared  almost 
among  them.  The  Indians  scattered  in  a panic,  doubtless  believing  the 
whole  thing  to  be  a trap,  but  that  officer  had  no  such  thought,  and  brought 
with  him  a large  amount  of  supplies  to  the  famishing  army. 

General  Gaines,  having  transferred  his  command  to  General  Clinch, 
left  for  New  Orleans  a few  daysy  later,  and  Clinch  marched  with  the 
army  to  Fort  Draine.  The  withdrawal  of  General  Gaines  was  due  to 
the  appointment  of  General  Scott  to  the  command  of  affairs  in  Florida. 
He  arrived  at  Fort  Draine  on  the  13th  of  March,  1836.  Fighting  continued 
through  the  summer,  often  of  the  sharpest  character.  The  Indians  did 
not  hesitate  to  attack  strong  bodies  of  soldiers,  and  sometimes  with  tempo- 
rary success.  They  held  their  own  with  great  ability,  and  when  autumn 
approached  it  could  not  be  said  that  the  slightest  progress  had  been 
made  in  the  conquest  of  the  Seminoles  of  Florida. 

If  any  reader  of  these  pages  is  old  enough  to  recall  the  days  of  which 
we  are  writing,  he  will  be  reminded  of  this  farce  of  the  Floridas.  When 
news  came  from  that  remote  quarter,  it  generally  told  of  the  desperate 
straits  of  the  mongrel  defenders  of  their  homes.  They  were  driven  to  the 
last  extremity  ; they  had  been  cornered  somewhere  ; the  last  blow  was  about 
to  be  struck,  and  the  next  news  would  undoubtedly  be  that  the  end  of  the 
struggle  had  come,  and  the  defiant  Seminoles  were  at  the  mercy  of  a too 
indulgent  government. 

Perhaps  the  report  was  that  the  end  had  actually  arrived,  and  the  war 
ended.  By  the  time  the  public  were  beginning  to  attach  some  credit  to 
the  oft-repeated  announcement,  along  would  come  another  dispatch  to  the 
effect  that  some  company  of  troops  had  been  cut  off  by  the  terrible  Osceola 
and  his  warriors,  and  that  the  main  body  was  so  close  on  the  heels  of  the 


BOLDNESS  OF  THE  SEMINOLES. 


263 


marauders  that  escape  was  impossible.  Nevertheless,  the  wily  fellow  and 
his  savages  did  manage  to  escape,  and  all  attempts  to  find  the  hiding 
places  of  the  families  of  the  hostiles  were  fruitless.  “ The  war  is  ended” 
by  and  by  came  to  be  a jest,  designed  to  acquire  more  grim  significance  as 
the  months  and  years  came  and  passed  without  bringing  a cessation  of 
hostilities. 

General  after  general  was  sent  to  Florida  to  wind  up  the  war,  with  the 
result  that  as  a rule  it  was  himself  who  was  “ wound  up.”  The  officers 
were  jealous  of  each  other,  the  important  question  most  of  the  time 
being  that  of  precedence  of  rank  and  the  mutual  rights  of  the  com- 
manders. 

General  Scott’s  most  notable  achievement  was  made  on  the  12th  of 
April,  when  he  shipped  off  four  hundred  Seminoles,  chiefly  women  and 
children  that  had  been  collected  at  Tampa,  and  belonging  to  Black  Dirt’s 
tribe,  to  their  new  homes  in  the  direction  of  the  setting  sun. 

On  the  14th  of  April,  1836,  one  of  the  divisions  of  the  army,  under 
General  Clinch,  marched  from  Tampa  to  Fort  Draine.  Three  days  later 
they  arrived  within  a few  miles  of  Fort  Cooper,  where  Major  Cooper  had 
been  left  with  his  Georgia  battalion.  General  Clinch  went  into  camp  and 
detached  two  mounted  companies  with  orders  to  join  Cooper.  The 
detachment  had  gone  but  a short  distance  when  it  was  fired  upon  by  the 
Indians  and  several  wounded.  A messenger  was  sent  to  General  Clinch 
for  re-enforcements,  but  on  their  arrival  not  an  Indian  was  visible. 

In  addition  to  numerous  attacks,  the  Seminoles  burned  the  lighthouse 
on  Cape  Florida,  the  keeper  managing  by  a narrow  chance  to  save  himself. 
Owing  to  the  unhealthfulness  of  Fort  Draine,  it  was  evacuated  in  July. 
The  troops  and  wagon  train,  while  on  the  way  to  Fort  Defiance,  were 
attacked  as  usual  by  the  Indians,  and,  had  not  relief  been  sent  from  the 
fort  near  at  hand,  it  is  probable  the  troops  would  have  suffered  the  fate  of 
Major  Dade  and  his  men. 

To  make  more  difficult  the  task  of  the  army,  it  was  soon  established 
that  the  Cherokees  in  Alabama  were  slipping  down  into  Florida,  as  chance 
offered,  and  joining  the  hostiles.  It  was  said  that  emissaries  were  sent 
among  them  by  Osceola,  and  perhaps  such  was  the  fact.  A considerable 
body  of  the  northern  Indians,  on  their  way  south,  were  followed  several 
days  by  the  people  of  Stewart  County,  Georgia,  in  the  effort  to  prevent 
their  departure.  Several  skirmishes  took  place,  but  the  whites  were  com- 
pelled to  draw  off  and  allow  the  Indians  to  do  as  they  chose. 

As  the  summer  passed,  the  savages  grew  bolder.  On  the  15th  of 
September,  a hatless  and  exhausted  man  rushed  into  Jacksonville  from 
his  home,  onl)'  seven  miles  away,  with  the  report  that  his  house  was 
attacked  that  morning  at  daybreak  by  a large  number  of  Indians.  He 


264 


ATTACKS  ON  THE  SETTLERS. 


had  two  men  and  nine  guns,  with  which  he  had  been  able  to  keep  off 
the  assailants  until  he  found  the  chance  of  slipping  away  and  giving  the 
alarm. 

Volunteers  quickly  set  out  for  the  place,  and  found  the  family  of  the 
man  uninjured.  Firing  having  been  heard  the  night  before  from  the  di- 
rection of  a neighbor’s  home,  the  party  went  thither.  The  house  was  a 
mass  of  smoking  ruins,  amid  which  were  the  charred  remains  of  a human 
being.  Pushing  along  the  Indian  trail,  they  came  upon  another  house, 
which  had  been  abandoned  so  recently  by  the  occupants  that  the  fire  was 


SEMINOLE  ATTACK  ON  A SETTLER’S  HOME. 


still  burning  in  the  kitchen.  There  were  no  evidences  of  the  hostiles  hav- 
ing done  any  mischief,  and  the  company  advanced  further. 

Four  miles  away,  a dreadful  story  came  to  light.  A man  and  his  wife 
were  about  fifty  feet  from  their  own  door,  when  they  saw  the  Indians 
approaching  from  the  corner  of  a fence  near  by.  They  ran  into  the  house 
and  fastened  the  door.  The  Indians  followed,  firing  into  the  logs  and  call- 
ing out  in  English  that  if  they  would  come  out  and  surrender  they  should 
not  be  harmed.  They  were  too  wise  to  trust  the  promise,  and  kept 
the  door  secured. 

Several  of  the  hostiles  now  peeped  through  the  crevices  between  the 


OUR  CREEK  ALLIES. 


265 


logs,  and,  seeing  the  frightened  man  and  wife,  ordered  them  to  come  out 
without  delay.  The  couple  refused,  and  begged  piteously  for  their  lives. 
Infuriated  by  the  delay,  the  Indians  hurled  themselves  against  the  door, 
stove  it  inward,  and  poured  into  the  room,  firing  at  the  cowering  husband 
and  wife.  The  former  fell  dead,  and  the  wife  sank  to  the  floor  wounded 
by  two  bullets,  her  body  falling  across  that  of  her  husband.  She  was 
seized  by  the  hair,  dragged  out  of  the  house  and  then  dragged  in  again. 
The  band  and  comb  were  torn  from  her  head,  and  she  was  scalped  and  her 
clothing  set  on  fire.  To  make  sure  work,  the  Indians  next  fired  the  house 
and  then  left. 

When  they  were  gone,  the  woman  roused  herself.  She  fainted  at  sight 
of  her  dead  husband,  but  rallied,  and  crawled  out  of  the  house  before  the 
flames  harmed  her.  She  was  able  to  reach  a swamp  near  by,  where  she 
was  found  by  the  party  following  the  trail  of  the  marauders,  to  whom  she 
told  her  story,  and  who  gave  her  the  kindest  attention.  The  hostiles  were 
now  so  far  off  that  it  was  useless  to  follow  them,  and  the  volunteers  re- 
turned. 

It  was  about  this  time  that  a hundred  and  fifty  men  sallied  out  of  Fort 
Gileland  to  punish  a somewhat  less  number  of  Indians  that  were  robbing 
near  by.  Two-thirds  of  the  Americans  were  mounted,  and  included  a 
company  of  artillery  with  a twenty-four  pound  howitzer.  A day’s  search 
failed  to  reveal  any  Indians,  but  the  colonel  was  certain  they  were  in  the 
direction  of  the  San  Feluso  hummock.  He  divided  his  men  into  three 
columns  and  advanced  in  battle  order. 

Sure  enough,  they  were  speedily  attacked,  but  though  the  fighting  con- 
tinued for  more  than  an  hour,  the  loss  on  both  sides  was  trifling.  The 
Indians  charged  on  the  artillery,  but  were  driven  back  and  pursued  for 
more  than  a mile,  when  they  escaped  in  the  wood.  The  United  States 
forces  were  soon  joined  by  two  Creek  chiefs  with  nearly  a thousand  warriors. 

It  looked  as  if  the  Seminoles  must  succumb  ere  long.  When  Indian  is  set 
to  hunt  Indian,  something  is  sure  to  be  done. 

On  the  29th  of  September,  Colonel  Lane  landed  at  Tampa,  from  Apa- 
lachicola, with  a force  of  friendly  Indians  and  whites.  Learning  that  the 
hostiles  were  committing  outrages  in  the  neighborhood,  he  set  out  with  a 
dozen  mounted  men  and  a hundred  Indians.  Marching  hurriedly  to  In- 
dian River,  twelve  miles  distant,  they  discovered  the  enemy  on  the  other 
side.  The  friendlies  had  not  yet  come  up,  but  Colonel  Lane  attacked  at 
once,  and  the  fight  continued  for  a quarter  of  an  hour.  When  the  Creeks 
arrived  the  assault  became  decisive,  and  though  the  Seminoles  fought 
bravely  for  a time,  they  were  compelled  to  fly  in  every  direction. 

During  the  fight  Colonel  Lane’s  life  was  saved  by  an  act  of  devotion  - 
rarely  witnessed.  A Mr.  Kelly  standing  near,  observed  a Seminole  taking 


266 


COLONEL  LANE'S  EXPEDITION. 


deliberate  aim  at  the  officer.  Having  just  fired  his  own  weapon,  he  saw  no 
way  of  saving  the  colonel’s  life  but  by  flinging  himself  between  him  and 
the  Indian  and  receiving  the  bullet  himself.  He  did  so.  The  officer 
escaped  unhurt,  and  Mr.  Kelly  was  wounded,  but,  we  are  glad  to  say,  not  to 
that  extent  that  he  did  not  recover. 

On  the  ioth  of  October,  Colonel  Lane  led  another  expedition  from 
Tampa.  After  a march  of  sixty  miles,  he  reached  Spotted  Lake,  or  O^ 
kikana,  dotted  with  small,  beautifully  wooded  islands  as  far  as  the  vision 


AN  ACT  OF  DEVOTION. 


extended.  It  was  a charming  scene  that  would  have  delighted  the  eye  of 
the  tourist;  but  those  who  had  ventured  into  this  section  had  no  time  to 
admire  the  works  of  nature.  They  struck  a fresh  trail,  which,  being  fol- 
lowed, led  to  a village.  But  it  was  deserted  by  the  Seminoles,  who  knew 
of  the  coming  of  the  white  men. 

Following  the  trail  to  a ford,  they  crossed  by  swimming  and  wading. 
The  horses  were  left  behind.  Beyond,  they  came  upon  extensive  corn 
fields,  ponies  and  cattle,  but  no  Indians.  Still  further,  they  struck  a 
marsh  nearly  a mile  wide,  consisting  of  mud  and  water.  The  Creeks 
plunged  into  it  and  were  followed  by  the  whites.  They  emerged  upon 
one  of  the  islands,  with  the  trail  still  leading  to  the  southward.  In  a vil- 
lage hard  by  were  found  domestic  animals,  utensils,  and  the  scalps  of  a 
number  of  white  people.  Further  on,  another  abandoned  village  was  en- 
countered. Determined  to  force  the  Seminoles  to  a stand,  the  Americans 
advanced  to  the  shore  of  a pond,  skirted  with  a thick  scrub,  a half  mile  in 
extent. 


GOVERNOR  CALL'S  OPERATIONS. 


267 


At  this  point  the  Indians  were  brought  to  bay.  They  met  the  intruders 
with  a volley.  A fight  opened  at  once  and  continued  for  half  an  hour,  when 
a charge  of  the  Creeks  put  the  hostiles  to  flight.  The  whites  destroyed  a 
large  number  of  cattle  and  hogs,  and  returned  to  Fort  Draine. 

Colonel  Lane,  who  had  been  very  active,  complained  of  his  brain 
troubling  him.  He  withdrew  to  the  tent  of  Captain  Goff,  who  was 
temporarily  absent.  On  his  return  he  saw  Colonel  Lane  dead  from  his 
own  sword.  Whether  he  had  fallen  upon  it  accidentally,  or  whether  he 
had  taken  his  own  life  in  a moment  of  mental  aberration,  was  never  known. 
His  death  caused  deep  sorrow  through  the  army,  for  he  was  a brave  and 
capable  officer. 

A short  time  previous,  Governor  Call  notified  the  Secretary  of  War 
that  he  had  taken  general  command  in  Florida,  General  Jesup  having  de- 
clined to  do  so.  The  governor  was  confident  that  he  would  bring  the  war 
to  a successful  close  in  a short  time.  He  began  active  operations  on  the 
28th  of  September,  1836,  by  marching  from  the  Suwanee,  at  Old  Town, 
with  one  thousand  three  hundred  and  seventy-five  men,  the  route  taken 
being  to  Fort  Draine,  which  was  reached  on  the  first  of  the  following 
month,  several  Indians  being  killed  on  the  way.  The  warning  of  one 
of  Osceola’s  spies  was  all  that  prevented  the  capture  of  himself  and  a num- 
ber of  his  warriors  by  Governor  Call.  The  latter  waited  at  Fort  Draine 
until  he  received  some  supplies,  when  he  headed  for  the  “ Cove  of  the 
Ouithlacoochee.”  O11  reaching  the  river,  it  was  so  overflowed  that  it  could 
not  be  crossed.  The  Indians  fired  upon  the  soldiers  from  the  other  sidej 
but  did  little  damage.  The  supplies  of  the  troops  being  nearly  exhausted, 
they  returned  to  Fort  Draine. 

On  the  nth  of  November,  the  army,  numbering  two  thousand  one 
hundred  men, set  out  once  more  from  Fort  Draine  for  the  Ouithlacoochee. 
The  river  was  still  so  high  that  it  was  crossed  with  great  difficulty,  four  of 
the  regulars  being  drowned  on  the  passage.  Arrived  at  the  “ Cove,”  noth- 
ing was  seen  of  the  Indians,  but  the  trails  led  into  Ochlawaha  and  the 
Wahoo  Swamp.  The  left  division  marched  to  Negro  Town,  and  burned 
that  and  another  village.  An  old  negro  told  them  that  the  Indians  had 
gone  to  Wahoo  Swamp. 

Governor  Call  prepared  to  follow  them  up  with  vigor.  Two  hundred 
and  fifty  regulars,  the  Creek  right,  and  a force  of  mounted  men  were  sent 
out  of  the  Cove  and  ordered,  after  exploring  the  country  south  and  west 
of  the  river,  to  unite  with  the  main  army,  near  Dade’s  battle  ground. 
Meanwhile,  Governor  Call  was  to  march  by  the  river  in  the  direction  of 
the  Wahoo,  with  the  Tennessee  brigade,  two  companies  of  artillery,  and 
the  Florida  foot.  The  divisions  marched  on  the  1 6th . The  day  follow- 
ing, the  main  body  discovered  a large  body  of  Indians  encamped  near 


268 


SECOND  BATTLE  OF  WAHOO  SWAMP. 


a hummock.  They  were  attacked,  and  retreated  to  the  hummock  and 
awaited  the  approach  of  the  troops,  who  were  fired  upon  when  in  the 
act  of  dismounting.  The  whites  had  two  killed  and  twelve  wounded, 
the  loss  of  the  Indians  being  much  greater  before  they  fled. 

Leaving  his  baggage  train  under  a strong  guard,  Governor  Call  marched, 
on  the  1 8th,  with  five  hundred  and  fifty  Tennesseans,  mostly  foot,  to  the 
Wahoo  Swamp.  The  Indians  fled  before  them,  burning  their  houses  as 
they  did  so,  and  then,  making  a stand,  opened  a hot  fire  on  the  whites, 
who,  after  returning  it  for  a time,  impetuously  charged  them. 

This  time,  however,  the  hostiles  held  their  ground,  fighting  with 
unflinching  valor.  At  the  same  time,  they  assaulted  the  two  wings  of  the 
army,  and  some  fifty  of  the  Seminoles  attacked  the  rear  of  the  Americans. 
For  half  an  hour  the  fight  continued,  the  greatest  bravery  being  shown  on 
both  sides.  Finally,  the  Seminoles  broke,  leaving  twenty-five  of  their 
number  dead  on  the  field,  while  the  whites  had  three  killed  and 
eighteen  wounded.  Night  was  at  hand,  and  the  army  retreated  to  the 
appointed  meeting  place  with  the  other  detachment  at  Dade’s  battle 
ground. 

On  the  2ist,  the  army  advanced  in  three  columns  into  the  swamp, 
the  Tennesseans  and  regulars  and  mounted  men  on  the  right,  Colonel 
Peirce  with  the  center,  and  the  Creek  regiment  on  the  left.  Most  of  the 
regulars  and  Tennesseans,  by  following  the  trail  on  the  right,  became 
involved  in  a dense  morass,  where  the  horses  could  not  move  and  where 
the  men  sank  to  their  waists  in  mud  and  water. 

The  trail  taken  by  the  Creeks  was  a better  one,  and,  being  followed, 
brought  them  face  to  face  with  the  enemy,  who  were  strongly  entrenched 
in  a cypress  swamp.  The  Creeks  charged  them,  losing  several  of  their 
warriors,  including  their  gallant  leader.  Although  the  friendlies  fought 
with  the  utmost  bravery,  their  situation  was  fast  becoming  hopeless,  and 
they  were  in  danger  of  being  overpowered.  Fortunately,  at  the  critica1 
moment,  re-enforcements  arrived,  but  not  until  all  the  whites  were  brought 
into  the  action  was  the  imminent  peril  ended.  Even  then,  when  the  Semi- 
noles ceased  fighting,  the  honors  were  about  even.  At  this  second  battle 
of  Wahoo  Swamp,  the  whites  lost  nine  killed  and  sixteen  wounded,  the 
Indian  loss  being  about  the  same. 

General  Jesup,  having  received  orders  from  the  Secretary  of  War  to  re- 
sume command,  put  the  main  body  in  motion  in  the  latter  part  of  January, 
1837.  Skirmishing  and  fighting  of  greater  or  less  vigor  followed,  the 
Indians  skillfully  avoiding  a decisive  battle.  General  Jesup  held  a meeting 
with  a few  of  the  chiefs  in  March,  who,  in  reply  to  his  question  as  to  when 
they  would  be  ready  to  remove,  replied  in  the  autumn,  an  answer  which  it 
was  evident  was  made  to  gain  time. 


ENLISTMENT  OF  INDIAN  ALLIES. 


269 


General  Jesup,  like  all  his  predecessors,  was  mercilessly  assailed  for  his 
failure  to  bring  the  war  to  a close.  This  fault-finding  became  so  violent 
that  the  officer  determined  to  do  something.  If  he  could  not  succeed  by 
civilized  methods,  he  meant  to  use  the  tactics  of  his  opponents. 

The  Indians  professed  their  desire  to  make  peace,  and,  during  the 
month  of  May,  there  were  assembled  more  than  3000  men,  women,  and 
children  at  Fort  Mellon,  Lake  Monroe,  to  whom  a thousand  rations  were 
issued.  The  chiefs  came  and  went  as  they  pleased,  and  it  did  begin  to 
look  as  if  the  war  was  about  over,  for  Osceola  had  slept  in  the  tent  of  Colo- 
nel Harney.  General  Jesup  was  confident  that  the  disgraceful  conflict 
was  closed,  and  the  Indians  would  keep  their  pledge  of  departing  without 
further  opposition. 

By  the  middle  of  May,  twenty-four  transports  were  lying  at  Tampa 
to  take  off  the  Indians;  but,  to  his  chagrin,  the  general  found  a fortnight 
later  that  all  had  fled  to  their  morasses  and  swamps.  The  war  promised 
to  break  out  once  more  and  rage  indefinitely  with  all  its  old-time  bitterness 
and  desperation.  Osceola  had  been  among  the  most  active  in  compelling 
the  Indians  to  take  to  the  woods  again. 

It  was  a most  unfortunate  occurrence,  indeed.  Many  of  the  soldiers 
had  gone  home;  sickness  prevailed  among  those  that  remained,  and  a reign 
of  terror  cursed  Florida  from  one  end  to  the  other.  That  General  Jesup 
should  be  humiliated,  as  well  as  exasperated,  was  but  natural.  He  was 
abused  with  more  virulence  than  ever,  and  wrote  to  the  Secretary  of  War, 
asking  to  be  relieved  from  command.  The  request  was  refused,  and  the 
secretary,  on  the  22d  of  July,  ordered  the  enlistment  of  western  Indians  to 
fight  the  Seminoles.  These  were  to  consist  of  400  Shawanoes,  200  Dela- 
wares, and  100  Kickapoos.  The  orders  were  carried  out,  and  in  September 
more  than  1000  southern  and  western  Indians  arrived  in  Florida  to  assist 
the  whites  in  conquering  the  Seminoles. 


CHAPTER  XXXII. 


THE  SECOND  SEMINOLE  WAR  (CONCLUDED)— TREACHEROUS  CAPTURE  OF 
OSCEOLA— HIS  DEATH— BATTLE  OF  LAKE  OKEECHOBEE— DEFEAT  OF 
LIEUTENANT  POWELL— BLOODHOUNDS  IMPORTED  FROM  CUBA — 
FURTHER  OUTRAGES — MIMIC  AND  REAL  TRAGEDIES — FAILURE  OF 
NEGOTIATIONS — THE  RIGHT  MAN  AT  LAST — END  OF  THE  SEMINOLE 
WAR. 

ABOUT  the  middle  of  October,  Osceola  sent  a message  to  Fort  Peyton 
L to  the  effect  that  he  was  but  a few  miles  away  and  wished  to  have  an 
interview  with  General  Hernandez.  He  asked  that  General  Jesup  should 
come  out  and  talk  with  them.  Jesup  did  not  reply,  but  directed  Lieu- 
tenant Peyton  to  get  Osceola  and  his  men  into  the  fort,  if  possible,  and 
then  seize  them.  This  could  not  be  done,  and  General  Hernandez  was 
dispatched  with  two  hundred  men  to  parley  with  them.  While  this  was 
going  on,  Jesup  sent  Lieutenant  Peyton  to  learn  whether  the  answers  of  the 
Indians  were  satisfactory.  The  officer  came  back  with  the  report  that  they 
were  not.  Jesup  then  ordered  Major  Ashby  to  capture  them,  even  though 
the  conference  was  under  a flag  of  truce. 

Major  Ashby  followed  directions,  and,  with  the  aid  of  Hernandez, 
seventy-five  Indians,  including  Osceola,  were  made  prisoners  without  the 
firing  of  a gun.  This  violation  of  the  laws  of  nations  took  place  October 
21,  183;. 

The  act  brought  a storm  of  denunciation  about  the  head  of  General 
Jesup,  greater  than  he  had  yet  been  called  upon  to  stand.  It  was  declared 
that  no  justification  could  be  urged  for  such  flagrant  treachery,  while,  on 
the  other  hand,  it  was  insisted  that  there  was  excuse  for  the  step,  inasmuch 
as  the  Seminoles,  by  their  repeated  treachery,  had  placed  themselves  out- 
side the  pale  of  civilized  warfare.  Furthermore,  the  capture  of  Osceola 
and  the  leading  chiefs  must  prevent  the  shedding  of  much  innocent 
blood,  since  no  reliance  could  be  placed  on  their  pledges,  and  their  whole 
course  was  only  meant  to  gain  time,  in  which  to  make  preparations  for 
carrying  on  their  hostilities  with  greater  success  than  ever. 

Even  if  we  admit  the  force  of  these  arguments,  it  is  impossible  to 
justify  a violation  of  the  sacredness  of  the  flag  of  truce  under  any  circum- 
stances. Unquestionably,  the  affair  was  and  must  ever  be  a blot  upon  our 
honor,  for  it  was  never  disavowed  by  the  government. 

Osceola  and  the  prisoners  were  sent  to  St.  Augustine,  the  chief  after- 


270 


TREACHEROUS  CAPTURE  OF  OSCEOLA. 


BATTLE  OF  LAKE  OKEECHOBEE. 


273 


ward  being  confined  in  Fort  Moultrie,  Charleston.  He  was  crushed  by  his 
overwhelming  misfortune,  and  pined  away  and  died  within  a year.  He 
was  an  individual  possessing  great  strength  of  character,  brave  and  skillful, 
but  without  the  noble  qualities  which  have  given  Tecumseh  his  enduring 
fame.  In  fact  he  had  little  Seminole  blood  in  his  veins,  his  father  having 
been  a white  man  and  his  mother  a half-breed. 

The  belief  that  the  wholesale  capture  of  the  leading  chiefs  would  dis- 
courage the  hostiles  was  delusive,  for  fighting  continued  as  determinedly 
as  ever. 

General  Zachary  Taylor,  afterward  known  as  “ Old  Rough  and 
Ready,”  and  who  became  President  of  the  United  States,  succeeded  Jesup 
in  Florida.  He  marched  from  Fort  Gardener  on  the  19th  of  December, 
1837,  at  the  head  of  six  hundred  men,  and  arrived  three  days  later  at  a point 
on  Okeechobee  Lake,  fifteen  miles  above  the  outlet  of  the  Kissimmee  River. 
From  a prisoner,  he  learned  that  the  main  force  of  the  Seminoles  was  en- 
camped about  twenty-five  miles  distant,  on  the  east  bank  of  Lake  Kis- 
simmee. 

Taylor  crossed  the  river,  leaving  a considerable  part  of  his  men  behind, 
including  most  of  the  Delawares,  whose  feet  and  legs  had  been  so  badly 
cut  by  the  saw  palmetto  that  they  were  barely  able  to  walk.  Using  the 
captured  Indian  as  a guide,  Taylor  advanced  with  the  rest  of  his  force,  and 
reached  the  vicinity  of  the  hostile  camp  on  Christmas  morning. 

The  Seminoles  were  intrenched  in  the  most  difficult  places  of  access 
known  in  the  territory.  About  noon,  the  battle  opened.  The  main  body 
of  Indians  were  posted  in  a hummock,  from  which  they  poured  such  a 
destructive  fire  on  the  volunteers  that  they  were  obliged  to  fall  back. 
They  formed  in  the  rear  of  the  infantry,  who,  in  turn,  were  forced  to  face 
the  murderous  discharge  of  the  hostiles.  They  pushed  on,  however,  and 
gained  the  hummock,  where  the  struggle  was  continued  for  more  than  an 
hour.  Several  times'  the  whites  staggered  and  were  almost  driven  back. 
At  one  time  their  line  was  broken,  but  they  re-formed  and  finally  drove 
the  Seminoles  from  the  field.  As  they  fled,  they  left  ten  of  their  dead,  and 
doubtless  carried  off  a number.  Taylor’s  loss  was  large,  being  twenty- 
eight  killed  and  one  hundred  and  eleven  wounded.  Every  officer  of  four 
companies,  with  a single  exception,  and  every  orderly  sergeant  of  the  same 
companies,  were  killed,  and  the  sergeant  major  mortally  wounded. 

This  was  the  severest  battle  that  had  yet  taken  place  in  Florida, 
The  American  loss  was  severe,  but  the  Seminoles  learned,  as  they  had 
never  learned  before,  how  the  whites  would  fight  when  anything  like  an 
equal  chance  was  given  them. 

Skirmishing  continued  as  before,  the  hostiles  being  too  wary,  as  a rule, 
to  run  the  risk  of  a marked  defeat.  With  such  secure  refuges  always  at 


2/4 


DEFEAT  OF  LIEUTENANT  POWELL. 


their  backs,  the  temptation  was  strong  to  fly  thither,  whenever  the  fortunes 
of  war  wavered  or  turned  against  them. 

On  the  afternoon  of  January  15,  1837,  Lieutenant  L.  M.  Powell,  of 
the  navy,  with  about  eighty  men,  had  a sharp  fight  with  a body  of  Indians 
near  Jupiter  Inlet. 

After  landing  at  Jupiter  River,  Lieutenant  Powell  captured  a squaw, 
whom  he  compelled  to  pilot  him  to  the  Indian  camp,  about  five  miles 
distant.  On  his  arrival,  Powell  found  the  hostiles  ready  for  him.  The 
whites  charged  through  a deep  swamp,  and  the  fight  instantly  became  hot. 


THE  SQUAW  GUIDE. 


Lieutenant  Harrison,  of  the  navy,  was  shot  down  at  the  head  of  his  men, 
who  were  thus  left  without  an  officer.  Lieutenant  Fowler,  of  the  artillery, 
was  ordered  to  penetrate  the  swamp  to  the  right,  while  the  rest  of  the 
troops  advanced  in  line. 

As  a result  of  these  maneuvers,  the  Indians  retreated  to  a large  cypress 
swamp,  nearly  a half  mile  to  the  rear.  At  that  point  they  made  a deter- 
mined stand,  and  Lieutenant  M.  Arthur,  of  the  navy,  and  the  surgeon  were 
killed,  the  latter  while  attending  to  his  medical  duties.  Night  was  at  hand, 
and  the  fire  was  so  destructive  that  Lieutenant  Powell  ordered  a retreat. 
Lieutenant  Fowler  was  shot  down  while  covering  the  withdrawal,  and  only 
, three  officers  were  able  to  keep  their  feet  at  the  close  of  the  action.  The 
whites  hurried  to  their  boats,  and  got  off  with  them  all,  excepting  one, 
which  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  Indians.  Of  the  Americans,  five  were 
killed  outright  and  thirty  wounded,  some  of  them  severely. 

General  Jesup  marched  with  a strong  force  and  attacked  the  Indians 
under  the  same  leader  that  had  defeated  Lieutenant  Powell.  The  general’s 


A RESORT  TO  BLOODHOUNDS. 


275 


force  was  strong  enough  to  drive  out  the  Indians,  but  in  the  effort,  he  had 
ten  men  killed  and  thirty  wounded,  among  the  latter  being  Jesup  himself, 
who  suffered  severely. 

By  this  time  General  Jesup  and  others  had  come  to  believe  that  the 
driving  out  of  the  Seminoles  from  Florida  was  an  impossibility.  It  seemed 
as  though  every  possible  means  had  been  employed,  including  that  of  using 
Indians  against  them,  and  violating  the  flag  of  truce,  but  they  were  as  un- 
conquerable as  ever,  and  able  to  defy  the  army  of  the  United  States. 

Jesup  wrote  to  the  Secretary  of  War,  urging  that  an  arrangement  be 
made  with  the  Seminoles  by  which  they  should  be  allowed  to  live  in  a 
certain  portion  of  Florida,  where  no  one  else  could  live.  The  Secretary  of 
War"  pigeon-holed  ” this  proposition,  saying  that  the  Seminoles  had  signed 
a treaty  agreeing  to  vacate  the  country,  and  that  no  other  arrangement 
could  be  considered. 

Matters  drifted  along  in  this  unsatisfactory  manner  until  April,  1838, 
when  General  Jesup  was  ordered  to  proceed  to  the  Cherokee  country,  leav- 
ing General  Taylor  in  command  of  the  forces  in  Florida.  On  the  10th  of 
May,  Captain  Ellis  killed  five  Indians  in  a hummock  near  Santa  Fe  bridge 
without  injury  to  his  own  party.  Similar  events  occurred  elsewhere,  with- 
out having  the  slightest  bearing  on  the  war  itself. 

General  Taylor’s  plans  were  disarranged  by  the  President,  and  he  was 
succeeded  by  General  McComb,  who  arrived  April  5,  1838,  at  his  head- 
quarters on  Black  Creek,  his  chief  purpose  being  to  make  peace  with  the 
Indians. 

Before  referring  to  the  actions  of  General  McComb,  mention  must  be 
made  of  a novel  method  of  running  down  the  Seminoles.  It  would  seem 
that  everything  imaginable  had  been  tried,  but  without  avail.  It  was  now 
decided  to  resort  to  bloodhounds,  and  General  Jesup  took  measures  to  pro- 
cure a number  of  these  terrible  canines  from  Cuba  for  the  purpose  of 
tracking  the  refugees  into  the  swamps.  General  Taylor  and  the  adminis- 
tration approved  of  the  plan,  and  thirty-three  hounds,  with  five  Spaniards 
to  manage  them,  were  brought  into  the  country  at  an  expense  of  several 
thousand  dollars. 

Although  it  was  officially  stated  that  these  dogs  were  intended  only  to 
track  the  hostiles,  and  there  is  little  evidence  that  they  were  used  for  any 
other  purpose,  the  act  raised  a cry  of  indignation  throughout  the  country. 
Tales  of  the  ferocity  of  the  brutes  toward  runaway  slaves  were  published, 
and  it  was  said  that,  failing  to  drive  the  rightful  owners  from  their  lands 
by  treachery,  it  was  now  decided  that  they  should  be  rended  to  pieces  by 
the  dreadful  creatures  from  Cuba. 

However,  this  flurry  was  unnecessary,  for,  to  the  disgust  of  those  hav- 
ing the  matter  in  charge,  the  experiment  proved  a flat  failure.  The  hounds 


276 


GENERAL  McCOMB’S  DIFFICULT  TASK. 


had  been  trained  to  take  the  scent  of  negroes,  and,  when  put  upon  the  trail 
of  an  Indian,  they  refused  to  follow  it.  No  inducement  could  make  them 
act  against  the  red  men.  It  is  said  in  some  cases,  where  the  dogs  were 
persuaded  to  enter  the  woods,  the  negroes  or  Indians  made  friends  with 
them,  and  then  used  them  to  hunt  down  the  white  men  themselves. 
This  was  turning  the  tables  with  a vengeance. 

Meanwhile,  as  we  have  stated,  General  McComb  found  a most  difficult 
task  on  his  hands.  From  time  to  time,  numbers  of  the  Seminoles,  with 


BLOODHOUNDS  IN  THE  SEMINOLE  WAR. 


their  families,  had  been  corralled,  or  persuaded  to  come  in,  and  allow  them- 
selves to  be  shipped  to  the  lands  selected  for  them  beyond  the  Mississippi, 
but  the  hostiles  were  as  defiant  as  ever.  The  general  attempted  to  open 
communication  with  them  by  means  of  kindly  treating  a number  of  pris- 
oners and  then  releasing  them.  But  those  who  did  not  join  the  savages 
came  back  with  the  report  that  they  could  not  find  them. 

Finally,  on  the  17th  of  May,  through  the  help  of  Colonel  Harney,  a 
number  of  chiefs  were  got  together  from  the  southern  part  of  the  penin- 
sula, with  whom  an  agreement  was  made  that  they  should  remain  in 
peaceable  occupation  until  they  heard  the  reports  of  those  who  had  re- 
moved to  the  new  country.  This  much  accomplished.  General  McComb 
thought  he  was  warranted  in  leaving  Florida. 

The  outrages  continued  without  intermission.  Besides  the  families  of 


A GROTESQUE  INCIDENT. 


277 


the  settlers,  small  detachments  of  soldiers  suffered.  Colonel  Harney  had 
gone  to  the  Colooshatchie  to  establish  a trading  post,  agreeably  to  the 
treaty  made  by  General  McComb.  While  there  he  was  attacked,  July  23, 
by  Indians,  and  thirteen  out  of  eighteen  men  were  killed.  This,  as  well  as 
the  other  atrocities,  showed  the  worthlessness  of  the  agreement  made  with 
a few  of  the  Seminoles. 

Nearly  at  the  same  time,  a company  of  soldiers  building  a bridge  in 
Middle  Florida  were  surprised  by  the  Indians  and  six  of  their  number 
killed,  and,  at  Orange  Lake,  three  soldiers  were  shot  while  bathing.  The 
outrages  were  so  numerous  and  so  similar  in  character,  that  it  is  useless  to 
give  them  in  detail. 

Thus  matters  moved  along  until  1840.  On  the  first  day  of  February, 
a detachment  of  men  hunting  for  deserters  were  fired  on  near  Fort  Brooke 
and  the  sergeant  killed.  On  the  22d  of  the  same  month,  while  Lieutenant 
Whedon,  with  some  volunteers,  was  following  a fresh  Indian  trail  near 
Magnolia,  he  was  drawn  into  ambush  and  shot  from  his  horse.  His  men 
hurried  off  and  left  him  to  his  fate. 

A grotesque  incident  took  place  in  May.  An  ambitious  theatrical 
manager  concluded  to  visit  Florida  and  show  the  people  some  mimic  trag- 
edies in  place  of  their  real  ones,  possibly  thinking  the  change  would  be  en- 
joyed by  them:  His  company  were  jogging  along  in  a couple  of  wagons, 
and  were  within  a few  miles  of  St.  Augustine,  when  the  Indians  opened  a 
genuine  tragedy  by  pouring  a volley  into  both  vehicles.  Four  of  the 
players  were  killed,  but  the  women  and  manager  escaped. 

The  Indians  donned  the  theatrical  costumes  with  all  their  spangles, 
brilliant  sashes,  and  toggery,  and  were  delighted  almost  out  of  their  wits. 
They  surrounded  Fort  Searle  and  dared  the  garrison  to  come  out  and  fight, 
but  the  whites  were  too  few  in  number  to  take  the  risk. 

General  W.  R.  Armistead  now  succeeded  to  the  command  in  Florida, 
it  having  been  decided  to  pursue  a more  conciliatory  policy  toward  the 
Indians.  With  this  end  in  view,  a deputation  of  Seminoles,  who  had 
spent  some  time  in  their  new  home  beyond  the  Mississippi,  were  induced 
to  go  among  their  hostile  brethren  and  try  to  persuade  them  to  move 
quietly  to  the  reservation.  Fourteen  chiefs  and  others  came  from  Arkan- 
sas, arriving  at  Tampa  on  the  2d  of  November.  These  warriors  were  all 
known  to  have  been  bitterly  opposed  to  emigrating,  and  much  hope  was 
placed  on  the  efforts  they  promised  to  make  among  the  disaffected.  To 
convince  the  whites  of  their  sincerity  they  left  their  families  with  them 
until  they  should  return. 

The  deputation  met  the  leading  hostiles  in  the  woods,  and  a number 
of  earnest  councils  were  held  with  them.  Whether  the  deputation  really 
tried  to  persuade  their  brothers  to  give  up  the  war  and  leave  the  country, 


278 


GENERAL  ARMISTEAD’S  DISAPPOINTMENT. 


or  whether  they  took  the  opposite  course,  cannot  be  known.  Be  that  as  it 
may,  the  mission  was  a failure.  The  wild  Seminoles  took  to  the  woods 
once  more,  and  renewed  their  fighting  with  as  much  fierceness  as  before. 

In  his  bitter  disappointment,  General  Armistead  wrote  to  the  Secre- 
tary of  War : 

“Thus  have  ended  all  our  well-grounded  hopes  of  bringing  the  war  to 
a close  by  pacific  measures.  Confident  in  the  resources  of  the  country, 


x ./  ' 

A SEMINOLE  THEATRICAL  I ROUPE. 

the  enemy  will  hold  out  to  the  last,  and  can  never  be  induced  to  come  in 
again.  Immediately  upon  the  withdrawal  of  the  Indians,  orders  were 
transmitted  to  commanders  of  regiments  to  put  their  troops  in  motion,  and 
before  this  reaches  you  there  will  be  scouting  in  every  direction.” 

The  severest  blow  against  the  Indians  was  struck  in  December  by 
Colonel  Harney,  who,  at  that  early  day,  had  made  a reputation  as  a great 
Indian  fighter.  Convinced  that  the  Seminoles  had  their  headquarters 


THE  RIGHT  MAN  AT  LAST. 


279 


somewhere  in  the  Everglades,  he  determined  to  penetrate  thither.  He 
secured  as  his  guide  an  old  negro  who  had  lived  a number  of  years  among 
the  Indians.  With  ninety  men  he  entered  that  dismal  solitude,  and,  com- 
ing upon  one  of  the  worst  bands  in  Florida,  killed  the  chief,  several  war- 
riors, took  thirty-eight  prisoners,  and,  convinced  that  nine  of  them  were 
engaged  in  the  massacre  of  his  little  command,  as  well  as  a number  of 
other  murders,  he  promptly  hanged  every  one. 

One  more  change  in  commanders  took  place,  and  it  was  the  last,  for 
General  William  J.  Worth  proved  to  be  the  right  man.  He  assumed  mili- 


PENET RATING  THE  EVERGLADES. 


tary  charge  in  Florida  in  the  spring  of  1841,  and  did  what  all  his  predeces- 
sors were  unable  to  do — ended  the  Seminole  war. 

In  a summer  camp,  his  troops  in  small  parties  penetrated  the  seem- 
ingly inaccessible  swamps  to  the  islands,  where  they  destroyed  not  only 
the  shelters  of  the  enemy,  but  most  of  their  crops,  on  which  they  and 
their  families  depended  in  winter.  A chief,  who  was  brought  to  Tampa 
in  irons,  was  put  to  the  best  use  of  his  life.  General  Worth  convinced 
this  individual  that  he  was  a powerful  leader  among  his  people,  and  could 
bring  the  war  to  a close.  He  allowed  him  to  name  five  of  his  fellow-cap- 
tives, who  were  sent  to  the  hostiles  with  word  that,  unless  they  came  in 


280 


END  OF  THE  SEMINOLE  WAR. 


and  surrendered  to  General  Worth  by  a date  fixed  by  the  captive  chief,  he 
and  every  one  of  the  prisoners  would  be  hanged. 

A picturesque  and  impressive  sight  followed  this  simple,  but  master 
stroke  of  General  Worth.  The  fierce  mongrels  that  had  successfully  defied 
the  United  States  Army  so  long,  and  worn  out  the  patience  of  the  nation, 
were  Irigntened  at  last  into  submission.  The  story  told  by  the  paroled 
captives,  who  did  their  duty  faithfully,  thrilled  them  for  the  first  time  with 
real  fear,  and  the  gloomy  Everglades  began  ejecting  their  terrible  denizens. 
The  desperate  vagrants,  emaciated,  cadaverous,  barefooted,  and  in  rags, 
straggled  out  of  the  dark  recesses,  with  their  wretched  and  half-naked 
women  and  children,  the  procession  continuing  until  the  dismal  “land  of  ref- 
uge ” was  emptied  of  its  savage  inhabitants.  The  dusky  warriors  handed 
over  the  flintlocks  that  had  wrought  such  fearful  work  to  their  captors,  and 
sullenly  awaited  their  fate. 

No  fear  now  of  their  scattering  like  rats  to  their  holes  again.  The 
military  authorities  had  learned,  from  dear  experience,  how  to  treat  such 
dangerous  enemies  when  in  their  power.  The  exodus  was  vigorously 
pushed,  and  the  captives  sent  westward,  until  Florida  was  finally  and  for- 
ever rid  of  their  perilous  presence. 

The  end  came  in  1842.  It  is  a striking  fact  that  had  the  Seminoles 
held  out  a single  year  longer,  they  would  have  secured  the  twenty  years* 
occupation  guaranteed  by  the  treaty  of  Payne’s  Landing. 

But  the  cost  of  the  Seminole  War!  The  figures  are  forty  million  dol- 
lars, and  for  every  fugitive  slave  reduced  to  bondage  again,  it  was  esti- 
mated that  the  lives  of  three  white  men  were  sacrificed  and  eighty  thou- 
sand dollars  expended.  Truly,  the  price  was  a fearful  one. 


CHAPTER  XXXIII. 


THE  DISCOVERY  OF  GOLD  IN  CALIFORNIA — TREATIES  WITH  THE  INDIANS 
— TREATY  WITH  THE  CHEYENNES  AND  ARAPAIIOES — INTRUSION  ON 
THE  INDIAN  LANDS — MASSACRE  OF  INDIANS  BY  COLONEL  CHIVINGTON 
— NEW  TREATIES — ESTABLISHMENT  OF  MILITARY  POSTS — THE  MILI- 
TARY DIVISION  OF  THE  MISSOURI — ATTACK  ON  THE  UNION  PACIFIC 
RAILWAY — FRUITLESS  NEGOTIATIONS — CONGRESS  APPOINTS  COMMIS- 
SIONERS— THEIR  DOINGS. 

T~^\OWN  to  the  year  1851,  the  vast  plains  to  the  eastward  of  the  Rocky 
' ' Mountains  were  regarded  as  Indian  territories,  over  which  numerous 
tribes  roamed  at  will  from  Texas  and  Mexico  to  the  British  possessions. 

The  discovery  of  gold  in  California,  in  1849,  drew  e>’es  °f  the 
civilized  world  to  the  Pacific  Coast,  and  a tide  of  emigration  set  in  that 
direction,  the  like  of  which  this  country  has  never  seen.  The  ships  that 
made  the  tempestuous  passage  around  Cape  Horn  were  crowded  to  over- 
flowing with  men  eager  to  face  every  peril  for  the  sake  of  diggingthe  yel- 
low particles  from  the  mountains  and  river  beds.  By  and  by,  the  long 
voyage  was  cut  in  two  by  the  multitudes  who  sailed  down  to  the  Isthmus 
of  Nicaragua,  and  tramped  or  rode  across  the  fever-smitten  neck  of  land 
and  took  ship  on  the  other  side  for  California. 

While  these  lines  of  travel  were  crowded,  thousands  crossed  the  conti- 
nent by  the  plains  or  overland  route.  This  course  was  beset  with  perils. 
The  emigrants  spent  weeks  and  months,  their  wagons  winding  slowly  across 
the  prairies,  fording  streams,  climbing  mountains,  toiling  through  ravines, 
deluged  with  rain,  sleet  and  snow,  shivering  with  cold  or  fainting  with 
heat,  and  in  continual  danger  from  Indians.  Many  a train  that  left  Inde- 
pendence, Miss.,  fully  equipped  and  armed,  and  full  of  high  hopes,  never 
lived  to  catch  the  gleam  of  the  far  Pacific.  If  they  survived  starvation  and 
the  rigor  of  the  climate,  they  were  overwhelmed,  perhaps,  in  some  lonely 
glen  by  the  fierce  red  man,  and  their  whitening  bones  were  left  to  tell 
their  fate  to  the  crowds  following  in  their  footsteps,  and  compelled  to 
face  the  same  perils  and  possibly  to  meet  the  same  fate. 

The  tide  of  emigration  across  the  plains  made  necessary  a treaty  with 
various  tribes,  by  which  a broad  highway  was  opened  to  California,  and  the 
tribes  restricted  within  certain  boundaries.  At  the  same  time,  they  were 
allowed  to  hunt  upon  this  reservation.  The  government  agreed  to  give 
the  Indians  fifty  thousand  dollars  annually  for  fifteen  years  in  payment  for 

281 


28  2 


TREATIES  WITH  THE  INDIANS. 


the  privilege  granted  to  emigrants  to  cross  the  plains  without  moles- 
tation. 

This  treaty  assigned  as  boundaries  to  the  Cheyennes  and  Arapahoes 
the  larger  part  of  the  present  State  of  Colorado,  while  the  Crows  and  Sioux 
were  to  occupy  the  land  traversed  by  the  Powder  River  route  to  Montana. 
Some  years  later,  gold  and  silver  were  discovered  in  Colorado  upon  the 
Indian  reservations,  and  hundreds  of  settlers  crowded  thither,  as  usual  with 


THE  OVERLAND  ROUTE  TO  CALIFORNIA. 


no  regard  for  the  rights  of  the  Indians.  When  these  intruders  had  taken 
up  most  of  the  lands,  another  treaty  was  made,  February  1 8,  1861,  to 
secure  them  in  their  possessions.  The  Indians  agreed  to  give  up  an  im- 
mense tract  of  territory  and  to  confine  themselves  to  a small  district  on 
both  sides  of  the  Arkansas  River,  and  alongthe  northern  boundary  of  New 
Mexico.  The  government  bound  itself  to  protect  them  in  these  possessions, 
paying  an  annuity  of  thirty  thousand  dollars  to  each  tribe  for  fifteen  years, 
and  to  furnish  them  with  stock  and  agricultural  implements. 

No  difficulties  occurred  between  the  white  inhabitants  of  Colorado 
and  the  Indians  until  April,  1864.  During  the  summer  of  that  year,  the 
red  men  began  committing  depredations  and  robberies  upon  the  property 
of  the  settlers.  Colonel  Chivington,  commanding  the  troops  at  Denver, 
allowed  a subordinate  officer  to  lead  a detachment  of  soldiers  to  punish  the 
Indians  for  their  acts.  He  attacked  the  Cheyenne  village  of  Cedar  Bluffs, 


COLONEL  CHIVINGTON’S  CRIME, 


283 


killed  twenty-six,  wounded  thirty,  and  divided  the  plunder  among  his  men. 
Hostilities  and  fighting  continued  until  autumn,  but  the  Indians  wanted 
peace,  and  applied  to  Major  Wynkoop,  commander  of  Fort  Lyon,  to  ne- 


COMITSG  IN  AT  FORT  LYON. 


gotiate  a treaty  to  secure  it.  That  officer  ordered  the  Indians  to  gather 
about  the  fort,  assuring  them  of  protection. 

In  response  to  this  command  and  guarantee,  five  hundred  men,  women, 
and  children  collected  at  the  post.  Colonel  Chivington  then  attacked  and 
slaughtered  them,  without  mercy.  This  horrible  crime,  known  as  the  Sand 
Creek  massacre,  was  committed  November  29,  1864.  Inevitably  a war 
with  these  tribes  followed,  drawing  eight  thousand  men  from  the  forces  in 
the  field  suppressing  the  Southern  insurrection,  and  costing  the  country 
thirty  million  dollars.  During  the  campaign  of  1865,  less  than  twenty  In- 


284 


ESTABLISHMENT  OF  MILITARY  POSTS. 


dians  were  killed.  The  attempt  to  obtain  peace  by  this  means  was  as 
futile  as  with  the  Seminoles,  nearly  thirty  years  before. 

As  the  only  thing  that  could  be  done,  commissioners  were  appointed 
in  the  autumn  of  1865, to  secure  a council  with  the  tribes  and  end,  if  pos- 
sible, the  war.  In  October  of  that  year,  the  commissioners  met  the  chiefs 
of  the  Cheyennes,  Arapahoes,  and  other  tribes  at  the  mouth  of  the  Little 
Arkansas,  and  induced  them  to  give  up  their  reservation  upon  the  Ar- 
kansas, and  accept  another  in  the  State  of  Kansas,  with  the  privilege  of 
ranging  over  the  plains  formerly  owned  by  them.  The  Senate  amended 
this  treaty  so  as  to  exclude  the  tribes  entirely  from  Kansas,  leaving  them 
nothing  but  their  hunting  privileges  on  the  unsettled  plains.  Neverthe- 
less, the  southern  tribes  strictly  observed  the  treaty  through  the  year  1866. 

The  Sioux,  to  the  north,  had  driven  the  Crows  into  Montana,  and 
occupied  the  wide  range  of  territory  originally  assigned  to  both.  The 
territories  to  the  south  had  become  populous,  and  rumors  of  rich  mines  in 
Montana  attracted  emigration  in  that  direction  across  their  lands.  This 
narrowed  the  rich  hunting  grounds  to  the  valley,  from  the  north  of  which 
flowed  the  Powder  River.  The  annuities  from  the  government  having 
ceased,  it  was  important  that  the  remnant  of  the  Indians’  hunting-ranges 
should  remain  intact,  for  they  afforded  their  only  means  of  subsistence. 

Orders  were  issued  by  the  commanding  officers  of  the  Military  Depart- 
ments of  the  Missouri  and  of  the  Platte,  to  establish  several  military  posts 
along  the  new  route  of  travel  to  Montana.  The  orders  were  given  June 
15,  1866,  to  garrison  Forts  Reno,  Phil  Kearny,  and  C.  F.  Smith.  The 
Indians  warned  the  troops  from  the  first  that  this  occupation  of  their  terri- 
tory would  be  resisted.  No  heed  was  paid  to  the  threat,  and  fighting  con- 
tinued through  the  summer  and  autumn.  On  the  21st  of  December,  a 
wagon  train  attended  by  an  escort  was  sent  a short  distance  from  Fort 
Phil  Kearny,  to  procure  lumber.  They  were  attacked  by  Indians  and 
brevet  Lieutenant  Colonel  W.  T.  Fetterman  was  ordered  out  with  forty- 
nine  men  to  the  rescue  of  the  wagon  train.  The  entire  company,  includ- 
ing its  commander,  was  assailed  and  massacred  by  the  Indians. 

Great  apprehension  now  prevailed  that  war  would  be  kindled  along 
the  line  of  the  Pacific  Railway.  General  St.  George  Cook,  commanding  at 
Omaha,  forbade  the  sale  of  arms  and  ammunition  to  the  Indians  within 
the  limits  under  his  command.  This  deepened  the  resentment  of  the 
Cheyennes  and  Arapahoes,  for  without  ammunition  they  could  not  hunt 
for  food  for  themselves  and  families. 

The  troops  on  the  Powder  River  route  were  exasperated  and  alarmed 
by  the  Sioux  and  Cheyennes,  who  would  not  listen  to  any  proposition  until 
the  troops  were  withdrawn.  The  memory  of  the  Sand  Creek  crime  still 
burned  in  the  hearts  of  the  Cheyennes,  Arapahoes,  Kiowas,  Comanches  and 


GENERAL  HANCOCK’S  CAMPAIGN. 


285 


Apaches.  They  had  been  driven  from  the  rich  lands  of  Colorado,  and  left 
only  the  poor  privilege  of  ranging  the  plains  for  the  fast  disappearing  buf- 
falo and  other  game,  and  now  this  privilege  was  made  worthless  by  the 
order  forbidding  the  sales  of  arms  and  ammunition,  which  was  promulgated 
in  January  at  the  Arkansas  posts  also.  Threats  of  a general  Indian  war  in 
the  spring  were  uttered  by  the  leading  chiefs  and  warriors. 

The  American  forces  were  under  the  command  of  Lieutenant  General 
William  T.  Sherman,  of  the  Military  Division  of  the  Missouri.  This  divi- 
sion was  made  into  three  departments:  Dakota,  on  the  north,  commanded 
by  General  A.  H.  Terry  ; the  Platte,  in  the  middle,  commanded  by  General 
C.  C.  Augur ; and  that  of  Missouri,  to  the  south,  commanded  by  General  W. 
S.  Hancock. 

In  this  war  were  engaged  about  300  warriors  of  the  northern  Cheyennes 
and  Arapahoes,  and  probably  about  five  times  as  many  members  of  the 
Sioux  tribe  in  the  north.  It  was  they  who  were  responsible  for  the  Fort 
Philt  Kearny.  massacre.  Of  the  southern  Cheyennes  and  Arapahoes,  500 
warriors  were  engaged. 

During  the  winter  of  1866-67,  engineering  parties  on  the  Union 
Pacific  were  warned  to  cease  operations.  Numerous  depredations  had 
occurred  upon  the  lines  of  stages  and  express  trains.  General  Hancock 
determined  in  the  spring  to  hold  councils  with  the  hostile  tribes  of  the 
south,  and  learn  their  purposes  and  claims.  He  reached  Fort*  Larned, 
April  7 with  1500  men.  He  was  there  informed  by  Colonel  Wynkoop, 
agent  for  the  Cheyennes,  Arapahoes,  and  Apaches,  that  he  had  sent  out 
runners  to  the  chiefs  to  arrange  for  a conference  at  that  post  on  the  10th. 

A violent  storm  raged  on  that  day  and  prevented  the  conference. 
The  following  day  it  was  learned  that  about  1 500  Cheyennes  were  encamped 
at  a village  on  the  Pawnee  Fork.  On  the  13th,  General  Hancock  rode 
toward  the  Indian  encampment  and  was  met  by  the  chiefs,  who  begged 
him  to  come  no  nearer  with  his  soldiers  as  they  were  afraid  of  a repetition 
of  the  scenes  of  Sand  Creek.  Thus  did  the  shame  of  one  officer  throw  its 
baleful  shadow  over  the  spotless  fame  of  another. 

General  Hancock  advanced,  however,  and  the  warriors  fled  with  their 
families.  In  their  flight  they  destroyed  several  stations,  killing  the  guards 
and  taking  away  the  property.  Learning  of  these  acts,  Hancock  burned 
the  village,  consisting  of  three  hundred  lodges,  and  property  to  the  amount 
of  $100,000.  He  pushed  westward,  and  hearing  of  constant  attacks  by  the 
hostiles  upon  the  Smoky  Hill  route,  on  the  line  of  the  Pacific  Railway,  he 
sent  General  Custer  with  a force  of  400  men  in  that  direction. 

Custer  met  Pawnee  Killer,  the  leader  of  the  hostiles  in  that  section,  and 
sought  a friendly  understanding  with  him,  but  without  success.  The  attacks 
by  the  Indians  continued,  and  Custer  assumed  the  offensive,  rarely  succeed- 


286  HOSTILITIES  ALONG  THE  UNION  PACIFIC  RAILWAY. 

in g,  however,  in  bringing  about  an  engagement  with  them.  Near  Fort 
Wallace,  500  Indians  attacked  the  wagon  train,  and  a fierce  engagement 
followed.  The  wagon  train  got  through  with  a loss  of  twelve  men.  Soon 
after  this  occurrence,  June  26,  General  Custer  was  recalled  from  the  region. 

General  Hancock  continued  his  expedition,  and  held  a number  of 
important  conferences  with  chiefs  who  professed  a desire  for  peace,  if  it 
could  be  had  on  equitable  terms.  Hancock  returned  to  Fort  Leavenworth 
in  August  and  was  succeeded  by  General  Sheridan. 

The  Indians  were  much  exasperated  by  the  burning  of  the  village  on 
Pawnee  Fork,  and  continued  their  depredations  during  the  summer.  The 


ATTACK  ON  RAILWAY  TRAIN  BY  HOSTILES. 

operations  on  the  Union  Pacific  Railway  were  much  retarded.  Surveyors 
and  workmen  were  often  waylaid  and  murdered,  and  stock  and  materials 
driven  off  or  destroyed.  Stages  and  express  trains  were  robbed,  stations 
burned,  settlements  attacked,  and  a wild  predatory  warfare  carried  on. 

In  August,  1867,  a freight  train  from  Omaha  was  thrown  off  the  track 
near  Plum  Creek  by  obstructions  placed  on  the  rails  by  Indians.  The 
cars  and  merchandise  were  burned,  and  all  the  employees  on  the  train, 
except  one,  killed.  General  Augur  sent  a detachment  of  troops  to  the  scene. 
They  were  joined  by  a band  of  friendly  Pawnees,  and  in  a fight  with  five 
hundred  Sioux,  killed  sixty  of  them. 

Most  of  General  Augur’s  forces,  numberingabout  two  thousand,  had  been 


APPOINTMENT  OF  INDIAN  COMMISSIONERS. 


287 


sent  under  General  Gibbon  to  the  region  about  the  sources  of  the  Powder  and 
Yellowstone  rivers,  where  the  northern  tribes  were  engaged  in  hostilities. 
On  the  2d  of  August,  a band  of  woodcutters  at  Fort  Phil  Kearny,  attended 
by  an  escort  of  forty  soldiers  and  some  fifty  citizens,  was  attacked  by  an 
overwhelming  force  of  Indians.  A desperate  fight  followed,  lasting  three 
hours,  when  the  whites  were  saved  by  the  arrival  of  two  companies  of 
Federal  troops  with  a howitzer,  who  drove  off  the  Indians,  inflicting  a loss 
of  more  than  fifty  killed  and  a large  number  wounded. 

The  operations  against  these  Indians  accomplished  nothing.  General 
Sheridan  declared  that  fifty  of  them  could  chcclsmate  three  thousand 
soldiers,  and  recommended  peaceful  negotiations  as  the  only  means  of  put- 
ting an  end  to  the  lamentable  state  of  affairs. 

Congress  passed  an  act  in  July,  “to  establish  peace  with  certain  hostile 
Indian  tribes,”  which  provided  for  the  appointment  of  commissioners  with 
a view  to  the  following  objects: 

1.  To  remove,  if  possible,  the  causes  of  the  war. 

2.  To  secure,  as  far  as  practicable,  our  frontier  settlements,  and  the 
safe  building  of  the  railways  looking  to  the  Pacific. 

3.  To  suggest  or  inaugurate  some  plan  for  the  civilization  of  those 
Indians. 

The  commissioners  selected  were:  N.  G.  Taylor,  president;  J, 
B.  Henderson  ; W.  T.  Sherman,  lieutenant  general ; W.  S.  Harney., 
brevet  major  general;  John  B.  Sanderson;  Alfred  H.  Terry,  brevet  major- 
general  ; S.  F.  Tappan  ; C.  C.  Augur,  brevet  major  general. 

These  commissioners  organized  at  St.  Louis,  August  6,  and  set  to 
work  to  obtain  interviews  with  the  chiefs  of  the  hostile  tribes.  Runners 
were  sent  out  to  assure  the  Indians  of  the  purposes  of  the  commissioners, 
who  visited  various  parts  of  the  Military  Division  of  the  Missouri,  taking 
evidence  of  the  officers  regarding  the  hostiles  and  the  causes  of  the  war, 
and  completing  arrangements  for  a great  council  of  the  northern  hostile 
tribes  at  Fort  Laramie  on  the  13th  of  September,  and  of  the  southern  tribes 
at  Fort  Larned  on  the  13th  of  October. 

It  was  found  difficult  to  deal  with  the  discontented  Sioux,  but  through 
the  exertions  of  Swift  Bear,  a chief  of  the  Brule  Sioux,  several  tribes  were 
represented  at  a meeting  at  North  Platte  in  September,  and  something  like 
a friendly  disposition  shown.  The  Indians  insisted  before  any  talk  was 
had  that  arms  and  ammunition  should  be  promised  them,  and  this  was  done 
by  the  commissioners.  The  meeting  at  Fort  Laramie  was  postponed  until 
November  1,  because  it  was  impossible  to  get  the  northern  Cheyennes  and 
Sioux,  who  still  kept  up  their  hostilities  on  the  Powder  River  route,  to  the 
post  in  time. 

At  the  conference  at  Fort  Larned  in  October,  the  Kiowas,  Comanches, 


288 


THE  MEETING  AT  FORT  LARAMIE. 


and  Apaches,  who  had  not  been  engaged  in  any  of  the  outrages  upon  the 
plains  during  the  summer,  were  readily  persuaded  to  meet  the  commis- 
sioners, and  a satisfactory  treaty  was  signed  with  them  on  the  20th  of  Octo- 
ber. There  was  more  difficulty  with  the  southern  Cheyennes  and  Arapahoes, 
but  they  were  finally  induced  to  sign  a joint  treaty. 

The  commissioners  now  proceeded  north  to  meet  the  tribes  at  Fort 
Laramie.  A delegation  of  Crows  awaited  them  at  that  post,  but  Red 
Cloud,  the  mighty  Sioux  leader  in  the  north,  refused  to  have  anything  to 
do  with  the  commissioners.  He  resisted  all  overtures,  but  sent  word  to 
them  that  war  would  cease  whenever  the  military  garrisons  were  withdrawn 
from  the  Powder  River  trail,  and  their  hunting  grounds  left  free  from 
molestation.  The  commissioners,  having  no  authority  to  make  such  with- 
drawal, succeeded  in  persuading  Red  Cloud  to  cease  hostilities  and  to  meet 
them  the  following  spring  or  summer. 

This  summary  of  the  leading  incidents  in  our  troubles  with  the  abor- 
igines of  the  West  has  obliged  us  to  omit  any  reference  to  what  was  really 
one  of  the  most  terrible  outbreaks  that  has  occurred  in  the  later  history 
of  our  country.  We  will  now  turn  back  a few  years  and  give  an  account  of 
the  memorable  Sioux  massacres  in  Minnesota  in  1862. 


CHAPTER  XXXIV. 


THE  MINNESOTA  OUTBREAK— CAUSES — THE  FIRST  HOSTILITIES — LITTLE 
CROW— FEARFUL  OUTRAGES — CONSTERNATION  ON  THE  BORDER — 
CAPTAIN  MARSH’S  ENCOUNTER  WITH  THE  HOSTILES — AT  YELLOW 
MEDICINE — ATTACKS  ON  FORT  RIDGELY. 

MINNESOTA  was  organized  into  a Territory  in  1849,  an^  the  rapid 
emigration  to  the  eastern  shore  of  the  Mississippi  began  encroach- 
ing upon  the  fertile  lands  opposite.  Two  years  later,  the  Indians  were  in- 
duced to  sign  treaties  by  which  they  ceded  to  the  United  States  more  than 
thirty  million  acres,  embracing  all  their  lands  in  Iowa,  Dakota,  and  Minne- 
sota, except  a tract  along  the  Upper  Minnesota  which  was  reserved  for  future 
occupancy  and  their  home.  The  beginning  of  this  tract  was  just  below 
Fort  Ridgely,  and  it  extended  one  hundred  and  fifty  miles  to  Lake  Trav- 
erse, with  a breadth  of  ten  miles  on  each  side  of  the  river. 

In  1852,  the  Indians  accepted  an  amendment  to  the  treaty,  by  which 
the  reservation  named  was  ceded  to  our  government,  the  Indians  agreeing 
to  locate  themselves  on  such  land  as  the  President  selected.  The  selection, 
however,  was  never  made,  and  the  red  men  having  occupied  the  reserva- 
tion first  named,  their  right  to  its  occupancy  was  recognized,  and  the  lands 
lying  on  the  north  side  of  the  river  were  purchased  from  them  in  i860. 
They  were  residing  on  the  remainder  at  the  time  of  the  fearful  outbreak 
in  the  summer  of  1862. 

The  tribes  concerned  in  this  uprising  were  the  M’dewakanton,  Wah- 
pekuta,  Wahpeton,  and  Sissetons,  of  the  great  Sioux  or  Dakota  nation.  In 
accordance  with  the  terms  of  the  treaty,  a good  deal  of  money  and  goods 
were  delivered  to  these  tribes  annually,  and  much  labor  performed  for 
their  benefit.  An  agent  resided  among  them,  and  two  places  were  estab- 
lished for  the  transaction  of  business.  One  was  on  the  Minnesota  River, 
fourteen  miles  above  Fort  Ridgely,  called  the  “ Lower,”  or  “ Redwood 
Agency,”  while  the  other,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Yellow  Medicine,  was 
termed  the  “ Upper,”  or  “Yellow  Medicine  Agency.” 

The  Sioux  in  this  section  represented  about  all  the  grades  of  barba- 
rism or  civilization  of  which  the  red  men  are  capable.  Some  lived  in  rude 
houses  made  by  themselves,  others  in  brick  dwellings  put  up  by  the 
government,  and  still  others  in  tepees  of  canvas.  The  different  bands, 
under  their  hereditary  chiefs,  occupied  separate  villages,  excepting  several 

289 


290 


CAUSES  OF  THE  MINNESOTA  OUTBREAK. 


hundred  families  who  adopted  the  dress  and  manners  of  the  white  men. 
Others  remained  wild  Indians,  with  all  their  characteristics.  They 
made  war  on  the  Chippewas,  and,  when  they  had  the  chance,  killed,  scalped 
and  tortured  them  in  the  good  old  style  of  their  forefathers. 

Besides  them,  there  were  the  half-breeds  and  traders,  forming  quite  a 
factor  of  the  mongrel  population.  Near  the  agencies  were  churches  and 
schools,  warehouses,  stores,  shops,  residences,  shoeing  thrift  and  pros- 
perity. 

When  asked  to  give  the  causes  of  the  Minnesota  outbreak,  we  answer, 
“ The  usual  ones.”  The  rapacity  of  the  agents,  their  deception  and  swind- 
ling of  the  Indians,  the  cheating  by  which  the  Sioux  were  induced  to  sign 
the  treaties,  the  wholesale  theft  of  their  lands,  the  debauchery  of  their 
families  by  white  men,  and  the  abuse  to  which  they  were  subjected  by  the 
traders  from  whom  they  were  obliged  to  purchase  goods  and  supplies. 

To  the  hereditary  hatred  of  the  white  man  should  be  added  another 
peculiar  to  the  time.  The  period  named  will  be  recognized  as  one  of  se- 
rious reverses  to  the  Union  arms.  The  “ Lost  Cause  ” was  then  seemingly 
on  the  high  road  to  triumph,  and  this  was  told  to  the  Indian  by  the  half- 
breeds  and  others  who  knew  how  to  read.  At  the  time,  too,  many  believed 
we  were  about  to  be  involved  in  a war  with  England  because  of  the  Trent 
affair. 

The  disaffected  tribes  could  place  one  thousand  three  hundred  warriors 
in  the  field.  The  Yanktons,  the  Yanktonais,  and  the  Teton  Sioux,  who 
naturally  sympathized  with  them,  could  marshal  four  thousand  more  on 
the  warpath.  Besides,  the  Winnebagoes  promised  help,  and  mysterious 
messages  passed  back  and  forth  between  the  adjoining  tribes.  The  old 
dream  of  a restored  hunting  grounds  and  the  expulsion  of  the  white  in- 
truders thrilled  many  a dusky  breast,  as  it  did  during  the  days  of  Tecumseh, 
of  Pontiac,  and  King  Philip. 

In  June,  a number  of  chiefs  and  head  men  of  the  Sissetons  and  Wah- 
petons  visited  the  Upper  Agency  and  asked  when  they  were  to  receive  the 
annuities  due  them,  adding  that  they  had  been  told  they  were  to  be  cheated 
out  of  them.  The  agent  assured  them  they  would  soon  arrive,  though  he 
could  not  set  the  day,  nor  could  he  be  sure  that  the  sum  would  be  a full 
payment.  The  visitors  went  away  half  satisfied,  but,  on  the  14th  of  July, 
they  returned  to  the  number  of  five  thousand,  and  encamped  about  the 
agency.  There  were  too  many  to  be  supplied  with  food,  and  several  cases 
of  death  from  starvation  resulted.  They  repeated  the  stories  that  had 
been  told  them  that  they  were  not  to  receive  their  money,  and  it  was  hard 
to  remove  their  fears. 

Among  these  Indians  were  a number  of  the  Yanktonais,  living  near 
Big  Stone  Lake.  This  tribe  justly  claimed  an  interest  in  the  lands 


THE  TROUBLES  AT  THE  LOWER  AGENCY. 


29I 


sold  by  the  annuity  Indians  ; but  they  had  received  no  pa y for  them, 
except  an  unauthorized  one  to  a few  members  of  one  o*  Wanata’s 
band.  Wanata  himself  was  half  Sisseton  and  Yanktonais,  and  his  band 
included  warriors  of  both  tribes.  These  were  informed  that  nothing  was 
to  be  paid  them  in  the  future. 

They  were  so  infuriated  on  learning  this  that  they  persuaded  the 
other  Indians  to  join  them,  on  the  4th  of  August,  in  an  attack  on  the  govern- 
ment warehouse.  It  was  burst  into  and  plundered,  with  a hundred  soldiers, 
having  two  twelve-pound  howitzers,  looking  on.  Not  only  that,  but  the 
American  flag  was  cut  down,  and  the  sullen  warriors  stood  around  with 
cocked  rifles,  ready  to  use  them  on  the  slightest  provocation.  Matters  be- 
came quieter  after  awhile,  and,  by  the  issuance  of  a considerable  quantity 
of  provisions,  the  malcontents  were  persuaded  to  return  to  their  homes. 

The  excitement  was  equally  great  at  the  Lower  Agency  for  a month 
before  the  outbreak.  What  was  called  a “Soldiers’  Lodge”  was  formed 
there,  the  members  of  which  agreed  to  secure  all  the  credit  they  could 
at  the  stores,  and  then  prevent  the  traders  from  getting  their  annuities 
when  sent  to  them.  A member  who  was  suspected  of  having  revealed  the 
secrets  to  the  whites,  was  followed  and  hacked  to  pieces. 

On  the  10th  of  August,  a party  of  twenty  Indians  from  the  Lower 
Reservation  were  hunting  in  the  woods  near  Forest  City,  and  procured  a 
wagon  which  one  of  their  number  had  left  the  previous  autumn  with  Cap- 
tain Whitcomb  as  security  for  a debt.  On  Sunday,  the  17th  of  August, 
when  within  a few  miles  of  Acton,  one  of  the  Indians  picked  up  some  hens’ 
eggs  on  the  prairie  and  was  about  to  eat  them.  His  companions  protested, 
saying  they  belonged  to  a white  man,  and  from  this  trifling  matter  a vio- 
lent quarrel  resulted.  The  one  carrying  the  eggs  finally  dashed  them  to 
the  ground.  Coming  upon  an  ox  a short  time  later,  he  shot  it  dead  as  vent 
to  his  anger. 

The  quarrel  between  the  four  Rice  Creek  Indians  and  the  rest  became 
so  hot  that  a collision  would  have  taken  place  had  they  not  separated,  the 
larger  company  declaring  they  meant  to  kill  a white  man. 

Soon  after,  the  four  heard  the  reports  of  guns  from  the  direction  of 
the  larger  party.  They  concluded  they  were  carrying  out  their  threat  of 
killing  white  people.  Two  of  the  Rice  Creek  Indians  insisted  that  they 
must  do  the  same,  or  they  would  be  considered  cowards,  but  the  other  two 
opposed.  Still  disputing,  the  four  pushed  on  to  Acton. 

The  first  house  was  found  unoccupied,  but  at  the  second  they  got  into 
a quarrel  with  the  owner,  who  drove  them  out.  At  the  next,  they  halted 
and  were  kindly  treated.  They  were  smoking  in  the  most  friendly  manner 
when  the  neighbor  who  had  quarreled  with  them  came  in  with  his  wife, 
and  the  wrangle  was  resumed.  The  result  was  the  Indians  fired  upon  the 


292 


LITTLE  CROW  JOINS  THE  MALCONTENTS. 


men,  killing  the  three  and  the  wife  of  the  neighbor  with  whom  they  had 
first  quarreled.  The  surviving  women,  who  had  met  with  such  a narrow 
escape,  sent  a boy  to  Ripley,  twelve  miles  distant,  where  a meeting  was  in 
progress  to  raise  volunteers  for  the  war. 

The  astounding  news  was  not  credited  for  some  time,  but  finally  a 
messenger  was  despatched  to  Forest  City,  where  were  a number  of  recruits. 
A dozen  rode  to  Acton,  and  found  the  shocking  tidings  too  true.  The  bodies 
were  covered,  but  not  disturbed,  until  the  morrow,  when  an  inquest  was 
held. 

During  the  inquest  a number  of  the  Indians,  unaware  of  what  was 
going  on,  approached,  and  a number  of  mounted  men  gave  chase.  The 
savages  escaped,  however,  though  several  shots  were  exchanged. 

A large  number  of  people  were  present  at  the  inquest,  and  the  excite- 
ment spread,  for  all  saw  the  imminence  of  an  outbreak.  The  relatives  of  the 
murderers  knew  that  they  would  be  punished  if  caught,  and  after  a hot 
dispute  it  was  decided  to  commence  the  massacre  without  delay.  Little 
Crow,  hitherto  so  friendly  disposed  toward  the  whites  that  he  was  sub- 
jected to  suspicion  by  his  own  people,  and  who  lived  in  a fine  house  at  the 
Lower  Agency,  built  for  him  by  the  agent,  was  visited  by  a turbulent  com- 
pany on  the  morning  of  the  18th  of  August  before  he  had  risen  from  bed. 

When  the  callers  stated  their  object,  great  beads  of  perspiration  stood 
out  on  the  forehead  of  the  chief.  He  saw  the  inevitable  end  of  any  upris- 
ing  against  the  whites,  but  he  knew  it  would  be  fatal  to  oppose  the  wishes, 
of  these  madmen. 

“Trouble  with  the  whites  must  come  sooner  or  later,”  he  said.  “It 
may  as  well  be  now  as  any  other  time.  I am  with  you.  Let  us  go  to  the 
agency,  kill  the  traders,  and  take  their  goods.” 

Messengers  were  sent  to  the  bands  of  Wabashaw,  Waconta,  and  Red 
Legs,  with  the  news,  and  the  warriors  ran  to  the  agency,  breaking  up  into 
small  bands  as  they  entered  the  village,  and  all  as  eager  as  tigers  who  have 
scented  their  prey.  It  was  yet  early  in  the  morning  when  they  ap- 
proached Myrick’s  store,  in  the  upper  part  of  the  place.  James  Lynde,  a 
clerk,  was  standing  in  the  door,  looking  wonderingly  at  the  horde,  when  one 
of  the  Indians  raised  his  gun  with  an  ugly  exclamation,  and  shot  him  dead. 
He  was  the  first  victim  of  the  Minnesota  outbreak. 

The  son  of  Mr.  Myrick,  a young  man,  was  upstairs  when  the  gun. 
was  fired,  and  crouched  behind  a dry  goods  box.  The  Indians  were  afraid 
to  climb  the  stairs,  lest  he  should  shoot  them  as  they  came  up  the  steps.. 
Some  of  them  proposed  to  fire  the  building,  hearing  which,  the  youth 
climbed  through  the  scuttle,  slid  down  the  lightning  rod  to  the  roof  of  the 
lower  building,  dropped  to  the  ground,  and  ran  toward  the  bush  along  the 
Minnesota  River.  The  Winnebagoes  discharged  a lot  of  arrows  after  him,. 


THE  SIGNAL  FOR  THE  MASSACRE.  293 

but  without  effect.  On  the  edge  of  the  bush  he  was  struck  by  a rifle  ball 
and  fell.  The  savages  ran  forward  and  finished  him. 

The  report  of  the  first  gun  was  accepted  as  a signal  by  all  the  Indians 
for  the  beginning  of  the  massacre.  Joseph  Belland  and  Antoine  Young 
were  killed  at  Forbes’s  store,  Brusson  at  Roberts’s  store,  and  La  Batte  and 
his  clerk  at  La  Batte’s  store.  Others  were  also  slain. 

George  Spencer,  at  Forbes’s  store,  was  wounded,  but  an  Indian 
acquaintance  prevented  his  death.  Clerk  Bourat  ran  upstairs.  He 


FALL  OF  YOUNG  MYRICK. 


heard  the  Indians  agree  to  follow  and  kill  him.  He  formed  a desper- 
ate plan.  Down  the  stairs  he  bounded,  dashed  through  the  astonished 
group,  out  the  door,  and  ran  for  life.  He  gained  a good  start,  when 
a charge  of  shot  brought  him  down.  Another  charge  entered  his  leg. 
The  Indians  came  up,  stripped  off  his  clothing  and  shoes,  and,  heedless  of 
his  appeals  for  mercy,  piled  a lot  of  logs  over  him,  so  he  should  not  get 
away,  and  promised  to  come  back  shortly  and  slay  him.  When  they  were 
gone,  knowing  they  would  fulfill  their  threat,  and  frantic  with  the  pain 
from  his  wounds,  he  twisted  himself  free  from  the  logs  on  him,  limped  off,, 
and  finally  escaped. 


294 


DR.  HUMPHREYS  AND  HIS  FAMILY. 


The  Indians  were  so  eager  to  plunder  the  stores  that  many  of  the 
inhabitants  were  able  to  get  away  unharmed.  They  hurried  down  to  the 
ferry,  where  the  brave  Mauley  wrought  with  might  and  main  to  carry  them 
to  the  opposite  side,  despite  the  great  danger  in  which  he  placed  himself  ; 
for  the  bands  of  Wabashawand  the  other  chiefs  hurried  up  and  joined  in  the 
plundering  and  killing.  This  finished,  they  scattered  to  the  surrounding 
country  to  continue  their  dreadful  work.  Mauley,  the  ferryman,  had  just 
completed  his  task  when  he  was  killed,  disemboweled,  his  head,  hands,  and 
feet  cut  off  and  thrust  into  the  cavity. 


Among  the  fugitives  was  Dr.  Humphreys,  the  physician  to  the  Lower 
Indians.  He  took  with  him  his  wife,  two  little  boys,  and  his  girl.  They 


halted  at  a house  two  miles  from  the  river,  and  being  thirsty  from  the  heat 
of  the  day  and  their  unusual  exertion,  he  sent  one  of  the  little  boys  down 
a hill  hard  by  for  water.  As  he  dipped  it  up  he  heard  the  firing  of  a gun, 
and,  peeping  over  the  hill,  saw  the  Indians  at  the  house.  He  hid  in  the 
bushes  and  waited  until  they  had  gone.  Then  stealing  to  the  house,  he. 
found  his  father  with  his  throat  cut,  while  his  mother,  brother,  and  sister  lay 
dead,  murdered  by  the  same  miscreants,  who  burned  their  bodies  in  the 
building. 

Through  that  fearful  day  the  massacre  continued  on  both  sides  of  the 
river  below  the  fort,  to  within  six  miles  of  New  Ulm,  and  up  the  river  to 
Yellow  Medicine.  Many  were  killed  at  Beaver  Creek  and  the  Sacred  Heart 


ATROCITIES  OF  THE  HOSTILES. 


295 

Creek.  While  tumbling  their  goods  into  the  waiting  wagons,  they  would 
be  appalled  by  the  appearance  of  a painted  band  of  yelling  warriors.  Know- 
ing it  was  useless  to  resist,  they  would  give  up  everything  in  the  hope  of 
appeasing  the  wrath  of  the  savages.  In  all  such  cases  the  victims  were 
slain  without  mercy. 

Lest  the  reader  should  feel  some  sympathy  for  the  Indians  concerned 
in  the  Sioux  Massacre,  we  will  give  in  this  place  a few  incidents.  There 
can  be  no  doubt  of  their  truth,  for  Mr.  Isaac  V.  D.  Heard,  who  was  on  the 
ground,  who  acted  as  recorder  of  the  military  commission  that  tried  the 
captured  Indians,  thus  hearing  all  the  testimony  and  making  his  own  care- 
ful investigations,  gives  these  and  others  in  his  history  of  that  awful 
outbreak. 

A gentleman  living  near  New  Ulm  went  to  the  place  without  any 
suspicion  of  danger.  On  his  return,  he  found  that  the  Indians  had  killed 
two  of  his  children  before  their  mother’s  eyes.  They  were  on  the  point 
of  slaying  her  infant,  when  she  snatched  it  from  them  and  ran  to  her 
mother’s  house  near  by.  They  followed,  firing  at  her  a number  of  times, 
without  success.  They  killed  her  mother,  her  sister,  and  servant  girl,  but, 
strange  to  say,  she  escaped  with  her  infant.  On  the  father’s  return,  he  found 
one  of  his  boys,  twelve  years  old,  still  alive.  He  was  cut,  bruised,  and 
horribly  mangled,  but  the  father  carried  him  safely  to  St.  Peter’s. 

Another  little  boy  was  brought  in  still  alive  with  a knife  thrust  into  one 
of  his  eyes.  A farmer  and  his  two  sons  were  working  in  a field,  when  all 
three  were  shot  down  by  Indians.  They  then  went  to  the  house,  and  killed 
two  small  children  in  the  presence  of  the  mother,  who  lay  ill  with  consum- 
ption. She  and  her  daughter,  thirteen  years  old,  were  dragged  through  the 
fields  to  their  camp.  There,  as  the  mother  lay  helpless,  her  innocent 
child  was  outraged  before  her  eyes  until  the  little  one  died. 

In  another  place,  a woman  was  tomahawked  while  baking  bread,  and 
her  infant  thrust  into  the  flaming  oven.  The  indignities  to  which  weak, 
defenseless  women  and  children  were  subjected  were  too  horrifying  to  be 
recorded  in  print.  No  imagination  can  conceive  them.  It  is  better  that 
the  reader  of  these  pages  should  not  know  them.  Let  it  suffice  that  no 
retribution  too  severe  could  be  visited  upon  the  authors  of  atrocities  never 
surpassed  in  the  history  of  barbarism. 

The  massacre  had  not  continued  long  when  news  of  it  reached  Fort 
Ridgely,  whence  Captain  Marsh,  of  the  5th  regiment  of  Minnesota  Volun- 
teers, started  for  the  agency  with  forty-eight  men.  He  rode  a mule,  and  his 
men  were  in  wagons.  A mile  from  the  fort  he  met  a party  of  fugitives, 
who  warned  him  that  he  would  be  killed  if  he  attempted  to  cross  the  ferry. 
He  was  advised  to  pause  on  the  bluff  on  that  side,  collect  what  women  and 
children  he  could,  and  bring  them  to  the  fort. 


296 


SINGULAR  DEATH  OF  CAPTAIN  MARSH. 


“ I have  plenty  of  ammunition,”  replied  the  brave  officer,  “ and  enough 
men  to  whip  all  the  Indians  this  side  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  I’m  not  only 
going  to  the  ferry,  but  shall  cross  it.” 

Five  miles  from  the  ferry,  Captain  Marsh  met  one  of  his  soldiers  who 
had  been  at  home  on  furlough.  It  was  in  this  man’s  house  that  Dr. 
Humphreys  and  his  family  were  slain  and  then  burned.  He  had  hidden  in 
a cornfield,  and  stole  away  after  the  departure  of  the  Indians.  His  story 
did  not  affect  the  courage  of  the  officer,  who  pushed  on,  meeting  other 
fugitives,  among  whom  was  the  little  boy  of  Dr.  Humphrey  that  escaped 
because  of  his  absence  at  the  spring  when  the  savages  visited  the  house. 

Captain  Marsh  and  his  soldiers  reached  the  ferry  at  sunset.  Seeing 
him,  the  Indians  came  down  to  the  edge  and  held  a conversation  through 
the  interpreter  with  the  officer.  The  latter  said  he  meant  to  cross  and 
look  into  matters.  Some  of  the  Indians  warned  him  not  to  do  so,  but 
White  Dog  advised  him  to  come  over.  While  the  conversation  was  going 
on,  a good  many  savages  secretly  crossed  the  stream,  and,  with  the  help  of 
the  tall,  thick  grass,  surrounded  Captain  Marsh  without  his  suspecting 
danger.  He  sent  one  or  two  of  his  men  to  the  right  and  left  to  investigate. 
They  convinced  him  that  it  was  certain  death  to  go  over.  The  captain 
replied  that  he  would  for  once  yield  his  judgment,  and  ordered  his  soldiers, 
who  were  facing  the  ferry,  to  turn  about. 

The  moment  it  became  clear  that  the  men  would  not  cross  the  river. 
Little  Crow  gave  the  signal  to  fire.  Instantly  from  every  side  was  poured 
such  a storm  of  bullets  that  almost  half  the  men  fell  dead,  while  the 
wounded  were  tomahawked.  It  it  said  that  the  interpreter,  who  was  stand- 
ing at  the  corner  of  the  ferry  house,  received  twenty  bullets  in  his  body, 
besides  a number  of  arrows.  The  survivors,  seeing  the  desperate  straits  in 
which  they  were  caught,  fired  once,  killing  an  Indian  and  wounding  another, 
and  then  fled  with  all  haste. 

The  fierce  volley  slew  Captain  Marsh’s  mule,  but  did  not  injure  him, 
though  he  stood  within  a few  feet  of  his  riddled  interpreter.  With  nine  of 
his  men,  he  succeeded  in  passing  two  miles  down  the  river,  when  he  found 
the  Indians  had  cut  off  his  way  to  the  fort.  He  decided  to  cross  the 
river  and  led  the  way,  holding  his  revolver  over  his  head  with  one  hand 
and  his  sword  with  the  other.  He  was  soon  beyond  his  depth,  but,  as  he 
was  an  expert  swimmer,  nothing  was  thought  of  that  until  his  struggles 
showed  he  was  drowning.  Two  of  his  men  hurried  to  his  help,  but  he  sank 
before  they  could  reach  him,  and  his  body  was  not  found  until  several  days 
afterward.  He  must  have  been  seized  with  cramp  on  entering  deep  water. 
His  companions  safely  reached  the  fort,  leaving  twenty-four  behind. 

This  massacre  did  much  to  inflame  the  outbreak.  The  Indians  had  killed 
9.  good  many  ; they  had  a large  number  of  captives,  with  plenty  of  arms, 


FRIENDSHIP  OF  OTHER  DAY. 


297 


lead,  powder,  and  plunder.  The  church  Indians,  fearing  they  would  be 
suspected  of  want  of  zeal,  plunged  into  the  carnival  of  blood  and  “ out- 
Heroded  Herod”  by  their  atrocities. 

Messengers  were  sent  to  the  Indians  at  the  Yellow  Medicine.  A dis- 
pute followed  as  to  what  course  to  take.  Other  Day,  a civilized  Indian, 
strenuously  opposed  joining  in  the  outbreak,  but,  being  overruled,  he  took 

the  arm,  and,  gun  in  hand,  visited 
the  whites  to  warn  them  of  their 
riedly  gathered  in  the  warehouse  to 
fifty,  determined  to  fight  to  the  last, 
and  several  of  his  relatives  stood  out- 
all  through  the  night,  on  the  watch 


his  wife,  a white  woman 
the  different  houses 
danger.  They  hur 
the  number  of 
Other  Day 
side  the  building 


STRANGE  DEATH  OF  CAPTAIN 
MARSH. 


for  the  first  evidence  of  attack.  Frequently  they  caught  sight  of  dark 
figures  skulking  about  as  silently  as  shadows,  peering  round  the  corner 
of  the  building  in  the  hope  of  catching  the  sentinels  unawares;  but  the 
dusky  guards  were  wide  awake,  seeing  which  the  prowlers  slunk  off  in 
the  gloom. 

Just  as  it  was  growing  light,  the  report  of  a gun  was  heard  some  distance 
off  and  a rush  was  made  for  the  warehouse.  Other  Day  led  the  whites, 
numbering  forty-two,  men,  women  and  children,  across  the  river,  whence 
they  safely  made  their  way  to  the  settlements.  Friendly  Indians  warned 
the  people  six  miles  above  the  Upper  Agency  of  their  danger,  and  they, 
also  numbering  forty-two,  including  the  missionaries,  Messrs.  Riggs  and 
Williamson,  got  safely  away. 

New  Ulm  and  Fort  Ridgely  were  overrun  with  terrified  fugitives,  many 
suffering  from  ghastly  wounds,  and  trembling  lest  the  furious  Indians 
should  swoop  down  upon  and  massacre  them  all.  In  every  direction  the 
skies  were  lit  up  by  the  glare  of  burning  homes,  and  the  near  and  far  re- 
ports of  guns,  the  yells  of  savages,  and  the  cries  of  the  hopeless  victims, 
made  the  night  dreadful  beyond  description. 

While  the  Indian  runners  were  speeding  across  the  prairies,  bearing 


298 


ATTACK  ON  NEW  ULM. 


the  news  to  willing  ears,  the  whites  sent  messengers  to  the.  settlements  and 
after  Lieutenant  Shehan,  who  had  started  a few  days  before  to  accompany 
Commissioner  Dole  on  his  way  to  make  a treaty  with  the  Red  Lake 
Chippewas.  The  officer  was  overtaken  forty  miles  away,  and  the  news  of 
the  massacre  was  carried  to  the  surrounding  towns. 

At  St.  Peter’s,  the  night  was  spent  in  running  bullets  and  preparing  for 
the  relief  of  Fort  Ridgely  and  New  Ulm.  At  daylight,  the  bells  were  rung 
and  the  people  gathered  to  decide  upon  the  course  to  be  taken.  Agent 
Galbraith  and  his  forty-five  men,  known  as  the  “ Renville  Rangers,”  had 
already  set  out  for  the  fort,  and  it  was  decided  to  send  a detachment  to  the 
relief  of  New  Ulm. 

Hon.  Charles  E.  Flandreau,  Associate  Justice  of  the  Supreme  Court, 
was  elected  captain,  William  B.  Dodd,  first  lieutenant,  and  Mr.  Meyer,  sec- 
ond lieutenant.  Wagons,  horses,  ammunition,  and  necessary  utensils  and 
provisions  were  soon  ready,  and  sixteen  men,  under  charge  of  ex-sheriff 
Boardman,  set  out  to  scout  in  the  direction  of  New  Ulm. 

Meanwhile,  Little  Crow,  with  one  hundred  and  twenty  warriors,  had 
appeared  before  the  fort,  but  did  not  make  an  attack.  Had  he  done  so, 
nothing  could  have  saved  the  post,  for  the  garrison  numbered  only  thirty 
men.  The  larger  part  of  his  band  scattered  in  other  directions.  While 
the  chief  and  his  men  were  hidden  near,  Agent  Galbraith  and  his  rangers 
entered  the  fort  unmolested,  and  it  was  safe  for  the  time. 

Near  the  middle  of  the  afternoon,  a hundred  Indians  attacked  New 
Ulm.  The  population  was  about  1500,  mostly  Germans,  the  houses  being 
so  scattered  that  it  could  not  be  readily  defended.  While  the  attack  was 
under  way,  ex-sheriff  Boardman  and  his  sixteen  mounted  men  dashed  into 
the  town  on  a full  gallop.  They  found  the  people  in  a wild  panic.  But 
for  the  brilliant  work  of  the  new  arrivals,  who  soon  drove  off  the  assail- 
ants,  the  place  must  have  fallen,  and  one  of  the  most  terrible  massacres 
would  have  followed. 

But  the  town  was  still  in  imminent  danger,  for  the  Indians  were  hourly 
receiving  re-enforcements,  and  the  means  of  defense  were  of  the  poorest 
character.  Fortunately,  Judge  Flandreau  and  one  hundred  men  arrived 
that  night.  Sentinels  were  at  once  stationed,  and  every  possible  precau- 
tion taken  against  attack.  None  was  made,  and  the  day  was  devoted  to 
strengthening  the  barricades  and  organizing  the  forces  for  the  conflict  that 
soon  must  come. 

Judge  Flandreau  was  made  commandant,  and  lie  organized  his  forces 
with  good  judgment.  During  the  day,  fifty  more  men  arrived  from  Man- 
kato, and  the  same  number  from  Le  Sueur.  No  Indians  were  visible,  and 
the  scouts  visited  the  surrounding  country,  continually  coming  upon  the 
victims  of  the  ferocious  red  men. 


RELIEF  OF  NEW  ULM, 


ATTACK  ON  FORT  RIDGELY 


301 


On  the  afternoon  of  Wednesday,  Little  Crow  being  joined  by  those 
who  had  been  at  New  Ulm  the  day  before,  unexpectedly  attacked  Fort 
Ridgely.  His  volley,  through  one  of  the  openings,  killed  three,  and  eight 
more  were  wounded  during  the  fight.  On  attempting  to  use  the  cannon,  they 
were  found  stuffed  with  rags,  the  work  of  some  half-breeds  that  had  joined 
the  enemy.  The  conflict  lasted  three  hours,  when  the  Indians  drew  off 
with  several  killed  and  wounded.  The  attack  was  renewed  twice  the  fol- 
lowing day,  but  it  was  seen  that  the  Indians  had  decreased  in  number, 
many  of  them  preferring  the  more  congenial  work  of  plundering  and  mur- 
dering through  the  neighborhood. 

Returning  to  the  agency  that  night,  Little  Crow  found  the  Upper  In- 
dians for  whom  he  had  sent.  He  had  now  nearly  500  warriors,  and  set  out 
in  high  hopes  the  next  day  to  attack  the  fort,  taking  with  him  a large 
number  of  wagons  in  which  to  carry  the  plunder  he  was  confident  of  ob- 
taining. These  were  left  on  the  reservation  side  of  the  river,  and  the 
Indians  crossed  over  and  hid  themselves  near  the  fort.  By  and  by,  a num- 
ber appeared  on  the  prairie,  waving  their  blankets  and  uttering  taunts  in 
the  hope  of  inducing  the  garrison  to  come  out  and  attack  them.  The 
whites  were  too  prudent  to  be  drawn  into  the  snare,  and  answered  only 
with  rifle  shots.  Then  Little  Crow  opened  the  attack,  which  was  kept  up 
without  cessation  for  five  hours.  While  it  was  in  progress,  the  horses  and 
mules  in  the  government  stables  were  set  free  and  the  buildings  around 
the  post  burned.  The  roof  of  the  fort  was  repeatedly  pierced  by  fire 
arrows,  but  the  flames  did  not  hold.  A knot  of  Indians,  posted  in  one  of 
the  stables,  were  driven  out  by  Sergeant  Jones,  who  exploded  a shell  among 
them.  The  casualties  of  the  defenders  were  one  killed  and  seven  wounded, 
none  severely. 

A short  time  before  the  first  attack,  Henry  Balland  started  out  to  get 
a horse  with  which  to  go  to  the  settlements.  Before  he  could  return,  the 
Indians  had  surrounded  the  place,  and  he  hid  himself  for  several  hours  in 
the  bushes.  They  were  all  around  him,  and  he  expected  every  minute  to 
be  discovered.  A cold  August  rain  set  in.  At  one  time  fully  a hundred 
Indians  were  ranged  near  him,  each  holding  his  gun  under  his  blanket  to 
keep  it  dry. 

The  storm  continued,  and  by  the  lightning  flashes,  when  night  had 
come,  Balland  crept  down  to  the  river  and  made  his  escape. 


CHAPTER  XXXV. 


THE  MINNESOTA  OUTBREAK  (CONTINUED)— ATTACK  ON  NEW  ULM— 
COLONEL  SIBLEY’S  EXPEDITION — RELIEF  OF  FORT  RIDGELY— DIS- 
ASTER TO  MAJOR  BROWN’S  COMMAND — ATTACK  ON  CAPTAIN  STROUT 
— ATTACK  ON  HUTCHINSON — DISSENSIONS  AMONG  THE  SIOUX — 
BATTLE  OF  WOOD  LAKE — CAPTURE  OF  THE  INDIAN  CAMP. 

FORT  RIDGELY  having  successfully  withstood  the  several  attacks, 
the  Indians  made  their  way  to  New  Ulm.  Several  days  had  passed 
since  the  fighting'  there,  and  this  visit  was  made  on  Saturday  the  23d  of 
August.  The  smoke  of  burning  buildings  in  the  direction  of  Fort  Ridgely 
indicated  to  the  defenders  the  approach  of  their  enemies. 

New  Ulm,  as  we  have  said,  was  ill  prepared  for  defense,  owing  to  the 
houses  being  so  widely  scattered.  Judge  Flandreau,  believing  it  better  to 
fight  the  enemy  on  the  prairie,  posted  his  men,  numbering  about  two 
hundred  and  fifty,  in  the  open  country  outside  the  town,  a half  mile  away, 
and  still  further  off  in  the  direction  whence  he  believed  the  attack  would 
come.  He  thus  describes  what  followed  : 

“At  nearly  10  o’clock  A.  M.,  the  body  of  Indians  (numbering  altogether 
probably  five  hundred),  began  to  move  toward  us,  first  slowly,  and  then  with 
considerable  rapidity.  Their  advance  upon  the  sloping  prairie  in  the  bright 
sunlight  was  a very  fine  spectacle,  and  to  such  inexperienced  soldiers  as 
we  all  were,  intensely  exciting.  When  within  about  one  mile  and  a half 
of  us,  the  mass  began  to  expand  like  a fan  and  increase  in  the  velocity  of 
its  approach,  and  continued  this  movement  until  within  about  double  rifle 
shot,  when  it  had  covered  our  entire  front. 

“ Then  the  savages  uttered  a terrific  yell,  and  came  down  on  us  like 
the  wind.  I had  stationed  myself  at  a point  in  the  rear  where  communica- 
tion could  be  had  with  me  easily,  and  waited  the  first  discharge  with  great 
anxiety,  as  it  seemed  to  me  to  yield  was  certain  destruction,  as  the  enemy 
would  rush  into  town  and  drive  everything  before  them.  The  yell  un- 
settled the  men  a little,  and  just  as  the  rifles  began  to  crack,  they  fell  back 
along  the  whole  line,  and  committed  the  error  of  passing  the  outer  houses 
without  taking  possession  of  them — a mistake  which  the  Indians  imme*- 
diately  took  advantage  of  by  themselves  occupying  them  in  squads  of  twos 
and  threes  and  up  to  ten.  They  poured  into  us  a sharp  and  rapid  fire  as 
we  fell  back,  and  opened  from  houses  in  every  direction.  Several  of  us 
rode  up  the  hill,  endeavoring  to  rally  the  men,  and  with  good  effect,  as 

302 


JUDGE  FLANDREAU’S  ACCOUNT. 


303 


they  gave  three  cheers,  and  sallied  out  of  various  houses  they  had  retreated 
to,  and  checked  the  advance  effectually.  The  firing  from  both  sides  then 
became  general,  sharp,  and  rapid  ; and  it  got  to  be  a regular  Indian  skirm- 
ish, in  which  every  man  did  his  own  work  after  his  own  fashion. 

“ The  Indians  had  spread  out  until  they  had  got  into  our  rear  and  on 
all  sides,  having  the  very  decided  advantage  of  the  houses  on  the  bluff, 
which  commanded  the  interior  of  the  town,  with  the  exception  of  the  wind- 
mill, which  was  occupied  by  about  twenty  of  the  Le  Sueur  Tigers,  who 
held  them  at  long  range. 

“ The  wind  was  from  the  lower  part  of  the  town,  and  this  fact  directed 
the  larger  part  of  the  enemy  to  that  point,  where  they  promptly  commenced 
firing  the  houses  and  advancing  behind  the  smoke.  The  conflagration  be- 
came general  in  the  lower  part  of  the  town  on  both  sides  of  the  street,  and 
the  bullets  flew  very  thickly  both  from  the  bluff  and  up  the  street.  I 
thought  it  prudent  to  dismount  and  conduct  the  defense  on  foot.  Just  at 
this  point,  Captain  Dodd,  of  St.  Peter’s,  and  someone  else,  whose  name  I 
do  not  know,  charged  down  the  street  to  ascertain  whether  some  horse- 
men seen  in  the  extreme  lower  town  were  not  our  friends  coming  in,  and 
were  met  about  three  blocks  down  with  a heavy  volley  from  behind  a house, 
five  bullets  passing  through  Captain  Dodd’s  body,  and  several  through 
that  of  his  horse.  The  horsemen  both  turned,  and  the  captain  got  suffi- 
ciently near  to  be  received  by  his  friends  before  he  fell.  He  died  about  five 
hours  after  being  hit.  Too  much  cannot  be  said  of  his  personal  bravery 
and  general  desire  to  perform  his  duty  manfully.  Captain  Saunders,  of 
the  Le  Sueur  company,  was  shot  through  his  body  shortly  after  and  re- 
tired, placing  his  rifle  in  effective  hands,  and  encouraging  the  men.  The 
fight  was  going  on  all  around  the  town  during  the  whole  forenoon  and 
part  of  the  afternoon,  sometimes  with  slight  advantage  to  us  and  again  to 
the  Indians ; but  the  difficulty  which  stared  us  in  the  face  was  their  gradual 
but  certain  approach  up  the  main  street  behind  the  burning  buildings, 
which  promised  our  destruction. 

“We  frequently  sallied  out  and  took  buildings  in  advance;  but  the 
risk  of  being  picked  off  from  the  bluff  was  unequal  to  the  advantage 
gained,  and  the  duty  was  performed  with  some  reluctance  by  the  men.  In 
the  lower  part  of  the  town  I had  some  of  the  best  men  in  the  State,  both 
as  shots  and  for  coolness  and  determination.  It  will  be  sufficient  to  men- 
tion two  as  types  of  the  class  of  the  best  fighting  men — Asa  White  and 
Newell  Horton,  known  to  all  old  settlers. 

“ They  did  very  effective  service  in  checking  the  advance,  both  by 
their  unerring  rifles  and  the  good  example  their  steadiness  placed  before 
the  younger  men.  We  discovered  a concentration  of  Indians  on  the  side 
of  the  street  toward  the  river  and  at  the  rear  of  the  buildings,  and  ex- 


304 


REPULSE  OF  THE  INDIANS. 


pected  a rush  upon  the  town  from  that  position,  the  result  of  which  I 
feared  more  than  anything  else,  as  the  boys  had  proved  unequal  to  it  in 
the  morning;  and  we  were  not  disappointed,  for  in  a few  minutes  they 
came  on,  on  ponies  and  on  foot,  furiously,  about  sixty  in  number,  charging 
around  the  point  of  a little  grove  of  oaks. 

“ This  was  the  critical  point  of  the  day.  But  four  or  five  hours  under 
fire  had  brought  the  boys  up  to  fighting  temperature,  and  they  stood 
firmly,  and  advanced  with  a cheer,  routing  the  rascals  like  sheep.  They 
received  us  with  a very  hot  fire,  killing  Houghton  and  the  elderly  gentleman 
whose  name  I did  not  know.  As  they  fled  in  a crowd  at  a very  short  range, 
we  gave  them  a volley  that  was  very  effective  and  settled  the  fortunes  of  the 
day  in  our  favor,  for  they  did  not  dare  to  try  it  over.  I think,  after  once 
repulsing  them  in  a fair  fight,  we  could  have  successfully  resisted  them  had 
they  returned  a second  time,  as  the  necessary  confidence  had  been  gained. 
White  men  fight  under  a great  disadvantage  the  first  time  they  engage. 
There  is  something  so  fiendish  in  their  yells  and  terrifying  in  their  ap- 
pearance when  in  battle,  that  it  takes  a good  deal  of  time  to  overcome  the 
sensation  that  it  inspires.  There  is  a snake-like  stealth  in  all  their  move- 
ments that  excites  distrust  and  uncertainty,  and  which  unsteadies  the 
nerves  at  first. 

“After  this  repulse  the  battle  raged  until  dark,  without  sufficient  ad- 
vantage on  one  side  or  the  other  to  merit  mention  in  detail,  when  the  sav- 
ages drew  off,  firing  only  an  occasional  shot  from  under  close  cover.  After 
dark  we  decreased  the  extent  of  our  lines  of  barricades  ; and  I deemed  it 
prudent  to  order  all  the  buildings  outside  to  be  burned,  in  order  to  prevent 
them  from  affording  protection  to  the  savages  while  they  advanced  to 
annoy  us.  We  were  compelled  to  consume  about  forty  valuable  buildings  ; 
but,  as  it  was  a military  necessity,  the  inhabitants  did  not  demur,  but 
themselves  applied  the  torch  cheerfully.  In  a short  time  we  had  a fair 
field  before  us  of  the  open  prairie,  with  the  exception  of  a large  brick 
building  which  we  held  and  had  loopholed  in  all  the  stories  on  all  sides, 
and  which  commanded  a large  portion  of  our  front  toward  the  bluff.  We 
also  dug  a system  of  rifle  pits  on  that  front  outside  the  barricades,  about 
four  rods  apart,  which  completed  our  defenses. 

“That  night  we  slept  very  little,  every  man  being  at  the  barricades  all 
night,  each  third  man  being  allowed  to  sleep  at  intervals.  In  the  morning 
the  attack  was  renewed,  but  not  with  much  vigor,  and  subsided  about 
noon.” 

Mr.  Heard  relates  the  following  incidents  connected  with  the  attack 
on  New  Ulm  : 

While  the  fight  was  going  on,  a heavy  firing  was  kept  up  from  a wood 
pile.  The  defenders  were  astonished  to  see  a warrior  standing  upright  and 


INCIDENTS  OF  THE  FIGHT. 


305 


in  full  view.  Again  and  again  he  was  fired  upon,  but  he  seemed  to  enjoy 
some  strange  protection,  for  none  of  the  best  marksmen  could  bring  him 
down.  After  the  battle,  as  he  still  kept  his  position,  some  of  the  whites 
went  out  to  investigate.  It  was  then  discovered  that  he  had  been  dead 
from  the  first,  his  body  being  repeatedly  pierced  by  bullets.  The  others 
had  propped  him  up  for  the  purpose  of  drawing  the  fire  of  the  whites. 

One  of  the  most  desperate  of  the  half-breeds  crept  up  close  in  the 
high  grass,  from  which  he  kept  up  a deadly  fire.  He  held  his  place 
after  the  advance  was  made,  when  he  discharged  his  gun  and  started  off 


INGENIOUS  STRATAGEM  OF  A HOSTILE. 


on  a run,  crouching  down  as  he  did  so.  Several  bullets  were  sent  after 
him,  and  one  cut  the  great  artery  in  his  shoulder,  from  which  the  blood 
spurted  in  a stream.  He  sank  down  and  was  quickly  decapitated  and 
scalped. 

A man  was  seen  walking  off  with  a featherbed  over  his  shoulder. 
He  was  near  by,  but,  as  he  moved  in  the  direction  of  the  Indians,  the 
spectators  remarked  the  foolish  risk  he  was  running.  When  he  had 
gone  a considerable  distance,  he  threw  down  the  bed  and  uttered  a tri- 
umphant shout.  He  was  one  of  the  hostiles,  that  had  escaped  by  this 
clever  ruse. 

It  would  require  a volume  to  tell  of  the  individual  outrages  during 
the  Sioux  outbreak.  The  revolt  extended  throughout  the  entire  frontier 
of  Minnesota  and  into  Iowa  and  Dakota.  During  the  first  week,  more 


30  6 


COLONEL  SIBLEY’S  CAMPAIGN. 


than  seven  hundred  people  were  killed  and  over  two  hundred  made  captive. 
As  stated  in  another  place,  the  women,  and  even  children  of  tender  years, 
were  subjected  to  indescribable  mutilation  at  the  hands  of  their  cap- 
tors.  Many  succumbed  under  the  awful  treatment,  and  welcomed  death 
for  the  blessed  relief  it  brought. 

Fortunately,  there  were  several  thousand  armed  men  in  the  State, 
summoned  by  President  Lincoln’s  recent  call  for  volunteers  to  serve  in  the 
Civil  War.  These  were  hurried  to  the  frontier,  and  mounted  soldiers  were 
called  out  by  the  governor  to  join  in  punishing  the  savages.  Governor 
Ramsey  hastened  to  Mendota  on  receipt  of  the  news  of  the  outbreak,  and 
requested  the  Hon.  H.  H.  Sibley  to  take  command,  with  the  rank  of 
colonel,  of  an  expedition  intended  to  move  up  the  Minnesota  Valley.  He 
complied,  and  started  as  quickly  as  possible  with  four  companies  of  the 
6th  regiment  for  St.  Peter’s,  where  he  arrived  on  the  day  of  the  last 
battle  at  the  fort.  On  Sunday,  two  hundred  men,  under  the  command  of 
W.  J.  Cullen,  came  in.  These,  with  a hundred  more,  were  placed  in  charge 
of  Colonel  Samuel  M’Phail.  Other  arrivals  fallowed  until  Sibley’s  com- 
mand was  increased  to  fourteen  hundred  men. 

Knowing  the  character  of  the  foe  before  him,  Colonel  Sibley  ad- 
vanced cautiously.  He  met  continuous  streams  of  fugitives,  while  Shako- 
pee,  Belle  Plain,  and  Henderson  were  overrun  with  the  terrified  people, 
who  were  in  constant  terror  of  attacks  by  the  Indians.  Detachments  were 
sent  to  New  Ulm,  which  was  known  to  be  surrounded  by  the  savages  and 
in  great  danger  of  capture.  These  detachments,  after  many  stirring 
experiences,  returned  to  St.  Peter’s,  where  they  found  that  Colonel  Sibley 
had  left  that  morning  for  Fort  Ridgely  and  had  ordered  them  to  follow  on 
their  return.  They  learned  that  the  people  of  New  Ulm  on  Monday, 
August  25,  had  abandoned  the  place.  They  numbered  two  thousand, 
including  the  women,  children,  sick  and  wounded,  with  a train  of  a hundred 
and  fifty-three  wagons.  They  had  gone  to  Mankato,  led  to  do  so  by  the 
exhaustion  of  their  ammunition,  the  sickness  caused  by  the  rotting  car- 
cases of  the  dead  animals,  the  isolation  of  the  town,  and  their  inability  to 
hold  out  against  a determined  attack  of  the  Indians. 

Colonel  Sibley  reached  Fort  Ridgely,  and  all  danger  of  attack  at  that 
place  and  New  Ulm  (where  really  there  was  nothing  to  attack),  was  ended. 
On  Sunday,  August  31,  a hundred  and  fifty  men,  under  command  of 
> Major  Joseph  R.  Brown,  were  sent  to  the  Lower  Agency  to  bury  the  dead 
and  learn,  if  possible,  what  had  become  of  the  enemy. 

Many  of  the  victims  of  Indian  atrocity  were  found  to  be  shot  with 
arrows  of  peculiar  construction,  worthy  the  genius  of  an  American  Indian. 
Along  the  reed,  from  the  head  to  the  feather  tip,  ran  a gutter,  cut  in  the 
wood  and  winding  irregularly  around  it.  The  object  of  this  is  to  prevent 


SCOUTING  OPERATIONS. 


307 


the  clotting  of  the  blood  in  a wound  inflicted  by  the  missile.  If  it  entered 
a few  inches  into  a person’s  body,  and  was  of  the  ordinary  pattern,  the 
wound  might  be  closed  by  the  clotting  of  the  blood,  but  this  gutter  fur- 
nishes such  a free  outlet  that  the  flow  continues  until  the  victim  dies  from 
weakness. 

Some  of  the  citizens  who  went  with  Major  Brown  came  back  the 
following  evening,  and  told  Colonel  Sibley  that  on  that  morning  the  cavalry 


and  a few  of  the  infantry  had  crossed  the  river  at  the  agency,  buried  the 
dead,  and  scouted  some  distance  above.  They  could  find  no  evidence  that 
any  Indians  had  been  there  for  several  days.  Captain  Grant,  with  the 
infantry,  buried  the  dead  on  the  Fort  Ridgely  side,  including  those  at  Beaver 
Creek,  and  going  into  camp  on  the  same  side  of  the  river,  was  joined  by 
Major  Brown  and  his  command. 

Colonel  Sibley  was  relieved  to  be  informed  that  no  signs  of  Indians 
had  been  discovered  by  Major  Brown,  who  was  an  old  campaigner  and 
ought  not  to  be  deceived.  But  on  Wednesday  morning,  the  sentries  heard 


3 o8 


THE  AFFAIR  AT  BIRCH  COOLIE. 


firing  in  the  direction  of  the  agency.  The  wind  was  blowing  toward  the 
point  whence  the  noise  came,  but  by  lying  on  the  ground,  the  anxious 
listeners  plainly  caught  the  rapid  discharge  of  firearms.  There  could  be  no 
mistake  as  to  the  meaning  of  this.  The  battle  was  “ on  once  more,”  and 
relief  must  be  dispatched  at  once  to  their  imperiled  comrades. 

Colonel  M’Phail  with  fifty  horsemen,  Major  M’Laren  with  a hundred 
and  five  infantry,  and  Captain  Mark  Hendricks  with  a mountain  howitzer, 
were  hurried  off  to  their  relief.  The  anxious  listeners  at  the  fort  still 
heard  the  rifle  firing,  and  by  and  by,  the  resounding  boom  of  the  howitzer 
told  that  the  relief  party  were  also  fighting.  Colonel  Sibley  ordered  all 
the  tents  to  be  struck  and  taken  into  the  fort,  and  just  as  night  was  closing 
in,  the  entire  command  set  out  to  the  help  of  the  two  detachments. 

The  night  grew  intensely  dark,  but  the  men  marched  forward  for  thir- 
teen miles.  Then  the  bright  flash  and  roar  of  the  mountain  howitzer  told 
them  they  were  close  upon  the  second  detachment.  It  was  found  that 
when  within  a few  miles  of  where  they  believed  Major  Brown  to  be,  they 
were  attacked  by  Indians.  Securing  the  best  position  attainable,  they  de- 
cided to  wait  for  re-enforcements.  The  howitzer  was  fired  to  guide  the 
main  body  to  the  spot. 

No  further  attack  was  made  that  night,  and  at  early  dawn  the  whole 
force  was  in  motion.  Not  far  off  they  came  in  sight  of  Birch  Coolie,  and 
saw  through  the  trees  the  gleam  of  tents,  but  whether  they  belonged  to 
Major  Brown  or  the  hostiles  could  not  be  determined  without  a closer 
approach. 

A few  minutes  later,  the  Indians  appeared  in  the  belt  of  woods,  wav- 
ing their  blankets  and  emitting  taunting  shouts  in  the  hope  of  drawing 
the  soldiers  in  pursuit.  Failing  in  this,  they  sheltered  themselves  as  best 
they  could,  and  opened  a brisk  but  poorly  aimed  fire  on  the  soldiers,  who 
speedily  drove  them  back.  The  shells  from  the  cannon  hastened  their 
flight,  and,  running  down  Birch  Coolie,  they  crossed  the  river  at  the 
agency. 

The  tents  discerned  through  the  trees  proved  to  be  those  of  Major 
Brown  and  his  command.  They  had  encamped  on  the  spot  two  nights 
before,  choosing  the  place  because  of  its  accessibility  to  wood  and  water 
and  under  the  belief  that  nothing  was  to  be  feared  from  the  Indians.  A 
worse  place  in  that  respect  could  not  have  been  chosen,  and  the  savages, 
who  were  on  the  watch,  assailed  them  suddenly  and  with  the  utmost 
fierceness.  The  men  made  a brave  defense  under  most  unfavorable  cir- 
cumstances, but  suffered  fearfully.  When  relieved  by  Colonel  Sibley,  they 
had  been  more  than  thirty  hours  without  food  or  water,  twenty-three  were 
killed  or  dying,  and  forty-five  were  badly  wounded.  Out  of  the  ninety 
horses  only  one  was  alive,  and  he  was  wounded.  Among  the  wounded 


A SINGULAR  COMPLICATION. 


309 


were  Major  Brown,  Captain  Anderson,  Agent  Galbraith,  and  Captain  Red- 
field.  William  Irvine  of  West  St.  Paul  had  been  shot  in  the  head  and  his 
brains  were  oozing  over  his  face,  but  he  lived  for  several  hours. 

Major  Brown  was  right  in  his  conclusion  that  the  Indians  had  left  the 
Lower  Agency  several  days  before.  Learning  of  Sibley’s  march  to  the 
relief  of  Fort  Ridgely,  they  had  moved  up  the  Yellow  Medicine  River  to 
place  their  families  out  of  danger.  Ascertaining  further  that  New  Ulm 
had  been  abandoned,  a war  party  was  sent  thither  to  procure  what  plunder 
they  could,  after  which  it  was  intended  to  attack  Mankato  and  St.  Peter’s. 
The  discovery  of  Major  Brown’s  approach  created  a diversion,  which, 
though  resulting  in  a dreadful  disaster,  undoubtedly  saved  the  towns 
named,  as  well  as  New  Ulm. 

A curious  complication  now  followed.  On  Monday,  Little  Crow’s 
party  traveled  thirty  miles  and  encamped  near  Acton.  The  leader  rode 
in  a wagon,  with  a half-breed  acting  as  his  driver  and  secretary.  A few  of 
the  Indians  were  mounted  on  stolen  horses,  and  all  went  well  until  noon  of 
the  next  day,  when  the  Indians  got  into  a wrangle,  the  result  of  which  was 
that  Little  Crow  and  thirty-four  others  started  for  Cedar  Mills  to  get  sup- 
plies, after  which  they  meant  to  return  to  Yellow  Medicine.  They  went 
into  camp  about  a mile  from  Acton.  The  other  party  were  bent  on  a 
raid  through  the  country  toward  St.  Cloud,  and  encamped  within  a half 
mile  of  Little  Crow’s  band,  without  either  party  suspecting  their  proximity 
to  each  other. 

At  the  same  time,  a company  of  seventy-five  white  men,  volunteers, 
under  Captain  Strout,  were  in  camp  near  by  in  Acton,  all  three  being 
ignorant  of  each  other’s  location.  During  the  night,  several  scouts  came 
into  Acton  from  Forest  City  with  news  that  Captain  Whitcomb  had  been 
attacked  the  morning  before  near  that  place,  and  the  town  was  in  such 
danger  that  they  were  begged  to  go  at  once  to  its  defense. 

The  start  was  made  early  the  next  morning  for  Forest  City  by  way  of 
Hutchinson.  The  volunteers  passed  the  camp  of  the  larger  band  of 
Indians  undetected,  but  one  of  Little  Crow’s  warriors  discovered  them,  and 
the  hostiles  hastily  prepared  for  battle.  Almost  at  the  same  moment,  the 
larger  body  of  Indians  also  discovered  them,  and  came  whooping  and 
yelling  at  their  heels.  Thus  the  whites  found  their  enemies  in  front  and 
rear,  but  they  charged  through  those  in  front,  and  continued  to  Hutchin- 
son. The  savages  closely  followed  them  for  several  miles,  killing  three 
men,  wounding  fifteen,  capturing  nine  horses,  and  several  wagons  contain- 
ing arms,  ammunition,  and  supplies. 

During  this  running  fight,  Little  Crow’s  son,  about  fifteen  years  old, 
shot  Mr.  Edwin  Stone,  a well  known  merchant  of  Minneapolis.  He  was 
wounded  while  walking  beside  a wagon,  and  was  unable  to  climb  into  it. 


3io 


A CHARACTERISTIC  INCIDENT. 


A second  Indian  dashed  out  his  brains  with  a tomahawk.  The  wadding 
from  the  boy’s  gun  set  the  clothing  of  the  merchant  on  fire,  so  that  his 
death  was  frightful. 

The  volunteers  were  attacked  the  next  day  in  the  fort  at  Hutchinson. 
Most  of  the  town  was  burned.  One  of  the  Indians  called  out  in  English, 
daring  the  soldiers  to  come  out  in  the  open  plain  and  fight  like  men.  The 
troops  accepted  the  invitation,  and  scattered  their  assailants  without  re- 
ceiving any  loss.  Skirmishing  continued  until  night,  when  the  Indians 
drew  off  and  encamped  near  Cedar  Mills.  They  were  then  joined  by  a 


band  of  fifty,  that  had  attacked  Forest  City  the  preceding  day,  burning  a 
number  of  buildings  and  securing  much  plunder.  The  following  morning, 
the  Indians  divided  and  went  home,  Little  Crow  and  his  men  by  way  of 
the  Lower  Agency,  where  he  arrived  that  night. 

Mr.  Heard  tells  the  following:  One  of  the  scouts  while  riding  along 
was  startled  by  his  horse  jumping  aside.  Looking  for  the  cause,  he  saw 
a white  man  lying  in  a pile  of  grass  which  he  had  pulled  up  and  piled  about 
him  for  concealment.  Several  ears  of  green  corn  partly  eaten  lay  around 
him.  He  was  a young  man,  with  small  hands,  long,  fair  hair,  but  his  gar- 
ments were  tattered  and  torn  with  long  journeyings,  and  the  face  was 
haggard  and  pale.  He  was  asleep,  with  his  cheek  resting  on  his  hand  ; so 
soundly  asleep,  so  intensely  engaged,  perhaps,  in  happy  dreams  that  the 
trampling  of  the  Indian’s  horse  did  not  arouse  him.  “ What  do  you  here, 


PANIC  IN  MINNESOTA. 


31 1 

my  friend  ? ” called  the  savage,  in  a loud  voice.  The  sleeper  raised  his  head 
and  gazed  with  startled  apprehension  in  the  painted  face  before  him.  Be- 
fore that  expression  had  time  to  change,  the  whirring  ax  dashed  out  the 
brains  which  gave  it  life.  Then  the  murderer  dismounting,  with  his  knife 
cut  off  the  head  ; but  even  then  that  startled  look  did  not  change,  for  death 
had  frozen  it  there,  and  nothing  but  corruption’s  effacing  hand  could  sweep 
' it  away.  The  shuddering  half-breeds  who  followed  afterward  passed  by 
• on  the  other  side,  and  Little  Crow  said,  “ Poor  fellow  ! his  life  ought  to 
have  been  spared  ; he  was  too  starved  to  have  done  us  harm.”  But  they 
left  it  there,  unburied,  in  its  pool  of  blood,  staring  upward  through  the 
gathering  darkness  with  its  fixed,  wild  eyes,  alone  in  the  vast  desolation 
ringed  by  distant  skies,  there  to  remain  until  nature,  by  storm  and  frost, 
shouid  transform  it  to  original  clay,  and  by  the  blessed  sunlight  “ reconcile 
it  to  herself  again  with  the  sweet  oblivion  of  flowers.” 

The  panic  which  reigned  in  Minnesota  at  this  time,  resulting  from 
the  attacks  on  New  Ulm,  Fort  Ridgely,  Birch  Coolie,  Acton,  Hutchin- 
son, Forest  City  and  the  massacres  that  had  taken  place  within  Colonel 
Sibley’s  lines,  was  shown  by  the  fact  that  people  living  on  the  outskirts  of 
St.  Paul  hurriedly  moved  into  the  interior  of  the  city.  General  Sibley’s 
family,  in  Mendota,  took  refuge  one  night  in  Fort  Snelling. 

Little  Crow,  although  the  most  prominent  leader  in  the  Sioux  out- 
break, saw  the  inevitable  end  from  the  beginning.  His  people  must  be 
conquered,  and,  though  he  had  been  forced  into  the  fight,  he  only  awaited 
the  opportunity  to  make  overtures  of  peace  to  the  military  authorities. 
He  opened  communication  with  Colonel  Sibley  at  Fort  Ridgely,  where 
that  officer  was  detained  by  lack  of  ammunition  and  supplies.  This  was 
during  the  first  week  in  September,  and  while  the  correspondence  was 
going  on,  something  like  a cessation  of  massacre  and  outrage  took  place. 
The  Indians  had  a large  number  of  captives,  who  were  in  danger  of  mas- 
sacre, and  the  object  of  Colonel  Sibley  was  first  to  secure  the  safety  of  these 
and  to  bring  the  outrages  to  an  end. 

The  correspondence  developed  the  fact  that  the  hostiles  were  divided 
among  themselves.  They  held  frequent  councils,  and  the  debate  over  the 
course  to  be  followed  became  so  violent  that  more  than  once  the  Indians 
were  on  the  point  of  flying  at  each  other.  Had  such  a wrangle  taken 
place,  every  one  of  the  two  hundred  and  more  captives  would  have  been 
massacred. 

A considerable  minority  of  the  Indians  were  in  favor  of  the  surrender 
of  the  prisoners  as  preliminary  to  peace,  but  others  were  so  fiercely  opposed 
that  they  threatened  to  kill  those  who  took  the  first  step  looking  to  that 
end.  With  Little  Crow  were  associated  a number  of  chiefs  who  wished  to 
make  terms  with  the  authorities.  They  maintained  a clandestine  corre- 


312 


THE  BATTLE  OF  WOOD  LAKE. 


spondence  with  Colonel  Sibley,  Wabashaw  and  Taopee  being  the  most 
prominent.  It  was  this  couple  that  managed  to  keep  up  an  “ underground  ” 
correspondence  with  Colonel  Sibley  in  the  effort  to  effect  their  object. 
They  were  accused  in  their  own  camp  of  doing  this,  but,  of  course,  denied 
it,  for  had  it  been  known  they  would  have  been  instantly  killed. 

Colonel  Sibley  left  Fort  Ridgely,  September  18,  to  hunt  the  hostiles. 
The  route  was  over  a country  still  smoking  hot  with  the  blood  of  the 
victims  of  Indian  atrocity.  The  Sioux  scouts  were  continually  in  sight, 
taunting  the  whites  and  skurrying  before  them  as  they  advanced  over  the 
prairie,  but  taking  care  to  keep  out  of  rifle  range. 

Sibley  camped  near  Wood  Lake  on  the  22d  of  September.  The  fol- 
lowing morning  a number  of  foraging  teams  were  fired  on  by  the 
Indians.  The  Third  Regiment  hurried  out  and  was  soon  engaged  with  the 
enemy.  They  appeared  in  large  numbers  on  all  sides,  gathering  in  the 
ravines  between  the  Third  Regiment  and  the  camp.  Colonel  Sibley  opened 
fire,  making  good  use  of  the  howitzer,  and  an  impetuous  charge  into  the 
gorge  drove  out  the  Indians.  The  fight  lasted  more  than  an  hour,  eight 
hundred  being  engaged  on  each  side.  The  whites  lost  four  killed  and 
about  fifty  wounded.  Little  Crow’s  plan  was  to  ambuscade  the  soldiers 
while  marching  through  the  ravine,  but  the  taunts  of  the  “Friendly  In- 
dians,” as  they  were  known,  caused  the  attack  to  be  made  in  the  open  plain. 

This  is  known  as  the  battle  of  Wood  Lake.  Colonel  Sibley  remained 
long  enough  to  bury  his  dead,  and  then  marched  to  the  Indian  camp  near 
Lac  qui  Parle.  This  was  reached  on  the  26th  of  September,  and  was 
found  to  contain  about  a hundred  tepees.  Little  Crow  and  two  hundred 
warriors  and  their  families  had  fled  northward  after  the  battle  of 
Wood  Lake. 

Sibley’s  camp  was  within  a quarter  of  a mile  of  the  Indian  camp, 
which  was  commanded  by  his  cannon.  He  soon  rode  over  with  his  staff 
and  bodyguard  and  took  formal  possession.  The  Indians,  many  of  whom 
had  conducted  themselves  like  demons,  were  profuse  in  their  professions 
of  friendship,  each  insisting  that  he  was  a good  Indian  and  all  the  outrages 
were  committed  by  the  other  fellows. 

Colonel  Sibley’s  formal  demand  for  the  captives  was  promptly  obeyed. 
They  numbered  two  hundred  and  fifty,  who  for  days  had  undergone  the 
most  agonizing  suspense  conceivable,  for,  beyond  question,  they  were  repeat- 
edly within  ahair’s  breadth  of  death.  Sometimes  it  looked  as  if  the  friends  of 
peace  would  prevail  and  the  anguish  end  by  their  restoration  to  their  friends, 
but  the  fiery  warriors,  implacable  in  their  hostility,  conquered,  and  the 
torture  of  hope  often  deferred  continued.  Now,  however,  it  was  over,  and 
they  were  safe  beyond  any  harm  from  their  painted  foes.  The  ragged, 
gaunt,  famished  women  and  children  wept  with  joy,  and  many  an  eye 


CAPTURE  OF  THE  HOSTILES. 


313 


among  the  soldiers  was  moistened  by  the  touching  sight.  There  was  only 
one  white  man,  George  Spencer,  among  the  restored  captives.  He  said 
that  if  Colonel  Sibley  had  done  as  many  of  his  friends  had  urged,  attacked 
the  Indians  at  certain  times,  every  one  of  the  captives  would  have  been 
killed. 

A military  commission  of  inquiry  was  organized  and  testimony  taken 
to  ascertain  the  guilt  of  accused  parties.  Some  thirty  or  forty  were  ar- 
rested, and  the  rest  were  sent  down  to  the  Yellow  Medicine  Agency,  under 
charge  of  Agent  Galbraith.  Indians  continually  came  in  and  surrendered, 
for  all  saw  the  end  had  come. 

Colonel  Crook,  by  direction  of  the  commander,  stealthily  surrounded 
the  second  camp  at  night,  disarmed  the  men,  and  placed  them  in  a log  jail 
erected  in  the  middle  of  the  camp.  The  same  thing  was  done  at  Yellow 
Medicine,  by  bringing  all  the  braves  into  the  agency  building  under  the 
pretense  of  holding  a council. 


CHAPTER  XXXVI. 


THE  MINNESOTA  OUTBREAK  (CONCLUDED)— ATTACK  ON  THE  INDIAN  PRIS- 
ONERS AT  NEW  ULM— TRIAL  OF  THE  PRISONERS— THIRTY-EIGHT  EXE- 
CUTED—DEATH  OF  LITTLE  CROW— CLOSE  OF  HOSTILITIES. 

/^OLONEL  SIBLEY  broke  camp  on  the  23d  of  October,  having  been 
joined  by  Lieutenant  Colonel  Marshall,  with  a number  of  prisoners 
captured  upon  Wild  Goose  Nest  Lake.  The  other  captives  were  taken  in 
at  Yellow  Medicine,  and  the  march  continued  through  one  of  the  fiercest 
wind  storms  ever  encountered  in  that  section.  It  cleared,  however,  and 
the  sun  was  shining  from  a calm  sky  when  camp  was  made  in  the  valley  of 
the  Redwood. 

Several  weeks  were  spent  at  the  Lower  Agency,  during  which  the  in- 
vestigation and  trials  were  continued.  Parties  sent  out  still  found  victims 
of  the  massacre.  Mr.  Heard  states  that,  on  the  29th,  a foraging  party 
crossed  the  river,  and  eleven  miles  above  discovered  the  remains  of  twelve 
persons.  In  one  house  a skull  lay  upon  the  bed,  and  in  the  same  room  was 
stretched  a dead  hog  that  had  probably  been  feeding  on  the  bodies.  Close 
to  the  house  the  party  were  saluted  by  two  howling,  half-starved 
dogs. 

The  next  day  they  came  upon  the  remains  of  thirteen  more  bodies. 
One  skull,  evidently  that  of  a powerful  man,  was  fractured  to  bits.  Cattle 
were  running  around  almost  as  wild  as  buffaloes.  An  ox  was  writhing  on 
the  ground  in  agony,  and  frothing  at  the  mouth,  apparently  with  hydro- 
phobia. Many  of  the  dogs  had  gone  mad.  Desolation  reigned  su- 
preme. 

On  the  7th  of  November,  Colonel  Marshall  started  for  Fort  Snelling 
with  the  inmates  of  the  Indian  camp,  numbering  about  1500,  mostly 
women  and  children.  While  passing  New  Ulm  the  inhabitants,  who  were 
engaged  in  disinterring  and  reburying  their  dead,  attacked  the  prisoners 
with  the  command.  The  sight  of  the  authors  of  their  desolation  and  woe 
inspired  the  men,  women,  and  children  to  madness.  Catching  up  hoes, 
brickbats,  clubs,  knives,  guns,  and  anything  upon  which  they  could  lay 
hands,  they  assailed  the  cowering  wretches  in  the  wagons.  One  woman 
broke  the  jaw  of  an  Indian,  and,  had  they  not  been  restrained,  more  than 
one  savage  would  have  been  killed. 

Arriving  at  Mankato,  Camp  Lincoln  was  established  and  a number  of 

314 


TRIAL  OF  THE  ACCUSED. 


315 


Winnebagoes  were  tried.  The  military  commission,  organized  to  try  sum- 
marily the  mulattoes,  mixed  bloods,  and  Indians  engaged  in  the  Sioux  raids 
and  massacres,  consisted,  at  first,  of  Colonel  Crook,  Lieutenant  Colonel 
Marshall,  Captains  Grant  and  Bailey,  and  Lieutenant  Olin.  Mr.  Isaac  V. 
D.  Heard,  the  historian  of  the  outbreak,  acted  as  recorder.  Before  the 
trial  was  concluded,  Major  Bradley  was  substituted  for  Lieutenant  Colonel 
Marshall,  who  was  called  away  by  other  duties. 

The  prisoners  were  arraigned  upon  written  charges  specifying  the 
criminating  acts.  These  charges  were  signed  by  Colonel  Sibley  or  his  ad- 


ATTACK  ON  THE  INDIAN  PRISONERS. 


jutant  general,  and  in  nearly  every  case  were  based  upon  information  fur- 
nished by  Rev.  S.  R.  Riggs,  who  assembled  those  that  had  the  means  of 
knowing  the  truth  by  themselves,  and  closely  questioned  them.  The 
names  of  the  witnesses  were  attached  to  the  charge.  Mr.  Riggs’s  long 
residence  among  the  Indians,  his  full  knowledge  of  their  habits  and  char- 
acteristics, and  his  thorough  acquaintance  with  the  accused  made  his  help 
invaluable  in  fixing  the  guilt  upon  the  right  parties. 

As  an  example  of  the  manner  in  which  this  famous  trial  was  conducted, 
we  give  Mr.  Heard’s  account  of  the  proceedings  in  the  case  of  the  first 
person  tried.  He' was  Godfrey,  a negro. 


3i6 


TRIAL  OF  GODFREY  THE  NEGRO. 


“ Charge  and  Specifications  against  O-ta-kle,  or  Godfrey,  a 

COLORED  MAN  CONNECTED  WITH  THE  SlOUX  TRIBE  OF  INDIANS. 


“ Charge — MURDER. 


“ Specification  I. — In  this,  that  the  said  O-ta-kle,  or  Godfrey,  a colored 
man,  did,  at  or  near  New  Ulm,  Minnesota,  on  or  about  the  19th  day  of 
August,  1862,  join  in  a war  party  of  the  Sioux  tribe  of  Indians  against  the 
citizens  of  the  United  States,  and  did  with  his  own  hand  murder  seven 
white  men,  women,  and  children  (more  or  less),  peaceable  citizens  of  the 
United  States. 

“ .Specification  2. — In  this,  that  the  said  O-ta-kle,  or  Godfrey,  a colored 
man,  did,  at  various  times  and  places  betweeen  the  19th  of  August  1862, 
and  the  28th  day  of  September,  1862,  join  and  participate  in  the  murders 
and  massacre  committed  by  the  Sioux  Indians  on  the  Minnesota  frontier. 
By  order  of 


“Col.  H.  H.  Sibley,  Com.  Mil.  Expedition. 
“ S.  H.  Fowler,  Lt.  Col.,  State  Militia,  A.  A.  A.  G. 


Mary  Woodbury,  ) 


u 


“ Godfrey  denied  the  grave  accusation,  insisting  that  he  had  been 
forced  into  the  fight  on  the  side  of  the  Indians,  and  had  done  nothing 
which  was  not  justified  by  the  situation  and  circumstances. 

“ Mary  Woodbury  testified  that  she  saw  him  two  or  three  days  after 
the  outbreak  at  Little  Crow’s  village  with  a breech  clout  on  and  his  legs 
and  face  painted  for  a war  party,  and  that  he  started  with  one  for  New 
Ulm;  that  he  appeared  very  happy  and  contented  with  the  Indians;  was 
whooping  around  and  yelling,  and  apparently  as  fierce  as  any  of  them. 
When  they  came  back,  there  was  a Wahpeton,  named  Hunka,  who  told 
witness  that  the  negro  was  the  bravest  of  all ; that  he  led  them  into  a house 
and  clubbed  the  inmates  with  a hatchet ; and  that  she  was  standing  in  the 
prisoner’s  tent  door  and  heard  the  Indians  asking  him  how  many  he  had 
killed,  and  he  said  only  seven  ; and  that  she  saw  him  once,  when  he  started 
off,  have  a gun,  a knife,  and  a hatchet. 

“ Mary  Swan  and  Mattie  Williams  testified  that  when  the  war  party 
took  them  captive,  though  the  prisoner  was  not  armed,  he  appeared  to  be 
as  much  in  favor  of  the  outrages  as  any  of  the  Indians,  and  made  no  intima- 
tion to  the  contrary  in  a conversation  the  witnesses  had  with  him. 

“ La  Batte  knew  nothing  about  him. 

“David  Faribault,  Sr.,  a half-breed,  testified  as  to  his  boasting  of 
killing  seven  with  a tomahawk,  and  some  more  children  ; but  these,  he  said, 
didn’t  amount  to  anything,  and  he  wouldn’t  count  them.  Witness  saw 


FATE  OF  THE  ACCUSED.  3 1 7 

him  at  the  fort  and  at  New  Ulm,  fighting  and  acting  like  the  Indians,  and 
he  never  told  him  (Faribault)  that  he  was  forced  into  the  outbreak. 

“ Godfrey’s  looks  and  honest  manner  led  the  court  to  think  that  possibly 
he  was  not  as  ‘ black  ’ as  painted.  His  voice  was  soft,  his  face  pleasing,  and 
he  created  much  sympathy  for  himself.  It  was  impossible  to  find  anyone 
who  had  actually  seen  him  kill  a white  person.  His  case  puzzled  the 
court,  but  he  was  finally  found  not  guilty  of  the  first  specification,  but 
guilty  of  the  charge  and  second  specification,  and  sentenced  to  be  hanged. 
Accompanying  the  sentence  was  a recommendation  of  a commutation  of 
punishment  to  imprisonment  for  ten  years.  This  was  granted  by  the 
President  of  the  United  States. 

“ Godfrey  possessed  an  extraordinary  memory  and  gave  great  aid  in 
the  trial  of  the  other  prisoners.  Most  of  these  virtually  admitted  their 
guilt,  though  they  tried  to  extenuate  what  they  had  done. 

“ The  most  terrible  murderer  among  the  lot  was  Cut  Nose.  He  was 
the  leader  in  most  of  the  massacres  and  foremost  in  outrages.  At  Beaver 
Creek  settlement,  a party  of  settlers  hurriedly  prepared  for  flight.  In  the 
wagon  huddled  a number  of  helpless  women  and  children,  who  gathered 
their  shawls  about  them  and  covered  their  heads  on  the  approach  of  the 
Indians.  Two  of  these  held  the  horses,  while  Cut  Nose  leaped  into  the 
wagon  and  tomahawked  eleven,  most  of  them  children.  An  infant  was 
then  snatched  from  its  mother’s  arms  and  riveted  to  the  fence  with  a bolt 
taken  from  the  wagon.  When  the  infant  had  expired,  the  mother  was 
mutilated  and  killed.” 

More  than  four  hundred  prisoners  were  tried,  of  which  three  hundred 
and  three  were  sentenced  to  death  and  eighteen  to  imprisonment.  The 
records  of  the  testimony  and  sentences  of  the  Indians  were  sent  to  Presi- 
dent Lincoln,  who  ordered  that  thirty-eight  should  be  executed  on  the 
26th  of  February,  1863. 

The  condemned  were  treated  with  the  utmost  consideration. 
They  were  allowed  to  select  their  spiritual  advisers,  to  bid  good-by  to 
their  families,  and  every  possible  indulgence  was  shown  to  them.  Some 
displayed  a stoical  indifference  to  their  awful  situation,  while  others  were 
affected  to  tears. 

The  following  details  of  the  last  scenes  are  from  the  St.  Paul 
Press  : 

“ Late  on  Thursday  night,  in  company  with  Lieutenant  Colonel  Mar- 
shall, the  reporter  visited  the  building  occupied  by  the  doomed  Indians. 
They  were  quartered  on  the  ground  floor  of  the  three-story  stone  building 
erected  by  the  late  General  Leech. 

“ They  were  all  fastened  to  the  floor  by  chains,  two  by  two.  Some 
were  sitting  up,  smoking  and  conversing,  while  others  were  reclining,  cov- 


318 


PREPARATIONS  FOR  EXECUTION. 


ered  with  blankets  and  apparently  asleep.  The  three  half-breeds  and  one 
or  two  others  only  were  dressed  in  citizens’  clothes.  The  rest  wore  the 
breech  clout,  leggings,  and  blankets,  and  not  a few  were  adorned  with 
paint.  The  majority  of  them  were  young  men,  though  several  were  quite 
old  and  gray-headed,  ranging  perhaps  toward  seventy.  One  was  quite 
a youth,  not  over  sixteen.  They  all  appeared  cheerful  and  contented, 
and  scarcely  to  reflect  on  the  certain  doom  which  awaited  them.  To 
the  gazers,  the  recollection  of  how  short  a time  since  they  had  been  en- 
gaged in  the  diabolical  work  of  murdering  indiscriminately  both  old  and 
young,  sparing  neither  sex  nor  condition,  sent  a thrill  of  horror  through  the 
veins.  Now  they  were  perfectly  harmless,  and  looked  as  innocent  as  chil- 
dren. They  smiled  at  your  entrance,  and  held  out  their  hands  to  be 
shaken,  which  yet  appeared  to  be  gory  with  the  blood  of  babes.  Oh, 
Treachery,  thy  name  is  Dakota  ! 

“ Father  Ravoux  spent  the  whole  night  among  the  doomed  ones,  talk- 
ing with  them  concerning  their  fate,  and  endeavoring  to  impress  upon 
them  a serious  view  of  the  subject.  He  met  with  some  success,  and  during 
the  night  several  were  baptized  and  received  the  communion  of  the 
church. 

“At  daylight  the  reporter  was  there  again.  That  good  man,  Father 
Ravoux,  was  still  with  them,  also  Rev.  Dr.  Williamson,  and  whenever  either 
of  these  worthy  men  addressed  them  they  were  listened  to  with  marked 
attention.  The  doomed  ones  wished  it  to  be  known  to  their  friends,  and 
particularly  their  wives  and  children,  how  cheerful  and  happy  they  all  had 
died,  exhibiting  no  fear  of  this  dread  event.  To  the  skeptical,  it  appeared 
not  as  an  evidence  of  Christian  faith,  but  a steadfast  adherence  to  their 
heathen  superstitions. 

“ They  shook  hands  with  the  officers  who  came  in  among  them,  bid- 
ding them  good-by  as  if  they  were  going  on  a long  and  pleasant  journey. 
They  had  added  some  fresh  streaks  of  vermilion  and  ultramarine  to  their 
countenances  as  their  fancy  suggested,  evidently  intending  to  fix  them- 
selves off  as  gayly  as  possible  for  the  coming  exhibition.  They  commenced 
singing  their  death  song,  Tazoo  leading,  and  nearly  all  joining.  It  was 
wonderfully  exciting. 

“At  half-past  seven  all  persons  were  excluded  from  the  room  except 
those  necessary  to  help  prepare  the  prisoners  for  their  doom.  Under  the 
superintendence  of  Major  Brown  and  Captain  Redfield  their  irons  were 
knocked  off,  and  one  by  one  they  were  tied  by  cords,  their  elbows  being 
pinioned  behind  and  the  wrists  in  front,  but  about  six  inches  apart.  This 
operation  occupied  until  about  nine  o’clock.  In  the  meantime,  the  scene  was 
much  enlivened  by  their  songs  and  conversation,  keeping  up  the  most  cheer- 
ful appearance.  As  they  were  being  pinioned,  they  went  around  the  room 


ASCENDING  THE  SCAFFOLD. 


319 


shaking  hands  with  the  soldiers  and  reporters,  bidding  them  ‘ good-by,'  etc. 
White  Dog  requested  not  to  be  tied,  and  said  that  he  could  keep  his  hands 
down  ; but,  of  course,  his  request  could  not  be  complied  with.  He  said  that 
Little  Crow,  Young  Six,  and  Big  Eagle’s  brother  got  them  into  the  war, 
and  now  he  and  others  are  to  die  for  it.  After  all  were  properly  fastened, 
they  stood  up  in  a row  around  the  room,  and  another  exciting  death  song 
was  sung.  They  then  sat  down  very  quietly,  and  commenced  smoking 
again.  Father  Ravoux  came  in,  and  after  addressing  them  a few  moments, 
knelt  in  prayer,  reading  from  a prayer  book  in  the  Dakota  language,  which 
a portion  of  the  condemned  repeated  after  him.  During  this  ceremony 
nearly  all  paid  the  most  strict  attention,  and  several  were  affected  even  to 
tears.  He  then  addressed  them  again,  first  in  Dakota,  then  in  French, 
which  was  interpreted  by  Baptiste  Campbell,  one  of  the  condemned  half- 
breeds.  The  caps  were  then  put  on  their  heads.  These  were  made  of 
white  muslin,  taken  from  the  Indians  when  their  camps  were  captured,  and 
which  had  formed  part  of  the  spoils  they  had  taken  from  the  murdered 
traders.  They  were  made  long,  and  looked  like  a meal  sack,  but,  being 
rolled  up,  only  came  down  to  the  forehead,  and  allowed  their  painted  faces 
yet  to  be  seen. 

“ They  received  these  evidences  of  their  near  approach  to  death  with 
evident  dislike.  When  they  had  been  adjusted  on  one  or  two,  they  looked 
around  on  the  others  who  had  not  yet  received  them  with  an  appearance 
of  shame.  Chains  and  cords  had  not  moved  them — their  wear  was  not  con- 
sidered dishonorable — but  this  covering  of  the  head  with  a white  cap  was 
humiliating.  There  was  no  more  singing  and  but  little  conversation  now. 
All  sat  around  the  room,  most  of  them  in  a crouched  position,  awaiting 
their  doom  in  silence,  or  listening  to  the  remarks  of  Father  Ravoux,  who 
still  addressed  them.  Once  in  a while  they  brought  their  small  looking- 
glasses  before  their  faces  to  see  that  their  countenances  yet  preserved  the 
proper  modicum  of  paint.  The  three  half-breeds  were  the  most  affected  of 
all,  and  their  dejection  of  countenance  was  truly  pitiful  to  behold. 

“At  precisely  ten  o’clock  the  condemned  were  marshaled  in  a proces- 
sion, and,  headed  by  Captain  Redfield,  marched  out  into  the  street  and 
directly  across  through  files  of  soldiers  to  the  scaffold  which  had  been 
erected  in  front,  and  were  delivered  to  the  officer  of  the  day,  Captain 
Burt.  They  went  eagerly  and  cheerfully,  even  crowding  and  jostling  each 
other  to  be  ahead,  just  like  a lot  of  hungry  boarders  rushing  to  dinner  in 
a hotel.  The  soldiers  who  were  on  guard  in  their  quarters  stacked  arms 
and  followed  them,  and  they,  in  turn,  were  followed  by  the  clergy,  re- 
porters, etc. 

“As  they  commenced  the  ascent  of  the  scaffold,  the  death  song  was 
again  started,  and  when  they  had  all  got  up,  the  noise  they  made  was 


320 


THE  EXECUTION. 


truly  hideous.  It  seemed  as  if  pandemonium  had  broken  loose.  It  had  a 
wonderful  effect  in  keeping  up  their  courage.  One  young  fellow,  who  had 
been  given  a cigar  by  one  of  the  reporters  just  before  marching  from  their 
quarters,  was  smoking  it  on  the  stand,  puffing  away  very  coolly  during  the 
intervals  of  the  hideous  ‘ Hi-yi-yi,  hi-yi-yi,’  and  even  after  the  cap  was  drawn 
over  his  face  he  managed  to  get  it  over  his  mouth  and  smoked.  Another 
was  smoking  his  pipe.  The  noose  having  been  promptly  adjusted  over 
the  necks  of  each  by  Captain  Libby,  all  was  ready  for  the  fatal  signal. 

“The  scene  at  this  juncture  was  one  of  awful  interest.  A painful  and 
breathless  suspense  held  the  vast  crowd,  which  had  assembled  from  all 
quarters  to  witness  the  execution. 

“Three  slow,  measured,  and  distinct  beats  on  the  drum  by  Major 
Brown,  who  had  been  announced  as  signal  officer,  and  the  rope  was  cut  by 
Mr.  Duly  (the  same  who  killed  Lean  Bear,  and  whose  family  were  at- 
tacked), the  scaffold  fell,  and  thirty-seven  lifeless  bodies  were  left  dangling 
between  heaven  and  earth.  One  of  the  ropes  was  broken,  and  the  body 
of  Rattling  Runner  fell  to  the  ground.  The  neck  had  probably  been 
broken,  as  but  little  signs  of  life  were  observed;  but  he  was  immediately 
hung  up  again.  While  the  signal  beat  was  being  given,  numbers  were 
seen  to  clasp  the  hands  of  their  neighbors,  which,  in  several  instances, 
continued  to  be  clasped  till  the  bodies  were  cut  down. 

“ As  the  platform  fell,  there  was  one  not  loud  but  prolonged 
cheer  from  the  soldiery  and  citizens  who  were  spectators,  and  then  all  were 
quiet  and  earnest  witnesses  of  the  scene.  For  so  many,  there  was  little 
suffering;  the  necks  of  all,  or  nearly  all,  were  evidently  dislocated  by  the  fall 
and  the  after-struggling  was  slight.  The  scaffold  fell  at  a quarter  past  ten 
o’clock,  and  in  twenty  minutes  the  bodies  had  all  been  examined  by  Sur- 
geons Le  Boutillier,  Sheardown,  Finch,  Clark,  and  others,  and  life  pro- 
nounced extinct. 

“ The  bodies  were  then  cut  down,  placed  in  four  army  wagons,  and,  at- 
tended by  Company  K as  a burial  party,  and  under  the  command  of  Lieuten- 
ant Colonel  Marshall,  were  taken  to  the  grave  prepared  for  them  among 
the  willows  on  the  sand  bar  nearly  in  front  of  the  town.  They  were  all  de- 
posited in  one  grave  thirty  feet  in  length  by  twelve  in  width,  and  four  feet 
•deep,  being  laid  on  the  bottom  in  two  rows,  with  their  feet  together  and 
their  heads  to  the  outside.  They  were  simply  covered  with  their  blankets 
and  the  earth  thrown  over  them.  The  other  condemned  Indians  were  kept 
close  in  their  quarters,  where  they  were  chained  and  not  permitted  to 
witness  the  execution.” 

It  will  be  remembered  that  after  the  defeat  of  Little  Crow  at  Wood 
Lake,  he  fled  northward  with  a number  of  his  band.  He  made  his  way  to 
Devil’s  Lake,  in  Dakota.  Encamping  on  the  shores  of  that  body  of  water 


DEATH  OF  LITTLE  CROW. 


321 


he  v js  joined  by  the  other  Minnesota  Sioux  who  had  not  surrendered  or 
been  captured,  numbering  about  four  thousand,  and  by  the  Yanktonais. 
He  spent  the  winter  in  trying  to  induce  the  surrounding  tribes  to  join  him 
in  a war,  but  with  little  success.  In  early  summer  he  went  to  St.  Joseph 
and  Fort  Garry,  in  British  territory,  to  obtain  ammunition,  but  it  was- 
refused  him. 

With  the  coming  of  spring,  Little  Crow  and  his  men  renewed  their 
depredations.  They  repeated  the  outrages  of  the  year  before,  killing  some 
thirty  during  the  course  of  the  summer  and  losing  about  half  that  number 
themselves. 

In  June  General  Sibley  started  for  Devil’s  Lake  with  two  thousand 
men,  his  route  being  by  way  of  the  Minnesota  River  and  Fort  Abercrom- 
bie. General  Sully,  with  a strong  force  of  cavalry,  moved  up  the  Missouri 
to  co-operate  with  Sibley  in  the  effort  to  cut  off  the  retreat  of  the  Indians, 
who  became  so  bold  that  they  kindled  their  camp  fires  within  a dozen  miles 
of  St.  Paul.  The  failure  of  the  regular  forces  to  run  down  the  savages,  and 
their  repeated  atrocities,  led  Adjutant  General  Malmros  to  offer  a reward  for 
every  Indian  killed,  and  he  organized  a band  of  State  scouts  for  service  on 
the  frontie*r.  Little  Crow  was  defiant,  and  sent  word  to  General  Sibley 
that  he  would  soon  find  him  at  Yellow  Medicine. 

Late  on  the  afternoon  of  July  3,  1863,  Mr.  Lampson  and  his  soi> 
Chauncey  were  passing  along  the  road,  six  miles  north  of  Hutchinson* 
when  they  saw  two  Indians  picking  berries  in  a clump  of  bushes  and  vines.. 
The  savages  did  not  see  them,  and  they  immediately  hid  themselves  and 
consulted  what  was  best  to  be  done.  It  did  not  take  them  long  to  decide. 

The  father  crept  through  the  undergrowth  to  a poplar  surrounded 
with  dense  bushes,  took  deliberate  aim  at  one  of  the  Indians,  and  let  fly. 
The  savage  threw  up  his  hands  with  a yell  and  fell  to  the  ground,  not  killed 
but  badly  wounded.  Fearing  that  others  were  near,  Mr.  Lampson  retreated 
toward  some  bushes.  On  his  way  he  had  to  pass  over  a little  knoll.  The 
wounded  Indian  saw  him,  and  in  turn  aimed  his  gun. 

The  son,  who  was  on  the  watch,  leveled  his  weapon  at  the  same  mo- 
ment, and  the  two  Indians  and  Chauncey  discharged  their  pieces  simulta- 
neously. The  bullet  of  one  Indian  grazed  the  boy’s  cheek  without  hurting 
him,  while  a buckshot  from  the  wounded  savage  struck  the  father  in  the 
shoulder,  making  a wound  which  bled  a good  deal  but  was  not  dangerous. 
The  bullet  of  the  boy,  however,  instantly  killed  the  wounded  savage. 

Believing  that  a large  band  was  near,  the  youth  made  all  haste  to 
Hutchinson  with  the  news.  Meanwhile  the  father,  favored  by  the  dark- 
ness, withdrew  from  his  dangerous  position,  and  following  a circuitous- 
route,  reached  home  at  two  o’clock  the  next  morning. 

A detachment  of  cavalry  hurried  to  the  spot  and  brought  in  the  body- 


322 


END  OF  THE  INDIAN  TROUBLES  IN  MINNESOTA. 


of  the  dead  Indian,  who  was  recognized  as  Little  Crow.  The  one  who  es- 
caped was  his  son,  captured  nearly  a month  later  in  a half-starved  condi- 
tion by  a party  of  soldiers  on  the  shore  of  Devil's  Lake.  The  skull  of  the 
famous  Little  Crow,  we  believe,  is  now  among  the  treasures  of  the  Minne- 
sota Historical  Society. 

In  July  General  Sibley  fought  battles  with  the  Indians  at  Big  Mound, 
at  Dead  Buffalo  Lake,  at  Stony  Lake,  and  on  the  banks  of  the  Missouri. 
In  all  of  these  he  inflicted  severe  loss  and  broke  the  power  of  the  Indians. 

The  Sioux,  like  all  of  their  race,  yield  sullenly  to  conquest,  and  while 
the  Seminole  War  was  perhaps  the  most  notable  illustration  of  this  fact,  it 
characterized,  in  a greater  or  less  degree,  most  of  our  conflicts  with  the  red 
men.  They  are  fond  of  desultory  fighting,  and  often  seem  to  continue  their 
depredations  through  an  innate  perversity  of  nature. 

The  Sioux  hostiles  were  steadily  pressed  to  the  wall,  until,  in  a few 
months,  all  armed  resistance  ceased.  Outrages  occurred  at  intervals,  and 
more  than  one  individual  encounter  of  a desperate  nature  took  place. 
These  caused  dread  and  consternation  in  many  sections  of  Minnesota,,  but 
the  Civil  War  was  raging  at  that  time  on  so  gigantic  a scale  that  the  out- 
break attracted  less  national  attention  than  it  would  have  done  at  any  other 
period  in  our  history.  With  winter,  peace  w^as  restored  along  the  harassed 
frontier. 


CHAPTER  XXXVII. 


FURTHER  TREATIES  BY  THE"  PEACE  COMMISSIONERS— CONTINUANCE  OF 
OUTRAGES— DEPREDATIONS  IN  KANSAS  AND  COLORADO— GENERAL 
SHERIDAN’S  CAMPAIGN — DESPERATE  FIGHT  OF  MAJOR  FORSYTH — 
SINGULAR  ADVENTURE  OF  TWO  SCOUTS — DESTRUCTION  OF  BLACK 
KETTLE’S  BAND  BY  GENERAL  CUSTER — THE  INDIANS  SUE  FOR 
PEACE. 

IN  chapter  xxxiii,  we  referred  to  the  efforts  of  the  Peace  Commissioners, 
in  1867,  to  conclude  treaties  with  the  Indian  tribes  of  the  western 
plains.  These  were  resumed  and  continued  through  the  springand  summer 
of  1868.  The  three  treaties  made  the  previous  year  with  the  Arapahoes, 
Cheyennes,  Kiowas,  Comanches,  and  Apaches,  at  Medicine  Lodge,  were 
formally  ratified  and  proclaimed  on  the  part  of  our  government,  but  those 
with  the  Pottawatomies,  Sacs,  Foxes,  and  other  tribes  in  Kansas,  were  not 
finally  acted  on  by  the  Senate,  the  object  being  to  secure  their  removal  to 
the  reservations  south  of  that  State.  A treaty  was  concluded  in  Washington, 
March  2,  with  the  several  bands  of  Utes,  by  which  they  agreed  to  remove 
from  the  settled  portions  of  New  Mexico  and  Colorado  to  a large  reserva- 
tion in  the  latter  territory..  It  was  arranged  also  that  two  agencies  should 
be  established  among  them  on  that  reservation. 

In  May  the  Peace  Commissioners  concluded  treaties  with  the  Brul£s, 
Sioux,  Crows,  northern  Arapahoes  and  Cheyennes,  and  the  Ogalalla  Sioux. 
Similar  treaties  followed  in  June  with  the  Osages,  Chippewas,  and  Nava- 
joes.  Thus,  before  midsummer,,  most  of  the  tribes  had  signed  treaties 
binding  them  to  keep  peace  with  the  subjects  and  authorities  of  the 
United  States. 

The  ultimate  object  of  these  treaties  was  to  secure  the  removal  of  the 
various  tribes  to  reservations  of  lands  which  were  to  be  exclusively  theirs 
for  use  and  occupation.  The  government  agreed  to  pay  all  the  expenses 
of  such  removal  and  to  make  the  most  liberal  provisions  for  their  comfort, 
education,  and  civilization.  The  Osages  sold  eight  million  acres  of  land  in 
Kansas  for  one  million  six  hundred  thousand  dollars  to  the  Leavenworth, 
Lawrence,  and  Galveston  Railway  Company,  and  promised  to  remove  to 
the  Indian  country  south  of  Kansas. 

The  northern  Indians  had  just  cause  for  complaint  in  1867,  because 
of  the  establishment  of  the  river  route  to  Montana  through  the  choicest 


323 


324 


INDIAN  TROUBLES  IN  KANSAS  AND  COLORADO. 


hunting  grounds  of  the  Sioux.  This  was  a violation  of  an  old  treaty;  and 
now  that  the  building  of  the  Union  Pacific  Railway  to  the  west  of  the 
Black  Hills  opened  abetter  way  to  Montana  on  that  side  of  the  mountains, 
General  Grant  gave  orders  for  breaking  up  the  military  posts  of  Fort 
Reno,  Phil  Kearny,  and  C.  F.  Smith.  To  General  Sherman  and  his  sub- 
ordinates was  assigned  the  duty  of  removing  the  numerous  tribes  to  their 
reservations. 

In  spite  of  the  nominally  friendly  relations  with  the  tribes,  many  out- 
rages were  committed  through  the  spring  and  summer.  The  Indians  had 
been  deceived  so  many  times  by  the  government  that  they  were  suspicious 
and  sullen,  and  were  exasperated  by  the  delays  in  receiving  their  promised 
supplies  and  the  greedy  intrusion  of  settlers  upon  their  lands. 

In  August  and  September  the  outrages  in  Kansas  and  Colorado  be- 
came like  those  in  Minnesota  in  1862.  Acting  Governor  Hall  of  Colorado 
telegraphed,  on  the  27th  of  August,  to  the  military  headquarters : “ The 
Arapahoes  are  killing  settlers  and  destroying  ranches  in  every  direction. 
For  God’s  sake,  give  me  authority  to  take  soldiers  from  Fort  Reynolds! 
The  people  are  arming  and  will  not  be  restrained.’'  A few  days  later, 
Hon.  Schuyler  Colfax  sent  a dispatch  from  Denver:  “Hostile  Indians 
have  been  striking  simultaneously  at  isolated  settlements  of  Colorado  fora 
circuit  of  over  two  hundred  miles.  Men,  women,  and  children  have  been 
killed  and  scalped  daily,  and  hundreds  of  thousands  of  dollars’  worth  of 
property  stolen.  These  atrocities  have  been  mainly  near  the  three  great 
lines  of  travel  from  this  focal  point.” 

General  Sheridan  had  a force  of  one  thousand  two  hundred  cavalry, 
and  one  thousand  four  hundred  infantry  at  the  various  posts,  after  dis- 
tributing which,  leaving  only  those  that  were  absolutely  necessary,  he  had 
eight  hundred  men  available  for  active  operations  against  the  Indians,  who 
could  place  six  thousand  well  armed  and  mounted  warriors  in  the  field. 
Nevertheless,  he  determined  upon  a vigorous  campaign  to  chastise  the 
tribes  that  had  committed  the  crimes  of  the  summer. 

Troops  were  kept  on  watch  along  the  line  of  travel  across  the  State  of 
Kansas  into  Colorado,  and  a company  of  scouts  under  Major  G.  A.  Forsyth 
was  sent  out  to  guard  in  the  direction  of  the  trails. 

Major  Forsyth  left  Fort  Hayes,  Kansas,  with  fifty  picked  men.  The 
second  in  command  was  Lieutenant  F.  H.  Beecher,  a nephew  of  the  late 
Henry  Ward  Beecher,  while  Dr.  John  S.  Movers  of  New  York  acted  as 
surgeon,  and  W.  H.  H.  McCall  was  first  sergeant. 

This  party  scouted  for  more  than  a week,  during  which  they  noted 
many  signs  of  Indians,  though  they  did  not  see  any  red  men  themselves. 
Reaching  Fort  Wallace,  Forsyth  proceeded  to  refit  his  command  ; this 
was  hardly  done  when  news  reached  the  post  that  the  Indians  had  attacked 


A STARTLING  SIGHT.  325 

a train  near  Sheridan,  a small  railway  town  eighty  miles  distant.  Forsyth’s 
party  was  sent  to  punish  the  marauders. 

Forsyth  and  his  frontiersmen  performed  their  task  with  their  usual 
energy.  They  were  soon  on  the  heels  of  the  dusky  miscreants,  who,  find- 
ing themselves  hard  pressed,  resorted  to  the  trick  so  common  among  the 
Apaches  and  other  tribes.  They  “ dissolved  into  their  original  elements  ” ; 
that  is  to  say,  they  broke  up  into  small  parties,  which  divided  still  further, 
until  the  whole  band  was  scattered  and  each  warrior  pursuing  an  independ- 
ent line  of  flight. 

Thus  it  came  about  that  the  trail  vanished.  Forsyth  pressed  on  to 
the  Republican  River,  where  he  struck  another  Indian  trail,  which  showed 
a peculiarity  directly  the  reverse  of  the  one  he  had  lost.  It  grew  steadily 
broader  and  more  distinct,  until  it  was  evident  that  a large  number  of 
cattle  and  horses  had  been  recently  driven  over  it. 

The  afternoon  was  well  advanced  on  the  eighth  day  out,  when  the 
command  went  into  camp  on  the  Arickaree  Fork  of  the  Republican.  At  the 
point  selected  the  river  divides  so  as  to  inclose  an  island,  which  is  a strip 
of  sand  and  gravel  about  a hundred  yards  long. 

At  this  time  the  command  had  but  one  day’s  provisions,  but  confident 
that  he  was  within  striking  distance  of  the  hostiles,  Forsyth  decided  to 
push  on.  The  major  was  one  of  those  officers  who  “ meant  business  ” from 
the  first. 

Just  as  it  was  growing  light  the  guard  called  out  that  Indians  were 
approaching.  The  men  sprang  to  their  feet,  each  grasping  his  rifle  with 
one  hand  and  his  horse’s  lariat  with  the  other,  to  prevent  the  hostiles  stam- 
peding their  animals.  Six  warriors  dashed  up,  rattling  bells,  flourishing 
buffalo  robes,  firing  their  guns,  and  emitting  loud  whoops  and  yells.  Their 
purpose  was  to  create  a stampede,  but  they  failed,  and  a few  shots  dis- 
persed them.  Four  of  the  pack  mules,  however,  broke  loose  and  galloped 
off  with  their  loads,  three  hobbled  horses  keeping  them  company. 

A number  of  the  men  dashed  in  pursuit  of  the  Indians,  but  Forsyth, 
aware  that  a general  attack  impended,  recalled  them  and  ordered  all  to 
saddle  up.  They  were  busily  employed  in  tightening  their  saddle-girths 
when  Grover,  the  guide,  touching  the  shoulder  of  Forsyth,  exclaimed  : 

“ O Major,  look  at  the  Indians  ! ” 

The  sight  was  enough  to  startle  anyone.  From  over  the  hills  to  the 
west  and  north,  on  the  other  side  of  the  river,  and  indeed  from  every  point 
of  the  compass,  swarmed  the  hostiles.  They  came  by  the  hundred,  were 
finely  mounted  and  in  their  war  paint.  Their  long  scalp-locks  were  braided 
with  eagles’  feathers,  and  they  shouted  and  brandished  their  weapons  as  if 
they  would  strike  terror  to  the  hearts  of  the  little  band  that  coolly  awaited 
their  charge. 


326 


A DESPERATE  SITUATION. 


Major  Forsyth  instantly  ordered  his  men  to  lead  their  ponies  across 
the  shallow  division  of  the  river  to  the  island  of  which  mention  has  been 
made,  there  to  tie  them  in  a circle  to  the  bushes,  and  lying  on  their  faces 
behind  them,  fight  to  the  last. 

Surrender  was  not  to  be  thought  of,  for,  since  mutilation,  torture,  and 
death  would  inevitably  follow,  every  man  preferred  to  die  fighting.  The 
Indians  also  dismounted,  and  crawling  forward  on  the  sand,  close  to  the 
island,  opened  a sharp  fire  at  point-blank  range  with  their  Spencer  and 
Henry  rifles.  The  savages  were  almost  if  not  quite  a thousand  in  number, 
and  included  Brules,  Sioux,  Cheyennes,  and  “ Dog  Soldiers.” 

Fully  realizing  their  desperate  situation,  the  first  step  of  the  besieged 
was  to  make  their  position  as  strong  as  possible.  With  the  help  of  their 
knives  they  threw  up  little  mounds  of  sand  in  the  form  of  a circle.  At  such 
times  the  smallest  irregularity  in  the  surface  of  the  ground  is  often  worth 
a life.  While  the  defenders  were  hurriedly  fortifying  as  best  they  could, 
two  of  them  were  shot  dead  and  several  wounded ; among  the  latter  was 
Major  Forsyth.  A minie-ball  entered  his  thigh,  and,  ranging  upward,  in- 
flicted a bad  wound. 

It  was  only  a short  time  after  this,  and  while  he  was  cautioning  his 
men  against  firing  too  rapidly,  that  he  was  struck  again  by  another  bullet 
between  the  left  knee  and  ankle,  and  his  leg  shattered.  Within  twenty 
seconds  Dr,  Movers,  who,  amid  such  hot  firing,  was  unable  to  look  after 
the  wounded,  and  who  had  a gun  in  hand,  fell  dead  from  a ball  that  passed 
through  his  head. 

A striking  feature  of  this  fierce  attack  was  that  the  surrounding  hills 
were  thronged  with  squaws  and  children  who  had  gathered  to  torture  the 
prisoners,  who  they  were  sure  would  soon  fall  into  their  hands.  It  may 
well  be  believed  that  the  sight  of  these  did  not  incline  the  defenders  to 
abate  the  energy  of  their  defense.  The  women  and  their  offspring  chanted 
war  songs  and  yelled  and  shouted,  while  the  medicine  men  and  chiefs 
hurried  hither  and  thither  among  the  warriors,  encouraging  them  to  press 
the  attack  with  all  possible  vigor. 

Meanwhile,  the  defenders  kept  up  a steady  fire  upon  their  assailants, 
and  numbers  continually  dropped  to  the  ground.  But  the  savages  were 
equally  active  with  their  guns,  and  in  the  course  of  a few  hours  every  horse 
belonging  to  the  defenders  was  shot  down.  When  the  last  steed  was 
killed,  one  of  the  Indians  washeard  to  declare  the  fact  in  good  English  and 
with  a triumphant  oath. 

It  was  still  early  in  the  day  when  the  famous  chief,  Roman  Nose,  mus- 
tered over  a hundred  “ Dog  Soldiers,”  and  supported  by  fully  three  hun- 
dred mounted  men,  just  beyond  rifle  range,  made  ready  to  charge  the  little 
band  that  were  fighting  for  their  lives.  The  dismounted  Indians  first 


THE  INDIANS  FORCED  BACK. 


327 


poured  in  a hot  fire,  as  artillery  do  when  seeking  to  silence  the  guns  of  the 
enemy  under  similar  circumstances.  General  Custer,  who  met  his  death 
under  almost  similar  circumstances  nearly  eight  years  afterward,  thus  de- 
scribes what  followed  : 

“Seeing  that  the  little  garrison  was  stunned  by  the  heavy  fire  of  the 
dismounted  Indians,  and  rightly  judging  that  now,  if  ever,  was  the  proper 
time  to  charge,  Roman  Nose  and  his  band  of  mounted  warriors,  with  a 
wild,  ringing  war-whoop,  echoed  by  the  women  and  children  on  the  hills, 
started  forward.  On  they  came,  presenting  even  to  the  brave  men  await- 
ing the  charge  a most  su- 
perb sight.  Soon  they 
were  within  the  range  of 
the  rifles  of  their  friends, 
and,  of  course,  the  dis- 
mounted Indians  had  to 


“ I NEVER  SAW  SUCH  A CHARGE  BEFORE.” 


slacken  their  fire  for  fear  of  hitting  their  own  warriors.  This  was  the  oppor- 
tunity for  the  scouts.  ‘ Now/  shouted  Forsyth,  and  the  scouts,  springing  to 
their  knees  and  casting  their  eyes  coolly  along  the  barrels  of  their  rifles, 
opened  on  the  advancing  savages  a deadly  fire.  Unchecked,  undaunted,  on 
dashed  the  warriors  ; steadily  rang  the  clear,  sharp  reports  of  the  rifles  of  the 
frontiersmen.  Roman  Nose  falls  dead  from  his  horse.  Medicine  Man  is 
killed,  and  for  an  instant  the  column,  now  within  ten  feet  of  the  scouts, 
hesitates — falters.  A cheer  from  the  scouts,  who  perceive  the  effect  of 
their  well-directed  fire,  and  the  Indians  begin  to  break  and  scatter  in  every 
direction,  unwilling  to  rush  to  a hand-to-hand  struggle.  A few  more  shots 
and  the  Indians  are  forced  back  beyond  range.  Forsyth  inquires  anxiously, 
.‘Can  they  do  better  than  that,  Grover  ? ’ ‘I  have  been  on  the  plains, 
Major,  since  a boy,  and  never  saw  such  a charge  as  that  before/  ‘ All 
right ; then  we  are  good  for  them/  ” 


328 


IN  SORE  STRAITS. 


The  annals  of  Indian  and  border  warfare  record  no  more  gallant  de- 
fense than  that  of  the  wounded  Forsyth  and  his  band  of  Spartans.  They 
had  lost  heavily,  among  the  killed  being  Lieutenant  Beecher. 

Having  fallen  back,  the  assailants  kept  up  their  fire  until  near  the  mid- 
dle of  the  afternoon,  but  by  that  time  the  defenders  had  so  strengthened 
their  defenses  that  they  afforded  good  shelter.  Twice  more — the  last  time 
at  sunset — was  the  charge  renewed  ; but  the  Indians  had  lost  their  best 
leaders,  and  they  were  repelled  with  more  ease  than  in  the  first  instance. 
They  were  furious  to  overwhelm  the  scouts  that  had  inflicted  such  frightful 
loss  upon  them,  and  one  must  shudder  to  think  of  the  fate  of  the  white  men 
had  they  fallen  into  the  power  of  the  treacherous  redskins. 

With  the  coming  of  night  the  firing  of  the  savages  ceased,  and  Major 
Forsyth  for  the  first  time  gained  an  opportunity  to  learn  how  much  his 
command  had  suffered.  Four  were  dead,  four  mortally  and  four  badly 
wounded.  Ten  others  were  slightly  hurt,  so  that  very  nearly  one-half  of 
his  force  had  been  struck. 

The  situation  at  the  close  of  the  first  day’s  fighting  may  thus  be 
summed  up.  All  of  the  scouts’  horses  were  killed,  their  provisions  gone,  their 
surgeon  dead;  there  were  no  medical  stores;  the  Indians  had  completely 
invested  them,  and  the  nearest  post  was  one  hundred  and  ten  miles  dis- 
tant. But  the  savages  had  been  decisively  repulsed;  the  soldiers  had  an 
abundance  of  ammunition  ; water  was  easily  obtained  by  digging  in  the  sand, 
and  the  bodies  of  mules  and  horses  were  a safeguard  against  starvation. 

The  wounded  were  made  as  comfortable  as  possible,  the  works 
strengthened  by  means  of  the  saddles  and  dead  animals,  and  a large  quan- 
tity of  the  meat  was  buried  in  the  sand  against  emergency. 

But  if  any  company  of  men  were  ever  in  need  of  help,  it  was  the  little 
party  on  the  small  sandy  island.  Two  of  the  scouts,  Trudeau  and  the 
famous  Jack  Stillwell,  set  out  to  run  the  gauntlet  in  the  hope  of  reaching 
Fort  Wallace,  more  than  a hundred  miles  off,  with  Major  Forsyth’s  appeal 
for  help. 

As  soon  as  it  was  dark  they  stealthily  left  the  island.  The  defenders 
waited  long  and  listened,  but  heard  nothing  that  could  make  known  the 
failure  or  success  of  their  brave  men.  It  seemed  impossible  that  they 
should  succeed,  and  the  general  belief  was  that  they  had  been  captured 
and  put  to  death. 

The  Indians  kept  up  a continuous  fire  all  the  next  day,  but  did  not 
attempt  any  charge.  The  scouts  were  so  well  protected  that  they  suffered 
no  harm,  and  they  returned  the  shots  when  they  saw  a chance  to  make 
them  effective.  At  dusk  two  more  scouts  were  sent  out,  but  they  were 
detected  and  barely  succeeded  in  getting  back  to  the  island.  Their  failure 
convinced  the  rest  that  Trudeau  and  Stillwell  had  not  been  successful. 


SINGULAR  EXPERIENCE  OF  TWO  SCOUTS. 


329 


The  firing  continued  the  next  day,  but  about  noon  the  women  and 
children  withdrew  from  the  hills.  This  was  accepted  as  a sign  of  their  dis- 
couragement. Some  hours  later  the  hostiles  sent  forward  a flag  of  truce 
asking  for  a parley,  but  the  frontiersmen  would  not  accept  it,  knowing  too 
well  that  its  purpose  was  to  entrap  them. 

That  night  the  two  scouts  who  were  sent  out  succeeded  in  making  their 
way  through  the  lines,  and  pushed  on  with  all  haste  to  Fort  Wallace.  On 
the  fourth  day  most  of  the  Indians  departed,  but  a small  investing  force  was 
left.  On  the  sixth  day  the  stench  of  the  dead  horses  almost  overpowered 
the  defenders.  There  was  no  longer  any  food  fit  to  be  eaten.  Major  For- 
syth called  his  men  around  him  and  told  them  that  those  who  chose  to  go 
and  leave  the  wounded  were  at  liberty  to  do  so,  or  they  could  stay  in  camp 
and  take  their  chances  of  being  rescued  by  friends  from  the  fort.  All 
agreed  to  stay  together  to  the  end. 

During  the  following  two  days  they  lived  on  putrid  horse  flesh  rubbed 
with  gunpowder.  Finally,  Colonel  Carpenter  and  his  cavalry  arrived  from 
Fort  Wallace.  Trudeau  and  Stillwell,  the  first  two  scouts  sent  out,  had 
succeeded  in  passing  through  the  Indian  lines  and  in  reaching  the  post,  from 
which  help  did  not  arrive  a moment  too  soon.  Of  the  fifty-one  brave  defend- 
ers, eight  were  slain,  eight  disabled  for  life,  and  twelve  wounded.  It  was  after- 
ward admitted  by  the  Indians  that  seventy-five  of  their  number  were  killed. 

Mention  is  made  in  the  preceding  sketch  of  the  two  scouts  sent  to  Fort 
Wallace  for  help  to  the  sorely  beleaguered  force  under  Major  Forsyth. 

The  singular  experience  of  the  two  successful  ones  is  thus  told  by 
Lieutenant  W.  E.  Ellis  of  the  Fifth  United  States  Artillery,  and  is  true  in 
every  particular  : 

Stillwell  and  Trudeau,  after  taking  to  the  water,  started  down  stream, 
keeping  as  near  as  practicable  in  the  middle.  The  water  was  hardly  more 
than  knee  deep,  so  that  swimming  was  out  of  the  question.  Consequently 
the  scouts  advanced  with  the  utmost  caution,  crawling  on  their  hands  and 
knees. 

Nature  aided  the  men,  for  the  night  was  cloudy,  and  but  few  stars 
were  visible.  The  moon  had  set  before  the  scouts  left  the  island.  Still- 
well and  Trudeau  had  proceeded  perhaps  a mile  from  the  island  before 
there  were  any  suspicious  sounds  to  break  the  almost  unnatural  stillness  of 
the  night.  Suddenly  several  rifle-shots  followed  by  shouts  were  heard  in  the 
distance.  This  disturbance  indicated  to  the  scouts  that  either  one  or  both 
of  the  other  parties  had  been  discovered,  but  it  served  as  a diversion,  for 
they  now  moved  more  rapidly  forward. 

Some  three  miles  from  the  island  the  scouts  waded  ashore,  and  con- 
cealing their  trail  as  only  the  experienced  plainsmen  can,  directed  their 
steps  toward  the  nearest  timber. 


330 


THE  FRIENDLY  REFUGE. 


The  break  of  day  found  them  about  ten  miles  from  the  locality  at 
which  they  left  the  water.  While  it  may  be  truly  said  that  they  had  passed 
the  enemy’s  lines  in  safety,  the  most  difficult  as  well  as  the  most  dangerous 
part  of  the  journey  was  still  before  them.  The  prairie  grass  was  so  short 
that  it  was  no  easy  task  to  conceal  themselves  from  the  keen  eyes  of  the 
Indians  patrolling  the  Fork.  Moreover,  there  was  great  danger  from  roving 
bands  of  hostiles. 

It  was  clearly  out  of  the  question  for  the  scouts  to  continue  their 
journey  any  farther  until  nightfall.  Their  success  depended  upon  finding 
some  kind  of  cover. 

The  two  carefully  studied  their  surroundings,  but  not  a sign  of  a hid- 
ing-place was  visible.  After  advancing  some  distance  further,  Stillwell 
suddenly  whispered  : 

“ Look  yonder  ! there  is  just  the  place.” 

About  a hundred  yards  further  on  was  a small  patch  probably  a foot 
higher  than  the  surrounding  grass.  Upon  reaching  the  spot  it  proved  to 
be  one  of  those  miniature  oases  of  healthy  green  grass  that  grow  up  around 
the  body  of  a dead  animal,  the  carcass  and  bones  serving  as  a fertilizer.  In 
the  present  case,  the  remains  were  evidently  those  of  a buffalo.  The  bones 
and  small  pieces  of  hide  were  all  that  was  left,  the  flesh  long  since  having 
disappeared. 

As  soon  as  the  scouts  reached  the  spot,  they  hastily  hid  themselves,  for 
it  was  now  so  light  that  objects  were  plainly  visible  at  a considerable 
distance. 

The  concealment  had  not  been  effected  any  too  soon,  for  they  had 
hardly  finished  their  frugal  morning  meal,  when  it  was  broad  daylight. 
From  their  hiding-place  they  saw  figures  moving  along  the  banks  of  the 
Fork,  and  the  occasional  puffs  of  smoke  told  that  the  besieged  and  besieg- 
ers were  wide  awake. 

The  scouts  now  agreed  upon  a system  of  reliefs.  One  was  to  sleep 
three  hours  while  the  other  acted  as  a sentry.  - Trudeau  had  the  first  watch, 
and  Stillwell,  making  himself  as  comfortable  as  possible  among  the  buffalo 
bones,  settled  down  for  a nap. 

His  companion,  after  taking  a liberal  chew  of  his  army  plug  of  tobacco, 
proceeded  to  make  himself  comfortable  also.  He  lay  upon  his  side,  gazing 
in  a contemplative  manner  at  the  island  which  they  had  left  some  hours 
before. 

It  was  a long  time  since  he  had  taken  a survey  of  the  entire  horizon, 
and  he  now  proceeded  to  repeat  it.  The  sight  caused  him  to  utter  an  in- 
voluntary exclamation  and  poke  his  companion  in  the  ribs. 

“ Wake  up,  Jack,  but  don’t  rise.” 

What  is  it,  old  man  ? ” was  the  instant  question. 


A STRANGE  PERIL. 


331 


“ There’s  a party  of  about  twenty  Indians  cornin’  this  way,  and  as  I 
calculate  it,  they’ll  pass  pretty  close,  even  if  they  don’t  stumble  on  to  us.” 

“ You’re  right,  Trudeau.  We’ve  got  to  hug  the  ground  and  make  our- 
selves as  scarce  as  possible.  Remember,  if — well,  we  come  high.” 

“ You  bet,”  was  the  only  response.  Gradually  the  Indians  approached, 
until  it  became  apparent  that  they  would  pass  within  a hundred  yards  of 
the  prostrate  men. 

The  scouts  were  lying  at  full  length,  in  breathless  suspense,  almost 
afraid  the  throbbing  of  their  own  hearts  would  betray  them.  The  slightest 
motion  was  sure  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  keen-eyed  savages.  Five 
minutes  more  and  their  fate  would  be  decided  ! 

When  unseen  danger  threatens  us  there  seems  to  be  an  instinct  in  our 
nature,  or  a sort  of  “ sixth  sense,”  that  warns  us  of  the  evil  which  is  beyond 
the  power  of  the  five  senses  to  detect. 

It  was  this  vague  feeling  of  impending  danger  that  caused  Stillwell 
to  turn  his  head,  even  at  this  most  critical  moment.  His  eyes  met  a sight 
which  unnerved  him,  brave  old  frontiersman  that  he  was.  From  out  of  the 
grass,  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  carcass,  and  noiselessly  moving  among 
the  bones,  he  espied  a huge  rattlesnake  gliding  directly  toward  him. 

To  the  average  traveler  of  the  South  and  Southwest,  a “ rattler  ” is  no 
more  of  an  event  than  the  sight  of  the  ordinary  garter  snake  is  to  a country 
lad.  The  old  plainsman  knew  that,  although  the  rattlesnake’s  bite  is 
deadly  poison,  “ trouble  won’t  trouble  him  until  he  troubles  trouble.”  In 
fact,  a “ rattler  ” is  hardly  worth  the  expenditure  of  ammunition  to  kill 
him. 

But  a rattlesnake  cornered  or  molested  is  quite  another  creature,  and 
he  becomes  a most  fearful  foe. 

Whether  in  the  present  case  the  men  had  unwittingly  invaded  his 
snakeship’s  home,  or  whether  the  reptile,  passing  that  way,  had,  by  some 
serpentine  instinct,  realized  the  helplessness  of  his  natural  enemies,  and 
had  determined  to  attack  them,  must  remain  a matter  of  conjecture. 

At  all  events,  every  movement  of  the  hideous  folds,  as  well  as  the 
vicious  glitter  of  the  beady  eyes,  left  no  doubt  of  the  snake’s  intention  to 
assail  them  at  once. 

The  first  thought  that  suggested  itself  to  the  scouts  was  to  shoot  the 
reptile  or  to  club  him  to  death,  but  the  proximity  of  the  Indians  placed 
this  out  of  the  question.  The  next  suggestion  was  to  stare  the  serpent 
out  of  countenance,  after  the  fashion  of  the  East  Indian  snake  charmer. 
But  this  particular  specimen  had  no  intention  of  being  charmed.  On 
the  contrary,  he  glided  to  within  four  feet  of  Trudeau,  and  slowly  coiled 
himself  to  strike. 

There  was  hardly  a moment  to  act,  and  Stillwell  had  made  up  his 


332 


A DEADLY  POISON. 


mind  to  shoot,  preferring  death  at  the  hands  of  the  Indians,  when  Trudeau, 
who  was  a trifle  in  advance,  shot  a large  accumulation  of  tobacco  spittle 
straight  from  his  lips  at  the  rattlesnake’s  head. 

Lucky  shot ! The  nicotine  solution  struck  the  reptile  squarely  in  the 
mouth,  and  played  the  mischief  with  him.  He  hurriedly  unwound  his 
coils,  and,  turning  tail,  slunk  away  into  the  grass  as  noiselessly  as  he  had 
come. 

Meanwhile  the  party  of  Indians  had  passed  by,  little  dreaming  of  the 
presence  of  the  two  scouts.  No  other  incident  occurred  during  the  day  to 


disturb  them  in  their  hiding-place.  At  midnight  they  again  made  a forced 
march,  and  in  due  time  arrived  at  Fort  Wallace. 

Major  Bankhead,  with  four  troops  of  cavalry,  immediately  started  to 
the  relief  of  Forsyth’s  command.  The  Indians,  after  making  an  unsuc- 
cessful attempt  to  jump  Bankhead’s  camp  some  twenty  miles  from  the 
Arickaree,  gave  up  the  siege  on  the  approach  of  the  relieving  troops  with- 
out giving  them  battle. 

Of  course,  the  scouts  wasted  none  of  their  valuable  time  in  exploring 
the  scene  of  their  encounter  with  the  snake  to  determine  whether  or  not 
he  died,  so  that  point  cannot  be  decided. 

There  is  a superstition  on  the  plains  to  this  day  that  tobacco  is  a 
deadly  poison,  and  if  you  ask  any  old  frontiersman  about  the  matter, 
he  will  probably  tell  you  the  above  incident,  adding  (if  you  are  a “ten- 
derfoot ”);  “ Yes,  sir,  it  killed  that  rattler  deader’n  a door  nail.” 


MOURNING  FOR  THE  FALLEN, 


DEATH  OF  BLACK  KETTLE. 


335 


After  this  affair,  troops  were  sent  to  the  field  of  action  from  other 
departments,  the  services  of  volunteers  from  Kansas  were  accepted,  and 
operations  were  pressed.  Skirmishing  and  indecisive  fighting  followed 
until  the  27th  of  November,  when  something  approaching  a battle  took 
place  in  Washita. 

General  Custer  had  gone  south,  with  eleven  companies,  in  search  of 
hostiles,  and  struck  the  trail  of  a band  of  Cheyennes  under  Black  Kettle. 
Following  this  up,  they  soon  came  upon  the  Cheyenne  camp,  consisting  of 
fifty-one  lodges.  The  weather  was  cold,  and  snow  lay  deep  on  the  ground. 
With  his  usual  impetuosity,  Custer  charged  upon  the  village,  and  a des- 
perate fight  took  place.  Black  Kettle  and  about  one  hundred  and  forty  of 
his  warriors  were  killed,  all  the  arms,  ammunition,  and  rifles  captured,  fifty- 
three  women  and  children  taken  prisoners,  and  the  village  destroyed. 

On  Christmas  Day  Colonel  Evans  burned  a Comanche  village. 
“ This,”  said  General  Sheridan,  “ gives  the  final  blow  to  the  backbone  of 
the  Indian  rebellion.” 

General  Sheridan’s  stern  course  toward  the  Indians  had  the  effect  of 
forcing  them  to  sue  for  peace.  At  midnight  on  the  last  day  of  the  year, 
to  quote  Sheridan’s  words,  a “delegation  of  the  chief  fighting  men  of  the 
Arapahoes  and  Cheyennes,  twenty-one  in  all,  arrived  at  this  place  on  foot, 
their  animals  not  being  able  to  carry  them.  They  had  ruled  the  village. 
They  begged  for  peace,  and  permission  for  their  people  to  come  in,  asking 
no  terms,  but  for  a paper  to  protect  them  from  the  operations  of  our  troops 
while  en  route . They  report  the  tribes  in  mourning  for  their  losses,  their 
people  starving,  their  dogs  all  eaten  up,  and  no  buffalo.” 


CHAPTER  XXXVIII. 


INDIAN  TROUBLES  IN  THE  NORTHWEST — GENERAL  CROOK’S  CAMPAIGN— 
THE  MODOC  WAR — ASSASSINATION  OF  GENERAL  CANBY  AND  DR. 
THOMAS— THE  EXPERIENCE  OF  TWO  YOUNG  RANCHMEN  IN  THE 
BAD  LANDS. 

SOMETIME  previous  to  the  incidents  related,  the  Shoshone  and  Piutes 
played  havoc  in  northern  Nevada,  northeast  California,  northeast 
Oregon,  and  western  Idaho.  The  culmination  of  their  daring  may  be  said 
to  have  been  reached  in  1866,  when  they  massacred  eighty-six  Chinamen 
on  their  way  to  the  mines  near  Boise.  This  roused  the  authorities.  The 
best  selection  possible  was  made  , in  the  person  of  General  George  Crook, 
who  had  well  won  his  spurs  in  the  campaigns  of  Virginia  and  Tennessee, 
and  who  had  proven  himself  a skilled  soldier,  an  excellent  general,  and  a 
devoted  patriot. 

General  Crook  left  the  Dalles,  in  Oregon,  with  his  troops  in  the  winter 
of  1866,  and  advanced  with  several  converging  columns  upon  the  center  of 
operations,  old  Camp  Warner,  in  southeastern  Oregon.  His  plan  was  to 
move  out  from  the  center,  and  dejiver  his  blows  as  necessity  might 
demand.  Each  column  had  a train  of  pack  mules,  and  a corps  of  Indian 
guides. 

General  Crook  was  hardly  at  work  when  his  wily  enemies  one  dark, 
stormy  night  succeeded  in  stampeding  his  horses  and  mules,  and  placing 
nearly  all  his  command  on  foot.  This  discouraging  misfortune  was  accepted 
as  one  of  the  incidents  of  war,  and  the  general  quickly  began  his  work  over 
again.  A remount  was  procured  from  the  Dalles,  and  by  the  middle  of 
summer  all  were  in  the  saddle  once  more. 

The  troops  were  encamped  on  the  eastern  side  of  Warner  Lake,  along, 
narrow  sheet  of  water,  extending  north  and  south.  The  Indians  were  on 
the  watch  for  military  expeditions  around  either  end,  but  General  Crook 
built  a causeway  of  rock  across  a very  strait  portion,  hurried  his  troops  over, 
and,  by  a number  of  stealthy  marches,  descended  upon  the  enemy  before 
his  presence  was  suspected. 

The  general  direction  was  toward  the  lava  beds  of  California.  The 
Indian  scouts  were  kept  a day  or  more  in  advance  and  covered  a large 
extent  of  country  on  the  right  and  left.  The  marching  was  done  at  night. 
The  advance  scouts  were  continually  involved  in  skirmishes  with  thehostiles. 
General  Crook  followed  the  shrewd  plan  of  making  his  daily  marches  uneven 

336 


GENERAL  CROOK’S  SUCCESSFUL  CAMPAIGN. 


337 


in  extent.  Sometimes  he  would  travel  twice  as  far  one  day  as  on  the  preced- 
ing. The  enemy  were  thus  prevented  from  knowing  where  to  attempt  an 
ambuscade.  The  march  was  exhausting.  The  men  and  horses  were  worn 
out  ; the  former  were  in  rags,  and  skirmishing  was  continuous,  the  strength 
of  the  command  being  frittered  away  without  reaching  any  substantial 
result. 

Nearly  four  hundred  miles  were  passed,  mostly  at  night,  and  the  In- 
dians had  successfully  eluded  a general  engagement.  The  soldiers  had  lost 
a couple  of  men,  and  not  more  than  a dozen  warriors  had  been  killed. 
Winter  was  approaching,  and  the  troops  were  ill  prepared  for  it.  General 
Crook,  however,  concluded  that  it  was  as  safe  and  easy  to  go  forward  as  to 
retreat.  Accordingly,  he  made  his  way  to  Lost  River,  where  he  encamped 
his  command  for  three  days.  While  there  he  was  visited  by  Captain  Jack 
and  several  Modocs,  who  told  him  that  the  hostiles  had  scattered,  turned 
to  the  southeast,  and  would  reunite  further  down  the  country. 

General  Crook  took  the  direction  named,  and  the  next  day  struck  the 
Piute  trail.  He  followed  it  for  four  days,  and,  upon  reaching  a point  on 
one  of  the  forks  of  Pitt  River,  discovered  the  hostiles.  A large  and  im- 
passable swamp  was  near,  and  to  prevent  the  Indians  taking  refuge  in 
it,  an  immediate  charge  was  made.  The  object  was  attained,  the  savages 
scampering  up  the  slope  of  a hill  which  began  a couple  of  hundred  yards 
from  the  swamp.  It  was  quite  steep  for  a short  way,  and  covered  with 
chaparral  and  bowlders.  Beyond  was  a grassy  slope,  extending  a half 
mile,  when  it  became  rocky  until  lost  in  a belt  of  scrubby  timber.  The 
scouts  seized  this,  under  orders  not  to  attack  until  the  troops  were  in 
position. 

The  hostiles  were  seen  hurrying  from  all  directions  and  hiding  them- 
selves in  a rim  of  basalt  between  the  belt  of  timber  held  by  the  scouts 
and  the  swamps  below.  The  ledge  was  so  small  that  Crook  was  puzzled 
to  know  what  had  become  of  all  the  Indians  after  reaching  it,  for  not  one 
of  them  could  be  seen.  The  curving  ridge,  however,  proved  to  be  the  rim 
of  an  extinct  crater,  broken  off  on  one  side,  and  impregnable  except  in  the 
direction  occupied  by  Crook.  It  was  about  two  hundred  yards  from  north 
to  south,  and  somewhat  less  from  east  to  west.  It  was  appropriately  named 
the  Hell  Caves,  and  was  a wild,  rugged  region,  where  it  would  seem  that  a 
small  force  might  defy  an  army. 

The  east  and  west  sides  of  the  crater  were  charged,  and  the  hostiles, 
thinking  that  Crook’s  whole  command  were  thus  engaged,  exposed  them- 
selves to  the  fire  of  the  scouts,  who  had  crept  down  from  their  first  posi- 
tion to  within  a few  rods.  Lieutenant  Madigan,  of  the  Twenty-third  In- 
fantry, and  seven  men  were  killed,  and  nine  wounded,  in  the  charge  to  secure 
possession  of  the  rim  of  the  crater. 


33» 


INDIAN  REPUBLICAN  GOVERNMENT. 


The  besieged  Piutes  crawled  out  during  the  darkness  and  scattered. 
Their  loss  could  not  be  ascertained,  but  it  was  considerable.  Crook  re- 
turned to  Camp  Warner,  looked  after  his  sick  and  wounded,  and  again  took 
the  field.  The  winter  set  in  early  and  was  unusually  severe.  Snow  fell 
almost  continuously,  and  became  so  heavy  early  in  November  that  all  the 
roads  and  trails  were  blockaded.  The  snow  forced  the  Indians  to  come 
down  from  the  mountains  into  the  valleys,  where  the  soldiers  gave  them 
no  rest.  Numerous  engagements  took  place,  and  the  hostiles  suffered 
severely. 

The  supply  train  was  delayed  a long  time  by  the  great  fall  of  snow, 
and  did  not  arrive  at  Camp  Warner  until  March,  1868.  A “chinook,”  or 
warm  wind,  turned  the  snow  into  slush,  and  only  after  the  greatest  labor 
was  the  command  able  to  reach  Camp  Warner.  But  Crook  resumed  his 
work  without  delay, "and  on  the  17th  of  March,  in  a blinding  snow  storm, 
defeated  the  Piutes  so  disastrously  that  they  begged  for  peace.  They  were 
granted  the  terms  of  unconditional  surrender  and  work.  The  district  thus 
released  from  peril  and  devastation  is  six  hundred  miles  long  by  three  hun- 
dred in  breadth.  General  Crook’s  campaign  was  brilliant,  and  stamped 
him  as  one  of  the  most  successful  Indian  fighters  in  the  army. 

No  one  appreciated  his  abilities  more  than  General  Grant,  who  soon 
afterward  became  President.  There  was  sharp  and  decisive  work  to  do  in 
Arizona,  and  General  Crook  was  the  man  to  do  it. 

In  the  month  of  December,  1870,  a council  of  delegates  from  a large 
number  of  Indian  tribes  met  at  Ocmulgee  in  the  Choctaw  division  of  the 
Indian  Territory.  This  meeting  was  in  accordance  with  the  suggestion  of 
President  Grant  to  consider  the  project  of  an  Indian  republican  govern- 
ment, under  the  general  rule  of  the  United  States.  A second  council  met 
in  July,  1871,  and  a provisional  government  was  organized. 

The  result  has  been  most  beneficent.  Anyone  who  visits  the  Indian 
Territory  is  astonished  and  gratified  at  the  wonderful  progress  made  by  the 
various  tribes  in  education  and  all  the  attributes  of  civilization.  They 
have  excellent  schools,  academies,  and  colleges,  publish  bright  and  well- 
edited  newspapers,  excel  in  various  trades  and  professions,  show  good  taste 
in  their  dwellings,  and  in  short  are  civilized  in  every  respect.  Their  govern- 
ment is  patterned  after  our  own,  and  the  laws  are  executed  with  a faithful 
conscientiousness  which  might  serve  as  a model  for  many  of  our  own 
States. 

The  proposition  was  made  that  our  government  should  set  aside  cer- 
tain tracts  to  be  known  as  “ reservations,”  which  were  to  belong  exclusively 
to  the  Indians.  So  long  as  they  remained  on  the  reservations,  they  were  to 
be  guarded  against  all  molestation,  and,  that  there  might  be  no  excuse  for 
straying  off,  nearly  six  hundred  acres  apiece  were  given  to  them. 


INDIAN  CIVILIZATION. 


V\tf 


ATTACK  ON  THE  PEACE  COMMISSIONERS. 


34J 


It  was  not  to  be  expected  that  all  the  tribes  would  look  favorably  upon 
this  proposition.  Many  had  dwelt  from  time  immemorial  in  remote  parts 
of  the  country,  where  the  soil,  climate,  and  general  characteristics  pleased 
them.  They  regarded  these  hunting  grounds  and  homes  as  immeasurably 
superior  to  those  in  the  Indian  Territory,  which,  despite  its  mineral  wealth 
and  fertility,  contains  many  tracts  that  are  comparatively  worthless.  It 
was  the  opposition  to  such  removal  that  brought  about  many  late  difficulties 
with  the  red  men. 

The  Modoc  tribe  numbered  only  a few  hundred,  and  were  removed  by 
the  government  from  their  fine  lands,  south  of  Oregon,  to  other  territories, 
where  the  soil  was  so  poor  that  they  were  filled  with  wrathful  disgust. 
They  went  back  to  their  old  homes  and  defied  the  United  States. 

Finding  that  the  attempt  would  be  made  to  bring  them  into  subjection, 
the  Modocs,  under  the  leadership  of  Captain  Jack  and  Scarfaced  Charley, 
withdrew  to  some  lava  beds,  just  over  the  frontier,  in  northern  California. 
With  the  exception  of  this  small  band,  the  other  Modocs  and  the  numerous 
Klamath  Indians  were  removed  to  their  reservation  without  trouble. 

The  Modocs  were  surrounded  in  the  lava  beds,  but  the  region  was 
almost  inaccessible,  and  it  seemed  impossible  to  conquer  them.  A dozen 
men  could  defy  a hundred  times  their  number,  and  it  was  certain  that 
many  valuable  lives  would  have  to  be  sacrificed  before  they  were  whipped 
into  submission. 

April  ii,  1873,  a conference  was  held  with  the  disaffected  Modocs 
under  a flag  of  truce,  by  six  members  of  the  Peace  Commission,  at  the  head 
of  which  was  General  Edward  S.  Canby.  While  the  interview  was  under 
way,  the  Indians  suddenly  assailed  the  white  men  with  great  ferocity. 
General  Canby  and  Dr.  Thomas  were  killed  on  the  spot,  and  General 
Meachem,  another  commissioner,  was  shot  and  stabbed,  but  escaped  with 
his  life. 

This  act  of  treachery  shocked  the  whole  country,  and  the  war  against 
the  Modocs  was  pushed  with  sleepless  energy.  But  the  Indians  were  so 
hard  to  reach  that  it  was  not  until  July  that  General  Davis  and  a force  of 
regulars  succeeded  in  bringing  Captain  Jack  and  his  handful  of  warriors  to 
terms.  Having  surrendered,  the  members  of  the  conference  concerned  in 
the  assassination  of  the  Peace  Commissioners  were  put  on  trial,  and  seven 
of  them  were  sentenced  to  be  hanged.  The  sentence  of  four  was  com- 
muted, but  Captain  Jack  and  two  brother  chiefs  were  executed  on  the  3d 
of  the  following  October.  The  remaining  Indians  were  removed  to  a 
reservation  in  Dakota,  where  they  adopted  peaceful  and  industrious  ways, 
and  gave  no  further  trouble. 

It  may  be  well  in  this  place  to  insert,  as  illustrative  of  life  in  a region 
of  the  West  made  famous  by  Indian  troubles,  the  experience  of  two  young 


342 


EXPERIENCE  OF  TWO  YOUNG  PIONEERS. 


partners,  putting  their  money  to- 
gether, began  to  buy  stock.  They  had 
seven  hundred  dollars  in  cash  and  two 
riding  ponies.  During  the  month  they  bought  thirty  yearling  heifers  and 
ten  fine  new-milch  cows,  with  their  calves  by  them  ; also  a blooded  animal 
for  breeding  purposes,  which  they  named  Duke. 


ATTACK  BY  MODOCS  ON  THE  PEACE 
COMMISSIONERS. 


men  in  the  “ Bad  Lands.”  Harland  Davis  and  Curtis  Stone  were  cousins. 
The  home  of  the  latter  was  in  Minnesota,  from  which  point  the  two  made 
a tour  westward  on  horseback  in  quest  of  a suitable  place  for  locating  a 
ranch,  for  they,  like  many  of  their  age,  were  eager 
to  try  their  fortune  in  stock-raising.  They  had 
formed  their  plans  a considerable 
time  before,  and  saved  their  funds 
for  the  purpose  of  carrying  them  out. 

In  April  the  two  intending 


JOURNEYING  TOWARD  THE  BAD  LANDS. 


343 


On  the  24th  day  of  May  they  set  off  to  drive  their  herd  by  easy 
stages  across  the  country  from  Minnesota  to  their  new  ranch  in  the 
“ Bad  Lands  ” of  the  Little  Missouri.  The  distance — as  I should  estimate 
it — was  at  least  four  hundred  miles.  Stockmen  in  the  western  territories  not 


THE  BAD  LANDS. 


unfrequently  drive  their  herds  six  or  even  eight  hundred  miles,  letting 
them  graze  as  they  move  on,  making  not  more  than  from  six  to  ten  miles 
per  day.  Stock  thus  carefully  driven  will  commonly  arrive  at  its  destination 
in  good  condition,  often  fat. 

Some  stockmen  hold  that  the  exercise  of  such  daily  driving  is  better 
for  a herd  than  the  inaction  of  a fixed  range.  The  Tartar  herdsmen  of  the 
Asiatic  steppes  have  from  time  immemorial  pursued  this  course  with  their 
herds  and  flocks,  migrating  with  the  season  along  extended  routes,  pastur- 
ing as  they  go. 

Our  two  adventurers  moved  on  day  by  day  across  the  rolling  prairie 
lands  of  Dakota.  They  commonly  made  their  night  camp  beside  some 
little  lake,  or  “slew.”  It  was  late  in  June  when  they  reached  the  Missouri 
River,  which  they  crossed  at  Old  Fort  Yates  (I  think  they  said) ; and  here 
they  lost  a cow,  which  fell  overboard  from  out  the  old  barge  used  as  a ferry, 
and  was  carried  down  the  strong,  muddy  current.  They  were  not  even 
able  to  recover  the  carcass,  which  was  lost  in  the  quicksands  and  mud. 

The  Missouri  is  a stream  which  never  gives  up  its  prey  ; once  in  its 
clutches,  man  or  beast  is  as  good  as  drowned  and  buried  too.  It  may  not 
sound  patriotic  for  an  American  to  say  it,  but  it  is,  on  all  accounts,  about 


344 


INDIANS  AND  BUFFALOES. 


the  meanest  river  of  its  size — and  it  is  plenty  large  enough— on  the  whole 
face  of  the  globe.  It  runs  mud  porridge  the  year  round,  and  it  is  always 
either  up  at  flood-height,  tearing  its  banks  to  pieces  and  sweeping  away 
everything  on  the  bottoms,  or  else  it  is  down  burrowing  half  out  of  sight 
in  the  sand.  Nature  never  intended  it  for  a navigable  river. 

The  boys  had  also  lost  one  calf  from  wolves,  two  or  three  of  which 
came  sneaking  into  their  camp  one  night  and  throttled  it  before  they  had 
time  to  beat  them  off.  But  they  had  come  upon  three  stray  steers  on  their 
route,  which  fell  into  their  herd.  As  these  animals  were  not  branded,  they 
made  no  scruple  of  taking  them  in  as  their  own,  according  to  common 
practice  in  the  Far  West. 

For  their  own  brand  they  had  adopted  the  initial  letters  H.C.  with  a 
bar  over,  thus,  H.C.,  branded  on  the  flank. 

Everything  went  on  without  serious  disaster  with  them  until  the  fifth 
day  out,  west  of  the  Missouri.  That  was  a black  day,  indeed  ! They  were 
following  up  the  bottoms  of  the  Cannon  Ball  River,  so  called,  having  that 
small  tributary  on  their  north. 

About  three  o’clock  that  afternoon,  as  they  were  resting  their  cattle, 
which  were  lying  down  chewing  their  cuds  among  the  willow-clumps  along 
the  bank,  they  heard  a singular,  low,  rumbling  noise,  which  immediately 
grew  louder. 

“That  can’t  be  thunder,  can  it,  Harl?”  said  Curtis. 

“ Sounds  too  steady  for  thunder  ; it  sounds  like  a train  of  cars,”  replied 
Harland. 

“ But  there  isn’t  a railroad  within  a hundred  miles  of  here,’  said 
Curtis. 

The  rumbling  noise  grew  louder  every  second.  It  seemed  to  come 
from  behind  the  bluffs  to  the  south  of  the  river. 

“ It  is  either  a railroad  or  something  heavy,  coming  directly  this  way, 
too  ! ” exclaimed  Harland,  jumping  from  the  ground. 

Just  then  they  heard  shots,  then  shouts  and  yells,  and  saw  an  immense 
cloud  of  dust  rising  over  the  bluffs.  Both  boys  bounded  into  their  saddles, 
and  started  up  their  cattle.  They  tried  to  get  them  into  a run  up  the 
river.  But  the  drowsy  animals  started  slowly  ; and  before  they  had  pro. 
ceeded  a hundred  yards,  there  burst  over  the  top  of  the  bluffs  above 
them,  and  came  plunging  down  upon  the  bottom,  an  immense  herd  of 
buffaloes — all  in  mad  flight. 

A whirlwind  of  dust,  like  spray  from  the  foot  of  Niagara,  rolled  up 
from  under  them  ; and  in  the  rear  of  the  struggling  mass  of  bodies  could 
be  seen  a score  of  tawny  horsemen,  spurring  their  ponies  into  the  midst  of 
the  bellowing  mob,  firing  rapidly  on  all  sides,  and  yelling  like  fiends  at 
every  shot. 


THE  STAMPEDE. 


345 


Both  shots  and  shouts  were  well  nigh  drowned  by  the  confused  bellow- 
ing and  roar  of  the  flying  herd.  The  very  ground  shook  beneath  their  head- 
long rush.  Antelope,  several  deer,  and  a big  silver-tipped  bear  headed  the 


THE  DESTRUCTIVE  HUNT. 


stampede,  and  all  bore  directly  out  across  the  bottom  toward  the  river, 
where  our  two  young  stockmen  were  vainly  trying  to  get  their  animals  out 
of  the  track  of  the  hunt. 

In  less  time  than  it  takes  to  write  this  line  they  were  in  the  midst  of 
the  thundering  melee,  struggling  and  spurring  for  their  lives. 

Their  own  hitherto  quiet  cattle,  struck  with  terror,  or  else  catching  the 
wild  spirit  of  the  fleeing  buffaloes,  sprang  away  with  loud  bawlings  and 
tails  erect,  and  in  a moment  were  lost  to  view  amidst  the  shaggy  groups  of 
their  wild  congeners. 

Our  two  friends  could  do  nothing  to  keep  them  under  control.  Each 
had  all  he  could  do  to  keep  from  being  overborne  and  trampled  under  foot. 
Luckily,  they  were  mounted  on  well-trained  and  sturdy  ponies. 

Somehow,  neither  could  tell  exactly  how,  they  found  themselves  wallow- 
ing in  the  middle  of  the  river,  with  the  whole  gang  of  hunters — Indians  and 


346 


THE  DESTRUCTIVE  HUNT. 


half-breeds — shouting  and  whooping  around  them,  and  the  stream  literally 
red  with  blood.  Buffaloes  were  dropping  thickly  all  about.  The  bank  was 
strewn  with  bodies  of  the  huge  animals,  and  with  desperately  wounded 
bulls  which  roared  horribly  in  their  dying  throes  ; while  upon  the  jammed 
mass  of  bodies  in  the  water  the  infuriated  hunters  fairly  leaped  their 
horses,  and  drawing  their  knifes,  struck  right  and  left. 

The  slaughter  was  sickening.  To  Harland  and  Curtis’s  alarmed  and 
astonished  eyes  the  hunters  looked  to  be  veritable  demons,  whose  one 
motto  was  Kill — Kill ! 

But  the  hunt  swept  past  as  swiftly  as  it  had  poured  down  upon  them. 
In  a minute  they  found  themselves  in  the  rear  of  it — amidst  a whole  river- 
ful of  dead  and  disabled  buffaloes.  Among  these  lay  nearly  all  their  own 
cows  and  calves  and  several  of  the  yearlings.  The  rest  had  crossed  with 
the  buffaloes,  pursued  still  by  the  wild  hunters,  who  seemed  determined  to 
slaughter  the  entire  herd. 

The  two  young  men  rode  out  of  the  water  and  gazed  anxiously  and 
sadly  about  them.  Save  their  ponies,  they  had  lost,  or  as  good  as  lost, 
everything.  Their  whole  herd  of  cattle  had  been  swept  away,  and  that, 
too,  when  after  a long  journey  they  had  arrived  within  forty  miles  of  their 
new  ranch. 

Accustomed  to  the  quiet  prosperity  of  New  England,  Harland  could 
scarcely  control  his  emotion. 

“ We’re  ruined  ! We’re  ruined  ! Everything  has  gone  ! ” he  cried  out 
bitterly. 

“ Wal,  that’s  about  the  size  of  it,”  replied  Curtis,  who  possessed  per- 
haps more  of  the  phlegm  of  a Westerner  than  his  cousin. 

Disasters  like  these  are  always  liable  to  befall  the  pioneer  in  the  Far 
West.  And  it  depends  upon  whether  he  has  in  him  the  true  grit,  or 
“ sand,”  as  they  say,  to  rally  from  such  “ crushers,”  that  determines  the 
question  of  his  final  success.  A great  many,  after  such  a reverse,  go  back 
home  wilted,  and  heaping  anathemas  on  the  West. 

Harland  Davis  and  Curtis  Stone  sat  on  their  ponies  and  looked  about 
them  upon  the  scene  of  the  slaughter  in  the  rear  of  the  hunt.  The  stream 
was  fairly  clogged  with  the  bodies  of  buffaloes  and  those  of  their  luckless 
cattle.  The  whole  bottom,  too,  and  the  sides  of  the  bluffs  were  strewn 
with  dead  and  disabled  animals. 

“ This  is  a bad  day  for  us,  Harl,”  said  Curtis. 

Harland  was  too  much  discouraged  to  even  speak. 

Ere  long  the  hunters — a party  of  thirty  or  forty  Sioux  and  half-breeds, 
with  two  or  three  frontiersmen — came  riding  back  on  their  reeking  ponies, 
reviewing  the  spoils  of  the  slaughter. 

Presently  one  of  the  white  hunters  rode  up  to  them. 


A HAPPY  THOUGHT. 


347 


“ Sorry  for  yer,”  he  said.  “ I see  ye’ve  lost  yer  drove.  It’s  rough  on 
yer,  but  we  couldn’t  ’a  helped  it  anyhow.  We’s  bound  to  have  them  buf- 
fels;  an’  yer  might’s  well  try  to  stop  a norther  as  ter  stop  a crew  of  these 
pesky  redskins  when  they  gits  arter  buffels.  But  pitch  in  an’  help  yersel’s 
to  meat.  There’s  enough  for  all,  I reckon,  an’  hides  too.” 

This  was  friendly,  though  rather  small  consolation.  Taking  their  tents 
and  such  of  their  outfit  as  had  survived  the  stampede,  they  went  about 
half  a mile  back  along  their  morning’s  trail,  and  camped  for  the  night. 

They  stayed  there  by  the  Cannon  Ball  River  for  four  or  five  days,  liv- 
ing on  buffalo-meat,  a stock  of  which  they  hung  up  to  dry  in  the  hot  sun. 
Meantime  a whole  tribe  of  Indians,  twenty  or  thirty  lodges,  had  come  up 
and  were  stripping  the  slain  buffaloes  and  feasting  on  the  flesh. 

The  night  following,  a pack  of  wolves  rushed  in  and  held  carnival  on 
the  refuse.  When  our  two  friends  rode  over  the  ground  next  forenoon, 
there  was  nothing  left  either  of  the  buffaloes  or  of  their  own  late  fair  herd 
save  scattered  white  bones,  and  three  or  four  hundred  black-horned  skulls, 
each  guarded  by  a snarling  coyote. 

Not  much  in  the  way  of  capital  to  start  again  on  ! And  yet  the  alert 
eye  of  Curt  Stone  saw  something  in  these  three  or  four  hundred  horned 
skulls  out  of  which  to  retrieve  their  fortunes! 

“ Truly,”  I said  to  myself,  when  they  told  me  of  it,  “there  is  no  such 
thing  as  beating  a young  fellow  who  has  true  grit  in  him  and  a good  eye 
for  chances.” 

The  year  before,  Curtis  had  been  at  Fargo,  Dakota,  and  in  the  hotel 
there  had  been  several  sets  of  buffalo-horns,  each  nicely  polished  to  a shin- 
ing black  and  bound  about  at  the  middle,  where  the  coarse  bone  connects 
the  two  horns,  with  pink  and  blue  silk.  Such  sets  make  very  pretty  office 
and  dining-room  ornaments,  and  at  that  time  were  more  rare  than  now. 
Curtis  had  never  seen  horns  thus  polished  before.  He  asked  the  price,  and 
was  informed  that  they  brought  seven  dollars  per  set.  Curtis  then  asked 
the  young  man  who  had  them  for  sale  what  he  would  give  for  such  sets, 
and  was  offered  four  dollars  for  each  and  every  perfect  and  well-polished 
set  he  would  bring  in. 

He  was  told,  too,  that  the  way  to  prepare  the  horns  was  to  take  them 
“ green,”  or  at  least  before  they  became  much  dried,  and  after  first  cleans- 
ing them,  scrape  them  with  glass  and  then  polish  them  with  sand-paper, 
till  they  took  on  the  beautiful  ebony-black  which  makes  a set  of  buffalo* 
horns  so  handsome  a present  to  a friend. 

Harland  was  at  first  astonished  to  hear  Curtis  talk  of  making  a thou- 
sand dollars  out  of  these  old  skulls  ; but  he  soon  caught  the  spirit  of  the 
project,  and  they  both  set  to  work  to  collect  the  heads  and  carry  them 
down  to  their  camp.  In  two  days  they  gathered  up  four  hundred  and 


348 


TRUE  AMERICAN  ENTERPRISE. 


twenty  heads,  from  which  they  selected  three  hundred  or  more  which  they 
thought  would  do  to  polish. 

Going  down  to  Fort  Yates,  they  procured  a quantity  of  glass,  a saw, 
and  some  old  knives  for  removing  the  flesh  and  superfluous  bone,  and,  with 
no  better  tools,  fell  to  work  to  prepare  the  horns. 

They  worked  at  this  job  through  July  and  the  most  of  August,  never 
once  changing  their  camp  there  on  the  Cannon  Ball  River;  and  they  did 
not  fare  very  sumptuously,  for  they  had  nothing  to  eat  save  the  dried  meat 
and  a very  scanty  supply  of  hard-tack  from  the  Fort.  They  were  even  re- 
duced to  eat  prairie  dogs  during  one  week  ; but  they  stuck  to  their  job,  and 
finished  off  three  hundred  and  four  sets  of  horns. 

It  took  four  days  to  get  this  stock  down  to  Fort  Yates.  Here  they 
sold  one  of  their  ponies,  and,  after  letting  the  other  out  for  his  keeping, 
bought  a large  bateau,  into  which  they  carefully  packed  their  horns,  and 
then  set  off  on  a long  voyage,  for  they  had  nothing  less  in  mind  than  to 
peddle  out  their  stock  of  horns  at  Omaha,  Kansas  City,  and  St.  Louis.  At 
the  former  place  they  stopped  a fortnight  ; and,  before  offering  any  of  the 
horns  for  sale,  they  purchased  a quantity  of  red  plush  and  ribbon  for  bind- 
ing and  ornamentation. 

For  some  of  the  finest  sets  they  received  six  and  seven  dollars,  and 
they  sold  none  for  less  than  three  dollars.  For  their  entire  stock  they  re- 
ceived thirteen  hundred  and  eight  dollars,  and  their  expenses  at  the  three 
cities  above-named  rose  to  a little  over  two  hundred  dollars,  so  that  they 
had  not  far  from  eleven  hundred  left  as  the  net  result  of  the  operation  in 
buffalo  horns. 

During  all  this  hard  struggle  to  start  again,  they  had  not  forgotten 
their  prospective  ranch  in  the  “ bad  lands.”  From  Kansas  City  they  wrote 
letters  home,  and,  getting  work  in  the  freight  house  in  this  latter  place,  re- 
mained there  during  the  rest  of  the  winter,  rather  more  than  paying  their 
expenses. 

Among  other  freight  which  they  saw  handled,  or  shifted,  at  Kansas 
City,  was  a great  quantity  of  old  dry  bones  which,  they  were  told,  were 
gathered  up  on  the  great  plains  to  the  northwest,  where  buffalo  and  elk 
used  to  wander  in  vast  herds,  and  were  being  shipped  East,  where  they 
were  manufactured  into  superphosphate  of  lime,  to  be  used  as  a fertilizer 
for  worn-out  soils.  They  learned  the  price  paid  per  ton  for  old  bones  at 
Kansas  City,  and  this  bit  of  information  served  them  in  good  stead  at  a 
subsequent  crisis  of  their  fortunes. 

As  soon  as  the  ice  went  out  of  the  Missouri  in  the  spring,  Harland 
and  Curtis  were  on  the  move  again.  They  took  passage  on  the  first  freight 
steamer  of  the  season  up  to  Fort  Yates,  where  they  found  their  riding  pony, 
and  they  were  able  to  buyback  the  one  they  had  sold  the  previous  season, 


IN  THE  HEART  OF  THE  BAD  LANDS. 


349 


Next  they  took  a canter  across  the  country  eastward  to  Curt’s  home  in 
Minnesota,  where  they  found  the  family  rejoiced  to  see  them  after  their 
long  absence. 

It  gave  Harland  a twinge  of  home-sickness  to  see  Curtis  warmly  wel- 
comed home  by  his  parents;  his  aunt’s  kindly  greeting,  however,  and  sev- 
eral letters  from  his  own  home,  enabled  him  to  conquer  it,  and  then  the 
two  partners  set  about  the  real  business  which  had  taken  them  that  way. 
They  had  hoped  to  purchase  a new  herd  of  cattle,  at  favorable  rates,  in 
that  section.  But  they  found  stock  very  high  in  price  and  scarce,  and,  after 
a few  days,  they  bade  farewell  to  their  relatives  and  friends  again  (this  time 
for  a long  absence,  as  it  proved),  and  set  off  across  the  country  for  the  region 
of  the  North  Platte  River,  in  Western  Nebraska,  where  are  located  many 
large  cattle  farms.  Here  they  hoped,  and,  as  it  turned  out,  were  able  to 
purchase  more  favorably. 

It  will  not  be  necessary  to  go  into  the  full  particulars  of  this  long  trip, 
or  give  the  details  of  their  new  purchase.  From  various  stock-farms  they 
bought  sixty  head  of  yearlings  and  two-year-olds;  and  during  July  and 
August  of  that  season  (1876),  they  drove  this  herd,  along  with  three  pack 
mules  and  two  milch  cows,  up  from  the  North  Platte,  through  the  western 
portion  of  the  Black  Hills  country,  to  the  head  waters  of  the  Little  Mis- 
souri River. 

Down  this  stream  they  moved,  by  easy  stages,  during  the  first  week  in 
September,  and,  after  three  or  four  days  of  “ prospecting,”  found  the  pla- 
teaux on  the  buttes  which  they  had  discovered  and  “ located  ” two  years 
before.  There  were  the  old  stone  piles  and  stakes.  Nobody  had  “ jumped  ” 
their  claim,  and  there  was  nothing  to  hinder  their  taking  possession. 

Remote  from  settlements,  and  buried  in  the  heart  of  the  “ bad  lands,” 
they  had  heard  nothing,  though  so  near,  of  the  last  and  worst  war  of  the 
Sioux,  nor  of  the  massacre  of  Custer  and  his  entire  command,  which  had 
occurred  but  a few  weeks  before  on  the  Big  Horn  River,  two  days’  march 
to  the  west  of  their  new  ranch. 

In  blissful,  yet  perilous,  ignorance  of  all  this,  and  of  the  bloodthirsty 
war  parties  that  were  moving  hither  and  thither  on  the  warpath  around 
them,  our  two  young  stockmen  set  to  work  to  build  them  a comfortable 
“ shack”  on  the  grass  slope,  nigh  to  the  little  gulch  where  the  spring  was, 
and  also  to  construct  yards  for  their  cattle.  This  done,  they  connected  the 
two  plateaux  by  a path  which  they  cut  down  by  the  sides  of  the  separating 
gully,  as  had  been  previously  planned,  and  shoveled  a passage-way  down 
the  high  bank  of  the  hither  plateau  to  the  grassy  slope  where  their  shack 
and  yards  were. 

In  November  came  rough  weather ; there  was  snow  but  once,  however, 
which  remained  for  more  than  twelve  hours,  and,  until  the  20th  of  Decern- 


350 


PLUCK  AND  PERSEVERANCE. 


ber,  the  cattle  got  their  living  on  the  two  plateaux.  On  that  day  there 
came  a storm,  which  lasted  a week,  and  from  this  time  forward  they  occa- 
sionally fed  hay  to  their  stock. 

From  December  till  late  in  February,  the  weather  was  so  uncom- 
fortably cold  that  our  two  settlers  (as  we  may  now  call  them)  abandoned 
their  shack  and  constructed  for  themselves  a singular  house. 

The  sides  of  the  buttes  are  often  of  a soft,  half-formed  sandstone; 
and  in  this,  on  the  south  side  of  the  bank  above  their  shack,  they  cut  a 
cave,  with  an  old  ax,  having  an  entrance-way,  or  mouth,  five  or  six  feet  in 
length,  opening  into  a room  some  ten  feet  square,  back  in  the  bank.  Here 
they  had  a fireplace,  with  a flue  leading  up  through  the  strata  of  the  roof. 
For  fuel  they  had  only  to  dig  out  the  lignite  coal  from  the  side  of  the 
butte,  sixty  or  seventy  feet  below,  and  bring  it  up  in  a basket  to  their 
cave-house. 

This  was  as  good  as  having  a dry  wood-pile  close  at  one’s  door;  so 
that,  on  the  whole,  they  managed  to  live  quite  comfortably.  Game  was 
plentiful,  particularly  black-tail  deer;  and  they  had  brought  with  them  an 
abundant  supply  of  cartridges  for  their  two  Winchester  rifles.  During 
storms  deer  frequently  joined  their  cattle.  They  had,  they  told  me,  two 
young  deer  as  pets,  which  had  been  driven  into  the  yard  along  with  a herd 
of  the  yearlings ; and  these  became  so  tame  that  they  would  come  into 
the  shack  of  their  own  accord  and  eat  dainties  from  the  hand. 

Their  cattle  lost  flesh  somewhat  during  the  winter;  only  one  died  out- 
right, however;  but  the  snow  and  the  severity  of  the  season  proved  to  the 
boys  the  necessity  of  cutting  a liberal  supply  of  hay,  and  also  of  having 
for  their  cattle  an  occasional  foddering  of  green  vegetables,  either  turnips 
and  beets,  or  else  potatoes.  They  determined  to  cultivate  a few  acres  in 
these  crops  every  season,  and  also  a plat  of  sweet  corn,  melons,  tomatoes, 
etc.,  for  their  own  use. 

Early  in  April,  therefore,  Curtis  set  off  to  ride  to  Deadwood,  in  the 
Black  Hills  country,  to  purchase  a stock  of  seeds  for  planting.  He  took 
one  of  the  pack-mules  along  with  him,  and  assured  Harland,  who  remained 
in  charge  of  the  shack,  that  he  should  be  back  in  four  days,  if  the  weather 
held  bright. 

Up  to  this  time  they  had  not  seen  a single  redskin,  and  had  little  fear 
of  an  attack,  believing  that  there  had  been  no  trouble  of  late  by  the 
Sioux. 

Curtis  had  been  gone  two  days,  I think  they  said,  when  Harland — who 
had  just  driven  the  cattle  up  from  the  yards  to  the  plateau,  and  was  dis- 
tributing to  them  the  last  few  handfuls  of  salt  which  they  had  in  store — 
was  startled  by  hearing  a shout. 

It  seemed  to  come  from  across  the  cafton,  in  the  direction  of  the  high 


TREACHEROUS  NEIGHBORS. 


351 


butte  to  the  northward.  He  turned  to  look  and  saw  a mounted  party  over 
there — half  a mile  away,  perhaps — sitting  on  ponies.  That  they  were  In- 
dians he  knew  by  their  bright-colored  blankets  and  trappings.  They  sat 
looking  toward  him. 

Presently  they  shouted  again,  as  if  hailing  him.  Harland  was  alarmed 
somewhat,  yet  he  did  not  think  they  were  really  hostile,  and  stood  watching 
them  without  answering  their  hail. 

Soon  the  party  started  forward,  and  immediately  our  solitary  pioneer 
saw  that  they  were  descending  the  butte  with  the  evident  intention  of 
coming  round  to  the  shack.  His  carbine  was  at  the  cabin,  and  he  at  once 
ran  down  there,  loaded  it,  and  put  a box  of  cartridges  in  his  pocket.  This 
done,  he  stepped  outside  the  door  and  watched  the  party — there  were 
eleven  or  twelve  of  them — come  up  the  valley.  He  felt  afraid  of  them. 
Still  he  thought  they  might  be  friendly,  and  that  his  best  way  was  to  make 
no  show  of  alarm.  They  came  up  on  the  farther  side  of  the  gulch  from 
where  the  shack  stood,  and  the  nearer  they  came  the  less  Harland  liked 
the  looks  of  them,  for  they  were  all  fully  armed,  feathered,  and  had  on  their 
war-paint. 

When  they  had  got  within  two  hundred  yards,  or  thereabout,  three 
of  them  dismounted  and  came  along  the  opposite  bank  of  the  gulch,  on 
foot,  while  the  rest  sat  on  their  ponies. 

When  these  three  had  come  off  opposite,  being  now  fifty  yards,  or 
less,  from  where  Harland  stood,  one  of  them  called  out,  “ Hola,  broder! 
hola,  broder ! ” 

Harland  said,  “ Hallo,  brother!  What  do  you  want?” 

They  laughed.  Then  one  of  them  said,  “ Good-day,  Good-by  ! All 
right,  Yank-Doodle,”  and  other  English  phrases. 

Harland  could  not  help  laughing  to  hear  them  ; and  since  they  seemed 
so  merry,  he  felt  less  alarmed,  and  answered,  “All  right;  nice  day,  Yank- 
Doodle.” 

The  foremost  redskin  then  made  motions  for  him  to  come  across  the 
gulch  where  they  were — still  laughing.  Harland  shook  his  head.  The 
savage  then  pointed  up  toward  the  cattle  and  held  up  three  fingers.  In 
response  to  this,  our  friend  held  up  one  finger,  thinking  he  would  give  them 
one  steer  to  keep  on  good  terms  with  so  formidable  a party. 

At  this  they  roared  with  laughter  again. 

But  they  were  merely  fooling  with  him.  For  almost  at  the  same  mo- 
ment— finding  probably  that  they  could  not  easily  lure  him  across — the 
two  standing  behind  the  foremost  shot  at  him  ; so  quickly  that  the  first 
intimation  which  he  had  of  their  treacherous  purpose  was  the  crash  of  the 
balls  through  the  shack  door  beside  him. 

Almost  simultaneously  with  the  two  shots  fired  by  the  treacherous  red- 


352 


DRIVEN  INTO  A “HOLE.” 


skins  there  rang  in  Harland  Davis’s  ears  that  terrific  yell — new  to  him  till 
that  moment — the  Sioux  war-whoop. 

’Twas  all  so  sudden — the  shots,  the  yells — that  a cold  thrill  of  horror 
filled  Harland’s  heart ; rather  from  instinct  than  design,  he  raised  his  car- 
bine, seeing  which  the  three  Indians  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  gulch 
jumped  down  the  steep  bank  into  it,  among  the  cedar  and  thorn  bushes. 
At  the  same  instant  a third  bullet  whizzed  past  his  face,  fired  from  the 
party  on  ponies  further  down  the  ravine. 

Harland  did  not  stop  to  fight.  He  ran.  Terror,  the  instinct  of  self- 
preservation,  and  visions  of  a horrible  death  awaiting  him,  overcame  all 
considerations  of  valor.  With  that  third  ball,  he  cut  round  the  corner  of 
the  shack  and  ran,  under  cover  of  it,  back  up  the  slope  toward  the  plateau  ; 
for  he  had  no  other  line  of  retreat.  He  had  not  fired  once  as  yet,  but 
hung  on  to  his  rifle. 

The  redskins  on  the  ponies  below  saw  him  running.  They  shouted 
and  fired  half  a dozen  shots,  which  flew  past  the  young  settler's  head  and 
struck  into  the  hillside  in  front  of  him  with  a spitefulness  not  calculated  to 
make  him  stop. 

His  first  thought  was  to  gain  the  plateau  above,  and  thence  make  his 
escape,  if  possible,  into  the  ravine  on  the  other  side  of  it  ; but,  even  as  he 
ran,  he  reflected  that  there  were  no  bushes  or  cover  of  any  sort  over  there  in 
which  he  could  hide  or  steal  away  through  it.  Turning  for  an  instant  at  the 
foot  of  the  steep  path  up  the  bank,  he  saw  that  half  a dozen  of  the  Indians 
had  put  their  ponies  at  a gallop,  and  were  spurring  down  the  hillside,  to 
come  round  into  that  very  ravine  to  head  him  off. 

His  heart  gave  a flutter  and  sank.  If  only  he  had  the  saddle  on  his 
own  trusty  pony,  he  felt  that  he  would  stand  some  chance  against  them; 
but  there  was  no  time  for  this,  no  time  for  anything  ! His  eyes  fell  on  the 
hole  in  the  sandstone  bank  which  had  served  as  an  entrance  to  their  cave- 
house  during  the  winter. 

“ They  couldn’t  get  me  out  of  there,”  he  thought,  “ unless  they  smoked 
me  out.”  Meantime  the  three  redskins,  who  had  jumped  into  the  gulch, 
had  climbed  up  the  bank  to  the  shack,  fifty  or  sixty  rods  below.  Catching 
sight  of  him,  they  fired  once,  and  then  started  after  him,  up  the 
slope. 

Seeing  that  he  must  be  surrounded,  Harland  hesitated  no  longer  but 
crawled  into  the  cave-house,  thinking  that  he  might  as  well  fight  for  his  life 
there  as  be  winged  on  the  run.  This  “dig-out,”  as  described  before,  had 
been  cut  with  an  ax  in  the  steep,  soft  sandstone  side  of  the  butte,  and 
consisted  of  a cave-room  some  ten  feet  square,  into  which  an  empty  hole, 
about  five  feet  in  length,  led  from  the  outside. 

Besides  this  entrance-hole,  they  had  cut  a little  window-hole  about  a foot 


TURNING  FOR  AN  INSTANT  AT  THE  FOOT  OF  THE  BANK. 


A FORTUNATE  ESCAPE.  355 

square.  Above  these  holes  the  bank  rose  almost  perpendicularly  twelve  or 
fifteen  feet,  and  thence  sloped  up  to  the  level  of  the  plateau  overhead. 

Poking  the  barrel  of  his  rifle  out  at  the  window-hole,  our  young  pioneer, 
like  a badger  in  his  burrow,  waited  for  his  foes,  determined,  since  they 
would  have  it  so,  to  make  as  good  a fight  as  he  could.  He  had  a good 
weapon,  with  seven  shots  at  command  for  instant  use  without  reloading. 

But  the  savages,  who  had  now  got  up  within  fifteen  or  twenty  rods,  no 
sooner  saw  the  muzzle  of  the  carbine  in  the  hole,  than  they  ran  sidewise  and 
began  dancing  about  to  prevent  him  from  getting  aim.  Still  dancing  and 
dodging,  they  sheered  off  to  the  right,  and  got  out  of  range  immediately. 

Our  friend  did  not  fire  ; nor,  indeed,  did  he  like  to  kill  any  of  them  unless 
they  came  to  close  quarters,  knowing  if  he  took  the  life  of  one  or  more 
of  the  party,  the  others  would  make  the  greater  efforts  to  get  him  for 
revenge’s  sake. 

This  was  no  doubt  the  wisest  course.  As  he  had  not  fired  at  them,  the 
redskins,  perhaps,  thought  it  not  worth  the  while  to  storm  him  in  his 
retreat — seeing  that  he  had  a pretty  strong  place.  He  saw  three  or  four  of 
them  overhauling  the  shack  and  carrying  off  blankets;  and  in  the  course  of 
an  hour  or  two  he  heard  some  of  them  on  the  top  of  the  bank  over  the 
cave-house  ; none  of  them  came  round  in  sight,  however. 

After  a time  he  heard  them  driving  and  shouting  to  the  cattle.  This 
was  the  hardest  thing  of  all  to  bear;  and  he  was  at  times  half-tempted 
into  rushing  out  and  emptying  his  carbine  among  them. 

By  noon  the  marauding  party  had  probably  left  the  place,  but,  fear- 
ing they  might  be  lying  in  wait,  Harland  did  not  venture  out  during  the 
entire  afternoon,  nor,  indeed,  till  as  late  as  nine  o’clock  in  the  evening. 
Very  cautiously,  then,  he  poked  his  head  forth  from  the  hole,  and,  finding 
that  all  was  quiet,  went  down  to  the  shack  and  got  something  to  eat.  Not 
daring  tq  sleep  in  the  cabin,  he  took  a blanket  and  went  back  to  the  cave- 
house,  where  he  passed  the  night. 

In  the  morning,  seeing  no  further  signs  of  the  redskins,  he  went  up 
the  plateau  to  look  after  the  stock.  Not  an  animal  was  in  sight!  He 
walked  round  the  edges  of  the  steep  banks,  and,  for  a time,  concluded 
that  the  savages  had  made  a clean  sweep  of  their  whole  herd. 

Presently,  however,  he  came  to  a place  where,  by  the  tracks,  he  saw 
that  some  of  their  cattle,  frightened  by  the  Indians,  had  leaped  down  the 
high  clay  bank.  Letting  himself  down,  he  found  two  of  the  steers  lying 
with  broken  legs  nearly  two  hundred  feet  below.  And  at  a distance  down 
the  ravine,  at  a water-hole,  he  discovered  twenty-three  of  the  yearlings  and 
two-year-olds.  Apparently  the  Indians  had  not  thought  it  worth  the 
trouble  to  get  them  out  of  the  ravine. 

Thankful  to  have  recovered  even  a fraction  of  their  herd,  Harland 


356 


WILL  IT  PAY? 


drove  the  animals  round  to  the  side  next  the  shack.  He  then  made  prep- 
arations for  getting  away  from  the  place  as  soon  as  possible,  fearing 
every  hour  that  the  Sioux  would  pay  him  another  visit. 

His  pony  and  both  the  pack-mules  had  been  captured  along  with  the 
cattle.  He  could  take  but  little  of  their  property  at  the  shack.  So  he 
carried  some  of  the  most  valuable  things  up  to  the  cave-house,  and  then 
blocked  up  the  entrance  to  it  with  stones  and  clay.  By  noon  he  was 
ready  for  a start  off,  and,  in  fact,  had  started  down  the  ravine,  when  he 
was  both  surprised  and  gladdened  to  see  Curtis  riding  back — without  the 
pack-mule. 

Each  had  uncomfortable  news  for  the  other. 

Curtis  had  been  waylaid  and  shot  at  by  redskins  ten  or  twelve  miles 
out  of  Deadwood,  and  had  only  escaped  by  hard  riding.  Feeling  sure 
there  had  been  a serious  Indian  outbreak,  he  made  no  attempt  to  reach 
the  town,  but  came  back  to  their  ranch  as  fast  as  he  could  ride.  Both  felt 
themselves  fortunate  to  see  each  other’s  faces  again. 

They  set  off  that  night  and  drove  the  remainder  of  their  herd  out 
toward  Fort  Yates  and  the  Missouri  River,  along  their  old  trail  into  the 
“bad  lands”  in  1874.  And,  from  what  they  learned  of  Sitting  Bull  and 
the  state  of  the  country  at  the  Fort,  where  they  arrived  five  days  later, 
they  concluded  that  they  had  been  lucky  to  get  away  as  easily  as  they 
did. 

Our  two  friends  felt  rather  “ blue.”  Thus  far  the  tide  of  fortune  had 
been  against  them.  In  three  years  they  had  made  nothing,  but  rather  lost 
money.  Judging  that,  in  the  present  condition  of  the  the  “Indian  Ques- 
tion,” stock-raising  west  of  the  Missouri  was  risky  business,  they  sold  out 
what  cattle  they  had  left  to  a Dakota  stockman  east  of  the  river,  and  then 
began  to  cast  about  for  some  new  enterprise  to  redeem  their  steadily  wan- 
ing fortunes.  For  after  three  yea.rs  of  toil,  and  often  peril,  they  found 
themselves  in  possession  of  less  than  three  hundred  dollars . They  were 
none  the  less  determined  not  to  go  home  with  that  ugly  word  failure 
written  across  their  faces. 

It  was  then  that  the  item  of  information  about  old  dry  bones , picked 
up  in  Kansas  City  almost  two  years  before,  rose  to  the  surface  of  their 
thoughts.  The  question  was  not,  “ Do  we  like  this  business?”  but,  “ Is 
there  any  money  for  us  to  be  got  out  of  it?  ” In  their  movements  about 
the  country  to  the  west  of  the  Missouri,  they  had  seen  and  traversed  many 
old  buffalo  ranges  where  the  turf  was  fairly  paved  and  packed  with  bones. 
In  fact,  the  entire  country  was  once  one  great  buffalo  range,  as  their  old 
“ paths  ” and  “wallows,”  seen  everywhere  on  the  Dakota  prairies,  abun- 
dantly testify. 

The  price  paid  at  Kansas  City  for  these  old  bones  was  then,  and  is 


A DIFFICULT  PROBLEM. 


357 


now,  fifty  cents  per  hundredweight,  or  ten  dollars  per  ton,  delivered. 
Thence  they  are  shipped  via  St.  Louis  to  Baltimore,  Philadelphia,  and 
other  points  east,  to  be  manufactured  into  superphosphate  of  lime,  which 
is  extensively  sold  to  farmers  as  a fertilizer  for  impoverished  soils. 

During  the  month  of  June  that  season,  our  two  friends  “ prospected  ” 
for  bones  at  various  points  up  and  down  the  river.  They  even  went  as  far 
north  as  the  Knife  River. 

To  test  the  quantity  on 
the  ground,  they  set  to 
work  and  collected  piles 
of  bones  in  many  places, 
to  see  how  many  they 
could  get  on  a given  piece 
of  ground — ait  acre,  for 
example — and  also  how 
long  it  would  take  a man 
to  pick  up  a ton.  The  re- 
sult of  the  month’s  ex- 
plorations convinced  them 
that  there  was  very  good 
pay  in  the  business — if 
they  were  willing  to  work 
hard. 

How  to  transport  the 
bones  to  market  at  least 
cost  was  the  next  ques- 
tion; and  during  July, 

Curtis  made  a trip  to  St. 

Louis,  where  he  made  in- 

“ STILL  DANCING  AND  DODGING  THEY  SHEERED  OFF.” 

quiries,  and  at  length  con- 
cluded an  arrangement  for  delivering  bones  on  the  bank  of  the  Missouri, 
to  be  shipped  down  the  river,  either  on  steamboats  or  in  barges  or  flat- 
boats,  which  could  be  towed  up  for  the  purpose.  An  immense  pile  of  the 
bones — sixty  or  seventy  tons — could  be  loaded  upon  one  of  these  barges. 
By  the  arrangement  which  Curtis  concluded,  they  would  receive  fifty- 
eight  cents  per  hundredweight  for  bones  loaded  on  the  barge  ready  to  go 
down  the  river. 

On  his  return  they  invested  their  three  hundred  dollars,  or  the  most 
of  it,  in  a “ bone  team,”  and  began  the  business  of  getting  bones  to  the 
river-bank  from  out  the  back  country  to  the  westward,  first  from  a tract  to 
the  south  of  the  Morran,  or  Owl  River,  and  afterwards  at  many  other 
points.  During  this  first  season,  they  prosecuted  the  business  wholly  by 


358 


THE  REWARD  OF  PERSEVERANCE. 


their  own  hands,  having  but  one  team,  consisting  of  a large  wagon  and 
four  mules.  If  I remember  aright,  they  said  that  they  drew  in  and  loaded 
for  shipping  one  hundred  and  forty  (odd)  tons  that  year.  It  is  easy  to 
see  that  they  must  have  labored  patiently  and  well.  Many  a New  Eng- 
land farmer’s  crop  of  corn  was  the  heavier  for  their  hard  work  on  the  banks 
of  the  Upper  Missouri  that  season. 

The  following  year,  they  enlarged  their  business,  buying  four  new 
teams  and  hiring  five  men  as  drivers.  They  had  five  teams  now,  but 
worked  none  the  less  steadily  with  their  own  hands ; for  they  collected 
and  piled  the  bones  in  ricks,  out  in  the  back  country,  to  keep  these 
five  teams  steadily  employed  hauling  loads  to  the  river.  The  writer  was 
not  informed  how  much  they  cleared  for  the  second  year  ; but  I judge  that 
they  made  a good  thing  of  it,  for  they  had  eleven  teams  employed  the 
next  year,  at  various  points,  both  above  and  below  the  Grand  River 
Agency. 

Not  to  dwell  on  this  bone  business  (which,  if  not  the  pleasantest  vo- 
cation in  the  world,  is  at  least  an  honest  and  a useful  one),  it  may  be 
stated  that  our  two  young  friends  continued  in  it  quite  extensively  till  the 
spring  of  1 88 1 . By  that  time  they  had,  as  Curtis  expressed  it,  “got  the 
old  ranges  along  the  river  pretty  well  cleaned  of  bones.” 

This  was,  as  the  reader  will  recollect,  the  year  of  the  “ great  flood  ” on 
the  Missouri.  Our  friends  had  two  barge-loads  of  bones  frozen  in  up  the 
river,  the  fall  before.  The  flood  washed  them  both  away  along  with  a 
vast  floe  of  ice  in  which  they  lay  imbedded.  One  capsized,  or  was  crushed 
and  sank.  The  other  one  they  heard  of,  in  May,  at  a distance  of  over  a 
hundred  miles  below.  Afterward  they  found  that  it  had  “ sot  down  on  ” a 
settler’s  log-house  upon  the  bottoms.  Apparently  it  had  stranded,  at 
high  water,  on  the  top  of  the  house ; and  as  the  flood  abated,  it  settled 
upon  the  cabin,  crushing  it  to  pieces. 

Curtis  and  Harland  were  both  very  active  in  saving  property,  cattle, 
and  even  human  lives,  during  those  weeks  of  the  uncivilized  Missouri’s 
furious  ravages.  An  account  of  their  adventures  at  that  time  would  fill  an 
entire  chapter,  had  I the  space  for  it.  One  had  not  to  look  far  for  a hero 
on  the  Upper  Missouri  that  spring.  It  was  a time  of  common  danger  and 
of  many  wonderfully  brave  and  unselfish  deeds,  which  ought  not  to  be  left 
unrecorded  in  the  history  of  Dakota  and  Nebraska. 

As  to  their  profits  during  the  four  years  our  young  friends  were  in 
the  bone  business,  the  writer  is  not  exactly  informed.  When  men  make  a 
good  thing  they  are  often  modest,  or  at  least  not  anxious  to  herald  it 
to  everybody.  But  some  idea  of  it  will  be  gathered  from  the  fact  that, 
early  in  the  season  of  i88i,they  bought  outright  five  hundred  head  of 
young  cattle  to  recommence  the  business  of  stock-raising.  For  during  all 


THE  MORAL  OF  IT  ALL. 


359 


this  time,  they  had  never  lost  sight  of  this  first  object  which  had  led  them 
West ; still  they  saw  money  in  it,  and  they  were  now  able  to  begin  on  a 
larger  scale.  Later  that  same  year  they  brought  three  hundred  head  more, 
and  have  made  some  purchases  since. 

This  brings  us  down  to  the  present  time.  When  the  writer  made  their 
acquaintance,  they  were  pasturing  their  cattle  down  to  the  southwest  of 
Sentinel  Butte,  near  the  boundary  of  Montana,  and  employed  ten  “ cow- 
boys ” ; their  herds  at  present  number  about  two  thousand  head,  which 
are  probably  worth  over  forty  thousand  dollars.  This  estimate  does  not 
include  ponies  and  much  other  property. 

It  must  certainly  be  conceded  that  for  young  men,  twenty-six  and 
twenty-seven  years  old,  they  have  done  fairly  well.  The  hardships  they 
have  endured  seem  not  to  have  told  severely  on  them  physically  ; they 
looked  hale  and  hearty. 

From  this  plain  narrative,  the  reader  will  not,  I think,  find  it  difficult 
to  draw  his  own  conclusions  and  frame  his  own  moral.  For  it  is  easily 
framed,  and,  if  I mistake  not,  will  run  as  follows: 

The  Far  West  is  a good  place  for  young  men  of  courage  and  persever- 
ance. Shirks  and  weaklings  had  better  stay  at  home. 


CHAPTER  XXXIX. 


CAMPAIGN  OF  GENERALS  TERRY  AND  CROOK  AGAINST  SITTING  BULL — THE 
CUSTER  MASSACRE — DEFEAT  OF  SITTING  BULL  BY  GENERAL  MILFS 
— DEFEAT  AND  DEATH  OF  CRAZY  HORSE — CHIEF  JOSEPH  AND  HIS 
WONDERFUL  RETREAT  AND  DEFENSE— DEATH  OF  MAJOR  THORN- 
BURGH AND  AGENT  MEEKER. 

BY  the  treaty  of  1867,  the  Sioux  agreed  to  give  up  all  the  territory  south 
of  the  Niobrara  River,  west  of  the  one  hundred  and  fourth  meridian 
and  north  of  the  forty-sixth  parallel  of  latitude.  They  promised  to  retire 
to  a large  reservation  in  southwestern  Dakota,  before  the  first  of  January, 
1876. 

Meanwhile,  as  stated,  gold  was  discovered  among  the  Black  Hills, 
most  of  which  by  treaty  belonged  to  the  Sioux  reservation.  Our  authori- 
ties warned  the  emigrants  to  keep  away,  but  they  flocked  thither,  and 
soon  thousands  of  desperate  men  were  engaged  in  the  scramble  for  the 
precious  metal. 

By  way  of  retaliation,  the  Sioux  left  their  reservation  and  beg^n  burn- 
ing houses,  stealing  horses,  and  killing  settlers  in  Wyoming  and  Montana. 
Generals  Terry  apd  Crook,  with  a strong  force  of  regulars,  marched  into 
the  mountainous  country  of  the  Upper  Yellowstone  and  several  thousand 
warriors  under  Sitting  Bull  were  driven  back  toward  the  Big  Horn  Moun- 
tains and  the  river. 

Generals  Custer  and  Reno  rode  forward  with  the  Seventh  Cavalry  to 
locate  the  hostiles  and  found  them  encamped  in  a large  village  extending 
nearly  three  miles  along  the  left  bank  of  the  Little  Big  Horn  River. 
General  Custer,  without  waiting  for  support,  detached  General  Reno  with 
three  companies  to  assail  the  rear  of  the  Indian  village,  while,  with  his 
usual  dash  and  daring,  he  charged  the  savages  in  front. 

The  particulars  of  what  followed  can  never  be  known,  since  Custer 
and  everyone  of  his  command  were  killed.  As  in  the  case  of  the  fall  of 
the  Alamo,  in  1836,  there  was  no  messenger  of  defeat.  The  meager  de- 
tails of  the  awful  slaughter  have  been  obtained  from  some  of  the  Indians 
who  took  part. 

On  the  25th  of  June,  1886,  at  the  tenth  anniversary  of  the  massacre, 
the  great  Sioux  chief  Gall  went  over  the  field,  and,  with  considerable  emo- 
tion, described  how  Custer  and  his  command  were  annihilated.  He  said: 
“We  saw  soldiers  early  in  the  morning  crossing  the  divide.  When 


360 


custer’s  last  fight 


CHIEF  GALL’S  ACCOUNT  OF  THE  MASSACRE. 


363 


Reno  and  Custer  separated,  we  watched  them  until  they  came  down  into 
the  valley.  The  cry  was  raised  that  the  white  soldiers  were  coming  and 
orders  were  given  for  the  village  to  move.  Reno  swept  down  so  rapidly 
upon  the  upper  end  that  the  Indians  were  forced  to  fight.  Sitting  Bull 
and  I were  at  the  point  where  Reno  attacked.  Sitting  Bull  was  the  big 
medicine  man.  The  women  and  children  were  hastily  moved  down  tne 
stream  where  the  Cheyennes  were  encamped.  The  Sioux  attacked  Reno 
and  the  Cheyennes  Custer,  and  then  all  became  mixed  up.  The  women 
and  children  caught  horses  for  the  bucks  to  mount,  and  the  bucks  mounted 
and  charged  back  on  Reno,  checked  him  and  drove  him  into  the  timber. 
The  soldiers  tied  their  horses  to  trees,  came  out  and  fought  on  foot.  As 
soon  as  Reno  was  beaten  and  driven  back  across  the  river,  the  whole  force 
turned  on  Custer,  and  fought  him  until  they  had  destroyed  him.  Custer 
did  not  reach  the  river,  but  was  met  about  half-way  up  the  ravine  now 
called  Reno  Creek.  They  fought  the  soldiers  and  beat  them  back  step  by 
step  until  all  were  killed. 

“The  Indians  ran  out  of  ammunition  and  then  used  arrows.  They 
fired  from  behind  their  horses.  The  soldiers  got  their  shells  stuck  in  their 
guns  and  had  to  throw  them  away.  Then  they  fought  with  pistols.  The 
Indians  were  in  couples  behind  and  in  front  of  Custer,  as  he  moved  up  the 
ridge,  and  were  as  many  as  the  grass  on  the  plains.  The  first  two  com- 
panies [Keogh’s  and  Calhoun’s]  dismounted  and  fought  on  foot.  They 
never  broke,  but  retired  step  by  step  until  forced  back  to  the  ridge,  upon 
which  all  finally  died.  They  were  shot  down  in  a line  where  they  stood. 
Keogh’s  company  rallied  and  were  all  killed  in  a bunch.  [This  was  evi- 
dently true,  as  thirty-eight  bodies  of  Keogh’s  troopers  were  found  piled  in  a 
heap].  The  warriors  directed  a special  fire  against  the  troopers  who  held 
the  horses,  and  as  soon  as  a holder  was  killed,  by  waving  blankets  and 
great  shouting,  the  horses  were  stampeded,  which  made  it  impossible  for 
the  soldiers  to  escape. 

“ The  soldiers  fought  desperately  and  never  surrendered.  They  fought 
standing  along  in  line  on  the  right.  As  fast  as  the  men  fell,  the  horses 
were  herded  and  driven  toward  the  squaws  and  old  men,  who  gathered 
them  up.  When  Reno  attempted  to  find  Custer  by  throwing  out  a 
skirmish  line,  Custer  and  all  who  were  with  him  were  dead.  When  the 
skirmishers  reached  a high  point  overlooking  Custer’s  field,  the  Indians 
were  galloping  around  and  over  the  wounded,  dying,  and  dead,  popping 
bullets  and  arrows  into  them. 

“ When  Reno  made  his  attack  at  the  upper  end,  he  killed  my  two 
squaws  and  three  children,  which  made  my  heart  bad.  I then  fought  with 
hatchet  [meaning  that  he  mutilated  the  soldiers].  The  soldiers  ran.  out  of 
ammunition- early  in  the  day.  Their  supplies  of  cartridges  were  in  the 


3^4 


THE  ONLY  SURVIVOR  OF  THE  MASSACRE. 


saddle  pockets  of  their  stampeded  horses.  When  their  ammunition  was  gone, 
the  Indians  killed  the  soldiers  with  hatchets ; a lot  of  horses  ran  away  and 
jumped  into  the  river,  but  were  caught  by  squaws.  Only  forty-three 
Indians  were  killed  altogether,  but  a great  many  wounded  ones  came  across 
the  river  and  died  in  the  bushes. 

“We  had  Ogallalas,  Minnconjous,  Brule,  Teton,  Uncapapa,  Sioux, 
Cheyenne,  Arapahoe,  and  Gros  Ventre.  When  the  big  dust  came  in  the 
dr,  down  the  river  [meaning  Terry  and  Gibbon],  we  struck  our  lodges  and 
vent  up  a creek  toward  the  White  Mountains.  The  Big  Horn  ranges  were 
covered  with  snow.  We  waited  there  four  days,  and  then  went  over  to  the 
Wolf  Mountains.” 

As  intimated  inThis  account,  by  one  of  the  most  active  participants, 
General  Reno,  who  had  been  engaged  with  the  Sioux  at  the  lower  end  of 
the  encampment,  held  his  position  on  the  bluffs  of  the  Little  Big  Horn,  until 
General  Gibbon  arrived  with  re-enforcements  and  saved  what  was  left. 

In  this  shocking  disaster,  fifteen  officers  and  two  hundred  and  thirty- 
two  men  were  annihilated.  With  Custer  fell  two  brothers  and  a nephew. 

It  has  been  stated  that  the  Custer  massacre  had  no  survivor,  but  there 
was  one; — Comanche,  the  horse  of  Captain  Keogh,  a relative  of  General  Cus- 
ter. He  was  found  about  a day’s  journey  from  the  scene  of  the  battle,  and 
the  soldiers,  who  recognized  the  well-known  horse  of  Captain  Keogh,  never 
expected  that  they  could  get  him  back  to  camp  alive,  for  he  had  seven  bad 
wounds  and  was  very  weak  from  loss  of  blood.  With  good  treatment,  how- 
ever, he  fully  recovered. 

Special  provision  was  made  for  the  care  and  support  of  Comanche  at  Fort 
Riley.  Once  in  a while,  when  the  cavalry  troops  were  on  inspection,  Co- 
manche was  led  out,  saddled  and  bridled,  but  no  one  ever  sat  in  his  saddle 
after  the  battle  of  the  Little  Big  Horn. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  Custer’s  command  used  the  dead  bodies  of 
their  horses  killed  by  the  shower  of  Indian  bullets  as  a barricade,  as  far  as 
possible.  All  the  horses  were  saddled,  as  the  troop  had  ridden  into  the 
valley  and  attacked  the  Sioux  camp : and,  as  Comanche  was  found  stripped 
of  his  accouterments,  it  has  always  been  supposed  that  his  saddle  and  bridle 
were  taken  by  the  victorious  Indians,  who,  believing  that  he  would  die  of  his 
wounds,  turned  him  loose.  The  body  of  every  other  horse  that  carried  the 
brave  cavalry  into  battle  on  that  fateful  morning  was  found  among  the 
heaps  of  the  slain  soldiers. 

Comanche  was  one  of  the  original  mounts  of  the  Seventh  Cavalry,  which 
regiment  was  organized  in  1866,  and  had  been  in  almost  every  battle  with 
the  Indian  service.  After  the  famous  massacre,  he  was  taken  in  charge  by 
Captain  Rowlan  and  sent  to  Fort  Riley,  where  for  fourteen  years  he  was 
not  subject  to  bridle  and  was  in  charge  of  the  Seventh  Cavalry.  He 


A MESSAGE  FROM  SITTING  BULL. 


3 67 


received  the  kindest  care  and  died  from  old  age,  Novembei  6,  1891.  He 
was  forty-five  years  old.  His  skin  was  stuffed  and  mounted  and  placed  in 
the  museum  of  the  Kansas  State  University,  to  be  sent  for  exhibition  to 
the  World’s  Fair  in  Chicago. 

A somewhat  similar  incident  occurred  during  the  Minnesota  outbreaks 
in  1862.  At  Birch  Coolie,  it  will  be  remembered,  everyone  of  the  horses, 
with  a single  exception,  was  killed.  This  exception  was  an  eight-year-old 
bay  mare,  owned  by  a Hennepin  county  farmer.  Not  a bullet  had  touched 
her.  Instinct  seemed  to  have  told  her  to  “ lie  low.”  She  served  through 
the  campaign,  and,  when  peace  returned,  resumed  her  duty  at  the  plow 
on  her  owner’s  farm. 

Upon  the  arrival  of  news  of  the  Custer  massacre  at  Fort  Leavenworth, 
Kansas,  General  Miles  and  the  Fifth  Infantry  were  ordered  to  proceed  to 
the  scene  of  hostilities,  and  form  part  of  the  large  command  already  there. 
The  orders  were  obeyed  and  the  autumn  passed  without  any  important 
military  movement. 

General  Miles  became  satisfied  in  October  that  a large  number  of 
hostiles  were  near  him,  and,  because  of  the  delay  in  the  arrival  of  a supply 
train,  expected  from  the  cantonment  of  Glendive,  he  marched  down  the  left 
bank  of  the  Yellowstone  with  the  Fifth  Infantry.  Some  days  later  he  met 
the  train  under  the  escort  of  a battalion  of  the  Twenty-second  Infantry. 
The  train  had  been  obliged  to  return  to  Glendive,  because  of  the  large 
number  of  Indians,  and  the  teamsters  were  so  panic  stricken  that  their 
were  places  filled  by  soldiers.  On  his  second  advance,  and  two  days 
before  General  Miles  was  met,  an  Indian  runner  left  the  following  note  on 
a hill  top : 

“ Yellowstone. 

“I  want  to  know  what  you  are  doing  traveling  on  this  road.  You 
scare  all  the  buffalo  away.  I want  to  hunt  in  this  place.  I want  you  to 
turn  back  from  here.  If  you  don’t  I will  fight  you  again.  I want  you  to 
leave  what  you  have  got  here  and  turn  back  from  here. 

“ I am  your  friend, 

“Sitting  Bull. 

“ I mean  all  the  rations  you  have  got  and  some  powder.  Wish  you 
would  write  as  soon  as  you  can.” 

General  Miles  started  after  Sitting  Bull  and  overtook  him  near  the 
head  of  Cedar  Creek,  one  of  the  tributaries  of  the  Yellowstone.  They  met 
under  a flag  of  truce  and  had  a sharp  interview.  Sitting  Bull  tried  to 
entrap  Miles,  but  the  latter  was  too  prudent  and  told  him  that  he  would 
drive  him  out  of  the  country  or  Sitting  Bull  would  drive  him  out. 

Th'e  angry  chief  hurried  back  to  his  lines,  and,  true  to  his  threat, 
General  Miles  attacked  the  Indians,  whose  force  was  much  more  numerous 


368 


THE  FLIGHT  OF  SITTING  BULL. 


than  his  own,  and  drove  them  back  so  precipitately  that  many  of  their 
dead  were  left  on  the  field.  The  chase  was  kept  up  for  nearly  fifty  miles, 
when  the  Sioux  abandoned  everything,  even  their  ponies,  in  their  desperate 
efforts  to  save  themselves. 

In  the  latter  part  of  October,  two  thousand  Indians  and  four  hundred 
lodges  surrendered  to  General  Miles,  and  five  chiefs  were  taken  as  hostages 
for  the  carrying  out  by  the  Indians  of  the  terms  of  surrender,  which  was 
that  they  should  go  to  their  various  agencies.  During  the  pursuit,  Sitting 
Bull  and  a few  followers  broke  away  from  the  rest  and  escaped  northward, 
where  he  was  afterward  joined  by  Gall  and  other  Indians. 

Returning  to  the  camp  on  Tongue  River,  General  Miles  organized  a 
force  and  started  after  Sitting  Bull,  but  the  trail  was  destroyed  by  the 


A NOTICE  TO  GENERAL  MILES  FROM  SITTING  BULL. 


falling  snow.  Unusually  severe  weather  followed,  but  Miles  kept  his  men 
continually  scouting  through  the  surrounding  country.  Sitting  Bull’s 
camp  was  overtaken  on  the  5th  of  January,  and  the  old  medicine  man, 
with  his  one  hundred  and  ninety  lodges,  was  driven  pell  mell  across  the 
Missouri.  Some  two  weeks  later,  the  Indian  camp  was  attacked  again, 
near  the  head  of  the  Redwater,  and  most  of  the  camp  equipage  captured, 
the  warriors  dispersing  south  of  the  Yellowstone. 

Sitting  Bull  pushed  northward,  and,  after  encamping  on  the  left  bank 
of  the  Missouri  until  near  the  close  of  winter,  he  crossed  into  Canada, 
where  for  a time  he  disappeared  from  the  scene  of  operations  in  our 
country. 

Crazy  Horse  was  hardly  a less  important  chief  and  leader  than  Sitting 
Bull.  He  was  at  the  head  of  the  Ogalallas,  had  taken  part  in  many  battles, 
and  was  probably  the  real  leader  in  the  massacre  of  Custer  and  his  com- 


PEACE  IN  DAKOTA  AND  MONTANA. 


369 

mand.  He  was  encamped  along  the  Tongue  River  and  other  southern 
tributaries  of  the  Yellowstone,  with  a large  force  of  Sioux  and  Northern 
Cheyennes.  There  was  no  doubt  they  meant  to  dispute  the  advance  of 
General  Miles. 

A severe  engagement  took  place,  January  8,  1877,  and,  for  a time, 
the  soldiers  were  in  great  peril,  for  the  Indians  largely  outnumbered  them 
and  had  much  the  better  position.  A blinding  snow  storm  set  in,  and  the 
troops  not  only  fought  heroically,  but  were  handled  with  great  skill. 
Finally,  the  Indians  broke  and  fled  through  Wolf  Mountains  toward  the 
Big  Horn  range. 

Some  time  later,  General  Miles  put  himself  in  communication  with 
Crazy  Horse,  to  whom  he  gave  the  choice  of  surrendering  or  fighting.  After 
considerable  dallying,  the  submission  was  made.  Crazy  Horse,  and  Little 
Hawk,  his  uncle,  led  most  of  the  hostiles,  numbering  more  than  two 
thousand,  to  the  Red  Cloud  and  Spotted  Tail  agencies,  in  the  department 
of  the  Platte,  where  they  surrendered. 

After  Crazy  Horse’s  surrender,  he  and  his  followers  were  put  on  the 
reservation,  near  Camp  Robinson,  in  Northern  Nebraska.  He  gave  no 
trouble  for  a time,  but  in  September,  1877,  there  was  reason  to  suspect 
he  was  planning  to  lead  his  people  again  on  the  warpath.  His  arrest 
was  ordered,  but  while  taking  him  to  the  guard  house  he  attempted  to 
break  away,  slashing  with  his  knife  everyone  who  opposed  him.  He  was 
so  badly  wounded  in  the  struggle  that  he  died.  Lame  Deer  and  Iron 
Star,  the  leaders  of  another  band  of  hostiles,  were  attacked  in  May,  those 
chiefs  killed,  and,  before  the  close  of  the  summer,  peace  reigned  through- 
out Dakota  and  Montana. 

Chief  Joseph  of  the  Nez  Perces  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable  Indians 
that  ever  lived.  He  is  six  feet  in  height,  of  magnificent  physique,  strikingly 
handsome  and  graceful,  with  a native  dignity  and  a mind  of  great  strength. 
He  is  a natural  born  general,  and,  could  he  have  received  the  training  of 
West  Point,  he  would  have  become  the  peer  of  any  of  his  Caucasian 
brethren. 

The  Nez  Perces,  in  1877,  were  living  in  Idaho,  beyond  the  Rocky  Moun- 
tains. They  were  quite  advanced  in  civilization,  but  they  became  involved, 
too,  in  trouble,  because  of  governmental  mismanagement*  and  Joseph 
formed  the  daring  scheme  of  transporting  his  whole  tribe,  men,  women, 
and  children,  across  the  Rocky  Mountains  into  British  territory.  He 
knew  he  would  be  pursued,  and  so  he  was.  Before  he  could  leave  Idaho, 
General  Miles  was  forming  his  plans  to  capture  him. 

Referring  to  this  remarkable  series  of  incidents,  General  Merritt  says 
that  in  1877, occurred  the  wonderful  retreat  and  defense  of  Chief  Joseph 
with  the  Nez  Perces,  pursued  by  General  Howard  and  his  command  from 


370 


SURRENDER  OF  CHIEF  JOSEPH  AND  HIS  PEOPLE. 


Idaho  Territory  to  Montana,  a distance  of  more  than  thirteen  hundred 
miles,  along  which,  at  different  points,  were  intercepting  forces,  which 
hacked  and  cut  at  the  Indians,  till  at  last,  reduced  in  numbers  and  equip- 
ment, they  surrendered  to  an  intercepting  force,  part  of  the  original  pur- 
suers being  present  at  the  surrender.  It  was  a wonderful  pursuit,  pluckily 
persisted  in,  in  the  face  of  every  possible  hardship  ; but  who  can  do  justice 
to  the  labor,  courage,  and  endurance  of  the  retreat  ? How  intensely 
interesting  would  be  an  account  from  Chief  Joseph,  if  he  had  the  pen  of  a 
ready  writer  and  could  make  his  own  report  ! his  feints,  stratagems,  and 
ambuscades  ; the  resolute  marches  in  which  he  distanced  his  pursuers  ; his 
defense  and  passage  of  rivers,  with  all  his  impedimenta,  including  women 
and  children  ; the  meeting  and  battling  with  intercepting  forces,  or  the 
avoidance  of  these  and  escape  across  difficult  and  unknown  country,  until 
finally,  deceived  only  in  reference  to  the  character  of  the  country  he  was 
seeking  and  the  friends  he  was  to  meet,  he  was  brought  to  bay  like  a 
hunted  lion,  terrible  even  in  his  death  struggle. 

It  was  on  the  5th  of  October,  after  fighting  several  days,  that  Chief 
Joseph  handed  his  rifle  to  General  Miles,  and,  with  impressive  dignity 
said,  pointing  to  the  sun  : 

“From  where  the  sun  now  stands  I fight  no  more  against  the  white 
man.” 

Four  hundred  and  eighteen  Indians  surrendered  ; a number  were  killed 
or  wounded  during  the  last  fight,  and  one  hundred  escaped  into  Dominion 
Territory.  Among  them  was  the  daughter  of  Joseph.  The  captives  were 
taken  to  Kansas  and  finally  sent  to  Indian  Territory.  It  is  pleasant  to  re- 
cord that  some  seven  years  later,  when  General  Miles  was  promoted,  he 
succeeded  in  havingChief  Joseph  and  the  remnant  of  his  band  returned  to 
the  neighborhood  of  their  old  home. 

The  Ute£of  Colorado  felt  bitterly  resentful,  in  1879,  toward  Agent 
Meeker  because  he  insisted  upon  their  learning  farming — a species  of 
labor  which  they  utterly  detested.  Major  Thornburgh,  with  a small 
force,  announced  that  he  would  help  him  in  his  task,  but  the  agent  begged 
him  not  to  approach  with  his  soldiers  as  the  Indians  would  take  it  as  a 
declaration  of  war.  It  was  arranged  that  the  major  should  advance  with 
five  soldiers  to  the  agency,  the  agent  agreeing  to  meet  him  on  the  road 
with  several  chiefs.  The  savages  lay  in  wait  and  killed  eleven  citizens,  two 
. officers  and  twelve  soldiers,  and  wounded  forty,one.  The  Indians  ad- 
mitted a loss  of  thirty-nine.  Major  Thornburgh  was  killed  in  action  and 
Agent  Meeker  at  his  residence. 


FROM  WHERE  THE  SUN  NOW  STANDS  I FIGHT  NO  MORE  AGAINST  THE  WHITE  MAN, 


CHAPTER  XL. 


THE  CONQUEST  OF  THE  APACHES — THE  MOST  TERRIBLE  OF  ALL  ABO- 
RIGINES— CAPTAIN  BOURKE’S  DESCRIPTION — THE  MASSACRE  AT  CAMP 
GRANT— A REIGN  OF  TERROR — INCIDENTS— GENERAL  CROOK 

ASSUMES  COMMAND— HIS  PLANS  INTERFERED  WITH  BY  A PEACE 
COMMISSIONER. 


HE  Apache  Indian  is  the  most  terrible  of  all  the  aborigines.  It  is 


-*•  conceded  that  in  cunning,  endurance,  ferocity,  and  what  may  be 
expressed  as  “deviltry,”  he  has  never  had  an  equal  on  this  continent,  and  it 
is  safe  to  say  the  world  has  never  known  his  superior. 

General  Crook  has  seen  an  Apache  lope  for  fifteen  hundred  feet  up 
the  side  of  a mountain  without  showing  the  first  sign  of  fatigue,  there 
being  no  perceptible  increase  of  respiration.  A band  of  those  fearful  war- 
riors have  been  known  to  ambush  a party  of  whites  on  an  open  plain, 
where  there  was  not  a tree,  shrub,  or  blade  of  grass  growing.  They  did  it 
by  burrowing  in  the  sand,  and  covering  their  bodies,  all  but  their  eyes,  and 
remaining  motionless  until  the  unsuspecting  whites  were  within  a hundred 


yards. 


The  climate  of  Arizona  and  other  portions  of  the  Southwest,  for 
weeks  at  a time,  is  like  a furnace.  Were  not  the  air  dry,  life  would  be 
unbearable  to  the  whites.  If  those  who  remained  at  home  had  any  con- 
ception of  the  sufferings  of  our  officers  and  soldiers  when  prosecuting 
their  Indian  campaigns,  their  lips,  instead  of  speaking  criticism,  would  utter 
expressions  of  wonder  and  admiration. 

When  the  troopers  were  trying  to  run  down  the  Apaches,  the  ther- 
mometer, day  after  day,  marked  one  hundred  and  twenty  degrees,  and 
often  more.  The  metal  work  on  their  guns  became  so  hot  that  it  could 
not  be  touched  with  the  bare  hand.  The  air  pulsated,  and  the  soil  was 
baked  under  their  feet.  Sometimes,  when  aflame  with  thirst,  they  toiled 
mile  after  mile,  cheered  by  the  expectation  of  reaching  some  spring,  they 
found  the  Apaches  had  been  there  ahead  of  them  and  befouled  it  beyond 
all  use  for  man  or  beast. 

The  practice  of  the  Apaches,  after  striking  one  of  their  murderous 
blows,  was  to  break  up  into  small  parties,  which,  if  hard  pressed,  would 
dissolve  still  further,  until  each  member  was  pursuing  his  way  alone 
through  the  mountain  fastnesses.  When  the  danger  was  past,  they 
reunited  at  some  far-removed  rendezvous. 


373 


374 


THE  APACHE  WARRIORS. 


It  must  be  remembered,  too,  that  these  people  were  familiar  with  all 
the  ravines,  caverns,  canons,  defiles,  gorges,  and  places  inaccessible  to 
horses,  which  exist  without  number  in  the  wild  recesses  of  the  various 
mountain  ranges.  The  Apache,  when  on  a raid,  lived  on  rats,  mice,  rab- 
bits, and,  if  hard  pressed,  killed  and  ate  his  horse.  After  that,  he  would 

stand  starvation,  if  necessary,  for  days,  and,  if 
beyond  the  reach  of  water,  would  go  without  it. 
When  he  wished  to  indulge  in  a debauch 
he  would  swallow  a horrible  decoction 
from  the  maguey  plant,  called  “Tizwin,” 
and  which  brought  out  all  the  latent  devil 
in  him,  provided  it  had  not  already  come 
to  the  surface. 

The  foregoing  facts  should  be  borne 
in  mind  in  following  the  attempts  to  con- 
quer the  Apaches,  who  form  one  of  the 
divisions  of  the  American  aborigines. 
They  are  generally  separated  into  two 
great  classes — those  who  cut  the  front 
hair  in  bangs,  reaching  the  level  of  the 
eyebrows,  and  those  who  do  not.  Cap- 
tain John  G.  Bourke,  of  the  Third  Cavalry, 
states  that  the  Apaches  who  do  not  trim 
their  hair  in  the  fashion  named  belong 
to  the  widely  disseminated  Apache-Navajo  family,  one  of  the  branches  of 
the  Tinnich  stock,  which  has  conquered  its  way  from  the  circumpolar 
regions  of  the  north,  where  many  bands  speaking  the  same  language  still 
live  on  the  affluents  of  the  Yukon  in  Alaska,  of  the  Mackenzie  in  the 
Dominion  of  Canada,  and  of  the  Great  Bear  and  Great  Slave  Lakes  in  the 
same  desolate  region.  The  other  tribes  in  Arizona  have  been,  until 
recently,  sedentary  Indians,  who  in  manners,  customs,  and  personal  appear- 
ance strongly  resemble  the  Pueblos  of  New  Mexico. 

Captain  Bourke  thus  describes  the  Apache : 

“Physically,  he  is  perfect;  he  might  be  a trifle  taller  for  artistic  effect, 
but  his  apparent  “squattiness”  is  due  more  to  great  girth  of  chest  than  to 
diminutive  stature.  His  muscles  are  hard  as  bone,  and  I have  seen  one 
light  a match  on  the  sole  of  his  naked  foot.  Twenty  years  ago,  when 
Crook  took  him  in  hand,  the  Apache  had  few  wants  and  cared  for  no  lux- 
uries. War  was  his  business,  his  life,  and  victory  his  dream.  To  attack  a 
Mexican  camp  or  isolated  village,  and  run  off  a herd  of  cattle,  mules,  or 
sheep,  he  would  gladly  travel  hundreds  of  miles,  incurring  every  risk  and 
displaying  a courage  which  would  have  been  extolled  in  an  historical  novel 


AN  APACHE  WARRIOR. 


THE  APACHE  ON  A RAID. 


375 


as  having  happened  in 
a raid  by  Highlanders 
upon  Southrons;  but 
when  it  was  your  stock, 
or  your  friend’s  stock, 
it  became  quite  a differ- 
ent matter.  He  wore 
no  clothing  whatever 
save  a narrow  piece  of 
calico  or  buckskin  about 
the  loins,  a helmet,  also 
of  buckskin,  plentifully 
crested  with  the  plum- 
age of  the  wild  turkey 
and  eagle,  and  long 
legged  mocassins,  held 
to  the  waist  by  a string, 
and  turned  up  at  the 
toes  in  a shield  which 
protected  him  from 
stones  and  “cholla” 
cactus.  If  he  felt 
thirsty,  he  drank  from 
the  nearest  brook;  if 
there  was  no  brook  near 
by,  he  went  without, 
and,  putting  a stone  or 
a twig  in  his. mouth  to 
induce  a flow  of  saliva, 

journeyed  on.  When  he  desired  to  communicate  with  friends  at  home,  or  to 
put  himself  in  correspondence  with  persons  whose  co-operation  had  been 
promised,  he  rubbed  two  sticks  together,  and  dense  signal  smoke  rolled  to  the 
zenith  and  was  answered  from  peaks  twenty  and  thirty  miles  away.  By  night- 
fall his  bivouac  was  pitched  at  a distance  from  water,  generally  on  the  flank  of 
a rocky  mountain,  along  which  no  trail  would  be  left,  and  up  which  no  force  of 
cavalry  could  hope  to  ascend  without  making  noise  enough  to  wake  the  dead.” 

General  Stoneman’s  campaign  in  the  Apache  country  cannot  be  pro- 
nounced a success.  His  concentration  of  the  troops  at  two  posts  and 
abandoning  the  others  which  the  people  deemed  necessary  for  safety, 
caused  great  dissatisfaction.  They  were  exasperated  by  the  activities  of 
the  Apaches,  and  declared  they  would  take  care  of  themselves  if  the  mili- 
tary authorities  would  not  do  it. 


ON  THE  WARPATH. 


376 


REPORT  OF  THE  GRAND  JURY. 


Some  four  hundred  of  these  Indians  had  been  gathered  near  Camp 
Grant,  where  they  were  fed  by  the  officers  on  condition  that  they  desisted 
from  their  depredations.  Undoubtedly  some  of  the  warriors  were  guilty 
of  many  atrocities,  for,  as  shown  below,  they  had  abundant  opportunity  to 
absent  themselves  without  the  knowledge  of  the  officers,  and  the  temp- 
tation was  too  great  to  be  resisted  by  such  people. 

April  28,  1871,  a party  of  white  men  and  one  hundred  Papago  Indians 
set  out  to  trace  some  Apache  marauders,  and  did  so  to  the  band  at  Camp 
Grant.  Two  days  later  they  attacked  the  party,  killed  eighty-five  men  and 
women,  and  carried  away  twenty-eight  children  as  prisoners. 

A grand  jury  of  the  Federal  court  investigated  the  affair  at  Camp 
Grant,  indicted  several  parties,  and  made  the  following  report : 

“ We  find  that  the  hostile  bands  of  Indians  in  this  territory  are  led  by 
many  different  chiefs,  who  have  generally  adopted  the  policy  of  Cochise, 
making  the  points  where  the  Indians  are  fed  the  base  of  their  supplies  for 
ammunition,  guns,  and  recruits  for  their  raids,  as  each  hostile  chief  usually 
draws  warriors  from  other  bands  when  he  makes  an  important  raid  upon 
the  citizens,  or  the  neighboring  State  of  Sonora,  where  they  are  continually 
making  their  depredations.  We  find  that  the  habit  of  beastly  drunkenness 
has  generally  prevailed,  with  few  marked  exceptions,  among  the  officers 
commanding  at  Camp  Grant,  Camp  Goodwin,  and  Camp  Apache,  where 
the  Apache  Indians  have  been  fed ; that  the  rations  issued  at  these  camps 
to  the  Indians  have  frequently  been  insufficient  for  their  support,  and 
unjustly  distributed,  sometimes  bones  being  issued  instead  of  meat;  that 
one  quartermaster  of  the  United  States  said  he  made  a surplus  of  twelve 
thousand  pounds  of  corn  in  issuing  rations  to  the  Indians  at  Camp  Good- 
win. We  find  that  a commanding  officer,  while  commanding  at  Camp 
Apache,  gave  liquor  to  the  Apache  Indians,  and  got  beastly  drunk  with 
them  from  whisky  belonging  to  the  Hospital  Department  of  the  United 
States  Government;  also,  that  another  officer  of  the  United  States  Army 
gave  liquor  to  the  said  Indians  at  said  camp;  that  officers  of  the  United 
States  Army,  at  those  camps  where  the  Indians  are  fed,  are  in  the  habit  of 
using  their  official  position  to  break  the  chastity  of  the  Indian  women ; 
that  the  present  regulations  of  Camp  Grant,  with  the  Apache  Indians  on 
the  reservation,  are  such,  that  the  whole  body  of  Indians  might  leave  the 
reservation  and  be  gone  many  days  without  the  knowledge  of  the  com- 
manding officer.  In  conclusion  of  the  labors  of  this  United  States  Grand 
Jury,  we  would  say  that  five  hundred  of  our  neighbors,  friends,  and  fellow- 
citizens  have  fallen  by  the  murdering  hand  of  the  Apache  Indian,  clothing 
in  the  garb  of  mourning  the  family  circle  in  many  of  the  hamlets,  towns, 
and  cities  of  all  the  States  of  our  country.  This  blood  cries  from  the 
ground  to  the  American  people  for  justice — justice  to  all  men.” 


PURSUIT  OF  THE  RAIDERS. 


SUFFERINGS  OF  THE  RANCHMEN. 


379 


The  Apaches  instituted  a reign  of  terror  through  eertain  portions  of 
the  Southwest.  There  was  no  deed  too  daring  for  them  to  perpetrate, 
and  no  cruelty  too  atrocious  for  them  to  commit.  Many  a time  the  ranch- 
men, returning  from  the  care  of  their  cattle,  found  their  houses  in  ashes,  and 
the  wife  and  little  ones  tomahawked.  Perhaps,  to  add  refinement  to  tor- 
ture, the  marauders  had  carried  away  the  boy  of  tender  years.  Some 
gallant  army  officer  within  reach,  feeling  for  the  stricken  parent  and  eager 
for  adventure,  gathers  two  or  three  of  his  scouts,  including,  probably,  a 
friendly  Indian,  and  takes  their  trail  with  their  wearied  horses  forced  to  a 
dead  run. 

Through  the  flaming  heat  the  animals  are  urged,  until  a sight  of  the 
dusky  miscreants  is  obtained.  Knowing  that  pursuit  is  almost  certain, 


TAUNTING  THEIR  PURSUERS. 


they  are  prepared  for  it,  and  their  tough  ponies  are  fresher  than  those  of 
the  white  men  on  their  trail.  They  plunge  into  the  shallow  river,  splash  to 
the  other  side,  where  they  wheel  about,  and  while  one  of  the  warriors  holds 
the  little  fellow  aloft  to  let  the  stricken  parent  know  they  still  have  him, 
the  others  utter  tantalizing  shouts  and  make  defiant  gestures. 

By  the  time  the  pursuers  have  crossed  the  stream,  the  Apaches  are 
scurrying  away  through  the  hot  dust  to  their  fastnesses  in  the  mountains. 
If  the  little  band  continue  the  pursuit  and  avoid  an  ambuscade,  they  may 
come  upon  the  body  of  the  child,  mangled  and  killed  by  the  wretches,  who 
know  no  such  sentiment  as  pity. 

Mr.  John  T.  Shy,  now  of  Deming,  N.  M.,  lived  on  a ranch  seventeen 
miles  from  any  other  settlement.  His  family  consisted  of  his  wife  and 


380 


ILLUSTRATIVE  INCIDENTS. 


young  son.  His  ranch  was  attacked  by  a roving  band  of  Apaches,  who 
attempted  to  drive  off  his  stock.  Mr.  Shy  was  not  caught  unprepared. 
He  was  well  armed  and  had  plenty  oi  ammunition.  He  removed  his  wife 
and  child  to  a place  of  safety  within  the  house  and  then  opened  fire*  which 
was  returned.  The  fight  was  waged  for  some  time,  till  one  of  the  Indians 
succeeded  in  crawling  up  and  setting  fire  to  the  house.  This  necessi- 
tated flight;  so,  sending  Mrs.  Shy  forward  under  cover  of  the  smoke  of  the 
burning  building,  the  husband  and  father,  carrying  his  young  son  under  his 
arm,  made  a dash  for  the  cover  of  some  thick  brush  which  was  growing 
near  by. 

An  Indian’s  bullet  went  through  the  child’s  hip  and  lodged  in  the 
father’s  body,  but  the  fight  went  on.  Mr.  Shy  ran  forward  some  distance, 
and  then,  dropping  the  child  in  the  brush,  would  face  about  and  fire  at  the 
leading  pursuer,  who  would  thus  be  brought  to  a standstill  for  a time. 
Then  another  short  flight  and  another  stand  to  gain  time  for  Mrs.  Shy, 
who  was  fleeing  in  the  front,  and  so  the  day  was  spent.  The  Indians 
finally  gave  up  the  chase,  which  had  cost  them  no  less  than  six  warriors, 
and  the  exhausted  fugitives  managed  to  reach  the  city  of  Deming  with 
their  lives.  The  wounds  received  by  both  father  and  son  were  rapidly 
healed,  and  now,  when  the  hostiles  are  forever  expelled  from  or  killed  out 
of  that  neighborhood,  there  is  no  more  flourishing  or  happy  family  in  New 
Mexico  than  that  of  valorous  John  T.  Shy. 

William  Brandenburg,  a ranchman,  was  sitting  by  his  fire  one  night,  in 
Arizona,  talking  with  his  son,  a young  man,  and  his  wife,  who  was  engaged 
with  her  sewing.  The  evening  was  unusually  cold,  and  the  blaze  on  the 
hearth  diffused  a grateful  warmth  through  the  room. 

There  had  been  no  trouble  for  more  than  a year  with  the  Apaches. 
Mr.  Brandenburg  had  served  as  a captain  in  the  Confederate  Army  during 
the  Civil  War,  and  had  been  in  many  brushes  with  the  red  men  on  the 
plains.  He  knew  that  danger  was  liable  to  burst  upon  them  at  any 
moment,  but,  like  many  others,  was  hopeful  that  the  long  series  of  depre- 
dations by  the  Apaches  were  at  an  end.  So  he  allowed  his  Winchester  to 
rest  on  the  deer’s  prongs  over  the  fireplace,  and  talked  with  his  wife  and 
son  about  a rumor  that  a small  band  of  hostiles  had  been  reported  on  a 
raid  at  a point  more  than  a hundred  miles  distant.  He  had  just  remarked 
that,  according  to  the  rumors,  the  Indians  were  working  in  another  direction, 
when  the  face  of  an  Apache  suddenly  appeared  outside  the  window,  and, 
almost  at  the  same  instant,  he  discharged  his  gun  through  the  pane  of  glass. 

An  involuntary  movement  of  the  captain,  who  caught  a glimpse 
of  the  visage,  saved  him,  though  the  Indian’s  bullet  shattered  the  pipe 
in  his  mouth.  The  inmates  of  the  room  instantly  whisked  back  out  of 
range,  and  each,  including  the  wife,  seized  a gun. 


ATTACK  ON  THE  RANCHMAN’S  FAMILY. 


GENERAL  CROOK  ASSUMES  COMMAND. 


383 


The  very  band  about  which  they  were  talking,  and  which,  according 
to  the  last  reports,  was  a hundred  miles  distant,  had  swooped  down  upon 
them,  attacking  with  the 
suddenness  to  which  they 
frequently  owed  their  suc- 
cess. 

They  circled  about  the 
building,  firing  through 
the  windows  and  making 
several  attempts  to  burn 
the  structure.  Twice  they 
nearly  succeeded,  but  the 
vigilance  of  the  defenders 
saved  them. 

More  than  that,  Cap- 
tain Brandenburg  shot  the 
leader  of  the  band  from 
his  pony,  and  sent  one  of 
his  old  time  defiant  yells 
after  the  band,  as  they 
galloped  off  in  search  of 
less  troublesome  victims 
to  their  cruelty. 

Not  always  did  the 
ranchers  fare  as  well  as 
the  captain.  The  rule  was 
that  the  descent  of  the 
Apaches  was  as  sudden, 
and  often  as  destructive, 
as  the  cyclone.  They  had  struck  their  blows  and  were  off  before  the  most 
watchful  cavalry  could  thunder  down  upon  them.  The  smoke  of  the  burn- 
ing  buildings  had  scarcely  stained  the  clear  sky,  warning  the  soldiers  of  the 
mischief  afoot,  when  the  raiders  were  assailing  some  other  dwelling,  miles 
away. 

In  June,  1871,  to  the  delight  of  all  citizens  of  Arizona,  General  Crook 
took  command.  He  proceeded  at  once  to  enlist  the  friendly  Indians 
against  the  hostiles,  securing  the  aid  of  the  powerful  chief  Miguel.  This 
was  unquestionably  the  most  effective  means  that  could  have  been 
adopted,  for  these  Indians  were  familiar  with  the  haunts  of  the  hostiles 
and  would  have  hunted  them  down  as  unerringly  as  bloodhounds;  but,  at 
this  juncture,  Vincent  Colyer,  one  of  the  Peace  Commissioners,  appeared  on 
the  scene,  and  announced  that  he  was  going  to  run  things.  He  forbade  the 


384 


A MISTAKEN  POLICY. 


employment  of  the  friendly  Indians,  and  General  Crook  was  obliged  to 
submit. 

This  was  anything  but  soothing  to  the  citizens  of  the  territory,  for 
Colyer  had  not  consulted  the  authorities,  and  his  peace  policy  showed  no 
abatement  in  Indian  outrages.  Among  them  was  the  attack  on  the  stage 
coach  from  Prescott  to  Tucson.  This  happened  near  Wickenburg,  on  the 
evening  of  November  5,  1871.  Several  persons  were  killed,  including  Mr. 
Frederick  W.  Loring  of  Boston.  It  will  be  admitted  that  the  residents  of 
the  territory  ought  to  be  qualified  to  pass  judgment  on  the  various  policies 
which  had  been  tried  among  them.  There  was  but  one  opinion  of  the  well 
intended  but  unfortunate  experiment  of  Mr.  Colyer.  It  was  utterly  con- 
demned, and  a petition  sent  to  Congress  asking  that  his  policy  should  be 
supplanted  by  that  of  General  Crook,  already  proven  to  be  the  only  one 
that  could  bring  peace  and  prosperity  to  that  sorely  tried  section.  It  was 
a long  time  before  the  prayer  was  heeded,  but  finally  Congress  listened  to 
the  reasonable  appeal  and  granted  what  was  asked. 


CHAPTER  XLI. 


THE  CONQUEST  OF  THE  APACHES  (CONCLUDED)— GENERAL  CROOK’S  CAM- 
PAIGN— A HAPPY  ENDING  DESTROYED  BY  POLITICAL  INFLUENCES — 
GERONIMO— HIS  DARING  EXPLOITS— CAPTAIN  LAWTON’S  BRILLIANT 
WORK  UNDER  GENERAL  MILES— END  OF  THE  WAR— GERONIMO  IN 
CAPTIVITY. 

GENERAL  CROOK  having  completed  his  arrangements  for  his  cam- 
paign against  the  hostile  Apaches,  the  different  columns  were  ordered, 
on  the  9th  of  December,  1872,  to  converge  at  Tonto  Basin,  the  stronghold 
of  the  worst  members  of  the  tribe.  This  rough  section  is  inclosed  by  the 
Mogollen,  the  Mazatzal,  and  the  Sierra  Ancha  Mountains,  covered  with 
timber,  and  white  with  snow  during  the  winter  months.  General  Crook 
stationed  himself  at  Camp  Grant,  which  army  officers  declared  to  be  the 
meanest  and  most  squalid  post  in  the  country. 

The  campaign  having  opened  in  December,  was  pushed  remorselessly 
to  a conclusion,  which  was  reached  in  the  following  April.  For  the  first 
time,  the  Apaches  found  themselves  matched  at  their  own  game,  for  the 
scouts  of  their  enemies  were  Indians  as  skillful,  daring,  and  untiring  as 
themselves.  When  several  small  parties  of  hostiles  had  been  gathered  in, 
the  bucks  belonging  to  them  were  used  as  trailers,  and  they  did  their  work 
well. 

Captain  Bourke,  already  quoted,  was  a member  of  the  Fifth  Cavalry, 
commanded  by  Major  William  H.  Brown,  which  belonged  to  the  column 
moving  out  from  Camp  Grant.  This  swept  through  the  Mescal,  Pinal, 
Superstition,  Sierra  Ancha,  and  Mazatzal  ranges,  and  later  the  southern 
and  western  extremity  of  the  Mogollon  plateau.  Captain  Bourke  thus 
describes  the  operations  in  which  he  took  part: 

“The  different  detachments  crossed  and  recrossed  each  other’s  trails, 
frequently  meeting  and  always  being  within  supporting  distance  of  one 
another.  The  Apaches  were  unable  to  reassemble  in  rear  of  any  passing 
column,  as  had  so  uniformly  been  done  on  previous  occasions,  and  had  to 
keep  an  eye  open  for  danger  from  all  points  of  the  compass,  in  darkness  as 
well  as  in  daylight.  In  this  extremity  they  concentrated  in  their  strong- 
holds, the  most  impregnable  being  the  cave  in  the  canon  of  Salt  River,  the 
summit  of  Turret  Butte,  and  the  cliffs  of  the  Superstition  Mountains. 

“The  first  of  the  three  was  struck  by  Major  Brown’s  command  at  the 
first  peep  of  day  of  a very  cold  morning,  December  28,  1872.  The  evening 

385 


386 


CAPTAIN  BOURKE’S  ACCOUNT. 


before,  our  Apache  scouts  told  Major  Brown  that,  although  the  command 
had  been  very  successful  in  its  work  thus  far,  yet  there  was  a big 
rancheria  only  a short  distance  off  in  which  the  hostile  Apaches  felt  that 
they  were  perfectly  invincible.  One  of  the  scouts  had  been  brought  up  in 

this  fortress,  for  such  he 
claimed  it  to  be,  and  would 
guide  us  there  because  he 
bore  enmity  to  the  chief 
and  some  others  of  the 
band. 

“By  starting  from  our 
present  bivouac,  which  was 
in  a small  box  cafion  on 
the  east  side  of  the  Mazat- 
zal  Mountains,  at  the  first 
appearance  of  a certain  star 
in  the  east,  and  marching 
briskly  all  night,  we  could 
reach  by  first  dawn  of  the 
morning  the  canon  of  the 
Salt  River,  where,  in  a cave 
half  way  down  the  face 
of  the  vertical  cliff,  the 
Apaches  dwelt.  A danger- 
ous trail  led  to  this  spot, 
and  it  would  be  all  we 
could  do  to  reach  there  by  the  time  fixed.  If  we  were  fortunate  enough  to 
get  down  there  before  the  enemy  discovered  our  presence,  we  could  count 
upon  destroying  the  whole  band ; if  we  did  not,  the  last  of  the  Americans 
would  die  on  the  trail,  trying  to  escape  out  of  that  canon. 

‘‘Did  his  American  brothers  have  the  ‘sand’  to  follow  him?  They  did. 
There  was  very  little  bustle  or  confusion,  as  we  were  all  ready  for  a fight 
at  a moment’s  notice.  All  that  was  really  done  was  to  examine  our  car- 
bines and  ammunition,  and  see  that  everything  was  slick;  put  some  crack- 
ers, bacon,  and  coffee  in  the  blanket  which  each  was  to  sling  over  his 
shoulder;  fill  canteens  with  water,  and  give  a final  look  at  our  moccasins, 
which  we  wore  through  preference  because  they  made  no  noise  going  over 
the  rocks.  The  mules  and  horses  were  to  be  left  back  in  this  bivouac, 
under  a strong  guard,  and  there  was  plenty  of  time  for  all  who  so  desired 
to  scratch  off  a line  to  the  folks  at  home  for  whom  this  might,  in  some 
cases  at  least,  be  the  last  letter. 

“The  Apache  scouts  wasted  no  time  in  this  sentimental  way.  They 


AN  APACHE  HOME. 


TRAILING  AT  NIGHT. 


387 


gathered  about  little  fires  and  stuffed  themselves  with  the  meat  of  one  of 
our  mules  which  had  died  that  day;  its  ribs  were  picked  clean  and  not  a 
particle  left.  This  kind  of  feasting  before  going  into  battle  is  the  cere- 
mony described  by  the  French  missionaries  in  Canada  two  centuries  ago 
under  the  title  festins  a manger  tout.  The  medicine  men  of  the  Apaches 
and  Pimas  told  their  followers  what  they  were  expected  to  do,  and  by 
eight  in  the  evening  Nantaje’s  star  twinkled  on  the  horizon  and  we  were 
on  the  trail. 

“For  half  an  hour  or  more  our  progress  was  leisurely.  The  top  of  a 

high  mesa  was  reached,  and  there  we  halted  to  let  the  column  close  up  and 

every  man  get  his  second  wind.  The  air  blew  keenly  across  this  barren 
mountain,  dotted  here  and  there  with  a scraggly  growth  of  cedar,  and  we 
were  all  glad  when  Nantaje  took  up  a brisk  gait  which  started  the  blood 
into  better  circulation.  We  moved  like  a long  file  of  specters;  not  a word 
was  spoken;  there  was  no  whistling,  humming  of  tunes,  coughing,  or  any- 
thing to  betoken  that  we  were  anything  else  than  a battalion  of  ghosts 
coming  in  on  the  keen  breath  of  the  north  wind.  At  the  crest  of  each  hill 

the  front  of  the  column  halted  for  a few  minutes  until  a warning  ‘ Tzit ! 

Tzit  /’  hissed  from  the  rear,  signaled  that  the  last  man  had  reached  his  place. 

“About  midnight  Nantaje  suddenly  turned,  and  seizing  Major  Brown 
with  both  arms  about  the  body  held  him  firmly  in  place.  The  Indian’s 
foo.  had  struck  a depression  in  a sandy  spot  on  the  trail,  and  his  keen 
instinct  told  him  it  was  the  imprint  of  a human  foot.  He  lay  down  on  the 
trail,  and  with  some  comrades  alongside  of  him,  with  their  blankets  spread 
over  their  heads  so  that  not  the  slightest  gleam  of  light  could  escape, 
struck  a few  matches  and  inspected  the  sign.  It  was  the  track  of  a big 
bear’s  foot,  which  is  not  at  all  unlike  a man’s,  and  had  been  made  only  an 
hour  or  so  before.  The  Apaches  believe  that  if  Bruin  crosses  the  trail  of  a 
war  party  it  is  an  omen  that  they  will  soon  meet  the  enemy,  consequently 
our  scouts  were  in  a flutter  of  excitement. 

“We  moved  onward  again  for  three  or  four  hours  until  we  reached  a 
small,  grassy  glade,  where  we  discovered  fifteen  Pima  ponies,  which  must 
have  been  driven  up  the  mountain  by  Apache  raiders  that  very  night ; the 
sweat  was  hardly  crusted  on  their  flanks,  their  hoofs  were  banged  against 
the  rocks,  and  their  knees  were  full  of  the  thorns  of  the  cholla  cactus, 
against  which  they  had  been  driven  in  the  dark.  There  was  no  moon,  but 
the  glint  of  stars  gave  enough  light  to  show  that  we  were  in  a country 
filled  with  huge  rocks  and  adapted  most  admirably  for  defense.  There  in 
front,  almost  within  touch  of  the  hand,  that  line  of  blackness  blacker  than 
all  the  other  blackness  about  us  was  the  canon  of  the  Salt  River.  We 
looked  at  it  well,  since  it  might  be  our  grave  in  an  hour,  for  we  were  now 
within  rifle  shot  of  our  quarry. 


388 


ATTACK  ON  THE  APACHE  STRONGHOLD. 


“Nantaje  now  asked  that  a dozen  picked  men  be  sent  forward  with 
him,  to  climb  down  the  face  of  the  precipice  and  get  into  place  in  front  of 
the  cave  in  order  to  open  the  attack;  immediately  behind  them  should 
come  fifty  more,  who  should  make  no  delay  in  their  advance;  a strong 
detachment  should  hold  the  edge  of  the  precipice  to  prevent  any  of  the 
hostiles  from  getting  above  them  and  killing  our  people  with  their  rifles. 
The  rest  of  our  force  could  come  down  more  at  leisure,  if  the  movement  of 
the  first  two  detachments  secured  the  key  of  the  field ; if  not,  they  could 
cover  the  retreat  of  the  survivors  up  the  face  of  the  escarpment. 

“Lieutenant  William  J.  Ross,  of  the  Twenty-first  Infantry,  was  assigned 
to  lead  the  first  detachment,  which  contained  the  best  shots  from  among 
the  soldiers,  packers,  and  scouts.  The  second  detachment  came  under  my 
own  orders.  Our  pioneer  party  slipped  down  the  face  of  the  precipice 
without  accident,  following  a trail  from  which  an  incautious  step  would 
have  caused  them  to  be  dashed  to  pieces;  after  a couple  of  hundred  yards 
this  brought  them  face  to  face  with  the  cave,  and  not  two  hundred  feet 
from  it.  In  front  of  the  cave  was  the  party  of  raiders,  just  returned  from 
their  successful  trip  of  killing  and  robbing  in  the  settlements  near  Flor- 
ence, on  the  Gila  River.  They  were  dancing  to  keep  themselves  warm 
and  to  express  their  joy  over  their  safe  return.  Half  a dozen  or  more  of 
the  squaws  had  arisen  from  their  slumbers,  and  were  bending  over  a fire 
and  hurriedly  preparing  refreshments  for  their  valorous  kinsmen.  The  fit- 
ful gleam  of  the  glowing  flame  gave  a Macbethian  tinge  to  the  weird  scene, 
and  brought  into  bold  relief  the  grim  outlines  of  the  cliffs  between  whose 
steep  walls,  hundreds  of  feet  below,  growled  the  rushing  current  of  the 
swift  Salado. 

“The  Indians,  men  and  women,  were  in  high  good  humor,  and  why 
should  they  not  be?  Sheltered  in  the  bosom  of  these  grim  precipices,  only 
the  eagle,  the  hawk,  the  turkey  buzzard,  or  the  mountain  sheep  could  ven- 
ture to  intrude  upon  them.  But  hark!  What  is  that  noise?  Can  it  be 
the  breeze  of  morning  which  sounds  ‘Click,  click’?  You  will  know  in  one 
second  more,  poor,  deluded,  redskinned  wretches,  when  the  ‘Bang! 
boom!’  of  rifles  and  carbines,  reverberating,  like  the  roar  of  cannon,  from 
peak  to  peak,  shall  lay  six  of  your  number  dead  in  the  dust. 

“The  cold,  gray  dawn  of  that  chill  December  morning  was  sending  its 
first  rays  above  the  horizon  and  looking  down  upon  one  of  the  worst  bands 
of  Apaches  in  Arizona,  caught  like  wolves  in  a trap.  They  rejected  with 
scorn  our  summons  to  surrender,  and  defiantly  shrieked  that  not  one  of 
our  party  should  escape  from  that  canon.  We  heard  their  death  song 
chanted,  and  then  out  of  the  cave  and  over  the  great  pile  of  rock,  which 
protected  the  entrance  like  a parapet,  swarmed  the  warriors.  But  we  out- 
numbered them  three  to  one,  and  poured  in  lead  by  the  bucketful.  The 


CAUGHT  IN  A TRAP. 


389 


bullets,  striking  the  roof  and  mouth  of  the  cave,  glanced  among  the  sav- 
ages in  rear  of  the  parapet,  and  wounded  some  of  the  women  and  children, 
whose  wails  filled  the  air. 

“During  the  heaviest  part  of  the  firing  a little  boy,  not  more  than  four 
years  old,  absolutely  naked,  ran  out  at  the  side  of  the  parapet  and  stood 
dumfounded  between  the  two  fires.  Nantaje,  without  a moment’s  pause, 
rushed  forward,  grasped 
the  trembling  infant  by 
the  arm,  and  escaped  un- 
hurt with  him  inside  our 
lines.  A bullet,  proba- 
bly deflected  from  the 
rocks,  had  struck  the  boy 
on  the  top  of  the  head 
and  plowed  round  to  the 
back  of  the  neck,  leaving 
a welt  an  eighth  of  an 
inch  thick,  but  not  injur- 
ing him  seriously.  Our 
men  suspended  their  fir- 
ing to  cheer  Nantaje  and 
welcome  the  new  arrival : 
such  is  the  inconsistency 
of  human  nature. 

“Again  the  Apaches 
were  summoned  to  sur- 
render, or,  if  they  would 
not  do  that,  to  let  such 
of  their  women  and  chil- 
dren as  so  desired  pass 
out  between  the  lines ; 
again  they  yelled  their  de- 

GENKRAI.  CROOK  S APACHK  GUIDE 

fiant  refusal.  Their  end 

had  come.  The  detachment  left  by  Major  Brown  at  the  top  of  the  preci- 
pice, to  protect  our  retreat  in  case  of  necessity,  had  worked  its  way  over  to 
a high  shelf  of  rock  overlooking  the  enemy  beneath,  and  began  to  tumble 
down  great  bowlders,  which  speedily  crushed  the  greater  number  of  the 
Apaches.  The  Indians  on  the  San  Carlos  reservation  still  mourn  period- 
ically for  the  seventy-six  of  their  relatives  who  yielded  up  the  ghost  that 
morning.  Every  warrior  died  at  his  post.  The  women  and  children  had 
hidden  themselves  in  the  inner  recesses  of  the  cave,  which  was  of  no  great 
depth,  and  were  captured  and  taken  to  Camp  McDowell.  A number  of 


390 


THE  “OLD,  OLD  STORY.” 

them  had  been  struck  by  glancing  bullets  or  fragments  of  falling  rock.  As 
soon  as  our  pack  trains  could  be  brought  up,  we  mounted  the  captives  on 
our  horses  and  mules  and  started  for  the  nearest  military  station,  the  one 
just  named,  over  fifty  miles  away.” 

This  was  one  of  the  worst  blows  received  by  the  hostiles.  Driven  to 
bay  in  their  chosen  fortress,  loaded  with  plunder  and  red  with  blood,  the 
whole  band  was  exterminated  with  a loss  to  the  soldiers  of  only  one  man 
killed. 

A few  days  later,  Major  Randall,  of  the  Twenty-third  Infantry,  deliv- 
ered an  almost  equally  fatal  blow  at  Turret  Butte,  and,  two  weeks  later, 
one  hundred  and  ten  hostiles  in  the  Superstition  Mountains  surrendered  to 
Major  Brown’s  command  and  went  back  with  him  to  Camp  Grant. 

In  April,  1873,  Buckskin  Hat,  head  chief  of  all  the  Indians  in  the 
Tonto  Basin,  went  to  General  Crook  and  said  he  wished  to  surrender. 
Crook  took  his  hand  and  told  him  if  he  and  his  people  would  stop  killing 
the  whites  and  behave  themselves,  he  would  be  the  best  friend  they  ever 
had.  He  said  he  would  teach  them  to  work,  and  find  a market  for  every- 
thing they  could  make  to  sell. 

It  sounds  almost  incredible,  but,  within  a month,  General  Crook  had 
all  the  Apaches  in  Arizona,  excepting  the  Chiricahuas,  who  were  not 
within  his  jurisdiction,  at  work  at  Camp  Apache  and  Camp  Verde,  digging 
irrigating  ditches,  planting  vegetables,  cutting  hay  and  wood,  and  with 
everything  on  the  highway  to  prosperity. 

“The  transformation,”  says  Captain  Bourke,  “was  marvelous.  Here 
were  six  thousand  of  the  worst  Indians  in  America,  sloughing  off  the  old 
skin  and  taking  on  a new  life.  Detachments  of  the  scouts  were  retained  in 
service  to  maintain  order;  and  also  because  money  would  in  that  way  be 
distributed  among  the  tribes.  Some  few  at  first  spent  their  money  fool- 
ishly, but  the  majority  clubbed  together  and  sent  to  California  for  ponies 
and  sheep.  Trials  by  juries  of  their  own  people  were  introduced  among 
them  for  the  punishment  of  minor  offenses,  the  cutting  off  of  women’s 
noses  was  declared  a crime,  the  manufacture  of  the  intoxicant  tizzvin  was 
broken  up  by  every  possible  means,  and  the  future  of  the  Indians  looked 
most  promising,  when  a gang  of  politicians  and  contractors,  remembered  in 
the  Territory  as  the  ‘Tucson  Ring,’  exerted  an  influence  in  Washington, 
and  had  the  Apaches  ordered  down  to  the  desolate  sand  waste  of  the  San 
Carlos,  where  the  water  is  brackish,  the  soil  poor,  and  the  flies  a plague. 
It  is  the  old,  old  story  of  Indian  mismanagement. 

“There  is  no  brighter  page  in  our  Indian  history  than  that  which 
records  the  progress  of  the  subjugated  Apaches  at  Camp  Apache  and 
Camp  Verde,  nor  is  there  a fouler  blot  than  that  which  conceals  the  knav- 
ery that  secured  their  removal  to  the  junction  of  the  San  Carlos  and  Gila.” 


GERONIMO  AND  CHATO. 


391 


The  most  famous  Apache  leader  was  Geronimo,  chief  of  what  is 
known  as  the  Warm  Spring  Indians.  He  is  the  son  of  Mangus  Colorado, 
one  of  the  worst  miscreants  that  ever  breathed.  Mangus  had  no  grievance 
against  the  white  people,  but  was  bad  “clean  through.”  He  boasted  that 
he  had  never  been  beaten  and  never  would  be.  He  raided  over  a large 
extent  of  territory,  stealing  stock,  killing  settlers,  and  plundering  their 
homes.  Finally  he  was  shot,  dying  with  his  boots  or,  rather,  moccasins  on, 
and  the  well  trained  son, 

Geronimo,  started  out  on 
his  career. 

Chato  is  a cousin  of 
Geronimo.  The  latter 
always  insisted  that 
Chato  was  his  mortal 
enemy.  One  reason  why 
Geronimo  took  the  war- 
path, as  he  claims,  was 
through  fear  that  Chato 
would  kill  him  if  he 
didn’t. 

Chato  was  enlisted 
to  help  run  Geronimo 
down.  More  than  once 
his  actions  excited  sus- 
picion, and  there  are 
many  who  believe  that 
he  and  Geronimo  were  really  friends,  and  that  an  understanding  existed 
between  them.  To  this  may  be  due  a prolongation  of  the  war.  Chato  is 
the  wretch  who  killed  Judge  Comas  and  his  family,  near  the  river  Gila. 

Geronimo  escaped  from  Fort  Apache  in  May,  1885,  taking  with  him 
thirty-four  warriors,  eight  boys,  and  ninety-one  women.  They  traveled 
one  hundred  and  twenty  miles  before  camping.  The  cavalry  were  hard 
after  them,  but  never  got  within  gunshot.  The  chase  was  continued  for 
hundreds  of  miles,  but  the  band  safely  reached  the  Sierra  Madre  Moun- 
tains, and  were  beyond  reach  for  the  time. 

General  Crook  was  on  his  mettle,  and  he  pushed  matters  so  hard  that 
he  finally  corraled  Geronimo.  He  held  him  just  one  night,  when  he 
escaped  again.  Several  nights  later  he  stole  into  camp  with  four  war- 
riors, and,  seizing  a white  woman,  told  her  that  the  only  way  to  save  her 
life  was  to  point  out  his  wife’s  tent.  She  obeyed,  Geronimo  set  her  down, 
caught  up  his  better  half,  and  was  off  before  the  alarm  could  be  spread. 

Fortunately,  a treaty  existed  with  Mexico  at  this  time,  by  which  our 


392 


THE  VIGOROUS  PURSUIT. 


CROSSING  THE  RIO  GRANDE. 


troops  were  permitted  to  follow  any  Indian  raiders  beyond  the  Rio 
Grande,  when,  as  was  often  the  case,  they  undertook  to  escape  by  crossing 
the  boundary  line  between  the  two  countries. 

Captain  H.  W.  Lawton,  Fourth  Cavalry,  took  the  field  with  his  com- 
mand, May  5,  1885.  He  intended  to  operate  exclusively  in  Mexico,  it 

being  thought  at  the  time  that  Geronimo  would 
flee  to  his  stronghold  in  the  Sierra 
Madre,  but  his  band  broke  up  into 
small  companies  and  began  a series 
of  raids  in  southwestern  Arizona 
and  northwestern  Sonora.  This 
forced  Captain  Lawton  to  change 
his  plan  and  follow  the  raiding 
party. 

Captain  Lawton’s  command  con- 
sisted of  thirty-five  men  of  Troop 
B,  Fourth  Cavalry,  twenty  Indian 
scouts,  twenty  men  of  Company  D, 
Eighth  Infantry,  and  two  pack 
trains.  In  June,  fresh  detachments  of  scouts  and  infantry  took  the  places 
of  those  first  sent  out,  and,  early  in  July,  the  hostiles  had  been  driven 
southeast  of  Oposura.  By  this  time,  Lawton’s  company  had  marched  a dis- 
tance equal  to  two-thirds  of  the  way  across  the  continent,  surprised  the 
Apaches  once,  and  compelled  them  three  times  to  abandon  their  camps. 
The  country  was  burned  over  so  that  there  was  no  grass  and  very  little 
water. 

“Every  device  known  to  the  Indian,”  says  Captain  Lawton,  “was  prac- 
ticed to  throw  me  off  the  trail,  but  without  avail.  My  trailers  were  good, 
and  it  was  soon  proved  that  there  was  not  a spot  the  enemy  could  reach 
where  security  was  assured.” 

The  work  of  June  was  done  by  the  cavalry,  who  were  so  worn  out 
that  a fresh  start  was  made  the  following  month  with  only  infantry  and 
Indian  scouts.  Assistant  Surgeon  Leonard  Wood,  at  his  own  request,  was 
given  the  command  of  the  infantry,  while  Lieutenant  Brown  led  the 
scouts.  These  charged  the  hostile  camp  and  captured  all  the  animals  and 
baggage.  The  pursuit  was  kept  up  for  several  days,  but  the  Apaches 
escaped. 

The  sufferings  of  the  soldiers  cannot  be  described.  The  country  was 
of  the  most  rugged  character,  the  ^weather  frightfully  hot,  and  it  rained 
almost  every  night.  Only  fourteen  men  of  the  infantry  were  fit  for  duty* 
and  as  they  had  no  shoes  and  were  exhausted,  they  were  sent  back  to  the 
supply  camp  for  rest,  while  the  cavalry  under  Lieutenant  A.  L.  Smith,  who 


SUFFERINGS  OF  THE  PURSUERS. 


393 


had  just  joined  his  troop,  continued  the  campaign.  General  Miles 
succeeded  General  Crook,  who  was  relieved  at  his  own  request  in  April, 
1885. 

Surgeon  Wood  in  his  report  describes  Sonora  as  chiefly  “a  continuous 
mass  of  mountains  of  the  most  rugged  character.  Range  follows  range 
with  hardly  an  excuse  for  a valley,  unless  the  narrow  canons  be  so  consid- 
ered.” The  pursuers  were  forced  to  send  their  horses  around  through 
gaps,  while  they  followed  the  direct  trail,  climbing  in  the  ascent  and  sliding 
in  the  descent.  Lieutenant  Brett  once  did  this  for  twenty-six  hours  with- 
out rest,  unable  to  find  a drop  of  water  for  eighteen  hours,  with  the  heat  all 


the  time  far  above  one  hundred  degrees.  Scout  Eduardy,  while  seeking 
“pointers,”  rode  one  horse  nearly  five  hundred  miles  in  less  than  seven 
days  and  nights. 

The  hunt  for  the  Apaches  was  taken  up  in  succession  by  twenty-five 
different  commands  or  detachments,  representing  four  regiments.  This 
was  in  obedience  to  General  Miles’s  order:  “Commanding  officers  are 
expected  to  continue  a pursuit  until  capture,  or  until  they  are  assured  a 
fresh  command  is  on  the  trail.” 

This  persistent  trailing,  and  five  encounters  with  the  red  men,  con- 
vinced Geronimo  and  Nachez  that  there  was  no  safety  in  Arizona,  and 
they  made  haste  to  the  fastnesses  of  the  Sierra  Madre  in  Mexico.  Lieu- 
tenant Spencer  thus  describes  the  landscape  of  Sonora,  where  the  Sierra 
Madre  rises  frequently  6000  or  7000  feet  above  the  plain,  which  is  a mile 
above  the  sea  level : 


394 


RUN  DOWN  AT  LAST. 


“Down,  down,  down,  upon  a rocky,  dangerous  trail,  now  along  a nar- 
row divide,  now  a narrow  side  cut  into  the  middle  of  a precipice  hundreds 
of  feet  high,  leading  one’s  horse  for  hours,  riding  only  for  a few  minutes, 
looking  now  almost  vertically  into  a canon  whose  bottom  is  a mile  below, 
and,  from  the  same  point,  at  the  ridge  now  thousands  of  feet  above — 
the  descent  of  the  Sierra  Madre  is  made.” 

After  a hot  pursuit  of  two  hundred  miles,  Captain  Lebo  of  the  Tenth 
Cavalry  brought  the  Apaches  to  bay,  and  a brisk  conflict  followed,  just 
within  the  confines  of  Mexico.  While  it  was  in  progress,  Corporal  Scott 
was  stretched  helpless  under  a hot  fire  of  the  Indians.  Lieutenant  Pow- 
hatan H.  Clarke,  fresh  from  West  Point,  rushed  out  at  the  peril  of  his  life, 
lifted  the  body  of  the  veteran  from  the  ground,  and  brought  it  to  a place  of 
safety.  Sergeant  Samuel  Adams  and  Packer  Bowman  did  a like  service 
for  Conradi,  a private,  who  was  killed  while  they  were  carrying  him  off. 

Lawton’s  command  now  took  the  trail,  clinging  to  it  like  bloodhounds, 
insensible  to  heat,  hunger,  thirst,  and  fatigue.  Geronimo  and  his  band 
could  not  shake  them  off.  The  pursuit  reached  a point  three  hundred 
miles  south  of  the  boundary  line,  winding  in  and  out,  and  repeatedly  inter- 
secting itself  through  the  mountains  and  canons  of  Sonora.  Finally,  the 
band  was  worn  out  and  ready  to  give  up.  Lieutenant  C.  B.  Gatewood  of 
the  Sixth  Cavalry,  at  the  imminent  risk  of  his  life,  went  unattended  by 
troops  into  the  hostile  camp,  meeting  Geronimo  face  to  face,  and  giving 
him  the  demand  for  surrender.  The  chief  was  helpless,  and  submitted. 

About  the  same  time  the  four  hundred  Warm  Spring  and  Chiricahua 
Indians  at  Fort  Apache,  who  were  on  the  point  of  revolting,  were  hurried 
eastward. 

So  long  as  Geronimo  and  the  members  of  his  band  were  in  Arizona  or 
New  Mexico,  or  indeed  anywhere  in  the  Southwest,  no  matter  how  closely 
confined,  no  settler  felt  safe.  There  was  no  saying  when  they  would  break 
out  and  renew  their  plundering  and  murder.  Accordingly  an  heroic  remedy 
was  adopted. 

Geronimo,  with  sixteen  men,  including  the  leading  chiefs,  was  sent  to 
Fort  Pickens,  Fla.,  and  the  rest  were  forwarded  to  their  relatives  at  Fort 
Marion,  St.  Augustine.  On  the  1st  of  May,  1887,  the  captives  were 
removed  to  Mount  Vernon,  Ala.,  on  account  of  their  health.  Afterward 
Geronimo  and  his  small  band  joined  them  there. 

The  Indian  prisoners  now  at  Mount  Vernon  are  three  hundred  and 
ninety,  of  whom  a hundred  and  thirty  are  children,  a hundred  and  eighty 
women,  and  eighty  warriors.  They  are  industriously  engaged  in  various 
pursuits,  and  it  is  hard  to  believe,  in  looking  on  the  quiet,  good-natured 
workers,  that  many  of  them  not  long  ago  were  the  worst  red  desperadoes 
that  ever  cursed  American  soil. 


GERONIMO  A GOOD  INDIAN. 


395 


In  October,  1888,  through  the  instrumentality  of  the  Boston  Citizen- 
ship Committee,  a school  was  opened  at  Mount  Vernon,  the  War  Depart- 
ment erecting  the  building,  and  the  committee  furnishing  the  teachers. 
The  Indians  did  not  take  kindly  to  it  at  first,  because  a hundred  of  their 
brightest  children  had  been  recently  removed  to  Carlisle,  Pa.  The 
Apaches  are  very  fond  of  their  children,  and  mourned  their  absence.  As 
a consequence,  they  looked  askance  at  the  provision  made  for  their  improve- 
ment and  education,  and  were  sullen  and  dissatisfied,  despite  the  assurances 
of  those  who  really  had  their  good  at  heart. 

General  Howard,  however,  poured  oil  upon  the  troubled  waters.  He 
visited  the  Indians  in  the  spring  of  1889,  and  pledged  his  word  that  the 
school  was  not  a preparatory  one  to  Carlisle.  They  knew  he  did  not  speak 
with  a “ forked  tongue,”  and  his  promise  could  be  relied  upon.  They  were 
satisfied,  and  Geronimo  himself  was  not  only  present  at  the  opening  of  the 
school,  but  acted  as  chief  usher.  Think  of  it ! The  school  is  flourishing 
and  the  Indians,  young  and  old,  make  excellent  progress  in  their  studies. 
Under  the  circumstances,  it  seems  safe  to  say  that  the  Indian  problem,  so 
far  as  the  Apaches  are  concerned,  has  been  successfully  solved. 


CHAPTER  XLII. 


THE  INDIAN  UPRISING  OF  189O-9I — THE  CAUSES  OF  THE  NUMEROUS 
INDIAN  WARS — THE  BOARD  OF  INDIAN  COMMISSIONERS — CORRUP- 
TION IN  THE  INDIAN  BUREAU — VIEWS  OF  GENERAL  O.  O.  HOWARD. 

FEW  people  understand  the  peril  which  we  escaped  in  the  winter  of 
1890-91.  There  were  days  and  weeks  when  a hasty  act,  an  inconsid- 
erate movement,  or  the  accidental  firing  of  a single  gun  would  have  precipi- 
tated the  most  fearful  Indian  war  in  American  history.  It  needed  but  a 
spark  to  kindle  a conflagration  that  would  have  swept  from  the  British 
Possessions  to  Mexico,  and  involved  the  loss  of  thousands  of  lives  and  the 
destruction  of  millions  of  dollars’  worth  of  property.  The  hands  would 
have  been  turned  back  on  the  dial  of  progress  for  a hundred  years.  Of  the 
quarter  of  a million  of  Indians,  one-half  would  have  been  drawn  into  a war, 
marked  by  atrocities  from  which  the  imagination  recoils. 

It  has  been  truly  said  that  back  of  the  numerous  Indian  wars,  with 
their  scenes  of  spoliation  and  cruelty,  will  always  be  found  some  act  of 
injustice  on  the  part  of  the  white  man.  General  Grant,  when  he  became 
President,  was  so  impressed  by  this  fact,  and  the  belief  that  the  American 
Indian  is  susceptible  to  civilization  and  contains  within  himself  hopeful 
elements,  that  he  said  in  his  inaugural  address: 

“The  proper  treatment  of  the  original  occupant  of  this  land,  the 
Indian,  is  one  deserving  of  careful  study.  I will  favor  any  course  toward 
them  which  tends  to  their  civilization,  Christianization,  and  ultimate  citi- 
zenship.” As  a consequence  of  this  avowal,  a delegation  of  citizens  from 
Philadelphia  called  on  President  Grant  in  March,  1868,  and  thanked  him 
for  his  utterance.  Some  time  later,  Congress  passed  a bill  authorizing  the 
President  to  appoint  a Board  of  Indian  Commissioners,  who  should  act  as 
an  advisory  body  with  the  President,  in  the  effort  to  civilize  the  Indians, 
calling  to  the  help  of  the  Government  the  agencies  of  education  and  reli- 
gion. The  members  of  the  board  received  no  salary.  The  following  gen- 
tlemen were  asked  to  become  members  of  the  board,  and  most  of  them 
accepted  the  invitation:  Honorable  John  V.  Farwell,  Chicago;  James  E. 
Yetman,  St.  Louis;  William  E.  Dodge,  New  York;  E.  S.  Tobey,  Boston; 
Honorable  Felix  R.  Brunot,  Pittsburg;  George  H.  Stuart  and  William 
Welsh,  Philadelphia.  These  were  good  men  and  true,  and  they  did  benefi- 
cent work.  They  visited  various  Indian  tribes,  carefully  studied  their 

396 


FRAUD  AND  DISHONESTY  ON  EVERY  HAND.  397 

condition,  and  brought  to  bear  their  broad  and  enlightened  views  in  the 
attempts  to  ameliorate  their  condition. 

As  might  have  been  anticipated,  however,  the  board  were  hindered  by 
the  political  conditions  of  the  times.  Those  were  the  days  when  corrup- 
tion stalked  through  the  land,  and  the  Indian  Bureau  was  the  hotbed  of 
fraud  and  dishonesty.  There  was  a riot  of  robbery,  the  government  and 
the  Indians  being  plundered  on  every  hand,  while  scoundrels  grew  rich,  and 
crime  went  unpunished.  Herbert  Welsh,  the  intelligent  and  devoted 
friend  of  the  red  man,  relates  the  following  incident,  which  is  but  a type  of 
scores  of  similar  ones : 

“An  Indian  agent,  located  at  one  of  the  agencies  among  the  Sioux,  was 
suspected  of  defrauding  the  Government  and  the  Indian  to  the  extent  of 
about  eighty  thousand  dollars.  An  investigating  committee  was  sent  from 
Washington  to  inspect  his  affairs.  The  agent  got  wind  of  their  coming 
and  determined  to  outwit  them.  He  bribed  one  of  his  interpreters  to 
meet  the  committee  at  a point  on  the  Missouri  where  they  would  be 
obliged  to  take  stage  for  the  agency.  The  committee,  in  the  long  drive  to 
the  agency,  fell  into  conversation  with  their  unsuspected  fellow  traveler, 
found  him  well  acquainted  with  the  Indians,  and  were  especially  overjoyed 
to  discover  that  he  spoke  Dakota.  ‘The  very  thing,’  they  said.  ‘We 
will  secure  his  services  as  an  interpreter.’  The  fellow  consented,  and 
received  fifty  dollars  in  payment  for  his  services.  Thus  an  interpreter  was 
secured  who  translated  the  bitter  complaints  of  the  Indians  in  a way  to 
make  them  appear  as  warm  commendations  of  their  agent.  The  commit- 
tee returned,  baffled,  to  Washington.” 

The  Board  of  Indian  Commissioners,  while  doing  great  good,  were  so 
crippled  by  the  political  powers  arrayed  against  them,  that  they  fell  short 
of  what  they  should  have  done  and  what  they  expected  to  do.  Several  of 
the  most  active  members  resigned,  believing  they  could  accomplish  more 
by  independent  action.  The  body  is  still  in  existence,  but  not  so  active 
as  formerly.  Mr.  Herbert  Welsh  has  done  much  to  enlighten  the  country 
by  his  writings  and  addresses  on  the  true  relation  of  the  Indian  to  the 
Government. 

General  O.  O.  Howard,  of  the  United  States  Army,  a Christian  soldier 
eminent  for  his  culture  and  humanity,  gives  the  following  clear  idea  of  the 
causes  of  the  trouble  with  the  powerful  Sioux,  a tribe  of  Indians  in  whom 
the  student  of  American  history  must  always  be  deeply  interested : 

“At  the  beginning  of  this  century,  the  country  of  the  Sioux  Indians  was 
that  portion  of  the  United  States  lying  between  the  Mississippi  River  and 
the  Rocky  Mountains,  north  of  the  fortieth  parallel  of  latitude.  Their 
domain  extended  beyond  our  limits  and  into  the  possessions  of  Great 
Britain  on  the  north.  It  was  drained  by  the  great  Missouri  River  and  its 


398 


CAUSES  OF  THE  TROUBLE  WITH  THE  SIOUX. 


many  tributaries.  Their  reserved  lands  have  been  made  smaller  and 
smaller,  until,  after  omitting  several  detached  portions,  about  30,000  Sioux 
Indians  inhabited  one  tract  of  country  called  the  ‘ Sioux  Reservation,’ 
which  contained  a little  more  than  35,000  square  miles,  or  20,000,000  acres. 

“This  is  a grass-covered,  rolling  prairie  country,  with  timber  only  along 
the  creeks  and  rivers.  The  soil  is  unusually  alluvial,  and  all  streams  cut 
deep  ravines.  Therefore  the  country  is  much  broken.  In  places  appar- 
ently underlying  deposits  of  coal  have  been  formed  in  ages  past,  and  such 
portions  are  called  ‘Bad  Lands,’  being  very  rough  and  almost  without 
vegetation. 

“Some  twenty-five  years  ago,  to  distinguish  between  Indians  raiding  or 
hostile  and  Indians  merely  hunting,  reservations  were  established.  That 
now  occupied  by  the  Sioux  is  what  remains  of  that  then  allotted  to  them 
by  a treaty  with  some  of  their  bands.  The  reservation  itself  has  been 
several  times  reduced,  the  United  States  being  the  purchaser  of  the  portion 
surrendered. 

“When  the  buffalo  became  extinct  and  other  game  scarce  it  was  neces- 
sary to  furnish  the  Indians  with  clothing  and  food  or  put  them  into  a condi- 
tion of  self-support.  The  emergency  was  too  sudden  for  the  latter,  so  that 
the  feeding  and  clothing  was  accomplished  by  collecting  them  in  groups  at 
several  points  in  their  vast  domain,  under  the  care  of  civil  agents  charged 
with  this  work  and  also  with  their  instruction  in  the  peaceful  arts. 

“There  are  now  five  Sioux  agencies,  from  one  to  two  hundred  miles 
from  each  other,  viz.,  Standing  Rock,  Cheyenne  River,  Brule,  Rosebud, 
and  Pine  Ridge. 

“At  each  of  these  agencies  there  are  two  distinct  classes  of  Indians,  the 
progressive  and  those  who  resist  progress,  i.  e .,  the  reactionary.  The  pro- 
gressives are  willing  to  till  the  land,  live  honestly,  and  are  more  or  less 
Christianized.  The  reactionary  are,  as  one  would  suppose,  at  all  times 
subject  to  excitement,  and  delighting  from  youth  to  age  in  war  and  pil- 
lage. They  have  habitually  made  raids  and  forays  against  other  Indians, 
with  now  and  then  a hostile  expedition  against  the  white  men  in  their 
neighborhood.  Over  these  latter  spirits  Sitting  Bull  exercised  his  power, 
instanced  in  the  war  with  General  Terry,  which  resulted  in  the  bloody  mas- 
sacre of  Custer  and  his  cavalry  during  the  summer  of  1876.  What  has 
been  called  the  ‘Messiah’  craze  was  taken  advantage  of  by  Sitting  Bull 
and  other  medicine  men  like  him  to  divide  the  Indians  still  more,  excite 
them  to  intense  enthusiasm,  and  so  have  them  ready  to  carry  out  his  pecu- 
liar machinations.  Doubtless  Sitting  Bull’s  death,  resulting,  as  it  did,  in  a 
fierce  combat  on  the  spot,  had  no  immediate  effect  to  pacify  the  wilder 
Sioux;  it  rather  increased  the  terror  of  the  timid  and  infuriated  those 
who  were  already  intoxicated  by  the  weird  dancing. 


THE  SITUATION  AT  PINE  RIDGE. 


399 


“Sitting  Bull  was  combative  and  possessed  great  power  of  endurance 
and  an  unusual  amount  of  diplomatic  tact.  He  was  a dangerous  character, 
and  probably  his  death  will,  in  the  end,  be  a benefit  to  all  the  Indians  in 
the  country,  and  certainly  to  the  settlers  of  South  Dakota  and  Nebraska. 

“There  are  a few  further  facts  which  may  give  a clear  idea  of  the  situa- 
tion at  one  of  the  agencies,  namely,  the  Pine  Ridge.  A report  to  Wash- 
ington, of  date  April  7,  1890,  says:  ‘In  former  years  this  agency  was- 
allowed  5,000,000  pounds  of  beef.  This  year  it  has  been  reduced  to  4,000,- 
000  pounds.  These  Indians  were  not  prepared  for  this  change,  no  instruc- 
tions had  been  given  the  agent  that  1,000,000  pounds  of  beef  would  be  cut 
off  from  the  Indians  this  year,  consequently  issues  were  made  from  the 
beginning  of  the  fiscal  year,  July  1,  1889,  until  the  date  of  the  final  deliv- 
ery of  beef,  October  15,  1889,  on  the  basis  of  5,500,000  pounds  for  the  year. 
This  necessitated  a large  reduction  in  the  beef  issued  afterward  to  catch 
up  with  the  amount,  and  came  at  just  the  worst  season  of  the  year/ 
This  report  was  official.  The  object  of  the  reduction  of  rations  on  the  part 
of  Congress  has  uniformly  been  to  compel  the  Indians  to  increased  industry 
and  more  active  provision  for  their  own  wants.  Certainly  this  explanation 
was  due  to  the  agent  and  to  the  Indians  at  a very  early  date.  The  same 
report  further  alleges  another  important  fact  relating  to  the  Government 
Commissioners  who  last  year  went  to  them  to  negotiate  a further 'reduc- 
tion of  their  reservation.  The  report  says:  ‘Their  enforced  absence 
attending  the  Sioux  Commission  caused  them  to  lose  all  they  had  planted, 
by  the  stock  breaking  in  on  their  farms  and  destroying  everything  that 
they  had.  They  have  been  compelled  to  kill  their  private  stock  during 
the  winter  to  keep  from  starving,  and  in  some  cases  have  been  depredating 
upon  the  stock  of  white  people  living  near  the  line  of  the  reservation/ 

“The  report  near  its  close  had  a significant  paragraph:  ‘ Men  will  take 
desperate  measures  sooner  than  suffer  from  hunger.  Not  much  work  can 
be  expected  with  the  present  feeling.  The  Indians  who  advocate  signing 
away  their  lands  are  now  laughed  at  and  blamed  for  being  fooled.  They 
don’t  get  even  their  former  rations,  and  ask  where  all  the  promises  are  that 
were  made.  The  Government  must  keep  faith  as  well  as  the  Indians.’ 

“This  early  report  would  doubtless  have  been  an  ample  warning  could 
the  consequences  of  delay  have  been  foreseen.  The  field  was  so  vast  that 
a mistake  like  this  at  a single  agency  then  (in  April)  appeared  a small  mat- 
ter, to  be  regarded  perhaps  as  only  a spur  to  more  persistent  efforts  for 
self-support.  It  is  some  time  since  I have  had  much  to  do  with  the 
Indian  tribes  that  have  centered  at  the  Cheyenne  River,  Pine  Ridge,  or 
Rosebud  agency,  but,  providentially,  I have  had  much  to  do  with  many  of 
the  best  and  some  of  the  worst  of  the  Indian  tribes. 

“First.  As  to  the  causes  of  the  outbreak  of  1890-91.  If  we  consult 


400 


THE  CHRISTIAN  INDIANS. 


either  the  reports  that  have  been  made  to  the  War  and  Interior  Depart- 
ments or  our  own  experience  of  Indian  wars,  we  find  the  causes  of  the 
trouble  uniformly  the  same.  They  proceed  primarily  from  the  minds  and 
hearts,  as  yet  unchanged,  of  a large  proportion  in  each  tribe,  where  the 
outbreak  comes,  of  savages — Indians — whose  thoughts,  whose  manners  and 
customs,  and  modes  of  living  and  government,  are  not  our  manners  and 
customs  and  modes  of  living. 

“One  of  the  greatest  friends  of  the  Indians,  and  one  of  the  best  men  of 
our  time,  Bishop  WhippD  nf  Minnesota,  said  that  in  the  work  of  convert- 
ing, educating,  and  civilizing  the  Indian  the  efforts  were  more  remunera- 
tive than  among  any  other  people.  He  is  certainly  right.  But  that  work 
itself  has  thus  far  been  but  a drop,  a fragment;  not  faithful  except  in 
:spots,  not  continuous,  and,  according  to  the  errors  of  teachers,  too  often 
proceeding  upon  untrue  and  untenable  theories. 

- “Still,  when  the  Nez  Perce  war  broke  out  both  Catholic  and  Protestant 
separated  themselves  from  the  hostiles,  and  remained  so  to  the  end  of  that 
terrible  conflict.  Some,  of  course,  took  the  red  man’s  side.  True  enough, 
but  it  was  not  the  rule.  Christian  Indians  worked  hard  in  council  to  pre- 
vent the  war.  They  protected  teachers  and  escorted  them  with  a large 
force  for  seventy  miles  to  places  of  safety.  They  did  not  want,  like  many 
of  our  loyal  Southern  officers  in  1 86 1 , to  go  out  and  fight  against  the  non- 
treaty savages  who  went  to  war,  for  they  were  all  Nez  Perces,  but  they  did 
often  furnish  us  with  guides  and  scouts. 

“And  we  notice  the  same  conduct  among  the  Sioux  of  the  Northwest. 
The  Santee  Sioux,  for  example,  are  a quiet,  orderly,  well-behaved  band. 
Many  of  them  are  sincere  Christians,  many  are  respectable  farmers.  They 
h>ave  good  schools  and  churches,  and,  if  the  reports  are  to  be  believed, 
none  of  them  went  to  war.  The  reason  is  that  the  majority  of  them  are 
already  Christian  in  their  minds,  in  their  manners,  and  modes  of  living. 

“Another  Episcopal  minister,  Bishop  Hare  of  Dakota,  to  the  northwest 
of  the  Santees,  wrote:  ‘One  thousand  seven  hundred  Sioux  Indians  com- 
municants, Sioux  Indians  contributing  $3000  annually  for  religious  pur- 
poses. . . .’  He  remarks  further:  ‘The  very  leaders  of  this  disturb- 
ance, which  alarmed  the  whole  Northwest,  covered  the  better  Indians  with 
shame,  brought  scorn  upon  their  essays  into  civilization,  robbed  many  of 
them  of  their  hard-earned  possessions,  and  exposed  them  to  personal  peril, 
should  not  be  left  at  liberty  hereafter  to  repeat  the  baneful  operation.’ 

, “Again  he  said:  ‘The  friendly  Indians  fear  that  in  the  event  of  any 
trouble  their  ponies  will  be  taken  from  them,  whether  innocent  or  guilty.’ 
Here  is  a significant  fact:  ‘I  have  visited  several  agencies,  and  have  late 
news  from  all  the  Sioux  Indian  country,  but  I have  yet  to  learn  of  a single 
case  of  insult,  much  less  of  violence,  offered  to  any  teacher  or  missionary 


GHOST  DANCE. 


THE  MESSIAH  CRAZE. 


403 


in  any  of  the  fifty  odd  stations  scattered  all  over  the  disturbed  districts  in 
South  Dakota.’  This  was  before  the  death  of  Sitting  Bull,  the  battle  at 
Wounded  Knee,  and  the  attack  at  the  Catholic  Mission  not  far  from  Pine 
Ridge.  Still,  the  fact  is  patent  that  the  Christian  Indians,  clergy  and  laity, 
have  struggled  hard  against  the  terrible  wildness  that  recently  stirred  up 
the  reactionary  classes.  There  are  more  than  5000  Christian  Sioux,  who, 
in  spite  of  the  influence  of  race  prejudice  and  misinterpretations  of  white 
men,  have  stood  firmly  to  their  choice  of  Christian  and  civilized  ways,  and 
I think  all  good  people  the  world  over  have  no  reason  to  be  discouraged 
during  this  storm  of  heathenism.  White  men  and  women  are  led  into  a 
furor  of  enthusiasm  often,  and  behold  a Messiah  coming,  in  propria  persona, 
and  they  have  at  times  done  extravagant  things  at  which  the  worldly 
world  has  jeered  and  laughed.  Some  satanic  agencies  delight  in  raising  up 
false  Messiahs  and  false  Christs,  and  good,  well-disposed  men  are  decried. 
The  Piute  Indian  who  started  his  wild  theory,  who  is  reported  to  have 
walked  a thousand  miles  to  carry  it  from  tribe  to  tribe,  was  another  false 
Messiah.  He  pretended  to  miraculous  power.  He  submitted,  ostensibly, 
to  be  shot,  and  then  was  found  alive.  He  encouraged  the  wild  dance,  that 
grew  wilder  and  wilder  under  his  inspiration.  He  demanded  peace  and 
submission,  it  is  true,  but  he  might  as  well  ask  the  untamed  lion  not  to 
roar,  or  the  tigress  robbed  of  her  young  not  to  spring  upon  the  robber,  as 
to  ask  the  wild  Sioux  to  keep  the  peace  when  their  old  dances  had  roused 
all  the  fierceness  of  their  unchanged  hearts. 

“One  distinguished  personal  witness,  speaking  of  the  Messiah  craze, 
calls  it  ‘the  delusion  which  has  taken  possession  of  the  minds  of  the 
wilder  portion  among  the  Indians.  The  leaders  in  the  movement  have 
invigorated  old  heathen  ideas  with  snatches  of  Christian  truth,  and  have 
managed  to  excite  an  amount  of  enthusiasm  which  is  amazing.  They 
teach  that  the  Son  of  God  will  presently  appear  as  the  avenger  of  the  wild 
Indian;  the  earth  will  shiver;  a great  wave  of  new  earth  will  overspread 
the  present  face  of  the  world  and  bury  all  the  whites  and  all  the  Indians 
who  imitate  their  ways,  while  the  real  Indians  will  find  themselves  on  the 
surface  of  the  new  earth,  basking  in  the  light.  The  old  ways  will  all  be 
restored  in  primitive  vigor  and  glory,  and  the  buffalo,  antelope,  and  deer 
will  return.’ 

“Behold  the  dancing  picture — a special  garb;  a calico  shirt,  short,  like 
the  army  jacket;  they  call  it  the  ‘mysterious  shirt.’  The  leaders  preach; 
the  people  sing  and  cry  out:  ‘The  buffalo  are  coming!  the  buffalo  are 
coming!’  Now  they  seize  each  other’s  hands  and  go  round  and  round  in 
circles,  half  confused,  wilder  and  wilder,  till  one  after  another  the  dancers 
fall  unconscious.  The  medicine  men  call  these  dead,  and  declare  that  they 
are  making  a visit  to  the  great  spirit  world,  where  they  will  meet  the  Son 


40^  SECONDARY  CAUSES  OF  INDIAN  WARS. 

of  God  and  all  true  friends  who  have  gone  before.  Coming  back  to  life, 
they  tell  of  their  strange  visions. 

“The  good  Bishop  of  Dakota  remarks:  ‘I  look  upon  the  movement  as 
the  efforts  of  heathenism,  grown  desperate,  to  recover  its  vigor  and  rein- 
state itself.  Many  of  the  missionaries  have  long  expected  such  a 
struggle.’ 

“Once  when  the  writer  was  in  council  with  a body  of  wild  Indians  who 
believed  in  spiritism,  who  drummed  continuously  about  every  sick  man, 
woman,  or  child,  and  listened  to  the  wizards  among  them,  called  medicine 
men,  they  questioned  him  as  follows: 

“ ‘Will  you  give  us  schools  and  churches  and  farms  and  houses  and. 
implements  for  all  kinds  of  work  if  we  will  do  as  you  want?’ 

“‘Yes,  the  Government  will  do  all  that,  and  teach  you  to  live  as  the 
white  men  do.’ 

“ ‘Now,  General  Howard,  we  tell  you  that  those  are  the  very  things  we 
do  not  want.  We  want  the  earth  to  be  as  it  is — nothing  should  break  up 
the  surface  of  the  earth.  We  will  not  have  schools  nor  churches  nor  farms 
nor  white  men’s  houses  nor  their  ways  of  living.  We  will  always  be 
Indians.’ 

“This  is  still  the  real  bottom  spirit  that  actuates  every  wild  Indian  who 
' has  the  fire  of  Indian  manhood  in  his  soul.  As  to  secondary  causes  of 
Indian  wars,  some  have  already  been  hinted  at. 

“i.  Promises  of  money  not  speedily  fulfilled.  For  years  the  Sioux 
have  had  several  of  these  promises  given  by  general  officers,  United  States 
Commissioners,  and  Government  agents.  It  takes  a long,  long  time  to  get 
the  necessary  appropriation  through  both  Houses  of  Congress.  No  officer 
or  commissioner  can  transfer  his  sympathy  to  our  legislators.  They,  like 
all  legislative  bodies,  have  a way  unto  themselves.  Years  and  years’ 
pledges  to  sundry  tribes,  we  own  it  with  sorrow,  have  remained  unful- 
filled. 

“As  to  the  Sioux,  their  consent  to  the  great  breach  of  their  reservation 
was  by  no  means  unanimous.  The  dissenters  quickly  embrace  a chance  to 
revenge  themselves.  Minorities  among  white  men  often  are  dissatisfied 
and  occasionally  turbulent.  The  Sioux  minority  exceeds  the  fervor  of 
white  legislators. 

“When  white  men  have  claims  against  the  Government  they  prosecute 
them  with  patience  and  wait,  sometimes  for  months  and  sometimes  for 
years,  for  the  essential  appropriations.  The  reactionary  Sioux  cannot  be 
made  to  understand  the  reasons  for  such  long  periods  of  waiting.*  They 
interpret  them  as  resulting  from  forked  tongues  and  bad  hearts.  For 
example,  after  the  war  of  1876,  when  certain  Sioux  Indians  were  disarmed 
and  deprived  of  their  ponies,  all  who  were  not  engaged  among  the  hostiles 


THE  INDIAN  AGENTS. 


405 


were  promised  payment  for  their  losses.  This  payment  has  not  yet  been 
completed. 

“2.  In  some  parts  of  our  new  States  the  land  boom  has  ended  badly, 
and  white  men  are  land  poor.  They  become  panicky.  They  fear  a 
drunken  Indian  at  a brothel  or  saloon  corner.  They  magnify  the  situa- 
tion: ‘Indians  are  near!  Indians  are  insolent!  Indians  are  dancing! 
Indians  are  coming!  They  can  wipe  us  out!’  Governors,  congressmen, 
and  newspapers  are  besieged  and  urged  to  help.  ‘Troops,  troops,  more 
troops!’  they  cry.  The  governor  sends  militia  or  volunteers.  The 
United  States  finally  sends  to  the  panicky  place  a few  companies  of  regu- 
lars. Money  comes  and  trade  is  quickened.  Men  who  have  nothing  to 
lose  and  everything  to  gain  by  such  rows  get  congenial  employment  and 
the  means  often  for  a renewal  of  dissipated  lives. 

“ ‘But  this  does  not  make  war!’  Yes,  it  does.  Poor  ranchmen,  far  and 
near,  get  frightened  at  the  rumors,  and  rush  with  their  families  to  the 
nearest  settlement.  The  Indians  get  the  rumor  ten  times  exaggerated 
and  the  wild  become  wilder,  and  women  and  children  are  often  blinded  by 
terror.  Young  ambitious  fellows  among  them  catch  a special  inspiration, 
rush  off  perhaps  in  small  parties,  kill  cattle,  take  horses,  and  murder 
mining  prospectors  and  individual  travelers.  They  then  return  with  their 
booty  and  the  scalps  to  be  the  lions  of  the  tribe.  Every  peace  council  is 
now  overborne,  and  war  is  upon  us  with  all  its  supreme  outrage  and  horror. 

“Indian  agents  have  a hard  and  trying  position.  They  must  be  gigan- 
tic in  ability  and  character  to  control  at  such  times.  We  must  not  blame 
them  too  much.  Some  are  not  suited  at  all  to  such  work;  some  are  not 
wise  governors ; but  I have  found  among  them  very  competent  men.  But 
no  one  man  can  quench  the  fire  of  a blazing  house  after  it  has  passed  the 
first  stage  of  ignition. 

“A  journal,  speaking  of  this  outbreak,  well  remarks  that  the  Indian 
* tests  practically  the  agent  put  in  charge  of  him.  If  he  finds  him  a man  of 
good  qualities,  firm,  true  to  his  word,  fearless,  yet  generous  and  kind,  he 
makes  of  him  a friend.  . . . An  agent  who  has  established  such  relations 
with  the  Indian  can  exercise  over  him  almost  unlimited  control.  But  an 
agent  who  has  incurred  suspicion  or  dislike  may  discharge  his  duties  with 
fidelity  and  still  be  only  a cause  of  constant  irritation.  . . . An  agent 
whom  he  trusts  can  do  more  with  the  Indian  in  peace  or  war  than  an  army 
with  banners.  It  is  by  the  influence  of  such  men  that  treaties  have  been 
concluded  when  the  whole  power  of  the  government  could  not  have 
secured  the  assent  of  a score  of  Indians.  ...  It  is  by  their  influence  that 
conflict  has  been  avoided  in  numberless  cases.  And  this  individual  way  of 
dealing  with  the  Indians  is  the  only  way  that  has  ever  met  with  the  slight- 
est success.’  ” 


f 


CHAPTER  XLIII. 


THE  INDIAN  UPRISING  OF  189O-9I  (CONTINUED) — THE  LEADERS  OF  THE 
REACTIONARY  PARTY— FRAUD  IN  THE  PURCHASE  OF  INDIAN  LANDS— 
INDIAN  COMMISSIONS — BISHOP  HARE’S  VIEWS— THE  MESSIAH  CRAZE 
—SITTING  BULL— THE  INDIAN  POLICE. 


HE  most  prominent  leaders  of  the  reactionary  party  among  the 


Sioux  were  Spotted  Tail,  killed  by  Crow  Dog  in  a wrangle  in  1881, 
Red  Cloud,  and  Sitting  Bull.  These  chieftains,  all  of  whom  possessed 
great  native  ability,  brooded  over  the  wrongs  their  people  had  suffered  at 
the  hands  of  the  whites,  dreamed  of  the  day  when  the  Cacausian  should  be 
driven  into  the  sea,  and  were  not  only  untamable  in  their  resentment,  but 
continually  fomented  discontent  among  their  own  people.  The  part  that 
Sitting  Bull  took  in  the  Indian  troubles  fifteen  years  before,  has  been  told 
elsewhere. 

The  opportunity  which  the  malcontents  wanted  in  order  to  rouse  their 
followers  to  fury  was  certain  to  come.  It  never  fails  to  come  when  mat- 
ters are  in  a critical  condition. 

A glance  at  the  Sioux  reservation  will  show  how  desirable  it  was  for 
the  inhabitants  of  Dakota  to  open  a highway  through  the  heart  of  the 
Indian  lands,  and  to  secure  the  settlement  of  the  reservation  by  white  peo- 
ple. It  would  immeasurably  help  the  red  men  and  the  whites,  and  there 
was  no  reason  why  it  should  not  have  been  done.  All  that  the  owners 
demanded  was  to  be  treated  with  justice,  and,  had  this  been  the  case,  there 
would  have  been  no  trouble. 

In  1882,  a Commission  sent  out  from  Washington  offered  the  Sioux 
eight  cents  an  acre  for  their  land.  They  used  deception  in  some  instances 
to  secure  the  consent  of  the  Indians,  whose  friends  were  warned  in  time  to 
prevent  the  passage  of  the  bill  by  Congress. 

In  1887,  another  Commission  presented  a new  proposition  to  the  Indi- 
ans. It  was  an  improvement  on  the  former,  but  the  red  men  had  been 
rendered  suspicious  by  the  previous  attempt  and  refused  to  sign.  The  terms 
were  made  more  favorable  to  them,  and  finally  a new  Commission,  of 
which  the  distinguished  General  Crook  was  chairman,  succeeded  in  win- 
ning over  the  Sioux,  who  signed  the  new  treaty,  by  which  about  11,000,000 
acres  were  given  up  and  the  reservation  was  reduced  one-half. 

The  Indians  signed  with  great  reluctance  and  only  after  much  pres- 


406 


DEPLORABLE  CONDITION  OF  THE  INDIANS. 


407 


sure  had  been  brought  to  bear  on  them.  In  referring  to  this  matter, 
Bishop  Hare  says: 

“Some  preferred  their  old  life  the  more  earnestly  because  schools  and 
churches  were  sapping  and  undermining  it.  Some  wished  delay.  All 
complained  that  many  of  the  engagements  solemnly  made  with  them  in 
former  years  . . . had  been  bioken---and  heie  they  were  right.  They  sus- 
pected that  present  promises  of  pay  for  their  lands  would  prove  only  old 
ones  in  new  shape.  When  milch  cows  were  promised — cows  having  been 
promised  in  previous  agreements — the  Indians  exclaimed,  ‘There’s  that 
same  old  cow!’  and  demanded  that  no  further  surrender  be  expected  until 
former  promises  had  been  fulfilled.  They  were  assured  that  a new  era  had 
dawned,  and  that  all  past  promises  would  be  kept.  So  we  all  thought. 

“The  Indians  understand  little  of  the  complex  form  sand  delays  of  our 
government.  Six  months  passed  and  nothing  came.  Three  months  more, 
and  nothing  came.  But  in  the  midst  of  the  winter’s  pinching  cold  the 
Indians  learned  that  the  transaction  had  been  declared  complete,  and  half 
of  their  land  proclaimed  as  thrown  open  to  the  whites.  Surveys  were  not 
promptly  made ; perhaps  they  could  not  be,  and  no  one  knew  what  land 
was  theirs  and  what  was  not.  The  very  earth  seemed  sliding  from  beneath 
their  feet.  Other  misfortunes  seemed  to  be  crowding  on  them.  On  some 
reserves  their  rations  were  being  reduced,  and  lasted,  even  when  carefully 
husbanded,  but  one-half  the  period  for  which  they  were  issued.  In  the 
summer  of  1889,  all  the  people  on  the  Pine  Ridge  Reserve — men,  women, 
and  children — were  called  in  from  their  farms  to  the  agency  to  treat  with 
the  Commissioners,  and  were  kept  there  a whole  month,  and,  on  returning 
to  their  homes,  found  that  their  cattle  had  broken  into  their  fields  and 
trampled  down  or  eaten  up  all  their  crops.  This  was  true  in  a degree  else* 
where.  In  1890,  the  crops,  which  promised  splendidly  early  in  July,  failed 
entirely  later,  because  of  a severe  drought.  The  people  were  often 
hungry,  and  the  physicians  in  many  cases  said  died,  when  taken  sick,  noT 
so  much  from  disease  as  from  want  of  food. 

“No  doubt  the  people  could  have  saved  themselves  from  suffering  if 
industry,  economy,  and  thrift  had  abounded;  but  these  are  just  the  vir- 
tues which  a people  merging  from  barbarism  lack.  The  measles  prevailed 
in  1889,  and  were  exceedingly  fatal.  Next  year  the  grippe  swept  over  the 
people  with  appalling  results.  Whooping-cough  followed  among  the  chil- 
dren. Sullenness  and  gloom  began  to  gather,  especially  among  the  heathen 
and  wilder  Indians.  A witness  of  high  character  told  me  that  a marked 
discontent,  amounting  almost  to  despair,  prevailed  in  many  quarters.  The 
people  said  their  children  were  all  dying  from  diseases  brought  by  the 
whites,  their  race  was  perishing  from  the  face  of  the  earth,  and  they  might 
as  well  be  killed  at  once.  Old  chiefs  and  medicine  men  were  losing  their 


408 


SOURCE  OF  THE  MESSIAH  CRAZE. 


power.  Withal  new  ways  were  prevailing  more  and  more,  which  did  not 
suit  the  older  people.  The  old  ways  which  they  loved  were  passing  away. 
In  a word,  all  things  were  against  them,  and  to  add  to  the  calamity,  many 
Indians,  especially  the  wilder  element,  had  nothing  to  do  but  to  brood 
over  their  misfortunes.  While  in  this  unhappy  state,  the  story  of  a Mes- 
siah coming,  with  its  Ghost  Dance  and  strange  hallucinations,  spread 
among  the  heathen  part  of  the  people.  The  Christian  Indians,  on  the 
whole,  maintained  their  stand  with  praiseworthy  patience  and  fortitude; 
but  the  dancers  were  in  a state  of  exaltation  approaching  frenzy. 
Restraint  only  increased  their  madness.  The  dancers  were  found  to  be 
well  armed.  Insubordination  broke  out  on  several  reserves.  The  author- 
ity of  the  agent  and  of  the  native  police  was  overthrown.  The  civilized 
Indians  were  intimidated.  Alarm  spread  everywhere.” 

Rev.  William  J.  Cleveland,  the  well-known  missionary  among  the 
Indians,  says  in  explanation  of  the  craze  about  the  coming  Messiah,  that 
they  told  it  to  him,  “from  the  people  who  wear  rabbit-skin  blankets  (who- 
ever they  are),  far  west  of  the  Yellow  Skins,  who  are  far  west  of  the  Utes.” 
Mr.  Welsh  surmises  that  the  Indians  thus  referred  to  are  the  Pueblo  or 
village  Indians  of  New  Mexico  and  Arizona.  They  use  rabbit-skin  blank- 
ets, live  far  west  of  the  Utes,  and,  moreover,  hold  the  old  Aztec  tradition 
of  Montezuma,  their  Saviour,  returning  to  free  their  race.  It  is  one  of 
their  customs  to  look  from  their  housetops  at  dawn,  for  the  coming  of 
Montezuma  over  the  eastern  mountains.  This  tradition,  formerly  confined 
to  the  southwest  and  certain  tribes  of  Indians,  spread  and  affected  other 
tribes. 

Be  that  as  it  may,  there  can  be  no  question  of  its  overmastering  influence 
on  the  Sioux.  It  ran  like  wildfire  among  them  and  was  eagerly  turned  to 
account  by  Sitting  Bull  and  the  other  leaders,  to  foment  the  fury  of  the 
red  men  against  the  whites.  The  revelation  from  the  Messiah  was  that  he 
had  once  descended  to  save  the  white  race,  but  they  rejected  and  killed 
him.  In  turn,  he  now  rejected  them  and  would  come  in  the  spring,  when 
the  grass  was  about  two  inches  high,  and  save  his  red  children  and  destroy 
the  white  ones.  It  was  enjoined  upon  all  those  who  believed  in  him  to 
wear  a peculiar  dress  and  to  practice  the  Ghost  Dance  as  often  and  as  long 
as  they  possibly  could,  as  a proof  of  their  faith.  If  any  died  of  exhaustion 
while  performing  this  weird  ceremony,  they  would  be  taken  immediately 
to  the  Messiah,  where  they  were  given  communion  with  the  departed  and 
whence  they  would  come  back  to  tell  the  living  of  what  they  had  heard 
and  seen.  When  the  Messiah  came  in  the  spring,  a new  earth  would  be 
created,  covering  the  present  world  and  burying  all  the  whites  and  those 
red  men  that  had  not  joined  in  the  dance.  The  Messiah  would  again 
bring  with  him  the  departed  of  their  own  people,  and  the  earth  would  once 


SITTING  BULL  THE  MARPLOT.  409 

more  be  as  their  forefathers  knew  it,  except  there  should  be  no  more 
death. 

Sitting  Bull'  was  the  leading  marplot  in  spreading  discontent  among 
the  Indians.  He  had  his  runners  everywhere  and  they  were  specially  active 
where  there  was  the  most  prospect  of  success,  such  as  among  Big  Foot’s  peo- 
ple on  the  Cheyenne  River  Reserve,  the  Lower  Brules  lower  down  the  Mis- 
souri, the  Upper  Brules,  or  Spotted  Tail’s  people,  at  Rosebud,  Red  Cloud’s 
people  and  among  the  Ogalalla’s  at  Pine  Ridge.  Here  was  the  best  of  soil  for 
sowing  the  dragon’s  teeth,  for  the  Indians  were  desperately  fanatical,  hun- 
gry, and  resentful  because  of  the  numerous  broken  pledges  of  the  Govern- 
ment to  them. 

Dr.  V.  T.  McGillycuddy,  one  of  the  most  faithful  and  energetic  of 
Indian  agents  (who  had  been  displaced  through  political  influences),  was 
present  at  Pine  Ridge,  as  the  representative  of  Governor  Mellette,  and 
under  date  of  December  4,  1 8qo,  wrote : 

“The  condition  of  affairs  when  I left  there  last  week  was  as  follows: 
About  four  thousand  of  the  agency  Indians  were  camped  at  the  agency. 
The  outlying  villages,  churches,  and  schools  were  abandoned.  About  two 
thousand  Brules  and  Wazazas-  were  camped  twenty-five  miles  distant  on 
Wounded  Knee  Creek,  uncertain  whether  to  come  into  the  agency  or  not, 
on  account  of  the  presence  of  troops.  Emissaries  of  Sitting  Bull  were  cir- 
culating among  all  of  the  Indians,  inciting  them  to  revolt,  and  ranging 
through  the  abandoned  villages  destroying  the  property  of  friendly  Indians. 
Indians  by  the  dozen  were  beseeching  me  to  obtain  permission  for  them  to 
go  to  their  homes  and  protect  their  property,  their  horses,  cows,  pigs, 
chickens,  etc. — the  accumulation -of  years.  Runners  came  to  me  from  the 
Brule  camp,  asking  me  to  come  out  and  explain  what  the  coming  of  troops 
meant.  They  said  they  knew  me,  would  believe  in  me,  and  come  in.  Red 
Cloud  and  other  chiefs  made  the  same  request  of  Agent  Royer  and 
Special  Agent  Cooper.  The  request  was  refused ; no  white  man  was  sent 
to  them.  On  Sunday  last  Sitting  Bull’s  emissaries  prevailed ; the  Brules 
became  hostile,  stole  horses  and  cattle,  and  are  now  on  the  edge  of  the 
Bad  Lands,  ready  for  a winter’s  campaign.  Many  Indians  who  were 
friendly  when  I left  the  agency  will  join  them.  They  have  possession  of 
the  agency  beef  herd  of  thirty-five  hundred  head  of  cattle.  The  presence 
of  troops  at  the  agency  is  being  rapidly  justified.  What  I state  investiga- 
tion can  substantiate.” 

Before  giving  an  account  of  the  arrest  and  death  of  Sitting  Bull,  a brief 
statement  should  be  made  concerning  the  Inxiian  police,  who  have  proven 
themselves  unsurpassed  in  heroism  and  devotion  to  duty. 

It  was  discovered  a number  of  years  ago  that  the  Indian  agent  could 
issue  orders,  but  that  only  he  himself  was  likely  to  enforce  them.  There 


4io 


THE  INDIAN  POLICE. 


were  soldiers  and  United  States  marshals  in  plenty,  but  none  of  them 
admitted  the  rule  of  the  Department  of  the  Interior.  So  when  an  agent 

wanted  anything  done  he  was 
obliged  to  do  it  himself  or  call  on 
the  uncertain  aid  of  the  friend- 
ly Indians  or  the  employees 
of  the  reservation. 
This  worked  very 
nicely  when  the 
friendlies  or  em- 
ployees desired  to 
see  the  order  en- 
forced, but  if  it  dis- 
pleased 
them  it 
had  bet- 


INDIAN  POLICE. 


ter  never  have  been  made,  for  they  only  laughed  at  the  agent,  and  even 
occasionally  refused  to  obey  the  orders  of  the  Indian  Commissioner,  unless 
the  “Great  Father”  backed  it  up  with  an  array  of  bayonets  and  deputy 
marshals.  So  the  force,  which  soon  gained  notoriety,  was  found  to  be 
a necessity. 

An  order  from  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  first  allowed  the  agents  to 
employ  friendly  members  of  the  tribe  or  tribes  under  their  charge  to  “pre- 
serve order  and  protect  the  property  of  the  Government  and  its  wards.’' 


UNIFORM  OF  THE  INDIAN  POLICE.  411 

At  first  two  or  three  members  were  chosen  on  each  reservation.  The 
police  were  sometimes  under  the  charge  of  a native  captain ; more  often 
they  were  captained  by  some  white  man.  They  were  paid  the  munificent 
salary  of  $10  a month  to  officers,  and  $8  a month  to  non-commissioned 
officers  and  privates.  From  the  time  of  the  appointment  of  the  police  the 
discipline  of  the  reservations  became  better.  Only  the  best  men,  morally 
and  physically,  were  accepted  by  the  Government,  which  was  thus  able  to 
secure  the  best  material  for  its  force  at  the  smallest  remuneration  paid  to 
any  of  its  numerous  employees.  The  entire  Indian  police  now  musters 
about  1000  men,  who  are  the  sole  agents  of  the  Interior  Department  for 
the  enforcement  of  its  rules  and  the  preservation  of  the  peace.  Besides 
their  salary  they  receive  the  usual  rations  and  supplies  of  wards  of  the 
Government. 

Their  duty,  as  prescribed  by  the  general  orders,  is  ‘‘To  obey  the 
instructions  of  agents,  protect  the  property  of  the  Government  and  the 
natives  against  cattle  thieves,  prevent  the  sale  of  liquor,  the  inroads  of  out- 
laws and  bad  whites,  and  to  suppress  every  kind  of  vice  and  lawlessness 
on  the  reservations.” 

The  Indian  police  wear  a uniform,  or  at  least  are  supposed  to.  This 
uniform,  which  is  made  of  the  national  blue  cloth,  partakes  of  both  the 
civil  and  military  habit.  It  approaches  the  cavalry  in  the  cut  of  the  blouse, 
and  the  trousers  with  the  high  top-boots.  But  the  military  aspect  is  lost 
in  the  broad  sombrero  and  the  cartridge  belt  and  Winchester.  Occasion- 
ally the  uniform  is  discarded,  and  then  the  members  of  the  force  dress  as 
they  please.  Sometimes  a cast-off  cavalry  suit,  or  a coat  belonging  to  a 
missionary  or  agent,  finds  the  back  of  a member  of  the  force  its  last  rest- 
ing-place before  being  cast  into  the  rag-bag.  But  among  this  brigade,  the 
members  of  which  stand  between  the  natives  and  their  white  guardians, 
the  most  absolute  discipline  is  maintained.  Most  of  the  men  belonging  to 
it  are  married,  and  live  near  the  agency  of  whatever  reservation  they  may 
be  attached  to.  They  have  no  general  headquarters,  being  distributed 
among  the  various  agencies. 


CHAPTER  XL IV, 


THE  INDIAN  UPRISING  OF  189O-9I  (CONTINUED) — DEATH  OF  SITTING 
BULL — SKETCH  OF  THE  FAMOUS  CHIEF  AND  MEDICINE  MAN- 
BATTLE  OF  WOUNDED  KNEE — INCIDENTS  OF  THE  FIGHT — BURN- 
ING OF  THE  CATHOLIC  MISSION  BUILDING —GLOOMY  OUTLOOK — 
DANGER  OF  PINE  RIDGE. 

OITTING  BULL  was  so  implacable,  active,  and  dangerous  that  his 
^ arrest  became  a necessity.  Accordingly,  General  Ruger,  at  St.  Paul, 
telegraphed,  December  12,  1890,  to  Colonel  Drum,  commanding  at  Fort 
Yates,  the  military  post  adjoining  Standing  Rock  agency,  to  arrest  the 
chief.  General  Ruger  desired  that  the  military  and  civil  agent  should 
co-operate.  Major  McLaughlin,  the  agent,  wished  to  effect  the  capture 
through  the  Indian  police,  so  as  not  to  irritate  the  followers  of  Sitting 
Bull.  The  time  fixed  was  when  most  of  the  Indians  were  absent  from  the 
camp,  drawing  their  rations  from  the  agency. 

The  arrest  would  have  been  made  on  the  date  fixed,  but  for  the 
attempt  of  Sitting  Bull  to  leave  the  reservation.  This  precipitated  action 
five  days  earlier  than  the  time  named.  The  Indian  police  to  the  number 
of  forty  set  out  to  perform  their  errand,  followed  at  some  distance  by  two. 
troops  of  cavalry  under  Captain  Fechet  and  a body  of  infantry  under 
Colonel  Drum. 

It  was  forty-three  miles  in  a southwesterly  direction  to  the  camp  of 
the  old  medicine  man.  Five  miles  from  the  tepees  on  Grand  River  the 
United  States  troops  stopped  and  held  a consultation  with  the  Indian 
police.  It  was  agreed  that  the  soldiers  should  station  themselves  within 
two  or  three  miles  of  the  Indian  camp,  where  they  could  be  readily  signaled. 

Bull  Head,  Shave  Head,  and  eight  policemen  entered  Sitting  Bull’s 
house,  raised  him  from  his  bed  and  brought  him  out.  They  tried  to  per- 
suade him  to  go  peaceably  with  them,  but  the  wrathful  chief  raised  the 
alarm  by  yelling.  Catch  the  Bear  dashed  out  of  his  tepee,  and,  seeing 
what  was  going  on,  ran  through  the  camp,  calling  upon  the  warriors  to 
bring  out  their  guns.  They  began  instantly  flocking  about  the  police,  who 
hurriedly  hoisted  Sitting  Bull  on  a horse.  Catch  the  Bear  fired  the  first 
shot,  wounding  Bull  Head  in  the  leg.  The  latter  instantly  wheeled  and  sent 
a bullet  through  Sitting  Bull’s  head  at  the  moment  he  was  shouting  his 
commands  to  his  followers.  Simultaneously  Red  Tomahawk,  of  the  police, 
shot  the  old  chief  in  the  stomach. 


412 


CONRAD  DISSTLER’S  ACCOUNT. 


413 


The  firing  now  became  general.  The  police  pressed  the  hostiles  so  hard 
that  they  retreated  to  the  stables,  a hundred  yards  distant.  The  police 
followed  and  drove  them  out,  and  obtaining  possession  of  a house,  they 
carried  their  dead  and  wounded  into  it.  There  were  a hundred  Sioux 
fighting  furiously,  and  the  position  of  the  police  was  fast  becoming  critical. 

At  the  first  outbreak,  a policeman  dashed  off,  his  horse  on  a dead  run, 
and  signaled  to  the  waiting  cavalry,  who,  having  heard  the  firing,  hurried 
forward  to  the  help  of  the  police.  They  opened  with  their  Hotchkiss  and 
Gatling  gun  on  the  hostiles,  who  fled  in  such  haste  that  their  families  were 
left  behind.  Then,  having  thoroughly  searched  the  woods  and  tepees,  the 
cavalry  and  police  fell  back  to  Oak  Creek,  eighteen  miles  north  of  Grand 
River,  where  they  camped  for  the  night. 

The  foregoing  account  of  the  death  of  Sitting  Bull  is  the  one  generally 
accepted.  There  is  no  denying,  however,  the  prevalence  of  the  belief  that, 
when  his  arrest  was  arranged,  it  was  understood  that  an  excuse  was  to  be 
found  for  putting  him  out  of  the  way. 

The  following  dispatch,  dated  St.  Paul,  December  6,  1891,  has  been 
widely  published : 

“Sitting  Bull  was  murdered.  Conrad  Disstler,  who  made  the  sixty- 
mile  march  across  the  sand  plains  of  the  Sioux  Reservation  from  Fort 
Yates  to  Grand  River  with  Troop  F,  Eighth  Cavalry,  on  December  6 last, 
told  the  story  of  the  killing  of  the  aged  chief  here  this  afternoon.  He 
read  the  affidavit  of  Sitting  Bull’s  wives,  charging  that  Bull  was  murdered, 
and  said  it  was  substantially  correct.  Disstler  was  an  eye  witness  of  the 
killing.  He  said : 

“ ‘Red  Tomahawk  never  liked  Bull,  and  he  was  glad  of  an  opportunity 
to  go  into  his  camp  under  Government  orders.  Troops  F and  G,  Eighth 
Cavalry,  under  Captain  Fechet,  arrived  at  Grand  River  at  six  o’clock  on 
the  morning  of  December  7.  The  Indian  police  were  ahead  of  us,  and  Red 
Tomahawk,  their  leader,  found  and  entered  the  tepee  of  Sitting  Bull. 
When  he  told  the  chief  that  he  was  to  come  with  him  Bull  made  no  resist- 
ance, but  came  out.  He  was  surrounded  by  women,  and  they,  alarmed, 
made  an  outcry.  Tomahawk  suddenly  drew  his  pistol  and  shot  the  aged 
chief.  Bull  fell  to  the  ground  wounded,  but  not  fatally,  while  Tomahawk 
and  his  party  made  for  a log  cabin,  where  they  were  quickly  besieged  by 
the  hostiles. 

“ ‘Captain  Fechet  brought  the  two  field-guns  into  play  at  once.  He 
and  Troop  G protected  them,  while  we  of  F were  dismounted  and  sent 
down  the  hill  on  a charge  into  the  camp.  As  we  started  the  Hotchkiss  and 
Gatling  guns  began  their  fire,  and  the  hostiles  fled  with  but  a poor  offer 
of  resistance. 

“ ‘Sitting  Bull,  after  receiving  his  wound,  had  crawled  into  a bush,  and 


414 


THE  CAREER  OF  SITTING  BULL. 


there  with  his  rifle  was  making  a fight.  He  was  dragged  forth,  and  an 
Indian  policeman  sprang  forward  with  a broken  pole,  used  on  the  sides  of 
wagons,  and  beat  in  his  head,  while  others  broke  his  rifle  over  his  head, 
and  still  others  slashed  his  face  horribly  with  their  knives.  In  this  manner 
he  died. 

“ ‘Lieutenant  Slocum  did  all  he  could  to  prevent  this  brutality,  but  the 
police  were  infuriated,  and  having  lost  five  or  six  of  their  number  in  the 
scrimmage,  they  were  not  to  be  pacified.’  ” 

Of  the  police  there  were  killed  Bull  Head,  the  lieutenant  in  command ; 
Shave  Head,  first  sergeant;  Little  Eagle,  fourth  sergeant;  Afraid-of- 
Soldiers,  private;  John  Armstrong,  special  police;  Harsh  Man,  special 
police,  and  Middle,  wounded. 

Bull  Head,  who  was  the  bitter  enemy  of  Sitting  Bull,  was  severely 
wounded  in  the  arm,  leg,  and  stomach.  The  surgeons  were  hopeful  of  pull- 
ing him  through,  but  he  died  three  days  after  being  shot. 

The  hostiles  known  to  be  killed  outright  were:  Sitting  Bull,  Black 
Bird,  Catch  the  Bear,  Little  Assiniboine,  Crow  Foot  (son  of  Sitting  Bull, 
seventeen  years  old);  Spotted  Horse  Bull,  a chief;  Brave  Thunder,  a chief, 
and  Chase,  wounded.  Several  others  were  badly  hurt  but  were  carried  off. 

The  bodies  of  the  five  Indian  police,  and  that  of  Sitting  Bull,  were 
buried  at  Fort  Yates  several  days  later. 

Sitting  Bull,  whose  stormy  career  ended  thus  tragically,  was  born  in 
Dakota,  in  1837.  He  was  a leader  from  boyhood  among  the  discontented 
Sioux,  his  hatred  of  the  white  race  being  inextinguishable.  After  the 
Minnesota  massacres  of  1862,  many  hitherto  peaceful  Indians  joined  Sit- 
ting Bull,  who  kept  up  a continual  warfare  on  the  frontier.  In  1874,  he 
drove  the  Crows  from  their  reservation.  The  Interior  Department  ordered 
him  to  remove  with  his  band  to  his  reservation  by  January  31,  1876.  He 
paid  no  heed  to  the  order,  and  the  following  day  the  Interior  Department 
turned  him  over  to  the  Department  of  War.  In  March,  General  Crook 
destroyed  the  village  of  Crazy  Horse  in  Yellowstone  Valley.  The  severe 
weather  compelled  a cessation  of  hostilities  for  some  time.  On  June  25 
occurred  the  frightful  disaster  on  Little  Big  Horn,  the  particulars  of  which 
have  been  already  given. 

It  will  be  remembered  that  as  General  Terry  advanced,  Sitting  Bull 
and  some  of  his  followers  fled  into  British  territory.  Under  the  persuasion 
of  the  officials  of  the  Dominion  of  Canada,  and  the  promise  of  pardon,  Sit- 
ting Bull  returned  to  American  territory  in  1880,  and  surrendered. 

For  a time  the  old  chief  acted  like  a good  Indian.  He  exhibited  him- 
self for  weeks  in  New  York  and  other  cities,  where  he  naturally  aroused 
much  interest  and  curiosity.  A striking  scene  was  that  observed  in  1883, 
when,  at  one  of  the  railway  stations  of  the  West,  Sitting  Bull  sat  on  a 


THE  FLIGHT  TO  THE  BAD  LANDS, 


415 


windy  eminence  selling  his  autographs  for  a dollar  and  a half  a piece.  In 
the  smiling  group  of  purchasers  gathered  around  him  were  Generals  U.  S. 
Grant  and  P.  H.  Sheridan,  Carl  Scliurz,  W.  M.  Evarts,  a number  of 
United  States  Senators  and  Congressmen,  several  British  noblemen, 
besides  Berlin  bankers,  German  professors,  railway  presidents,  financiers, 
and  journalists.  The  old  chief  did  a thriving  trade  disposing  of  his  sig- 
nature, which  was  something  like  this: 


In  July  and  August,  1888,  Sitting  Bull,  at  a conference  at  Standing 
Rock,  influenced  his  tribe  to  refuse  to  relinquish  their  lands.  He  was  as 
defiant  as  ever,  and,  but  for  his  death,  must  have  been  the  leading  actor  in 
the  last  outbreak. 

The  defeated  hostiles  made  for  the  Bad  Lands  at  a furious  rate  to  join 
Start  Bull  and  Crow  Dog,  who  were  entrenched  there  with  two  hundred 
Ogalalla  bucks.  Other  malcontents  followed  them,  and  the  danger  became 
so  threatening  that  the  arrival  of  General  Miles  at  the  agency  on  the  18th 
was  received  with  delight.  He  had  established  his  reputation  as  a skillful 
general  and  Indian  fighter,  and  it  was  felt  that  a reliable  hand  had  taken 
the  helm. 

While  the  troops  began  drawing  a cordon  around  the  Bad  Lands,  a 
great  many  Indians,  mostly  old  men,  women,  and  children,  straggled  into 
the  agency  at  Pine  Ridge  and  surrendered.  At  times  the  hope  was  strong 
that  the  trouble  would  be  settled  without  further  bloodshed,  and  again 
matters  became  so  critical  that  a terrific  battle  seemed  certain  to  occur  at 
any  day  and  hour.  On  the  23d  of  December  the  report  came  that  three 
thousand  Indians,  including  six  hundred  fighters,  were  in  the  Bad  Lands, 
and  that  they  were  continually  receiving  accessions. 

It  was  a great  relief,  therefore,  when  Big  Foot,  with  some  of  the  Sit- 
ting Bull  fugitives  and  disaffected  ones  on  Cherry  Creek,  Cheyenne  reser- 
vation, surrendered  to  Colonel  Sumner;  but  while  conducting  the  two  hun- 
dred prisoners  to  the  Missouri  River,  the  whole  band  made  their  escape 
(December  24)  and  hurried  south  to  join  Kicking  Bear  and  the  other 
hostiles.  Almost  immediately  on  receiving  the  news  four  companies  of 
the  Ninth  Cavalry  (colored),  with  two  Hotchkiss  guns  and  one  mortar,  left 
Pine  Ridge,  followed  by  a wagon  train  and  escort,  to  intercept  the  fugi- 
tives. December  28th,  Big  Foot  and  his  band  were  discovered  by  Little 
Bat,  an  Indian  scout,  eight  miles  north  of  Major  Whiteside’s  camp,  on 


416 


SURRENDER  OF  BIG  FOOT. 


CROW  INDIAN  SCOUTS. 


Wounded  Knee  Creek.  Four  troops  of  the  Seventh  Cavalry  immediately 
rode  thither.  As  they  approached,  the  hostiles  formed  a long  battle  line, 
one  hundred  and  fifty  strong,  with  guns  and  knives,  the  latter  in  cartridge 
belts  outside  their  blankets. 

Major  Whiteside  also  drew  up  in  battle  line.  Then  Big  Foot 
approached  on  foot  and  unarmed.  The  major  dismounted  and  walked 
forward  to  receive  him. 

“I  am  sick,”  said  Big  Foot.  “My  people  want  peace.  My  people 
here  want  peace ” 

“I  won’t  talk  or  parley  with  you/’  interrupted  the  officer.  “It  is 
either  unconditional  surrender  or  fight;  I await  your  answer.” 

“We  surrender;  we  would  have  done  so  before  but  couldn’t  find 
you.” 

At  a signal  from  their  chief,  the  warriors  raised  the  white  flag.  The 
military  quickly  surrounded  them  and  a courier  was  dispatched  post  haste 
for  four  troops  of  the  Seventh  Cavalry,  and  Lieutenant  Taylor’s  scouts,  to 
help  guard  and  disarm  the  party.  Big  Foot’s  band  included  one  hundred 


BATTLE  OF  WOUNDED  KNEE. 


BATTLE  OF  WOUNDED  KNEE.  4I9 

and  fifty  warriors  perfectly  armed,  with  two  hundred  and  fifty  squaws  and 
many  children. 

The  four  troops  of  the  Seventh  arrived  that  afternoon,  and  at  eight 
o’clock  the  following  morning  General  Forsyth  ordered  the  males  to  come 
from  their  tepees  for  a talk.  They  obeyed  sullenly,  ranging  themselves  in 
a semicircle  in  front  of  the  tent  where  Big  Foot  lay  sick  with  the  pneu- 
monia. The  Indians  were  told  that  they  must  give  up  their  arms  in 
groups  of  twenty  at  a time. 

The  score  first  selected  scowlingly  entered  their  tepees,  and  after 
awhile  straggled  out  again,  and  surrendered  two  rifles  only. 

Major  Whiteside,  who  was  superintending  matters,  was  angered.  He 
turned  and  consulted  for  a few  minutes  with  General  Forsyth.  The  cav- 
alry, in  obedience  to  orders,  dismounted,  formed  in  almost  a square  about 
twenty-five  paces  back  and  then  closed  in,  standing  within  twenty  feet  of 
the  Indians,  who  were  now  in  their  center. 

A detail  of  cavalry  were  then  sent  to  search  the  tepees.  When  they 
reappeared,  they  brought  out  about  sixty  guns.  They  were  now  directed  to 
search  the  warriors  themselves.  The  soldiers  proceeded  to  do  so,  with 
never  a thought  of  mischief. 

A dozen  Indians  had  probably  been  searched,  when,  in  a twinkling,  the 
rest  whipped  out  their  rifles  from  under  their  blankets  and  began  pouring 
bullets  into  the  soldiers,  who  a few  moments  before  were  almost  near 
enough  to  touch  them.  A hundred  shots  were  fired  by  the  hostiles  with 
such  suddenness  that  they  sounded  like  one  volley.  Then  the  troops 
opened  upon  the  Indians,  with  such  effect  that  they  toppled  over  like 
tenpins. 

The  firing  lasted  for  half  an  hour,  during  which  many  of  the  combat- 
ants discharged  their  rifles  almost  in  one  another’s  faces.  Some  of  the 
Indians  got  through  the  lines  and  away  to  the  small  hills  to  the  southwest ; 
about  one  hundred  were  killed,  while  twenty-four  of  the  soldiers  fell  and 
thirty-three  were  wounded.  Several  of  the  latter  died. 

The  charge  has  been  repeatedly  made  that  our  soldiers  pursued  and 
shot  down  women  and  children.  When  the  Sioux  delegation  visited 
Washington,  in  the  following  February,  the  chiefs  Turning  Hawk  and 
American  Horse  told  their  side  of  the  story  of  Wounded  Knee.  It  was  a 
shocking  narration,  and,  if  true,  would  be  an  eternal  disgrace  to  American 
arms. 

But  their  account  (American  Horse  was  not  at  the  battle)  cannot  be 
fully  accepted.  That  women  and  children  were  killed  in  the  desperate  fight 
is  admitted ; the  cause  lay  in  the  fact  that  they  were  among  the  fiercest 
combatants.  The  squaws  and  bucks  were  dressed  so  similarly  that  it  was 
hard  to  distinguish  them.  When  a soldier  saw  a redskin  drawing  a bead  on 


420 


A YOUNG  HERO. 


him,  and  he  knew  that  his  own  life  depended  upon  firing  first,  he  could  not 
be  expected  to  stop  and  inquire  the  sex  of  his  foe.  Nor,  when  a half 
grown  buck  was  on  the  point  of  sending  a bullet  through  his  body,  was  it 
fair  to  demand  that  he  should  pause  to  learn  the  age  of  his  enemy  and 
then  argue  the  question,  with  a view  of  dissuading  him  from  his  purpose. 
Captain  Wallace  was  beaten  to  death  and  his  skull  crushed  by  clubs  in  the 
hands  of  infuriated  squaws,  after  he  had  fallen  helpless  to  the  ground; 


THE  YOUNG  CANNONEER. 


and,  it  is  safe  to  say,  that  had  the  women  and  children  remained  non-partic- 
ipants, none  of  them  would  have  suffered  at  the  hands  of  the  soldiers. 

In  such  conflicts  there  are  always  a number  of  individual  instances  of 
striking  bravery.  A hero  thus  brought  forward  was  a young  man,  little 
more  than  a boy,  who  commanded  a Hotchkiss  gun.  All  through  the  desper- 
ate fight,  the  skill  with  which  he  handled  this  piece  roused  the  admiration 
of  the  troopers.  After  the  Sioux  stampeded  before  the  bullets  of  the 
Seventh  Cavalry,  this  strippling  of  a cannoneer  dragged  his  machine  from 
the  knoll  where  he  had  been  stationed.  Lieutenant  Hawthorne  was  at  his 
side.  The  battle  had  now  dwindled  to  heavy  skirmishing  on  the  crests  of 
the  ravines,  where  the  survivors  of  Big  Foot’s  band  had  sought  refuge. 
Although  the  bullets  were  whizzing  and  singing  in  the  air,  the  young  can- 
noneer wheeled  his  machine  to  the  mouth  of  the  gulch,  where  the  firing 
was  heaviest. 

The  men  attached  to  the  Hotchkiss  instantly  became  the  target  for 


SEVERAL  HEROES. 


421 


the  savages.  Bullets  splintered  the  black  wheels  of  the  gun  and  scattered 
the  dirt  right  and  left.  Lieutenant  Hawthorne  was  struck  by  a bullet. 
The  ball  hit  his  watch,  and,  glancing  off,  entered  his  groin.  But  the 
stripling  of  a cannoneer  continued  his  advance.  He  pushed  the  muzzle  of 
his  awful  contrivance  up  the  gulch  and  shelled  the  pockets  of  the  neigh- 
boring ravines.  Just  as  he  was  about  to  place  one  shell  in  the  breech  a 
bullet  struck  the  index  finger  of  his  right  hand  and  the  long  brass  missile 
fell  to  the  ground.  Without  faltering  the  young  man  seized  another  shell, 
placed  it  in  his  little  cannon,  and  fired.  The  shell  burst  in  a sort  of  cave 
where  eleven  bucks  were  sheltered.  The  destruction  was  appalling.  Not 
one  of  the  savages  escaped.  Ten  of  them  were  killed  instantly.  The  only 
survivor  of  the  shell  died  two  days  later. 

Continuing  his  advance,  the  young  cannoneer  swept  the  ravine  from 
side  to  side,  leaving  a score  or  more  of  dead  and  wounded  in  the-  bushes. 
When  the  last  shot  of  the  battle  was  over,  the  grimy  and  bloody  gunner 
was  found  leaning  against  a shattered  wheel  of  his  machine.  He  was 
exhausted,  and  could  not  stand  alone. 

Private  Kelly  was  shot  near  the  heart.  He  knew  the  mortal  nature  of 
his  wound,  and  as  he  rolled  over  said  to  Private  Girbach:  “I’m  gone,  sure; 
roll  me  around  and  make  a breastwork  of  me.” 

Private  McKinzie,  of  Troop  B,  was  hit  hard  in  the  left  shoulder. 
One  of  the  surgeons  saw  he  was  wounded  and  sent  a litter  bearer  to  bring 
him  in.  But  McKinzie  would  not  go.  He  insisted  on  shooting  away  at 
the  stubborn  foe.  “I  know  I’m  getting  weak,”  said  he,  “but  Tve  got  to 
have  a couple  of  shots  yet.”  He  did  fire  once  or  twice  more,  then  he 
fainted  from  loss  of  blood  and  was  taken  to  the  rear. 

Sergeant  Tritle,  of  E troop,  has  what  some  folks  call  “grit.”  His  first 
wound  was  in  his  left  hand,  and  a minute  or  two  later  he  got  another  bad 
one  in  the  hip.  That  would  have  satisfied  the  average  warrior,  but  the 
sergeant  was  not  inclined  to  retire.  Just  then  Sergeant  Nettles  was  killed 
almost  at  Tritle’s  side.  Tritle  saw  the  Indian  who  fired  the  fatal  shot,  and 
although  his  own  left  hand  was  shattered  and  blood  was  pouring  steadily 
from  his  hip,  he  said:  “I’ll  get  that  Indian.”  He  did,  and  an  instant  later 
a hostile  bullet  penetrated  his  left  breast.  “I  guess  I’ll  get  these  wounds 
dressed  now,”  was  his  faint  remark  as  he  crawled  for  the  rear. 

The  Seventh  Cavalry  had  just  reached  camp  on  the  morning  of 
December  30,  when  a courier  dashed  up  to  Pine  Ridge  with  the  alarming 
news  that  the  Catholic  Mission  building  was  on  fire  and  the  Indians  were 
massacring  the  teachers  and  pupils.  Within  twenty  minutes  the  hungry 
and  weary  troops  were  in  motion.  They  found  the  fire  was  at  the  day 
school,  a mile  nearer  Pine  Ridge.  The  Indians,  to  the  number  of 
eighteen  hundred,  under  the  command  of  Little  Wound  and  Two  Strike, 


422 


A DARK  OUTLOOK. 


were  about  a mile  beyond  the  mission.  The  Seventh  immediately  formed 
in  line  and  began  fighting.  Only  three  or  four  hundred  of  the  savages  par- 
ticipated in  the  battle,  the  majority  being  concealed  from  sight.  General 
Forsyth,  suspecting  an  ambuscade,  was  cautious  and  did  not  advance  too 
far.  Colonel  Henry  started  from  Pine  Ridge  an  hour  later  to  his  assist- 
ance, his  tired  horses  being  compelled  to  travel  slowly. 

At  the  moment  when  the  Seventh  was  surrounded  and  their  situation 
was  critical,  the  Ninth  assailed  the  Indians  in  the  rear.  They  broke  and 
fled,  and  the  soldiers  fell  back,  reaching  the  agency  about  dusk. 

It  was  learned  afterward  that  Two  Strike  and  Little  Wound  had  laid 
a trap  for  the  Seventh,  and,  but  for  the  caution  of  General  Forsyth  and 
the  arrival  of  the  Ninth,  the  whole  command  would  have  been  massacred, 
as  was  Custer  on  the  Little  Big  Horn. 

The  outlook  grew  darker.  Many  hitherto  friendly  Indians  slipped 
away  from  the  agency  and  joined  the  hostiles.  Signal  fires  were  seen  burn- 
ing at  night,  and  the  disaffection  spread  until  it  may  be  said  that  the  only 
Indians  that  were  not  enemies  were  the  police,  a few  Cheyennes,  and  the 
scouts.  Recruits  came  from  all  directions,  even  from  British  territory. 
Red  Cloud  and  the  lesser  chiefs,  always  excepting  the  noble  American 
Horse,  joined  their  brethren  for  the  last  decisive  fight. 

General  Miles  now  had  in  the  field,  and  well  placed,  about  seventeen 
and  a half  regiments.  These  were  composed  of  the  First,  Sixth,  Seventh 
(eight  companies),  and  Ninth  Cavalry;  one  company  of  the  First  Artillery, 
Company  E;  one  company  of  the  Fourth  Artillery,  Company  F;  and  the 
First,  Second,  Third,  Seventh,  Eighth,  Twelfth,  Sixteenth,  Seventeenth, 
Twentieth,  Twenty-first,  Twenty-second,  and  Twenty-fifth  Infantry,  mak- 
ing fifty-one  companies  in  all.  There  should  have  been  ten  thousand  offi- 
cers and  men,  but  as  some  of  the  companies  were  not  full,  the  force  was 
probably  about  eight  thousand. 

On  December  23,  Major  Carroll,  with  fifty-five  cavalry,  made  a forced 
march  of  sixty-five  miles  in  fourteen  hours  up  the  Cannon  Ball,  arriving  at 
New  England  City  at  eight  o’clock  the  following  morning.  This  was  in 
obedience  to  orders  from  Fort  Yates  to  march  to  the  relief  of  Captain 
Fountain  of  the  Eighth  Cavalry,  who  was  reported  to  be  surrounded  in 
Cave  Hills  by  five  hundred  Indians. 

Cave  Hills  is  fifty  miles  from  New  England  City,  near  the  northwest- 
ern boundary  of  South  Dakota.  The  cavalry,  after  two  hours’  rest,  pushed 
on  and  reached  Cave  Hills  on  Christmas  morning,  and  the  Eighth  Cavalry 
were  safe. 

At  Fort  Bennett,  on  the  Missouri  River,  a little  south  of  the  Cheyenne, 
nearly  two  hundred  Indians  surrendered.  They  were  not  from  the  Bad  Lands, 
however,  the  latter  being  reported  by  this  time  to  be  entirely  surrounded. 


ATTACK  ON  A WAGON  TRAIN. 


423 


On  the  26th  of  December,  the  Ninth  Cavalry  (colored),  commanded 
by  Colonel  Guy  Q.  Henry,  left  Pine  Ridge  for  the  scene  of  the  expected 
hostilities.  Captain  Taylor’s  scouts  were  led  by  the  famous  Gourard. 
One  hundred  pack-mules  and  mules,  with  a little  Hotchkiss  gun,  followed, 
and  the  Gatling  gun  and  heliograph  corps  brought  up  the  rear.  The  col- 
ored men,  who  looked  odd  in  their  fur  caps,  doffed  them  in  answer  to  the 
hearty  cheers  of  the  white  soldiers. 

The  following  day  reports  came  to  Pine  Ridge  that  the  hostiles  in  thr 
Bad  Lands  had  given  heed  to  the  persuasions  of  General  Brooke’s  Ogalalla 


ATTACK  ON  THE  WAGON  TRAIN. 


and  Brule  peace  commissioners,  and  were  moving  toward  Pine  Ridge  with 
the  purpose  of  surrendering.  The  rumor  on  the  heels  of  this,  to  the  effect 
that  the  Indians  were  not  only  growing  more  defiant,  but  were  rapidly 
receiving  accessions,  had  far  more  truth  in  it. 

It  was  learned  at  Wounded  Knee  that  a number  of  wagons  with  sup- 
plies were  approaching  from  Rapid  City.  Thirty  troopers  were  sent  out  to 
escort  them  in.  Ten  miles  away,  they  came  upon  the  thirteen  wagons, 
drawn  up  in  a square,  with  the  teamsters  fighting  for  their  lives  against 
fifty  Indian  horsemen. 

The  detachment  dashed  forward  and  the  Indians  fled.  The  new 
arrivals  then  aided  the  nineteen  teamsters  in  piling  up  sacks  of  grain, 
bundles,  and  boxes  to  serve  as  breastworks.  The  Indians,  observing  what 


424 


ALARM  AT  PINE  RIDGE. 


was  goingon,  returned  with  re-enforcements  and  renewed  the  attack.  They 
circled  around  the  wagons,  firing  at  the  whites,  but  the  red  men  kept  so 
far  off  that  the  only  harm  done  was  the  wounding  of  one  of  the  soldiers  in 
the  shoulder. 

The  assailants  were  continually  increasing  in  numbers,  and  the  situa- 
tion of  the  besieged  became  so  perilous  that  they  were  doomed  unless  help 
should  reach  them.  In  this  emergency,  Private  Collins  mounted  one  of 
the  fleetest  horses,  and  while  the  attention  of  the  Indians  was  held  in 
another  direction,  dashed  out  from  the  wagons  and  sped  away  on  a dead 
run  for  Wounded  Knee. 

He  was  observed  almost  instantly,  and  twenty  Indians  hurried  after 
him,  firing  and  pressing  their  ponies  to  the  utmost,  but  Collins  was  the 
better  mounted  and  soon  drew  away  from  them.  His  pursuers  then  gave 
it  up  and  came  back  to  help  in  the  attack  on  the  wagons. 

Several  bucks  were  shot  from  the;r  horses,  and  the  cavalry  lost  four  of 
their  animals.  Some  of  the  Indians  stole  up  near  the  horses  of  the  cavalry 
and  fired  into  them  a number  of  times  in  the  effort  to  stampede  them. 
They  came  very  near  success. 

After  the  fight  had  continued  for  six  hours,  troopers  were  seen  coming 
at  full  charge.  The  besieged  cheered  heartily  and  the  Indians  scattered. 

Pine  Ridge  was  thrown  almost  into  a panic  on  Sunday  night,  January 
4,  when  it  was  discovered  that  the  hostiles  had  formed  a plot  for  massa- 
cring all  the  whites.  The  plan  was  for  each  warrior  at  the  agency  to 
select  late  at  night  a white  man  and  kill  him.  On  hearing  the  firing,  the 
hostiles  would  rush  in  and  complete  the  butchery.  As  there  were  but 
comparatively  few  soldiers  at  that  time  at  Pine  Ridge,  and  they  some  dis- 
tance off  in  the  intrenchments,  there  was  good  ground  for  alarm. 

A general  abandonment  of  homes  and  a rush  to  stores  and  storehouses 
followed,  the  women  pale  and  terrified,  the  children  crying,  and  the  hus- 
bands stern  and  determined.  The  Indians  were  told  that  the  plot  was 
fully  known  and  preparations  were  made  to  frustrate  it.  General  Miles 
remained  up  until  three  o’clock  in  the  morning,  but  the  dreaded  uprising 
did  not  take  place. 

The  grave  question  that  all  asked  themselves  was  whether  the  hostiles 
could  capture  Pine  Ridge.  There  were  hundreds  who  believed  the  agency 
was  in  imminent  peril,  and  capture  in  such  case  meant  the  slaughter  of 
every  man,  woman,  and  child  in  it.  General  Miles  made  all  his  disposi- 
tions skillfully,  strengthening  his  defenses,  and  assured  the  anxious  ones 
that  not  the  slightest  danger  of  such  a disaster  existed. 

Soon  after,  Jack  Red  Cloud  (son  of  the  old  chief  Red  Cloud),  Big 
Head,  High  Horse,  Lone  Bear,  Live  Hawk,  and  five  others  came  to  Pine 
Ridge  to  hold  a pow  wow  with  General  Miles. 


A BRIEF  AND  POINTED  POW  WOW. 


425 

This  pow  wow  business  is  a favorite  resource  of  the  Indians.  The 
reader  of  these  pages  will  recall  many  instances  when  the  subterfuge  was 
resorted  to  by  them  during  our  frontier  wars  for  the  purpose  of  carrying 
out  some  treacherous  scheme.  Often,  too,  it  was  successful,  especially  with 


COMING  IN  FOR  A POW  WOW. 


officers  unaccustomed  to  Indian  warefare,  who  found  to  their  cost,  when 
the  conference  terminated,  that  the  only  result  was  a marked  advantage 
gained  by  the  dusky  foes. 

General  Miles  was  too  sagacious  a veteran  to  be  deceived.  As  a mat- 
ter of  course,  he  admitted  the  visitors,  but  he  made  the  interview  brief  and 
to  the  point.  He  listened  to  what  they  had  to  say,  and  then  informed  them 
that  there  was  only  one  proposition  that  could  come  from  them  to  which 
he  would  give  any  attention  : that  was  surrender.  He  impressed  upon  them 
that  if  they  had  any  complaints  to  present,  they  must  be  presented  at 
Washington.  And  so  the  visit,  which  caused  considerable  interest  at  the 
time,  came  to  naught,  and  the  ambassadors  went  back  somewhat  wiser  than 
before. 


CHAPTER  XLV. 


THE  INDIAN  UPRISING  OF  1890-91  (CONTINUED) — THE  KILLING  OF 
LIEUTENANT  E.  W.  CASEY — EXCITEMENT  AMONG  THE  HOSTILES — 
ALARMING  RUMORS— WANTON  ATTACK  ON  FRIENDLY  INDIANS — 
CRITICAL  HOURS— SULLEN  APPROACH  OF  THE  INDIANS  TO  THE 
AGENCY. 

ONE  of  the  most  shocking  occurrences  of  the  war  occurred  on  Wed- 
nesday morning,  January  7,  1891.  Lieutenant  E.  W.  Casey,  attached 
to  the  Twenty-second  Infantry,  and  known  throughout  the  country  as  the 
commander  of  a large  company  of  Cheyenne  scouts,  left  the  camp  of  Gen- 
eral Brooke  to  reconnoiter  a large  village  of  the  hostiles  on  White  Clay 
Creek,  near  the  White  River.  He  was  accompanied  by  one  of  his  scouts 
and,  before  he  set  out,  was  cautioned  by  General  Brooke  not  to  go  too  near 
the  village,  as  the  Indians  were  holding  a dance. 

Lieutenant  Casey  and  his  companion  rode  eight  miles,  when  they  came 
in  sight  of  the  village.  They  were  observed  at  the  same  time  by  an  Oga- 
lalla  and  a Brule.  The  former  wheeled  and  ran  into  the  village  with  a 
message  to  Red  Cloud  that  an  army  officer  was  approaching.  The  camp 
was  instantly  thrown  into  commotion. 

In  the  Indian  camp  was  Jack  Richards,  a French  half-breed,  who  was 
there  to  look  after  his  family  who  were  held  prisoners.  Red  Cloud  sent 
him  to  Lieutenant  Casey  to  warn  him  of  the  peril  of  staying  near  the  vil- 
lage. The  Ogalalla  picket  and  the  Brule  followed  the  half-breed  on  horses. 

When  the  three  reached  Casey,  the  Ogalalla,  speaking  in  Sioux,  also 
warned  the  officer,  saying  that  the  Brule  had  a bad  heart  and  that  he  must 
beware  of  him.  Casey  thanked  Richards  and  the  Ogalalla,  but  said  he 
would  ride  to  the  top  of  an  adjoining  butte  and  take  one  peep  at  the  vil- 
lage, which  was  pitched  in  a ravine-like  depression. 

Lieutenant  Casey  reached  the  crest  when  Plenty  Horses,  the  Brule, 
raised  his  gun  to  fire  upon  him.  The  Ogalalla  wrenched  the  weapon  from 
his  grasp,  and  then,  handing  it  back  to  Plenty  Horses,  begged  him  not  to 
shoot  the  officer.  The  Brule  dashed  away  a few  yards  and  began  circling 
about  Casey,  singing  in  a dismal  monotone.  Suddenly  he  brought  his  rifle 
to  his  shoulder  and  fired.  The  bullet  struck  Lieutenant  Casey  in  the 
back  of  the  head,  coming  out  at  the  forehead.  The  officer  fell  dead  from 
his  horse  without  speaking. 


426 


BRINGING  TIIE  NEWS  OF  LIEUTENANT  CASEY’S  DEATH, 


ATTACK  ON  FEW  TAILS  AND  HIS  FRIENDS.  429 

Terrific  excitement  was  produced  in  the  camp  of  the  hostiles,  as  well 
as  in  that  of  the  soldiers,  by  the  news  of  the  occurrence.  Old  Red  Cloud 
went  out  to  recover  the  body  and  save  it  from  mutilation,  while  Richards 
galloped  furiously  to  General  Brooke  with  the  tidings.  Yankton  Charley, 
an  Ogalalla  scout,  rode  his  horse  to  death  through  a fierce  blizzard  and 
twenty  miles  of  hostile  country  to  carry  the  news  to  Pine  Ridge. 

Lieutenant  Getty,  with  a strong  detachment  of  the  Ninth  Cavalry, 
was  sent  out  by  General  Brooke  to  bring  in  the  body  of  Casey.  It  was 
turned  over  to  him  and  found  not  to  have  been  mutilated. 

The  terrifying  deed  caused  a mutiny  in  the  hostile  camp.  Red  Cloud 
and  his  friends  denounced  the  act,  and  repeated  their  threats  of  returning 
and  surrendering  to  General  Miles.  The  chief  and  his  adherents  were 
called  cowards  by  the  Brules,  Uncapapas,  and  Yanktonais,  and  warned 
that  if  they  made  the  attempt  to  surrender  they  would  be  killed. 

Nevertheless,  late  that  night  old  Red  Cloud,  with  the  help  of  his  son, 
was  smuggled  out  of  the  camp,  and,  accompanied  by  some  twenty  mem- 
bers of  his  family,  started  through  the  blizzard  for  the  agency.  But  for 
the  help  of  his  daughter,  the  old  chief,  who  was  nearly  blind,  never  could 
have  reached  his  destination.  The  hostiles  fired  many  shots,  but  took  care 
not  to  hit  Red  Cloud,  for  none  of  them  cared  to  harm  the  old  man. 

On  the  9th  of  January,  the  hostiles  burned  several  cabins  within  four 
miles  of  Pine  Ridge  agency.  Further  away,  there  was  continual  skirmish- 
ing between  scattered  parties.  One  hour  would  bring  apparently  well 
authenticated  rumors  that  the  formidable  body  of  Indians  were  on  the 
march  to  surrender  to  General  Miles,  and  then  would  come  another,  that 
their  numbers  were  greatly  augmented  and  it  was  impossible  to  bring  the 
difficulties  to  a termination  without  a bloody  battle. 

In  the  unsettled  condition  of  the  country,  the  inexcusable  deeds  were 
not  confined  by  any  means  to  the  red  men.  A party  of  six  Indians,  two 
squaws,  twelve  ponies,  and  two  wagons  were  on  their  way  from  the  Bear 
Butte  Country  to  Pine  Ridge,  carrying  a pass  from  General  Brooke  and 
assurances  from  Captain  Taylor  that  they  were  peaceable.  Not  one  of 
them  was  painted,  and  they  had  neither  ammunition  nor  guns. 

This  party  was  hardly  started  on  their  journey  southward,  when  they 
were  fired  upon  by  a party  of  whites  in  ambush.  Few  Tails  fell  dead,  and 
his  squaw  was  shot  in  the  leg  and  breast.  She  crawled  into  the  bushes, 
where  she  hid  for  a day  before  setting  out  on  her  tramp  for  Pine  Ridge, 
one  hundred  miles  away.  Her  companions  had  fled  and  she  supposed 
they  were  killed. 

The  wounded  squaw  was  almost  dead  when  she  reached  the  agency. 
Indians  in  the  hospital  quickly  spread  the  report,  and  much  excitement  was 
produced  in  the  camp  of  the  hostiles.  Few  Tails  was  a relative  of  Young- 


430 


THE  CRITICAL  PERIOD. 


Man-Afraid-of-his-Horses,  a powerful  chief  who  had  done  effective  service 
for  the  military  authorities,  and  there  was  reason  to  fear  that  this  cold- 
blooded murder  would  drive  him  over  to  the  hostiles.  General  Miles  sent 
for  him  to  come  to  headquarters.  When  he  learned  that  Few  Tails,  his 
relative,  had  been  treacherously  shot  down,  he  was  furious.  It  was  a long 
time  before  Miles  succeeded  in  pacifying  him,  but  he  finally  admitted  that 
the  army  was  not  blamable  for  the  crime.  The  alarm  among  the  hostiles, 
however,  continued,  and  the  situation  became  so  complicated  that  the  quar- 


DEATH  OF  FEW  TAILS. 


termaster  ordered  twenty  days  additional  rations,  while  the  troops  that 
were  expected  to  go  to  the  agency  for  review  were  ordered  to  stay  in 
camp. 

Now  came  the  critical  period,  when  all  the  sagacity,  patience,  and  skill 
of  General  Miles  and  his  officers  were  needed  to  prevent  an  explosion 
among  the  hostiles  and  to  secure  their  surrender  to  the  Government 
troops.  The  red  men  saw  that  resistance  was  useless,  and  their  leaders, 
were  untiring  in  their  efforts  to  bring  about  submission;  but  there  were  at 
least  a thousand  turbulent  bucks  among  them,  who  were  bent  on  fighting,, 
regardless  of  the  consequences  to  themselves  and  their  people. 

Early  in  January,  fully  five  thousand  Indians  were  encamped  within  a 
few  miles  of  Pine  Ridge,  while  the  soldiers  were  gradually  closing  around 
them  on  three  sides,  in  the  effort  to  force  them  into  the  agency.  The  sit- 


DRAWING  IN  THE  NET. 


431 

uation  may  be  compared  to  that  of  an  immense  net,  which  it  was  necessary 
to  draw  forward,  with  the  greatest  caution,  in  order  to  prevent  those 
within  taking  alarm  and  leaping  out.  The  soldiers  kept  back  several 
miles,  progressing  step  by  step,  as  may  be  said,  timing  their  progress  to 
that  of  the  dilatory  red  men,  who  were  repeatedly  on  the  point  of  wheel- 
ing about  and  assailing  the  troops.  Infinite  care  had  to  be  taken  to  guard 
against  any  movement  or  action  that  would  irritate  the  savages,  but  all  the 
while  the  net  was  steadily  drawing  closer. 

On  the  9th  of  January,  1891,  a big  pow  wow  was  held  in  the  Indian 
camp.  The  stars  were  shining,  and  the  Sioux  stood  or  squatted  in  a great 
circle  around  the  council  fire.  Several  of  the  Ogalallas,  led  by  Little 
Wound  and  Big  Road,  made  eloquent  appeals  for  surrender,  but  the  young 
braves  were  obdurate.  Wrangling  and  fighting  continued  for  hours,  when 
it  was  agreed  to  move  toward  the  agency  on  the  morrow,  and  go  into 
camp  on  White  Clay  Creek,  five  miles  from  Pine  Ridge  and  near  the  scene 
of  the  Catholic  Mission  battle.  It  was  believed  at  the  time  that  the  great 
round  up  could  not  be  accomplished  without  fierce  fighting. 

It  was  decided  that,  as  long  as  the  Indians  continued  approaching  the 
agency  and  showed  a disposition  to  surrender,  the  troops  would  make  no 
attack  on  them.  If  any  renegades,  however,  attempted  to  get  away  or 
passed  the  lines  of  soldiers,  they  were  to  be  shot  down  or  pursued  and 
captured.  The  expectation  was  that  a thousand  of  the  fiery  young  braves, 
fearful  of  punishment  for  their  atrocities,  would  make  the  effort  to  get 
away,  in  which  case  bloody  fighting  was  certain  to  follow. 

The  following  morning,  two  young  Brules  galloped  up  to  the  agency 
buildings,  coming  directly  from  the  hostile  camp.  They  wore  white  shirts, 
and  one  had  a streak  of  blue  paint  across  his  nose.  Dropping  from  their 
horses,  rifle  in  hand,  they  dashed  through  the  crowd  to  General  Miles’s 
headquarters.  Indian  policemen  disarmed  them  and  they  asked  to  see 
General  Miles.  They  were  escorted  thither  and  made  haste  to  assure  the 
general  that  the  Brules  intended  no  mischief.  General  Miles  directed 
them  to  go  back  to  their  camp  and  tell  their  people  to  surrender  without 
further  trouble.  Their  guns  were  returned  to  them  and  they  dashed  off, 
laughing  at  the  Indian  police. 

By  this  time,  the  soldiers  were  pressing  the  hostiles  so  close  that, 
when  they  pulled  up  stakes,  they  would  have  to  fight  or  run  for  the 
agency,  where  every  preparation  was  made  to  receive  them.  A three-inch 
gun,  that  could  sweep  the  country  for  four  miles,  projected  through  a 
breach  in  the  breastworks  on  the  north,  while  the  Hotchkiss  guns  and  the 
Gatling  were  pointed  toward  the  ravine,  which  would  be  one  of  the  run- 
ways of  the  Sioux.  Those  guns  were  behind  the  huge  dirt  and  stone  bar- 
riers on  the  butte  to  the  east.  Another  Hotchkiss  thrust  its  muzzle 


432 


THE  CRITICAL  SITUATION. 


through  the  breastworks  near  the  schoolhouse  on  the  west.  This  could  be 
made  to  sweep  the  plain  for  a mile  in  a half  circle,  and,  with  the  three-inch 
rifle  on  the  north  butte,  riddle  Red  Cloud’s  house  and  his  outfit.  Six 
hundred  infantry  troopers  were  ready  to  receive  the  Indians,  but  they  were 

in  anything  but  a calm  state 
of  mind,  for  every  man  fully 
appreciated  the  fearfully 
delicate  situation. 

The  Indian  village  was 
two  miles  long  and  was 
pitched  in  a winding  ravine. 
The  scouts  reported  that 
many  of  the  hostiles  had  no 
tepees  and  were  in  camp  in 
pockets  in  the  sides  of  the 
ravine,  with  pine  boughs 
arranged  to  shelter  them 
from  the  cutting  wind  and 
snow.  Among  them  were 
many  wounded  from  the 
battles  of  Wounded  Knee, 
the  Catholic  Mission,  and  on 
the  ridges  about  the  agency. 
On  the  night  of  the 
10th,  the  Indians  pulled  up  stakes  and  advanced  sullenly  for  two  or 
three  miles  toward  the  agency.  Having  plenty  of  tobacco  and  beef, 
they  dawdled  away  time,  naturally  staving  off  the  inevitable  as  long  as 
they  could.  Meanwhile,  the  military  cordon  remorselessly  drew  around 
them.  General  Miles  remarked  that  in  ail  his  experience  as  an  Indian 
fighter,  he  had  never  been  in  so  peculiar  a situation.  If  he  attacked 
the  savages,  an  indignant  protest  would  have  gone  up  from  the  en- 
tire country,  and  he  would  be  charged  with  assailing  them  because  they 
were  slow  in  moving  their  wounded.  Twelve  miles  away  was  a large  force 
of  avowed  hostiles,  and  yet  he  dared  not  molest  them,  because  they  had 
forty-odd  wounded  bucks  and  squaws.  The  force  at  Pine  Ridge  was 
increased  to  seven  hundred  men,  with  whom  were  four  three-inch  rifled 
cannon,  four  Hotchkiss  and  two  Gatling  guns.  A furious  storm  raged,  the 
whirling  sand  blinding  the  pickets,  and  the  flying  alkali  causing  great 
trouble  to  the  eyes. 

The  situation  was  so  critical  that  a panic  spread  among  the  half-breeds 
and  friendly  Indians  at  the  Ridge.  A number  of  families  left  during  the 
day,  and  the  windows  of  the  stores  were  nailed  down  in  anticipation  of  an 


U.  S.  BORDER  INFANTRY-MAN. 


A STRIKING  PROCESSION. 


433 


They  were  followed  by  a num- 

\ | J 


attack.  General  Carr  and  his  famous  Indian  fighters  of  the  Sixth  Cavalry 
slowly  pressed  in  from  the  left,  while  General  Brooke,  with  the  Second  In 
fantry  and  Ninth  Cavalry,  encamped  on  the  night  of  the  ioth  on  the  same 
spot  where  the  hostiles  were  twenty-four  hours  before.  The  latter  were 
now  within  five  miles  of  the  agency. 

Two  ghost  dancers  rode  in  on  the  nth.  One  came  from  the  Standing 
Rock  Agency  while  the  other  was  a Brule, 
ber  of  stragglers,  and, 
after  being  disarmed, 
were  allowed  to  tramp 
through  the  snow  and 
the  triple  line  of  senti- 
nels and  on  to  the  camp 
of  the  friendlies,  a half 
mile  to  the  south  of  the 
troops. 

The  procession  as 
it  came  over  the  moun- 
tain trail  was  pictur- 
esque and  striking. 

The  Indian  police,  who 
had  been  scouting  all 
night  in  the  hills,  min- 
gled with  the  Sioux, 
and  then  came  the 
scouts  with  their  rifles 
slung  to  their  saddles. 

The  Indians,  however, 
advanced  slowly,  with 
the  exception  of  the 
two  first  named.  Those 
who  galloped  over  the 
hills  were  Ogalallas  that  had  been  waiting  ever  since  the  Wounded  Knee 
battle  to  come  into  camp. 

But  the  crowds,  who  were  anxiously  looking  for  the  arrival  of  the 
hostiles,  saw  them  not.  They  held  back,  and  the  scouts  reported  the  situa- 
tion as  more  critical  than  ever.  The  young  braves  grew  restless  as  they 
neared  the  agency,  and  an  outbreak  seemed  inevitable.  General  Miles 
would  not  allow  ex-agent  McGillicuddy  and  Buffalo  Bill  to  enter  the  Sioux 
camp,  since  it  was  certain  they  would  be  killed. 

The  hostiles  reached  their  new  camping  ground  about  noon  on  the 
nth.  It  was  a mile  and  a half  from  the  agency.  The  first  warning  of 


CHEYENNE  SCOUT. 


434 


AN  EXTRAORDINARY  SCENE. 


hideou: 


what  was  coming  was  the  popping  up  of  the  heads  of  a number  of  Indian 
scouts  over  the  ridges  on  the  north,  where  they  were  in  plain  sight  of  the 
sentinels  in  Captain  Dougherty’s  fort.  The  painted  faces  remained  in 
sight,  carefully  studying  the  situation,  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes,  and  then 
dropped  from  view.  A quarter  of  an  hour  later,  a number  of  Indian  horse- 
men appeared  on  the  crest  of  a distant  butte.  Other  horsemen  continually 

came  in  sight,  until 
the  snowy  summit 
was  covered  with 
them.  They  were 
so  near  that  the 
gleam  of  their  rifles, 
the  flutter  of  their 
feathers,  and  the 
painted  faces  were 
plainly  observable  to  the  sol- 
diers, who  were  carefully 
watching  every  movement. 

There  were  no  squaws  among 
them,  and  the  hostiles  were  too 
numerous  to  be  counted.  They 
formed  an  impressive  picture  as  they 
sat  on  their  ponies,  scowling  down 
on  the  agency  as  if  daring  the  armed  men  to  come  out  and  give  them 
battle.  Then  they  slowly  descended  the  slope  and  entered  a winding 
valley  leading  toward  Red  Cloud’s  old  home,  where  they  halted  once  more. 
Then  followed  an  extraordinary  scene. 

The  bucks  began  firing  their  rifles  about  the  heads  of  the  older  men, 
who  were  urging  them  to  surrender.  Then  they  opened  a fusillade  on 
their  own  horses  and  dogs,  shooting  them  down  in  all  directions.  All  this 
took  place  within  a little  more  than  half  a mile  of  the  rifled  cannon  of 
Captain  Dougherty. 

Skirmishers  were  deployed  from  the  redoubts  with  directions  not  to 
fire,  but  to  fall  back  in  case  of  an  attack.  Orders  from  General  Miles  were 
posted  on  all  the  buildings,  prohibiting  anybody  from  having  communi- 
cation with  the  savages.  The  pickets  were  strengthened  and  told  to  allow 
no  one  whatever  to  pass  the  lines. 

At  night,  one  of  the  resentful  bucks  stole  close  to  a sentinel  stationed 
near  the  Indian  camp,  and  was  drawing  a bead  on  him,  when  several  old 
men  seized  and  gave  him  a trouncing.  On  the  13th,  when  the  Seventeenth 
Infantry  was  escorting  General  Brooke’s  supply  train  over  the  hills  to  the 
agency,  several  hundreds  of  the  young  braves  rushed  into  the  neighboring 


APPROACH  OF  THE  INDIAN  SCOUTS. 


GRADUAL  APPROACH  OF  THE  HOSTILES. 


435 


ravines  and  pockets  and  made  ready  to  give  the  soldiers  battle.  The 
latter  acted  as  though  they  saw  them  not,  and  the  Indians  returned  to 
their  camp  without  firing  a shot. 

The  situation  could  not  have  been  more  delicately  critical.  The  firing 
of  a single  gun  by  a soldier  or  Indian  would  have  exploded  the  magazine. 

The  unexpected  appearance  of  the  hostiles,  descending  the  slopes  of 
the  buttes,  caused  much  excitement  in  camp.  Orderlies  dashed  off  to 
headquarters  with  messages  to  General  Miles,  and  the  troops  made  ready 
for  action.  The  sight  of  the  surgeons  preparing  bandages,  lint,  and  their 
instruments,  the  hurried  shifting  of  cannon  to  new  positions,  and  the  order 
for  all  civilians  to  leave  the  breastworks,  showed  unmistakably  the  gravity 
of  the  crisis. 

Meanwhile,  the  hostiles  continued  their  deliberate  march  down  the 
sides  of  the  ravines.  Their  eagle  feathers  waving  from  their  scalp  locks, 
and  the  garments  of  the  ghost  dancers,  were  plainly  visible  on  the  Brules 
and  Ogalallas.  One  fine  looking  fellow  was  in  his  war  bonnet,  the  end  of 
his  long  streamer  of  feathers  reaching  to  the  tail  of  his  horse,  where  it  was 
tied.  No  doubt  he  was  a chief,  but  none  of  the  spectators  who  scanned 
him  through  their  glasses  could  make  out  his  identity. 

The  line  disappeared  for  an  instant  behind  the  scrawny  pine  trees, 
coming  into  sight  again  on  the  west  side  of  Clay  Creek.  Then  the  tepees 
began  appearing  as  if  by  magic,  until  the  plain  at  the  base  of  the  wooded 
pocket,  almost  a mile  in  circumference,  was  covered  with  the  soiled  tents. 
Five  hundred  were  discerned  from  the  earthworks,  but  there  were  many 
more  beyond  sight,  the  hostile  village  extending  along  the  ravine  for  three 
or  four  miles. 


CHAPTER  XLVI. 


THE  INDIAN  UPRISING  OF  189O-9I  (CONCLUDED)— THE  CRISIS— SUR- 
RENDER OF  THE  HOSTILES— GENERAL  MILES’S  CONGRATULATORY 
ADDRESS— CHARGES  AGAINST  COLONEL  J.  W.  FORSYTH— OVERRULED 
BY  THE  SECRETARY  OF  WAR. 

EVENTS  steadily  approached  the  crisis.  The  14th  was  set  for  the 
council  between  General  Miles  and  the  chiefs  at  the  Indian  camp. 
At  noon  five  of  them  appeared.  They  were  Young-Man-Afraid-of-His- 
Horses,  Little  Wound,  Big  Road,  Crow  Dog,  and  Turning  Bear.  They 
told  General  Miles  the  Indians  were  ready  to  surrender  and  give  up  their 
arms  on  condition  that  they  were  not  punished  for  anything  they  had  done. 

All  this  was  gratifying,  but  the  force  of  the  declaration  was  taken 
away  by  the  fact  that  the  chiefs  named  were  either  Ogalallas  or  peaceable 
Brules,  who  admitted  that  they  could  not  control  the  turbulent  bucks  that 
were  eager  for  war. 

On  the  morning  of  the  15th,  a heavy  fog  hung  over  Pine  Ridge,  the 
sun  not  appearing  until  late  in  the  day.  As  the  fog  gradually  lifted,  the 
hundreds  of  eyes  turned  in  the  direction  of  the  hostile  camp  saw  that  it 
was  in  motion.  It  was  about  eight  o’clock,  and  it  required  but  a few  min- 
utes* study  of  the  Indian  village  to  see  that  the  promises  made  to  General 
Miles  the  day  before  were  about  to  be  fulfilled.  The  hostiles  were  prepar- 
ing to  come  in  and  surrender. 

The  Indians  advanced  from  the  wooded  ravine  north  of  the  agency, 
where  they  had  been  in  camp  for  two  days,  around  the  base  of  Horse  Shoe 
Butte,  into  the  valley,  and  at  last  past  old  Red  Cloud’s  house  in  a direct 
line,  a fourth  of  a mile  further  south.  The  strange  procession  was  watched 
by  the  soldiers  through  their  glasses,  as  they  stood  on  the  knolls  near  the 
schoolhouse. 

The  head  of  the  line  was  composed  of  warriors,  who  drove  hundreds  of 
ponies  in  bunches.  They  were  followed  by  a string  of  wagons  driven  by 
squaws  and  loaded  with  tepees,  poles,  and  camp  equipage.  There  were 
scores  of  dogs  and  horses,  the  latter  trotting  along  without  bridle  or  sad- 
dle. They  represented  the  spoils  of  several  weeks’  raiding  along  White 
River.  The  Indians,  knowing  they  were  now  practically  prisoners,  deter- 
mined to  impress  their  captors  with  their  importance. 

By  nine  o’clock,  the  trail  leading  from  the  point  opposite  the  friendly 
camp  to  the  old  village  of  the  hostiles  swarmed  with  wagons,  ponies,  and 

436 


THE  FINAL  SURRENDER. 


THE  FINAL  SURRENDER. 


439 


dogs,  the  procession  extending  for  four  miles.  The  only  noise  heard  from 
the  hostiles  was  the  jingling  of  bells  on  some  of  the  horses.  While  pass- 
ing in  review  before  the  soldiers,  the  Indians  threw  out  a long  line  of 
Brule  footmen,  who  advanced  like  skirmishers  along  the  sides  of  the  buttes 
a hundred  yards  above  the  wagon  train.  In  front  of  the  agency  the  foot 
warriors  squatted  on  the  ground,  and  the  Brule  horsemen  galloped  ahead. 
The  Indians  chose  this  old  trail,  high  up  the  sides  of  the  buttes,  in  order 
to  protect  the  long  line  below  against  attack. 

All  were  amazed  at  the  strength  of  the  Indians.  The  reports  had 
been  that  the  entire  force  was  no  greater  than  three  thousand  five  hundred 
souls,  but  in  the  procession  were  seven  hundred  and  thirty-two  lodges 
and  more  than  five  thousand  Indians.  The  encampment  at  the  agency 
was  one-third  of  the  Sioux  nation.  Those  competent  to  judge  made 
the  number  eleven  thousand,  of  whom  three  thousand  were  warriors. 
No  such  a gathering  will  ever  again  be  seen  on  the  American  conti- 
nent. 

The  surrender  of  weapons  by  the  Indians  was  the  farce  that  was  gen- 
erally anticipated.  They  turned  in  a beggarly  number  of  guns,  nearly  all 
of  which  were  worthless  antiquated  relics.  The  valuable  rifles,  doubtless, 
had  been  hidden  away  by  the  owners. 

General  Miles,  despite  signs  of  uneasiness  in  various  directions,  was  so 
convinced  that  the  trouble  was  over  that  arrangements  were  made  for  the 
various  commands  to  depart  to  different  points,  and  he  issued  the  following 
congratulatory  address : 

“The  division  commander  takes  pleasure  in  announcing  the  satisfac- 
tory termination  of  hostilities  in  this  division.  The  disaffection  among  the 
Indians  was  widespread,  involving  many  different  tribes.  The  purpose  of 
the  conspiracy  was  to  produce  a general  uprising  of  all  the  Indians  in  the 
coming  spring. 

“The  hostile  element  of  the  Sioux  nation  precipitated  the  movement 
by  leaving  their  agencies,  defying  the  authority  of  the  Government,  and 
destroying  their  property  that  had  been  given  them  for  the  purposes  of 
civilization.  They  assembled  in  large  force  on  almost  impenetrable  ground, 
known  as  the  Mauvaise  Terres  of  South  Dakota,  and  from  that  rendezvous, 
marauding  parties  robbed  both  white  citizens  and  friendly  Indians  on  their 
reservation  and  through  the  adjacent  settlements.  To  check  this  insurrec- 
tion, orders  were  given  for  the  arrest  of  the  chief  conspirator,  Sitting  Bull, 
who  was  on  the  eve  of  leaving  his  reservation  to  join  those  above  men- 
tioned. This  was  done  on  the  14th  December  last.  After  peacefully  sub- 
mitting to  arrest  by  the  officials  of  the  Government,  he  created  a revolt 
which  brought  to  his  assistance  a large  number  of  his  followers,  who 
attacked  the  Indian  police.  This  resulted  in  his  death  and  the  final  arrest 


44°  GENERAL  MILES’S  CONGRATULATORY  ADDRESS. 

of  three  hundred  of  his  people,  and  removed  the  principal  part  of  the  dis- 
affected element  from  the  Standing  Rock  Reservation. 

“The  second  arrest  was  that  of  Big  Foot’s  party  on  December  21, 
and  they  made  their  escape  the  following  day.  This  band  was  composed 
of  outlaws  from  the  different  tribes  who  defied  the  Government  officials. 
While  these  measures  were  being  carried  into  execution,  the  troops  were 
quickly  moved  between  the  hostile  element  and  their  stronghold  and  the 
settlements  in  such  a way  as  to  check  their  usual  depredations  and  give 
protection  to  the  life  and  property  of  the  citizens.  Nearly  the  entire  force 
of  the  troops  in  the  Department  of  Dakota  under  General  Ruger  were 
judiciously  placed  where  they  would  give  the  most  protection  to  the  settle- 
ments, and  enabled  them  to  intercept  any  body  of  hostiles,  should  they 
escape. 

“Brief  delays  were  necessary  to  put  the  troops  in  proper  position,  as 
well  as  to  give  time  for  the  work  of  disaffection  to  be  carried  on  in  the 
hostile  camp  and  strengthen  the  loyal  element.  Gradually  the  troops 
were  moved  to  such  positions  as  to  render  the  resistance  of  the  hostiles 
useless,  and  they  were  forced  back  to  the  agency. 

“The  escape  of  Big  Foot  made  his  recapture  necessary.  This  was  suc- 
cessfully done  by  a battalion  of  the  Seventh  Cavalry  and  Lieutenant  Haw- 
thorne’s detachment  of  artillery,  under  Major  Whiteside,  on  December 
28,  after  which  they  were  marched  seven  miles  to  Wounded  Knee. 

“The  command  was  then  joined  by  Colonel  Forsyth,  with  the  second 
battalion  of  his  regiment,  with  two  Hotchkiss  guns  under  Captain  Capson, 
and  Lieutenant  Taylor’s  Sioux  scouts.  With  this  band  of  outlaws  under 
control,  and  the  entire  hostile  camp  moving  in  before  the  troops  to  surren- 
der within  a short  distance  of  the  agency,  it  was  hoped  that  the  serious 
Indian  difficulty  would  be  brought  to  a close  without  the  loss  of  a single 
white  man.  While  disarming  Big  Foot’s  band  on  the  morning  of  Decem- 
ber 29,  after  a portion  of  their  arms  had  been  surrendered,  they  were 
incited  to  hostility  by  the  harangues  by  their  false  prophets,  and  in  their 
attack  and  attempt  to  escape  nearly  all  of  the  men  were  killed  or  wounded, 
and  serious  loss  of  life  occurred  to  a large  number  of  non-combatants. 
During  the  engagement  some  of  the  young' warriors  who  were  moving  in  to 
surrender  went  to  the  assistance  of  Big  Foot’s  band,  and  were  engaged 
with  the  troops,  and,  returning,  made  a vigorous  attack  upon  the  agency, 
drawing  the  fire  of  the  Indian  police  and  scouts.  This  caused  a general 
alarm,  and  upward  of  three  thousand  Indians  fled  from  the  agency  to  the 
canons  and  broken  ground  adjacent  to  White  Clay  Creek,  and  assumed  a 
hostile  attitude. 

“The  troops  that  were  following,  however,  checked  their  further  move- 
ments. The  attempt  of  some  of  the  warriors  to  burn  the  buildings  near 


GENERAL  MILES'S  CONGRATULATORY  ADDRESS.  44 1 

the  agency  the  following  day,  resulted  in  a skirmish  with  the  Seventh  Cav- 
alry, under  Colonel  Forsyth,  promptly  supported  by  Major  Henry  of  the 
Ninth  Cavalry. 

“In  January,  a spirited  engagement  occurred  on  White  River  between 
a body  of  warriors,  numbering  upward  of  one  hundred,  and  Captain  Kerr’s 
troops  of  the  Sixth  Cavalry,  in  which  the  Indians  were  repulsed  with  loss, 
Major  Tupper’s  battalion  of  Colonel  Carr’s  command  of  the  Sixth  Cavalry 
moving  to  his  support.  This  was  followed  by  several  skirmishes. 

“The  service  sustained  a serious  loss  in  the  death  of  that  gallant 
officer,  Lieutenant  Casey.  The  troops,  under  command  of  Brigadier 
General  Brooke,  gradually  closed  their  lines  of  retreat  and  forced  the 
hostiles  by  superior  numbers  back  to  the  agency,  where  they  are  now 
under  the  guns  of  the  command  and  the  control  of  the  military. 

“While  the  service  has  sustained  the  loss  of  such  gallant  officers  and 
patriots  as  Captain  Wallace,  Lieutenants  Casey  and  Mann,  and  the  other 
brave  non-commissioned  officers  and  soldiers  who  have  given  their  lives  in 
this  cause  of  good  government,  the  most  gratifying  results  have  been  ob- 
tained by  the  endurance,  and  patience,  and  fortitude  of  both  officers  and  men. 

“The  work  of  disarming  the  hostiles  has  in  a large  measure  been 
accomplished,  but  will  be  continued  by  a portion  of  the  command  now  in 
the  field  and  by  the  agency  officials.  As  soon  as  practicable,  the  troops 
will  return  to  their  stations,  and  will  take  with  them  the  assurance  that 
their  services  have  been  of  great  value  to  the  country  in  suppressing  one  of 
the  most  threatening  Indian  outbreaks,  and  that  they  have  been  enabled 
to  keep  between  the  hostile  Indians  and  the  unprotected  settlers  to  the 
extent  that  not  a citizen’s  life  has  been  lost  beyond  the  boundaries  of  the 
Indian  reservation. 

“In  these  facts  the  division  commander  desires  to  express  his  thanks 
and  highest  appreciation  of  the  loyal  and  efficient  service  that  has  been 
rendered.  The  mention  of  individual  names  of  either  officers  or  soldiers 
for  meritorious  conduct  will  be  deferred  until  sufficient  time  is  given  to 
ascertain  each  heroic  act  in  order  that  it  may  be  properly  recognized  and 
duly  rewarded.” 

During  the  progress  of  the  difficulties  with  the  Indians,  General  Miles 
was  so  dissatisfied  with  the  conduct  of  Colonel  J.  W.  Forsyth,  Seventh 
Cavalry,  at  the  battle  of  Wounded  Knee  Creek,  that  he  made  charges 
against  that  officer.  Secretary  of  War  Proctor,  on  the  12th  of  February, 
1891,  made  public  the  result  of  this  investigation. 

The  official  order  for  the  investigation  was  directed  to  Colonel  E.  A. 
Carr,  Sixth  Cavalry;  Major  J.  F.  Kent,  Fourth  Infantry;  and  Captain 
F.  D.  Baldwin,  Fifth  Infantry,  who  were  directed  “to  make  an  immediate 
inquiry  into  and  examination  of  all  the  circumstances  and  acts  connected 


442  CHARGES  AGAINST  COLONEL  J.  W.  FORSYTH. 

with  the  disarming  of  a band  of  Indians  by  troops  under  the  command  of 
Colonel  J.  W.  Forsyth,  Seventh  Cavalry,  encamped  on  Wounded  Knee 
Creek,  S.  D.,  December  29,  1890.” 

The  witnesses  examined  were  Major  S.  M.  Whiteside,  Captain  C.  A. 
Varnum,  First  Lieutenant  W.  J.  Nicholson,  Captain  E.  S.  Godfrey,  Second 
Lieutenant  Sedgwick  Rice,  Captain  C.  S.  Ilsley,  Captain  Henry  Johnson, 
Captain  W.  S.  Edgerly,  First  Lieutenant  W.  W.  Robinson,  Jr.,  Second 
Lieutenant  T.  Q.  Donaldson,  Jr.,  Second  Lieutenant  S.  R.  H.  Tompkins, 
Captain  H.  J.  Nowlan,  First  Lieutenant  L.  S.  McCormick,  and  Colonel 
J.  W.  Forsyth,  all  of  the  Seventh  Cavalry;  Interpreter  R.  O.  Wells,  Frog, 
of  Big  Foot’s  band;  Help  Them,  an  Ogalalla;  the  Rev.  F.  M.  J.  Craft, 
Brigadier  General  J.  R.  Brooke,  Assistant  Surgeons  C.  B.  Ewing  and 
J.  V.  R.  Hoff,  First  Lieutenant  C.  W.  Taylor,  Ninth  Cavalry,  and  Captain 
Allyn  Capron,  First  Artillery. 

The  record  of  the  court  of  inquiry  is  indorsed  by  Major  General  Miles 
as  follows : 

“In  disposing  of  this  matter  it  has  been  desired  to  treat  Colonel  For- 
syth with  the  utmost  consideration.  But  as  it  is  important  to  the  best 
interests  of  the  service  that  skill  and  heroism  should  be  rewarded,  so  also 
is  it  important  that  incompetency  and  neglect,  when  found,  should  not 
pass  unnoticed,  it  would  be  utterly  subversive  of  military  discipline  to 
overlook  a neglect  and  disregard  of  warnings  and  orders  on  the  part  of  an 
officer,  particularly  when  such  neglect  and  disregard  may  have  involved  the 
lives  of  brave  men  and  jeopardized  the  success  of  the  military  operations  in 
hand 

“The  testimony  elicited  shows  the  following  facts:  First.  That  Colo- 
nel Forsyth  had  received  repeated  warnings  as  to  the  desperate  and  deceit- 
ful character  of  Big  Foot’s  band  of  Indians,  and  repeated  orders  as  to  the 
exercise  of  constant  vigilance  to  guard  against  surprise  or  disaster  under 
all  circumstances. 

“Second.  That  these  warnings  and  orders  were  unheeded  and  disre- 
garded by  Colonel  Forsyth,  who  seemed  to  consider  an  outbreak  of  the 
Indians  as  being  beyond  the  pale  of  possibility  in  the  presence  of  the  large 
force  of  troops  at  hand.  The  disasters  that  have  occurred  to  our  troops  in 
the  past  from  the  desperation  of  the  Indian  nature  are  known  to  all  who 
are  familiar  with  our  history.  In  addition  to  this,  it  was  well  known,  and 
Colonel  Forsyth  had  been  warned,  that  this  particular  band  contained 
many  of  the  most  desperate  and  deceitful  characters  in  the  Sioux  nation, 
and  that  a religious  excitement  nearly  approaching  frenzy  had  made  them 
peculiarly  dangerous.  Under  these  circumstances  the  apparent  indiffer- 
ence and  security  of  the  officer  in  command  of  the  troops  at  Wounded 
Knee  Creek  is  incomprehensible  and  inexcusable. 


CHARGES  AGAINST  COLONEL  J.  W.  FORSYTH. 


443 


“Third.  An  examination  of  the  accompanying  map  and  testimony 
shows  conclusively  that  at  the  beginning  of  the  outbreak  not  a single  com- 
pany of  the  troops  was  so  disposed  as  to  deliver  its  fire  upon  the  warriors 
without  endangering  the  lives  of  some  of  their  own  comrades.  It  is,  in 
fact,  difficult  to  conceive  how  a worse  disposition  of  the  troops  could  have 
been  made.  It  will  be  noticed  that  it  would  have  been  perfectly  practica- 
ble for  the  entire  command  of  upward  of  four  hundred  and  fifty  men  to 
have  been  placed  between  the  warriors  and  the  women  and  children,  with 
their  backs  to  the  latter  and  their  faces  toward  the  warriors,  where  they 
might  have  used  their  weapons  effectively  if  required. 

“The  testimony  goes  to  show  that  most  of  the  troops  were  forced  to 
withhold  their  fire,  leaving  the  brunt  of  the  affair  to  fall  upon  two  compan- 
ies until  such  warriors  as  had  not  been  killed  broke  through  or  overpow- 
ered the  small  force  directly  about  them,  and  reached  the  camp  occupied 
by  their  women  and  children.  The  battery  of  four  Hotchkiss  guns  had 
until  then  been  useless,  the  friction  primers  having  been  removed  from  the 
guns  by  order  of  the  captain  commanding  the  battery,  lest  the  gunners 
might,  in  their  excitement,  discharge  the  pieces  and  destroy  their  own  com- 
rades. These  guns  were  now  opened  upon  the  Indian  camp,  even  at  that 
time  placing  in  peril  Troops  C and  D,  Seventh  Cavalry,  which  were 
obliged  to  retreat  for  some  distance  owing  to  the  fire  from  these  guns  and 
from  the  small  arms  of  other  portions  of  the  command.  The  fact  that  a 
large  number  of  the  one  hundred  and  six  warriors  were  without  firearms 
when  the  outbreak  occurred,  is  shown  by  the  evidence  that  forty-eight 
guns  had  been  taken  from  the  tepees,  and  that  a personal  search  of  twenty 
or  more  warriors  resulted  in  finding  them  unarmed. 

“This  fact,  taken  in  connection  with  the  extremely  injudicious  disposi- 
tion of  the  troops  and  the  large  number  of  casualties  among  them,  con- 
strains the  belief  that  some  of  these  casualties  were  suffered  at  the  hands 
of  our  own  men. 

“The  fatal  disposition  of  the  troops  was  such  as  at  the  outset  to  coun- 
teract in  great  measure  the  immense  disparity  of  strength,  and  would  have 
been  inexcusable  in  the  face  of  an  armed  and  desperate  foe,  even  had  no 
especial  warnings  and  orders  been  received  from  higher  authority.  I can 
only  partially  account  for  the  singular  apathy  and  neglect  of  Colonel  For- 
syth upon  the  theory  of  his  indifference  to  and  contempt  for  the  repeated 
and  urgent  warnings  and  orders  received  by  him  from  the  division  com- 
mander, or  by  his  incompetence  and  entire  inexperience  in  the  responsibil- 
ity of  exercising  command  where  judgment  and  discretion  are  required. 

“I  also  forward  herewith  report  of  Captain  Frank  D.  Baldwin,  Fifth 
Infantry,  concerning  the  finding  of  the  bodies  of  a party  of  women  and 
children  about  three  miles  from  the  scene  of  the  engagement  on  Wounded 


444 


INDORSEMENT  OF  THE  SECRETARY  OF  WAR. 


Knee  Creek.  This  report  indicates  the  nature  of  some  of  the  results  o^ 
that  unfortuante  affair — results  which  are  viewed  with  the  strongest  disap- 
proval by  the  undersigned. 

(Signed),  “Nelson  A.  Miles, 

“Major  General  Commanding.” 

General  Schofield’s  indorsement  contained  the  following: 

“The  evidence  in  these  papers  shows  that  great  care  was  taken  by  the 
officers  and  generally  by  the  enlisted  men  to  avoid  unnecessary  killing  of 
Indian  women  and  children  in  the  affair  at  Wounded  Knee,  and  shows  that 
the  conduct  of  the  Seventh  Cavalry,  under  very  trying  circumstances,  was 
characterized  by  excellent  discipline  and  in  many  cases  by  great  forbear, 
ance.  In  my  judgment,  the  conduct  of  the  regiment  was  well  worthy  of 
the  commendation  bestowed  upon  it  by  me  in  my  first  telegram  after  the 
engagement.” 

The  following  indorsement  was  made  by  the  Secretary  of  War: 

“From  the  testimony  taken  by  Major  Kent  and  Captain  Baldwin,  two 
officers  of  General  Miles’s  staff,  ordered  by  him  to  investigate  the  fight  at 
Wounded  Knee,  it  appears  that  before  the  action  Big  Foot’s  band  had 
been  joined  by  Sitting  Bull’s  following,  and  these  bands  embraced  the 
most  fanatical  and  desperate  elements  among  the  Sioux.  . . . The  sur- 
render was  made  to  Major  Whiteside,  commanding  the  First  Battalion  of 
the  Seventh  Cavalry,  on  the  afternoon  of  December  28.  Colonel  For- 
syth was  ordered  up  to  his  support,  and  arrived  at  a quarter  to  nine  that 
evening.  . . . The  troops  appear  to  have  been  well  disposed  to  prevent 
an  outbreak,  which  was  not  and  could  hardly  have  been  anticipated  by  any- 
one under  the  circumstances,  even  in  dealing  with  Indians,  and  the  disposi- 
tions appear  to  have  had  the  desired  effect  of  convincing  at  least  a major- 
ity of  the  Indians  of  the  futility  of  any  attempt  to  escape 

“The  disarmament  was  commenced,  and  it  was  evident  that  the  Indi- 
ans were  sullenly  trying  to  evade  the  order.  To  carry  out  this  order  the 
men  had  been  ordered  out  from  their  camp  to  separate  them  from  their 
women  and  children,  and  were  formed  about  a hundred  yards  away,  and 
Troops  K and  B were  posted  midway  between  them  and  their  tepees. 
When  ordered  to  surrender  their  arms,  they  produced  two  broken  carbines, 
and  stated  that  was  all  they  had ; but  when  the  partial  search  of  the 
tepees  was  made,  before  the  firing  commenced,  about  forty  arms  were 
found,  the  squaws  making  every  effort  to  conceal  the  same  by  hiding  and 
sitting  on  them,  and  in  various  other  ways  evidencing  a most  sullen  mien. 

“The  disarmament  was  much  more  thorough  than  they  expected,  and 
when  they  found  that  the  arms  were  to  be  taken  from  their  tepees,  and 
those  they  had  concealed  under  their  blankets  were  to  be  taken  away  also, 


INDORSEMENT  OF  THE  SECRETARY  OF  WAR.  44^ 

they  were  carried  away  by  the  harangue  of  the  ghost  dancer  and,  wheeling 
about,  opened  fire.  Nothing  illustrates  the  madness  of  their  outbreak  more 
forcibly  than  the  fact  that  their  first  fire  was  so  directed  that  every  shot 
that  did  not  hit  a soldier  must  have  gone  through  their  own  village. 

“There  is  little  doubt  that  the  first  killing  of  women  and  children  was 
by  this  first  fire  of  the  Indians  themselves.  They  then  made  a rush  to 
break  through  and  around  the  flanks  of  Troop  K,  commanded  by  the 
gallant  Captain  Wallace,  and  reached  their  tepees,  where  many  of  them 
had  left  their  arms  with  the  squaws,  and  they  continued  the  firing  from 
among  their  own  women  and  children,  and  when  they  started  from  their 
camp  their  women  and  children  were  mingled  with  them.  The  women 
and  children  were  never  away  from  the  immediate  company  of  the  men 
after  the  latter  broke  from  the  circle.  Many  of  them,  men  and  women, 
got  on  their  ponies,  and  it  is  impossible  to  distinguish  buck  from  squaw  at 

a little  distance  when  mounted 

“The  bodies  of  an  Indian  woman  and  three  children,  who  had  been 
shot  down  three  miles  from  Wounded  Knee,  were  found  some  days  after 
the  battle,  and  buried  by  Captain  Baldwin  of  the  Fifth  Infantry,  but  it 
does  not  appear  that  this  killing  had  any  connection  with  the  fight  at 
Wounded  Knee,  nor  that  Colonel  Forsyth  is  any  way  responsible  for  it. 
Necessary  orders  will  be  given  to  insure  a thorough  investigation  of  the 
transaction  and  the  prompt  punishment  of  the  criminals. 

“No  doubt  the  position  of  the  troops  made  it  necessary  for  some  of 
them  to  withhold  their  fire  for  a time  in  order  that  they  might  not  endan- 
ger the  lives  of  their  comrades,  but  both  Major  Kent  and  Captain  Baldwin 
concur  in  finding  that  the  evidence  fails  to  establish  that  a single  man  of 
Colonel  Forsyth’s  command  was  killed  or  wounded  by  his  fellows.  This 
fact  and,  indeed,  the  conduct  of  both  officers  and  men  through  the  whole 
affair,  demonstrates  an  exceedingly  satisfactory  state  of  discipline  in  the 
Seventh  Cavalry.  Their  behavior  was  characterized  by  skill,  coolness,  dis- 
cretion, and  forbearance,  and  reflects  the  highest  possible  credit  upon  the 
regiment,  which  sustained  a loss  of  one  officer  and  twenty-five  enlisted 

men  killed,  and  three  officers  and  thirty-two  enlisted  men  wounded 

“In  the  light  of  actual  conditions  as  they  appeared  to  the  command- 
ing officer,  there  does  not  seem  to  be  anything  in  the  arrangement  of  the 
troops  requiring  adverse  criticism  on  the  part  of  the  department. 

“I  therefore  approve  of  the  indorsement  of  the  major  general  com- 
manding, that  the  interests  of  the  military  service  do  not  demand  any 
further  proceedings  in  this  case.  By  direction  of  the  President,  Colonel 
Forsyth  will  resume  the  command  of  his  regiment. 

“Redfield  Proctor, 

“Secretary  of  War.” 


CHAPTER  XLVII. 


VISIT  OF  THE  SIOUX  DELEGATION  TO  WASHINGTON— SPEECHES  BY 
SECRETARY  NOBLE,  JOHN  GRASS,  AMERICAN  HORSE,  YOUNG-MAN 
AFRAID-OF-HIS-HORSES,  TWO  STRIKE,  HUMP,  HIGH  HAWK,  HOLLOW 
HORN  BEAR,  MEDICINE  BULL,  WHITE  GHOST,  BIG  MANE,  LITTLE  NO 
HEART,  MAD  BEAR,  TURNING  HAWK,  AND  THE  GREAT  FATHER, 
PRESIDENT  HARRISON— THE  INDIAN  STORY  OF  WOUNDED  KNEE. 


PON  the  advice  of  General  Miles,  a delegation  of  twelve  Sioux  chiefs 


^ were  invited  to  Washington,  in  order  to  hold  a conference  with  the 
representatives  of  the  Government  regarding  the  recent  troubles,  and  to 
consult  as  to  the  best  measures  to  be  adopted  in  the  future  for  the  good  of 
the  “wards  of  the  nation. ” 

The  “pow  wow,”  as  it  is  called  by  the  red  men,  began  on  the  7th  of 
February,  1891,  at  the  Interior  Department.  It  was  opened  by  Secretary 
Noble,  who  said: 

“You  were  represented  here  just  after  the  agreement  with  General 
Crook  was  made.  You  made  certain  requests  and  complaints  at  that  time, 
and  you  received  certain  promises  from  me.  There  has  been  trouble  since 
then,  and  you  have  come  again  to  say  what  you  think  proper  as  to  the 
cause  of  the  trouble,  and  to  make  any  further  complaints  you  see  fit.  The 
Secretary  is  here  to  tell  you  that  he  has  kept  his  word,  but  if  there  is  any- 
thing more  he  can  do,  through  friendship  for  the  Sioux,  he  is  ready  to  do 
it.  He  is  your  friend,  and  the  Great  Father  has  told  him  to  be  your  friend. 
He  wants  you  to  talk  to  him  as  a friend,  and  he  will  meet  you  in  the  same 
spirit.’' 

The  Secretary  then  asked  if  the  Indians  had  made  any  arrangements 
about  speakers.  He  could  not  hear  them  all,  but  he  would  listen  to  a few, 
and  he  desired  them  to  speak  briefly.  He  added  that  if  no  objection  was 
made  he  would  hear  from  John  Grass,  Hollow  Horn  Bear,  American 
Horse,  Two  Strike,  Hump,  and  Young-Man-Afaid-of-His-Horses. 

Louis  Rencontre  said  that  this  arrangement  was  not  satisfactory,  as  it 
was  desired  that  each  agency  should  be  represented  in  the  speakers. 

The  Secretary  replied  that  he  would  hear  John  Grass  and  American 
Horse,  and  then  advise  with  them  as  to  who  should  follow. 

John  Grass  then  came  forward.  The  Rev.  C.  S.  Cook,  the  Episcopal 
minister  at  Pine  Ridge,  acted  as  interpreter.  Grass  at  once  began  to  speak 
of  the  recent  trouble  among  the  Indians,  the  origin  of  which  he  did  not 


SPEECHES  BY  JOHN  GRASS  AND  AMERICAN  HORSE.  447 

know.  They  had  come  for  the  purpose  of  conferring  with  the  Secretary  in 
regard  to  the  matter.  The  Indians,  he  said,  did  not  desire  to  be  driven 
back  to  their  wild  life,  but  wished  to  consult  with  the  President  so  as  to 
determine  upon  the  future.  They  wished,  he  said,  to  speak  on  certain 
matters  talked  over  when  the  Indians  were  here  last,  and  the  promises  in 
regard  to  which  were  not  carried  out.  He  protested  against  the  practice 
of  blaming  all  Indians  for  what  was  the  fault  of  a few.  The  Indians 
believe  that  if  they  are  honest  in  trying  to  put  their  children  into  schools, 
and  if  they  follow  the  teachings  of  Christianity,  they  would  be  going  in  the 
right  road.  The  Indians  regarded  these  as  important  factors,  and  they 
also  thought  it  desirable  that  the  agents  should  be  civilians  rather  than 
military.  They  desired  a continuance  of  the  present  system  in  this 
respect.  In  the  past,  he  said,  the  Indian  agents  had  opportunities  to  steal, 
but  now  the  good  people  in  the  East  maintained  such  a close  watch  that  it 
was  difficult  for  them  to  adopt  such  practices.  The  agents  in  late  years, 
he  said,  were  good  men.  In  speaking  of  his  own  reservation,  that  of 
Standing  Rock,  the  threatened  trouble  had  been  put  down  by  the  Indian 
police.  They  believed  in  the  Indian  police,  and  he  was  requested  to  ask 
for  an  increase  of  fifty  men.  Grass  then  shook  hands  with  the  Secretary 
and  took  his  seat. 

American  Horse  was  the  next  speaker.  He  displayed  considerable 
natural  ability,  and  made  a graceful  preface  to  his  remarks,  referring  in 
complimentary  terms  to  the  Secretary  and  the  ladies  present.  He  then 
asked  if  the  Secretary  thought  it  was  good  to  curtail  the  speech  of  a man 
who  had  something  to  say,  so  that  he  did  not  have  the  chance  to  say  all 
he  intended. 

This  question  created  some  laughter,  and  the  Secretary  replied  that 
he  thought  short  speeches  were  the  best,  but  he  desired  him  to  say  all  he 
wished  to  say. 

American  Horse  further  inquired  whether  they  would  have  another 
conference  with  the  Secretary.  He  said  that  they  had  a good  deal  of 
business  to  transact,  which  might  require  three  or  four  months. 

The  Secretary  said  he  was  willing  to  see  them  as  often  as  necessary, 
but  said  that  their  business  here  must  be  brought  to  a close  in  a short 
time.  If  this  could  not  be  done  they  must  attend  to  the  rest  of  it  at  the 
agencies.  He  asked  that  they  proceed  to  address  themselves  to  the  sub- 
ject of  the  conference. 

American  Horse  further  protested  against  haste.  He  said  that  he  had 
endeavored  to  learn  the  origin  of  the  late  trouble,  and  in  his  search  and 
investigation  he  found  himself  in  Washington.  He  then  went  on  to  speak 
of  the  importance  of  this  city  as  a treaty-making  center,  and  gradually 
drifted  into  a discussion  of  the  subject  proper.  He  protested  against 


448 


VIEWS  OF  AMERICAN  HORSE. 


being  classed  as  a hostile,  and  the  Secretary  assured  him  that  he  was  not 
so  classed.  American  Horse  said  that  the  Indians  at  Pine  Ridge,  through 
the  destruction  of  their  property,  had  been  put  back  fifteen  years,  and  that 
the  Indians  desired  to  have  these  losses  made  good.  The  Government,  he 
said,  had  made  mistakes  in  their  attempts  to  civilize  the  Indians.  He 
enumerated  their  mistakes.  Instead  of  the  places  at  the  agencies  being 
filled  by  Indians,  white  men  crowded  them  out  and  took  the  places.  This 
was  one  reason  why  the  Indians  were  called  lazy.  At  the  agencies,  he 
said,  the  white  men  were  so  numerous  that  they  fairly  trampled  on  the 
Indians.  What  his  people  wanted  was  a chance  to  rise  and  fill  the  places 
of  trust  and  consequence  that  were  within  their  reach.  He  desired  that 
some  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  wishes  of  the  Indians  in  regard  to  the 
men  to  be  agents. 

The  Indians  were  able  to  tell  as  well  as  white  men  what  men  were 
competent.  The  agents,  he  said,  naturally  selected  their  own  relations  to 
fill  the  places  under  them.  He  thought  that  the  Indians  would  receive 
these  appointments  if  justice  were  done.  He  then  spoke  of  religious  mat- 
ters, and  said  that  there  were  three  religious  bodies  on  their  reservation 
who  were  trying  to  teach  them  to  live  better  lives,  and  especially  to  bring 
about  religious  marriages;  but  they  did  not  want  to  be  compelled  to  marry 
certain  persons. 

The  Secretary  inquired  who  had  sought  to  compel  them  to  marry. 
American  Horse  replied  that  he  referred  more  particularly  to  persons  who 
eloped.  When  the  couple  were  brought  back,  the  agent  obliged  them  to 
get  married.  He  asked  that  the  losses  suffered  by  the  Indians  in  the  late 
disturbance  be  made  good  by  the  Government.  He  urged  that  a remedy 
for  a good  many  of  the  present  troubles  would  be  for  the  Government  to 
go  back  to  the  treaty  of  1868,  and  redeem  some  of  the  promises  then 
made.  The  money  bags,  as  he  called  the  money  which  had  been  promised 
them,  must  by  this  time,  he  thought,  have  reached  a good  age  and  have 
grown,  and  the  distribution  of  the  sums  due  would  be  of  great  service. 
He  favored  the  removal  of  the  Carlisle  School  to  the  West,  as  the  Indi- 
ans’ children  would  not  then  suffer  in  consequence  of  a change  of  climate 
and  their  modes  of  life.  He  said  that  the  contract  with  the  Indians  was 
that  their  children  be  sent  to  the  schools  in  the  East,  and  upon  their 
return  places  would  be  given  them  on  the  reservations.  This,  he  said,  had 
not  been  done. 

Young-Man-Afraid-of-His-Horses  said  he  was  very  much  pleased  to 
meet  everybody,  and  then  went  on  to  relate  his  services  in  the  interest  of 
harmony  during  the  late  trouble.  In  the  course  of  his  introductory 
remarks  he  said  he  had  brought  his  people  into  camp  and  had  turned  in 
their  arms. 


OTHER  INDIAN  ADDRESSES. 


449 


“How  many?”  queried  the  Secretary,  and  the  orator  was  somewhat 
nonplussed.  He  knew  the  total  was  small,  and  he  did  not  care  to  say. 
The  Secretary  removed  the  embarrassment  by  bidding  him  proceed  in  his 
own  way,  and  then  Young-Man-Afraid-of-His-Horses  said  he  hoped  the 
Government  would  not  only  educate  the  children,  but  would  also  give 
them  something  to  do  when  they  finished  at  school.  The  Government 
had  always  said  that  if  Indians  worked  they  would  get  rich.  They  wanted 
to  get  rich,  and  the  only  way  that  was  possible  was  the  giving  of  employ- 
ment to  the  young  men  when  they  left  school. 

Two  Strike  was  next  called  for.  The  wily  old  warrior  did  not  want  to 
say  much,  but  his  manner  was  quite  vigorous.  He  acknowledged  that 
there  had  been  trouble,  but  that  was  gone.  He  had  made  peace  with  Gen- 
eral Miles,  and  turned  in  his  arms,  and  now  came  to  report  to  the  Great 
Father.  He  was  always  going  to  do  what  he  could  to  maintain  peace. 

The  next  speaker  was  Hump.  He  called  attention  to  the  fact  that  he 
had  farmed  at  Cheyenne  River  for  three  years  and  had  no  crop,  and  for 
that  reason  he  wanted  the  rations  increased  and  continued.  Cheyenne 
River  Agency  had  suffered  much  in  this  trouble — about  three  hundred  of 
the  people  had  been  killed — and  there  should  be  some  consideration  shown 
the  survivors. 

High  Hawk,  an  Ogalalla,  told  with  a loud  voice  how  earnest  he  had 
always  been  for  peace.  His  principal  complaint  was  as  to  the  dividing  line 
between  the  Pine  Ridge  and  Rosebud  Agencies.  The  line  had  caused 
much  trouble,  and  he  hoped  it  would  be  removed. 

Then  Hollow  Horn  Bear,  a Brule  from  Rosebud  Agency,  took  the 
floor.  He  said  that  one  man  (referring  to  the  affair  at  Wounded  Knee) 
wanted  to  fight ; the  others  did  not.  That  man  fired  his  gun,  and  then  the 
soldiers  shot  men,  women,  and  children.  He  was  somewhat  lost,  but  he 
was  going  to  try  to  do  right,  as  he  had  always  done,  but  he  had  to  say  that 
only  the  white  man  had  broken  the  mutual  promises.  He  told  of  some  of 
his  people  who  were  badly  wounded,  and  characterized  the  conduct  of  the 
military  as  cruel.  The  soldiers  were  the  cause  of  all  the  trouble. 

Hollow  Horn  Bear  then  asked  that  those  Indians  who  had  lost  prop- 
erty during  the  late  trouble  might  be  reimbursed,  and  went  into  financial 
matters  in  connection  with  old  and  unfulfilled  treaties.  Cows  had  been 
promised  long  ago,  but  they  had  not  been  given.  Crops  were  failures  in 
his  country,  and  only  cattle  raising  was  a success.  The  cows  ought  to  be 
sent  out  right  away.  There  was  money  due  the  Indians,  and  he  hoped 
that  would  be  used  in  the  purchase  of  cows  and  mares.  The  money  was 
to  have  been  used  to  buy  beef.  He  would  rather  see  it  spent  for  some- 
thing that  would  bring  in  increase.  He  asked  that  sub-issue  houses  be  estab- 
lished in  the  various  camps,  so  that  men  who  desired  to  work  be  not  taken 


450 


REPLY  OF  SECRETARY  NOBLE. 


away  from  their  farms  or  cattle.  The  agency  was  many  miles  away  from 
many  camps.  There  was  no  line,  and  there  ought  not  to  be.  It  had 
caused  much  trouble.  More  schoolhouses  had  been  promised,  and  he 
hoped  they  would  soon  be  built.  He  wanted  the  children  to  have  an 
opportunity  to  learn  something. 

Medicine  Bull  next  talked  through  Interpreter  Cook.  From  his  utter- 
ances it  was  evident  that  he  always  had  been,  was  now,  and  ever  would  be, 
in  perfect  accord  with  the  Indian  policy  of  the  Government. 

Secretary  Noble  then  spoke  to  the  Indians.  The  Indian  must  not  be 
discouraged.  He  would  be  supported  as  long  as  he  endeavored  to  do  well. 
There  were  two  sides  to  the  question  of  what  is  due  the  Indian  and  what 
is  due  from  the  Indian.  “I  wish  to  speak  about  these  things  in  a friendly 
spirit,”  said  he.  “I  wish  to  tell  the  Sioux  what  the  Government  has  done 
for  them,  and  I wish  to  tell  them  from  a book  written  by  their  friend,  Miss 
Fletcher,  as  to  what  has  been  done  for  them.  Up  to  1884,  $42,000,000  has 
been  given  the  Sioux  by  the  Government.  The  Government  acknowl- 
edges its  treaties  and  agreements  with  the  Sioux.  Since  1884,  when  this 
money  was  paid,  there  has  been  much  more  money  paid,  according  to  the 
treaty.  One  of  the  speakers  complained  that  no  cows  have  been  issued 
within  the  last  two  years.  I wish  to  tell  what  has  been  issued  in  the  way 
of  horses  and  stock  cattle  under  the  treaty.  [The  Secretary  then  quoted 
statistics  as  to  the  issues  to  Indians.]  The  schools  that  the  Indians  want 
have  been  kept  up  at  all  of  these  agencies,  and  industrial  schools  such  as 
they  want  have  also  been  established  at  Pierre,  and  another  school  will  be 
put  up  at  Flandreau.  Farmers  have  been  kept  at  the  different  agencies  to 
show  the  Sioux  how  to  farm  the  land.  The  Great  Father  asked  Congress 
to  do  these  things  according  to  the  recommendations  of  General  Crook  and 
the  commissioner.  Congress  has  acted  as  rapidly  as  other  public  business 
would  permit,  and  the  Sioux  will  next  get  the  benefit.  The  bill  was 
approved  on  January  19,  1891.  It  was  a mere  accident  that  $100,000 
should  have  been  cut  off  the  Sioux  appropriation  immediately  after  the 
agreement  with  General  Crook.  It  would  have  been  the  same  if  there  had 
been  no  agreement.  These  things  should  convince  the  Sioux  that  the 
Government  has  been  trying  to  do  what  was  right  for  the  Indians.” 

In  conclusion  the  Secretary  advised  the  Indians  to  think  over  the 
many  things  the  Government  had  done  for  them ; to  look  at  the  promises 
made  by  General  Crook  and  to  have  confidence  in  what  he  said.  The  Sec- 
retary said  he  wanted  the  Indians  to  make  up  their  minds  to  do  the  best 
they  could  to  educate  or  to  have  educated  their  children,  and  never  to  let 
their  young  men  dream  that  they  could  ever  get  anything  by  force  from 
the  United  States.  The  Secretary’s  speech  closed  with  renewed  assurances 
of  friendship. 


OTHER  CAUSES  OF  COMPLAINT. 


451 


The  conference  was  resumed  the  next  day  by  the  Commissioner  of 
Indian  Affairs,  who  told  the  delegation  that  he  had  called  them  together  that 
he  might  explain  some  things,  and  that  he  might  hear  from  them  in  regard  to 
some  matters  of  administration.  He  reminded  them  that  he  had  no  power 
to  make  laws,  and  had  no  food  or  money  to  give  them  except  what  Congress 
provides.  He  said  he  thought  they  had  already  heard  all  that  was  neces- 
sary in  regard  to  the  past.  What  was  wanted  now  was  to  hear  their  plans 
for  the  future. 

The  first  speaker  from  the  Indian  delegation  was  White  Ghost  of  the 
Crow  Creek  Reservation,  who  spoke  of  the  encroachments  of  the  whites 
upon  the  lands  of  the  Indians. 

The  commissioner  assured  him  that  he  would  have  that  matter  fully 
investigated  and  remedied. 

White  Ghost  spoke  of  the  rations  of  coffee,  and  said  that  they  amounted 
to  only  one  hundred  grains  a week  to  each  person.  He  referred  to  the 
small  ration  of  bacon  issued,  and  said  that  at  a meeting  of  the  delegation 
yesterday  the  unanimous  decision  was  reached  that  they  did  not  want 
military  agents. 

Big  Mane  of  the  Lower  Brule  Agency  told  the  commissioner  that  the 
white  people  had  squatted  on  their  lands  and  prevented  the  Indians  from 
getting  fuel  and  hay.  He  wanted  the  agency  moved  nearer  to  the  lands 
occupied  by  the  Indians,  and  said  they  needed  better  school  facilities. 
He  complained  of  the  small  size  of  the  beef  cattle  given  them  for  food,  and 
humorously  attributed  it  to  the  defective  eyesight  of  the  agent. 

Little  No  Heart,  from  the  Cheyenne  River  Agency,  said  that  the 
Christian  people  on  the  reservation  were  doing  a good  work  in  civilizing 
his  people,  and  that  their  influence  was  always  on  the  side  of  peace  and 
good  government.  He  said  that  his  people  wanted  more  and  larger 
schools,  where  their  children  could  learn  the  white  man’s  ways.  He  pro- 
tested against  the  appointment  of  military  agents.  His  people  were  peace- 
fully disposed,  and,  in  his  opinion,  civil  agents  would  better  suit  the  Sioux, 
and  that  the  good  of  all  concerned  required  the  appointment  of  civil 
agents. 

In  answer  to  his  request  for  information  as  to  what  the  Government 
proposed  to  do  for  his  people,  the  commissioner  said  that  he  would  furnish 
to  the  delegation  copies  of  the  Sioux  agreement  of  1889,  and  said  that  the 
purpose  of  the  Government  was  to  fulfill  every  promise  made  in  that  agree- 
ment. 

Little  No  Heart  also  complained  of  the  delay  in  establishing  the 
boundary  lines  between  the  two  reservations.  As  the  matter  now  stands 
white  squatters  are  undoubtedly  still  trespassing  and,  as  there  is  no  well 
defined  line,  they  cannot  demand  their  removal. 


452 


THE  INDIAN  STORY  OF  WOUNDED  KNEE. 


The  commissioner  said  that  he  had  already  given  instructions  to  have 
the  trespassers  removed,  and  to  have  all  others  warned  not  to  enter  the 
reservation. 

Little  No  Heart  having  again  said  that  his  people  did  not  want  mili- 
tary agents,  the  commissioner  said  that,  inasmuch  as  nearly  all  who  had 
spoken  had  expressed  the  same  desire,  he  wished  to  learn  now  many  of  the 
members  of  the  delegation  were  in  favor  of  civil  agents  and  how  many  in 
favor  of  military  agents,  and  for  that  purpose  he  instructed  the  interpreter 
to  ask  such  of  the  Indians  as  preferred  civil  agents  to  stand  up.  With  a 
single  exception  they  all  stood  up.  The  only  one  who  preferred  military 
agents  was  Major  Swords,  the  chief  of  the  Indian  police  at  Pine  Ridge. 
The  commissioner  explained  his  vote  by  saying  that  a place  in  the  army 
had  been  offered  him  by  General  Miles.  This  remark  elicited  considerable 
laughter  among  the  spectators. 

Mad  Bear,  from  Standing  Rock,  said  that  the  chiefs  of  the  several 
bands  on  his  reservation  had  had  a meeting,  at  which  they  asked  him  to  insist 
upon  more  reservation  schools.  His  people  preferred  reservation  schools 
to  distant  schools.  If  the  schools  were  located  on  the  reservation  their 
influence  would  be  felt  not  only  by  the  pupils  but  by  the  parents  as  well. 
In  this  way  the  greatest  possible  good  could  be  accomplished. 

The  conclusion  of  the  conference  was  made  memorable  by  the  story  of 
the  fight  at  Wounded  Knee  as  told  by  Turning  Hawk  and  American 
Horse.  At  the  opening,  Turning  Hawk  said  that  a certain  falsehood  came 
to  his  agency  from  the  West,  which  acted  like  fire  upon  the  Indians. 

“When  the  fire  came  upon  our  people,”  he  said,  “those  who  had  a 
certain  far-sightedness  and  could  see  into  the  matter  made  up  their  minds 
to  stand  up  against  it  and  fight  it.  The  reason  we  took  this  hostile  atti- 
tude to  this  fire  was  because  we  believed  that  you  yourself  would  not  be  in 
favor  of  this  particular  mischief-making  thing;  but,  just  as  we  expected, 
the  people  in  authority  did  not  like  this  thing,  and  we  were  quietly  told 
that  we  must  give  up  or  have  nothing  to  do  with  this  certain  movement. 
Though  this  was  the  advice  from  our  good  friends  of  the  East,  there  were, 
of  course,  many  silly  young  men  who  were  longing  to  become  identified 
with  the  movement,  although  they  knew  that  there  was  absolutely  nothing 
bad,  nor  did  they  know  there  was  anything  absolutely  good,  in  connection 
with  the  movement,  and  in  the  course  of  time  we  heard  that  the  soldiers 
were  moving  toward  the  scene  of  the  trouble. 

“Frightened  at  the  approach  of  the  soldiers,  and  hearing  all  manner  of 
rumors  as  to  what  the  soldiers  were  going  to  do  with  them,  they  fled  into 
the  Bad  Lands.  Their  friends  and  relatives  left  behind  at  the  agency 
became  very  anxious  about  them,  and  sent  parties  to  them  to  try  and 
induce  them  to  return.  Finally  they  succeeded.  When  our  people  who 


THE  INDIAN  STORY  OF  WOUNDED  KNEE. 


453 


had  been  frightened  away  were  returning  to  Pine  Ridge,  and  when  they  had 
almost  reached  the  agency,  they  were  met  by  the  soldiers  and  surrounded 
and  finally  taken  to  the  Wounded  Knee  Creek,  and  there,  at  a given  time, 
their  guns  were  demanded,  and  when  they  had  delivered  them  up  the  men 
were  separated  from  their  families,  from  their  tepees,  and  taken  to  a cer- 
tain spot,  their  guns  having  been  given  up.  When  the  guns  were  thus 
taken  and  the  men  thus  separated,  there  was  a crazy  man,  a young  man  of 
very  bad  influence,  and  in  fact  a nobody  among  that  bunch  of  Indians, 
fired  his  gun;  and,  of  course,  the  firing  of  a gun  must  have  been  the  break- 
ing of  a military  rule  of  some  sort,  for  immediately  the  soldiers  returned 
the  fire,  and  the  indiscriminate  killing  followed.’' 

The  Commissioner:  Did  this  man  fire  at  the  soldiers,  or  did  he  simply 
shoot  in  the  air? 

Spotted  Horse:  He  shot  an  officer  in  the  army.  The  first  shot  killed 
this  officer.  I was  a voluntary  scout  at  that  encounter  and  I had  just 
asserted  that  I saw  exactly  what  was  done,  and  that  was  what  I noticed — 
that  the  first  shot  killed  an  officer. 

The  Commissioner:  Did  the  soldiers  return  the  fire  immediately,  or 
did  the  Indians  keep  up  their  firing? 

Spotted  Horse:  As  soon  as  the  first  shot  was  fired,  the  Indians  imme- 
diately began  drawing  their  knives,  and  they  were  exhorted  from  all  sides 
to  desist,  but  this  was  not  obeyed ; consequently  the  firing  began  imme- 
diately on  the  part  of  the  soldiers. 

Turning  Hawk:  All  the  men  who  were  in  the  bunch  were  killed  right 
there,  and  those  who  escaped  that  first  fire  got  into  the  ravine,  and  as  they 
went  along  up  the  ravine  for  a long  distance  they  were  pursued  on  both 
sides  by  the  soldiers,  and  shot  down,  as  the  dead  bodies  showed  afterward. 

The  Commissioner:  In  this  fight  did  the  women  take  any  part? 

Turning  Hawk:  They  had  no  firearms  to  fight  with. 

The  Comipissioner : The  statement  has  been  made  in  the  public  press 
that  the  women  fought  with  butcher  knives,  and  this  has  been  given  as  a 
reason  why  the  women  were  shot. 

Turning  Hawk:  When  the  men  were  separated  and  were  bunched 
together  at  a given  place,  of  course  only  the  men  were  there ; the  women 
were  at  a different  place  entirely,  some  distance  off. 

The  Commissioner:  Was  it  possible  for  a soldier  to  tell  the  difference 
between  an  Indian  man  and  an  Indian  woman?  The  statement  has  been 
made  in  the  public  press  that  the  soldiers  shot  the  women  because  they 
dressed  in  such  a way  that  they  could  not  tell  they  were  women. 

Turning  Hawk:  I think  a man  would  be  very  blind  if  he  could  not 
tell  the  difference  between  a man  and  a woman.  I have  told  you  that  the 
women  were  standing  off  at  a different  place  from  that  where  the  men  were 


454 


STRONG  WORDS  FROM  AMERICAN  HORSE. 


stationed,  and  when  the  firing  began  those  of  the  men  who  escaped  the 
first  onslaught  went  in  one  direction  up  the  ravine,  and  then  the  women, 
who  were  bunched  together  at  another  place,  went  entirely  in  a different 
direction  through  an  open  field,  and  the  women  fared  the  same  fate  as  the 
men  who  went  up  the  deep  ravine. 

The  Commissioner  (to  the  interpreter):  Tell  these  men  that  are  pres- 
ent that  I would  like  if  he  (Turning  Hawk)  makes  any  statement  which 
they  do  not  accept,  that  they  will  correct  it.  I want  to  get  at  the 
truth.  I 

American  Horse:  The  men  were  separated,  as  has  already  been  said, 
from  the  women,  and  they  were  surrounded  by  the  soldiers,  who  then 
came  next  the  village  of  the  Indians,  and  that  was  entirely  surrounded  by 
the  soldiers  also.  When  the  firing  began,  of  course  the  people  who  were 
standing  immediately  around  the  young  man  who  fired  the  first  shot  were 
killed,  right  together,  and  then  they  turned  their  guns — Hotchkiss  guns, 
etc. — upon  the  women,  who  were  in  the  lodges,  standing  there  under  a flag 
of  truce,  and,  of  course,  as  soon  as  they  were  fired  upon  they  fled,  the  men 
fleeing  in  one  direction  and  the  women  running  in  two  different  direc- 
tions. So  that  there  were  three  general  directions  in  which  they  took 
flight. 

The  Commissioner:  Do  you  mean  to  say  that  there  was  a white  flag 
in  sight  over  the  women  when  they  were  fired  upon? 

American  Horse:  Yes,  sir;  they  were  fired  upon,  and  there  was  a 
woman  with  her  infant  in  her  arms  who  was  killed  as  she  almost  touched 
the  flag  of  truce,  and  the  women  and  children,  of  course,  were  strewn  all 
along  the  circular  village  until  they  were  dispatched.  Right  near  the  flag 
of  truce  another  was  shot  down  with  her  infant.  The  child,  not  knowing 
that  its  mother  was  dead,  was  still  nursing,  and  that  was  especially  a very 
sad  sight.  The  women,  as  they  were  fleeing  with  their  babes  on  their 
backs,  were  killed  together,  shot  right  through,  and  the  women  who  were 
very  heavy  with  child  were  also  killed.  All  the  Indians  fled  in  these  three 
directions.  After  most  of  them  had  all  been  killed,  a cry  was  made  that  all 
those  who  were  not  killed  or  wounded  should  come  forth  and  they  would 
be  safe,  and  little  boys  who  were  not  wounded  came  out  of  their  places  of 
refuge,  and  as  soon  as  they  came  in  sight  a number  of  soldiers  surrounded 
them  and  butchered  them  there. 

The  Commissioner  (to  the  interpreter):  I wish  you  would  say  to  him 
that  these  are  very  serious  charges  to  make  against  the  United  States 
Army.  I do  not  want  any  statements  made  that  are  not  absolutely  true, 
and  I want  anyone  here  that  feels  that  the  statements  are  too  strong  to 
correct  them. 

American  Horse:  Of  course  we  all  feel  very  sad  about  this  affair.  I 


STATEMENT  OF  REV.  MR.  COOK. 


455 


stood  very  loyal  to  the  Government  all  through  those  troublesome  days, 
and  believing  so  much  in  the  Government  and  being  so  loyal  to  it,  my  dis- 
appointment was  very  strong,  and  I have  come  to  Washington  with  a very 
great  blame  against  the  Government,  on  my  heart.  Of  course  it  would 
have  been  all  right  if  only  the  men  were  killed ; we  would  feel  almost 
grateful  for  it.  But  the  fact  of  the  killing  of  the  women,  and  more  espe- 
cially the  killing  of  the  young  boys  and  girls,  who  are  to  go  to  make  up 
the  future  strength  of  the  Indian  people — those  being  killed  is  the  saddest 
part  of  the  whole  affair,  and  we  feel  it  very  sorely.  This  is  all  I know 
about  that  part  of  the  story,  and  my  good  friend  here  [pointing  to  Turning 
Hawk]  will  continue  his  narrative. 

The  Commissioner:  Does  American  Horse  know  these  things  of  his 
own  knowledge,  or  has  he  been  told  them? 

American  Horse:  I was  not  there  at  the  time  before  the  burial  of  the 
bodies,  but  I did  go  there  with  some  of  the  police,  and  the  Indian  doctor, 
and  a great  many  of  the  people,  men  from  the  agency,  and  we  went 
through  the  battlefield  and  saw  where  the  bodies  were  from  the  track  of 
the  blood. 

The  Rev.  Mr.  Cook,  a Sioux  half-breed,  pastor  of  an  Episcopal  church 
at  Pine  Ridge,  who  had  at  times  acted  as  interpreter  during  the  conference, 
rose,  and,  among  other  things,  said : 

“Much  has  been  said  about  the  good  spirit  with  which  the  members  of 
the  Seventh  Cavalry  went  to  that  scene  of  action.  It  has  been  said  that 
the  desire  to  avenge  Custer’s  death  was  entirely  absent  from  their  minds. 
In  coming  toward  Chicago  in  company  with  General  Miles,  I talked  with 
one  of  his  scouts,  who  was  almost  killed  because  he  was  compelled  to  fly 
with  the  Indians,  being  fired  upon  by  the  men  whom  he  tried  to  serve  and 
help.  He  told  me  that  after  he  recovered  from  his  flight,  and  succeeded  in 
getting  among  the  soldiers  after  they  all  got  in  from  killing  the  Indians, 
an  officer  of  high  rank,  he  did  not  know  who,  came  to  him  and  said,  with 
much  gluttonous  thought  in  his  voice:  ‘Now  we  have  avenged  Custer’s 
death,’  and  this  scout  said  to  him:  ‘Yes,  but  you  had  every  chance  to  fight 
for  your  lives  that  day;  these  poor  Indian  people  did  not  have  that  oppor- 
tunity to  protect  and  fight  for  themselves.’  If  that  is  an  indication  of  the 
spirit  of  a number  of  the  men  in  that  company,  I am  sure  the  Seventh 
Cavalry  cannot  be  free  from  any  charge  of  going  there  with  the  kindest  of 
motives  simply  to  bring  these  poor  people  back.’’ 

After  several  others  had  spoken,  the  Commissioner  declared  the  confer- 
ence at  an  end. 

At  one  o’clock  in  the  afternoon  of  February  12,  1891,  the  Indian  dele- 
gation called  at  the  White  House  in  a body  and  paid  their  respects  to 
their  “Great  Father.’’  The  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs  and  several 


456 


INTERVIEW  WITH  THE  “ GREAT  FATHER.” 


interpreters  accompanied  them.  The  reception  took  place  in  the  East 
Room  the  visitors  listening  attentively  to  the  sensible  address  of  Presi- 
dent Harrison,  who  spoke  as  follows: 

Will  you  say  to  them,  Mr.  Interpreter,  that  I have  given  them  an 
audience  this  morning  without  any  intention  of  talking  to  them  at  any 
length.  They  have  had  opportunity  to  state  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Inte- 


INTERVIEW  OF  THE  INDIAN  DELEGATION  WITH 
THEIR  “GREAT  FATHER”  AT  WASHINGTON. 


nor  and  to  the  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs  their  wants  and  views. 
These  officers  will  bring  what  has  been  said  to  my  attention.  One  or  two 
things  I will  say  myself.  It  has  been  a great  grief  to  me  that  some  of  the 
people  represented  by  you  have  recently  acted  badly;  have  gone  upon  the 
warpath  against  the  Government.  You  can  get  nothing  by  war  except 
punishment.  You  should  understand  by  this  time  that  you  are  too  weak 
to  contend  against  the  United  States  in  war.  You  must  teach  your  young 
men  not  to  be  warriors,  but  citizens.  When  you  suffer  any  wrong  through 
the  agents  who  are  over  you,  or  from  any  white  settlers  who  are  about 
you,  you  should  peacefully  make  these  things  known  to  us  here.  The 
President  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior,  the  Commissioner  of  Indian 
Affairs,  the  Congress,  and  the  great  mass  of  our  people  desire  to  deal 
mdly  with  you.  The  agreement  that  was  made  with  you  by  General 
Crook  and  Governor  Foster  and. Mr.  Warner  we  all  desire  to  carry  out 


SPEECH  OF  PRESIDENT  HARRISON. 


457 


faithfully;  to  do  all  that  we  promised  to  do.  I have  asked  the  Congress 
to  pass  laws  to  carry  out  every  provision  of  the  contract  made  with  you. 
It  is  believed  now  that  full  provision  has  been  made  for  this.  You  must 
not  expect  that  you  and  your  children  will  always  be  fed  by  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States  without  working  yourselves.  Every  white  man 
works  for  the  bread  and  meat  that  sustains  him,  and  you  must  learn  to  do 
a little  more  for  your  own  support  every  year.  You  must  tell  your  young 
men  to  spend  their  money  or  trade  their  ponies  for  something  that  is  good 
for  them,  and  not  for  rifles.  I shall  try  to  see  that  the  Indian  police  are  so 
increased  upon  the  reservations  as  to  protect  you  against  any  bad  white 
men  who  may  live  about  you.  We  will  try  in  every  way  to  give  your  peo- 
ple employment  about  the  agencies  with  the  army,  in  the  Indian  police, 
and  otherwise,  as  we  can,  and  you  must  each  take  your  allotment,  and 
endeavor  the  best  you  can  to  earn  your  living,  either  by  plowing  or  by 
raising  cattle  or  horses,  or  some  other  peaceful  industry.  I hope  you  will 
all  return  to  the  reservation  with  these  things  settled  in  your  minds,  and 
you  may  depend  upon  us  to  do  everything  we  can  to  promote  the 
advancement  of  your  tribe,  to  protect  you  against  aggression  or  injury 
from  those  who  are  about  you,  and  to  encourage  every  Indian  who  is  dis- 
posed to  be  peaceful  and  industrious.” 


CHAPTER  XL VIII. 


TRIAL  AND  ACQUITTAL  OF  PLENTY  HORSES  FOR  THE  KILLING  OF  LIEU- 
TENANT CASEY— VIEWS  OF  CAPTAIN  R.  H.  PRATT  ON  THE  EDUCA- 
TION OF  THE  INDIAN. 

PLENTY  HORSES,  the  slayer  of  Lieutenant  Casey,  was  arrested  and 
brought  to  trial  at  Sioux  Falls,  S.  D.  His  case  excited  great  interest 
throughout  the  country,  and  the  court  room  was  crowded  daily.  On  the 
28th  of  May,  1891,  Judge  Shiras  ended  the  proceedings  by  instructing  the 
jury  to  bring  in  a verdict  of  “not  guilty.”  The  announcement  was  a great 
surprise.  Judge  Shiras  said : 

“There  is  no  need  of  going  further  with  this  case.  What  I shall  say  is 
the  opinion  of  the  court,  but  not  of  my  colleague.  It  is  said  upon  my 
own  responsibility. 

“Under  repeated  decisions  of  the  Supreme  Court  of  the  United  States, 
it  is  made  the  duty  of  the  trial  court  to  instruct  the  jury  as  to  the  verdict 
that  should  be  rendered  when  the  facts  and  law  of  the  case  were  such  that 
in  the  view  of  the  court  only  a verdict  of  not  guilty  could  be  sustained. 
From  the  entire  evidence  it  clearly  appears  that  on  the  day  when  Lieuten- 
ant Casey  met  his  death  there  existed  in  and  about  Pine  Ridge  Agency  a 
condition  of  actual  warfare  between  the  Army  of  the  United  States  there 
assembled,  under  the  command  of  Major  General  Miles,  and  the  Indian 
troops  occupying  the  camp  on  No  Water  and  in  its  vicinity.  It  is  entirely 
clear  that  on  the  part  of  the  United  States  this  condition  of  actual  existing 
warfare  was  recognized,  and  the  troops  of  the  United  States  and  the  Indi- 
ans had  fought  several  engagements  with  more  or  less  severity,  and  that 
both  forces  were  then  actually  arrayed  in  hostility  against  each  other. 

“It  has  not  been  questioned  that  Lieutenant  Casey  was  an  officer  of 
the  United  States  Army,  and  was  acting  in  that  capacity  in  charge  of  a 
portion  of  the  scouts  belonging  to  the  United  States  forces.  It  was 
clearly  shown  that  Lieutenant  Casey  left  his  camp  on  January  7,  1891, 
with  a portion  of  the  scouts  belonging  to  his  command,  for  the  purpose  of 
reconnoitering  the  camp  of  the  hostile  Indians  at  No  Water;  that  while 
engaged  in  the  expedition  he  met  Plenty  Horses,  the  defendant,  and  was 
shot  and  killed  by  him.  While  the  manner  in  which  Plenty  Horses  killed 
Lieutenant  Casey  was  such  as  would  meet  the  severest  condemnation, 
nevertheless  we  cannot  deny  the  fact  that  Lieutenant  Casey  was  engaged 
in  an  act  of  legitimate  warfare  against  the  Indians,  and  was  in  such  condi- 

458 


ACQUITTAL  OF  PLENTY  HORSES.  459 

tion  that  he  might  be  legitimately  killed  as  an  act  of  war  Dy  a member  of 
the  hostile  camp  against  which  he  was  then  operating. 

“It  is  clearly  apparent  that  if  on  the  same  day  a portion  of  the  hostile 
Indians  had  intended  to  reconnoiter  the  fortifications  and  position  of  the 
United  States  troops,  and  while  they  were  engaged  in  such  expedition  one 
or  more  of  them  had  been  shot  and  killed  by  a soldier  belonging  to  the 
United  States  forces,  that  such  an  act  would  not  be  deemed  to  be  an  act 
of  murder  on  the  part  of  the  white  soldier,  and  justice  requires  the  applica- 
tion of  the  same  rule  to  the  Indian  as  we  would  apply  to  the  white  soldier 
under  reversed  circumstances.  It  is  apparent  that  the  actions  and  the  con- 
duct of  the  troops  of  the  United  States  at  and  about  Pine  Ridge  Agency, 
at  the  time  that  Lieutenant  Casey  was  killed,  cannot  be  justified  in  all 
respects  excepting  upon  the  admission  of  the  fact  that  they  were  engaged  in 
actual  hostilities  and  warfare,  and  were  therefore  justified  in  resorting  to  all 
the  legitimate  acts  of  war.  The  main  facts  involved  in  the  case  are  not  in 
dispute,  and,  in  the  judgment  of  the  court,  any  other  conclusion  cannot  be 
maintained  under  the  evidence  than  that  there  was  a condition  of  actual 
warfare  existing  between  the  Indians  and  the  United  States  Army. 

“Casey  met  his  death  when  in  the  line  of  his  duty  and  in  the  perform- 
ance of  an  act  of  legitimate  warfare,  and  under  such  circumstances  as 
would  excuse  the  defendant  from  killing  him,  he  being  a member  of  the 
opposing  forces.  Under  these  circumstances  the  judgment  of  the  court  is 
that  this  jury  would  be  compelled  to  hold  as  first,  that  there  was  a condi- 
tion of  actual  warfare  existing  at  that  time,  and  that  Lieutenant  Casey  was 
actively  engaged  in  operations  as  a member  of  the  armed  forces  of  the 
United  States  carrying  on  hostilities  against  the  Indians.  The  Indians 
were  opposed  thereto.  Casey  went  out  in  the  performance  of  his  duty  as 
a member  of  the  United  States  Army,  to  do  and  perform  an  act  in  further- 
ance of  the  work  in  which  he  was  engaged,  and  met  a member  of  the 
opposing  forces,  and  the  result  was  that  Lieutenant  Casey  met  his  death. 
Suppose  that  the  result  had  been  different.  Supposing  that  in  reconnoi- 
tering  that  camp  the  scouts  had  been  fired  upon  by  the  Indians,  and  they 
fired  back,  and  Lieutenant  Casey  had  killed  an  Indian.  Under  the  circum- 
stances I do  not  think  he  would  have  ever  been  brought  before  a court 
and  jury  to  be  tried  for  murder.  Now  if  that  would  be  a protection  to 
him  we  must  afford  the  same  protection  we  would  require  in  this  case. 
Under  these  circumstances  it  is  the  judgment  of  the  court  that  a verdict 
of  guilty  could  not  be  sustained,  and  therefore  the  jury  are  instructed  to 
return  a verdict  of  not  guilty.” 

When  the  judge  had  concluded  his  remarks,  Juror  Palmer  of  Ver- 
million arose  and  objected  to  declaring  the  prisoner  not  guilty.  He  said 
he  was  convinced  that  Plenty  Horses  was  guilty  as  charged,  and  wanted  to 


460 


PLENTY  HORSES  CONGRATULATED. 


convict  him.  The  judge  insisted,  however.  The  jury  conferred  for  a 
moment,  and  then  announced  the  verdict  of  “not  guilty.” 

The  assemblage  cheered,  and  it  was  several  minutes  before  Judge 
Edgerton  and  Marshal  Fry  could  establish  order.  Plenty  Horses  was  the 
coolest  person  in  the  room.  His  face  did  not  for  a moment  light  up  with 
joy.  There  was  no  sign  of  delight,  as  before  there  had  been  none  of  anx- 
iety or  fear.  When  Attorney  Powers  clasped  his  hand  in  congratulation 
the  defendant  neither  smiled  nor  said  a word. 

Attorney  Nock  then  moved  that  the  defendant  be  discharged  from 
custody.  The  motion  was  granted,  and  Plenty  Horses,  who  has  cost  the 


CONGRATULATING  PLENTY  HORSES  ON  HIS  ACQUITTAL  OF  THE  MURDER  OF  LIEUT.  CASEY. 

Government  thousands  of  dollars,  and  whose  name  has  been  heard  in  every 
town  from  San  Francisco  to  New  York,  was  a free  man. 

Among  those  who  congratulated  Plenty  Horses  was  American  Horse, 
one  of  the  bravest  Indians  and  truest  friends  of  the  white  men  that  ever 
lived.  Grasping  the  hand  of  his  fellow-Sioux  he  said : 

“I  am  glad  you  are  free.  You  killed  Casey;  that  was  bad.  He  was  a 
brave  man  and  a good  one.  He  did  much  for  the  Indian,  but  the  whites 
cruelly  starved  us  into  such  a condition  that  the  young  men  were  crazy, 
and  you  did  not  know  what  you  did.” 

It  was  the  summary  action  of  Judge  Shiras  which  saved  Plenty 
Horses.  A canvass  of  the  jurors  showed  that  eleven  stood  for  conviction 
and  one  only  favored  manslaughter.  This  acquittal  may  serve  as  the  last 
incident  of  the  great  Indian  uprising  in  the  Northwest  in  the  winter  of 


VIEWS  OF  CAPTAIN  R.  H.  PRATT. 


461 


1890-91.  The  renewal  of  the  disturbances,  which  many  believed  would 
take  place  in  the  following  spring,  did  not  occur,  and  it  is  impossible  that 
such  a gigantic  conspiracy  can  ever  again  be  formed  or  carried  so  near 
success. 

The  Indian  problem,  however,  still  confronts  us.  As  stated  elsewhere, 
there  are  probably  more  red  men  in  this  country  to-day  than  ever  before. 
One  of  the  strange  delusions  is  that  the  American  race  is  steadily  dwin- 
dling, and,  before  many  generations  come  and  go,  will  be  extinct.  Single 
tribes  have  perished,  confederations  have  been  broken  up,  and  the  aborig- 
ines that  have  figured  as  the  most  powerful  and  warlike  opponents  of  civili- 
zation have  sunk  into  insignificance.  But  while  these  have  decreased,  just 
as  civilized  nations  have  their  birth,  manhood,  and  decay,  others  have 
increased,  until  the  aggregate  of  American  Indians  is  near  a quarter  of  a 
million. 

Everything,  therefore,  relating  to  the  welfare  of  the  red  man,  and 
tending  to  his  advancement,  should  interest  all  American  citizens.  Captain 
R.  H.  Pratt,  general  manager  of  the  Indian  Government  Training  School 
at  Carlisle,  Pa.,  published  some  time  since  in  the  Red  Man  the  following 
article : 

“Ouanah,  one  of  the  principal  men  of  the  Comanches,  is  the  son  of  a 
white  mother  and  a Comanche  father.  His  mother  belonged  to  one  of  the 
first  families  of  Texas,  and  lived  in  the  central  part  of  the  State.  The 
Comanches,  in  one  of  their  raids,  captured  her  when  she  was  about  fifteen 
years  old.  She  became  the  wife  of  a young  Comanche  of  some  impor- 
tance, had  a number  of  children,  forgot  her  mother  tongue,  and  was  lost  to 
her  people  for  many  years.  Finally  she  was  discovered  and  persuaded  to 
return  to  her  childhood’s  home.  She  spoke  only  Comanche.  Her  habits 
and  dress  were  entirely  those  of  the  Comanche  Indians.  Her  relatives 
were  very  kind,  dressed  her  in  the  garb  of  civilization,  and  treated  her  with 
every  mark  of  affection.  She  was  not  long  with  them  before  she  showed 
discontent,  and  finally  disappeared,  and  alone  traversed  the  hundreds  of 
miles  between  her  relatives’  Texan  home  and  the  Comanche  reservation. 

“Among  the  first  students  brought  to  Carlisle  in  October,  1879,  was  a 
light-complexioned  boy,  about  sixteen  years  old,  to  whom  we  gave  the 
name  of  Stephen.  He  came  in  blanket,  leggings,  and  moccasins.  His  hair 
was  long  and  matted.  He  was  as  dirty  and  as  much  covered  with  vermin 
as  any  in  the  party.  He  spoke  no  word  of  English,  but  could  speak  the 
Sioux  language  with  as  much  fluency  as  the  others.  His  teacher  found,  as 
he  developed,  that,  while  he  had  a good  mind,  he  learned  English  with  less 
readiness  and  made  slower  progress  than  many  of  the  Indian  boys  who 
came  with  the  same  party  and  under  like  circumstances.  When  he  was 
presented  at  Rosebud  Agency  as  a pupil  for  Carlisle,  inquiry  developed 


fl  62 


INSTRUCTIVE  INCIDENTS. 


that  his  father  and  mother  were  white  people,  and  while  crossing  the  plains 
to  California  their  party  had  been  attacked  by  Indians.  His  father  was 
killed  and  his  mother  captured.  Stephen  was  born  just  after  this  event. 
His  mother  married  an  Indian,  by  whom  she  had  other  children.  When 
these  facts  became  known,  word  was  sent  to  the  camp,  and  she  was  asked 
to  come  to  the  agency  to  see  the  Carlisle  school  agent.  She  sent  back 
word  that  she  was  an  Indian  now,  and  did  not  want  to  come  in  to  the 
agency,  but  that  she  wanted  her  white  boy  to  become  educated  with  his 
own  race.  We  know  scores  of  such  cases. 

“Carlos  Montezuma  is  a full-blooded  Apache  Indian.  When  he  was 
thirteen  years  old  he  was  captured  by  the  Pimas  and  brought  to  their 
camps,  where  he  was  offered  for  sale,  a horse  being  the  price  asked.  A 
traveling  photographer,  who  happened  to  be  in  the  Pima  camp  taking  pho- 
tographs, became  interested  in  the  boy  and  offered  $30,  the  price  of  a 
horse,  which  the  Indians  accepted.  He  brought  the  boy  East,  and  had 
him  with  him  in  his  gallery  in  Brooklyn,  Boston,  and  Chicago;  he  sent  him 
to  the  public  schools,  and  finally,  through  the  interest  of  a lady  of  means, 
he  entered  the  Illinois  Agricultural  College.  He  developed  special  apti- 
tude for  chemistry,  and,  when  he  graduated,  a place  was  found  for  him  in  a 
drug  store  near  the  Chicago  Medical  College,  where,  as  a clerk,  he  sup- 
ported himself  and  earned  the  means  for  carrying  himself  through  a course 
in  that  college.  He  graduated  in  1888,  and,  under  the  advice  of  friends, 
put  out  his  sign  as  a physician  in  Chicago.  When  General  Morgan 
became  Commissioner  of  Indian  Affairs  he  heard  of  Dr.  Montezuma,  and 
offered  him  an  appointment  as  physician  for  the  Indian  School  at  Fort 
Stevenson,  Dak.  The  doctor  accepted,  and,  after  about  a year’s  service 
there,  was  promoted  to  the  position  of  agency  physician  at  one  of  the 
agencies  in  Nevada,  where  he  now  is.  He  knows  nothing  of  his  native 
Apache  language,  nor  is  there  a trace  of  Apache  superstition  or  habit  to 
be  found  in  him.  He  is  civilized  in  habit  and  thought. 

“During  the  campaign  of  1874  and  1875,  against  the  Cheyennes, 
Kiowas,  and  Comanches  in  the  Indian  Territory,  two  of  our  companies  ran 
into  a large  Cheyenne  camp  on  the  border  of  the  Staked  Plains  near  the 
head  waters  of  the  Washita  River.  The  Indians  vastly  outnumbered 
the  troops,  and  the  troops,  by  rapid  retreat,  barely  escaped  being  anni- 
hilated. Two  soldiers  were  killed  and  left  on  the  field.  When  the  com- 
panies reached  our  main  camps,  some  thirty-five  miles  distant  from  the 
Indian  camp,  our  whole  force  was  at  once  ordered  out  and  moved  on  the 
Cheyennes.  The  Cheyennes  had,  doubtless,  followed  the  troops  and  knew 
of  our  large  command,  so  that  when  we  reached  their  camps  they  had  fled 
to  the  Staked  Plains.  We  found  the  bodies  of  the  two  soldiers,  and,  as  I 
had  command  of  about  eighty  Indian  scouts  and  held  the  advance  of  our 


THE  GOOD  RESULTS  OF  ENVIRONMENT. 


463 


troops,  I was  the  first  to  enter  the  vacated  camps.  The  two  soldiers  had 
been  scalped,  and  near  the  center  of  the  camp,  on  high  ground,  I found  a 
pole  about  ten  feet  high,  on  the  top  of  which  was  the  fresh  scalp  of  one  of 
the  soldiers,  while  the  sod  around  the  pole  for  a distance  of  twenty  feet  or 
more  was  all  worn  out  by  the  dancing  of  the  Indians.  I found  out  after- 
ward from  the  Indians  that  their  women  and  children  had  danced  all  night 
around  that  scalp.  Among  them  was  a lad  of  ten  or  eleven  years. 

“Some  time  after  that  war,  when  these  Indians  had  come  in  about 
their  agency,  this  lad  was  induced  to  attend  the  agency  school.  On  the 
opening  of  Carlisle,  in  1879,  was  one  °f  the  ^rst  pupils.  He  was  bright 
and  capable,  advanced  rapidly  to  the  higher  departments,  and  in  time 
became  sergeant  major  of  the  cadet  organization.  After  being  eight  years 
with  us  he  married  one  of  our  girls,  a member  of  the  Pawnee  tribe.  Both 
he  and  his  wife  having  established  themselves  in  the  confidence  of  the 
white  people,  through  our  outing  system,  he  found  employment  and  went 
out  from  us  to  live  in  a community  near  Philadelphia.  He  has  now  been 
in  the  employ  of  a responsible  business  man  for  three  years.  He  has  ardu- 
ous duties  to  perform  which  require  him  to  get  up  at  four  o’clock  in  the 
morning.  He  receives  a salary  which  enables  him  to  support  himself  and 
his  family.  During  these  years  neither  he  nor  his  family  has  cost  the  Gov- 
ernment of  the  United  States  one  cent.  Both  he  and  his  wife  are 
respected  members  of  the  church  and  community  where  they  live.  He 
pays  his  taxes,  and  votes.  He  desires  to  remain  among  civilized  people 
and  follow  the  pursuits  of  civilized  life.  He  can  talk  of  his  former  savage 
habits  and  the  habits  of  his  people,  but  he  despises  them  and  deplores 
the  pauper  condition  into  which  his  people  have  been  forced  by  the  system 
of  control  and  management  pursued  by  the  United  States.  I know  scores 
of  like  cases — Cheyennes,  Arapahoes,  Comanches,  Kiowas,  Sioux,  and 
others  of  the  most  nomadic  tribes. 

“In  every  case  within  our  knowledge  the  formation  or  change  of  habit 
has  been  brought  about  by  environment.  We  say,  then,  environ  the 
Indians  with  our  language  and  civilized  habits  and  they  will  become  civil- 
ized. Leave  them  in  the  environment  of  the  tribes  and  of  their  savagery, 
and  they  will  remain  tribal  savages.  Of  course  they  will.  What  is  to 
change  them?  There  is  no  ‘heart  language.’  There  is  no  resistless  clog 
placed  upon  us  by  birth.  We  are  not  born  with  language,  nor  are  we  born 
with  ideas  of  either  civilization  or  savagery.  Language,  savagery,  and  civ- 
ilization are  forced  upon  us  entirely  by  our  environment.  I will  not  say 
during  the  growing  period  only,  for  in  the  case  of  Stephen’s  mother, 
maturity  had  been  reached,  and  in  the  case  of  Ouanah’s  mother,  Dr.  Mon- 
tezuma, and  the  young  Cheyenne,  much  more  than  half  the  period  before 
maturity  had  been  passed  before  they  each  entered  upon  new  conditions. 


464 


THE  ILL  RESULTS  OF  ISOLATION. 


If,  then,  we  relentlessly  consign  to  their  savagery  our  Indian  population, 
and  carefully  guard  them  in  their  reservations,  as  we  are  now  doing,  we 
shall  have  material  for  Wild  West  shows  which  the  gaping  throngs  of  the 
East  may  laugh  at  and  the  crowned  heads  of  Europe  patronize  for  cen- 
turies to  come. 

“Suppose  the  5,246,613  foreigners  who  have  immigrated  to  America  in 
the  past  ten  years,  instead  of  being  distributed  throughout  our  communi- 
ties had  been  sent  to  reservations,  each  nationality  by  itself,  we  ask  if 
any  reasonable  person  could,  for  a moment,  anticipate  that  they  would 
have  made  any  material  progress  in  becoming  Anglicized  or  Americanized. 
It  is  only  when  we  do  allow  them  to  congregate  in  bodies  together  that 
they  give  us  trouble.  Scattered,  and  in  contact  on  all  sides  with  our  own 
people,  they  become  of  us.  Massed  in  communities  by  themselves,  they 
more  or  less  oppose  the  principles  and  the  spirit  of  our  government.  The 
negroes  are  about  thirty  times  as  many  in  the  United  States  as  the  Indi- 
ans, and  yet  they  were  savages  of  a very  low  state  when  brought  to  this 
country.  Now,  because  of  environment,  they  are  English  speaking  and 
fellow  citizens.  With  these  facts  constantly  before  me,  I have  come  to 
look  upon  all  plans  which  congregate  and  isolate  the  Indians  from  the 
whites  as  against  their  best  interests. 

“The  United  States  Government  invites  trouble  and  postpones  the 
consummation  of  its  purpose  to  accomplish  the  American  civilization  and 
citizenship  of  its  Indian  wards  when  it  places  them  for  instruction  in  the 
hands  of  those  who  compel  American  citizenship  and  civilization  to  bow 
to  creed.  The  abundant  fruits  of  such  proceedings  are  to  be  found  every- 
where in  tribes  who  have  somewhat  advanced  in  civilization,  and  who, 
while  drawing  all  the  means  for  their  support  from  the  government,  still 
look  upon  it  as  an  enemy.  While  they  do  not  longer  band  themselves 
together  to  defend  by  force  their  savagery  and  tribal  autonomy,  they  do 
continually  band  together  to  make  large  raids  upon  the  government 
treasury.  In  many  cases  on  this  line  they  meet  with  great  success,  but 
their  successes  only  weaken  and  destroy  them,  for  idleness,  with  all  its 
attendant  dissipations,  necessarily  follows. 

“It  cannot  be  disputed  that  the  aim  of  every  government  effort  to 
educate  and  train  the  Indian  should  be  not  only  in  the  direction  of  reliev- 
ing the  government  of  the  care  of  the  Indian  as  a pauper,  but  to  so  fit  and 
equip  him  that  he  may  become  a producer  and  help  support  the  govern- 
ment. I feel  assured,  from  long  observation  and  large  responsibility  in 
connection  with  the  Indians,  that  any  expenditure  of  either  labor  or 
money  on  tribal  lines  is  not  only  working  against  this  result,  but  is  build- 
ing up  a condition  which  will  prolong  the  tribe  and  reservation,  and  call  for 
larger  outlay.  I have  never  known  an  Indian  capable  of  meeting  and 


THE  COMPETITION  OF  LABOR  NECESSARY. 


465 


competing  with  the  whites  in  civilized  business  and  industries,  who  did  not 
acquire  such  ability  in  actual  association  and  competition  with  the  whites. 

“The  education  of  Indians  in  purely  Indian  schools  will  not  bring  the 
Indians  into  harmony  with  the  other  people  of  the  United  States,  but  is 
rather  calculated  to  make  them  stronger  to  hold  out  and  contend  as  a sep- 
arate class.  Especially  is  this  the  result  in  schools  where  the  children  of 
one  tribe  are  brought  together.  Tribal  pride  and  tribal  interest  are  simply 
rendered  more  powerful  by  such  a system.  I am  convinced,  therefore, 
that  it  is  bad  policy,  and  wrong  to  those  who  will  come  after  us  and  have 
to  bear  the  burdens  of  government,  to  expend  Government  money  in  the 
establishment  of  tribal  schools. 

“The  Indian  has  a capacity  in  every  way  to  meet  the  issues  of  civilized 
life  at  once.  All  Indian  youth  may  readily  be  prepared  to  enter  the  com- 
mon schools  of  the  country  by  two  or  three  years’  course  in  Government 
schools  established  for  the  special  purpose  of  bringing  them  to  this  condi- 
tion of  fitness;  and  having  once  entered  public  schools  the  way  is  open  for 
them  to  remain  and  go  up  head.  Such  schools,  and  all  our  higher  schools, 
are  now  and  always  have  been  open  to  the  Indian.  Harvard  and  Dart- 
mouth Colleges  were  started  in  the  interests  of  Indian  education. 

“The  negro,  forbidden  an  education  by  law,  worked  his  way  into  citi- 
zenship and  manly  self-support.  The  Indian,  with  Harvard  and  every 
school  in  the  country  open  to  him,  is  still  an  impotent.  We  must  not 
hope  that  the  training  in  industries  of  industrial  schools  will  achieve  the 
end  sought,  however  good  and  thorough.  The  competitions  of  labor,  and 
these,  too,  with  the  very  men  he  is  to  contend  industrially  with,  are  abso- 
lutely essential.  We  do  the  Indian  no  kindness  to  hold  him  away  from 
this  competition,  for  it  is  that  very  experience  that  is  to  develop  him.” 


r 


CHAPTER  XLIX. 


THE  VIEWS  OF  FREDERIC  REMINGTON,  THE  ARTIST,  ON  THE  INDIAN 
QUESTION— A SPECIMEN  OF  NATIONAL  LEGISLATION  FOR  THE 
INDIANS— THE  ACQUISITION  OF  INDIAN  LANDS. 


HE  well-known  artist  Frederic  Remington,  represented  Harper s 


Weekly  during  the  recent  Indian  hostilities,  his  sketches  of  the  inci- 
dents being  remarkably  vivid  and  accurate.  He  gave  his  views  of  the 
Indian  question  in  the  journal  named  in  the  following  vigorous  terms: 

“The  Indians  have  at  least  one  distinct  impression  regarding  the  Gov- 
ernment. They  know  that  it  never  keeps  its  word.  Any  old  chief  will  tell 
you  that  white  men  are  all  liars,  and  if  you  press  him  regarding  it  he  v ill 
prove  it,  and  the  only  exception  he  will  make  is  the  white  soldier.  This 
class  of  men  has  formed  a decided  respect  for  the  Indians,  on  the  principle 
of  that  strange  liking  you  have  for  a man  after  you  have  fought  with  him. 
Every  young  West  Pointer  learns  very  early  in  his  career  never  to  speak 
anything  but  the  exact  truth  to  an  Indian.  This  code  of  morals  was 
acquired  from  a savage  race. 

“After  we  regard  Indians  as  children  in  their  relation  to  us,  we  must 
understand  another  thing,  and  that  is  that  they  are  only  second  to  the 
Norsemen  of  old  as  savage  warriors.  Above  wealth,  wives,  children,  and 
civil  renown,  there  is  one  thing  an  Indian  holds  next  to  his  God,  and 
around  his  mind  is  emblazoned  the  halo  of  him  who  can  fight  and  die.  A 
soldier — that  is  the  man  whose  image  fills  an  Indian’s  eye.  He  represents 
courage,  justice,  and  truth;  and  while  the  civil  agents  sent  from  Washing- 
ton to  dole  out  bad  and  insufficient  rations  to  a conquered  race  may 
receive  the  homage,  they  can  never  command  the  respect  of  the  wild 
tribes. 

“All  the  reports  of  Indian  agents  to  their  department  about  the  indus- 
trial, and  especially  the  agricultural,  progress  of  their  wards  are  gilded,  to 
say  the  least;  and  in  a great  many  instances  you  can  rub  off  the  gilt  and 
disclose  simple  commonplace  lies  with  no  foundation  whatever  in  fact. 
But  the  Indian  agents  are  simply  men  who  are  occupying  a political 
appointment  for  a brief  term,  and  they  do  many  things  which  are  not  high 
minded.  It  does  not  seem  necessary  for  me  to  go  on  to  prove  that  the 
Indian  Department  is  not  a joy  forever.  Very  few  people  think  it  is,  and 
most  of  those  who  do  have  a finger  in  the  pie.  They  have  never  been 
distinguished  for  anything  except  Indian  wars,  and  for  almost  every 

466 


THE  SOLDIERS  THE  TRUE  FRIENDS  OF  THE  INDIANS.  467 

affair  of  the  kind  they  are  entirely  responsible.  The  Northwest  is  dotted 
over  with  soldiers  sleeping  out  in  the  snows  of  this  winter  because  of  the 
mismanagement  of  the  Indian  Bureau.  With  an  instance  of  this  incompe- 
tency before  their  eyes  nearly  half  of  the  time,  people  in  the  East  ought 
to  understand,  and  every  man  who  in  the  West  comes  near  enough  to  get 
the  stench  cannot  but  know  its  rottenness.  It’s  unchristian,  it’s  inhuman, 
it’s  vile.  It  is  the  constantly  recurring  old  story — a gross  case  of  misman- 
agement. And  then  the  army  is  called  in  to  be  responsible — to  protect 
the  lives  of  the  settlers,  and  in  these  days  to  shoot  down  a people  who 
have  the  sympathy  of  every  soldier  in  the  ranks. 

“The  only  excuse  I have  for  not  being  absurd  in  this  matter,  when  I 
argue  that  the  wild  Indian  tribes  can  be  allowed  to  live,  is  that  their  lands 
are  so  worthless  that  we  do  not  want  them,  and  that,  secondly,  they  can 
be  made  useful  to  us — two  reasons  selfish  enough  for  us  to  entertain. 

“The  hatred  of  the  Six  Nations  for  the  Canadas  made  the  English 
occupation  of  this  continent  possible,  which  would  have  been  questionable 
in  its  contest  with  the  French  regime  backed  by  its  Church  and  State.  To 
come  to  our  own  generations,  we  recognize  that  Indians  have  co-operated 
with  our  troops  in  every  contest  for  the  acquisition  of  the  great  West. 
Delawares  guided  our  columns  to  Mexico  in  1847.  Friendly  Cheyennes, 
led  Mackenzie  into  his  fight  in  the  Big  Horn  Mountains  against  their  own 
tribe.  General  Crook  was  guided  to  every  hidden  stronghold  of  the 
Apaches  by  Apaches  who  were  not  disaffected.  I do  not,  of  course,  mean 
to  say  that  these  acts  were  inspired  by  true  loyalty  to  the  old  flag,  but  I 
do  think  it  demonstrates  that  experienced  United  States  army  officers  can 
handle  these  people  under  any  conditions. 

“One  thing  is  certain — the  wild  tribes  are  steadily  retrograding  under 
Interior  Department  management.  I do  not  for  a moment  want  to  be 
understood  as  censuring  the  present  administration  in  particular.  It  was  as 
true  of  the  last  administration  as  it  is  of  this  one,  and  it  will  be  as  true  of 
the  next  as  it  was  of  the  last.  It  is  the  system  which  is  responsible.  We 
are  year  after  year  oppressing  a conquered  people,  until  it  is  now  assuming 
the  magnitude  of  a crime.  Any  administration  which  will  change  this 
order  of  things  will  have  one  claim  on  immortality. 

“Now  we  will  suppose  that  the  American  people  desire  to  do  justice 
to  the  wild  Indians;  we  will  suppose  that  they  want  to  avert  the  intermin- 
able Indian  outbreaks ; and  we  will  assume  that  they  have  the  best  inter- 
ests of  the  American  army  at  heart ; and  then  we  will  turn  them  all  over 
to  the  War  Department.  Since  the  Indian  ring  found  the  Apaches 
unprofitable,  and  they  passed  to  the  War  Department,  you  do  not  hear  of 
outbreaks  among  them.  It  was  only  through  the  statements  of  a general 
in  the  United  States  Army  that  the  United  States  Senate  learned  that  the 


468 


WHAT  THE  ARMY  MEN  COULD  DO. 


Sioux  were  being  starved.  The  army  people  would  like  to  take  the  Indi- 
ans, as  they  do  not  doubt  their  own  ability  to  handle  them ; and  the  thing 
furthest  from  their  minds  could  be  to  precipitate  hostilities  with  the  red 
men,  since  the  War  Department  does  not  regard  Indian  campaigning  as 
war.  The  War  Department  could  then  organize  them  into  a semi-indus- 
trial military  force,  much  after  the  fashion  of  the  Cossacks,  whose  com- 
pany chief  is  responsible  for  their  operations  in  peace  and  their  deeds  in 
war.  He  is  both  the  head  of  the  village  and  the  war  chief.  Four  or  five 
irregular  cavalry  regiments  could  be  organized  at  the  discretion  of  the  War 
Office  officials,  and  then  the  separate  troop  formations  could  be  one  hun- 
dred men  each.  We  might  say,  for  instance,  that  is  A Troop  of  the  First 
Irregular  Cavalry — they  are  Crows;  and  that  is  K Troop  of  the  same  regi- 
ment— they  are  Cheyennes.  Each  company  should  have  its  own  perma- 
nent village,  situated  near  its  agricultural  or  stock  raising  operations,  and 
let  the  captain  of  the  company  be  the  head  of  the  village.  He  has  judi- 
cial and  administrative  powers,  and  is  responsible  to  his  superior  in  a mili- 
tary way.  These  officers  should  come  from  the  regular  army,  and  they 
may  apply  for  the  appointments  after  their  experience  and  natural  capac- 
ity are  considered.  Under  this  arrangement  pride  of  company  is  incul- 
cated, and  emulation  is  natural  between  the  troops  and  their  commanders. 
Each  officer  would  then  be  given  an  opportunity  to  apply  his  theories,  and 
by  experience  much  might  be  developed  There  can  be  issued  the  regular 
clothing  and  pay  of  a soldier,  and  a ration  for  themselves  and  families  such 
as  is  sufficient.  This  ration  in  time  might  be  decreased  if  they  attained  to 
agricultural  success.  Each  man  should  be  required  to  have  at  least  two 
good  serviceable  ponies,  and  each  company  should  have  a complete  pack 
train.  This  would  cost  a little  more  than  under  the  Interior  Department, 
but,  when  we  figure  on  the  attendant  Indian  wars,  it  would  be  as  nothing. 
In  time  the  regiments  of  the  regular  army  could  be  withdrawn  from  the 
small  posts,  and  concentrated  by  brigades,  with  great  good  to  themselves 
from  every  point  of  view. 

“All  this  has  been  suggested  in  times  past,  and  found  fault  with  by  a 
certain  class  of  politicians  ‘who  are  not  in  with  the  deal/  and  by  a good 
many  estimable  people  belonging  to  Indian  societies,  who  are  in  a habit  of 
congregating  with  the  purpose  of  harrowing  up  each  other’s  feelings  over 
the  wrongs  of  the  red  men.  I am  happy  to  say  that  the  above  suggestion 
is  no  longer  an  experiment,  but  has  been  tried  thoroughly,  with  results 
which  are  so  astonishingly  successful  that  they  should  be  seen  to  be  appre- 
ciated. There  is  a corps  of  Apache  scouts  at  San  Carlos,  and  they  are 
doing  very  well,  but  need  experienced  men  to  deal  with  them.  I would 
not  recommend  that  they  be  brought  under  this  regime  at  present.  They 
live  in  a very  difficult  country,  and  are  yet  wild,  having  had  very  little  con- 


THE  INDIAN  AS  A SOLDIER. 


469 


tact  with  white  people,  and  having  been  lately  at  war  with  the  United 
States  troops.  Their  present  management  is  the  best  one  for  a consid- 
erable period  in  the  future. 

“There  is  a small  but  efficient  corps  of  Comanche  and  Kiowa  scouts  at 
Fort  Sill,  whose  main  business  is  to  keep  individual  Texans  in  a realizing 
state  of  mind  when  they  covet  their  neighbor’s  horse  or  his  ox.  They  are 
good  material  for  soldiers,  and  so  are  their  neighbors  the  southern  Chey- 
ennes and  the  Arapahoes,  although  these  latter  are  undergoing  the  opera- 
tion of  being  starved  into  farming,  and  regard  the  whole  process  with  ill- 
concealed  disgust.  There  is  a very  fine  corps  of  Cheyennes  at  Fort  Reno, 
and  they  were  the  first  perfectly  uniformed  and  organized  troop  of  Indians 
I had  ever  seen;  and  I talked  with  some  Carlisle  schoolboys  who  had 
lately  been  discharged  from  the  corps  in  order  to  make  room  for  others  of 
the  tribe,  and  they  were  full  of  regrets,  as  they  had  liked  soldiering,  and 
now  had  nothing  to  do  but  draw  rations  at  the  agency.  They  were  very 
bright  young  fellows,  fairly  educated,  and  each  had  a trade,  I believe. 
There  was  no  possible  way  for  them  to  earn  a living.  They  were  not 
allowed  off  the  reservation,  and  so  they  must  sit  calmly  down  and  do 
nothing.  Idleness  is  fully  as  bad  for  an  Indian  as  a white  man,  and  is 
always  the  godfather  of  folly  and  crime.  At  Reno  I saw  young  scouts 
who  would  make  a West  Point  drill  master’s  mouth  water.  They  were 
‘set  up’  until  they  had  completely  lost  the  habitual  slouch  of  an  Indian, 
and  strode  about  as  straight  and  proud  as  a drill  sergeant. 

“Indeed,  it  was  this  little  corps  which  first  impressed  me  with  the  pos- 
sibilities of  the  whole  scheme.  Their  pride  in  being  soldiers  was  the  no- 
ticeable feature.  A young  scout  passed  through  the  garrisur.  and  no  man 
about  the  post  held  his  head  up  higher  or  put  his  foot  down  firmer  than 
that  young  chap,  who  would,  in  his  blanket,  have  sneaked  along  under  the 
gutter  of  the  building  like  a coyote  under  a cut  bank.  They  were  well 
dressed,  well  fed,  full  of  pride  in  their  business,  and  full  of  respect  for  their 
superiors.  The  same  man,  if  he  were  plowing  a field,  would  ill  conceal  his 
mortification  at  doing  a thing  which  he  had  been  taught  for  generations 
was  low-spirited,  degrading,  and  which  he  had  always  found  profitless. 

“The  Indian  tribes  are  yet  warriors;  they  have  not  lost  their  instincts 
or  respect  for  the  trade  of  war;  but  an  Indian  will  do  the  most  arduous 
and  laborious  work  if  he  has  a cavalry  uniform  on,  when  he  would  not  lift 
his  little  finger  to  the  task  if  dressed  in  his  bright  blanket  and  bead  work, 
both  of  which  are  emblematic  of  a thousand  years  of  glorious  deeds  of 
arms.  He  sees  the  white  soldiers  work,  and  makes  as  great  a distinction 
between  the  laboring  soldier  and  his  agricultural  brother  as  you  would 
between  a farm  hand  and  a gentleman  cultivating  orchids  in  his  con- 
servatory. 


470 


ORGANIZATION  AND  EQUIPMENT. 


“Major-General  Miles  having  had  a vast  experience  with  Indians,  I 
agree  with  him  when  he  says  we  should  not  be  over-hasty  in  arming  a 
people  who  may  at  any  time  be  our  opponents.  We  must  not  forget, 
though,  that  it  is  impossible  to  keep  the  Sioux  disarmed  and  still  allow 
them  their  liberty.  We  must  also  remember  that  Indian  police  and  scouts, 
in  the  service  both  of  the  army  and  the  agents,  have  never  proved  untrust- 
worthy, or  attended  the  ghost  dances  of  the  last.  year.  If  a large  Indian 
military  establishment  were  maintained,  one  tribe  could  be  made  to  fight 
another  as  readily  as  it  has  been  done  in  times  past. 

“But  under  a just  administration  of  their  affairs  there  would  be  no 
more  chance  of  the  Indians  breaking  out  than  there  would  be  of  the  people 
of  Deadwood  or  Helena.  Industry  and  proper  care  will  do  completely 
away  with  all  the  turbulence  which  at  times  characterizes  the  present 
administration  of  affairs.  As  scouts  they  are  used  constantly  on  detached 
service.  They  are  perfect  marvels  as  couriers,  and  can  trail  stray  horses, 
scout  the  country,  arrest  deserters,  and  guide  troops  about.  When  the 
Government  starts  its  great  horse-breeding  farm,  which  it  must  do  shortly 
or  have  its  cavalry  mounted  on  brewery  horses,  they  would  be  of  great  use 
as  herders.  They  could  raise  crops  in  summer,  and,  in  short,  be  made  to 
work  systematically,  as  Lieutenant  Casey  has  demonstrated.  The  small 
scout  corps,  as  at  present  organized,  have  their  time  fully  taken  up  with 
duties  of  a purely  military  character,  but  under  the  Cossack  organization 
they  would  be  a se mi-industrial  military  class,  who  in  time  would  become 
self-supportin' 

“Tb  dews  as  to  their  proper  organization  and  equipment 

am^  .d  experienced  army  officers,  but  all  this  is  a small 

* could  be  changed  from  time  to  time  in  the  light  of  expe- 
vjeneral  Miles  would  have  them  armed  only  with  the  revolver,  and 
^utered  as  lightly  as  possible,  in  order  that  they  might  ride  with  great 
rapidity  and  endure  long.  This  would  be  proper  as  mere  scouts,  but  as 
irregular  cavalry  they  should  have  the  carbine.  It  would  be  a pity  to 
equip  and  handle  Indian  soldiers  in  any  manner  calculated  to  eradicate 
their  primitive  traits.  A little  thing,  for  instance,  is  this:  By  long  moving 
in  the  solid  ranks  a cavalry  horse  cannot  be  forced  out  of  them.  In  the 
battle  of  the  Little  Big  Horn,  General  Custer’s  horses  stampeded  over  the 
field  in  solid  troop  formations.  This  is  not  a grave  defect  in  dragoon  cav- 
alry operations,  but  would  be  fatal  to  light  cavalry.  The  Indian  and  his 
pony  must  be  the  unit,  not  the  company.  Indians  should  be  allowed  to 
scatter  out  on  the  march,  and  not  be  kept  in  the  column.  It  is  a curious 
fact  that  on  the  plains  you  can  tell  two  cowboys  from  two  Indians  at  a 
great  distance.  The  cowboys  will  ride  abreast,  and  the  Indians  will  trail 
after  each  other.  As  to  the  uniforms  of  these  bodies,  I suggest  one  which 


THE  INDIANS  AS  LIGHT  CAVALRYMEN. 


471 

is  light,  inexpensive,  and  preserves  as  much  of  the  local  color  of  the  Indian 
as  possible.  I believe  in  building  the  little  log  village.  Some  command- 
ers will  not  agree  with  this,  saying  that  it  softens  the  men ; let  them  live 
in  the  tepee,  and  retain  the  hardihood  of  the  hunter  state.  We  must 
remember  that  the  organization  I speak  of  is  semi-industrial  as  well,  and  in 
process  of  time  would  lose  much  of  its  military  character.  If  the  Crows, 
Cheyennes,  and  Sioux  become  wealthy,  industrious,  and  contented,  the 
First  Cavalry  will  not  be  at  Fort  Custer,  but  in  New  York,  Leavenworth, 
or  Chicago.  In  the  case  of  a light  scouting  corps,  I admit  you  must  nurse 
the  savage. 

“ There  is  one  thing  that  cannot  be  urged  too  strongly — a wagon 
should  form  no  part  of  a light  cavalry  outfit.  A scout  corps  which  is  tied 
up  to  some  wagons  is  about  as  useless  as  a sprint  runner  with  a cork  leg. 
Pack  trains  of  large  broncho  horses  to  each  troop  should  be  issued,  and 
there  should  be  enough  of  them  so  that  they  might  be  loaded  lightly,  and 
thus  be  able  to  pass  over  the  country  as  rapidly  as  the  exigencies  of  the  case 
might  require.  In  the  winter  oil-tanned  cowskin  moccasins  should  be  issued. 
A system  of  tactics  should  be  gotten  up  for  the  Indian  soldiers,  vast  sim- 
plicity being  the  consideration,  and  preserving  all  the  signs  and  movements 
peculiar  to  their  old  warrior  days. 

“As  to  the  efficiency  of  these  people  on  light  cavalry  duties  there  can 
be  no  question.  Lieutenant  Carter  Johnson  told  me  that  he  thought  he 
could  take  a command  of  Apaches  and  ride  from  Arizona  to  Washington 
without  losing  any  of  his  command,  and  judging  from  some  of  that  officer’s 
exploits,  I am  inclined  to  think  he  could.  As  to  their  faithfulness,  an 
officer  recently  sent  a Crow  scout  with  a message,  and  inadvertently  said, 
'Go  quick!’  The  Crow,  thinking  the  thing  was  vital,  rode  a hundred  miles 
and  killed  his  horse  (his  own  property)  to  deliver  the  message.  A Crow 
scout  also  rode  for  three  days  after  a stray  horse,  covering  an  enormous 
distance,  which  I have  forgotten.  Lieutenant  Casey’s  scouts  will  fell  trees 
and  build  houses.  In  short,  experienced  officers  can  do  anything  with 
these  men,  and  the  Indians  like  it.  The  dearest  dream  of  any  Indian  is 
that  some  day  he  may  be  a Government  scout.  And  when  he  thinks  of 
being  a pure  and  simple  farmer  it  chills  his  soul,  and  he  welcomes  the 
ghost  dance,  and  would  welcome  anything  else  which  would  take  him  from 
the  lazy  starvation  of  the  agency. 

“Let  these  people  who  claim  to  be  friends  of  the  Indian  cease  their 
chatter,  and  help  this  or  some  other  practical  scheme  of  regeneration.  Let 
some  statesmen  have  the  courage  to  curb  this  restless  thirst  for  spoil  in 
land  which  characterizes  our  frontier  population,  and  teach  them  to  value 
the  solemn  obligations  of  this  Government  as  they  would  a copper  cent  at 
least.  Let  our  army  have  the  fruits  of  its  work;  and  let  us  preserve  the 


472 


A SPECIMEN  OF  NATIONAL  LEGISLATION. 


native  American  race,  which  is  following  the  buffalo  into  painted  pictures 
and  printed  books.” 

As  a specimen  of  national  legislation  for  the  Indians,  the  New  York 
Sun  refers  under  date  of  March  13,  1891,  to  the  Indian  appropriation  bill. 

“The  bill  comprises  sixty-two  pages  of  compact  matter,  and  is  a most 
intricate  piece  of  parliamentary  mechanism.  It  is  literally  full  of  blunders, 
crudities,  and  incongruities.  Whole  sections  and  provisions  are  repeated 
and  duplicated,  treaty  stipulations  and  agreements  are  frightfully  entan- 
gled and  interwoven,  and  a great  deal  of  new  matter  is  added  to  the  form 
in  which  it  left  the  House  and  Senate. 

“This  was  done  on  the  individual  responsibility  of  the  conference 
committees,  composed  respectively  of  Bishop  W.  Perkins  of  Kansas, 
Samuel  W.  Peel  of  Arkansas,  and  O.  S.  Gifford  of  South  Dakota  on  the 
part  of  the  House,  and  H.  L.  Dawes  of  Massachusetts,  and  Wilkinson  Call 
of  Florida  on  the  part  of  the  Senate. 

“Although,  in  all  other  respects,  the  act  is  one  of  the  most  carelessly 
constructed  ever  placed  upon  the  statute  books,  yet  the  gentlemen  respon- 
sible for  it  have  exercised  the  most  scrupulous  and  marvelous  care  in  look- 
ing after  the  interests  of  the  attorneys,  agents,  and  boodlers  who  ply  indus- 
triously between  Washington  and  the  Indian  reservations. 

“For  instance,  to  the  paragraph  providing  for  the  payment  of  $43,600 
to  the  Western  Miami  Indians  in  Kansas  and  the  Indian  Territory,  for 
lands  alleged  to  have  been  unjustly  taken  from  them,  and  $18,370  extra,  on 
account  of  tribal  funds  given  against  their  protest  to  persons  not  entitled 
to  them  away  back  in  1854,  the  significant  provision  is  added  by  the  con- 
ferrees  that  this  money  shall  be  immediately  available,  and  that  before  any 
part  of  it  is  paid  there  shall  be  deducted  and  paid  from  it  the  promised 
attorney’s  fee.  Without  an  express  provision  making  such  an  appropria- 
tion immediately  available,  the  money  would  not  be  forthcoming  until 
July  1,  proximo,  when  the  new  fiscal  year  begins. 

“The  other  blocks  of  money  are  likewise  made  immediately  available 
by  the  action  of  the  conferrees;  $80,000  for  payment  to  the  Sisseton  and 
Wahpeton  bands  of  Sioux  Indians  on  Devil’s  Lake  reservation  for  land 
claimed  by  them  under  an  old  treaty;  $7095  to  be  paid  to  one  hundred 
and  twenty-nine  citizens  of  the  Creek  Nation,  who  contrived  to  subsist 
themselves  for  a year  without  government  aid ; $19,843  as  proceeds  or  bal- 
ance of  sales  of  the  Cherokee  Strip,  to  be  forwarded  to  the  Treasurer  of 
the  Cherokee  Nation  as  trust  funds  of  the  tribe;  $30,000  for  the  construc- 
tion, purchase,  and  use  of  irrigating  machinery  and  appliances  in  Arizona, 
Montana,  and  Nevada,  for  the  use  of  the  Indian  reservations;  $503,200  of 
the  whole  $2,203,000  appropriated  for  the  Sisseton  and  Wahpeton  Indians 
in  consideration  of  a treaty,  and  to  certain  scouts  and  soldiers  of  the  Med- 


UNPARDONABLE  CARELESSNESS. 


473 


awakanton  and  Wahpakoota  bands  of  Sioux  for  services  rendered  to  the 
United  States  in  the  Sioux  outbreak  of  1862;  and  $10,000  for  the  pur- 
chase of  animals,  seeds,  and  temporary  support  of  the  Shebit  tribe  of  Utah 
to  enable  them  to  become  self-supporting. 

“There  is  a tremendous  increase  in  the  appropriations  for  Indian 
schools.  The  total  appropriations  for  this  object  aggregate  $2,210,650, 
which  is  $367,880  more  than  was  given  for  the  current  fiscal  year.  This 
money  for  the  support  of  schools  is  thus  distributed : 

‘‘One  hundred  and  ten  thousand  dollars  is  allowed  the  school  at  Car- 
lisle, Pa.,  $110,000  for  the  Chillocco  school,  in  the  Indian  Territory;  $100,- 
000  for  the  Lawrence  school,  and  somewhat  smaller  amounts  for  schools 
at  other  places.  It  is  provided  that  at  least  $500,000  shall  be  used  exclu- 
sively for  the  support  and  education  of  Indian  pupils  in  industrial  and  day 
schools  in  operation  under  contracts  with  the.  Indian  Bureau. 

“Apropos  of  the  several  irrigating  schemes  in  the  bill,  the  committees 
attached  to  it  the  vicious  proviso  that  the  funds  designed  for  the  construc- 
tion of  the  ditches  and  other  works  for  irrigating  may  be  expended  at  the 
discretion  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  without  advertising  for  bids. 
Advertising  was  always  looked  upon  as  a safeguard  against  fraud. 

“The  conferrees  even  went  so  far  in  closing  up  their  reckless  work  as 
to  incorporate  in  the  act  an  entirely  new  section  to  appropriate  for  the 
payment  of  an  alleged  debt  of  the  Government  which  is  not  yet  due  and 
cannot  be  considered  due  until  a decision  of  the  case  is  rendered  by  the 
Court  of  Claims.  The  sum  is  $117,790. 

“So  careless,  also,  were  the  architects  of  this  unique  bill  that  they  left 
out  the  date  of  an  important  treaty  with  the  Cheyennes  and  Arapahoe 
tribes.  By  the  agreement  with  the  Grosventres  and  Arickarees,  who  are 
stated  to  have  vastly  more  land  than  they  need  or  will  ever  make  use  of, 
and  who  relinquished  their  title  to  certain  lands  in  the  Fort  Berthold  reser- 
vation in  Dakota,  the  sum  of  $80,000  is  appropriated  annually  for  ten  years 
to  pay  them.  This  amount,  in  all  $800,000,  is  so  disproportionate  to  the 
actual  value  of  the  land  sold,  and  so  prodigal  for  the  needs  of  the  tribe,  that 
a precautionary  provision  is  inserted  that,  whenever  in  the  opinion  of  the 
President,  the  annual  installment  shall  be  found  to  be  in  excess  of  the 
amount  required  in  carrying  out  the  agreement,  so  much  of  the  amount  as 
is  excessive  shall  be  placed  to  the  credit  of  the  Indians  in  the  United 
States  Treasury  and  expended  after  the  last  installment  of  $80,000  shall 
have  been  paid,  in  ‘continuing  the  benefits  of  the  treaty.’  A junketing 
trip  for  twelve  fortunate  Crow  chiefs,  to  visit  the  President  for  general  con- 
sultation, is  provided  for,  and  $5000  is  set  aside  to  defray  their  expenses.” 

The  acquisition  of  Indian  lands  has  gone  on  at  a prodigious  rate  for 
the  last  few  years,  but  in  the  report  of  Commissioner  Morgan,  issued  in 


474 


THE  INDIAN  RIGHT  OF  OCCUPANCY. 


1891,  he  argues  that  it  should  be  carried  much  further.  Previous  to  Mr. 
Morgan’s  appointment  at  the  head  of  the  Indian  Bureau,  Congress  had 
passed  the  Severalty  Allotment  Law,  which  is  based  on  a prospective,  grad- 
ual abandonment  of  tribal  reservations  and  the  absorption  of  the  red  men 
into  American  citizenship.  And  even  twenty  years  ago  Congress  passed  a 
law  declaring  that  “no  Indian  nation  or  tribe  within  the  territory  of  the 
United  States  shall  be  acknowledged  or  recognized  as  an  independent 
nation,  tribe,  or  power  with  whom  the  United  States  may  contract  by 
treaty.”  Up  to  that  time  the  Government  had  made  with  them,  during 
the  century  preceding,  between  three  hundred  and  four  hundred  treaties, 
which,  however,  did  not  concede  to  them  the  rights  that  belong  to  auton- 
omous nations. 

This  law  expressly  respected  existing  obligations,  but  from  the  first 
the  courts  had  held  that  the  ultimate  title  of  all  Indian  lands  was  in  the 
Government,  subject  to  the  right  of  occupancy.  It  had  been  further  held 
by  the  Supreme  Court,  in  repeated  cases,  that  the  Government  had  the 
exclusive  power  of  extinguishing  that  right  of  occupancy  by  procuring  a 
voluntary  cession  of  it.  Throughout  the  colonial  period  the  Indian  right  of 
occupancy  was  respected  by  the  Crown  and  the  courts,  and  when  lands  were 
surrendered  by  the  red  men  it  was  through  the  medium  of  a regular  con- 
tract or  treaty,  usually  with  a consideration  in  the  form  of  money  or 
goods.  When  Great  Britain  acknowledged  the  independence  of  the 
United  States  the  latter  acquired  her  rights  in  the  soil,  and  so  it  was  with 
the  purchase  of  Louisiana  from  France  and  of  Florida  from  Spain.  Our 
Government  has  never  extinguished  an  Indian  title  by  right  of  conquest 
except  one,  during  the  Sioux  outbreak  in  Minnesota  about  thirty  years 
ago;  and  in  this  instance  the  proceeding  was  repaired  by  giving  the  Indians 
another  reservation,  and  the  net  value  of  the  lands  from  which  they  had 
been  evicted.  During  these  processes  of  acquisition  injustice  was  occa- 
sionally done  to  the  Indians;  but  it  was  something  to  acknowledge  inva- 
riably that  their  rights  of  occupancy  must  be  extinguished  by  purchase, 
and  if  it  be  true  that  in  some  cases  the  Indians  were  virtually  driven  to 
sell,  yet  the  Government,  in  the  exercise  of  its  right  of  eminent  domain, 
has  frequently  forced  the  relinquishment  by  whites  also  of  land  which  it 
sought  to  acquire.  An  exception  may  appear  in  the  Southwest  and  on 
the  Pacific  coast,  since  Mexico  admitted  no  Indian  title  of  occupancy 
except  where  it  had  been  expressly  ceded,  but  our  Government  extended 
to  the  lands  acquired  under  the  treaty  of  Guadaloupe  Hidalgo  its  uniform 
policy  of  laying  out  reservations  for  Indians;  and  then  if  the  advance  of 
civilization  demanded  the  acquisition  of  a whole  or  a part  of  them,  it 
effected  this  by  negotiation. 

Of  the  more  than  one  hundred  and  sixty  reservations  established  in 


SEVERALTY  ALLOTMENTS. 


475 


the  country  some  depend  on  treaties  or  agreements,  others  on  acts  of  Con- 
gress, and  more  than  a third  on  Executive  order.  In  the  Indian  Territory 
there  are  reservations  regularly  patented  to  Indian  tribes  in  fee  simple  or 
in  a qualified  fee,  with  a reversion  to  the  United  States  on  its  abandon- 
ment by  them.  The  homes  of  the  civilized  tribes  in  the  Indian  Territory, 
and  one  or  two  others  in  the  States,  are  expressly  excepted  from  the  opera- 
tion of  the  Severalty  Allotment  Act  of  1887. 

“Everything  indicates  that  severalty  allotments  may  ultimately  be 
the  rule  among  the  quarter  of  a million  Indians  of  this  country.  The  wise 
provision  of  the  law  makes  these  allotments  inalienable  for  twenty-five 
years.  It  gives  to  every  head  of  an  Indian  family  one  hundred  and  sixty 
acres;  half  as  much  to  every  unmarried  person  over  eighteen  years  of  age 
and  every  orphan ; finally,  forty  acres  to  each  person  under  eighteen.  Its 
ultimate  effect  will  be  to  break  up  tribal  allegiance;  in  fact,  Indians 
accepting  allotments  thereby  become  citizens,  as  are  also  those  who  have 
taken  up  their  residence  apart  from  a tribe  and  have  adopted  the  habits  of 
civilized  life. 

“The  process  of  allotment  under  this  act  has  undoubtedly  been  slow 
hitherto,  but  it  is  better  that  it  should  be  so,  since  education  and  ability 
to  earn  a living  by  the  cultivation  of  the  soil,  by  grazing,  by  hauling,  or  in 
general  by  some  form  of  manual  skill  or  labor,  are  necessary  to  make  the 
allotments  most  beneficial  to  the  Indians.  Much  of  the  allotment  work 
thus  far  has  been  done  with  the  smaller  tribes  and  bands,  who  have  sold 
their  surplus  lands  to  the  Government  and  have  occupied  the  portions  set 
out  to  the  extent  already  indicated. 

“In  spite  of  the  enormous  cessions  of  Indian  lands  made  during  the 
past  few  years,  the  red  men  still  hold  nearly  one  hundred  million  acres, 
and  possibly  more.  Since  there  are  not  more  than  two  hundred  and  fifty 
thousand  of  them  outside  of  Alaska  it  is  evident  that  large  reductions 
could  still  be  made  in  their  holdings,  and  yet  leave  them  much  more  than 
is  required  under  the  allotment  basis.  Commissioner  Morgan’s  anticipa- 
tion of  a time  ‘when  the  Indian  reservation  will  no  longer  appear  on  our 
maps,’ echoes  the  expectations  of  his  recent  predecessors;  but  this  should 
be  rather  the  consequence  of  other  steps  in  the  progress  of  the  race  than 
the  condition  precedent.  In  Dakota  with  the  Sioux,  in  Minnesota  with 
the  Chippewas,  and  in  Montana  with  the  Crows,  the  needs  for  settlement 
have  stimulated  the  acquisition  of  territory;  but  the  education  of  the 
Indian  and  his  preparation  for  entering  into  citizenship  are  more  important 
than  the  reduction  of  reservations  for  the  mere  sake  of  reduction.  Above 
all,  it  is  necessary  that  the  terms  of  purchase  should  be  carried  out  in  good 
faith  prior  to  any  opening  of  such  lands  to  settlement.” 

Since  the  foregoing  was  prepared,  statistics  show  that  the  Indian  pop- 


476 


THE  INDIAN  POPULATION. 


ulation  of  the  United  States  in  1890,  exclusive  of  the  five  civilized  tribes 
and  the  Indians  in  Alaska,  was  250,483.  Of  these  67,586  were  clothed 
wholly  and  44,522  in  part  in  citizens’  dress,  21,576  could  read,  24,976  could 
speak  English  fairly  well,  and  19,785  were  members  of  Christian  churches. 
The  number  of  dwelling-houses  occupied  by  Indians  was  16,544,  and  167 
church  buildings  had  been  provided  for  them.  The  number  of  Indian 
apprentices  was  570.  There  were  253  male  missionaries  in  the  tribes. 
The  number  of  births  in  1889-90  was  5181 ; deaths,  4719.  There  were  36 
Indians  killed  by  Indians,  13  by  citizens,  and  7 whites  killed  by  Indians 
during  the  year,  which  of  course  does  not  include  the  date  of  the  troubles 
at  Pine  Ridge.  The  number  of  Indian  criminals  convicted  by  civil  and 
military  tribunals  was  666,  by  tribal  tribunals  529,  while  234  crimes  were 
committed  by  whites  against  Indians. 

The  estimated  number  of  Indians  in  Alaska  is  37,000.  The  aggregate 
area  of  the  various  reservations  was  116,000,000  acres,  or  181,250  square 
miles,  enough  to  give  each  Indian  more  than  750  acres.  During  1889-90, 
arrangements  were  made  to  transfer  14,726,000  acres  of  Indian  lands  to  the 
Government. 


CHAPTER  L. 


THE  RICHEST  PEOPLE  IN  THE  WORLD— “ WHAT  SHALL  BE  DONE  WITH 
THE  INDIANS?” — VIEWS  OF  THE  FIRST  WHITE  CHILD  BORN  IN 
THE  PRESENT  STATE  OF  MINNESOTA  — INDIAN  PROGRESS  AND 
CIVILIZATION. 

HOW  many  people,  if  asked  to  name  the  richest  nation  in  the  world, 
would  select  an  Indian  tribe?  And  yet  such  is  the  fact.  Every 
man,  woman,  and  child  in  the  Osage  nation  is  worth  $15,000,  and  many  of 
them  a great  deal  more.  Senator  Platt,  in  referring  to  a visit  to  the 
Indian  Territory,  some  time  ago,  said  that,  while  at  the  trading  post  of  the 
Osage  Indians,  he  was  amused  to  see  an  Indian  buying  a barrel  of  good 
flour  for  himself  and  a barrel  of  cheap  flour  for  the  white  man  who  worked 
for  him. 

A correspondent  of  the  New  York  Sun , to  which  journal  we  are  indebted 
for  many  facts  concerning  the  recent  outbreak,  writes  that  the  interest  on  the 
sum  held  by  the  United  States  to  the  credit  of  the  Osage  Indians  is  so 
great  that  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  will  not  pay  out  all  of  it  at  ope 
time,  and  a gradual  increment  is  adding  to  the  millions  already  credited  to 
the  tribe  on  the  books  of  the  Government. 

“The  Osages  came  by  their  wealth  through  the  sale  of  their  lar  Js  in 
Kansas,  when  they  were  moved  to  a reservation  in  what  is  now  known  as 
Oklahoma  Territory.  One  Indian  abandoned  his  tribe  and  clung  to  his 
Kansas  land,  and  it  is  said  that  to-day  through  the  appreciation  in  the 
value  of  that  land  he  is  worth  a million  dollars.  He  is  perhaps  the  richest 
Indian  in  the  world.  Nothing  is  known  of  him  at  the  Indian  Office 
because,  having  abandoned  his  tribe,  he  has  ceased  to  be  a subject  of  solici- 
tude to  the  gentlemen  in  charge  of  Indian  affairs  at  the  national  capital. 
The  land  belonging  to  the  other  Indians  was  bought  by  the  Government 
and  thrown  open  to  settlement.  In  buying  this  property  the  Government 
did  not  make  any  actual  payment  for  it.  It  announced  to  the  Osages  that 
they  had  been  credited  with  the  amount  of  the  purchase  money,  and  that 
they  would  receive  interest  on  that  amount.  There  was  no  deposit  made 
to  secure  this  indebtedness  of  the  Government.  There  is  nothing  to  repre- 
sent it  in  the  Treasury  Department  except  the  record  of  the  fact  that  it 
has  been  assumed  by  the  Government.  This  has  been  the  practice  of  the 
Government — its  exclusive  practice — for  many  years.  A long  time  ago 
the  Treasury  Department  used  to  purchase  Southern  State  bonds  with 
the  purchase  price  of  Indian  lands  and  hold  them  in  trust  for  the  Indians. 


477 


478 


A FORTUNATE  PEOPLE. 


A great  many  of  these  Southern  State  bonds  are  now  in  the  Treasury 
vaults,  held  in  trust  to  secure  indebtedness  to  the  Indian  tribes.  But  on 
the  majority  of  them  no  interest  has  been  paid  by  the  States  for  a long 
time;  in  fact,  the  bonds  in  effect  have  been  repudiated.  The  Government, 


POETIC  JUSTICE. 


however,  under  its  contract  with  the  Indians,  is  held  liable  for  the  interest 
which  these  bonds  should  have  drawn.  This  interest  it  has  assumed.  So 
the  purchase  of  the  State  bonds  was  a losing  investment  for  the  Govern- 
ment. Its  unhappy  experience  in  this  direction  has  taught  it  the  wisdom 
©f  securing  its  debts  to  the  Indians,  like  its  other  obligations,  with  a prom- 
ise to  pay. 

“In  the  deposits  to  the  credit  of  the  Osage  Indians  there  is  one  item 
©f  $8,147,5 15.  The  annual  interest  on  this  is  $407,376.  There  are  about 
3500  Osages  on  the  reservation  in  Oklahoma.  The  exact  number  men- 
tioned in  the  last  annual  report  of  the  Indian  Commissioner  is  1496;  but 
this,  of  course,  varies  from  time  to  time.  The  members  of  this  tribe,  men, 
women,  and  children,  are  joint  sharers  in  the  interest  money.  As  it  is  paid 
to  the  tribe  it  is  divided  equally  among  them.  It  is  drawn  by  the  head  of 
each  family  for  himself,  his  wife,  and  his  children.  The  Indian  with  a 
large  family  draws  a goodly  sum  each  month.  Even  the  amount  to  which 
the  single  Indians  are  entitled  is  large — for  an  Indian.  It  has  been  the 
policy  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior,  acting  for  the  President,  who,  under 
the  law,  is  the  trustee  for  the  Indians,  to  pay' to  the  Osage  tribe  only  a 
part  of  the  money  to  which  it  is  entitled.  The  amount  paid  annually  was, 
for  a long  time,  $250,000.  Two  years  ago  the  payment  was  increased,  at 
the  request  of  the  Indians,  to  $300,000  a year.  That  is  less  than  seventy- 
five  per  cent,  of  the  amount  due  the  Indians,  and  the  other  twenty-five  per 


THE  SECOND  WEALTHIEST  TRIBE. 


4 79 


cent,  goes  toward  swelling  the  amount  with  which  the  tribe  is  credited  on 
the  Treasury  books.  What  will  be  done  with  this  slowly  increasing  capital* 
and  the  correspondingly  increasing  interest  on  it,  is  a question  with  which 
the  Government  has  not  yet  troubled  itself. 

“Occasionally,  some  of  the  interest  money  which  is  due  the  Osages  is 
expended  for  their  benefit  by  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior,  within  his  dis- 
cretion. The  Indian  Office  has  on  hand  now  plans  for  a $30,000  building 
to  be  used  as  a dormitory  and  school  in  connection  with  the  education  of 
the  Osage  children.  The  council  of  the  tribe  requested  the  Secretary  to 
make  this  expenditure.  The  Government  looks  after  the  education  of  the 
Osages,  and  a special  fund  is  set  aside  for  educational  purposes.  The  Gov- 
ernment supplies  them  with  agricultural  implements  and  a great  many 
other  things  which  the  Indians  could  very  well  afford  to  buy  for  them- 
selves. They  do  buy  a great  many  luxuries.  Very  few  of  them  save  any 
of  the  money  which  is  paid  to  them  by  the  Government.  The  traders  at 
the  agency  get  a greater  part  of  it  within  an  hour  after  the  payment  has 
been  distributed.  The  Osage  tradership  is  regarded  as  the  most  valuable 
in  the  United  States.  Other  traders  have  more  Indians  to  deal  with,  but 
not  so  much  money. 

“After  the  provisions  of  the  recent  treaty  with  the  Chippewa  Indians 
have  been  fulfilled  they  will  be  the  second  wealthiest  tribe  in  the  world. 
They  number  about  five  thousand.  Their  wealth  is  represented  by  the 
value  of  some  rich  lands  bordering  the  small  lakes  in  Minnesota,  which  the 
Chippewa  Commission  persuaded  them  to  sell.  The  Government  has  paid 
to  them  this  year  $200,000.  Next  year  they  will  receive  $90,000  advance 
interest,  and  probably  a much  greater  sum  in  the  annual  interest  will  be 
due  them.  The  Coeur  d’Alene  Indians  will  receive  a payment  of  half  a 
million  dollars  this  year. 

“The  Osage  Indians  are  solitary  in  their  superfluous  wealth.  There  is 
no  other  tribe  which  has  more  money  than  it  can  use.  Most  of  the  money 
paid  to  the  Indians  by  the  Government  is  a pure  gratuity.  Two  tribes,  the 
Omahas  and  Winnebagoes,  who  are  regarded  as  the  most  civilized  of  all 
the  Indians,  receive  no  aid  from  the  Government.  When  the  land  owned 
by  some  of  the  Indian  tribes  is  cut  up  and  sold  to  settlers  by  the  Govern- 
ment, some  of  them  may  be  in  the  position  of  the  Osages,  and  have  more 
interest  money  coming  to  them  every  year  than  they  can  well  dispose  of. 
But  at  present  the  Osage  tribe  is  the  only  one  which  is  accumulating 
wealth.  It  is  not  with  any  degree  of  willingness  that  the  Osages  allow 
their  principal  to  increase  yearly.  They  object  strenuously  to  the  policy 
of  the  Secretary  of  the  Interior  in  refusing  to  pay  to  them  all  of  their 
annual  income.  Each  year  they  send  to  Washington  a representative  of 
their  tribe  to  beg  the  Secretary  to  pay  over  to  them  the  accumulated  inter- 


480 


THE  FIVE  CIVILIZED  TRIBES. 


est.  They  are  not  to  be  satisfied  with  the  full  amount  now  coming  to 
them  annually.  They  want  the  back  interest,  which  was  withheld  from 
them,  paid  over  in  a lump  sum.  They  have  been  told  again  and  again  that 
when  they  become  civilized  they  will  receive  the  money  which  is  due  to 
them ; but  this  promise  seems  to  be  no  inducement  to  them  to  adopt  the 
ways  of  the  white  man.  They  continue  to  retrograde,  year  by  year,  instead 
of  improving  their  condition.  They  are  very  much  averse  to  sending  their 
children  to  school,  and  the  report  of  the  Indian  Commissioner  shows  that, 
of  those  who  have  been  sent  to  the  training  schools  and  educated,  a very 
small  portion  prove  in  any  way  useful  members  of  society. 

“Death  may  solve  the  problem  of  the  disposal  of  the  accumulating 
Osage  fund,  for  the  tribe  is  gradually  becoming  smaller.  The  population 
of  the  tribe  in  1858  was  6720;  in  1869,  4481  ; in  1878,  2391,  and  in  1890, 
1496.  The  shrinkage  in  the  tribe  is  an  additional  source  of  increased  indi- 
vidual wealth.  With  the  aggregate  wealth  increasing  and  the  membership 
of  the  tribe  being  gradually  reduced,  there  is  no  telling  how  much  the  last 
Osage  will  be  worth.  He  may  be  the  richest  man  in  the  world.  Even 
now  the  Osage  tribe  is  the  richest  nation  on  earth.  Their  wealth  per 
capita  is  five  times  as  great  as  that  of  the  American  people,  ten  times  as 
great  as  that  of  the  English,  and  many,  many  times  as  great  as  that  of  the 
French  or  Italians. 

“Outside  of  the  Osage  tribe  are  many  individual  Indians  who  are  grow- 
ing rich.  This  is  especially  true  of  the  members  of  the  five  civilized  tribes 
— the  Cherokees,  Creeks,  Choctaws,  Chickasaws,  and  Seminoles — which 
live  in  the  Indian  Territory  and  have  a government  of  their  own.  The 
interest  money  due  them  is  paid  to  them  regularly  without  question, 
because  they  are  perfectly  competent  to  take  care  of  their  own  affairs. 
Many  of  them  are  well  to  do ; and  if  all  of  their  race  had  their  business 
ability  there  is  no  reason  why  the  majority  should  not  be  independent.” 

During  a recent  discussion  of  the  question,  “What  Shall  be  Done  with 
the  Indians?”  General  O.  O.  Howard  said: 

“The  end  to  be  worked  toward  is  citizenship  for  the  Indian.  Many  of 
the  reservations  to-day,  and  many  of  the  Pueblo  Indians,  are  ripe  to  be 
transferred  to  a condition  of  citizenship. 

“I  would  not  withdraw  from  them  the  protection  and  aid  of  the  Fed- 
eral Government.  I would  give  the  Indian  the  right  to  vote  and  the  right 
to  own  property,  and  I would  protect  him  in  those  rights  if  need  be  by  the 
whole  power  of  the  Government  of  the  United  States. 

“With  reference  to  the  wild  Indians  who  still  insist  on  the  tribal  rela- 
tion, who  are  essentially  nomadic,  who  will  not  take  any  steps  toward  self- 
support,  who  are  perpetually  involving  the  better  disposed  in  trouble,  and 
who  constantly  alarm  whole  sections  of  new  settlers,  there  can  be  no  better 


VIEWS  OF  GENERAL  HOWARD  AND  REV.  J.  P.  WILLIAMSON.  483 

control  than  that  of  the  army.  Just  at  present  there  is  a full  co-operation 
between  the  army  and  the  Interior  Department. 

“The  desire  to  make  money  on  our  side,  too,  is  almost  universal,  and 
the  temptation  to  avarice  is  very  great,  while  large  bodies  of  Indians  are 
fed  and  clothed  at  Government  charges.  Inevitably  this  avarice,  whether 
coming  from  contractors  or  employees  of  the  Government,  will  bring  on 
ferment,  discord,  war  dances  of  some  kind,  and  outrages  which  fill  our 
souls  with  horror. 

“I  would  remedy  this,  so  far  as  it  can  be  remedied,  by  elevating  the 
agents,  giving  them  suitable  compensation  and  holding  them  to  a strict 
accountability,  like,  for  instance,  officers  of  the  navy;  and  it  strikes  me 
that  it  would  be  wise,  in  view  of  the  necessity  to  make  amends  for  a cen- 
tury of  dishonor,  to  lift  up  the  Indian  Bureau  itself  into  the  clear  light  of 
an  independent  bureau. 

“I  believe  it  would  be  wise  to  form  the  Indians,  so  far  as  practicable, 
into  a frontier  police.  For  some  reason,  after  I left  that  country,  the 
Indian  police  was  abolished  and  the  border  troubles  were  renewed. 

“The  life  of  a soldier  is  natural  for  the  Indian,  and  the  drill  and  dis- 
cipline increase  their  self-respect  and  manhood.  They  fought  as  well  as 
the  colored  troops  in  the  West,  who  almost  put  to  shame  the  whites,  for 
they  fight  fearlessly  and  seldom  desert.” 

The  first  white  child  born  in  the  present  State  of  Minnesota  (October 
27,  1835,  at  Lac  qui  Parle)  was  John  P.  Williamson,  at  this  writing  living 
at  Greenwood,  S.  D.  His  whole  life,  since  reaching  young  manhood,  has 
been  spent  on  the  western  frontier  in  missionary  work  among  the  Sioux 
Indians.  His  name  will  be  recalled  in  our  account  of  the  Minnesota  out- 
break. He  believes  that  the  Indians  will  be  finally  regenerated  through 
education  and  religion.  Here  are  some  of  his  beliefs: 

“It  is  easier  to  convert  an  Indian  than  to  civilize  him.” 

“An  Indian  is  frequently  very  religious  and  very  immoral.” 

“They  are  naturally  a religious  people,  but  do  not  associate  religion 
with  ethics.” 

“Social  inequality  between  whites  and  Indians  is  the  great  barrier  to 
their  civilization.” 

“However  much  a white  man  may  sympathize  with  the  Indian,  he 
doesn’t  want  him  for  a son-in-law.” 

“The  present  theory  of  Indian  management  is  as  perfect  as  can  be 
devised;  the  practice  makes  it  as  bad  as  can  be.” 

“The  advancement  of  the  Christian  Indians  in  civilization  is  most 
encouraging.” 

“The  Indian  may  acquire  religion  without  acquiring  civilization,  but 
he  never  civilizes  without  Christianity.” 


484 


CAPACITY  FOR  SELF-GOVERNMENT. 


Reference  has  been  made  in  these  pages  to  the  common  delusion  that 
there  are  less  Indians  to-day  in  our  country  than  ever  before,  when  the 
reverse  is  the  truth.  As  illustrative  of  this,  as  well  as  of  the  capacity  of 
the  aborigines  for  self-government  and  advancement  in  civilization,  the 
most  striking  example  is  furnished  by  the  Iroquois  Confederacy,  generally 
known  as  the  Five  Nations. 

At  the  time  of  the  advent  of  the  Europeans  on  the  Atlantic  coast,  the 
League  of  the  Iroquois  never  comprehended  more  than  15,000  persons, 
with  an  available  fighting  force  of  2500.  The  last  United  States  census 
shows  that,  including  the  members  living  in  the  West  and  in  New  York,  the 
total  is  15,870,  whereas  in  1660,  when  the  first  reliable  computation  was 
made,  it  was  11,000. 

The  Iroquois  Confederacy  originally  included  the  Mohawk,  Oneida, 
Onondaga,  Cayuga,  and  Seneca  nations.  The  Tuscaroras  were  afterward 
added,  and  this  League  virtually  conquered  the  Algonquin  tribes,  through 
an  organization  that  was  the  most  wonderful  achievement  of  the 
American  race. 

Each  nation  of  the  League  was  distinct  and  independent  as  to  its 
domestic  affairs,  but  welded  by  ties  of  honor  in  matters  affecting  the 
general  welfare.  Each  nation  had  its  chief  sachems,  or  civil  magistrates, 
with  subordinate  officers,  in  all  two  hundred,  besides  fifty  possessed  of 
hereditary  rights.  The  League  had  a President,  with  six  advisers,  who 
could  convene  representatives  of  all  the  tribes,  where  concerted  action  was 
necessary. 

Oho-to-da-ha,  an  aged  Onondagan,  was  the  first  President  of  the 
League.  The  mat  upon  which  he  sat  is  still  reverentially  preserved. 
The  matrons  had  a vote  in  council  on  the  question  of  peace  or  war.  The 
eight  tribes,  or  clans  (which  terms  were  not  synonymous  with  nation),  were 
known  respectively  as  the  Wolf,  the  Bear,  the  Turtle,  the  Snipe,  the 
Beaver,  the  Deer,  the  Horse,  and  the  Heron.  Each  tribe  was  divided  into 
five  parts,  and  one  of  the  parts  was  located  in  each  nation.  Thus  the 
tribes  formed  a complex  and  indissoluble  tie  for  the  confederated  peoples, 
and  the  League  never  fell  into  anarchy  from  internal  disorder. 

We  conclude  our  history  by  this  brief  illustration  of  the  capacity  of 
the  American  Indian  for  self-government  and  progress,  while  the  events 
recorded  in  the  preceding  pages  are  equally  conclusive  as  to  what  can  be 
accomplished  in  a far  greater  degree,  when  he  is  treated  by  us  with 
humanity  and  justice. 


THE  LAST  SCENE. 


